[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

TWI245997B - IP communication system, IP transfer network, gateway device, server, network point device, medium router, terminal device and terminal communication method - Google Patents

IP communication system, IP transfer network, gateway device, server, network point device, medium router, terminal device and terminal communication method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI245997B
TWI245997B TW090105465A TW90105465A TWI245997B TW I245997 B TWI245997 B TW I245997B TW 090105465 A TW090105465 A TW 090105465A TW 90105465 A TW90105465 A TW 90105465A TW I245997 B TWI245997 B TW I245997B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
network
packet
internet protocol
aforementioned
communication
Prior art date
Application number
TW090105465A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Hisao Furukawa
Shoji Miyaguchi
Original Assignee
Distribution Systems Res Inst
Miyaguchi Res Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Distribution Systems Res Inst, Miyaguchi Res Co Ltd filed Critical Distribution Systems Res Inst
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI245997B publication Critical patent/TWI245997B/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L65/00Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
    • H04L65/1066Session management
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L61/00Network arrangements, protocols or services for addressing or naming
    • H04L61/50Address allocation
    • H04L61/5007Internet protocol [IP] addresses
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L65/00Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
    • H04L65/10Architectures or entities
    • H04L65/102Gateways
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L65/00Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
    • H04L65/10Architectures or entities
    • H04L65/1053IP private branch exchange [PBX] functionality entities or arrangements

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
  • Telephonic Communication Services (AREA)

Abstract

There is provided a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method that can be applied to multimedia communication such as communication between IP phones, audio visual communication and IP multicast communication. A connection server and a relay connection server are installed in an IP transfer network, a function similar to line connection control of a subscriber exchanger (LS) is applied to the connection server, a function similar to the line connection control of a relay exchanger (TS) is applied to the relay connection server, and a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method using the IP transfer network is realized in such a manner that a telephone set and a terminal such as an IP terminal and a video terminal transmit/receive an initial address message (IAM), an address completion message (ACM), a call pass message (CPG), an answer message (ANM), a release message (REL) and a release completion message (RLC), which can be made in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship with line connection control messages of the common line signal system. Furthermore, while an address administration table is set to a network node apparatus of an IP transfer network, means for registering addresses of the terminals into this address administration table is employed, so that an IP packet communication by a multicast manner can be realized with improving information security performance.

Description

1245997 五、發明說明(1) 發明說明 本發明係有關於用於網際網路協定傳輸網路之終端間 通信接續控制方法,上述網際網路協定傳輸網路可適用於 IPUnternet Protocol,網際網路協定)終端、IP電話機 、聲音影像裝置等的2終端間之I P通信及使用多點發送 (Multicast)IP 技術之 i:n 的 IP 通信。 習知技術 本發明人在特願平1 1 - 1 28956號(以下稱為「前案」) 提出利用IP傳輸網路實現郵件送受信、電話、影像通信等 種種終端間通信的方法,在此前案中揭露了實現内部分離 而包含具有IP電話網路、IP影像網路、IP電子資料泛用網 路等種種特質的複數I p傳輸網路之「統合IP傳輸網路」。 為了實現一體化各種終端間通信的IP傳輸網路,參照 圖339簡略說明前述前案揭露的内容。 在統合I P傳輸網路9 0 1内部假想地設置具有I p影像網 902、IP電子資料泛用網9〇3、ip電話網904等不同特質的 複數IP傳輸網路,在被設置於從統合IP傳輸網路9〇1外部 向統合IP傳輸網路901的輸入點上之網點裝置9〇5-χ及9〇5 -Y的内部設定各種位址管理表,在此位址管理表中預先登 錄終端的位址等,利用比較被寫入至輸入統合〗p傳輸網路 901的IP封包的位址等與被登錄至前述位址管理表的位址 等’在統合I P傳輸網路9 〇 1的内部可分別送信給個別的j p 傳輸網路。 接著簡略說明與本發明有關之公眾電話交換網(pSTN)1245997 V. Description of the invention (1) Description of the invention The present invention relates to a method for controlling communication between terminals used in an Internet Protocol transmission network. The above Internet Protocol transmission network can be applied to the IPUnternet Protocol, Internet Protocol. ) IP communication between 2 terminals such as terminals, IP telephones, audio and video equipment, and IP communication using i: n using Multicast IP technology. Conventional technology The present inventors proposed a method for implementing various types of communication between terminals such as mail sending and receiving, telephone, and image communication using an IP transmission network in Japanese Patent Application No. 1 1-1 28956 (hereinafter referred to as the "previous case"). The "Unified IP Transmission Network" which realizes internal separation and includes a plurality of IP transmission networks with various characteristics such as IP telephone network, IP video network, and IP electronic data universal network is disclosed. In order to realize an IP transmission network that integrates communication between various terminals, the content disclosed in the previous case is briefly described with reference to FIG. 339. In the integrated IP transmission network 901, a plurality of IP transmission networks having different characteristics, such as an IP video network 902, an IP electronic data universal network 903, and an IP telephone network 904, are set up. The IP transmission network 901 externally sets various address management tables internally to the node devices 905-χ and 905-Y on the input point of the integrated IP transmission network 901. In this address management table, The address and the like of the registered terminal are compared on the integrated IP transmission network 9 by comparing the address of the IP packet written to the input integration transmission network 901 with the address registered on the address management table. Internal 1 can send separate messages to individual jp transmission networks. Next, a brief description of the public telephone exchange network (pSTN) related to the present invention

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd $ 5頁 1245997 五、發明說明(2) 所採用的終端間通信接續控制方法(Ν〇· 7-共通信信號方 式)0 在圖340中,98-1及98-3係接續電話機的交換機(加入 者交換機)、98-2係中繼交換機、98-4及98-5係電話機。 98-6及98-8係交換機的通話路控制部ng至gm係交 換機内部控制部、9 8 - 1 2至9 8 - 1 4係進行電話的終端間接續 控制之#號局(SP ’Signaling Point)。交換機内部控制 部與父換機内部動作控制一起,進行通話路控制部與信號 局間的通話電路之設定與修復的情報交換等。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd $ 5 pages 1245997 5. Description of the invention (2) Inter-terminal communication connection control method (No. 7-common communication signal method) 0 In Figure 340, 98-1 and 98-3 series exchanges (joiner exchanges), 98-2 series relay exchanges, 98-4 and 98-5 series telephones. 98-6 and 98-8 series call control unit ng to gm series switch internal control unit, 9 8-1 2 to 9 8-1 4 series for telephone terminal indirect continuous control ## 局 (SP 'Signaling Point). The internal control unit of the exchange, together with the internal operation control of the parent switch, exchanges information for setting and repairing the communication circuit between the communication path control unit and the signal office.

98- 12及98-14係特別做為信號端局(SEp,SignaHng End Point),98-1 3則係特別做為信號中繼局(stp,98-12 and 98-14 are specially used as signal end offices (SEp, SignaHng End Point), 98-1 3 are specially used as signal relay offices (stp,

Signaling Transfer Point)。98-15 係其他的信號端局。 这些信號局98-12至98-15係經由各信號電路98_24至98 —27 而被接續至仏號網9 8 - 1 6,將用於終端間通信接續控制及 網之保守•運用的情報等儲存於信號單元(su ·· signal ing Un 11 ),並在仍號局間相互地送受信。在信號局上授與用 以與其他#號局識別的16位元之信號局碼(pC : p〇int Code)。、一方面,98 —21及98 — 22係傳送電話聲音的通話電 路,其並不傳送用於終端間通信接續控制的情報。電話電 路98-20及98-23係聲音與終端間通信接續控制情報一體, =就是聲音與終端間通信接續控制情報不分離地被傳送的 二面(稱為UNI)。在公眾電話交換網(psTN)内部中,信號 f路98-24至98-26與通話電路98 —21、98 —22分離為Ν〇· 7一 共通線信號方式的特徵。Signaling Transfer Point). 98-15 is other signal end office. These signal stations 98-12 to 98-15 are connected to the network No. 9 8-16 through each of the signal circuits 98_24 to 98-27, and will be used for control of communication between terminals and information for network conservation and operation. It is stored in the signal unit (su ·· signal ing Un 11), and is sent to and received from each other. A 16-bit signal station code (pC: point code) for identification with other # stations is granted on the signal station. On the one hand, 98-21 and 98-22 are communication circuits that transmit telephone sounds, and they do not transmit information for control of communication connection between terminals. The telephone circuits 98-20 and 98-23 are integrated with the communication control information between the terminals. The two sides are called the UNI and the communication control information between the sound and the terminals. In the public telephone switching network (psTN), the signal f channels 98-24 to 98-26 and the communication circuits 98-21 and 98-22 are separated into No. 7-common line signal mode characteristics.

1245997 五、發明說明(3)1245997 V. Description of Invention (3)

圖341所示之信號單元係包含「受信信號局碼」(DPC :Destination Point Code)、「發信信號局碼」(〇pc ·· Or igin Point Code)、「電路識別碼」(CIC : Circui t Identification Code)、訊息類別(MSG : message)、訊息 的參數。 受"is彳§號局碼係顯示送出信號單元的目的地,發信信 號局碼係表示信號單元的送信元,電路識別碼(c丨c : Circuit Identification Code)係識別設定在送信元信號 局與受信信號局間的通話電路的識別號碼。所謂訊息類 別,舉例而言係用於終端間通信接續控制的丨AM、ACM、 CPG、ANM、REL、RLC、SlIS、RES、CON。在信號單元的訊 息類別領域中寫入I AM的信號單元以做為初期位址訊息 (I AM)。同樣地,在信號單元的訊息類別領域中寫入ACM的 信號單元係位址結束訊息(ACM),寫入CPG的信號單元係呼 叫進行訊息(CPG),寫入ANM的信號單元係應答訊息(ANM) ,寫入REL的信號單元係釋放訊息(REL),寫入RLC的信號 單元係釋放完成訊息(RLC),寫入SUS的信號單元係中斷訊 息(SUS),寫入RES的信號單元係再開訊息(RES),寫入CON 的信號單元係接續訊息(C〇N)。 參照圖342說明用以從圖34〇所示之電話機98_4經由交 換機98-1、98-2、98-3,與電話機98-5電話通信的終端間 通信接續控制方法。各信號局將授與各信號局的信號局碼 設定為表示受信與發信元位址,經由信號電路924至98一 27及共通線信號網98-16交換信號單元。電話機98-4與交The signal unit shown in Figure 341 includes "Received Signal Office Code" (DPC: Destination Point Code), "Transmitted Signal Office Code" (〇pc ·· Or igin Point Code), and "Circuit Identification Code" (CIC: Circui t Identification Code), message type (MSG: message), message parameters. The "" is 彳 § station code indicates the destination of the signal unit sent, the signal station code indicates the transmission unit of the signal unit, and the circuit identification code (c 丨 c: Circuit Identification Code) identifies the signal set on the transmission unit. The identification number of the calling circuit between the office and the trusted signal office. The so-called message type is, for example, AM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC, SlIS, RES, and CON used for communication connection control between terminals. The signal unit of I AM is written in the message type field of the signal unit as the initial address message (I AM). Similarly, in the message type field of the signal unit, the signal unit of the ACM is an address end message (ACM), the signal unit of the CPG is a call progress message (CPG), and the signal unit of the ANM is a response message ( ANM), the signal unit written in REL is a release message (REL), the signal unit written in RLC is a release complete message (RLC), the signal unit written in SUS is an interrupt message (SUS), and the signal unit written in RES is Re-open message (RES), the signal unit written in CON is a continuation message (CON). A method for controlling communication connection between terminals for telephone communication with the telephone set 98-5 from the telephone set 98_4 shown in FIG. 34 through the switches 98-1, 98-2, and 98-3 will be described with reference to FIG. 342. Each signal office sets the signal office code granted to each signal office to indicate the address of the receiving and transmitting cells, and exchanges the signal units through the signal circuits 924 to 98-27 and the common line signal network 98-16. Phone 98-4 and pay

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

第7頁 1245997Page 7 1245997

= 以電話電路98 —20被接續,電話細-4的終端 Z接:控制係受持於交換機98_丨内的信號局98_12。同樣 雷機98_5與交換機9"係以電話電物-23被接續 υ 的終端間接續控制係受持於交"内的 1吕唬局98-1 4。 若使用者從電話機9 8 - 4發出呼叫要求,作垆q q ? =信(圖342之步驟X1),根據交換卿]的通;/路局控98制1 部 -6及交換機内.部控制部98_9的機能,決定用於從電話機 4接收党信電話號碼的通信電路,形成寫入該通信電路 識別碼(cic)的信號單元以做為初期位址訊息(IAM):在初 期位址訊息(IAM)的參數領域上至少寫入電話機98 — 5的電 話號碼,也就是受信電話號碼” Tel_N〇 —98 —5”。再者,也 可寫入電話機98-4的電話號碼,也就是發信電話號碼"Tel -No-98-4丨丨 〇 接著’信號局9 8 -1 2將用以進行電話呼出的初期位址 訊息(IAM)送到交換機98-2内的信號局98-13上(步驟X2)。 在I AM中包含有做為通話電路98 —21内部的邏輯通信電路之 通話電路的電路號碼" 98-4 —98 —5”、受信電話號碼;;Tel—N〇 -98-5’’、發信電話號碼”1^14〇-98-4”(可省略的選項)等= Connected by the telephone circuit 98-20, the terminal of the telephone line -4 Z connection: The control system is supported by the signal office 98_12 in the switch 98_ 丨. Similarly, the lightning machine 98_5 and the switch 9 are connected to the terminal indirectly by the telephone -23. The control of the terminal indirect continuation is under the control of the 1 Luhui Bureau 98-1 4. If the user makes a call request from the telephone 9 8-4, write 垆 qq? = Letter (step X1 in Figure 342), according to the communication of the exchange secretary]; The function of the unit 98_9 determines the communication circuit for receiving the party letter telephone number from the telephone 4, forming a signal unit written with the communication circuit identification code (cic) as the initial address information (IAM): (IAM) In the parameter field, at least the telephone number of telephone 98-5 is written, that is, the trusted telephone number "Tel_N0-98-5". In addition, the telephone number of telephone 98-4 can also be written, which is the sending telephone number " Tel -No-98-4 丨 丨 〇 and then the "signal station 9 8 -1 2" will be used for the initial call The address information (IAM) is sent to the signal office 98-13 in the switch 98-2 (step X2). The I AM contains the circuit number of the communication circuit which is the logical communication circuit within the communication circuit 98-21. "98-4 -98-5", the trusted telephone number; Tel-N0-98-5 '' , Send phone number "1 ^ 14〇-98-4" (optional options), etc.

。信號局98-12在發送出IAM後,一轉移成後述的位址結束 訊息(ACM)的等待狀態,就啟動ACm等待計時器。 父換機98-2内的信號局98-13接收前述IAM,經由交換 機内部控制部98-10將電路號碼" 98-4-98-5”通知通話電路 控制部98-7,若通話電路控制部98 —7進行導通試驗,且通. After the signal station 98-12 sends the IAM, the ACm wait timer starts as soon as it transitions to the wait state of the address end message (ACM) described later. The signal station 98-13 in the parent switch 98-2 receives the aforementioned IAM and informs the call circuit control unit 98-7 of the circuit number "98-4-98-5" via the switch internal control unit 98-10. The control section 98-7 conducts a continuity test, and

1245997 五、發明說明(5) ---- 活電路98-21可以通話,則信號局98 —13將前述iam送給交 換機98-3内的信號局98 —14(步驟χ3),信號局98 —η調查接 收到的UM的内容,若經由控制部98 —及通話電路控制部 98-8,通話電路98 —22可以通話,信號局98 —14進而將電話 機98-5接續至交換機98 —3,檢查是否容許接收來電,在容 許接收來電時,對電話機98-5進行呼叫設定要求(步驟) ’再者,信號局98-14回電通知接收丨am的位址結束訊息 (ACM)(步驟X5)丨ACM係經由信號局98-13而到達信號局 98-12(步驟X6)。若信號局98-12接收ACM,則已經設定的 ACM等待計時器就停止。又,在接收ACM前的時點中,acm 等待計時器期滿時釋放通話電路。 交換機98-3内的信號局98-14若接收表示來自電話機 98 - 5的呼出音響動中的情報(步驟χ7),對信號局98一13發 送呼叫進行訊息(CPG)(步驟χ8),信號局98-13將接收到的 CPG發送給信號局98 —12(步驟χ9),交換機98 —丨内的信號局 98-12接收CPG,然後信號局98一12將呼出中音發送給電話 機99-4(步驟XI 〇)。若電話機98_5回應前述呼叫設定要求 (步驟XII),且若電話機98 —5與交換機98 —4間的通話電路 98-23可以通話,電話機98_5進而將表示應答的應答訊息 (ΑΝΜ)發送給信號局98-13(步驟Χ12)。 信號局98-13將接收的ANM發送給信號局98-12(步驟 X13) ’信號局98-12通知停止發送給電話機98-4的呼出音 (*步驟X14),使電話機98 —4與電話機98 —5間可以收送電話 聲音,而轉移至通話狀態(步驟χ15)。電話機98 —4的送受1245997 V. Description of the invention (5) ---- Live circuit 98-21 can talk, then the signal office 98-13 sends the aforementioned iam to the signal office 98-14 in the switch 98-3 (step χ3), the signal office 98 —Η investigate the content of the received UM. If the control unit 98 and the call circuit control unit 98-8 are used, the call circuit 98-22 can talk, and the signal station 98-14 can connect the telephone 98-5 to the exchange 98-3. , Check if incoming calls are allowed, and when incoming calls are allowed, call setting request is made to telephone 98-5 (step) 'Further, the signal office 98-14 calls back to notify the receiving of the address end message (ACM) of am (step X5) ACM arrives at signal station 98-12 via signal station 98-13 (step X6). If the signal station 98-12 receives the ACM, the ACM wait timer that has been set will stop. Also, at the point before receiving the ACM, the acm waits for the timer to expire when the call circuit is released. If the signal station 98-14 in the exchange 98-3 receives the information indicating that the outgoing call from the telephone 98-5 is in motion (step χ7), it sends a call progress message (CPG) to the signal station 98-13 (step χ8). Office 98-13 sends the received CPG to the signal office 98-12 (step χ9), and the signal office 98-12 in the switch 98- 丨 receives the CPG, and then the signal office 98-12 sends the outgoing midrange to the telephone 99- 4 (Step XI). If the telephone set 98_5 responds to the aforementioned call setting request (step XII), and if the call circuit 98-23 between the telephone set 98-5 and the exchange 98-4 can talk, the telephone set 98_5 further sends an answer message (ANS) indicating a response to the signal station. 98-13 (step X12). The signal station 98-13 sends the received ANM to the signal station 98-12 (step X13). The signal station 98-12 notifies to stop sending the outgoing call tone to the telephone 98-4 (* step X14), so that the telephone 98-4 and the telephone set 98-5 can send and receive the voice of the phone, and shift to the call state (step χ15). Pickup and Delivery on Phone 98-4

12459971245997

五、發明說明(6) 話器被掛上(掛鉤),釋放要求(REL)被送出(步驟χ16)。信 就局98-12 —接收釋放要求(REL) ’就送出下一個釋放要求 (REL)給信號局98-13(步驟Χ17),並且將表示該通話電路 為空閒狀態的釋放結束(RLC)通知電話機98-4(步驟χΐ8)。 然後’信號局98-13 —接收釋放要求(REL),就送出下 一個釋放要求(REL)給信號局98-14(步驟X19),並且將表 示該通話電路為空閒狀態的釋放結束(RLC)通知信號局98一 12(步驟X20) ’傳號局98-14 —接收釋放要求(rel),就送 出下一個釋放要求(REL給電話機98-5(步驟X21),並且將 表示該通話電路為空閒狀態的釋放結束(RLC)通知信號局 98-13(步驟X22)。在電話機98-4與信號局98-12間及信號 局9 8 -1 4與電話機9 8 - 5間傳送接收的終端間通信接續控制 的順序係根據電話機的種類而變,舉例而言,可在前述步 之後,從電話機98 —4輸出對釋放結束的確認通知至 信號局98-12,或是也可在前述步驟χ23之後,從信號局 98 -14輸出對釋放結束的確認通知至電話機98 — 5。 圖343係說明用以從電話機98 —4經由98 —丨至“^而與 電話機98-5電話通信的他種終端間通信接續控制方法的、β 式。此終端間通信接續控制方法係在圖296中說明的 :通仏接續控制方法中除去了步驟Χ5及以,也就相當於β 去了位址結束訊息ACM。但是,在步驟乂2中 / 器以取代ACM等待計時器,信號局9“ 在步:X9之後停止CPG等待計時器。以上說明的 k接、,控制方法係交換機為類比交換機,而非刪 <15. Description of the invention (6) The microphone is hung up (hook), and the release request (REL) is sent out (step χ16). Letter 98-12 —Receive a release request (REL) 'Send the next release request (REL) to the signal office 98-13 (step X17), and notify the release end (RLC) that the call circuit is idle Telephone 98-4 (step χΐ8). Then 'Signature Office 98-13—Receive a release request (REL), send the next release request (REL) to Signal Office 98-14 (step X19), and will release the end of the release (RLC) indicating that the call circuit is idle Notify signal office 98-12 (step X20) 'Number office 98-14—Receive a release request (rel), then send the next release request (REL to telephone 98-5 (step X21), and will indicate that the call circuit is Idle state release end (RLC) notifies signal station 98-13 (step X22). Terminals transmitting and receiving between telephone 98-4 and signal station 98-12 and signal station 9 8 -1 4 and telephone 9 8-5 The sequence of continuous communication control varies depending on the type of telephone. For example, after the foregoing steps, a confirmation notification of the end of release can be output from telephone 98-4 to signal station 98-12, or it can also be performed in the foregoing steps. After χ23, a confirmation notification of the end of release is output from the signal station 98-14 to the telephone 98-5. Fig. 343 illustrates the communication with the telephone 98-5 from the telephone 98-4 through 98- to "^". Β-type for a method for controlling communication connection between terminals. The method for controlling communication connection between terminals is illustrated in FIG. 296: Steps X5 and 5 are removed from the communication connection control method, which is equivalent to β removing the address end message ACM. However, in step 乂 2, the device starts with Instead of the ACM wait timer, the signal station 9 "stops the CPG wait timer after step X9. The control method described above is that the switch is an analog switch, instead of deleting < 1

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第10頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 10 1245997

五、發明說明(7) 所採用的方法。 圖344係說明電話機98_4與電話機98 —5 =…法的圖式,此終端間通信接續2 ,、在刖述、、X糕間通信接續控制方法中,尚未等笟姓 L的連串步驟(步驟X16至步驟X23)的例子。 ΪΙ345係用以從電話機98 —4經由交換機98 —丨至“ —3而 與電話機98-5電話通信的其他終端間通信接續控制方法, 在通話中(步驟XI 5)電話機98 — 4的送受話器僅短時間被放 置(掛鉤),傳送用以暫時中止電話通信的中斷訊息(步驟 X30至X33),取回送受話器(離鉤),傳送再開始電話通信 的再開訊息(步驟χ35至X38),顯示回到通話中(步驟χ39) 的情況。接下來的釋放(REL)與釋放結束(RLC)的步驟與圖 343中說明者相同(步驟χ4〇至χ47)。 其次’有關於IP電話通信,係TTC標準”根據JT_H323 封包的多媒體通信系統",例如ITU 一T建議的Η323 ΑΝΝΕχ D 準據(1 999年4月版)中記述者。在多媒體終端間通信中進 行呼叫接續之控制的”信號協定與媒體信號的封包化"技術 被規定為JT-H225,又,在多媒體終端間通信中,,多媒體通 信用控制協定’’則被規定為jT — H245。 接著’參照本發明,參閱圖346〜圖349說明根據ITU所 規定的JT-H323閘道的基本機能。 圖346中的方塊8〇〇係JT-H323閘道,可從SCN電路801 輸入的聲音及影像信號在SCN終端機能802中被變換成的數5. Description of the invention (7) The method adopted. Figure 344 is a diagram illustrating the method of telephone set 98_4 and telephone set 98-5 = ..., the communication connection between the terminals 2 has not yet waited for the series of steps of the last name L in the description of the connection control method of the communication between the terminals X and X ( Examples of steps X16 to X23). ΪΙ345 is a method for controlling communication connection between other terminals for telephone communication with telephone 98-5 via telephone 98-4 through switches 98-1 through "-3", and during the call (step XI 5) the receiver of telephone 98-4 Only be placed (hook) for a short time, transmit the interruption message (steps X30 to X33) to temporarily suspend the telephone communication, retrieve the handset (off hook), and transmit the reopen message (steps χ35 to X38) to resume the telephone communication, The display returns to the call (step χ39). The steps for the next release (REL) and end of release (RLC) are the same as those described in Figure 343 (steps χ4〇 to χ47). Next, 'About IP telephone communication, "TTC standard" according to the JT_H323 packet multimedia communication system ", for example, as described in the ITU-T Η323 ΑΝΝχ D standard (April 1999 version). The "signal protocol and the encapsulation of media signals" technology for controlling call connection in communication between multimedia terminals is specified as JT-H225, and in the communication between multimedia terminals, the control protocol for multimedia communication is The specification is jT-H245. Next, referring to the present invention, the basic functions of the JT-H323 gateway according to the ITU will be described with reference to Figures 346 to 349. The block 800 in Figure 346 is a JT-H323 gateway, which can be obtained from The audio and video signals input by the SCN circuit 801 are converted into numbers in the SCN terminal function 802.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第11頁 1245997 五、發明說明(8) " ' —2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 11 1245997 V. Description of Invention (8) " '—

位資料信號,在變換機能803中被變換成資料形式與信號 傳送接收規則等,在終端機能804中被變換成IP封包的形 式並且被送出給I p通信電路8 〇 5。又,反向的流程,也就 是包含從IP通信電路805輸入的聲音及影像資料的ip封 包’在終端機能804中被回復為數位資料的形式,在變換 機能8 0 3中被變換為資料形式及信號傳送接收規則等,在 SCN終端機能802中被變換為在SCN電路中流動的信號並且 被送出至SCN電跨80 1。在此,聲音及影像信號可區分為在 與通信對象的電話號碼的對話等所使用的,,呼叫控制資料" 及構成該等聲音及影像的"實際資料"。在通信電路8〇5上 流通有做為呼叫控制資料的IP封包810(圖347)、做為構成 聲音的實際資料的IP封包811 (圖348)、及做為構成影像的 實際資料的IP封包81 2(圖349)。在使用ISDN電路時,SCN 終端機能802係相當於資料電路終端裝置(Dsu)。又,終端 機能804具有進行與JT-323電話機及JT-323聲音影像裝置 的對向通信所必要的終端通信機能。 接著’有關與本發明有密切關係的特許第3084681號 的統合情報通信網係參照圖3 5 0加以簡略說明。 方塊191係統合IP通信網,ip終端192-丨具有Ip位址 "EA01",IP終端192-2具有IP位址” EA〇2”。這個例子是從 IP終端192-1至IP終端192-2 ’經由統合ip通信網轉送ip封 包193-1的例子,IP位址"EA01"及"EA02"由於係在統合ιρ 通網1 9 1的外部使用而稱為外部I p位址。在圖3 〇至圖 353中的記載中,IP的標頭部分係記載IP位址部分本身,The bit data signal is converted into a data format and a signal transmission / reception rule in the conversion function 803, and is converted into an IP packet format in the terminal function 804 and sent to the IP communication circuit 805. In addition, the reverse flow, that is, the ip packet including the audio and video data input from the IP communication circuit 805 is restored to the form of digital data in the terminal function 804, and converted into the data form in the conversion function 803 And signal transmission and reception rules, etc., are converted into signals flowing in the SCN circuit in the SCN terminal function 802 and sent to the SCN power span 80 1. Here, audio and video signals can be divided into call control data " actual data " which is used in conversation with the telephone number of the communication partner, etc., and constitutes such audio and video. The communication circuit 805 circulates an IP packet 810 (Figure 347) as call control data, an IP packet 811 (Figure 348) as actual data constituting sound, and an IP packet as actual data constituting video. 81 2 (Figure 349). When using an ISDN circuit, the SCN terminal function 802 is equivalent to a data circuit terminal device (Dsu). In addition, the terminal function 804 has a terminal communication function necessary for carrying out the opposite communication with the JT-323 telephone and the JT-323 audiovisual device. Next, the integrated information and communication network of Patent No. 3804681 which is closely related to the present invention will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The system of block 191 and the IP communication network, the IP terminal 192- 丨 has an IP address " EA01 ", and the IP terminal 192-2 has an IP address "EA〇2". This example is an example of transferring IP packet 193-1 from IP terminal 192-1 to IP terminal 192-2 via the integrated IP communication network. The IP addresses " EA01 " and " EA02 " The external use of 9 1 is called the external IP address. In the records in FIGS. 3 0 to 353, the header portion of the IP records the IP address portion itself.

2049-3793-PF : RAY.ptd 第12頁 1245997 五、發明說明(9) 其他項目則省略。 網點裝置195-1 —接收外部IP封包^ 輸入IP封包193-1的邏輯通信電路…]的終端:確C 子)的内部ip位址為"IA01",IP封包193M的受邏W 址為"EA02”,檢索圖350所示之位址管理表丨“^内:/ 檢索包含開始的送信元内部IP位址為”丨A0丨"、接 …、: 信外部IP位址為"EA02"的記錄,進而檢查IP封包的受 的送信元外部IP.位址"EA01”是否包含在前述檢出的記 中。又,檢查IP封包193-1内的送信元外部邝位址"ΕΑ〇ι'" 是否包含在前述檢出的記錄中的動作可以省略。 在本例中具有包含上面第2行的"EA01、EA02、IA01、 IA0 2”的記錄,使用此記錄内部之Ip位址的"u〇l,,及"ia〇2 lf,並形成具有送信元IP位址為"IA 0 Γ且受信丨p位址為 "IA02"之IP標頭的ip封包ι93-2(ιρ封包之膠囊化)。在此 ’ IA 0 1及’ IA 0 2 ’’稱為統合I p通信網1 9 1的内部丨p位址。 内部IP封包193-2係經由路由器197-1、197 - 2、197-3到達 網點裝置195-2。網點裝置195 — 2除去接收到的内部IP封包 1 9 3 - 2的IP標頭(I P封包的逆膠囊化),將得到的外部丨p封 包193-3送出給通信電路194-2,使得IP終端192-2接收外 部IP封包193-3。再者,197-6係外部IP位址為"ΕΑ8Γ、内 部IP位址為"IA8 Γ的伺服器的例子。 圖3 5 1係位址管理表的其他實施例,圖3 5 〇的位址管理 表196-1變成圖351的位址管理表196 —3,圖350的位址管理 表196-2變成圖351的位址管理表196-4,其他部分則相同2049-3793-PF: RAY.ptd Page 12 1245997 V. Description of Invention (9) Other items are omitted. Network point device 195-1 —Receive external IP packet ^ Input the logical communication circuit of IP packet 193-1 ...] Terminal: Make sure that the internal IP address of the IP packet is "IA01", and the logical W address of the IP packet 193M is " EA02 ", retrieve the address management table shown in Figure 350 丨" ^ :: / Retrieve the internal IP address of the sending cell containing the beginning is "丨 A0 丨 ", then ...,: The external IP address of the letter is " EA02 " record, and then check whether the IP packet's external IP. Address " EA01 " received in the IP packet is included in the previously detected record. It is also possible to omit the operation of checking whether the external cell address " EAA " in the IP packet 193-1 is included in the detected record. In this example, there is a record containing "EA01, EA02, IA01, IA0 2" in the second line above. Use "u〇l" and "ia〇2 lf" of the IP address inside this record, and Form the IP packet ι93-2 (the capsuleization of the ιρ packet) with the IP header of the sending cell " IA 0 Γ and the trusted 丨 p address " IA02 ". Here 'IA 0 1 and' IA 0 2 '' is called the internal IP address of the integrated IP communication network 1 9 1. The internal IP packet 193-2 arrives at the branch device 195-2 via the routers 197-1, 197-2, 197-3. The branch Device 195-2 removes the IP header of the received internal IP packet 1 9 3-2 (inverse encapsulation of the IP packet), and sends the obtained external packet 193-3 to the communication circuit 194-2, so that the IP terminal 192-2 receives an external IP packet 193-3. Furthermore, 197-6 is an example of a server with an external IP address of "ΕΑ8Γ" and an internal IP address of "IA8 Γ." Figure 3 5 1-series address management For other examples of the table, the address management table 196-1 of FIG. 350 becomes the address management table 196-3 of FIG. 351, and the address management table 196-2 of FIG. 350 becomes the address management table 196 of FIG. 351. 4, other Part is the same

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第13頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 13 1245997

。位址管理表196-3及196-4可適用 (address mask)技術。 已知的位址罩幕 開始時,檢索包含有授與通信電路194 輯端子的内部IP位址"IA01"的位址管理表196^ , ^ ^邏 中:址管理表196-3上行的記錄肖第2行的記錄=. The address management tables 196-3 and 196-4 are applicable to (address mask) technology. At the beginning of the known address mask, the internal IP address " IA01 " containing the terminals of the granting communication circuit 194 is retrieved from the address management table 196 ^, ^^ in the logic: Record of Shaw line 2 =

’,於第1行的記錄,檢查受信用外部Ip罩幕""二 =IP封包i 9 3 - i内的受信外部ϊ P位址I, E A 〇 2 "的"a η寅、 的結果,與第i行記錄内受信外部Ιρ位址"ΕΑ8ΐχ"是否二^ (下述(1)式),在本例中為不一致,接著有關第2行的 ,檢查受信用外部IP罩幕"Mask2"與外部ΙΡ封包193-1 ^ I 受信外部IP位址"ΕΑ02"的"and"演算的結果,與第鑛 内受信外部IP位址"EA02y"是否一致(下述(2)式),在本你 中為一致。有關送信元IP位址也與前述相同,根據下述 (3)式加以比較。 I f (丨’ Mask81 ” and " EA02丨丨=” ΕΑ81χπ ) · · · (1)', In the record of line 1, check the trusted external IP mask " " Second = trusted external IP within IP packet i 9 3-i ϊ P address I, EA 〇2 " " a η Yin The result of, is inconsistent with the trusted external Iρ address " ΕΑ8ΐχ " in the record of the i-th line (the following (1)), which is inconsistent in this example. Then, regarding the second line, check the trusted external IP The result of the calculation of "Mask2" and the external IP packet 193-1 ^ I trusted external IP address " ΕΑ02 " is consistent with the trusted external IP address " EA02y " (Expression (2)), which is consistent with you. The transmission cell IP address is also the same as described above, and is compared according to the following formula (3). I f (丨 ’Mask81” and " EA02 丨 丨 = ”ΕΑ81χπ) · · · (1)

If ("Mask2i 丨 and 丨丨 ΕΑ02’,= ”EA02y”) · · ·(2)If (" Mask2i 丨 and 丨 丨 ΕΑ02 ’, =” EA02y ”) · · · (2)

If("Maskly" and "EAOl" = "EAOly”) · · · (3)If (" Maskly " and " EAOl " = " EAOly ") · · · (3)

根據以上的比較結果選擇第2行的記錄,第2行的記錄 内的内部記錄” ΙΑ0Γ與,,IA02”被用以進行膠囊化,而形成 内部IP封包193-2。 圖352是位址管理表的其他實施例,其中,圖350的位 址管理表196-1變成圖352的位址管理表196-5 ,圖350的位 址管理表196-2變成圖351的位址管理表196-6,其他部分 則相同。在此例中,位址管理表1 9 6 _ 5與1 9 6 - 6内部的送信According to the above comparison result, the record in the second line is selected. The internal record “IAAΓ ,, IA02” in the record in the second line is used for encapsulation to form an internal IP packet 193-2. FIG. 352 is another embodiment of the address management table, wherein the address management table 196-1 of FIG. 350 becomes the address management table 196-5 of FIG. 352 and the address management table 196-2 of FIG. 350 becomes FIG. 351 The address management table 196-6 is the same for other parts. In this example, the address management tables 1 9 6 _ 5 and 1 9 6-6 send mail internally

2049.3793.PF;RAY.ptd 第14頁 1245997 五、發明說明(11) 元外部IP位址標記有,’don’t care” ,在IP膠囊化中送作元 外部IP位址不被引用。在IP封包193-1膠囊化時,由位^止70 管理表196_5内部的送信元内部IP位址"IA〇1"及受作外部 IP位址"ΕΑ02Π,決定受信内部IP位址"丨A〇2”。再者,在此 實施例中由於未使用位址管理表的送信元外部Ip位址,位 址管理表可不包含送信元外部I p位址用的領域。 圖353係位址管理表的其他實施例,其中,圖35〇的統 合ip通信網變成尤網,内部ip封包變成内部光碼框(frame )’以下概略說明。方塊19 lx係IP封包轉送網,也就是利 用光碼框轉送ip封包的光網。光碼框轉送光網191χ内部具 通信第1層至通信第2層之機能的光通信通路。在光碼框^ 標頭部分授與光鏈路位址。在光碼框為HDLC碼框的情形 中,光鏈路位址變成在HDLC碼框中使用的HDLC位址。1?終 ,端192-lx具有IP位址"EA1”,IP終端192-2x具有ip位址 ΠΕΑ2”。這個例子是從IP終端192_1}(到1{)終端192 —&,經 由光網191χ轉送外部1{>封包193-1χ的例子。在圖353的記 載中,IP的標頭部分係記載ΙΡ位址部分本身,光碼框也記 載同樣的標頭部分,其他的項目則省略。網點裝置195 — ΐχ 一接收外部IP封包193 —1χ,就確認被授與輸入Ιρ封包 19 3 lx的邏輯通信電路194 —丨义的終端部(邏輯端子)之内部鲁 =鏈路位址為IA1 ,1 p封包1 9 3 -1 X的受信外部I p位址為 A2’’,檢索圖353所示之位址管理表196 —ΐχ内部,並檢索 包含開始的送信元内部光鏈路位址"ΙΑ1”,接下來的受信 外部1Ρ位址"ΕΑ2"的記錄,進而檢查IP封包193-lx内的送2049.3793.PF; RAY.ptd Page 14 1245997 V. Description of the invention (11) Meta external IP address is marked with "don't care", which is sent as meta external IP address in IP encapsulation and is not referenced. When the IP packet 193-1 is encapsulated, the internal IP address of the sending cell " IA〇1 " and the external IP address " ΕΑ02Π, which is the internal IP address " in the management table 196_5, are determined by the bit 70.丨 A〇2 ". Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the external IP address of the transmitting cell is not used, the address management table may not include the field for transmitting the external IP address of the cell. Fig. 353 is another embodiment of the address management table, in which the integrated IP communication network of Fig. 35 becomes an You network, and the internal IP packet becomes an internal optical code frame. Block 19 lx is an IP packet transfer network, that is, an optical network that uses an optical code frame to forward IP packets. The optical code frame transfers the optical communication path with the functions of communication layer 1 to communication layer 2 inside the optical network 191χ. The optical link address is given in the optical code box ^ header section. In the case where the optical code frame is an HDLC code frame, the optical link address becomes the HDLC address used in the HDLC code frame. 1? At the end, the terminal 192-lx has an IP address " EA1 ", and the IP terminal 192-2x has an IP address ΠΕΑ2". This example is an example in which an external 1 {> packet 193-1χ is transferred from the IP terminal 192_1} (to the 1 {) terminal 192 — & via the optical network 191χ. In the record of Figure 353, the IP header section records the IP address section itself, the optical code frame also records the same header section, and other items are omitted. The network device 195 — ΐχ receives the external IP packet 193 — 1χ, and confirms that it is given the logical communication circuit 194 of the input Iρ packet 19 3 lx — the internal terminal of the defined terminal (logical terminal) = the link address is IA1 , 1 p packet 1 9 3 -1 X's trusted external IP address is A2 ", retrieves the internal address management table 196 —ΐχ shown in Figure 353, and retrieves the internal optical link address containing the initial transmission element " ΙΑ1 ", the next record of the trusted external 1P address " ΕΑ2 ", and then check the delivery in the IP packet 193-lx

12459971245997

信元外部ip位址”EA1"是否包含於前述 又,檢杳TP4+4109 1 ^ 檢出的記錄内。 檢查P封包193—lx内的送信元外邻TP你 疋否包含於前述檢出的記錄内的動作可省^ p位址 記錄在面第2行的"Hha" 忑錄使用在此纪錄内部的光鏈路位址之" , 形成具有送信元光鏈路位址”丨A丨” 的俨® K吕光鏈路位址"IA21 Λ s 2χ(ΙΡ封包的膠囊化)。在此,"ΐΑΐ,, ㈣:呈Λ "191χ的内部位址。内部光碼框ΐ93_2χ 係丄由具有光碼框轉送機能的路由器197—1χ、ΐ97—2χ、Check whether the external IP address "EA1" of the cell is included in the previous check record. TP4 + 4109 1 ^ Checked out. Check whether the outer neighbor TP of the sent cell in the P packet 193-1x is included in the previous check. The action in the record can save ^ p address recorded in the second line of the "Hha" record using the "optical link address" inside the record to form the optical link address with the sending cell "丨 A丨 "吕 ® K Lu optical link address " IA21 Λ s 2χ (capsule of IP packet). Here, " ΐΑΐ ,, ㈣: Λ " 191χ internal address. Internal optical code frame ΐ93_2χ system丄 Router 197-1χ, ΐ97-2χ,

Η7:3χ而到達網點裝置195-2χ。網點裝置ΐ95_2χ除去接你 至、内邛光碼框193-2χ的標頭(光碼框的逆膠囊化),將赛 到的外部IP封包193 —仏送出給通信電路194 —2χ,使ιρ終碎 19 2-2χ接收到外部ΙΡ封包193 —3χ。 。在本發明中,IP電話機與後述的媒體路由器、各種伺 服器(此等總稱為「IP送受信可能點」)被個別授與lp位 址 了接收發送IP封包’並相互地交換資料,在本發明中 稱做IP通信工具。圖353為1?送受信可能點34〇-1及1?送受 信可能點34 0-2分別具有IP位址"AD1 ”及"AD2",從終端 340-1傳送具有送信元ip位址” "及受信ιρ位址” AD2”的 Φ IP封包34卜1給終端340-2,另外,利用反方向地接收ip封 包341-2,相互地傳送接收各種資料的例子。除去Ip封包 的標頭的資料部分也稱為酬載(payl〇ad)。 接著’使用做為I p轉送網的I p技術中的多點發送技術 的有將電子書籍及電子新聞等1?資料從1個配送元轉送至Η7: 3χ and arrived at the outlet device 195-2χ. The network device ΐ95_2χ removes the header that connects you to the internal optical code frame 193-2χ (inverse encapsulation of the optical code frame), and sends the received external IP packet 193 — 通信 to the communication circuit 194 —2χ, so that ιρ ends Broken 19 2-2χ received an external IP packet 193-3χ. . In the present invention, an IP telephone set, a media router described later, and various servers (these are collectively referred to as "IP sending and receiving possible points") are individually assigned lp addresses to receive and send IP packets, and exchange data with each other. In the present invention, It is called IP communication tool. Figure 353 shows that 1? Send-receive possible point 34〇-1 and 1? Send-receive possible point 34 0-2 have IP addresses " AD1 " and " AD2 ", respectively. " An example of a Φ IP packet 34 of the trusted address "AD2" to the terminal 340-2, and an IP packet 341-2 received in the opposite direction, and an example of transmitting and receiving various data to each other. The part of the data excluding the header of the IP packet is also referred to as payload. Next, using the multicast technology of the IP technology as the IP transfer network is to transfer 1? Materials such as electronic books and electronic news from 1 distribution unit to

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第16頁 1245997 五、發明說明(13) 複數個受信處的IP資料多點發送網 盥影傻資粗一如政1认%私, 彳文為將TV的聲音資料 二二像貝枓起發送給複數受信處之卯聲音影 ;〔-baSe TV廣播網,及IP-base電影配給網 354說明從1個配送元轉送給複數個 ' …开圖 IP轉送網27-1。 。处的夕點發送型的 ,型”二中27本11至27-20為路由器,各路由器保持路由 f 其表示根據包含於接收到的1p封包中之 位,,‘IP封包應該被轉送給複數通信電路 ="二點發送位址指定為"MA1"。具有多點發送位 L二1封包29]從1p終端28]被傳送,然後經由路 由器27-11到達路由器27_18,路由器”^複製ιρ封包 =”=器27 —18引用保持的路由器型多點發送表,將 IP封包29-3及29-4轉送給通信電路。路由器27_17 封包29-3,參照路由器型多點發送表將ιρ/包接 29-5轉送至通信電路29_17,並將ιρ封包29_6轉送給通俨 電路29-18。由於路由器27_19上沒有路由器型多點發送 表,IP封包29-4直接通過路由器27_19,變成Ip封包29 7 ’並被轉送至路由器27-14。 路由器27-17從圖355所示的通信電路2 9-16輸入ip封 包29-3,確認ip封包29-3的送信元ip位址為” SRC1”,受信 端W位址為多點發送位址” MA1,,,由於相對於多點發送位。 址"MA1” ,輸出介面被指定為多點發送表29 —15中的πιριπ 與IF2’1 ,路由器27-17複製ip封包29-3,做為ip封包29 - 5 以輸出至具有輸出介面為"IF1 ”的通信電路29一17,另外, 第17頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(14) 路由器27-17複製IP封包29-3,做為IP封包29-6以輸出至 具有輸出介面為’|1?2’,的通信電路2 9-18。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 16 1245997 V. Description of the invention (13) Multiple IP addresses of multiple trusted locations are sent to the Internet in multiple locations. The shadows are as rough as the government. The audio materials are sent to the multiple trustees from two or two like sounds; [-baSe TV broadcast network, and IP-base movie distribution network 354 explain the transfer from one delivery element to a plurality of '... Open IP transfer network 27-1. . It ’s a router-type, "2", 27 books, 11 to 27-20 routers, and each router maintains a route f. It indicates that according to the bits contained in the received 1p packet, 'IP packets should be forwarded to plural The communication circuit = " two-address transmission address is designated as " MA1 ". A packet with multicast bits L two 1 29] is transmitted from 1p terminal 28], and then via router 27-11 to router 27_18, router "^ Copy ιρ packet = "= 27-27 refers to the router-type multicast table maintained and forwards IP packets 29-3 and 29-4 to the communication circuit. Router 27_17 packet 29-3, referring to the router-type multicast table, sends ιρ / Packet 29-5 is forwarded to the communication circuit 29_17, and ιρ packet 29_6 is forwarded to the communication circuit 29-18. Since there is no router type multicast table on the router 27_19, the IP packet 29-4 directly passes the router 27_19 and becomes Ip The packet 29 7 ′ is forwarded to the router 27-14. The router 27-17 inputs the IP packet 29-3 from the communication circuit 2 9-16 shown in FIG. 355, and confirms that the IP address of the sending element of the IP packet 29-3 is “” "SRC1", the receiver W address is a multicast address "MA1 ,,, With respect to the multi-point transmission bits. Address " MA1 ", the output interface is designated as πιριπ and IF2'1 in the multicast table 29-15, and the router 27-17 copies the ip packet 29-3 as the ip packet 29-5 to output to the output interface Communication circuit 29-17 for "IF1", in addition, page 17 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the invention (14) Router 27-17 duplicates IP packet 29-3 as IP packet 29 -6 to output to communication circuit 2 with output interface '| 1? 2', 2-9-18.

路由器2 7 -1 2複製接收到的I p封包2 9 — 5,參照路由器 型多點發送表,將IP封包29-8轉送給ip終端28 —2,並將Ip 封包29-9轉送給IP終端28-3。路由器27_13複製接收到的 IP封包29-6,參照路由器型多點發送表,將lp封包29iq 轉送給IP終端28-4,並將IP封包29 — u轉送給Ip終端285 。路由器27-14祿製接收到的ip封包29 — 7,參照路由器型 多點發送表,將IP封包29-12轉送給IP終端28 —6,並將Ip 封包29-13轉送給IP終端28-7。在送信元的Ip終端28 —丨 f位資料形式的電子書籍與電子新聞轉送至lp轉送網27q 此IP轉送網27-1係用以配送電子書籍與電子 貝料多點發送網,IP終端28 —2至28一8成為購買電 Z ”新聞的使用者的IP終端。將送信元的ιρ終端28:心 成TV播放用的聲音影像送信震置,以播放口節 替= 送;變成1P base的Tv廣播網,IP終端28-2至28-7則成為轉 具有TV視聽者使用的TV受信機能之Ip故端。 珉為 =述圖354的多點發送方式的實施例中,Ip終端 ^成為达仏者以傳达多點發送資料,ιρ終端28 成為受信者,採用此種方法沾夕^ -7 ^ τ . _ 的夕點發送係在網際網路及庵 域LM等试驗性地使用。但是,由於以此種多點廣 亞:-醫終端都可成為多點發的送信方式 惡-的送信者將多點發送資料無限制地連續傳送二 =Router 2 7 -1 2 copies the received IP packet 2 9 — 5 and refers to the router-type multicast table to forward IP packet 29-8 to IP terminal 28-2 and forward IP packet 29-9 to IP Terminal 28-3. Router 27_13 copies the received IP packet 29-6, refers to the router-type multicast table, forwards lp packet 29iq to IP terminal 28-4, and forwards IP packet 29 — u to IP terminal 285. Router 27-14 received IP packets 29-7. Refer to the router-type multicast table to forward IP packets 29-12 to IP terminal 28-6, and forward IP packets 29-13 to IP terminal 28-. 7. IP terminal 28 at the sending cell— 丨 f-bit electronic books and electronic news are transferred to the lp transfer network 27q This IP transfer network 27-1 is used to distribute electronic books and electronic materials to the multicast network, IP terminal 28 — 2 to 28 to 8 become the IP terminals for users who purchase news on the news of electricity Z. The terminal ιρ of terminal 28: Xincheng TV is used to send the audio and video signals to the TV, and the playback interface is replaced = send; it becomes 1P base In the Tv broadcast network, IP terminals 28-2 to 28-7 have become the IP end of the TV receiver function used by TV viewers. In the embodiment of the multicast transmission method shown in FIG. 354, the IP terminal ^ Become a master to convey multicast data, ιρ terminal 28 becomes a trustee, and using this method Zanxi ^ -7 ^ τ. _'S xidian transmission is experimental on the Internet and in the domain LM. Use. However, because of this multi-point Guangya:-medical terminals can become a multi-point transmission method evil-the sender will send the multi-point transmission data without limit continuous two =

1245997 五、發明說明(15) --- -- ΪΪ能Π止的危險。再者,路由器内部的多點發送表被 過i而^限制地送入大量的資料,也會使得路由器負荷 正行::機。利用限制多點發送資料的送信元,以排除不 情報^防止路由器負荷過大而當機等危險,可實現 頃報女全性高的多點發送方 只 發明欲解決之問題 制方法:2 Τ ί收資料的1p終端機間之終端間通信接續控 際網路中,例*,做為用以傳送接收電 網路等傳送“制方法。本發明係以利用網際 終端間通信接續控制方Γ貝V故為主要目的的1ρ終端間的 技術,建立可適用4利用與前述之TTC標準不同的 及IP多點發送通信等的通信,聲音影像通信, 方法。 、體通化的終端間通信接續控制 供終端間通信接G:J理:進行,本發明之目的為提 信與聲音影像通信,Ιρ夕駐鉻1、可適用於1ρ電話機間的通 用以解決問題的方法夕送通信等的多媒體通信。 在本發明中 利 續控制方法改變為適::二共通線信號方…1245997 V. Description of the invention (15) ----Danger of being unable to stop. In addition, the router's internal multicast table is restricted to send a large amount of data through ^, which will also make the router load forward :: machine. The use of limiting the sending of data to send data to eliminate uninformation ^ prevents routers from overloading and causing dangers such as crashes, and can realize that a multi-point sender with high female integrity can only invent a problem to be solved. Method: 2 T In the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control network between 1p terminals receiving data, for example, * is used as a transmission method for transmitting and receiving electrical networks and the like. The present invention is to control the communication connection method between the Internet terminals. Therefore, the main purpose of 1ρ technology between terminals is to establish and apply 4 communication, audio and video communications, methods, etc. that are different from the above-mentioned TTC standard and IP multicast communication, etc., and the terminal communication connection control for physical terminals is provided for terminals. Inter-communication communication: G: J: Carry out. The purpose of the present invention is to send messages and communicate with audio and video. Ip is stationed in Chrome 1. It is applicable to the general communication between 1p telephones to solve problems such as multimedia communication. In the present invention, the continuation control method is changed to: the two common line signal parties ...

終端、聲音影像迭受作玖姓士以實現經由電話機及IP 轉送網的終端間通^真機終端等的終端間之IP 在圖1中,1係;ΪΓρ = :法。 、細、耷音影像送受信終端Terminals, audio and video are used as surnames to achieve IP communication between terminals such as telephone terminals and real-world terminals via telephone and IP transfer networks. In Figure 1, line 1; ΪΓρ =: method. , Thin, 耷 audio and video sending and receiving terminal

1245997 五、發明說明(16) 及傳真機終端等),1 - 3及1 - 4係用以將1個以上的終端接續 至IP轉送網的媒體路由器,1 —5及卜6係接續伺服器,卜7 係中繼接續伺服器。上述各接續伺服器卜5及卜6上授與有 和公眾電話交換網(PSTN)之加入者交換機(LS)的電路接續 控制類似的機能,在中繼接續伺服器丨—7上則授與有和中 繼交換機(TS)的電路接續控制類似的機能。 利用者從終端1 -1輸入受信端電話號碼並送出呼叫設 定(步驟Z1),媒體路由器1 — 3送回呼叫設定接受(步驟Z2) ’接著媒體路由器1-3將包含受信端電話號碼及送信端電 話號碼的呼叫設定之IP封包傳送給接續伺服器卜5(步驟Y1 )’接續伺服器1 - 5使用接收到的受信端電話號碼以決定I p 轉送網内部的終端間通信用的通信電路,而形成識別通信 電路用的電路號碼(CIC),及包含受信端電話號碼及送信 端電話號碼之I P封包。在此,電路號碼(c I c )唯一地決定 可識別一組受信端電話號碼及送信端電話號碼。此丨p封包 被稱為包含初期位址訊息(I AM)的IP封包,或是簡稱為初 期位址訊息(I AM )。前述終端間通信用的通信電路,例如 轉送數位化聲音封包用的IP通信電路,此IP通信電路可規 定一組設定聲音IP封包的送信端IP位址及受信端IP位址, 或是附加於IP封包上的MPLS技術的標記。當使用IP終端及¥ 聲音動影像資料與傳真資料終端等其他終端時,通信電路 為用於IP終端的資料轉送用通信電路及聲音動影像送受信 終端與傳真資料轉送用通信電路。 其次,接續伺服器卜5將初期位址訊息(I AM)送給接續1245997 V. Description of the invention (16) and facsimile terminals, etc., 1-3 and 1-4 are media routers used to connect more than one terminal to the IP transfer network, and 1-5 and 6 are connected servers , Bu 7 is a relay connection server. Each of the above connection servers 5 and 6 is granted with functions similar to the circuit connection control of the subscriber switch (LS) of the public telephone exchange network (PSTN), and is granted on the relay connection server 丨 -7. It has a similar function to the circuit control of the trunk switch (TS). The user enters the phone number of the recipient from the terminal 1 -1 and sends the call settings (step Z1), and the media routers 1-3 send back the call settings to accept (step Z2). The IP packet of the call setting of the terminal telephone number is transmitted to the connection server 5 (step Y1). The connection server 1-5 uses the received telephone number of the trusted terminal to determine the communication circuit for inter-terminal communication within the IP transfer network. , And form a circuit number (CIC) for identifying the communication circuit, and an IP packet containing the telephone number of the receiving end and the telephone number of the transmitting end. Here, the circuit number (c I c) uniquely determines that a set of telephone numbers of the receiving end and telephone numbers of the transmitting end can be identified. This packet is called an IP packet containing initial address information (I AM), or simply referred to as initial address information (I AM). The foregoing communication circuit for communication between terminals is, for example, an IP communication circuit for transmitting digitalized voice packets. This IP communication circuit may specify a set of sender IP addresses and receiver IP addresses of the voice IP packets, or may be added to MPLS technology marking on IP packets. When using an IP terminal and other terminals such as audiovisual materials and facsimile data terminals, the communication circuit is a communication circuit for data transfer of the IP terminal and a communication circuit for audiovisual image transmission and reception terminals and facsimile data transmission. Second, the connection server 5 sends the initial address information (I AM) to the connection.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第20頁 五、發明說明(17) 飼服器1-7(步驟Y2),同時轉變為後述位址結束訊息(acm) 的等待狀態’並啟動A C Μ等待計時器。中繼接續伺服器1 一 7 接收ΙΑΜ,並將ΙΑΜ送給接續伺服器卜6(步驟γ3)。接續伺 服器1-6檢查接收到的ΙΑΜ的内容,並檢查通信電路是否被 設定至接續具有受信端電話號碼之終端丨—2的媒體路由器 14也就疋檢查媒體路由器1-4是否被容許接收接續要求 呼叫,當容許接收時,對媒體路由器丨—4進行呼叫設定要 求(步驟Υ4),媒體路由器卜4對終端1-2要求呼叫設定(步 驟Ζ4),再者,接續伺服器卜6形成通知接收ιαμ的ιρ封 〇此封包(稱為位址結束訊息(AC Μ))被送回給中繼接續 伺服器卜U步驟Y5),ACM經由中繼接續伺服器卜7到達中 繼接續伺服器1-5(步驟Y6)。接續伺服器卜5 一接收ACM, 就停止已經設定的ACM等待計時器。在接收ACM前的時點 中,當ACM等待計時器期滿之時,釋放通信電路。又,α(:μ 從IAM繼受電路號碼(CIC),並可將其保持在ΚΜ内部,或 是ACM可在步驟Y5中由送信端電話號碼及受信端電話號碼 形成電路说碼’並保持在ACM内部。 終端1-2發出接續要求呼叫的接收音,並報告給媒體 路由器卜4(步驟Z7),媒體路由器w將終端卜2的接續要 求呼叫接收傳呼傳送給接續伺服器卜6(步驟γ7) ’接續飼 服器1-6形成IP封包,其通知終端卜2為接續要求呼叫接收 傳呼中。此ip封包被稱為包含呼叫進行訊息(epG)的㈣ 包’或簡稱呼叫進行訊息(CPG)。接續伺服器卜6將呼叫進 仃讯息(CPG)傳送給中繼接續伺服器卜7(步驟γ8),中繼接2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 20 V. Description of the invention (17) Feeder 1-7 (step Y2), at the same time, it changes to the waiting state of address end message (acm) described below and starts AC Μ waiting Timer. The relay connection server 1-7 receives the IAM, and sends the IAM to the connection server 6 (step γ3). The connection server 1-6 checks the contents of the received IAM, and checks whether the communication circuit is set to connect to the terminal with the phone number of the trusted end 丨 -2. The media router 14 also checks whether the media router 1-4 is allowed to receive The connection request calls. When receiving is allowed, a call setting request is made to the media router 丨 -4 (step Υ4). The media router 44 requests a call setting to the terminal 1-2 (step 44), and the connection server 66 is formed Notification of receiving the ιαμ ιρ package. This packet (called the end of address message (AC M)) is returned to the relay connection server (step Y5), and the ACM reaches the relay connection server via the relay connection server (7). 1-5 (step Y6). After receiving the ACM, the connection server stops the ACM waiting timer that has been set. At the point before receiving the ACM, when the ACM wait timer expires, the communication circuit is released. In addition, α (: μ receives the circuit number (CIC) from the IAM and can keep it inside the KM, or the ACM can form the circuit code from the sender's phone number and the receiver's phone number in step Y5 and keep it Inside the ACM. Terminal 1-2 issues the reception request call for connection request and reports it to the media router BU 4 (step Z7), and the media router w transmits the connection request call reception paging from terminal 2 to the connection server BU 6 (step γ7) 'The connection server 1-6 forms an IP packet, which informs the terminal BU 2 that the call is being received for paging. This ip packet is called a packet containing a call progress message (epG)' or simply a call progress message ( CPG). The connection server BU6 sends the call incoming message (CPG) to the relay connection server BU7 (step γ8), and the relay connection

1245997 五、發明說明(18) Π服器卜7將接收到的前述CPG傳$給接續飼服器卜 32) ’接續飼服器丨-5接收CPG,且接續伺服器丨_5根 媒體路由器1-3的CPG之内容,通知媒體路由器13終端卜2 傳呼中(步驟Y10),媒體路由器卜3將傳呼中的聲音通知级 端Η(步驟Z10)。㈣可在步驟Y5中根據送信端電話號碼 及爻信端電話號碼形成電路號碼,並保持在cpG内邙。 終端卜2—回答步驟Z4的呼叫設定要求(步驟Z1丨), 體路由器丨_4便释終端卜2已回答通知接續飼服器卜6(步驟 Y11),接續伺服器1-6形成IP封包,其表示終端卜2回答呼 叫設定的要求。此IP封包被稱為包含應答訊息(△)的11> 封包,或簡稱應答訊息(ANM)。接續伺服器卜6將產生的 ANM傳送給中繼接續伺服器卜7(步驟γΐ2),中繼接續飼服 器卜7將接收到的ΑΝΜ傳送給接續伺服器卜5(步驟γΐ3)。接 續伺服器卜5將受信端終端卜2已回答通知媒體路由器 卜步驟Υ14),媒體路由器丨_3通知傳送給終端卜i的傳呼 音停止(步驟Z14),在終端卜1與終端卜2間,使用根據電 路號碼(CIC)特定的終端間通信用的通信電路,可傳送接 收載運數位媒體的IP封包,並轉變至通話階段(步驟γΐ5) :ΑΝΜ也可在步驟Υ5中根據送信端電話號碼及受信端電話 號碼形成電路號碼,並保持在ΑΝΜ内部。通知終端的切 斷要求(步驟Z16),媒體路由器卜3將切斷要求通知接續伺 服器1-5(步驟Y16),並將切斷確認通知終端卜丨(步驟zi8 )° 接續伺服器1-5 —接收切斷要求,就根據送信端電話1245997 V. Description of the invention (18) The server sends the received CPG to the connection server. 32) 'The connection server 丨 -5 receives the CPG and connects to the server 丨 5 media routers The contents of the CPG of 1-3 are notified to the media router 13 that the terminal BU 2 is paging (step Y10), and the media router BU 3 notifies the paging voice of the paging terminal (step Z10). ㈣ In step Y5, the circuit number is formed based on the phone number of the sender and the phone number of the sender and is kept in cpG. Terminal 2—answer the call setting request of step Z4 (step Z1 丨), the body router 丨 _4 will explain that terminal 2 has responded to notify the feeder server 6 (step Y11), and connect the server 1-6 to form an IP packet , Which indicates that the terminal BU 2 answers the call setting request. This IP packet is called an 11 > packet containing an answer message (△), or an answer message (ANM) for short. The connection server 6 transmits the generated ANM to the relay connection server 7 (step γΐ2), and the relay server 7 transmits the received ANM to the connection server 5 (step γΐ3). The connection server BU 5 notifies the receiving end terminal BU 2 that the media router has responded (step 14), and the media router 丨 _3 notifies the paging tone transmitted to the terminal i to stop (step Z14), between the terminal BU 1 and the terminal BU 2. , Using the communication circuit specified for communication between terminals according to the circuit number (CIC), can transmit and receive IP packets carrying digital media, and transition to the call phase (step γΐ5): ANM can also be based on the phone number of the sender in step Υ5 And the telephone number of the receiving end forms a circuit number and is kept inside the ANM. Notify the terminal of the disconnection request (step Z16), the media router BU3 notifies the disconnection server of the connection server 1-5 (step Y16), and notifies the terminal of the disconnection confirmation (step zi8) ° Connect the server 1- 5 —Receiving cut-off request

1245997 五、發明說明(19) 號碼及受信端電話號碼識別電路號碼(CIC),形成代表通 信電路之釋放要求(^乩)的115封包。此1{)封包被稱為包含 釋放(REL)WP封包’或簡稱為釋放訊息()。釋放訊息 (REL)包含電路號碼(CIC),將此釋放訊息(REL)送出給中 繼接續伺服器卜7(步驟Y1 7),進而將表示切斷要求結束的 回復結束送回給媒體路由器卜3(步驟γΐ8)。中繼接續伺服 器1-7將釋放要求(REL)送出給接續伺服器卜6(步驟γΐ9), 進而形成表示釋.放要求結束的1?封包。此Ιρ封包被稱為包 含釋放結束(RLC)的IP封包,或簡稱為釋放結束訊息(rlc) 。此釋放結束(RLC)被送回給接續伺服器卜5(步驟γ2〇)。 接續伺服器卜6 —接收釋放要求(REL)就將切斷要求送 出給媒體路由器卜4(步驟Y21),並將代表釋放要求(rel) 結束的釋放結束(RLC)送回給中繼接續伺服器卜7( Y22) ^媒體路由器卜4 一接收切斷要求,就將接續要求呼 叫的切斷指示通知終端卜2(步驟Z22),然後將表示完成 述切斷指示的切斷結束送回給接續伺服器卜6(步驟。 終端卜2將回復結束通知媒體路由器(步驟Ζ23)。在仕 端間通信的手續中’也可將來自終端卜2的終端間通σ信的< 切斷要求送出給媒體路由器1-4 ’而變成與上述相同 序。當中繼接續伺服器卜7不存在’也可能實現在接續伺 服器1-5及卜6間的終端間通信接續控制方法。接續伺 卜5及1-6係在終端1-1及卜2間的終端間通作社束之 : 就是在步驟Υ18及步驟Υ22中’收集包含電碼(cic)’t 通信時刻、電話號碼的終端間通信記錄1其記錄於接續1245997 5. Description of the invention (19) The number and the telephone number identification circuit number (CIC) of the receiving end form 115 packets representing the release requirements (^ 乩) of the communication circuit. This 1 {) packet is called a Release (REL) WP packet 'or simply a release message (). The release message (REL) contains the circuit number (CIC), and sends this release message (REL) to the relay connection server 7 (step Y1 7), and then returns the end of the reply indicating the end of the disconnection request to the media router. 3 (steps γΐ8). The relay connection server 1-7 sends a release request (REL) to the connection server BU 6 (step γΐ9), thereby forming a 1? Packet indicating the end of the release request. This Ip packet is called an IP packet containing Release End (RLC), or simply Release End Message (rlc). This release completion (RLC) is returned to the connection server BU 5 (step γ20). Connection server BU 6—After receiving the release request (REL), it sends the disconnection request to the media router BU 4 (step Y21), and returns the release completion (RLC), which represents the end of the release request (rel), to the relay connection server. Device 7 (Y22) ^ Media router 4 As soon as the disconnection request is received, the terminal 2 is notified of the disconnection instruction of the connection request call (step Z22), and then the completion of the disconnection instruction indicating completion of the disconnection instruction is returned to the terminal. Connect server 6 (step. Terminal 2 will notify the media router of the end of the response (step Z23). In the formalities of the communication between the terminals, 'it is also possible to cut off the communication request from the terminal 2 to the < It is sent to the media routers 1-4 'and becomes the same order as above. When the relay connection server bu 7 does not exist', it is also possible to implement a communication connection control method between the terminals 1-5 and bu 6. The connection server 5 and 1-6 are the communication between the terminals between terminals 1-1 and 2: that is, in step Υ18 and step Υ22, 'collect the communication time including the code (cic)', and the communication between the terminals. Record 1 whose record is continued

1245997 五、發明說明(20) 伺服器的内部’可用於計費及運用管理。 形,= = 在終端為電話機的情 終端為IP終端(具有收紐曰封包匕:二為端 信,而在 媒體為文字乃至於數位化靜、)的情形,數位 信,在終端為聲音動影像端:資料通 為傳真終端的情.形,= ==對方終端而個別地決定的終端識m 如可為在特定的通信、網内部之有效的終端固有號碼。 玷故U!路由器及接續伺服器之間,及接續伺服器間 的、、.;鈿間通化接續控制的方法也可有各種變化,又,步驟 Y2中也可省略ACM等待計時器的啟動,此在實施例中加以 說明。1245997 V. Description of the invention (20) The internal part of the server can be used for billing and operation management. Shape, = = When the terminal is a telephone, the terminal is an IP terminal (with a packet receiving terminal: two is a terminal letter, and in the case of media is text or even digital quiet,), the digital letter is voice-activated at the terminal. Video terminal: The data terminal is a facsimile terminal. The terminal identification m that is determined individually by the counterparty terminal can be a valid terminal unique number within a specific communication or network.玷 Therefore, there can be various changes between the U! Router and the connection server, and between the connection server; the method of connection control between the connection server and the connection server can also be variously changed. In addition, the ACM wait timer can be omitted in step Y2. This is explained in the examples.

本發明係有關於使用丨p轉送網的終端間通信接續控制 方法’本發明之上述目的係為了在第1的1?終端及第2的1? 終端間進行多媒體I p通信,前述第1的丨p終端將包含前述 第2的IP終端之主機名稱的Ip封包,經由媒體路由器内部 的網域名稱伺服器及網點裝置,傳送至統合丨p轉送網内部 的網域名稱伺服器,前述統合丨p轉送網内部的網域名稱伺 服器將1 : 1地對應於前述第2的I p終端之主機名稱的I P位 址,經由前述媒體路由器内部的網域名稱伺服器或是直接 地送回給前述第1的IP終端,當前述第1的IP終端送出傳送The present invention relates to a method for controlling communication connection between terminals using a p-transmission network. The above-mentioned object of the present invention is to perform multimedia IP communication between a first 1? Terminal and a second 1? Terminal.丨 The p terminal sends the IP packet containing the host name of the second IP terminal described above to the unification through the domain name server and branch device inside the media router, and the unification 丨 p domain name server inside the forwarding network. The domain name server inside the p-forwarding network sends the 1: 1 IP address corresponding to the host name of the second IP terminal in the above through the domain name server inside the media router or directly returns it to When the first IP terminal sends the transmission,

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第24頁 1245997 五、發明說明(21) 給前述第2的IP終端之I p封句,生标士乂 , 其厶由刖述第1的IP終端接 π的媒體路由b m網點裝f、Ip轉送網内部一個以 上的路由器,而到達接續前述第2的115終端之 :、’透”由通信電路之其他媒體路由器,ιρ封包:送裝給 則述IP終端,而達成對前述網域名稱伺服器的使用。、 又’本發明之上述目的係為了在第i非獨立型IP電話 ίι 與非第^ ί :二『電話機間進行電話通信,-拿起前述 第非獨IIP零話機的送受話器,通知來自前述第i非獨 f型1 ^電話機的傳呼之IP封包被傳送,第1媒體路由器内 4的第1個H323終端部檢出前述1?封包,將應答的ιρ封包 送回給前述第1非獨立型1?電話機,前述第1非獨立型即電 話機經由前述第1的11323終端部傳送包含前述第2的第 獨?體電話機之電話號碼的Ip封包,而到達第i媒體路 由器之内部的第1網域名稱飼服器,及前述第i媒體路由器 經由通信電路接續的第丨網點裝置,前述第丨網點裝置將前 述IP封包傳送給前述統合IP轉送網内部的第2網域名稱伺 服器,前述第2網域名稱伺服器將1:1地對應於前述第1非 獨立型1?電話機的電話號碼的第2的IP位址,經由前述第j 網域名稱飼服器,或是不經由前述第!名稱飼服器而直接 地送回給前^述第1的11323終端部,前述第1的11323終端部以 1 ·· 1地對應前述第i非獨立型1?電話機的第i的1?位址做為 發信端位址,前述第2的1?位址做為受信端位址以產生Ip 封包並送出,經由前述第1網點裝置,前述IP轉送網内部 的1個以上的路由器,而到達前述第2的第1非獨立型Ip電, 第25頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 24 1245997 V. Description of the invention (21) I p-sentence to the aforementioned second IP terminal, the bidding certificate, which is connected by the first IP terminal described above The media routing bm network node is installed with more than one router in the f, IP transfer network, and reaches the 115th terminal that is connected to the aforementioned second: "transparent" by other media routers in the communication circuit, and the packet is sent to the IP terminal To achieve the use of the aforementioned domain name server. Also, the above-mentioned object of the present invention is for the i-th non-independent IP phone and non-^^: two "for telephone communication between telephones,-pick up the aforementioned The receiver of the non-exclusive IIP zero telephone notifies that the IP packet of the paging from the i-th non-exclusive f-type 1 ^ telephone is transmitted, and the first H323 terminal unit 4 in the first media router detects the aforementioned 1 packet and will respond The ιρ packet is sent back to the aforementioned first non-independent type 1? Telephone, and the aforementioned first non-independent type, the telephone, transmits an IP packet containing the telephone number of the aforementioned second independent phone through the 1113 terminal unit, And reach inside the i-th media router The 1st domain name feeder and the ith network point device connected by the i-th media router via a communication circuit, the ith network point device transmits the IP packet to the second network name server inside the integrated IP forwarding network The aforementioned second domain name server will correspond 1: 1 to the second IP address of the telephone number of the first non-standalone 1? Telephone, via the aforementioned j domain name feeder, or It is directly returned to the above-mentioned 1113 terminal section without passing through the above-mentioned feeder! The 1113 terminal section of the first section corresponds to the first section of the i-dependent type 1? Telephone set. The 1? address of i is used as the sending end address, and the aforementioned 2? address is used as the receiving end address to generate an Ip packet and sent out, via the aforementioned first network device, and one within the aforementioned IP forwarding network. The above routers reach the 2nd first non-independent type IP power, 2049-3793-PF on page 25; RAY.ptd 1245997

機被接續的其他第2網點裝置,透過經由通信電路,送 $至在其他第2媒體路由器内部的前述第2的第i非獨立型 IP電話機被接續的第2個JJ323終端部。 第1利用者在電話一開始通話時,前述第1非獨立型1? 電話機以前述第i的]^位址做為發信端”位址,以前述第2 =IP位址做為党信端丨P位址而送出包含數位方式的電話聲 音之IP封包,此IP封包經由前述第1個11323終端裝置、前 述第1網點裝置、前述丨P轉送網内部的i個以上的路由器、 前述第2網點裝置、前述第u@H32^端裝置,而到達前述 第2非獨立型ip電話機,當第2利用者發出聲音,前述第2 非獨立型I p電話機以前述第2的丨p位址做為發信端丨p位址 ,以前述第1的IP位址做為受信端1?位址,而送出包含數 位方式的電話聲音之IP封包,此IP封包係經由前述第2個 Η 3 2 3、、、ς、褒置、第2網點裝置、前述I p轉送網内部之一個 以上的路由器、前述第1網點裝置、前述第1個⑽㈡終端裝 置’而到達前述第1非獨立型I ρ電話機。 當第1利用者因為電話通信結束而放回送受話器,便 以前述第1的IΡ位址做為發信端丨ρ位址,以前述第2的丨ρ位 址做為受信端IP位址,產生並送出表示電話通信結束的ιρ 封包’經由前述第1個Η 3 2 3終端部、第1網點裝置、前述I ρ 轉送網内部之1個以上的路由器、前述第2網點裝置、第2 個Η323終端裝置,而到達第2個第i非獨立型1?電話機,當 第2利用者知道電話通信結束後放回送受話器,便以前述 第2的IP位址做為發信端丨ρ位址,並以前述第1的丨ρ位址做The other second network device connected to the mobile phone is transmitted through the communication circuit to the second JJ323 terminal unit connected to the second i-independent IP phone in the second media router. When the first user initiates a call, the first non-standalone 1? Telephone uses the above [i] address as the sender's address, and the aforementioned 2 = IP address as the party's letter. IP address containing digital voice over the IP address, this IP packet passes through the first 1323 terminal device, the first network device, the i or more routers inside the P forwarding network, the first 2 branch devices, the aforementioned u @ H32 ^ terminal device, and reached the aforementioned second independent IP phone, when the second user makes a sound, the aforementioned second independent IP phone uses the aforementioned second IP address As the sender's p address, the aforementioned 1st IP address is used as the receiver's 1? Address, and an IP packet containing the digital voice of the phone is sent. This IP packet is transmitted through the aforementioned 2nd Η 3 2 3 ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ρ telephone. When the first user returns the handset because the telephone communication is over, The IP address of the first IP address is used as the sender's IP address, and the IP address of the second IP address is used as the IP address of the receiver, and an ιρ packet indicating the end of the telephone communication is generated and sent. One Η 3 2 3 terminal unit, the first branch point device, one or more routers inside the aforementioned I ρ transfer network, the aforementioned second branch point device, and the second Η323 terminal device, and reached the second ith non-independent type 1? Telephone, when the second user knows that the telephone communication is over and puts it back into the receiver, the second IP address is used as the sending end 丨 ρ address, and the first 丨 ρ address is used as

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第26頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 26 1245997

產生並送出用以 經由前述第2個Η323終端裝置、第2網點;;束3 ip轉达網内部之i個以上的路由器、前述 、則述 到達前述第1個H323終端裝置,以結束前述非裝置’而 前述第2非獨立型1p電話機之間的電話通V",型ip H323終端部送出傳送至前述第2非獨“ιρ ^ :Generate and send to pass through the second Η323 terminal device and the second network point; bundle 3 ip relays to more than i routers in the network, and the foregoing, and then reach the first H323 terminal device to end the non- Device 'and the telephone communication V " between the aforementioned second non-independent type 1p telephone is sent out to the aforementioned second non-independent type "ιρ ^:

包,經由網點裝置、IP轉送網内部之丨個以上的^封 而到達前述第2非獨立型1?電話機接續的其他網點:以, ,由通信電路而進入其他媒體路由器,經由該们。级端 4,IP封包到達前述第2非獨立型z P電話機。 本發明係將位址管理表設定至Ip轉送網内的網點裝置 上,將終端的位址登錄在此位址管理表上的方式(特願平 11-128956)應用在多點發送技術上,以下說明其内容。 轉送網做為通公司官理運用的網路,將網點裝置設置在 IP轉送網内,透過將IP終端的IP位址登錄在此網點裝置 上’而實現根據情報安全性高之多點發送技術的I p封包傳The packet arrives at the other outlets connected by the second non-independent type 1? Telephone through the outlet device and one or more ^ seals inside the IP forwarding network: the communication circuit enters other media routers, and passes through them. Stage end 4. The IP packet arrives at the aforementioned second independent zP telephone. The invention sets the address management table to the network device in the IP transfer network, and registers the address of the terminal on this address management table (Japanese Patent Application No. 11-128956) to the multicast technology. The contents are described below. The transfer network is used as the official network of the company. The branch device is set in the IP transfer network. The IP address of the IP terminal is registered on this branch device. I p packet transmission

送。當接收包含未登錄之多點發送IP位址的IP封包時,即 廢棄此IP封包(IP位址過濾)。 參閱圖2加以說明,IP轉送網1 -1 〇的内部設置有網點 裝置1-11至1_14及路由器1 -15至1-20。網點裝置與路由器 係按照I P通信電路,直接地或是經由網點裝置與路由器間 接地接續。具有IP封包送收機能的IP終端卜21至卜27係透 過IP通信電路而被接續至網點裝置上。IP終端不容許直接 接續至路由器。網點裝置卜11至卜1 4將該網點裝置接續的give away. When receiving an IP packet containing an unregistered multicast IP address, the IP packet is discarded (IP address filtering). Referring to FIG. 2 for explanation, the IP transfer network 1 -1 〇 is provided with network devices 1-11 to 1_14 and routers 1 -15 to 1-20. The branch point device and the router are grounded directly or through the branch point device and the router according to the IP communication circuit. The IP terminals Bu 21 to Bu 27 having the function of sending and receiving IP packets are connected to the outlet device through the IP communication circuit. IP terminals are not allowed to connect directly to the router. Outlet device bu 11 to bu 1 4

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第27頁 1245997 五、發明說明(24) I P終端情報中’至少一個丨p位址登錄至該網點裝置的内 部。 做為第1的1 P封包之接受檢查,係檢查進入IP轉送網 的外部IP封包的標碩内的受信端IP位址是否有登錄至該網 點裝置的位址管理表,在受信端丨P位址未被登錄的情形中 ’廢棄該I P封包。做為第2的I p封包之接受檢查,係檢查 進入I P轉送網的外部I p封包的標頭内的送信端丨p位址是否 有被登錄至該網黏裝置的位址管理表,在送信端丨p位址未 被,,的情形下,廢棄該IP封包。做為第1位址登錄檢查 、,當受信端多點發送位址登錄至網點裝置的位址管理表, 進入至網點裝置的外部Ip封包的標頭内之受信端多點發送 位址未登錄至位址管理表的情形下,透過網點 I:封包,以防止預定外的IP封包混入至IP轉送網。透= 之送信者的位址登錄至受信者侧的網點裝 封勺從多點發送1?封包受信者至多點發送IP 點ίΐ ΐ之1p封包受信確認用的ACK封包’無法通過網 心表多 入至IP轉读敏!咖Μ 4匕个$伙1 r得运網的外部送2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 27 1245997 V. Description of the invention (24) IP terminal information is registered to the inside of the outlet device with at least one 丨 p address. As the acceptance check of the first 1 P packet, it is to check whether the IP address of the trusted end in the label of the external IP packet entering the IP forwarding network is registered in the address management table of the network device. If the address is not registered, the IP packet is discarded. As the acceptance check of the second IP packet, it is to check whether the sending end in the header of the external IP packet entering the IP forwarding network has the p address registered in the address management table of the network stick device. If the sender's p address is not used, the IP packet is discarded. As the first address registration check, when the multicast address of the trusted end is registered in the address management table of the branch device, the multicast address of the trusted end in the header of the external IP packet entering the branch device is not registered. In the case of the address management table, the network I: packet is used to prevent unintended IP packets from being mixed into the IP forwarding network. Transparent = The address of the sender is registered in the network of the recipient. The envelope is sent from the multicast point. 1 The packet is sent to the IP address of the recipient. The ACK packet for the 1p packet confirmation of the packet cannot be transmitted through the network. Enter to IP transfer reading Min! ΜM 4 个 伙 伙 1 得 1 得 delivery of the outside network

内部的C器,或是不容許適用於ιρ轉送網 轉送網夕卜運用管理伺服器的1p位址之登錄,從IP 存取,以提對1p轉送網内部的運用管理伺服器進行 铖巧情報安全性。做為第2位址登錄檢查,限定 1245997 五、發明說明(25) 包含多點發送資料之1 P封包的送信端,以避免不正行為者 的不正行為。又,當有不正行為進行時,也容易去特定IP 封包的送信端,而可提高I P轉送網的情報安全性。 將在本發明之實施例中說明的IP膠囊化及逆IP膠囊化 替換為低於3層之通信層的膠囊化與逆膠囊化,例如,可 置換為根據通信層2層之光HDLC碼框的標頭之膠囊化與逆 膠囊化。再者,在膠囊化與逆膠囊化中所給予的標頭上未 包含有送信端内·部位址,換言之,也可能適用簡易標頭的 簡易膠囊化及簡易逆膠囊化。即使在簡易膠囊化中,也使 用與在膠囊化及逆膠囊化中使用者相同機能的位址管理 表。以圖357說明之。 方塊 2300 係 IP 通信網,230 1、2302、2303、2304 係網 點裝置,230 1 -1、2302-1、2303_1、2304-1 係各種位址管 理表,230 卜2、230 1 -3、2302-2、2302-3、2303-2、 2303-3、2304-2、2304-3係通信電路的終端部與網點裝j 的接點(邏輯端子),分別被授與内部位址"IA1 ”、" I a 2,,、 "IA3"、”A4"、"IA5"、"IA6"、"U7”、” U8"。23〇6七 2306-8係具有送收ip封包之機能的Ip終端,其分 醫位址"EA1"至” EA8 ”。23〇7]至23〇7一4 :Internal C device, or registration of 1p address that is not suitable for ιρ transfer network transfer network and management server, access from IP, in order to provide clever information on the application management server inside 1p transfer network safety. As the second address registration check, the limit is 1245997 V. Description of the invention (25) The sender of the 1 P packet containing the multicast data to avoid the wrongful behavior of the wrongdoer. In addition, when wrongdoing is carried out, it is easy to go to the sending end of a specific IP packet, and the intelligence security of the IP transfer network can be improved. The IP encapsulation and inverse IP encapsulation described in the embodiment of the present invention are replaced with the encapsulation and inverse encapsulation of the communication layer below 3 layers, for example, it can be replaced with the light HDLC code frame according to the communication layer 2 layer Capsules and inverse capsules. In addition, the headers given in the encapsulation and inverse encapsulation do not include the address and location of the transmission end. In other words, the simple encapsulation and the simple inverse encapsulation of the simple header may be applied. Even in simple encapsulation, an address management table having the same function as the user in encapsulation and decapsulation is used. This is illustrated in Figure 357. Block 2300 is an IP communication network, 230 1, 2,302, 2303, and 2304 are point devices, 230 1-1, 2302-1, 2303_1, and 2304-1 are various address management tables, 230, 2, 230 1 -3, and 2302. -2, 2302-3, 2303-2, 2303-3, 2304-2, and 2304-3 series communication circuits are connected to the terminals (logical terminals) of the node j, which are respectively assigned internal addresses " IA1 ", &Quot; I a 2 ,,, " IA3 "," A4 ", " IA5 ", " IA6 ", " U7 "," U8 ". 2307-7 2306-8 is an IP terminal with the function of sending and receiving IP packets, and its sub-medicine address " EA1 " to "EA8". 23〇7] to 23〇7 一 4:

網點裝置與路由器係經由ϋ彳古雷攸 ^ ^ y ^ ^火1恭厶甶通乜電路,直接或經由路由器$ 接地被接續,則述終端係經由通信 置。在圖357的記栽中,IP的標頭部分係lp位;^身點裝 他項目則省略。 & + 5 兵 終端2306-1傳送具有送信端位址"eai 、受信端位址The branch device and the router are connected through the circuit, and are connected directly or through the ground of the router. Then the terminal is connected through the communication device. In the record of Figure 357, the header part of the IP is the lp bit; the items of the body and other items are omitted. & + 5 Ping terminal 2306-1 has the address of the sender " eai, the address of the recipient

1245997 五、發明說明(26) "ΕΑ3Π的IP封包2310,網點裝置230 1接收IP封包231〇時, 確認在輸入IP封包2310的通信電路終端的邏輯端子上被於 與的内部位址為” IA1”,IP封包2310的受信端外部位址為又 "EA3”,並檢索位址管理表230 1 -1的内部,檢索包含開始 的送信端内部IP位址為"ΙΑΓ、接下來的受信端外部 址為ΕΑ3的$己錄,進而調查在前述檢出的記錄内是否包 含IΡ封包2 3 1 0内的送信端外部I ρ位址為"ΕΑ丨”。 t 在本例中上·方起位址管理表23 0 1 -1的第1行的記錄為 "EA1、EA3、I Al、IA3",使用此記錄内部之位址"jA3,,, 、IΑ Γ係與前 也就是’因而 對IP封包2310 將簡易標頭授與IP封包2310,以形成内部封包231 3(簡易 膠囊化)。但是,簡易標投並不包含有送信端内部位址 "IA1”。前述被形成的内部封包2313係經由路由器23〇74 、2307-2,而到達網點裝置23〇2。網點裝置23〇2除去接收 到的内部封包2313之簡易標頭(簡易逆膠囊化),將依據前 述=到的外部IP封包“丨^與^封包231〇同一内容)送出給 通仏電路,IP終端2306-3接收IP封包2317。再者,位址管 理表2302 —1的第1行的記錄"EA3、EA1、IA3 述相反的方向按同樣的方法,轉送IP封包, 將IP封包從終端2306 — 3轉送至終端23〇6 —1。 肉沾在=裝置2301中進行簡易膠囊化時,叫-以 内的送k 外部丨P丨丨P A 1丨丨σ I 人1245997 V. Description of the invention (26) " EAA3Π's IP packet 2310, the network device 230 1 receives the IP packet 2310, and confirms that the internal address of the logical terminal of the communication circuit terminal that entered the IP packet 2310 is "" IA1 ", the external address of the trusted end of the IP packet 2310 is again " EA3", and retrieves the interior of the address management table 230 1 -1, and retrieves the internal IP address of the sending end including the beginning of the " ΙΑΓ, the next The external address of the trusted end is $ A record of ΕΑ3, and then it is investigated whether the aforementioned detected record contains an IP packet 2 3 10 and the external I ρ address of the sending end is " ΕΑ 丨 ". t In this example, the record in the first line of the address management table 23 0 1 -1 is " EA1, EA3, I Al, IA3 ", use the internal address of this record " jA3 ,,,, IA Γ is the same as before. Therefore, the IP packet 2310 is given a simple header to the IP packet 2310 to form an internal packet 2313 (simple encapsulation). However, the simple bidding does not include the internal address of the sender "IA1". The previously formed internal packet 2313 is routed to the network device 2302 via the routers 23074 and 2307-2. The network device 2302 Except for the simple header (simple reverse encapsulation) of the received internal packet 2313, the external IP packet "丨 ^ and ^ packet 231〇" according to the aforementioned = is sent to the communication circuit, and the IP terminal 2306-3 receives IP packet 2317. In addition, the record in the first line of the address management table 2302-1 " EA3, EA1, IA3, and the opposite direction, in the same way, forward IP packets, and forward IP packets from the terminal 2306-3 to the terminal 2306 -1. When the meat is contaminated in the device 2301 for simple encapsulation, it is called to send k within-outside 丨 P 丨 丨 P A 1 丨 丨 σ I person

Mm i m ^ EA1疋否包含於在位址管理表 230 1 -1内邛檢出的記錄内之檢查, = 中,位址管理表的二 鳊外部IP位址。又,對於位址管理表230 1 -1的各 1245997 五、發明說明(27) 記錄内之兩個外部I p位址(送信端丨p位址與受信端丨p位址) ’可適用簡易膠囊化技術,其係根據與後述位址罩幕 (address mask)技術相同的原理。 接著說明轉送IP封包的其他例子。終端2306-5傳送具 有送信端位址"E A 5"、受信端位址"E A 4 ”的I p封包2 3 1 2,網 點裝置2303接收IP封包2312時,確認被授與至輸入Ip封包 2312之通、電路終端的邏輯端子之内部位址為,ip 封包2312的受信端外部ip位址為”EA4,,,檢索位址管理表 23 0 3-1内部,並檢索開始的送信端内部Ip位址為"IA5,,的 記錄,在本例中,位址管理表2303 —丨的上方起第1行的記 錄 Mask7、ΕΑ7χ、ΙΑ5、ΙΑ7Π 與第2 行的記錄"jjask4、 EA4x、IA5、IA4相當,有關第1行的記錄,檢查罩幕 "Mask7”與外部IP封包2312内的受信端外部1?位址"EA4"的 "and"運算的結果,是否與第i行記錄内的受信端外部卯位 址"ΕΑ7χπ —致(下列(4)式),在本例中為不一致。接著有 關第2行的記錄,檢查受信端用外部Ιρ罩幕,,MasU"盥外 部IP封包2312内的受信端外部^位址"EA4 ”之,,andn演算的 結果,與第2行之記錄内受信端外部卯位址"ΕΑ4χ"是否一 致(下列(5 )式),在本例中為一致。Mm i m ^ EA1 Whether to include the check in the record detected in the address management table 230 1 -1, = 2, the external IP address of the address management table. In addition, for each 1245997 of the address management table 230 1 -1 V. Description of the invention (27) Two external I p addresses in the record (transmitting end 丨 p address and receiving end 丨 p address) The encapsulation technology is based on the same principle as the address mask technology described later. Next, another example of forwarding IP packets will be described. When the terminal 2306-5 transmits the IP packet 2 3 1 2 with the sending end address "EA 5" and the receiving end address "EA 4", and the network device 2303 receives the IP packet 2312, it confirms that it is granted to the input Ip. The internal address of the logical terminal of the packet 2312 and the logical terminal of the circuit terminal is, the external IP address of the trusted end of the ip packet 2312 is "EA4", and the internal address management table 23 0 3-1 is retrieved, and the starting sending end is retrieved Records with internal IP addresses of " IA5 ,, In this example, the first line of the address management table 2303 — the records of Mask7, ΕΑ7χ, ΙΑ5, ΙΑ7Π and the records of the second line " jjask4, EA4x, IA5, and IA4 are equivalent. For the record of the first line, check whether the mask "Mask7" and the external end 1 of the trusted end in the external IP packet 2312 "address" and "EA4" are calculated. The external address of the trusted end in the record in the i-line record "(ΑΑχχπ) (formula (4) below) is inconsistent in this example. Then, regarding the record in the second line, check that the trusted end is covered by the external Ip, MasU " Outside trusted IP ^ 2312 in external IP packet " EA4 In other words, whether the result of the andn calculus is consistent with the external address of the trusted end in the record in the second line ("EAA4χ") (formula (5) below) is consistent in this example.

If ("Mask7” and ”ΕΑ4” = "ΕΑ7χ”)· · ·⑷ Ιί (’丨 Mask4” and "EA4” = "EA4x”)· · ·(5) 在本例中上方起位址管理表23034的第2行之記錄為 "Mask4、EA4x、IA5、IA4”,使用此記錄内部之位址"U4" ’將簡易標頭授與IP封包2312 ’以形成内部封包2314(簡If (" Mask7 ”and” ΕΑ4 ”= " ΕΑ7χ”) · · · ⑷ Ιί ('丨 Mask4 ”and " EA4” = " EA4x ”) ·· (5) The upper position in this example The record of the second line of the address management table 23034 is "Mask4, EA4x, IA5, IA4", use the address inside this record "U4" "Give a simple header to the IP packet 2312" to form the internal packet 2314 ( simple

1245997 五、發明說明(28) ,易膠,囊化)。但是,前述簡易標頭不包含送信端内部位址 IA5 。前述形成的内部封包2314係經由路由器2307-3、 23G7 —4、2307 —2,到達網點裝置23 02。網點裝置2302除去 ^收^的内部封包2314的簡易標頭(簡易逆膠囊化),將依 前述得到的外部IP封包2318(與IP封包2312同一内容)送出 給通信電路’ IP終端23〇6 —4接收Ip封包2318。 接著’從終端2306-2被送出給終端2306-7的IP封包 2311 ’在網點裝置2301 一!中,使用位址管理表的第 2行的e錄π EA2、EA7、IA2、IA7",利用與前述同樣的方 法被簡易膠囊化,而變成内部膠囊2316,其經由路由器 、2307-2、2307-4,到達網點裝置2304,網點裝置 2304除去接收到的内部封包2316的簡易標頭(簡易逆膠囊 化)’將依前述得到的外部Ιρ封包2319(與Ιρ封包2311同一 内谷)送出給通信電路,Ιρ終端23〇6 — 7接收Ιρ封包2319。 再者’前述位址罩幕技術係與以圖3 51說明的位址罩 幕技術具相同的原理。做為利用簡易標頭之膠囊化與逆膠 囊化的其他例子,可使用根據MpLS技術之習知的MpLS標 圯。在此’ MPLS標記雖然包含有受信端内部位址,但不包 含送信端内部位址。 其次’從終端2306-9被送出給終端2306-8的IP封包 f 2321 ’在網點裝置2305中,使用位址管理表23051的第2 行的記錄"Msk8、EA8y、IA8”,利用與前述同樣的方法被 簡易膠囊化,而變成内部膠囊2322,其經由路由器2307 - 4 ’到達網點裝置2304,網點裝置23 〇4除去接收到的内部封1245997 V. Description of the invention (28), easy to glue, encapsulated). However, the aforementioned simple header does not include the internal address IA5 of the sender. The internal packet 2314 formed as described above reaches the network device 23 02 via the routers 2307-3, 23G7-4, and 2307-2. The network point device 2302 removes the simple header (simple reverse encapsulation) of the internal packet 2314 received, and sends the external IP packet 2318 (the same content as the IP packet 2312) obtained in the foregoing to the communication circuit 'IP terminal 23〇6 — 4 receives the IP packet 2318. Then “the IP packet 2311 sent from the terminal 2306-2 to the terminal 2306-7” is at the branch device 2301 one! In the second line of the address management table, eRecords EA2, EA7, IA2, IA7 " are simply encapsulated by the same method as above, and become the internal capsule 2316, which passes through the router, 2307-2, 2307. -4, arrived at the branch office device 2304, the branch office device 2304 removed the simple header (simple inverse capsuleization) of the received internal packet 2316, and sent the external Iρ packet 2319 (the same inner valley as the Iρ packet 2311) obtained as described above to the communication Circuit, Ip terminal 2306-7 receives Ip packet 2319. Furthermore, the aforementioned address mask technology has the same principle as the address mask technology described with reference to FIG. As another example of encapsulation and inverse encapsulation using a simple header, a conventional MpLS label based on MpLS technology can be used. Although the 'MPLS label contains the internal address of the receiving end, it does not include the internal address of the transmitting end. Next, 'the IP packet f 2321 sent from the terminal 2306-9 to the terminal 2306-8' is used in the branch device 2305, using the record of the second line of the address management table 23051 " Msk8, EA8y, IA8 " The same method is simply encapsulated and becomes the internal capsule 2322, which reaches the branch point device 2304 via the router 2307-4 ', and the branch point device 23 〇 removes the received internal seal

1245997 五、發明說明(29) 包2322的簡易標頭(簡易逆膠 IP封包2323(與IP封包232 1闾^化),將依刖述得到的外部 終端2306-8接收IP封包2319。一内容)送出給通信電路,1p 圖3 5 8係繪示在前述符总 (也稱内部碼框)的形式。前内囊/匕中被形成的内部封包 外—封包的形態述將簡易標頭授與 Ά ^ ^ ^ J 門易軚頭包含有受信端内部位址 及情報領域。但不包含谈彳古一 & ^ , -y ^ ^ , 达七鸲内邛位址。情報領域係包含 有關於内部封包之酬 人明戰眭域的情報(協定等)。接著,參月召 圖359與圖360,有關前沭符且脚真, 香 爹 有關月j边簡易膠囊化與逆膠囊化,說明其 他實施例。圖7係1?轉送網,2352一丨至 2352-7係具有外部IP位址"EA1"的終端,2353 —i至2353一7 係具有外部IP位址"EA2"的終端。至2354 —7係内部 封包(内部碼框)。2355-1至2355-7、2356-1至2356-7係網 點裝β置。2 35 9-1至2359-7係通信電路與網點裝置的接點 (邏輯端子),其被授與内部位址,,ΙΑ1"。2360-1至2360-7 係通信電路與網點裝置的接點(邏輯端子),其被授與内部 位址"ΙΑ2”。235 7-1 至2357-7、235 8-1 至2358-7 係位址管 <1 理表。若前述終端與網點裝置、網點裝置與其他的網點裝 置以通信電路連結,在終端與網點裝置之間傳送接收丨ρ封 包’在網點裝置之間則轉送前述内部封包(内部碼框)。 終端2352-1傳送具有送信端位址"ΕΑ1”、受信端位址 "ΕΑ2”的IP封包,網點裝置2355-1 —接收前述ip封包時, 就確認被授與輸入前述IP封包的通信電路終端的邏輯端子 之内部位址為"ΙΑ1Π,前述IP封包的受信端外部ip位址為1245997 V. Description of the invention (29) The simple header of the packet 2322 (Simple Reverse IP IP packet 2323 (which is equivalent to the IP packet 232 1)) will receive the IP packet 2319 according to the external terminal 2306-8 obtained as described below. A content ) Sent to the communication circuit, 1p Figure 3 5 8 is shown in the form of the preceding symbol (also called internal code frame). The inner packet formed in the front inner capsule / dagger The outer-packet morphology grants a simple header Ά ^ ^ ^ J Menyi bun contains the internal address of the trusted end and the information field. But it does not include Tan Yi Gu Yi & ^, -y ^ ^, up to the address of the Qiongyi. The field of intelligence includes information (agreements, etc.) concerning the internal envelope of the payer. Next, referring to Fig. 359 and Fig. 360, regarding the front anatomy and the feet are true, Xiang Da will explain other embodiments of the simple and inverse encapsulation on the side of the moon. Fig. 7 is a 1? Forwarding network, 2352-1 to 2352-7 are terminals having an external IP address " EA1 ", and 2353-i to 2353-7 are terminals having an external IP address " EA2 ". To 2354 —7 Internal packet (internal code frame). 2355-1 to 2355-7, 2356-1 to 2356-7 series point installation β. 2 35 9-1 to 2359-7 are the contact points (logic terminals) of communication circuits and network point devices, which are given internal addresses, ΙΑ1 ". 2360-1 to 2360-7 are the contacts (logic terminals) of communication circuits and network point devices, which are given internal addresses " ΙΑ2 ". 235 7-1 to 2357-7, 235 8-1 to 2358-7 Address management < 1 management table. If the aforementioned terminal is connected to the branch device, the branch device is connected to other branch devices by a communication circuit, and the terminal is transmitted and received between the terminal device and the branch device, the packet is forwarded between the branch devices. Internal packet (internal code frame). The terminal 2352-1 transmits an IP packet with a sender address " ΕΑ1 "and a recipient address " ΕΑ2", and the network device 2355-1—when receiving the aforementioned IP packet, it is confirmed to be The internal address of the logical terminal of the communication circuit terminal granting the input of the aforementioned IP packet is " ΙΑ1Π, and the external IP address of the trusted end of the aforementioned IP packet is

1245997 五、發明說明(30) f A2”,檢索位址管理表2357_i内部,檢索包含開始的送 ,信端"内部ip位址為” IA1",接著的受信端外部1?位址為、 jA2"的記錄。在本例中從位址管理表2357 —丨的上方 ,仃的,記錄為”EA2、IA1、IA2”,使用此記錄内部的位址 IA2’’ ,=簡易標頭授與前述IP封包,以形成内部封包 54-1(簡易膠囊化)。前述形成的内部封包2354 — ι經由通 仏電路而到達網點裝置2356-1。網點裝置2356- 1除去接收 内部封包2354-1的簡易標頭(簡易逆膠囊化),將依前 V传到的外部IP封包送出給通信電路,Ip終端2353 收前述還原的IP封包。 ⑴獲 ,終 =352 —2傳送具有送信端位址,,EA1"、受信端位址 ^ j ▲的封包,網點裝置2355-2 一接收前述1?封包時, 涊被授與輸入前述Ip封包的通信電路終端的邏輯端子 H部位址沒有㈣,前述IP封包的送信端外部IP位址為 ,受信端外部IP位址為,,EA2” ,檢索位址管理表 —内部。在本例中從位址管理表2357-2的上方起第i •·Τα2,,己錄膝為EA1、EA2、U2",使用此記錄内部的位址 二:簡易標頭授與前述1P封包,以形成内部封包 作雷攸(簡易、膠囊化)。前述形成的㈣封包2354一2經由通 ^丨沾向而到達網點裝置2356 —2。網點裝置2356 —2除去接收 到的内部封包2354-1的簡易;^ _ & #腹香几、 ^ 诚俨w λα μ J間勿铩頭(簡易逆膠囊化),將依前 沾&部IP封包送出給通信電路,1P終端2353一2則接 收還原的前述IP封包。 終端2352-3傳送具有送信端位址"EA1"、受信端位址1245997 V. Description of the invention (30) f A2 ", search the internal address management table 2357_i, search including the initial send, the terminal " internal IP address is" IA1 ", then the external address of the trusted terminal is, jA2's record. In this example, from the upper part of the address management table 2357 — 丨, the record is “EA2, IA1, IA2”, and the internal address IA2 in this record is used. = The simple header grants the aforementioned IP packet to An inner packet 54-1 is formed (easy encapsulation). The internal packet 2354 — ι formed as described above reaches the branch point device 2356-1 via the communication circuit. The network point device 2356-1 removes the simple header (simple inverse encapsulation) of the internal packet 2354-1, and sends the external IP packet transmitted according to the previous V to the communication circuit, and the IP terminal 2353 receives the aforementioned restored IP packet. Captured, final = 352—2 sends a packet with a sender address, EA1 ", a trusted address ^ j ▲, and the network device 2355-2 Upon receiving the aforementioned 1? Packet, 涊 is granted the input of the aforementioned IP packet The address of the logical terminal H of the communication circuit terminal is not ㈣. The external IP address of the sending end of the aforementioned IP packet is, and the external IP address of the receiving end is, EA2 ”. The address management table—internal is retrieved. In this example, from From the top of the address management table 2357-2, i. · Tα2, the recorded record is EA1, EA2, U2 ", use this record's internal address two: the simple header grants the aforementioned 1P packet to form an internal packet Act as Lei You (simple, encapsulated). The previously formed ㈣ packets 2354-2 reach the outlet device 2356-2 through communication. The outlet device 2356-2 simplifies the removal of the received internal packet 2354-1; ^ _ &# 腹 香 几, ^ Sincerely w λα μ Do n’t scratch your head (simple inverse capsuleization), and send the IP packet according to the previous & part to the communication circuit, and the 1P terminal 2353-2 receives the restored aforementioned IP packet. The terminal 2352-3 transmits the address with the sending end " EA1 " End address

1245997 五、發明說明(31) "EA2"的㈣包’網點裳置2355_3 一接收前述ιρ封包 就確認被授與輸入前述邝封包的通信電路終 時, 之内部位址沒有關係,前述ip封包的受信端外部 "EA2",檢索位址管理表2357M内部,接著 為 端外部IP位址為"EA2"的記錄。在本例中從位址管理 2357-1的上方起第1行的記錄為"EA2、U2",使用此 内部的位址”IA2” ’將簡易標頭授與前述! = 内部封包2354_3(簡易膠囊化)。前述形成的内部封包成 2354-3經由通信電路而到達網點裝置2356_3。網點 2356-1除去接收到的内部封包2354 3的 \ 膠囊化),將依前述得到的外部Ip封包送出^頭逆 IP終端2 353-3則接收前述Ip封包。 、。kb電路’ 終端2352-4傳送具有送信端位,丨ea〗”1245997 V. Description of the invention (31) " EA2 " ㈣ 包 '网 裳 置 2355_3 As soon as the aforementioned ιρ packet is received, it is confirmed that the communication circuit that has been input into the aforementioned 终 packet has no relation to the internal address. "EA2" outside the trusted end retrieves the inside of the address management table 2357M, and then records the external IP address of the end as "EA2". In this example, the record of the first line from the top of the address management 2357-1 is " EA2, U2 ", using this internal address "IA2" 'The simple header is given to the aforementioned! = Internal packet 2354_3 ( Easy capsuleization). The previously formed internal packet 2354-3 reaches the branch point device 2356_3 via the communication circuit. The network point 2356-1 removes the encapsulation of the received internal packet 2354 3), and sends the external IP packet obtained as described above to the ^ header inverse IP terminal 2 353-3 receives the aforementioned IP packet. . kb circuit ’terminal 2352-4 transmission has a transmitting end bit, 丨 ea〗”

Up封包,網點裝置235“接收前述“::位二 認被授與至輸入前述IP封包之通信電時確 "内部位址為"IA1"’前㈣封包的受信端外邏輯:子之 EA2",檢索位址管理表2355_4内部,檢 4址為 内部IP位址為"IA1"的記錄,在本例中,位信端Up packet, network device 235 "receives the aforementioned" :: bit two acknowledges that the communication telegram that was input to the aforementioned IP packet is confirmed " internal address is " IA1 " EA2 " retrieves the internal address management table 2355_4, checks the record where the internal IP address 4 is "IA1", in this example, the bit end

= 57-4的上方起第1行的記錄相當於"MsU EA2X、IA1、IA2",開始時,有 Alx、Msk2、 ” Msk2"與前述輸入的外部Ip封有包關内第檢 ” EA2"的"and"演算的結果,是卜。PIP位址 :部,位址一致(下列(6);),4錄 用外部IP罩幕"MSkl"與前述外部㈣包内的二The record of the first line from the top of 57-4 is equivalent to "MsU EA2X, IA1, IA2", and at the beginning, there are Alx, Msk2, "Msk2", and the external input IP with the aforementioned input is enclosed within the customs inspection "EA2" The result of " and " calculus is bu. PIP address: Ministry, the address is the same (the following (6);), 4 adopted external IP mask " MSkl "

1245997 五、發明說明(32) IP位址"EA1"之"and"演算的結果’與 7位址是否-致(下列⑺式),/=1245997 V. Description of the invention (32) Whether the IP address " EA1 " of the result of the calculation and the 7 address are the same (the following formula), / =

If ("Msk2" and "EA2” = "EA2x") · · · “、If (" Msk2 " and " EA2 "= " EA2x ") · · ·",

If ("Mskl” and "EA1” = "ΕΑΙχ") ····(? 在本例中為上方起位址管理表2357一4的 —^ 錄’使用此記錄内部之位址” IA2",將 二2 f 外部”封包’以.形成内部封包2354_4(簡易膠=與則: :成= 由通信電路到達網點裝二6 符易= 接收到的内部封包235“的 ^易私易逆膠囊化)’將依前述得到的外部ιρ封包送 出給通k電路,IP終端2353-4接收前述IP封包。 終端235 2-5傳送具有送信端位址"EA1,,、 子,與刚述終端235 2-4傳送具有送信端位址"EA1,,、 端?址12"的IP封包的例子類似,其不同點為沒有進‘ 受信端外部IP罩幕與前述外部1?封包内的受信 址間的"and"演算,其他則相同。 終端2352-6傳送具有送信端位址"EA1"、受信端位址 "EA2"的IP封包,而網點裝置2355_6接收前述Ip封包的例 子,與前述終端2352-4傳送具有送信端位址"Eu"、受信 端位址12"的IP封包的例子類似,其不同點為沒有對被 授與至輸入前述IP封包的通信電路終端的邏輯端子之内部 位址進行確認,其他則相同。If (" Mskl ”and " EA1” = " ΕΑΙχ ") ···· (? In this example, the address management table 2357-4 from the top— ^ Record 'Use the internal address of this record " IA2 ", the two 2 f outer "packets" to form an inner packet 2354_4 (simple glue = and then:: Cheng = arrive at the outlet from the communication circuit to install two 6 characters easy = received internal packet 235 " (Inverse encapsulation) 'will send the external IP packet obtained in the foregoing to the communication circuit, and the IP terminal 2353-4 receives the aforementioned IP packet. Terminal 235 2-5 transmits the address with the sending end " EA1 ,,,, and just The terminal 235 2-4 transmits an IP packet with the sending end address "EA1 ,,, and the terminal address 12". The difference is that it does not enter the external IP mask of the trusted end and the aforementioned external 1 packet. The calculation between the "and" of the trusted address is the same as the others. The terminal 2352-6 transmits the IP packet with the sending address "EA1" and the trusted address "EA2", and the network device 2355_6 receives the aforementioned IP packet. Example, with the aforementioned terminal 2352-4 transmitting the address with the sending end " Eu & quot The example of the IP packet with the trusted end address 12 " is similar, except that the internal address of the logical terminal of the communication circuit terminal which is granted to the input of the aforementioned IP packet is not confirmed, the others are the same.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

第36頁 1245997 五、發明說明(33) 終端2352*"7傳送具有送信端位址,,EA1"、受信端位址 EA2”的」P封包,而網點裳置235"接收前述㈣包的例 =,與,刖述終端2352-5傳送具有送信端位址”"、受信 G 上1?封包的例子類似,其不同點為沒有對被 ;=輸:前述1p封包的通信電路終端的邏輯端子之内部 位址進行確認,其他則相同。 發明之實施例 1卜明中,組合或變更揭示於本申請人之特願平 「ITU ^及^·—7共通線信號方式的電路接續方法、 ιτυ-τ建議H323 ANNEXD準據的JT—H323 閘道」、「sip ίϊΪ」、及特許第3084681號的實施例中的若干功能 $,奸+入媒體路由器、閘道、1 Ρ網路服務運用管理伺服 序、、ϋ 二體地規疋媒體路由器及閘道的構成與動作程 的# = /使用媒體路由器及閘道的終端間通信之IP封包 實規U網路服務運用管理伺服器應該具有的機能等, ^轉送網為前提的終端間通信接續控制方法。 個ip^tf特願平11 一1 28956號,統合IP轉送網包含複數 網、τ P敫:,也就是至少2個以上的1 p資料網、1 p電話 、IP次技:影像網、盡力而為網(best effort network) 網點Ϊ二二點發送網、1P baSe TV廣播網、及網點裝置,· 個以2沾糸經由通信電路而被接續至1 P轉送網中之任何一 電路而,他方網點裝置之網點裝置端子則經由通信 电峪而被接續至統合ΙΡ轉送網的外部之終端。 在本發明中,統合ΙΡ轉送網在其内部包含i個以上的1245997 on page 36 5. Description of the invention (33) The terminal 2352 * " 7 transmits a "P" packet with a sender address, EA1 " and a trusted end address EA2 ", while the outlet receives 235 " Example =, and, the description of terminal 2352-5 transmitting with a sending end address "", 1? Packet on trusted G is similar to the example, the difference is that it is not addressed; = input: the aforementioned 1p packet of the communication circuit terminal The internal address of the logic terminal is confirmed, and the others are the same. In the first embodiment of the invention, the combination or change is disclosed in the applicant's wishing-to-know "ITU ^ and ^ · -7 common line signal circuit connection method, ιτυ -τ recommends some functions in the JT-H323 Gateway of the H323 ANNEXD standard "," sip ίϊΪ ", and the license No. 3086681. $ + Media router, gateway, 1P network service operation management Servo sequence, and two-body ground plan. Composition and action of media routers and gateways. # = / IP packet specification for communication between terminals using media routers and gateways. U network service operation management server should have Function, etc., ^ Transfer Network Inter-terminal communication connection control method premise. Each IP ^ tf special wish flat 11-1 28956, the integrated IP forwarding network includes a plural network, τ P 敫:, that is, at least 2 more 1 p data network, 1 p phone, IP secondary technology: video network, best effort For the best effort network, the 22-point transmission network, the 1P baSe TV broadcast network, and the network device, are connected to any one of the circuits in the 1 P transmission network via a communication circuit with 2 connections. The network terminal of the other network device is connected to the external terminal of the integrated IP transfer network via the communication cable. In the present invention, the integrated IP forwarding network includes more than i

1245997 五、發明說明(34)1245997 V. Description of Invention (34)

閘道,或是在其外部,經由接續至網點裝置的通信電路, 而直接被接續至1個以上的媒體路由器或是間接地接續至 LAN内部的媒體路由器。閘道及媒體路由器為具有直接接 續以收容I P終端、I P電話機、I P聲音影像裝置等的機能之 一種路由器。透過閘道或媒體路由器,及使用統合IP轉送 網内部的網域名稱伺服器,以遂行使用終端間之IP轉送網 的終端間通信之接續控制。為了將終端登錄記錄至I p轉送 網,至少一個終端的位址被記錄保持在網點裝置内部的位 址管理表或在設置於IP轉送網内的網域名稱伺服器上。為 了使通信事業者能一元化地管理該IP轉送網的運用管理及 IP轉送網提供的服務與路由器及通信電路等每一種網路資 源’在各IP轉送網的内部設置有丨p網路服務運用管理伺服 器0The gateway is either directly connected to more than one media router or indirectly connected to the media router inside the LAN via the communication circuit connected to the network device. The gateway and the media router are a type of router having a function of directly connecting to accommodate an IP terminal, an IP telephone, an IP audio-visual device, and the like. Through gateways or media routers, and using a domain name server within the integrated IP forwarding network, connection control between terminals using the IP forwarding network between terminals can be performed. In order to record the terminal registration to the IP forwarding network, the address of at least one terminal is recorded and maintained in the address management table inside the branch device or on a domain name server set in the IP forwarding network. In order to enable the communication operator to manage the operation and management of the IP forwarding network and the services provided by the IP forwarding network, routers and communication circuits, etc., each network resource is installed in each IP forwarding network. Management Server 0

IP網路服務運用管理伺服器的種類係由各IP轉送網加 以決定,例如可分別在丨P資料網内部設置總括管理丨p資料 通信的IP資料服務運用管理伺服器(DNS),在1?電話網内 部設置總括管理電話通信的IP電話服務運用管理伺服器 (TES),在IP聲音影像網内部設置總括管理聲音影像通信 的ip聲音影像服務運用管理伺服器(AVS),在盡力而為網 内部设置總括管理盡力而為通信的盡力而為服務運用管理 伺服器(BES ),在I p資料多點發送網内部設置總括管理! p 資料多點發送通信的IP資料多點發送服務運用管理伺服器 (DMS) ’在IP base TV廣播網内部設置總括管理Ip base TV廣播的IP base TV廣播服務運用管理伺服器(Tvs)。1?The type of IP network service operation management server is determined by each IP forwarding network. For example, the IP data service operation management server (DNS) can be set up in the data network separately. The IP telephone service operation management server (TES) that manages telephone communications is set up inside the telephone network, and the IP audio and video service operation management server (AVS) that manages audio and video communications is set up inside the IP audio and video network. Internally set up management for best effort and best effort for communication. Use a management server (BES) to set up overall management for the IP data multicast network! p IP data multicast service operation management server (DMS) for data multicast communication ’An IP base TV broadcast service operation management server (Tvs) is provided inside the IP base TV broadcast network to manage Ip base TV broadcasts. 1?

12459971245997

五、發明說明(35) 轉送網的每個服務i室田# 送網提供的網服器可分為專門管理各1?轉 資调沾:, 務 服務伺服器,及專門管理網路 貝源的網路運用管理伺服器。 以下,參照圖式說明本發明之實施例。 1 ·使用媒體路由器的第1實施例 ^在圖3中,2是統合1P轉送網、3是IP資料網、4是IP雷 =、、祠:5-、1是ip聲音影像網、5 —2是盡力而為網、6 —丨是通 。二司X運用管理之IP轉送網的範圍、6一2是通信公司Y 用言理之IP轉送網的範圍。7 -1、7-2、7-3、7-4、8〜1、 8 2、8-3、8-4為各種網點裝置,及9 — 2為閘道, 〜10-8為通信電路,u —卜丨卜^為^終端,12 —丨及^^為 獨立型IP電話機,13 —i〜13 —4為非獨立型Ip電話機,H卜 16-4係非獨立型ip聲音影像裝置。 網點裝置經由通信電路而接續至lp轉送網之任一個 上,也就是IP資料網3、IP電話網4、IP聲音影像網卜1、 盡力而為網5 - 2之任何一個以上的網路上,另一方面,網 點裝置經由通信電路1〇-1至丨〇-8 ,接續至統合Ip轉送網外 部的IP終端11-1及11-2獨立型IP電話機丨2-1及丨2 — 2、媒體 路由器14-1及14-2、LAN15-1及15-2等。媒體路由器14一3 及14-4係被設置在LAN15-1及LAN15-2的内部,間接地被接 續至網點裝置上。媒體路由器14-1〜14-4係直接地接續以 收容非獨立型IP電話機13-1、13-2、13-4,非獨立型1?聲 音影像裝置16-1、16-2、16-3,類比電話機18-1至丨8 —4。 又,其他的類比電話機18-5及18-6係經由公眾交換電V. Description of the invention (35) Each service of the transfer network Muruo Tian # The network servers provided by the transfer network can be divided into specialized management services, transfer service transfer services, and service management servers, and specialized network management Network operation management server. Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 · The first embodiment of using a media router ^ In FIG. 3, 2 is an integrated 1P transfer network, 3 is an IP data network, 4 is an IP mine =,, temple: 5-, 1 is an ip audio and video network, 5 — 2 is a best effort network, 6 is a pass. The scope of the IP forwarding network managed by Division 2 X, 6-2 is the scope of the IP forwarding network used by communication company Y logically. 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 8 ~ 1, 8 2, 8-3, 8-4 are various outlet devices, and 9-2 are gateways, and ~ 10-8 are communication circuits , U — Bu 丨 Bu ^ is a ^ terminal, 12 — 丨 and ^ ^ are independent IP telephones, 13 — i ~ 13 — 4 are non-independent IP telephones, and H 16-4 is a non-independent IP audio and video device. . The branch device is connected to any one of the lp transfer network via the communication circuit, that is, the IP data network 3, the IP telephone network 4, the IP audio and video network BU1, and the best-effort network 5-2. On the other hand, the branch network device is connected to the IP terminals 11-1 and 11-2 independent IP telephones outside the integrated IP transfer network via communication circuits 10-1 to 丨 -8 — 2 and 2 — 2. Media routers 14-1 and 14-2, LAN 15-1 and 15-2, and so on. The media routers 14-3 and 14-4 are installed inside LAN15-1 and LAN15-2, and are indirectly connected to the branch device. Media routers 14-1 to 14-4 are directly connected to accommodate non-standalone IP phones 13-1, 13-2, 13-4, and standalone 1? Audiovisual devices 16-1, 16-2, 16- 3. Analog telephones 18-1 to 8-4. Also, other analog telephones 18-5 and 18-6 are exchanged by the public.

12459971245997

話網26-1及26-2,而被接續至閘道^丨及^?。閘道91係 經由通信電路而被接續至網點裂置8_4,閘道9_2係經由通 信電路而被接續至網點裝置7 - 4。 五、發明說明(36) 19 1 19-19係轉送各IP封包的路由器,26 — 1及26-2係 公眾交換電話網(以下稱「PSTN」)。媒體路由器14_丨係經 由通信電路10-1而被接續至網點裝置8_2,媒體路由器14_ 2係經由通k電路1〇-5而被接續至網點裝置,lan15-1 係經由通信電路丨〇-3而被接續至網點裝置8 4,LMl5 2係 經由通信電路1 〇 — 7而被接續至網點裝置γ — 4。Voice networks 26-1 and 26-2 are connected to the gateways ^ 丨 and ^ ?. The gateway 91 is connected to the branch node 8_4 through the communication circuit, and the gateway 9_2 is connected to the branch device 7-4 through the communication circuit. V. Description of the invention (36) 19 1 19-19 is a router that forwards all IP packets, and 26-1 and 26-2 are public switched telephone networks (hereinafter referred to as "PSTN"). The media router 14_ 丨 is connected to the network device 8_2 via the communication circuit 10-1, the media router 14_ 2 is connected to the network device via the communication circuit 10-5, and the lan15-1 is connected via the communication circuit 丨 0- 3 is connected to the network device 8 4 and LMl5 2 is connected to the network device γ-4 via the communication circuit 10-7.

類比電話機18-5係經由電話電路丨7 — 3、公眾交換電話 網26-1、電話電路17 —丨、閘道9 — i,而被接續至網點裝置 8 4,同樣地,類比電話機係經由電話電路I? — 4、公 眾交換電話網26-2、電話電路17_2、閘道9-2,而被接續 至網點裝置7-4。媒體路由器14-1係包含有路由器2〇_3、 接續控制部22-1、H323終端部23-1、SCN介面24-1,路由 器20-3被接續至接續控制部22-1,接續控制部22-1被接續 至H323終端部23-1,H323終端部23-1被接續至SCN介面 24-1。同樣地,媒體路由器14 —2包含有路由器2〇-4、接續The analog telephone 18-5 is connected to the network device 8 4 via the telephone circuit 丨 7-3, the public switched telephone network 26-1, the telephone circuit 17 丨, and the gateway 9-i. Similarly, the analog telephone is connected via Telephone circuit I? — 4. The public switched telephone network 26-2, telephone circuit 17_2, and gateway 9-2 are connected to the network device 7-4. The media router 14-1 includes router 20_3, connection control unit 22-1, H323 terminal unit 23-1, and SCN interface 24-1. Router 20-3 is connected to connection control unit 22-1, and connection control The part 22-1 is connected to the H323 terminal part 23-1, and the H323 terminal part 23-1 is connected to the SCN interface 24-1. Similarly, the media router 14-2 includes the router 20-4.

控制部22-2、H323終端部23-2、SCN介面24-2。 LAN15-1内部的路由器2〇 —丨係經由通信電路1〇_3而被 接續至網點裝置8-4。LAN 15-1係經由乙太網等LAN通信電 路’而被接續至IP終端11-4與媒體路由器14-3。又,媒體 路由器14-3係經由通信電路,而分別被接續至ιρ終端丨丨_5 、非獨立型IP聲音影像裝置16-2、類比電話機18_2。同樣The control unit 22-2, the H323 terminal unit 23-2, and the SCN interface 24-2. The router 20- inside the LAN 15-1 is connected to the branch point device 8-4 via the communication circuit 10_3. The LAN 15-1 is connected to the IP terminal 11-4 and the media router 14-3 via a LAN communication circuit 'such as Ethernet. In addition, the media router 14-3 is connected to the ιρ terminal 丨 __5, the non-independent IP audio and video device 16-2, and the analog telephone 18_2 via communication circuits. same

12459971245997

地,LAN15-2内部的路由器20-2係經由通信電路1〇 — 7而被 接、、、κ至網點裝置7-4。LAN 15-2係經由乙太網等lan通信電 路,而被接續至IP終端11-8與媒體路由器14一4。又,\某體 路由器14-4係經由通信電路,而分別被接續至Ip終端u_9 、非獨立型IP電話機13-4、類比電話機18 — 4。、The router 20-2 inside the LAN 15-2 is connected to the branch point device 7-4 via the communication circuit 10-7. LAN 15-2 is connected to the IP terminal 11-8 and the media router 14-4 via a LAN communication circuit such as Ethernet. In addition, \ some body router 14-4 is connected to the IP terminal u_9, the independent IP phone 13-4, and the analog phone 18-4 via communication circuits. ,

21 -1至21 -5係在通信公司X的管理範圍6-1與通信公司 Y的官理範圍6-2間,轉送ip封包的路由器。”―丨及” —?係 ATM網,27-3係光通信網,27-4係碼框中繼(frame relay ’ FR)交換網,做為用以轉送各種IP封包的高速幹線網的 實施例。再者,atm網及光通信網、碼框中繼交換網也可 用以做為統合I p轉送網的次I P網路的任何元件。 IP資料服務運用管理伺服器35-1、IP電話服務運用管 理飼服器36-1、IP聲音影像服務運用管理伺服器37-1、盡 力而為服務運用管理伺服器38 —丨係分別由通信公司X管理 ’而在通信公司X管理的網路範圍6 — 1的内部。又,I ρ資料 服務運用管理伺服器35-2、IP電話服務運用管理伺服器 36-2、IP聲音影像服務運用管理伺服器37-2、盡力而為服 務運用管理伺服器38-2係分別由通信公司γ管理,而在通 信公司Y管理的網路範圍6-2的内部。21 -1 to 21 -5 are routers that forward IP packets between the management range 6-1 of communication company X and the official range 6-2 of communication company Y. "— 丨 and" —? ATM network, 27-3 optical communication network, and 27-4 frame relay (FR) switching network are examples of high-speed trunk networks used to forward various IP packets. Furthermore, the ATM network, optical communication network, and code frame relay switching network can also be used as any component of the secondary IP network that integrates the IP transfer network. IP data service operation management server 35-1, IP telephony service operation management server 36-1, IP audio and video service operation management server 37-1, best effort service operation management server 38 — 丨 respectively by communication Company X manages' and is within the network range 6-1 of communication company X's management. In addition, Ip data service operation management server 35-2, IP telephone service operation management server 36-2, IP audiovisual service operation management server 37-2, and best effort service operation management server 38-2 are respectively Managed by communication company γ, and within the network range 6-2 managed by communication company Y.

統合IP轉送網2的外部經由通信電路接續的各種多媒 體終端,也就是IP電話機與^聲音影像裝置,與其他的lp 終端相同,統合IP轉送網2的内部之所在位置可經由做為 多媒體終端識別用的位址之主機名稱加以特定。丨p終端與 多媒體終端的主機名稱與在網際網路上使用的電腦主機名Various multimedia terminals connected to the outside of the IP forwarding network 2 via communication circuits, that is, IP telephones and audio and video devices are the same as other lp terminals. The location inside the integrated IP forwarding network 2 can be identified as a multimedia terminal. Specify the host name of the address.丨 The host name of the terminal and the multimedia terminal and the host name of the computer used on the Internet

1245997 五、發明說明(38) 稱相同,對應附加於授斑夂T p攸*山β夕 ”细a々—丄興各1 P終‘及多媒體終端之I P位 1 ° 發明中,授與IP電話機與IP聲音影像 裝置的電話號碼被用r耸曰&像 名稱。 又電話機與1p聲音影像裝置的主機 網域名稱飼服器(以下稱「DNS」)保 位址的1:1對應情報,复主 β a八主要機忐為一提示主機名稱就回 善IP位址,並具有與網際網路上使用的同樣的機能。 IP資料網的溥用的網域名稱伺服器30_ 續至通信公司X管理的網點梦罟夕T P次制A丄 刃蜩點裝置之IP資料網中使用的1?終 t11:3 M卜1、u—4 ]卜6等,保有被授與各終端的主機 名稱與IP位址的1:1對應附加情報,又,Ip資料網的專用 的網域名稱伺服器30-4,對於在被接續至通信公司γ管理 的網點裝置之IP資料網中使用的1?終端η—7、ι卜2、m 等,保有被授與各終端的主機名稱與Ip位址的ι:ι對應附 加情報。 IP電話網的專用的網域名稱伺服器3 i —丨,對於在被接 續至通信公司X管理的網點裝置之IP電話網中使用的非獨 立型IP電話機13-1、13-3及類比電話機18 —丨、18 — 2、丨8一5 <1 等,保有被授與該等電話機的主機名稱(電話號碼)與”位 址的1:1對應附加情報,又,IP電話網的專用 飼服器31-2,對於在被接續至通信公司¥管理的網點裝置 之IP電話網中使用的非獨立型IP電話機13_2、 3、18-4、18-6等,保有被授與該等電話機的主機名稱 (電話號碼)與IP位址的1 : 1對應附加情報。1245997 V. Description of the invention (38) It is the same, and it corresponds to the IP address of the multimedia terminal T pyou * 山 β 夕 "々—々 兴 丄 1 P terminal 'and the IP address of the multimedia terminal 1 ° In the invention, the grant IP The phone numbers of the telephone and the IP audio and video device are suffixed with & like names. And the host computer domain name of the telephone and the 1p audio and video device is provided with the 1: 1 correspondence information of the reserved address (hereinafter referred to as "DNS"). The eight main machines of the complex master β a recover the IP address as soon as the host name is prompted, and have the same functions as those used on the Internet. Used domain name server 30 of the IP data network Continue to the network data managed by the communication company X. The network is managed by the IP data network of the TP system A. The t11: 3 Mbu 1, u-4] Bu 6, etc., which holds additional information of 1: 1 correspondence between the host name and IP address of each terminal, and a dedicated domain name server 30-4 of the IP data network. The 1? Terminals η-7, ι2, m, etc. used in the IP data network of the network device managed by the communication company γ have additional information corresponding to the host name and ip address of the IP address granted to each terminal. A dedicated domain name server 3 i — 丨 for the IP telephone network, for non-standalone IP telephones 13-1, 13-3, and analog telephones used in the IP telephone network connected to the branch office equipment managed by the communication company X 18 — 丨, 18 — 2, 丨 8-5 < 1, etc., with additional information corresponding to the host name (phone number) and “address 1: 1” of the IP phones, and dedicated to the IP phone network The feeder 31-2 holds the non-standalone IP telephones 13_2, 3, 18-4, 18-6, etc. used in the IP telephone network connected to the network device managed by the communication company ¥. The host name (telephone number) of the telephone corresponds to 1: 1 of the IP address for additional information.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

12459971245997

五、發明說明(39) 2影像網的專用的網域名稱飼服器32-1,對於在被 理的網點裝置之1p聲音影像網中使用 …^〖右:二:“象裝置“—卜獨立型卯聲音影像裝置 與該等ΙΡ聲音影像裝置的主機名稱(ιρ 二二衫像裝置號碼)與115位址的1:1對應附加情報,又,ιρ 曰影像網的專用的網域名稱伺服器32_2,對於在被接續 司Υ管理的網點裝置之聲音影像網中使用的非獨 聲音影像濃置16-3、16-4等,保有被授與該等即聲 /衫像裝置的主機名稱(IP聲音影像裝置號碼)與1{5位址的 1 : 1對應附加情報。 盡力而為網的專用的網域名稱伺服器334,對於在被 接續至通信公司X管理的網點裝置之盡力而為網中使用的 IP終端11-5、非獨立型ip聲音影像裝置16_2等,保有被授 與該等終端的主機名稱與IP位址的丨:1對應附加情報, 又’盡力而為網專用的網域名稱伺服器33_2,對於在被接 續至通信公司Y管理的網點裝置之盡力而為網中使用的】p 終端11-9、11-10、非獨立型1?電話機13_4等,保有被授 與該等終端的主機名稱與IP位址的1 : 1對應附加情報。 其次’參照圖4及圖5,說明本發明之主要元件-—媒體 路由器與閘道的基本功能。 SCN終端機能802-0、變換機能803-0、終端機能804 - 0 包含有各種前述的SCN終端機能802、變換機能803、終端 機能804所具有的機能。可從類比電話機41-3經由SCN電路 40-1而輸入的聲音及影像信號,被變換為SCN終端機能 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第43頁 1245997 802-0中的數位資料信號,在變換機能“[ο中的資料形式 與信號送受規則被改變,然後在終端機能8〇4 — 〇中被變換 成IP封包的形式,而被送出給IP通信電路4〇-2。又,反向 的流程’也就是包含從IP通信電路4〇 — 2輸入的聲音及影像 資料的IP封包,在終端機能804-0中被回復為數位資料的 形式’在變換機能803-0中資料形式及信號送受規則等被 改變,在SCN終端機能8〇2-0中變換為在SCN電路中流動的 信號’然後經由SCN電路40-l被傳送給類比電話機41-3。V. Description of the invention (39) 2 Dedicated domain name feeder 32-1 of the video network, for use in the 1p audiovisual network of the managed network device ... ^ [Right: II: "Like device"-Bu The host name of the independent type audio and video device and the IP audio and video device (ιρ 22 shirt image device number) corresponds to the 1: 1 115-address additional information, and ιρ is the dedicated domain name server of the video network The device 32_2 holds the host name of the non-single sound and video density 16-3, 16-4, etc. used in the sound and video network of the point device managed by the connected company ( IP audio and video device number) and 1 {1 of 5 addresses correspond to additional information. The dedicated domain name server 334 of the best-effort network, for the best-effort IP terminals 11-5, non-independent IP audio and video devices 16_2, etc., which are connected to the network device managed by the communication company X, The host name and IP address of these terminals that are granted are: 1: 1 corresponding additional information, and a best-effort network-specific domain name server 33_2, which is connected to the network device managed by the communication company Y. Best-efforts used in the network] p-terminals 11-9, 11-10, non-standalone 1? Telephones 13_4, etc., have 1: 1 additional information corresponding to the host names and IP addresses granted to these terminals. Next, referring to Figs. 4 and 5, the basic functions of the main components of the present invention-the media router and the gateway-will be described. The SCN terminal function 802-0, the conversion function 803-0, and the terminal function 804-0 include various functions of the aforementioned SCN terminal function 802, the conversion function 803, and the terminal function 804. The audio and video signals that can be input from the analog phone 41-3 via the SCN circuit 40-1 are converted into SCN terminal functions 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 43 1245997 802-0 digital data signals The data format and signal transmission and reception rules in the conversion function "[ο are changed, and then converted into the IP packet form in the terminal function 804--0, and sent to the IP communication circuit 4-2. In addition, the reverse The process 'that is, the IP packet containing the audio and video data input from the IP communication circuit 40-2 is restored to the form of digital data in the terminal function 804-0' The data form and signal in the conversion function 803-0 The sending and receiving rules and the like are changed, converted into signals flowing in the SCN circuit in the SCN terminal function 80-2-0, and then transmitted to the analog telephone 41-3 via the SCN circuit 40-1.

SCN介面24-〇包含有SCN終端機能802-0及變換機能〇。 H323終端4 23-〇包含有終端機能804-0,由於終端機能 804-0包含前述H323終端機能,H323終端部23-〇可經由終 端41 - 2及通k電路40 - 5進行對向通信。在本發明中使用的 多媒體終端41-2係依據H323規格的IP電話機與1?聲音影像 裝置等。 / 接續控制部2 2 - 0經由通信電路4 〇 - 2而被接續至η 3 2 3終 端部23-0 ’並經由電路40-3而被接續至路由器20-〇。路由 器2 0-0係經由通信電路40-4而被接續至網點裝置41-4, 又,經由通信電路40_6而被接績至IP終端41-1。在通信電 路40-2上,流通著做為呼叫控制資料的ip封包81〇,做為The SCN interface 24-0 includes SCN terminal function 802-0 and conversion function 0. The H323 terminal 4 23-〇 includes the terminal function 804-0. Since the terminal function 804-0 includes the aforementioned H323 terminal function, the H323 terminal section 23-〇 can perform opposite communication through the terminal 41-2 and the k-circuit 40-5. The multimedia terminal 41-2 used in the present invention is an IP telephone set based on the H323 standard and a 1-audio and video device. / The connection control unit 2 2-0 is connected to the η 3 2 3 terminal unit 23-0 ′ via the communication circuit 4 0-2 and is connected to the router 20-0 via the circuit 40-3. The router 2 0-0 is connected to the branch point device 41-4 via the communication circuit 40-4, and is connected to the IP terminal 41-1 via the communication circuit 40_6. On the communication circuit 40-2, an ip packet 810, which is used as call control data, is circulated as

構成聲音的實際資料之IP封包811與做為構成影像的督!^ 資料之IP封包812。 貫際 呼叫控制資料係包含電話號碼與個人電腦等的主機名 稱。一方面,在通信電路4〇-3上流通的IP封包43(圖5)係 用以得到將主機名稱通知DNS以回答詢問的資料形式,The IP packet 811 of the actual data constituting the sound and the IP packet 812 of the data constituting the supervisor! ^. Kanji call control data includes host names such as phone numbers and personal computers. On the one hand, the IP packet 43 (FIG. 5) circulating on the communication circuit 40-3 is used to obtain the data format in which the host name is notified to the DNS to answer the query.

1245997 五、發明說明(41) 就是MS詢問應答形式,例如可採用rfc1 996(a Mechanism for Prompt Notification of Zone Changes) 。 DNS詢問 應答機能42係將H323形式呼叫控制資料810變換為DNS詢問 應答形式資料43,具有詢問DNS以取得對應於主機名稱的 IP位址的機能。再者,構成聲音的丨p封包8丨1與構成影像 的IP封包812係穿透地通過接續控制部42。在總結上述說 明時’從類比電話機41-3輸入的電話號碼係在SCN介面 24-0上被變更為激位的電話號碼,以輸入至H323終端部 23-0,或者從H323形式的lp電話機41-2輸入之根據⑽“規 格的多媒體終端之電話號碼與主機名稱,做為H323形式呼 叫控制資料810以輸入H323終端部23-0,兩者的電話號碼 係在通信電路40-2上的H323形式呼叫控制資料810,其經 由接續控制部22-〇被變換為DNS詢問應答形式43。再者, 從IP終端41 -1被送出的呼叫控制資料係採用原來的DNS詢 問應答形式,由於不須要使用接續控制部22 — 〇的機能,故 而被直接接續至路由器20_0。在此,路由器2〇-〇收集通信 電路40-3與40-6,同時使ip封包透過。再者,構成Ip封包 811與812内的聲音與影像之實際的資料沒有受到變更而通 過接續控制部22-〇的内部。ip封包係經由電路4〇 — 4在網點 裝置41-4與路由器2〇-〇間被傳送接收。 做為DNS詢問應答的具體例,當Ip電話機上被授與電 話號碼” 81 -47-325-3897,,及IP 位址"192· 1· 2· 3"時,若詢 "問DNS電話號碼"81一47一325一3897„,則1)化會回答1{)位址 192·1·2·3Π,或是當IP終端之個人電腦上被授與主機名1245997 V. Invention description (41) is the MS inquiry response form, for example, rfc1 996 (a Mechanism for Prompt Notification of Zone Changes) can be used. The DNS query response function 42 converts H323 format call control data 810 into a DNS query response format data 43 and has a function of querying DNS to obtain an IP address corresponding to a host name. Furthermore, the p-packet 8 and 1 constituting the sound and the IP packet 812 constituting the image pass through the connection control unit 42 penetratingly. When summarizing the above description, the phone number entered from the analog phone 41-3 was changed to the phone number on the SCN interface 24-0 to be entered into the H323 terminal unit 23-0, or from an H323-type lp phone. 41-2 Enter the phone number and host name of the multimedia terminal according to the "Specifications" as H323 call control information 810 to enter H323 terminal section 23-0. The phone numbers of the two are on the communication circuit 40-2. H323 format call control data 810 is converted to DNS query response format 43 by the connection control unit 22-〇. Furthermore, the call control data sent from the IP terminal 41-1 uses the original DNS query response format. It is necessary to use the function of the connection control unit 22-0, so it is directly connected to the router 20_0. Here, the router 20-0 collects the communication circuits 40-3 and 40-6 and transmits the IP packet at the same time. Furthermore, it constitutes an IP packet The actual data of audio and video in 811 and 812 are not changed and pass through the connection control unit 22-〇. The ip packet is transmitted between the branch device 41-4 and the router 2-0 through the circuit 40-4. Receive. As a specific example of DNS query response, when an IP phone is given a phone number "81 -47-325-3897," and the IP address " 192 · 1,2 · 3 ", if the inquiry " Ask the DNS phone number "81-47-325-3897", then 1) will answer 1 {) address 192 · 1 · 2 · 3Π, or be given a host name on the personal computer of the IP terminal

12459971245997

稱"hostl· dnamel· dname2· co· jp,,及IP 位址"128· 3· 4· 5,, 時’若5旬問〇^主機名稱"|1〇81:1.(111311161.(111311162.00·』、", DNS會回答此個人電腦的Ιρ位址"128· 3. 4· 5”。 IP終端41-1、多媒體終端41-2、類比終端41 - 3經由在 其間傳送接收I P封包,而可以通信。換言之,丨p終端4丨〜i 透過經由路由器20-〇、接續控制部22-〇、H323終端部23-〇 與多媒體終端41-2傳送接收ip封包,而可能相互通信。 <<媒體路由器的動作>>Call "hostl · dnamel · dname2 · co · jp", and IP address "128 · 3 · 4 · 5", when 'if you ask at 5 o'clock host name " | 1〇81 : 1. (111311161 . (111311162.00 · "," The DNS will answer the Ip address of this personal computer "128 · 3.4 · 5". The IP terminal 41-1, the multimedia terminal 41-2, and the analog terminal 41-3 pass between them. It is possible to communicate by transmitting and receiving IP packets. In other words, 丨 p terminal 4 丨 ~ i transmits and receives ip packets through the router 20-〇, the connection control section 22-〇, the H323 terminal section 23-〇, and the multimedia terminal 41-2. It is possible to communicate with each other. ≪ < Action of media router > >

本發明之媒體路由器14-1的動作以圖6加以說明。媒 體路由器14-1的元件之1的路由器20-3具有圖4之路由器 2 0-0的機能,圖6之接續控制部22-1具有圖4之接續控制部 22 - 0的機能,圖6之H323終端部23-1具有圖4之H323終端部 23-0的機能,圖6之SCN介面24-1具有圖4之SCN介面24-〇的 機能。圖6之48-1係具有與前述之DNS相同的機能。RAS機 構4 9 -1係連至媒體路由器1 4 -1的終端的登錄與認證(其意 思分別為登錄係指將終端接續至媒體路由器,認證係指根 據終端的接續許可條件確認終端是否正常地被使用)及管 理媒體路由器的内部狀態(例如一元化地管理内部構成元 件與其利用狀態)的機構,51 -1係媒體路由器1 4 -1的操作 輸出入部。從而,圖6之媒體路由器14-1的接續控制部 22 -1、H323終端部23-1、SCN介面24-1的各項機能就依照 有關圖4之接續控制部22-0、H323終端部23-0、SCN介面 24-0的說明加以說明。 << IP終端間的通信接續控制〉〉The operation of the media router 14-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The router 20-3 of the component 1 of the media router 14-1 has the function of the router 2 0-0 of FIG. 4, and the connection control section 22-1 of FIG. 6 has the function of the connection control section 22-0 of FIG. 4, and FIG. 6 The H323 terminal section 23-1 has the function of the H323 terminal section 23-0 of FIG. 4, and the SCN interface 24-1 of FIG. 6 has the function of the SCN interface 24-0 of FIG. 48-1 of FIG. 6 has the same function as the aforementioned DNS. The RAS organization 4 9 -1 is connected to the media router 1 4 -1 for login and authentication of the terminal (which means that the login refers to connecting the terminal to the media router, and authentication refers to confirming whether the terminal is normally working according to the terminal's connection permission conditions Used) and a mechanism for managing the internal state of the media router (such as the unified management of internal components and their use status), the 51 -1 is the operation input / output section of the media router 1 4 -1. Therefore, the functions of the connection control unit 22-1, the H323 terminal unit 23-1, and the SCN interface 24-1 of the media router 14-1 of FIG. 6 are in accordance with the connection control unit 22-0 and the H323 terminal unit of FIG. The description of 23-0 and SCN interface 24-0 will be explained. < < Communication connection control between IP terminals >>>

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第46頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 46 1245997

接下來,參照圖6、圖7及圖8〜圖14,從IP終端n—3將 儲存於IP封包之資料傳送給IP終端n — 7,並說明接收信號 的%序。I P終端11 - 3經由通信電路5 2 —;[,將自己的位址, 也就是送信端IP位址"Α113π、媒體路由器14 —丨内部的網域 名稱伺服器48-1的位址,也就是受信端1{>位址"Α481"、儲 存通信對象的IP終端11-7的主機名稱"ΐρΤ—丨卜7 name"之 圖9所示的IP封包45-1,傳送給網域名稱伺服器“—丨。在 ,此,IP封包45-1户斤示的詢問内容,也就是"IpT—n —7 name :係被儲存於圖5所示之"DNS詢問應答形式,,内的,,詢問部 。網域名稱伺服器48-1檢查接收到的封包45-丨的内容 ,經由通信電路1 0-1,透過網點裝置8 —2詢問Ip資料網的 專用的網域名稱伺服器30 —丨(步驟ST1〇)。當網域名稱伺服 器30-1將包含1:1對應於前述主機名稱"IpT-n_7 name"的 IP位址"All 7"之IP封包送回給網域名稱伺服器48-丨時(步 驟STii),網域名稱伺服器48 — "fIP封包45—2送回給1?終 端11-3。在以上所述的程序中,網點裝置8 — 2參照圖8的位 址管理表44-1,檢查接收到的IP封包“Η所包含的送信端 位址’’All 3"是否登錄於位址管理表中。在本例中,由於在 位址管理表44-1上起第2行的記錄中,外部1?位址為” Aln ",通信電路識別記號"Li — "表示/通二= 入的IP封包,確認I P終端11 — 3可經由網點裝置進行通信的 許可登錄。再者,在未被登錄在位址管理表44 —丨的情況 中,網點裝置8-2可廢棄接收到的ip封包454。 其-人’當IP終端11-3產生傳送給ip終端的ip封包Next, referring to Fig. 6, Fig. 7 and Fig. 8 to Fig. 14, the data stored in the IP packet is transmitted from the IP terminal n-3 to the IP terminal n-7, and the% sequence of the received signal is explained. The IP terminal 11-3 passes the communication circuit 5 2 —; [, sets its own address, that is, the IP address of the sender " A113π, the address of the internal domain name server 48-1 of the media router 14-, That is, the receiving end 1 {> address " Α481 ", the host name of the IP terminal 11-7 storing the communication object " ΐρΤ— 丨 7 name " of the IP packet 45-1 shown in FIG. 9 is transmitted to The domain name server "— 丨. Here, the content of the inquiry indicated by the IP packet 45-1 households, that is," IpT-n —7 name: "is stored in the" DNS inquiry response shown in Figure 5 " Format, internal, and inquiry. The domain name server 48-1 checks the contents of the received packet 45- 丨, and inquires the dedicated IP data network via the communication circuit 1 0-1 and the network device 8-2. Domain name server 30 — (step ST1〇). When the domain name server 30-1 will contain an IP address corresponding to the aforementioned host name " IpT-n_7 name " When the IP packet is returned to the domain name server 48- 丨 (step STii), the domain name server 48 — " fIP packet 45-2 is sent To 1? Terminal 11-3. In the procedure described above, the network device 8-2 refers to the address management table 44-1 of FIG. 8 and checks the received IP packet "the address of the sender included in the packet". All 3 " Whether registered in the address management table. In this example, since the address in the second line from the address management table 44-1, the external 1? Address is "Aln ", the communication circuit identification code " Li — " means / 通 二 = 入IP packet, confirms that the IP terminal 11-3 can be registered for communication via the branch device. Furthermore, when it is not registered in the address management table 44- 丨, the branch device 8-2 can discard the received IP. Packet 454. Its-Person 'when IP terminal 11-3 generates an IP packet transmitted to IP terminal

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第47頁 1245997 45-3 ,並經由路由器20-3傳送給網點裝置8-2時,若網點 裝置8-2係將此IP封包45-3轉送給統合Ip轉送網1的内部, IP封包45-3通過圖3的^資料網3的内部之通信電路與複數 路由器,也就是路由器19-1、19 —3、21y、194、19_6, 而到達網點裝置7-2。於是,網點裝置7 — 2將接收到的ιρ封 包45-3送出給圖7所示的通信電路1〇-5(步驟ST12),路由 器20-4接收IP封包45-3,經由通信電路52 — 2轉送給Ip終端 11 -7。當接收IP.封包45-3的IP終端11—7產生回信用的1?封 包45-4,並經由通信電路送出給路由器2〇-4時,其經由通2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 47 1245997 45-3, and transmitted to the network device 8-2 via router 20-3, if the network device 8-2 forwards this IP packet 45-3 to the unified IP Inside the transfer network 1, the IP packet 45-3 passes through the internal communication circuit and the multiple routers of the data network 3 in FIG. -2. Then, the network device 7-2 sends the received lp packet 45-3 to the communication circuit 10-5 shown in FIG. 7 (step ST12), and the router 20-4 receives the IP packet 45-3, and via the communication circuit 52- 2 is forwarded to the IP terminal 11-7. When the IP terminal 11-7 receiving the IP. Packet 45-3 generates a 1? Packet 45-4 with a credit back, and sends it to the router 2-0 through the communication circuit, it passes the communication

化電路1 0 - 5 (步驟ST 1 3 )、並經由網點裝置7_ 2、統合I p轉 送網2的内部之I P資料網3而到達網點裝置8 — 2,然後經由 通信電路10-1 ’圖12所示的ip封包45-4被送到IP終端 11-3。依照以上的程序,IP終端丨丨—3與1{>終端丨丨―7間可經 由傳送接收IP封包而進行通信。 ' 在來自以上所述的IP終端之通信程序中,可從媒體路 由器14-1移除媒體路由器内的網域名稱伺服器“―丨。此 時’ IP終端11-3將儲存送信端ip位址"A1丨3”、ip資料網專 用的網域名稱祠服器3 〇 -1的I p位址"a 3 0 1 "、與通信對象的 IP終端11-7的主機名稱”ιρτ-11-7 name"之IP封包45-5傳Circuit 1 0-5 (step ST 1 3), and through the branch point device 7_ 2, the integrated IP data transfer network 3 in the IP transfer network 2 reaches the branch point device 8-2 and then passes through the communication circuit 10-1 ' The IP packet 45-4 shown in 12 is sent to the IP terminal 11-3. According to the above procedure, IP terminals 丨 丨 -3 and 1 {> terminals 丨 丨 -7 can communicate by transmitting and receiving IP packets. 'In the communication procedure from the IP terminal described above, the domain name server in the media router "-1" can be removed from the media router 14-1. At this time, the IP terminal 11-3 will store the sender's ip bit Address " A1 丨 3 ", the IP address of the domain name dedicated server of the IP data network 3 〇-1 IP address " a 3 0 1 ", and the host name of the IP terminal 11-7 with the communication target" ιρτ-11-7 name " IP packet 45-5 transmission

送給網域名稱伺服器3 〇 -1。網域名稱伺服器3 〇 —丨送回包含 1:1對應於"IPT 11-7 name"的IP位址,,A117"之IP封包 45_6。再者’移除媒體路由器内的網域名稱飼服器My, 藉以可直接存取網域名稱伺服器3 〇 - 1的技術,可依照關於 網域名稱伺服器的習知技術加以實現。To the domain name server 3 0 -1. The domain name server 3 〇— 丨 sends back the IP packet 45_6 containing the 1: 1 corresponding IP address corresponding to "IPT 11-7 name", A117 ". Furthermore, the technology of removing the domain name server My in the media router, so as to directly access the domain name server 3 0-1, can be implemented in accordance with the conventional technology of the domain name server.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第48頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 48 1245997

當前述步驟ST11結束時,Ip終端n —3&amp;u —7為可以準 備開始通信的狀態,網點裝置8 — 2檢出ιρ封包45 —2盥45_6 時,IP終端間通信記錄,也就是1?終端n—3與11)終端n_7 間的通信記錄與其時刻,若有必要,m同時在内部記錄保 &lt;〈非獨立型IP電話機間的通信接續控制〉〉When the foregoing step ST11 ends, the IP terminal n-3 &amp; u-7 is ready to start communication. When the network device 8-2 detects the ιρ packet 45-2 and 45-6, the IP terminal communication record is 1? Terminals n-3 and 11) The communication record between terminal n_7 and its time, if necessary, m also keeps an internal record at the same time &lt; <control of communication connection between non-independent IP telephones >>

其次,說明撥電話號碼,從非獨立型lp電話機對 非獨立型IP電話義13 —2進行電話通信的程序。在此,”非 獨立型ip電話機&quot;指的是接續至媒體路由器丨、等 以進行通彳s的IP電話機,另一方面,„獨立型〖p電話機&quot;係 未接續至媒體路由器’而直接接續至網點裝置的圖3之j p 電話機12-1與12-2,其通信程序如後所述。 圖6之非獨立型ip電話機13-1係經由通信電路Μ — 〗而 被接續至H323終端部23-1,圖7的非獨立型IP電話機13一2 係經由通信電路53-2而被接續至H323終端部23-2。 當拿起非獨立型IP電話機13-1的送受話器時(離鉤), 圖15所示表示通知呼出的ip封包46 — 1被傳送至圖6所示的 通仏電路53-1上(圖6的步驟ST20),H323終端部23-1從通Next, a procedure for dialing a telephone number and performing telephone communication from a non-standalone lp phone to the stand-alone IP phone 13-2 will be described. Here, "non-independent IP phone" refers to an IP phone connected to a media router, etc. for communication. On the other hand, "independent IP phone is not connected to a media router" The jp telephones 12-1 and 12-2 of FIG. 3 which are directly connected to the branch device are described below. The non-independent IP phone 13-1 of FIG. 6 is connected to the H323 terminal section 23-1 via the communication circuit M —, and the non-independent IP phone 13-1 of FIG. 7 is connected via the communication circuit 53-2. To the H323 terminal section 23-2. When the receiver of the non-stand-alone IP phone 13-1 is picked up (off-hook), the IP packet 46-1 shown in FIG. 15 to notify the outgoing call is transmitted to the communication circuit 53-1 shown in FIG. 6 (Figure Step ST20 of step 6), H323 terminal unit 23-1

信電路53-1檢出輸入的呼出,並送回呼出確認的Ip封包 46 - 2(步驟ST21)。在此,被記載於ip封包46-1的酬載(資 料部分)上之&quot;CTL- Inf 〇_1 ’’係呼出控制情報,被記載於ip 封包46-2的酬載上之&quot;CTL-Inf0-2”係呼出確認情報。 當非獨立型IP電話機13-1的利用者撥號輸入通信對象 處之非獨立型IP電話機丨3-2的電話號碼時,在非獨立型IpThe letter circuit 53-1 detects the incoming call, and sends back the IP packet 46-2 of the outgoing call confirmation (step ST21). Here, the "CTL-Inf 〇_1" described in the payload (data part) of the ip packet 46-1 is the outgoing call control information and is described in the payload of the ip packet 46-2. "CTL-Inf0-2" is the call confirmation information. When the user of the non-independent IP phone 13-1 dials and enters the phone number of the non-independent IP phone at the communication destination 3-2, the non-independent IP phone

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第49頁 1245997 五、發明說明(46) 電話機13^1的内部產生包含通信對象處之電話號碼(,,Teh 13-2namen )與非獨立型Ip電話機H —丨的電話號碼及Ip位 址’例如H· 225規定的呼叫控制資料形式的Ip封包46 —3,2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 49 1245997 V. Description of the invention (46) The phone 13 ^ 1 internally generates a phone number (,, Teh 13-2namen) containing the communication target and a non-independent IP phone H —丨 phone number and IP address' for example, IP packet 46-3 in the form of call control data specified by H.225,

並經由通信電路53-1傳送至H323終端部23 —丨。但是,在Ip 封包4 6-3内部是否包含非獨立型1?電話機13-1的電話號碼 及1P位址則是選擇性的。H323終端部23-1從通信電路53-1 接收IP封包46-3,檢索圖30的媒體路由器狀態表丨〇〇-1内 部的6錄’以檢·出表示通信電路5 3 —丨的電路識別子,在本 例中就是檢出從媒體路由器狀態表丨〇 〇 一 i上起的第i行之記 錄’亦即&quot;53-Γ。其次,讀取被記於此記錄中之非獨立型 IP電話機13-1的電話號碼&quot;81-3 —1234-5679 &quot;及Ip位址&quot;32· 3.53.1&quot; ’又在ip位址及電話號碼未被包含於Ip封包463 時’將記載於媒體路由器狀態表的值設定於1?封包46 — 3, 即使在有關IP位址與電話號碼的情報被寫入時,若是值不 一致’則廢棄IP封包46_3以做為錯誤處理。在此,非獨立 型IP電話機13-1的IP位址的A131之具體數值為 &quot;32· 3· 53· Γ (步驟ST22)。Then, it is transmitted to the H323 terminal unit 23 — through the communication circuit 53-1. However, does the IP packet 4 6-3 contain the non-independent 1? The phone number of the telephone 13-1 and the 1P address are optional. The H323 terminal unit 23-1 receives the IP packet 46-3 from the communication circuit 53-1, and searches the media router status table of FIG. 30 for the 6 records' inside the 0-1-1 to detect and detect the circuit representing the communication circuit 5 3 —. The identifier, in this example, is to detect the record of the i-th row from the media router status table 001-i, that is, &quot; 53-Γ. Secondly, read the phone number of the dependent IP phone 13-1 recorded in this record "81-3 —1234-5679" and the IP address "32 · 3.53.1" again in the ip position When IP address and phone number are not included in IP packet 463, 'Set the value recorded in the media router status table to 1? Packet 46-3, even if the information about the IP address and phone number is written, if the values are not consistent 'The IP packet 46_3 is discarded for error processing. Here, the specific value of A131 of the IP address of the non-standalone IP phone 13-1 is &quot; 32 · 3 · 53 · Γ (step ST22).

其次,H323終端部23-1將儲存非獨立型1?電話機134 的位址’也就是送信端IP位址” Al31&quot;、網域名稱伺服器 48-1的位址,也就是受信端1?位址&quot;Α481&quot;、及通信對^處 電話號碼” Te卜13-2 name&quot;的IP封包46-4,傳送給圖6之媒 體路由器14-1内部的網域名稱伺服器48 —丨(步驟ST23)。網 域名稱伺服器48-1檢查接收到的IP封包46-4的内容,接著 經由通信電路10-1與網點裝置8-2,傳送給Ip封包46 —5仏Secondly, the H323 terminal unit 23-1 will store the address of the non-standalone 1? Telephone 134, which is the IP address of the sender "Al31", and the address of the domain name server 48-1, which is the receiver 1? The address &quot; Α481 &quot;, and the telephone number of the correspondent ^ "tebu 13-2 name" IP packet 46-4 is transmitted to the domain name server 48 inside the media router 14-1 of FIG. 6 — ( Step ST23). The domain name server 48-1 checks the content of the received IP packet 46-4, and then transmits it to the IP packet 46-5 via the communication circuit 10-1 and the network point device 8-2.

1245997 五、發明說明(47) IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器31-1(步驟ST24)。當IP電 話網專用的網域名稱伺服器31 _ 1將包含1 : 1對應於前述主 機名稱&quot;Tel-13-2 name”的IP位址,’ A1 32&quot;之IP封包送回給 網域名稱伺服器48-1時(步驟ST25),網域名稱伺服器48 -1 將IP封包46-6送回給H323終端部23-1。 其次,當H323終端部23-1產生傳送給H323終端部23-2 的IP封包46-7,經由路由器20-3傳送給網點裝置8-2時(步 驟ST26),網點裝置8-2將此IP封包46-7轉送給圖3之統合 IP轉送網2的内部,IP封包46-7係通過IP電話網4的内部之 路由器19-8、19 -9、21 - 2、19-11、19-13,而到達網點裝 置7-2。於是,網點裝置7-2將接收到的IP封包46 — 7送出給 通信電路10 -5,經由路由器20-4,H323終端部23-2接收IP 封包46-7。H323終端部23-2將IP封包46-7解釋為電話呼 出,而進行以下兩個手續。第i個手續是產品回信用1?封 包46-8,並送回給路由器20 —4,第2個手續是將Ip封包 46-7經由圖7所示的通信電路53 —2,轉送至非獨立型1? 話機13-2。 、參照圖7加以說明,根據第1手續產生的lp封包46 —8經 由通佗電路1〇-5(步驟ST27),並經由網點裝置7 —2及ip電 話網4,到達網點裝置8 —2,然後經由通信電路1〇-1到達路 由器20-3,再經由H323終端部23 —丨到達非獨立型Ip電話機 13 1。非獨立型ip電話機13 —丨經由接受”封包46 —8而解 為通信對象呼出中。 根據上述第2手續,非獨立型IP電話機13-2經由接收 1245997 五、發明說明(48) IP封包46-7而發出呼出鈴聲(啐屮1245997 V. Description of the invention (47) A domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network (step ST24). When the IP phone network dedicated domain name server 31_1 will contain an IP address corresponding to the aforementioned host name &quot; Tel-13-2 name &quot;, the IP packet of 'A1 32 &quot; will be returned to the domain When the name server 48-1 (step ST25), the domain name server 48-1 returns the IP packet 46-6 to the H323 terminal unit 23-1. Second, when the H323 terminal unit 23-1 generates and transmits it to the H323 terminal When the IP packet 46-7 of the unit 23-2 is transmitted to the network point device 8-2 via the router 20-3 (step ST26), the network point device 8-2 forwards this IP packet 46-7 to the unified IP forwarding network of FIG. 3 Inside 2, the IP packet 46-7 passes through the internal routers 19-8, 19 -9, 21-2, 19-11, 19-13 of the IP telephone network 4 and reaches the branch device 7-2. Therefore, the branch The device 7-2 sends the received IP packet 46-7 to the communication circuit 10-5, and receives the IP packet 46-7 via the router 20-4 and the H323 terminal unit 23-2. The H323 terminal unit 23-2 sends the IP packet 46 -7 is interpreted as a phone call, and the following two procedures are performed. The i procedure is the product credit back 1? Packet 46-8 and returned to the router 20-4, the second procedure is to pass the IP packet 46-7 through The communication power shown in Figure 7 Route 53-2 is transferred to the non-standalone 1? Phone 13-2. As described with reference to FIG. 7, the lp packet 46-8 generated according to the first procedure passes through the communication circuit 10-5 (step ST27), and via The branch point device 7-2 and the IP telephone network 4 reach the branch point device 8-2, and then reach the router 20-3 via the communication circuit 10-1, and then reach the non-independent IP phone 13 1 via the H323 terminal section 23-. The stand-alone IP phone 13 — is called as a communication target by receiving the “packet 46 — 8”. According to the second procedure described above, the non-standalone IP phone 13-2 sends an outgoing ring tone (啐 屮 by receiving 1245997 V. Description of the invention (48) IP packet 46-7 (啐 屮

的送受話器(離鉤)。於^非^獨/型IP電話機13一2 ^ . .R 〇 ^ s ^ 非獨立型IP電話機13-2產生IP 封包46-9並送出至電路53_2上(步驟ST28),h323終端部 23-2接收IP封包46-9,其經由網點裝置 達網點裝置8 —2,然後經由通信電路 成經由麗終端部2㈠至,j達非獨立型Ip電話機i3],以做 為通知電話通信料拿起非獨立型1{&gt;電%機13_2的送受話 f的聲音(應答)’並通知非獨立型1{5電話機13_丨的利用 者。 前述步驟ST28係將應答情報,也就是通知非獨立型1{&gt; j話機13-1與非獨立型IP電話機13_2間的電話通信開始的 IP封包46-9轉送的手續,當網點裝置7_2及82檢出ιρ封包 46 9時,可將電話通信開始記錄,也就是非獨立型π話 機13-1與非獨立型IP電話機13_2間之電話通信開始的事實 做為IP封包46-9的内容之一部分’例如送信端^位址受 =IP位,、送信端埠號、受信端埠號’以及其檢出時刻 保存在设定於網點裝置内部的收費記錄表上。 _田非獨立型Ip電話機1 3 -1的利用者開始電話通信的會 話時,非獨立型IP電話機13_i產生包含數位化聲音^ιρ封 包46-10,並送出給通信電路53-1(步驟ST29)。聲音封包 46-10經由H323控制部23-1、路由器20-3、網點裝^卜^、 路由器19-8、19-9、2卜2、19-11、19-13、網點、裝置7_2 、路由器20-4、H323終端部23-2,而到達非獨立型1?電話 第52頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997Receiver (off-hook). On the non-stand-alone / type IP phone 13- 2 ^. .R 〇 ^ s ^ The stand-alone type IP phone 13-2 generates an IP packet 46-9 and sends it to the circuit 53_2 (step ST28), and the h323 terminal unit 23- 2 receives the IP packet 46-9, which reaches the branch device 8-2 via the branch device, and then passes through the communication circuit to the non-independent IP phone i3 through the terminal section 2], as a notification telephone communication material to pick up The non-independent type 1 {& the voice (response) of the call f by the electric machine 13_2 ', and notify the user of the non-independent type 1 {5 telephone 13_ 丨. The foregoing step ST28 is a procedure for transferring the response information, that is, the notification of the start of the IP packet 46-9 of the telephone communication between the non-standalone 1 {&gt; j phone 13-1 and the standalone IP phone 13_2. When the branch device 7_2 and When the ιρ packet 46 is detected at 82, the telephone communication can be recorded, that is, the fact that the telephone communication between the non-independent π telephone 13-1 and the non-independent IP telephone 13_2 has started as the content of the IP packet 46-9. A part of 'e.g. sender ^ address receive = IP bit, sender port number, receiver port number' and its detection time are stored on the charge record table set in the outlet device. _When a user of a non-standalone IP phone 1 3 -1 starts a communication session, the stand-alone IP phone 13_i generates a packet 46-10 containing a digitized voice ^ ιρ and sends it to the communication circuit 53-1 (step ST29 ). The sound packet 46-10 passes through the H323 control unit 23-1, the router 20-3, the outlet installation ^ bu ^, the router 19-8, 19-9, 2bu 2, 19-11, 19-13, the outlet, and the device 7_2, Router 20-4, H323 terminal unit 23-2, and reach the non-independent 1? Phone page 52 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997

^13-2。非獨立型1?電話機13_2的使用者 y封包46-n,以與上述相反的流程,也=立由化 H323控制部23-2、路由器20-4、網點裝置7 —2、路 叫3、19-&quot;、2卜&quot;、網點裝置由 器20-3、H323控制部23-1 ,而到達非獨立型1?電話 13-1(步驟ST30)。 當非獨立型IP電話機13-丨的使用者結束電話通信而放 回送受話器時,·非獨立型IP電話機13 —丨產生表示電話通信 結束的IP封包46-12,並送出給通信電路53 —丨(步驟ST31) 。IP封包46-12係經由H323控制部23-1、路由器2〇-3、網 點裝置8-2、路由器19-8、19-9、21-2、19-11、19-13、 網點裝置7-2、路由器20-4、H323終端部23-2,而到達非 獨立型IP電話機13-2。當非獨立型ip電話機13 — 2的使用者 知道電話通信結束而放回送受話器時,產生並送出Ip封包 46-13,以與上述相反的流程,也就是經由H323控制部 23-2、路由器20-4、網點裝置7-2、路由器19-13、19-11 、21-2、19-9、19-8、網點裝置8-2、路由器20-3,而到 達H323控制部23-1 (步驟ST32)。 前述步驟ST32係轉送呼叫切斷的確認情報,也就是通 知非獨立型IP電話機與非獨立型Ip電話機13_2間的電 話通彳§結束的IP封包46-13的手續,當網點裝置8-2與7-2 檢出IP封包46-13時,可將電話通信結束記錄,也就是非 獨立型IP電話機13-1與非獨立型ip電話機13-2間之電話通 k結束的事實做為I p封包4 6 _ 1 3的内容之一部分,例如送^ 13-2. The user y packet 46-n of the non-stand-alone type 1 telephone 13_2, in the opposite process, also stands for the H323 control unit 23-2, the router 20-4, and the network device 7-2, and the call is 3, 19- &quot;, 2 &quot;, the outlet device router 20-3, the H323 control unit 23-1, and reach the non-independent 1-phone 13-1 (step ST30). When the user of the non-stand-alone IP phone 13- 丨 ends the telephone communication and returns the receiver, the non-stand-alone IP phone 13 — 丨 generates an IP packet 46-12 indicating the end of the phone communication and sends it to the communication circuit 53 —丨 (Step ST31). IP packet 46-12 is transmitted through H323 control unit 23-1, router 20-3, branch device 8-2, router 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11, 19-13, and branch device 7 -2, router 20-4, H323 terminal unit 23-2, and reach non-independent IP phone 13-2. When the user of the independent IP phone 13-2 knows that the telephone communication is over and returns the receiver, an IP packet 46-13 is generated and sent out, which is the reverse flow from the above, that is, via the H323 control unit 23-2 and the router 20-4, branch point device 7-2, router 19-13, 19-11, 21-2, 19-9, 19-8, branch point device 8-2, router 20-3, and reach H323 control section 23-1 (Step ST32). The foregoing step ST32 is to forward the confirmation information of call disconnection, that is, the procedure for notifying the completion of the IP packet 46-13 of the telephone communication between the non-independent IP phone and the non-independent IP phone 13_2. When the branch device 8-2 and 7-2 When IP packet 46-13 is detected, the telephone communication end record, that is, the fact that the telephone communication between the independent IP telephone 13-1 and the independent IP telephone 13-2 ends, is taken as I p Part of the contents of packet 4 6 _ 1 3, such as sending

1245997 五、發明說明(50) 信端I P位址、受信端I P位址、送信端埠號、受信端埠號, 以及其檢出時刻保存在設定於網點裝置内部的收費記錄表 上。 按照以上的程序’非獨立型I P電話機丨3 -丨與非獨立型 I P電話機1 3 - 2間經由傳送接收I p封包,可進行電話通信。 在以上所述的通信程序中,由媒體路由器丨4 一丨移除媒 體路由器内的網域名稱伺服器48-1,也可將前述步驟ST23 至ST25,置換成以下所述的步驟3723叉至ST25x。換言之, H323終端部23-1將儲存非獨立型ip電話機13-1的位址,也 就是送信端IP位址n A1 3 Γ、IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服 器31 -1的位址,也就是受信端I p位址” A3 1 Γ、及通信對象 處電話號碼&quot;Tel-13-2 name”的IP封包46-14,經由通信電 路1 0 -1及網點裝置8 - 2,傳送給IP電話網專用的網域名稱 伺服器31-1 (步驟ST23x)。網域名稱伺服器31-1將包含有 1 : 1對應於通信對象處電話號碼&quot;Tel-13-2 name,,之IP位址 &quot;A132&quot;的IP封包46-15送回給H323終端部23-1(步驟ST25x) 〇 在以上所述之步驟ST23至ST25,或是步驟ST23x及 ST 2 5x的手續中,網點裝置8-2透過檢查包含於經由通信電 路10_1接收到的IP封包46-5中之送信端位址&quot;Α48Γ與通信 電路識別記號” Line-10-厂的組合,是否有登錄於位址管 理表44-1(圖8)上,或者,網點裝置8-2透過檢查包含於經 由通信電路1 0-1接收到的IP封包46-14中之送信端位址 ”Α1 31&quot;與通信電路識別記號&quot;Line-10-1”的組合,是否有1245997 V. Description of the invention (50) The IP address of the receiver, the IP address of the receiver, the port number of the sender, the port number of the receiver, and the detection time are stored on the charging record table set in the outlet device. According to the above procedure, a non-stand-alone IP phone 3-1-丨 and a non-stand-alone IP phone 1 3-2 can receive and transmit IP packets by transmitting and receiving telephone packets. In the above-mentioned communication procedure, the domain name server 48-1 in the media router is removed by the media router 4-1, and the foregoing steps ST23 to ST25 can also be replaced with the steps 3723 described below. ST25x. In other words, the H323 terminal unit 23-1 will store the address of the independent IP phone 13-1, that is, the IP address of the sender n A1 3 Γ, and the address of the domain name server 31 -1 dedicated to the IP telephone network. That is, the IP packet 46-14 of the IP address "A3 1 Γ" of the receiving end and the telephone number "Tel-13-2 name" of the communication destination passes through the communication circuit 1 0 -1 and the network point device 8-2. Transfer to the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network (step ST23x). The domain name server 31-1 returns an IP packet 46-15 containing the IP address &quot; Tel-13-2 name &quot; corresponding to the telephone number of the communication destination &quot; A132 &quot; to the H323 terminal. Unit 23-1 (step ST25x) 〇 In the above steps ST23 to ST25, or steps ST23x and ST 2 5x, the branch device 8-2 checks to include the IP packet 46 received through the communication circuit 10_1. -5 The combination of the sender's address &quot; Α48Γ and the communication circuit identification mark "Line-10-factory is registered in the address management table 44-1 (Figure 8), or the branch device 8-2 Check whether the combination of the sender address "Α1 31" and the communication circuit identification code "Line-10-1" contained in the IP packet 46-14 received through the communication circuit 1 0-1 is present.

Η 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第54頁 1245997 五、發明說明(51) 登錄於位址管理表44-1(圖8)上,非獨立型IP電話機13 -1 由通信電路1 0-1經由網點裝置8_2的通信被許可,也就是 確認”通信許可登錄”。 &lt;&lt;獨立型IP電話機間的通信接續控制&gt;&gt; 由於圖6的非獨立型IP電話機13-1包含有H3 23終端部 23-1的終端功能,非獨立型Ip電話機丨3 —丨可與接續控制部 22-1 —體化。因此,圖31的獨立型1?電話機12-丨内部的非 獨立型IP電話機1 3- 11經由通信電路直接被接續至接續控 制部22-11。通信電路1〇 —4從接續控制部22-11接出,被接 續至圖3的網點裝置8-4。獨立型ip電話機12Μ與獨立型” 1話機12-2可進行傳送接收1?封包的 2非獨立體電話機13]及非獨立型lp電話機 = 封包以進行電話通信的步驟ST2Q 3 相冋。此外,不同的第1點是由·“ 域名稱伺服器48-1不存在,故而奸 口 &lt;内的網 48-1,而將步驟ST23與步驟ST24顏=::名稱伺服器 ^ ^323 ^ ^ # 3 # # ^ ^ H323終端部“―丨及“^的部分置2为不存在,而將此等 電路。 矣為可通過1p封包的通信 &lt;〈非獨立型IP聲音影像裝 » 與非獨立型1P聲音影像裝置間 其次,經由從非獨立型聲 此通信程序係與非獨Η 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 54 1245997 V. Description of the invention (51) Registered in the address management table 44-1 (Figure 8), the non-stand-alone IP phone 13 -1 by the communication circuit 1 0- 1Communication via the branch device 8_2 is permitted, that is, "communication permission registration" is confirmed. &lt; &lt; Control of communication connection between independent IP phones &gt; &gt; Since the non-stand-alone IP phone 13-1 of FIG. 6 includes the terminal function of the H3 23 terminal section 23-1, the non-stand-alone IP phone 丨 3 —丨 Can be integrated with the connection control unit 22-1. Therefore, the non-standalone IP phone 1 3- 11 inside the stand-alone 1? Telephone 12- 丨 of FIG. 31 is directly connected to the connection control section 22-11 via the communication circuit. The communication circuit 10-4 is connected from the connection control unit 22-11, and is connected to the branch point device 8-4 of FIG. The standalone IP phone 12M and the standalone "1 phone 12-2 can transmit and receive 1 packet 2 non-standalone phone 13] and the standalone lp phone = packet ST2Q steps for telephone communication 3 In addition, The first difference is that the "domain name server 48-1 does not exist, so the rape network is within the network 48-1, and step ST23 and step ST24 are colored = :: name server ^ 323 ^ ^ ^ # 3 # # ^ ^ H323 terminal part “― 丨” and “^” are set to 2 as non-existent, and these circuits are used.矣 Communication via 1p packets &lt; <non-independent IP audio and video equipment »and non-independent 1P audio and video equipment Secondly, the communication program

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第55頁2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 55

IP聲音影像裝置16-3傳送或接裝置16 —丨至非獨立型 封包可能實行識別装置之主機名稱封包,利用傳送接收IP 1245997 五、發明說明(52) 立型IP電活機1 3 -1與非獨立型丨p電話機丨3 _ 2使用丨p電話網 專用的網域名稱伺服器31-1的步驟ST2〇至步驟ST32相同。 其不同點為不使用I P電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器3丨一 i, 而使用圖7的I P聲音影像網專用的網域名稱伺服器3 2 — i, 以步驟ST44取代步驟ST24,並以步驟^45取代步驟”25。 非獨立型聲音影像裝置16 —丨係對Ip轉送網内部的ιρ影像影 像網域名稱伺服器324,詢問非獨立型聲音影像裝置16一2 的主機1稱,以取得非獨立型聲音影像裝置的1?位 =:接著,由於從非獨立型聲音影像裝置16_丨傳送聲音影 象資料給非獨立型聲音影像裝置16 — 2,而可在非獨立型聲 :影像裝置1 6-1與非獨立型聲音影像裝置16_2間,進行傳 送接收聲音影像資料的聲音影像通信。 &lt;〈獨立型IP聲音影像裝置與非獨立型ιρ聲音影像裝置間〉〉 由於圖6的非獨立型IP聲音影像裝置丨6 —丨包含H323終 垃^# — 1的終端機能,非獨立型1P聲音影像裝置16-1可與 穿置體化。因此,圖32的獨立型1P聲音影像 電ί直接型1P聲音影像裝置16 一12經由通信 =接被接續至接續控制部22 —12。 續控制部22-12接出,被接續至圖3的網點裝置8 —4。 =立型IP聲音影像裝置12一3與非立 可進行傳送接,封包的聲音影像通信聲; ί置Hi :P聲:影像裝置16-1及非獨立型1p聲音影像 32-1,@ # f音影像網的專用的網域名稱伺服器 ‘由傳送接收IP封包以進行聲音影像通信的步驟IP audio and video device 16-3 transmits or connects device 16 — to the non-independent type of packet. The host name packet of the identification device may be implemented, and IP 1245997 is transmitted and received. V. Description of the invention (52) Vertical IP electric machine 1 3 -1 Steps ST20 to ST32 are the same as those of the non-standalone 丨 p telephone 丨 3 _ 2 using the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the p telephone network. The difference is that instead of using the domain name server 3 i-i dedicated to the IP telephone network, the domain name server 3 2 — i dedicated to the IP audiovisual network of FIG. 7 is used, and step ST44 is used instead of step ST24, and Replace step "25 with step ^ 45. Non-independent audio and video device 16 — It refers to the ip image and video domain name server 324 inside the IP transfer network, and asks the host 1 of the non-independent audio and video device 16-2, To obtain 1 bit of the independent audio and video device =: Next, since the audio and video data is transmitted from the independent audio and video device 16_ 丨 to the independent audio and video device 16-2, : The video device 1 6-1 and the independent audio-visual device 16_2 perform audio-visual communication for transmitting and receiving audio-video data. &Lt; <between independent IP audio-visual device and non-independent audio-visual device >> Non-independent IP audio and video device of 6 丨 6 — 丨 Contains the terminal function of H323 terminal ^ # — 1. The non-independent 1P audio and video device 16-1 can be integrated with the wearer. Therefore, the independent 1P of FIG. 32 Audiovisual The connection type 1P audio and video device 16-12 is connected to the connection control section 22-12 via communication. The connection control section 22-12 is connected and connected to the network device 8-4 in FIG. 3. = Vertical IP audio and video Device 12-3 can communicate with the non-legislative, packetized audio and video communication sound; Hi: P audio: video device 16-1 and non-independent 1p audio and video 32-1, @ # f audio and video network dedicated Steps for sending and receiving IP packets for audio-visual communication

1245997 五、發明說明(53) ST20至步驟ST32相同。其不同點是由於媒體路由器14-1内 的網域名稱伺服器48-1不存在,故而不經由網域名稱伺服 器48-1,而將步驟ST23與步驟ST24視為一體的步驟。 透過將獨立型IP聲音影像裝置16-4接續至網點裝置 7-4 ’在獨立型聲音影像裝置丨2-3與獨立型聲音影像裝置 16-4間,經由網點裝置8-4、IP聲音影像網5-1、網點裝置 7-4,傳送接收ip封包可進行聲音影像通信。1245997 V. Description of the invention (53) ST20 to step ST32 are the same. The difference is that since the domain name server 48-1 does not exist in the media router 14-1, step ST23 and step ST24 are regarded as an integrated step without going through the domain name server 48-1. By connecting the independent IP audio and video device 16-4 to the network device 7-4 'between the independent audio and video device 丨 2-3 and the independent audio and video device 16-4, via the network device 8-4 and IP audio and video Network 5-1, network point device 7-4, transmitting and receiving ip packets can perform audio and video communication.

將獨立型IP·聲音影像裝置12-3視為販賣聲音影像商品 的聲音影像商品販賣公司的販賣裝置,將非獨立型丨p聲音 影像裝置16-3及獨立型IP聲音影像裝置16-4視為聲音影像 商品購買者的購買裝置,可以實現使用IP轉送網流通聲音 影像商品的假想市場。購買者根據聲音影像傳票,向販賣 公司e丁購聲音影像商品,販賣公司可傳送數位化的聲音影 像商品。 ” &lt;&lt;類比電話機間的通信〉〉 參照圖3、圖6、圖7、圖33至圖47,說明撥出電話號 碼,從一般的電話機,也就是類比電話機Μ — 〗,而非1?電 話機’對類比電話機1 8 - 3進行電話通信的程序。The independent IP audio and video device 12-3 is regarded as a sales device of an audio and video product sales company that sells audio and video products. It is a purchase device for purchasers of audiovisual products, which can realize an imaginary market where audiovisual products are distributed using an IP transfer network. The purchaser purchases audiovisual products from the sales company e based on the audiovisual subpoena, and the sales company can deliver digital audiovisual products. &Lt; &lt; Communication between analog telephones >> With reference to Fig. 3, Fig. 6, Fig. 7, and Figs. 33 to 47, a description will be given of dialing a telephone number. • Telephone 'is a program for telephone communication with analog telephones 18-3.

圖6的類比電話機18-1係經由通信電路^ —丨被接續至 SCN介面24-1,又圖7的類比電話機18-3係經由通信電路 5 5-2被接續至8(^介面24-2。當拿起類比電話機18-1的送 受話器時(離鉤),經由通信電路55 —丨韁呼出的類比信號送 出給SCN介面24-1 ’ SCN介面24-1將接收到的呼出信號變換 成數位資料形式。接著’變換此數位資料的傳送接收規則The analog telephone 18-1 of FIG. 6 is connected to the SCN interface 24-1 via a communication circuit, and the analog telephone 18-3 of FIG. 7 is connected to 8 (^ Interface 24- 2. When picking up the handset of the analog telephone 18-1 (off-hook), the analog signal sent out via the communication circuit 55 — 丨 缰 is sent to the SCN interface 24-1. The SCN interface 24-1 converts the received outgoing signal Into digital data form. Then 'transform the transmission and reception rules of this digital data

定類比信號送出給通信電路55-丨,Scn介面23-1使用&quot;呼叫 設定&quot;類比信號,以產生通知電話號碼的圖35之資料方塊 47-3’並送出給11323終端部23-1。在此,11323終端部23-1 1245997 發明說明(54) 等產^通知呼出之圖33所示的數位資料47_1,並輸入至 H323終端部23 —1(圖6的步驟ST60),H323終端部23-1將呼 出確認之圖34的數位資料47_2送回給SCN介面以—丨(步驟 ST61)。在此’數位資料^^内部的&quot;cTL-hfoq&quot;為呼出 控制情報’而數位資料47 —2内部的&quot;CTL-Inf 〇-2π為呼出確 逐情報。 其次’當類比電話機丨8 —丨的使用者撥號輸入通信對象 處的類比電話機18-3的電話號碼時,電話機18-1將呼叫設 檢索圖30的媒體路由器狀態表1〇〇—ι内部的記錄,以檢出 表示通信電路53-1的電路識別子,在本例中就是檢出從媒 體路由器狀態表100-1上起的第3行之記錄,亦即&quot;55-1&quot;。 其次’讀取被記於此記錄中之類比電話機丨8 —丨的電話號碼 1 81 -47-32 5-3887” 及IP 位址&quot;20· 〇· 55· Γ。在此,類比電 話機18-1的IP位址的&quot;Α18Γ之具體數值為&quot;20·〇·55·Γ (步 驟ST62)。 其次,Η323終端部23-1產生儲存假想地授與類比電話 機1 8-1的位址,也就是送信端ip位址” Α181”、媒體路由器 内的網域名稱伺服器48-1的位址,也就是受信端1?位址 Α481 、及通對象處電話號碼&quot;Tel -18-3 name&quot;的圖36 之IP封包47-4,並傳送給網域名稱伺服器48-1(步驟ST63) 。網域名稱祠服器48 -1檢查接收到的ip封包47-4的内容,The analog signal is sent to the communication circuit 55- 丨, and the Scn interface 23-1 uses the "call setting" analog signal to generate the data box 47-3 'of FIG. 35 to notify the telephone number and sends it to the 11323 terminal unit 23-1. . Here, the 11323 terminal unit 23-1 1245997 invention description (54) and other products ^ notify the outgoing call of the digital data 47_1 shown in FIG. 33 and input it to the H323 terminal unit 23-1 (step ST60 in FIG. 6), the H323 terminal unit 23-1 returns the digital data 47_2 of FIG. 34 to the SCN interface with a call confirmation (step ST61). Here, "cTL-hfoq" inside "digital data ^^ is used to call out control information" and "CTL-Inf 0-2π inside digital data 47-2" is called out to determine information. Secondly, when the user of the analog telephone 丨 8— 丨 dials and enters the telephone number of the analog telephone 18-3 at the communication destination, the telephone 18-1 will call the device to retrieve the media router status table 100-i in FIG. 30. Record to detect the circuit identifier representing the communication circuit 53-1. In this example, the record in the third line from the media router status table 100-1 is detected, which is &quot; 55-1 &quot;. Secondly, 'read the analog phone 丨 8 — 丨 phone number 1 81 -47-32 5-3887' recorded in this record and the IP address &quot; 20 · 〇 55 · Γ. Here, the analog phone 18 The specific value of "A18Γ" of the IP address of -1 is "20 · 55 · Γ" (step ST62). Secondly, the Η323 terminal unit 23-1 generates a bit storing a pseudo-granted analog phone 1 8-1. Address, which is the sender's IP address "A181", the address of the domain name server 48-1 in the media router, which is also the receiver 1? Address A481, and the telephone number of the communication destination &quot; Tel -18 -3 name &quot; IP packet 47-4 of FIG. 36 and transmits it to the domain name server 48-1 (step ST63). The domain name server 48-1 checks the contents of the received IP packet 47-4 ,

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第 58 頁 1245997 發明說明(55) 接著經由通信電路1 0 - 1與網點裝置8 - 2,傳送給I p封包 47-5給IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器31 —丨(步驟ST64)。 當IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器31 _丨將包含丨· i對 應於前述主機名稱” Tel-1 8-3 name&quot;的IP位址&quot;A183,,2Ip 封包47-6送回給網域名稱伺服器48-1時(步驟ST65),網域 名稱伺服器48-1將IP封包送回給H3 23終端部23-1。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 58 1245997 Description of the invention (55) Then through the communication circuit 1 0-1 and the network device 8-2 to IP packet 47-5 to the IP phone network dedicated domain name Server 31 — 丨 (step ST64). When the IP phone network dedicated domain name server 31 _ 丨 will contain the IP address corresponding to the aforementioned host name "Tel-1 8-3 name" "A183", 2Ip packet 47-6 will be returned to When the domain name server 48-1 (step ST65), the domain name server 48-1 returns the IP packet to the H3 23 terminal unit 23-1.

其次’當H323終端部23-1產生傳送給H323終端部23一2 的IP封包47-7,·經由路由器20-3傳送給網點裝置8 —2時(步 驟ST66),網點裝置8-2將此IP封包47-7轉送給圖3之统合 IP轉送網2的内部,IP封包47-7係通過IP電話網4的内部&quot;之 路由器19-8、19-9、21-2、19-11、19 —13,而到達網點裝 置7-2。於是,網點裝置7 —2將接收到的Ip封包47 — 7送出給 通信電路10-5,經由路由器20-4,H323終端部23-2接收^ 封包47-7。H323終端部23-2將IP封包47-7解釋為電話呼 出,而進行以下兩個手續。第i個手續是產生回信用Ip封 包47-8,並送回給路由器20-4,類比電話機18_3經由接收 IP封包47-7,發出呼出鈴聲(呼出音)。第2個手續是將卯 封包47-7經由SCN介面24-2,轉送給類比電話機18_3。 參照圖7加以說明,根據第!手續產生的lp封包〇 —8經 由通信電路10-5(步驟ST67),並經由網點裝置7 —2及卯電 話網4,到達網點裝置8 —2,然後經由通信電路ι〇 —丨到達路 由器20-3 ’再經由H323終端部23-1、SCN介面24-1,到逵 類比電話機18 —1。類比電話機18-1經由接受1?封包47 —R 解釋為通信對象呼出中。Secondly, when the H323 terminal unit 23-1 generates an IP packet 47-7 that is transmitted to the H323 terminal unit 23-2, and transmits it to the network device 8-2 via the router 20-3 (step ST66), the network device 8-2 sends This IP packet 47-7 is forwarded to the inside of the integrated IP forwarding network 2 in FIG. 3, and the IP packet 47-7 passes through the inside of the IP telephone network 4 &quot; routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19- 11, 19-13, and arrived at the outlet device 7-2. Then, the network point device 7-2 sends the received IP packet 47-7 to the communication circuit 10-5, and receives the packet 47-7 via the router 20-4 and the H323 terminal unit 23-2. The H323 terminal unit 23-2 interprets the IP packet 47-7 as a phone call, and performs the following two procedures. The i procedure is to generate a return credit IP packet 47-8 and send it back to the router 20-4. The analog phone 18_3 sends an outgoing ring tone (outgoing tone) via receiving the IP packet 47-7. The second procedure is to transfer the 卯 packet 47-7 to the analog phone 18_3 via the SCN interface 24-2. Description will be made with reference to FIG. The lp packet 0-8 generated by the procedure passes through the communication circuit 10-5 (step ST67), reaches the branch device 8-2 via the branch office device 7-2 and the telephone network 4, and then reaches the router 20 via the communication circuit ι〇- 丨-3 'and then to the analog phone 18-1 via the H323 terminal 23-1 and the SCN interface 24-1. The analog phone 18-1 interprets that the communication partner is calling out by receiving 1? Packet 47 —R.

1245997 五、發明說明(56) ---- 根據上述第2手續,類比電話機1 8-3的使用者聽到此 呼出音’拿起類比電話機18-3的送受話器(離鉤)。於是, H323終端部23-2產生ip封包47-9 (步驟ST68),並將ip封 包47-9送出給路由器2〇-4,經由網點裝置7-2、IP電話網4 到達網點裝置8 - 2,然後經由通信電路1 〇 一丨到達路由器 20-3,經由H323終端部23-1、SCN介面24-1,到達類比電 話,18-1,以做為通知電話通信對象拿起類比電話機18 — 3 的送受話器的聲音(呼叫設定確認的聲音),並通知類比 話機18-1的利用者。1245997 5. Description of the invention (56) ---- According to the second procedure above, the user of the analog phone 1 8-3 hears this call-out tone 'and picks up the microphone (off hook) of the analog phone 18-3. Then, the H323 terminal unit 23-2 generates an ip packet 47-9 (step ST68), and sends the ip packet 47-9 to the router 20-4, and reaches the branch point device 8 through the branch point device 7-2 and the IP telephone network 4- 2. Then reach the router 20-3 via the communication circuit 101, via the H323 terminal 23-1, the SCN interface 24-1, and reach the analog phone, 18-1, as a notification to the telephone communication object to pick up the analog phone 18 — 3 The sound of the handset (the sound of the call setting confirmation), and notify the user of the analog phone 18-1.

前述步驟ST68係將呼叫設定確認的情報,也就是通知 類比電話機1 8-1與類比電話機18_3間的電話通信開始的ιρ 封包47-9轉送的手續,當網點裝置7 —2及8_2檢出Ip封包 47-9時,可將電話通信開始記錄,也就是類比電話機 與類比電話機1 8-3間之電話通信開始的事實做為Ip封包 4 7-9的内容之一部分,例如送信端Ip位址、受信端I 、送信料號、受信端埠號,以及其檢出時刻保存在設定 於網點裝置内部的收費記錄表上。 士當類比電話機18-1的利用者開始電話通信的會話時, 其,音、號經由通信電路55-1,且被轉送給SCN介面 的聲音信號為數位的形式,接著H3 23終端部23 —丨產生包含 化聲音的1p封包47_10,並送出給通信電路10-U步驟 ST69)。聲音封包47-10經由H323控制部234、路由— g 、網點裝置8-2、路由器19-8、19_9、2&quot;、心:3 13、網點裝置7-2、路由器20-4、H323終端部23_2,而到The aforementioned step ST68 is the information for confirming the call setting, that is, the procedure of transferring the ιρ packet 47-9 to notify the start of the telephone communication between the analog phone 1 8-1 and the analog phone 18_3. When the network device 7-2 and 8_2 detect the IP When the packet is 47-9, the recording of the telephone communication can be recorded, that is, the fact that the telephone communication between the analog telephone and the analog telephone 1 8-3 starts as part of the content of the IP packet 4 7-9, such as the IP address of the sender. The receiving end I, the sending material number, the receiving end port number, and its detection time are stored on the charging record table set in the outlet device. When the user of the analog telephone 18-1 starts a telephone communication session, the tone and number pass through the communication circuit 55-1 and the sound signal transmitted to the SCN interface is in digital form, followed by H3 23terminal 23-丨 Generate a 1p packet 47_10 containing the voice and send it to the communication circuit 10-U (step ST69). Voice packet 47-10 via H323 control unit 234, routing-g, branch device 8-2, router 19-8, 19_9, 2 &quot;, heart: 3 13, branch device 7-2, router 20-4, H323 terminal section 23_2 while

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第60頁 1245997 發明說明(57) 達類比電話機18-3。類比電話機18-3的使用者的聲音以與 上述相反的流程,也就是經由H323控制部23-2、路由器 20一4、網點裝置7一2、路由器19-13、19-11、2卜2、19-9 、19-8、網點裝置8一2、路由器2〇-3、H323控制部“Η, 而到達類比電話機18-1(步驟ST70)。 當類比電話機1 8-1的使用者結束電話通信而放回送受 活器時’類比電話機1 8 - 1將表示電話結束的呼叫切斷信號 送出給通信電路55-1,SCN介面24-1將呼叫切斷信號變換 為數位資料形式,接著H323終端部23-1產生表示電話通信 結束的IP封包47-12,並送出給通信電路ι〇-ΐ(步驟ST71) ° IP封包47-12係經由H323控制部23-1、路由器20-3、網 點裝置8-2、路由器 19一8、19一9、21一2、19-11、19-13、 網點裝置7-2、路由器2〇-4、H323終端部23-2,而到達類 比電話機18-3。當類比電話機18 —3的使用者知道電話通信 結束而放回送受話器時,H323終端部23一2產生並送出ιρ封 包47-13 ’以與上述相反的流程,也就是經由控制部 23-2、路由器2〇-4、網點裝置7-2、路由器19-13、19~ 11 、21-2、19-9、19-8、網點裝置8-2、路由器20-3,而到 達H323控制部23-1 (步驟ST72)。 前述步驟ST72係轉送呼叫切斷的確認情報,也就是通 知類比電話機18 — 1與類比電話機18-3間的電話通信結束的 IP封包47-13的手續,當網點裝置8_2與7-2檢出IP封包 4 7 -1 3時’可將電話通信結束記錄,也就是類比電話機 18-1與類比電話機18 —3間之電話通信結束的事實做2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 60 1245997 Description of the invention (57) Analog phone 18-3. The voice of the user of the analog telephone 18-3 follows the reverse flow, that is, via the H323 control unit 23-2, the router 20-4, the branch device 71-2, the router 19-13, 19-11, 2 and 2 , 19-9, 19-8, branch point device 8-12, router 20-3, H323 control unit "Η", and arrive at analog telephone 18-1 (step ST70). When the user of analog telephone 1 8-1 ends When returning the receiver by telephone communication, the analog telephone 1 8-1 sends the call disconnection signal indicating the end of the call to the communication circuit 55-1, and the SCN interface 24-1 converts the call disconnection signal to a digital data form, and then The H323 terminal unit 23-1 generates an IP packet 47-12 indicating the end of the telephone communication, and sends it to the communication circuit ι〇-ΐ (step ST71) ° The IP packet 47-12 passes through the H323 control unit 23-1 and the router 20-3 , Branch point device 8-2, router 19-8, 19-9, 21-12, 19-11, 19-13, branch point device 7-2, router 2-0-4, H323 terminal section 23-2, and reach the analogy Telephone 18-3. When the user of analog telephone 18-3 knows that the telephone communication is over and returns the handset, H323 terminal unit 23-2 generates and sends ρ packet 47-13 'In the flow opposite to the above, that is, via the control unit 23-2, router 2〇-4, network device 7-2, router 19-13, 19 ~ 11, 21-2, 19-9 , 19-8, branch point device 8-2, router 20-3, and reach H323 control unit 23-1 (step ST72). The aforementioned step ST72 forwards confirmation information of call disconnection, that is, the analog telephone 18—1 and The procedure of the IP packet 47-13 of the end of the telephone communication between the analog telephones 18-3. When the network device 8_2 and 7-2 detect the IP packet 4 7 -1 3, the end of the telephone communication can be recorded, that is, the analog telephone 18 The fact that the telephone communication between the -1 and the analog telephone 18-3 has ended

1245997 五、發明說明(58) 包4 7 -1 3的内容之一部分,例如送信端I p位址、受信端I p 位址、送“端璋说、受信端璋號’以及其檢出時刻保存在 網點裝置内部的收費記錄表上。 按照以上的程序,類比電話機18-1與類比電話機18一3 間經由傳送接收I p封包,可進行電話通信。 在以上所述的通信程序中,由媒體路由器14-1移除媒 體路由器内的網域名稱伺服器48-1,也可將前述步驟ST63 至ST65,置換成以下所述的步驟ST63x及ST65x。換言之, H323終端部23-1將儲存類比電話機18-1的位址,也就是送 信端IP位址π Α18Γ、IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器w — i 的位址,也就是受信端IP位址&quot;A31 Γ、及通信對象處電話 號碼&quot;Tel-18-3 name&quot;的IP封包47-14,經由通信電路1〇 一 1 及網點裝置8-2,傳送給IP電話專用的網域名稱伺服器 3卜1 (步驟ST63x)。網域名稱伺服器31-1將包含有1:1對 應於通信對象處電話號碼” Tel-18-3 name,,之IP位址 &quot;A183”的IP封包47-15送回給H323終端部23-1(步驟ST65x) 〇 在以上所述之步驟ST63至ST65,或是步驟ST63x及 ST65x的手續中,網點裝置8-2透過檢查包含於經由通信電 路10-1接收到的IP封包47-5中之送信端位址’,Α48Γ與通信 電路識別記號&quot;Line-10-l&quot;的組合,是否有登錄於位址管 理表44-1(圖8)上,或者,網點裝置8-2透過檢查包含於經 由通信電路10-1接收到的IP封包47-14中之送信端位址 &quot;Α18Γ與通信電路識別記號&quot;Line-10-1&quot;的組合,是否有1245997 V. Description of the invention (58) Part of the contents of packet 4 7 -1 3, such as the sending end IP address, the receiving end IP address, sending the "end address, the end address number" and its detection time It is stored on the charge record sheet inside the outlet device. According to the above procedure, the analog telephone 18-1 and the analog telephone 18-3 can receive and transmit IP packets through transmission. In the above-mentioned communication procedure, The media router 14-1 removes the domain name server 48-1 in the media router, and the above steps ST63 to ST65 can also be replaced with the steps ST63x and ST65x described below. In other words, the H323 terminal unit 23-1 will store The address of the analog phone 18-1 is the IP address of the sender π Α18Γ, the address of the domain name server w — i dedicated to the IP telephone network, which is the IP address of the receiver &quot; A31 Γ, and the communication The IP packet 47-14 of the telephone number &quot; Tel-18-3 name &quot; of the target office is transmitted to the domain name server 3 dedicated to the IP phone via the communication circuit 101-1 and the branch device 8-2 (Step 1 ST63x). Domain Name Server 31-1 will contain 1: 1 pairs The IP address 47-15 of the telephone number “Tel-18-3 name”, the IP address “A183” of the communication destination is returned to the H323 terminal unit 23-1 (step ST65x). 〇 In step ST63 described above, To ST65, or steps ST63x and ST65x, the branch device 8-2 checks the sender address contained in the IP packet 47-5 received through the communication circuit 10-1, 'A48Γ and the communication circuit identification mark The combination of "Line-10-l" is registered in the address management table 44-1 (Fig. 8), or the branch device 8-2 checks the IP packet received by the communication circuit 10-1 by checking Is the combination of the sender address &quot; Α18Γ and the communication circuit identification mark &quot; Line-10-1 &quot; in 47-14

Hi 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第62頁 1245997 五、發明說明(59) --- 登錄於位址營理主4 4 雷丄表44 —1(圖8)上’類比電話機18 —1由通信 ^ -T ^網點裝置8 —2的通信被許可,也就是確認通 1石汗1y登錄。 &lt;&lt;IP : m艮務運用管理飼服器〉〉 山田t二管理下的1P資料服務運用管理飼服器35-1經 &quot;^ 、或隨時詢問網點裝置8-2及8-4等,傳送接收ip 封包,以敗iS.如 w 在刚述步驟ST 11中網點裝置產生的I p終端間 &quot;°己錄。又’ IP資料服務運用管理伺服器35-1透過傳送 立=ICMP封包等方法檢查通信公司X管理的ιρ資料網的内Hi 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 62 1245997 V. Description of the invention (59) --- Registered in the address manager 4 4 Thunder table 44-1 (Figure 8) 'Analog phone 18-1 The communication by the communication ^ -T ^ network device 8-2 is permitted, that is, it is confirmed that the login is made through 1 Shihan 1y. &lt; &lt; IP: Management and Feeding Device for Operation Management >〉 1P Data Service Management and Feeding Device for 35P Management under Yamada t2 &quot; ^, or inquiries at the outlet devices 8-2 and 8-4 at any time Wait, send and receive ip packets to defeat the iS. For example, the IP between the IP terminals generated by the network device in step ST 11 just described is recorded. Also ’The IP data service uses the management server 35-1 to check the inside of the ιρ data network managed by the communication company X through the transmission of ICMP packets and other methods.

部資源,例如路由器19-1、19-2、19-3、IP資料網專用的 網域名稱伺服器3〇 —丨及別-2、路由器間的通信電路等是否 正常(故障管理),又,透過監視IP資料網内的IP封包是否 過於擁擠(通信品質管理),一元化的運用管理通信公司X 的IP資料網。External resources, such as routers 19-1, 19-2, 19-3, the domain name server 30- 丨 and other-2 dedicated to the IP data network, whether the communication circuits between routers are normal (fault management), and By monitoring whether the IP packets in the IP data network are too crowded (communication quality management), the unified management of the IP data network of communication company X is performed.

口同樣的,通信公司γ管理下的丨p資料服務運用管理伺 服器35-2經由周期性的或隨時詢問網點裝置7_2及7 — 4等, 傳送接收IP封包,以取得在前述1?終端間通信記錄,一元 化地運用管理通信公司γ的丨P資料網的故障管理與通信品 質。再者,IP資料服務運用管理伺服器35 —丨及35 — 2可區分 為分別用以專門管理IP資料服務的Ip資料服務伺服器與專 門管理IP資料網之資源的丨P資料網運用管理伺服器。 &lt;&lt;IP電話服務運用管理伺服器〉〉 通信公司X管理下的IP電話服務運用管理伺服器36-1 經由周期性的或隨時詢問網點裝置8 —2及8_4等,傳送接收Similarly, the data service operation management server 35-2 under the management of the communication company γ sends and receives IP packets through periodic or anytime inquiries to the network device 7_2 and 7-4, etc., to obtain the above 1? The communication records are used in a unified way to manage the fault management and communication quality of the communication company's P data network. Furthermore, the IP data service operation management server 35 — 丨 and 35 — 2 can be divided into an IP data service server dedicated to managing IP data services and a P data network management server dedicated to managing IP data network resources. Device. &lt; &lt; IP telephony service operation management server >〉 The IP telephony service operation management server 36-1 under the management of the communication company X transmits and receives by periodically or at any time inquiring the network device 8-2, 8_4, etc.

1245997 五、發明說明(60) IP封包,以取得前述電話通信開始 錄。又,透過傳送接收聰封包等方法檢:通1245997 V. Description of the invention (60) IP packet to start recording of the aforementioned telephone communication. In addition, by sending and receiving Satoshi packets and other methods:

理的IP電活網的内部資源,例如路由器19_8、】&quot;:S 19、10&gt;、IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器3丨—1、路由器 的通彳§電路等是否正常(故障管) ° 過於擁播(通信品質管理),-元化的 運用g理通信公司X的IΡ電話網。 _同? ΐ :网ί信公司γ管理下的電話服務運用管理伺服 器36-2經由周期性的或隨時詢問網點裝置7_2及7_4等,傳 電話網的故 j收IP封包’以取得前述電話通信開始記錄與電話通信 π束圮錄,一兀化地運用管理通信公司γ的^ 障管理與通信品質。 再者,上述手續中的步驟ST28、步驟ST68之電話通信 開始的記錄與步驟ST32、步驟^72之電話通信結束的記錄 也可省略,此時可省去對通信公司X與通信公司γ的電話通 信開始記錄與電話通信結束記錄的取得。 再者’IP電話服務運用管理伺服器“―丨及“ —?可區分 為二別用以專η官理I p電話服務的! p電話服務飼服器與專 門管,IΡ電話網之資源的! Ρ電話網運用管理祠服器。 &lt;&lt;ΙΡ聲音影像服務運用管理伺服器〉〉 通#公司X管理下的IΡ聲音影像服務運用管理伺服器 37-1經由周期性的或隨時詢問網點裝置8 —2及8_4等,傳送 接收If封包’以取得前述聲音影像通信開始記錄與聲音影 像通#結束記錄。又,透過傳送接收1(:評封包等方法檢查 第64頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(61) _ 通信公司X管理的IP聲音影像網的内部資源,例如路由器 19-14、19-15、IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器My、路 由器間的通信電路等是否正常(故障管理),另外,透過監 視IP聲音影像網内的1?封包是否過於擁擠(通信品質管理) ’ 一元化的運用管理通信公司X的丨p聲音影像網。 同樣的,通信公司γ管理下的1?聲音影像服務運用管 理伺服器37-2經由周期性的或隨時詢問網點裝置7 — 2及7 送接收IP.封包,以取得前述聲音影像通 與#音影像通信結束記錄,一元化地運用管理通信公司, 的聲音影像網的故障管理與通信品質。再者,IP聲音 服務運用管理伺服器37_i及37_2可區分 理㈣音影像服務的1?聲音影像服務 」:= 音影像網之資源的IP聲音影像網運用管理^服^門目理聲 &lt;&lt;盡力而為服務運用管理伺服器〉〉 p 通信公司X管理下的盡力而為 38-1 -元化地運用管理通信公 :::理何服器 理與通信品質。同樣的,、g 、 而為網的故障管 務運用管理伺服器38_2 一元 的盡力而為服 力而為網的故障管理與通信品質運:理:信公司Y的盡 用:理:服器38]及38-2可區分為分別用服務運 而為服務的盡力而為服務飼服 =Η管理盡力 網之資源的盡力而為網運用管理伺服y理盡力而為服務 在以上的說明中,鹌 ° 「Η323終端部」及「Η3 的元件名稱,例如 3閘道」等時,並非表示係依據 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第65頁 1245997Internal resources of the active IP electrical network, such as router 19_8,] &quot;: S 19, 10 &gt;, the domain name server 3 for the IP telephone network 3-1-Is the communication circuit of the router normal (fault) Management) ° Too much broadcast (communication quality management),-the use of the IP phone network of the communication company X. _Same? Ϊ́: The telephone service operation management server 36-2 under the management of the Internet letter company γ sends the IP packet of the telephone network by periodically or at any time inquiring the network device 7_2 and 7_4, etc. to obtain the aforementioned call The communication start record and the telephone communication are recorded in a bundle, and the failure management and communication quality of the management communication company γ are integrated. In addition, the records of the start of the telephone communication in steps ST28 and ST68 and the records of the end of the telephone communication in steps ST32 and step ^ 72 in the above procedures may be omitted. At this time, the calls to the communication company X and the communication company γ may be omitted. Acquisition of communication start record and telephone communication end record. Furthermore, the management server "IP phone service use" "丨" and "?" It can be divided into two types which are dedicated to the official IP phone service! p telephone service feeder and dedicated management, resources of IP telephone network! P telephone network uses management server. &lt; IP audio and video service operation management server>〉 IP audio and video service operation management server 37-1 under the management of company X transmits and receives by periodically or at any time inquiring the network device 8-2 and 8_4, etc. If packet 'to start recording with the aforementioned audio-video communication and audio-video communication # to end recording. In addition, through transmission and reception 1 (: packet evaluation, etc., check page 64 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (61) _ Internal resources of the IP audio and video network managed by the communication company X, such as router 19 -14, 19-15, whether the domain name server My dedicated to the IP telephone network, the communication circuit between routers, etc. are normal (fault management). In addition, by monitoring 1? Packets in the IP audio and video network are too crowded (communication Quality management) 'Unified operation management of the audio and video network of communication company X. Similarly, 1? Audio and video service operation management server 37-2 under the management of communication company γ via periodic or any time inquiries to the network device 7 — 2 and 7 send and receive IP. Packets to obtain the above-mentioned audio and video communication and # audio and video communication end records, and use the management and communication company's audio and video network fault management and communication quality in a unified way. Furthermore, the IP audio service operation management server Device 37_i and 37_2 can distinguish the audio and video services of audio and video services ": = IP audio and video network operation management of audio and video network resources ^ service ^ door and head audio &lt; &lt; Do your best to serve the management server >>> p The best effort 38-1 under the management of the communication company X-Use the management communications company in a unified way ::: Reason for server management and communication quality. Similarly, g, And for the fault management of the network, the management server 38_2 is the best effort for the fault management and communication quality of the network. Operation: Management: The best use of the company Y: Management: Server 38] and 38-2 Divide into the best effort and service for the service and service = Η manage the resources of the best effort network and use the management server and manage the best effort for service. In the above description, "鹌 323terminal department" And "Η3's component names, such as 3 gateways", etc., does not mean that it is based on 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 65 1245997

ITU-H323的建議,而僅代表具有相關的通信功能。 如圖48所示,媒體路由器的操作者1〇2°經由犯操 入部51-1,與RAS機構49-1内部的RAS管理程式1〇1 、】— 情報交換,或者,透過改為RAS管理程式内的表進行 行終端的登錄與認證,並管理媒體路由器⑹的内部Κ 如圖49所示,終端操作者丨03係透過操作非獨立 電話機1 3-1,此操作情報係由終端程式1〇5 —2、然後經由 通信電話53-1内假想地存在的3層通信通道1〇6,與ras 構49-1内部的rAS管理程式的介面1〇5_ι及ras管理程式的 AP層101-2進行情報交換,另外,透過改寫ras管理程式'内 的RAS表,進行終端的登錄與認證,及管理媒體路由^ 14-1的内部狀態。 &quot; 如圖5 0所示,電話機操作者1 〇 4係透過操作電話機 18-1 ’此操作情報係由SCN介面24-1内的電話操作程式 10 6-2、然後與RAS機構49 —丨内部的RAS管理程式的Tcp/Ip 介面106-1及RAS管理程式的AP層1〇卜3進行情報交換,另 外’透過改寫RAS管理程式内的RAS表’進行終端的登錄與 認證,及管理媒體路由器丨4-丨的内部狀態。 、 在圖3的實施例中,移除通信公司Y運用管理的IP轉送 網之範圍6-2的全部的内部元件,進而可移除路由器21 -1 至21-5。此時,統合ip轉送網2的内部變成通信公司X運用 管理的IP轉送網的範圍6 — 1、與網點裝置7-1至7 — 4、8-1至ITU-H323 recommendations only represent relevant communication functions. As shown in FIG. 48, the operator of the media router 102 ° exchanges information with the RAS management program 101 inside the RAS organization 49-1 via the criminal operation unit 51-1, or through RAS management The table in the program performs the registration and authentication of the terminal, and manages the internal of the media router 如图 As shown in Figure 49, the terminal operator 丨 03 is through the operation of the non-independent telephone 1 3-1. 〇5 —2, and then through the imaginary three-layer communication channel 106 in the communication phone 53-1, and the RAS structure 49-1 internal rAS management program interface 105_ι and the RAS management program AP layer 101- 2 for information exchange, in addition, by rewriting the RAS table in the ras management program, to perform terminal registration and authentication, and manage the internal status of media routing ^ 14-1. &quot; As shown in FIG. 50, the telephone operator 1 04 operates the telephone 18-1 'This operation information is provided by the telephone operation program 10 6-2 in the SCN interface 24-1, and then communicates with the RAS agency 49 — 丨Internal RAS management program's Tcp / Ip interface 106-1 and AP layer 10 and 3 of the RAS management program exchange information, and 'rewrite the RAS table in the RAS management program' for terminal registration and authentication, and management of media Internal status of routers 丨 4- 丨. In the embodiment of FIG. 3, all internal components of the range 6-2 of the IP forwarding network managed by the communication company Y are removed, and the routers 21 -1 to 21-5 can be removed. At this time, the inside of the integrated IP forwarding network 2 becomes the range of the IP forwarding network managed and managed by the communication company X 6-1, and with the branch device 7-1 to 7-4, 8-1 to

example

8-4及閘道g-ι與9_2本身。在ιρ資料通信的情況中為,8-4 and the gate g-ι and 9_2 itself. In the case of ιρ data communications,

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第66頁 1245997 五、發明說明(63) ---2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 66 1245997 V. Description of Invention (63) ---

如從網點裝置8-2經由路由器19-1、路由器19-3,轉送产 報給網點襞置7-2。在IP電話通信的情況中為,例如$二 7點,置8-2經由路由器19-8及19_9,轉送情報至網點装I 2·使用閘道的第2實施例 &lt;&lt;經由閘道的類比電話機間的通信&gt;〉 q 1芬圖^、7的媒體路由器丨4 — 1及14 —2係具有與圖51的閘道 圖52的閘道9 —2大略相同的内部構成之機能,1 ::相對於媒體路由器14]及14_2位於統合1?轉送;冋 外。門9-1及9-2係位於統合1P轉送網2的内部,另、 1道9-1及9-2内部除收費部721及72_2 Η323終端部、及9_2的内部分別由介面、 構成。又,79=:部/$由器等共通的内部元件方塊 情報處理機構,81 ^RAS機構,80-1係閘道9-1的 由器與問道除了與收的/作輸出入部。媒體路 機能。興收費部相關的處理外,具有大略相似的 ㈣有ΙΡ_1-6及非獨立型 及非獨立㈣聲音忿2裝上,通信電路接續有ίΡ終端】!]。 終端間通信為可能一 如同經由媒體路由器的 2、閉道9~2,例如圖3所經由閉道Μ、統合1P轉送網 的終端間通信、非獨立^的1P終端U-6與ip終端丨卜“間 機13-4間的终端^ iIP電話機13-3與非獨立型Ip 1 _一 通L非獨立㈣聲音影像裝 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第67頁 1245997For example, from the branch office device 8-2 through the router 19-1 and the router 19-3, the production report is forwarded to the branch office device 7-2. In the case of IP telephone communication, for example, $ 2.70, 8-2 is set via routers 19-8 and 19_9, and information is transmitted to the outlets. I 2 · The second embodiment using a gateway &lt; &lt; Communication between analog telephones >> q 1 Fintu ^, 7 media routers 丨 4-1 and 14-2 have the same internal structure as the gateway 9-2 in Figure 52 , 1 :: Relative to media routers 14] and 14_2 are located in the unified 1? Forwarding; The gates 9-1 and 9-2 are located inside the integrated 1P transfer network 2. In addition, the interiors of the 9-1 and 9-2 except the toll collection section 721 and 72_2 Η323 terminal section, and 9_2 are respectively composed of interfaces. In addition, 79 =: department / $ youji and other common internal component blocks. Information processing organization, 81 ^ RAS organization, 80-1 series gateway 9-1 except for and receiving / receiving / working input / output department. Media Road Function. In addition to the relevant processing by the Ministry of Toll Collection, there are roughly similar ones (IP_1-6 and non-independent and non-independent) sounds 2 are installed, and the communication circuit is connected to Pl terminals]!]. Inter-terminal communication is possible like 2 and closed channels 9 ~ 2 via the media router, for example, closed channel M through Figure 3, inter-terminal communication of the integrated 1P transfer network, non-independent 1P terminal U-6 and IP terminal Bu "Terminal between 13-4 ^ iIP telephone 13-3 and non-independent type IP 1 _One pass L non-independent ㈣ audio and video equipment 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 67 1245997

五、發明說明(64) 非獨立型ip聲音影像裝置16_4間 L7 ΠΓ , ^ π r , 、味間通信為可能。 網9 1 圖68,說明經由閘道9 — ι、統人ip棘谈 、周2、閘道9-2之類比電話機18_ 口 ^ 通信程序。 n € ”舌機18-6間的 當拿起類比電話機18_5的送受話器 17-3、公眾交換電咭絪% ]、雷%命&amp;町左由電話電路 又俠电居網Μ一1、電话電路17-1,呼出栌躲釗 1=内確部ΛΤ·1… 雷二1 V : 眾交換電話網2Η送回給類比 (步驟S61)。其次’類比電話機Μ的使用者 右撥號輸入通信對象處的電話機18 — 6的電話號碼 6 name ,當類比電話機18-5將呼叫設定作號送 出給通信電話17-3時,呼叫設定信號經由公眾交換:f話網 26-1、電話電路17-丨,到達SCN介面77 —丨(步驟s62),此呼 =設定信號可被數位化,如圖53所示之資料方塊“—丨被傳 送至H323終端部76-1(步驟S62x),H323終端部76 -1檢索圖 7 0的閘道狀態表1 〇 〇 — 2内部的記錄,檢出表示通信電路 1 7-1的電路識別子,在此例中為閘道狀態表丨〇〇_2上起第1 行的記錄π 17-Γ。 接著,讀取被記載在此記錄中的類比電話機18_5的電 話號碼” 81-3-9876-5432,,及 IP 位址&quot;100. ι〇ι· 102. 103&quot;。 另外,H323終端部76-1產生儲存類比電話機18-5的位址, 也就是送信端IP位址” A1 8 5π、閘道内的網域名稱伺服器 78-1的位址,也就是受信端ip位址” Α781 &quot;、及通信對象處 電話號碼’’ Te 1-18-6 name”的IP封包48-2,並傳送給網域V. Description of the Invention (64) Non-independent IP audio and video devices 16_4, L7 ΠΓ, ^ πr, and Ajima communication are possible. Net 9 1 Figure 68 illustrates the analog telephone 18_ port through the gateway 9-ι, Tongren ip talk, week 2, gateway 9-2 ^ communication procedures. n € "When picking up the handset 17-3 of the analog phone 18_5, the public telephone exchange %%], the thunder% life & the town's telephone circuit and the electric home network M-1, Telephone circuit 17-1, call out 栌 hide Zhao 1 = internal part Δ ·· 1 ... Lei 2 1 V: The public switched telephone network 2 sends back to the analog (step S61). Second, the user of the analog phone M right dials the input The telephone number 6 name of the telephone set 18-6 at the communication destination. When the analog telephone set 18-5 sends the call setting number to the communication telephone 17-3, the call setting signal is exchanged through the public: fphone 26-1, telephone circuit 17- 丨, arrive at the SCN interface 77 — (step s62), this call = the setting signal can be digitized, as shown in the data block "-丨" shown in Figure 53 is transmitted to the H323 terminal 76-1 (step S62x), The H323 terminal unit 76-1 searches the internal record of the gateway state table 1 in FIG. 70 and detects a circuit identifier representing the communication circuit 1 7-1. In this example, the gateway state table 丨 〇〇_ Record π 17-Γ on line 1 from 2. Next, read the telephone number "81-3-9876-5432" of the analog telephone 18_5 recorded in this record, and the IP address "100. 102. 103". In addition, the H323 terminal unit 76 -1 generates the storage analog phone address 18-5, which is the IP address of the sender "A1 8 5π, the address of the domain name server 78-1 in the gateway, which is also the IP address of the receiver" Α781 &quot;, And the IP address 48-2 of the telephone number "Te 1-18-6 name" at the communication destination, and send it to the network domain

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第68頁 1245997 五、發明說明(65) 名稱飼服器78-1(步驟S63)。網域名稱伺服器78-1檢查接 收到的IP封包48-2的内容,經由網點裝置8-4將IP封包 48_3傳送給IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器31 —丨(步驟 S64)。當IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器31 —丨將包含丨· 1 對應於前述通信對象處電話號碼” Tel_18 —6 name&quot;的1?位 址n A 186π之1?封包48-4送回給網域名稱伺服器78-1時(步 驟S65),網域名稱伺服器78_UfIp封包送回給Η323 ^ 76-1 。 、 口 其次,當Η323終端部76-丨產生ΙΡ封包48_5,並傳送給 網點裝置8-4時(步驟S66),若網點裝置8-4將此ip封包 47-5轉送給圖3之統合IP轉送網2的内部,Ip封包48 —5係通 過IP電話網4的内部之路由器19 —8、19 —9、21 —2、ΐ9 ιγ、 19-13,而到達網點裝置7 — 4。於是,網點裝置了―4將接收 到的IP封包48-5經由路由器74 —2、Η323終端部76〜2, 給SCN介面77-2。SCN介面77-2將IP封包48-5解釋為對類比 電話機18 - 6的電話呼出,對電話電路17一2送出呼^疒 ;當從公眾交換電話網2&quot;接收呼出確信號 時(步驟S66y),進行以下兩個手續。第丨個手續是產生γ L用IP封包48-6 ’並送回給路由器74_2,第2個 呼叫設定信號經由電路丨7 — 2,送出仏八 卞躓疋將 。 运出給公眾父換電話網26-2 據第1手續產生的IP封包48-6經由網點裝置舟撕 S67) ’並經由IP電話網4,到達 (步驟 巧運網點裝置8 - 4,麸始和丨、去日日 道9-1内部的H323終端部76 —丨厂、後到達閘 終鳊部76-1將接收到2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 68 1245997 V. Description of the invention (65) Name feeder 78-1 (step S63). The domain name server 78-1 checks the content of the received IP packet 48-2, and transmits the IP packet 48_3 to the domain name server 31 — 丨 dedicated to the IP telephone network via the node device 8-4 (step S64). When the domain name server 31 dedicated to the IP telephone network — 丨 will return 1? Address n A 1 of 186π which contains 丨 · 1 corresponding to the aforementioned telephone number of the communication partner? Packet 48-4 When giving the domain name server 78-1 (step S65), the domain name server 78_UfIp packet is sent back to Η323 ^ 76-1. Second, when Η323 terminal section 76- 丨 generates IP packet 48_5 and sends it to When the branch office device 8-4 (step S66), if the branch office device 8-4 forwards this IP packet 47-5 to the inside of the integrated IP forwarding network 2 in FIG. 3, the IP packet 48-5 passes through the inside of the IP telephone network 4. Router 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, ΐ9 ιγ, 19-13, and reach the branch device 7-4. Therefore, the branch device ―4 will receive the received IP packet 48-5 through the router 74-2 , Η323 terminal section 76 ~ 2, to the SCN interface 77-2. The SCN interface 77-2 interprets the IP packet 48-5 as an outgoing call to the analog telephone 18-6, and sends an outgoing call to the telephone circuit 17-2; When receiving an outgoing call confirmation signal from the public switched telephone network 2 (step S66y), the following two procedures are performed. The first procedure is to generate an IP packet for γ L 48-6 'and send it back to router 74_2, the second call setting signal is sent out through the circuit 丨 7-2 and sent to the 仏 eight 卞 踬 疋 will be shipped out to the public parent telephone network 26-2 IP generated according to the first procedure Packet 48-6 via the outlet device boat S67) 'and via the IP telephone network 4, reach (step Qiaoyun outlet device 8-4, bran start and 丨, go to H323 terminal 76 inside Riri Road 9-1 — 丨Factory, after arriving at the gate end of the gate 76-1 will receive

1245997 五、發明說明(66) 的I P封包4 8 - 6理解為對通信對象的電話機(類比電話機 18-6)呼出中,將代表呼出音的資料方塊48一7送出至SCN介 面77-1 cSCN介面77-1將呼出音送出給通信電路17-1,當 此呼出音經由公眾交換電話網26-1、通信電路17-3到達類 比電話機18-5時,類比電話機18_ 5解釋為呼出通信對象的 類比電話機18-6中。 根據上述第2手續,類比電話機1 8 - 6接收呼叫設定信 號(步驟S67x),發出呼出音。當類比電話機的使用者 聽到此呼出音,拿起類比電話機18-6的送受話器時,從類 比電話機18-6送出呼叫設定確認的信號,經由電路17 — 4、 公眾父換電話網2 6 - 2、電路1 7 - 2,此呼叫設定確認信號到 達SCN介面77-2。當SCN介面77 —2將應答的受信傳達至H3231245997 5. The IP packet 4 8-6 of the description of the invention (66) is understood as the outgoing call to the telephone set (analog phone 18-6) of the communication object, and the data box 48-7 representing the outgoing tone is sent to the SCN interface 77-1 cSCN The interface 77-1 sends the outgoing tone to the communication circuit 17-1. When the outgoing tone reaches the analog telephone 18-5 via the public switched telephone network 26-1 and the communication circuit 17-3, the analog telephone 18_ 5 is interpreted as the outgoing communication object Analog phone 18-6. According to the second procedure described above, the analog telephone 1-8-6 receives the call setting signal (step S67x), and makes an outgoing tone. When the user of the analog phone hears this callout and picks up the receiver of the analog phone 18-6, the call setting confirmation signal is sent from the analog phone 18-6, via circuit 17-4, and the public parent telephone network 2 6- 2. Circuit 1 7-2, this call setting confirmation signal reaches the SCN interface 77-2. When the SCN interface 77-2 relays the response to the H323

終端部76-2(步驟S67y)時,H323終端部76_2產生IP封包 48-8,並送出給H323終端部76-1(步驟S68)。於是,此IP 封包48-8經由網點裝置7_4、Ip電話網4到達網點裝置8一4 ,然後經由閘道9-1内部的路由器74_丨到達H323終端部 113 2 3、、、,端邛76-1將接收到的1?封包48-8 (也就是類比電話機18 — 6的使用者拿起送受广; 呼叫設定確認的資料方塊48刊送出至SCN 面77M將呼出確認信號送出給通 換電話網26-1、通信電踗17 0 ,土 上田a承 €路17 — 3而到達類比電話機18-5。 前述步麵係將應答的情機 機18-5與類比電話機18_6間的電話通信開始的J封比包=When the terminal unit 76-2 (step S67y), the H323 terminal unit 76_2 generates an IP packet 48-8 and sends it to the H323 terminal unit 76-1 (step S68). Therefore, this IP packet 48-8 reaches the branch point device 8-4 through the branch point device 7_4 and the IP telephone network 4, and then reaches the H323 terminal section 113 2 3 ,,, and the terminal through the router 74_ 丨 inside the gateway 9-1. 76-1 will pick up the received 1? Packet 48-8 (that is, the user of the analog phone 18-6 pick up the receiver; send the data box 48 of the call setting confirmation to the SCN surface 77M and send the call confirmation signal to the exchange Telephone network 26-1, communication telephone 17 0, Dokuda a, road 17-3 and reach analog phone 18-5. The aforementioned steps are telephone communications between the answering machine 18-5 and the analog phone 18_6. Started J package than package =

1245997 '發明說明(67) 轉送的手續,當網點裝置7-4或8-4檢出IP封包48-9時,可 將電話通信開始記錄,也就是將類比電話機1 8 - 5與類比電 話機18-6間的電話通信開始的事實與其時刻一起保存於設 定在網點裝置内部的收費記錄表上。1245997 'Invention (67) Transfer procedure. When the network device 7-4 or 8-4 detects the IP packet 48-9, the telephone communication can be recorded, that is, the analog telephone 1 8-5 and the analog telephone 18 The fact that the telephone communication between the six stations started is stored together with the time on the charge record table set in the outlet device.

當類比電話機1 8-1的使用者開始電話通信的會話時, 其聲音信號經由通信電路1 7 - 3、公眾交換電話網2 6 -1、通 仏電路17-1 ’被轉送給SCN介面77-1,聲音信號被以數位 方式表現,接著H3 23終端部76-1產生包含數位化聲音的1? 封包48-10。聲音封包48-10經由路由器74-1、網點裝置 8 4、路由器 19- 8、19- 9、21-2、19-11、19-13、網點裝 置7-4、H323終端部76-2、SCN介面77-2、通信電路17 —2' 公眾交換電話網26-2、通信電路17-4,到達類比電話機 18-6(步驟S69)。類比電話機18 —6的使用者的聲音則為Ip 封包48-11,以上述相反的流程,也就是經由8(:^介面77一2 、H323控制部76-2、網點裝置7-4、路由器19-13、19-11 、21 -2、19-9、19-8、網點裝置8-4、閘道9-1内部的H323 終端部76-1、SCN介面77-1、通信電路1 7-1等,到達類比 電話機18-5(步驟S70)。When the user of the analog telephone 1 8-1 starts a telephone communication session, the sound signal is transferred to the SCN interface 77 via the communication circuit 17-3, the public switched telephone network 2 6 -1, and the communication circuit 17-1 '. -1, the sound signal is represented digitally, and then H3 23 terminal 76-1 generates a 1? Packet 48-10 containing digitized sound. The voice packet 48-10 passes through the router 74-1, the branch device 8 4, the router 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11, 19-13, the branch device 7-4, the H323 terminal section 76-2, The SCN interface 77-2, the communication circuit 17-2 ', the public switched telephone network 26-2, and the communication circuit 17-4 arrive at the analog telephone 18-6 (step S69). The voice of the user of the analog phone 18-6 is the IP packet 48-11. Following the above reverse process, that is, via the 8 (: ^ interface 77-2, the H323 control unit 76-2, the outlet device 7-4, the router 19-13, 19-11, 21-2, 19-9, 19-8, outlet device 8-4, H323 terminal section 76-1 inside gateway 9-1, SCN interface 77-1, communication circuit 1 7 -1, etc., arrive at the analog telephone 18-5 (step S70).

、、&lt;當,比電話機18-5的使用者因為電話通信結束而放下 ,受話器時,類比電話機18-5將代表電話結束的呼叫切斷 L號送出至通彳s電路17 —3,g⑶介面77 —1將呼叫切斷信號 變換為^位資料的形式,接著當⑽“終端部76 —丨產生表示 電話通信結束的1P封包48-12,並送出給路由器74 —丨時(步 驟S71) ’ IP封包48-12經由網點裝置8 —4、路由器19一8、,, &lt; When the user of the telephone set 18-5 puts down because of the end of the telephone communication, when the receiver, the analog telephone set 18-5 sends the call disconnection L number representing the end of the telephone to the communication circuit 17-3, g⑶ The interface 77-1 converts the call disconnection signal into a format of ^ bit data, and then when the "terminal section 76-" generates a 1P packet 48-12 indicating the end of the telephone communication, and sends it to the router 74- 丨 (step S71) '' IP packets 48-12 pass through network devices 8-4, routers 19-8,

12459971245997

7β ? ςρΜ ^911、19 — 13、網點裝置7-4、H323 終端部 ==部:知2道= crx丨人。 、電3舌通k結束而放回送受話器時,7β? Σρ ^^ 911, 19-13, outlet device 7-4, H323 terminal section == 部: 知 2 道 = crx 丨 people. When the phone 3 is switched off and the microphone is replaced,

SCN”面77 - 2理解為呼叫切斷墟( .X ,is] ά八y # &amp; ^斷確⑽(也就疋電話通信結束) Α人、、電話網2 6 - 2通知並取得類比電話機1 8 ~ 5 與類比電話機1 8 - 6間的雷每诵尸ν並Μ「 Ί的電話通#必要的「公眾交換電話網 時/雷$」基乂,牛例而言,在通信電路1 7-2為ISDN電路 時,在電話通信結束時,告知收費情報。 傲丨惑面77 2以則述取得的公眾交換電話網的使用費 Γί ^ 通知H323終端部76-2,23終端部76-2得 H323 ^ ^ „76-2 A t ^ ^ ^ t 1 〇 做為第i個手續。,二:8;?ϊ送出至路由器74_2以 罾,壯$。 ^ 於疋以上述相反的流程,也就是經網 點裝置7-4、路由器19_13、19_u、2&quot;、19 9、19 8、 網點裝置8-4,到達H323終端部76_丨(步驟s?2)。再者, =S部76_2將包含有依據上述程序取得的收費費用之 i銼、笨I料方塊48~14,通知使用在閘道9-2内部動作的資 =^機能之收費部72_2。收費部72_2在前述取得的類比 =話機18-5與類比電話機18_6間的電話通信中,可保存使 用公眾交換電話網26-2的收費情報。 ^山,過以上的程序類比電話機18-5與類比電話機18-6 經由傳送接收IP封包,可進行電話通信。 前述步驟S72係將切斷確認情報,也就是通知類比電 8 8-5與類比電話機18-6間的電話通信結束的ιρ封包SCN "face 77-2 is understood as the call cut off market (.X, is) ά 八 y # & ^ Sure confirmation (that is, the end of the telephone communication) Α person, the telephone network 2 6-2 notice and get an analogy Telephones 18 to 5 and analog telephones 18 to 6 are described in the following sections: "Ί 的 通通 #" Necessary "Public Switched Telephone Network Time / Thunder $", for example, in communication circuits 1 When the 7-2 is an ISDN circuit, the charging information will be notified at the end of the telephone communication. Pride 77 77 2 The fee for the use of the public switched telephone network obtained in accordance with the rules Γί ^ Notify the H323 terminal section 76-2, 23 terminal section 76-2 gets H323 ^ ^ 76-2 A t ^ ^ ^ t 1 〇 as the i-th procedure., 2: 8;? Ϊ send to router 74_2 to 罾, to strengthen $. ^ Yu 疋 to the opposite of the above The process, that is, via the network point device 7-4, the router 19_13, 19_u, 2 &quot;, 19 9, 19, and the network point device 8-4, reaches the H323 terminal section 76_ 丨 (step s? 2). Furthermore, = S The unit 76_2 will inform the charging unit 72_2 of the function of the data files that are operating in the gateway 9-2, which contains the charging fees obtained in accordance with the above procedures, and the stupid blocks 48 ~ 14. The charging unit 72_2 is in the foregoing The analogy obtained = In the telephone communication between the telephone 18-5 and the analog telephone 18_6, the charge information of using the public switched telephone network 26-2 can be saved. ^ Shan, the above procedure analogizes the telephone 18-5 and the analog telephone 18-6. By transmitting and receiving the IP packet, telephone communication can be performed. The aforementioned step S72 is to cut off the confirmation information, that is, to notify the completion of the telephone communication between the analog telephone 8 8-5 and the analog telephone 18-6.

1245997 五、發明說明(69) 4:~13轉送的手'續’當網點裝 時,可將電話通信結束記錄 二=出JP封包48-13 二比電話機μ間的電話通信結束的事機18-5與 存於設定在網點裝置内部的收費記錄表上時刻一起保 透過二的話服務運用管理飼服器… m期㈣或&amp;時傳送接收詢問網 包:得前述電話通信開始記錄與電話通信 再者’ IP電.話服務運用管理伺、。朿°己錄。 詢問收費邻72 1里^服器36-i透過傳送接收 J门收賈472-1的IP封包,取得前述收費情 通信公司Y管理下的IP電話服務運用管理伺服器36门2透’ 周期性的或隨時傳送接收詢問網點裝置7_4的ιρ ,匕 取得前述電話通信開始記錄與電話通信結束記錄。匕以 IP電話服務運用管理伺服器3 6 _ 2透過傳送接收詢問收 72-2的IP封包,取得前述收費情報。 在以上所述的通信程序中,從閘道9 —i移除網域名稱 伺服器78-1,可將前述步驟S63至S65置換為下述步驟36仏 至S65x。亦即,H323終端部76-1將儲存類比電話機18 —5的 位址,也就是送信端IP位址&quot;A1 85”、IP電話網專用的網域 名稱祠服1§31-1的位址’也就是欠信端I p位址&quot;a 311&quot;、及 通信對象處電話號碼&quot;Tel-18-6 name”的ip封包48 —15,經 由網點裝置8-4傳送給網域名稱伺服器31-1(步驟S63x)。 IP電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器3 1 -1將包含有丨:i對 應於通信對象處電話號碼n Tel-18-6 name',的IP位址 &quot;Α186π之IP封包48_16送回至H323終端部76-1(步驟S65x)1245997 V. Description of the invention (69) 4: ~ 13 Transferred hand 'continued' When the outlet is installed, you can record the end of the telephone communication II = JP packet 48-13 The telephone communication between the two telephones μ is finished 18 -5 With the time record stored in the charge record set in the outlet device to ensure the management of the feeder through the two-call service ... m period or or & transmission and reception inquiry network packet: get the aforementioned telephone communication to start recording and telephone communication Furthermore, the management of IP telephony service applications.朿 ° has been recorded. Ask the toll neighbor 72 1 mile ^ server 36-i through transmission and reception of IP packets of J gate to receive 472-1, to obtain the IP phone service management server 36 under management of the aforementioned toll communication company Y. Periodical Or at any time to transmit and receive the lp of the inquiry network device 7_4, and obtain the aforementioned telephone communication start record and telephone communication end record. The IP server uses the management server 3 6 _ 2 to receive and receive the 72-2 IP packet by sending and receiving inquiries to obtain the aforementioned charging information. In the above-mentioned communication procedure, the domain name server 78-1 is removed from the gateway 9-i, and the foregoing steps S63 to S65 can be replaced by the following steps 36 仏 to S65x. That is, the H323 terminal unit 76-1 will store the address of the analog telephone 18-5, that is, the IP address of the sender &quot; A1 85 &quot;, the domain name dedicated to the IP telephone network, and 1§ 31-1. The IP address 48, which is the IP address of the untrusted terminal, "a 311", and the telephone number of the correspondent office "Tel-18-6 name", is transmitted to the network domain name through the network device 8-4. The server 31-1 (step S63x). The domain name server 3 1 -1 dedicated to the IP telephone network will return the IP packet 48_16 containing the IP address &quot; Α186π which contains 丨: i corresponding to the telephone number n Tel-18-6 name 'at the communication destination. H323 terminal section 76-1 (step S65x)

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第73頁 1245997 五、發明說明(70) 在以上所述之步驟s63至S65,或是S63x至S65x的手續 中’網點裝置8-4經由通信電路17-1及H323終端部76-1,2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 73 1245997 V. Description of the invention (70) In the above-mentioned steps s63 to S65, or S63x to S65x, the 'point device 8-4 via the communication circuit 17-1 And H323 terminal section 76-1,

透過檢查包含於在閘道内的網域名稱伺服器78-1上產生的 IP封包48-3内之送信端位址&quot;A781&quot;與通信電路識別記號 ’’Line-17-1”的組合是否被登錄於位址管理表44 —2(圖69) 上,或者,網點裝置8 —4透過檢查包含於在H323終端部 76-1上產生的ip封包48 — 15内的送信端位址&quot;A185”與通信 電路識別記號&quot;Line-17-1&quot;的組合是否被登錄於位址管理 表44-2(圖69)上,類比電話機is-5由通信電路17-1經由網 點裝置8 - 4的通彳§被許可。也就是,確認通信許可登錄。 &lt;〈電話服務運用管理伺服器〉〉 通信公司X管理下的丨!&gt;電話服務運用管理伺服器36 —i 透過周期性的或隨時傳送接收詢問網點裝置8 —2及8 —4等会 IP封包,以取得前述電話通信開始記錄與電話通信結束i 錄。又,透過傳送接收ICMP封包等方法檢查通信公司乂管 理的IP電話網的内部資源,例如路由器19 —8、、 19-10、網域名稱伺服器、路由器間 否正常(故障管理),並且,透過龄损口冤路等疋 田禾、μ认始枕广尤 迓迺皿視1Ρ電話網内的IP封^By checking whether the combination of the sender address &quot; A781 &quot; in the IP packet 48-3 included in the domain name server 78-1 in the gateway and the communication circuit identification mark `` Line-17-1 '' is It is registered on the address management table 44-2 (Fig. 69), or the branch device 8-4 checks the sender address contained in the ip packet 48-15 generated on the H323 terminal section 76-1 &quot; Is the combination of "A185" and the communication circuit identification code "Line-17-1" registered on the address management table 44-2 (Fig. 69), and the analog telephone is-5 is communicated by the communication circuit 17-1 via the branch device 8- The ultimatum of 4 is permitted. That is, the communication permission registration is confirmed. &lt; <telephone service operation management server >> Managed by the communication company X! &gt; The telephone service operation management server 36 -i will periodically or at any time send and receive inquiries to the network device 8-2 and 8-4. IP packet to obtain the aforementioned telephone communication start record and telephone communication end record. In addition, the internal resources of the IP telephone network managed by the communication company such as routers 19-8, 19-10, domain name servers, and routers are normal (fault management) by sending and receiving ICMP packets and other methods. Through the age loss and other injustices, Putianhe and μ recognized the IP address of the IP phone network in the 1P phone network ^

疋否過於擁擠(通信品質管理),一元 t H 们連用官理通^ &gt; 同樣地,通信公司γ管理下的1?電話服務 服器36-2透過周期性的或隨時傳送接收詢 e ;疋 Is it too crowded (communication quality management), unary t H use the official management ^ &gt; Similarly, 1? Telephone service server 36-2 under the management of the communication company γ through periodic or at any time to receive inquiries e;

1245997 五、發明說明(71) 通信結束記錄,一元化的運用管理通信公司Y的I p電話網 的故障管理或通信品質。 再者,上述手續中,也可省略步驟s 68中的電話通信 開始記錄,及步驟S72中的電話通信結束記錄,此時,可 省略經由通信公司X或通信公司γ的電話通信開始記錄與電 話通信結束記錄的取得。另外,I p電話服務運用管理伺服 器36-1及36-2可區分為分別用以專門管理ip電話服務的Ip 電話服務伺服器與專門管理I P電話網之資源的I P電話網運 用管理伺服器。 3 ·使用閘道的第3實施例 參照圖71 ’經由在C A T V通信網的内部使用本發明的媒 體路由器,說明適用於IP轉送網的終端間通信接續的第3 實施例。 媒體路由器115係位於CATV網1 13-1内部的CATV閘道 113-2的内部,經由通信電路丨12被接續至統合Ip轉送網 11 0内部的網點裝置111,再者,媒體路由器11 5經由catV 電路介面114、CATV電路119 -1至119-4中之任一個,接續1245997 V. Description of the invention (71) End of communication records, unified management of fault management or communication quality of the IP telephone network of communication company Y. Moreover, in the above procedure, the telephone communication start record in step s 68 and the telephone communication end record in step S72 may be omitted. At this time, the telephone communication start record and the telephone through the communication company X or the communication company γ may be omitted. Acquisition of communication end record. In addition, the IP phone service operation management servers 36-1 and 36-2 can be divided into an IP phone service server specifically used to manage the IP phone service and an IP phone network operation management server dedicated to manage the resources of the IP phone network. . 3 · Third embodiment using a gateway Referring to Fig. 71 ', a third embodiment of communication connection between terminals suitable for an IP transfer network will be described by using the media router of the present invention in a CATV communication network. The media router 115 is located inside the CATV gateway 113-2 inside the CATV network 1 13-1, and is connected to the network point device 111 inside the integrated IP transfer network 110 through the communication circuit 丨 12. Furthermore, the media router 115 is connected via Any of catV circuit interface 114 and CATV circuit 119-1 to 119-4, continued

至IP終端116-1至116-3、類比電話機Π7、非獨立型ip電 話機118-1、非獨立型IP聲音影像裝置118_2 qCATV電路 119-1至119-4係包含CATV電路特有的通信下位層(通信物 理層及資料鏈結層),同時具有在通信網路中轉送Ip封包 的機能。從IP終端11 6-1被傳送的I p封包經由CATV電路 11 9_1輸入至CATV電路介面114,在此IP封包被取出並被送 至媒體路由器115。媒體路由器ι15與圖6之媒體路由器To IP terminals 116-1 to 116-3, analog phones Π7, dependent IP phones 118-1, dependent IP audio and video devices 118_2 qCATV circuits 119-1 to 119-4 contain lower communication layers unique to CATV circuits (Communication physical layer and data link layer), and also has the function of forwarding IP packets in the communication network. The IP packet transmitted from the IP terminal 11 6-1 is input to the CATV circuit interface 114 via the CATV circuit 11 9_1, where the IP packet is taken out and sent to the media router 115. Media router ι15 and the media router in Figure 6

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第75頁 1245997 五、發明說明(72) I 4- 1具有相同的構成,且與丨4-丨有相同的機能,例如,包 含網域名稱飼服器。因此,媒體路由器11 5將包含呼叫控 制資料的IP封包變換成DNS詢問應答形式資料,可送出給 通信電路112,再者,從類比電話機Π7、非獨立型IP電 話機118-1、或非獨立型IP聲音影像裝置118_2,經由CATV 電路119-2至119-4、CATV電路介面114輸入的IP封包,經 由媒體路由器11 5被傳送至通信電路11 2。另行,相反 地,也就是從網點裝置111經由通信電路Π 2被傳送的I p封 包可經由媒體路由器115、CATV電路介面11 4、然後經 CATV電路119-1至119-4之任一個,被傳送至ip終端116 -1 、類比電話機11 7、非獨立型I p電話機11 8 -1、及非獨立 型IP聲音影像裝置118-2的其中之一。 根據以上所述的原理,CATV網113-1内部的IP終端 116-1、類比電話機117、非獨立型ip電話機η 8-1、非獨 立型IP聲音影像裝置11 8 - 2係經由統合I p轉送網11 〇,如 在其他實施例中說明的一樣,使用統合丨p轉送網内部的網 域名稱伺服器,被接續至統合IP轉送網1丨〇的其他各種終 端’也就是IP終端或類比電話機、IP電話機、IP聲音影像 裝置等終端,可進行終端間通信。 IP終端116-1係經由CATV電路119-1、CATV間道113-2 ’將通信對象處的IP終端之主機名稱提示給統合IP轉送網 II 0内部的網域名稱伺服器’以取得該對象處的I p終端之 IP位址’接著’經由從IP終端116-1傳送資料給該對象處 的IP終端’可進行傳送接收資料的終端間通信。同樣地,2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 75 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (72) I 4- 1 has the same structure and the same functions as 丨 4- 丨, for example, it contains a domain name feeder. Therefore, the media router 115 converts the IP packet containing the call control data into DNS query response format data, which can be sent to the communication circuit 112, and further, from the analog phone Π7, the non-independent IP phone 118-1, or the non-independent type The IP audio and video device 118_2 receives the IP packets input through the CATV circuits 119-2 to 119-4 and the CATV circuit interface 114, and transmits them to the communication circuit 112 through the media router 115. In addition, on the contrary, the IP packet transmitted from the branch point device 111 via the communication circuit UI 2 can be passed through the media router 115, the CATV circuit interface 11 4, and then any of the CATV circuits 119-1 to 119-4. It is transmitted to one of the ip terminal 116-1, the analog phone 117, the non-stand-alone IP phone 11 8-1, and the non-stand-alone IP audio-visual device 118-2. According to the above-mentioned principle, the IP terminal 116-1, the analog telephone 117, the non-stand-alone IP phone η 8-1, and the non-stand-alone IP audio and video device 11 8-2 in the CATV network 113-1 pass through the integrated IP. The forwarding network 11 〇, as explained in the other embodiments, uses the domain name server inside the integrated IP forwarding network, which is connected to other various terminals of the integrated IP forwarding network 1 丨 aka IP terminals or analogy. Terminals such as telephones, IP telephones, and IP audio and video devices can perform inter-terminal communication. The IP terminal 116-1 is obtained through the CATV circuit 119-1 and the CATV channel 113-2 'prompts the host name of the IP terminal at the communication target to the domain name server inside the integrated IP forwarding network II 0' to obtain the target The IP address of the IP terminal at the location is then transmitted to and from the IP terminal at the target via the IP terminal 116-1 to perform the inter-terminal communication. Similarly,

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第76頁 1245997 I、發明說明(73) ' 類比電話機117經由CATV電路119-2、CATV閘道113-2,將 通化對象處的類比電話機的主機名稱,也就是該對象處電 話機的電話號碼,提示給統合〗p轉送網丨丨〇内部的網域名 稱伺服器’以取得該對象處電話機的〗p位址。接著,經由 從類比電話機11 7與該對象處類比電話機間傳送接收聲音 資料,可進行電話通信。同樣地,非獨立型丨p電話機 118-1經由CATV電路119-3、CATV閘道113-2,將通信對象 處的類比電話機啲主機名稱,也就是該對象處電話機的電 話號碼’提示給統合I P轉送網1 1 〇内部的網域名稱伺服 器,以取得該對象處電話機的丨P位址。接著,經由從非獨&gt; 立型I P電話機11 8-1與該對象處類比電話機間傳送接收聲 音資料,可進行電話通信。 4 ·使用具有無線介面之閘道的第4實施例 參照圖7 2,將終端收容無線裝置組合至本發明之閘道 上,說明使用IP轉送網之終端間通信接續的第4實施例。 1 2 0係統合I P轉送網、1 21係網點裝置、1 2 2係閘道、 12 3係無線送受信部、1 2 4 -1係無線介面變換部、1 2 4 _ 2係 通信電路、1 25係無線通信路、1 26係終端收容無線裝置、 1 2 7係無線送受信部、1 2 8 -1係IP終端、1 2 8 - 2係非獨立型 IP電話機、128-3係非獨立型IP聲音影像裝置、i29_l至 1 2 9 - 3係無線介面變換部。閘道1 2 2包含與圖51之閘道9 -1 相同的機能,當IP終端、Η 3 2 3終端、或類比電話機等終 端,經由通信電路1 2 4 - 2而接續時,可用於終端間通信。 因此’透過通信電路124-2接續IP終端、ip電話機或2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 76 1245997 I. Description of the invention (73) 'The analog telephone 117 passes the CATV circuit 119-2 and the CATV gateway 113-2 to the host name of the analog telephone at the communication target, also It is the telephone number of the telephone at the object, and it is prompted to unify the domain name server 'inside the p-forwarding network' to obtain the p-address of the telephone at the object. Then, voice data is transmitted and received between the analog telephone set 107 and the analog telephone set of the subject, and telephone communication can be performed. Similarly, the non-stand-alone phone 118-1, via the CATV circuit 119-3 and the CATV gateway 113-2, presents the analog phone at the communication target to the host name, that is, the telephone number of the telephone at the target. A domain name server inside the IP forwarding network 110 to obtain the IP address of the telephone at the target. Then, by transmitting and receiving audio data from the non-standalone &gt; IP phone 11 8-1 and the analog phone at the target, telephone communication can be performed. 4 · A fourth embodiment using a gateway with a wireless interface Referring to Fig. 72, a terminal-receiving wireless device is combined with the gateway of the present invention, and a fourth embodiment of communication connection between terminals using an IP transfer network will be described. 1 2 0 system and IP transfer network, 1 21 series network point device, 1 2 2 series gateway, 12 3 series wireless transmitting and receiving section, 1 2 4 -1 series wireless interface conversion section, 1 2 4 _ 2 series communication circuit, 1 25 series wireless communication path, 1 26 series terminal housing wireless device, 1 2 7 series wireless transmitting and receiving department, 1 2 8 -1 series IP terminal, 1 2 8-2 series non-standalone IP phone, 128-3 series non standalone IP audio and video equipment, i29_1 to 1 2-9-3 wireless interface conversion unit. Gateway 1 2 2 contains the same function as gateway 9 -1 in Figure 51. When terminals such as IP terminals, Η 3 2 3 terminals, or analog telephones are connected via communication circuit 1 2 4-2, they can be used for terminals. Intercommunication. Therefore, through the communication circuit 124-2, an IP terminal, an IP phone, or

1245997 五、發明說明(74) I P聲音影像裝置,可進行終端間通信 欠從IP終端128-1被送出的DNS詢問應答形式的資料或文 字資料在無線介面變換部129-1被變換成無線送受信部的 輸入資料形式,並被輸入至無線送受信部丨27,經由無線 通信路125被送至無線送受信部123,在無線介面變換'部 124-1中被變換成可輸入至閘道的ιρ封包的資料形式,再 經由通信電路124-2被送至閘道丨22。從非獨立型Ip電話機 128-2被送出的電話之呼叫控制用的資料或被傳送接收以 數位方式表現的聲音資料,在無線介面變換部129 — 2被變 換成無線送受信部的輸入資料形式,並被輸入至無線送受 信部127,接著分別經由無線通信路125、無線% ^ # 123、無線介面變換部124 —i、通信電路124-2,變成β可輸 入至閘道的ip封包的資料形式,而被送至閘道122。從 =聲音影像裝置128-3被送出的1?聲音影像裝置之 呼叫控制用的資料或被傳送接收以數位方式表現的聲音盥 料眘在無線介面變換部129—3被變換成無線送、 ^^1入一料形式,並被輸入至無線送受信部1 27 , = 封包的資料形弋通%\電路124一2,變成可輸入至間道的ΙΡ 封匕的貝科形式,而被送至閘道122。另外,反方 料流程,例如來自網點穿:詈】? 、貝 由閘道122、㈣電話用之㈣包係經 路124—2、無線介面變換糊-!、I ί;”部123、無線通信路125、無線送受信部127、: 線介面變換部129-2,而到達非獨立型又J機 無 第78頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(75) 再者’被接續至終端收容無線裝置126的IP終端128 -1 、非獨立型IP電話機128-2、非獨立型IP聲音影像裝置 128-3,經由統合IP轉送網120可與被接續至統合Ip轉送網 120的其他各種終端,亦即ip終端、類比電話機、ιρ電話 機或IP聲音影像裝置等終端,進行終端間通信。 ° 5 ·閘道之構造不同的第5實施例 本實施例為與第2實施例之圖5 1所示的閘道9 —!之構造 不同的其他實施例,參照圖73加以說明。 9-5為閘道、74-5為路由器、78_5為網域名稱伺服 器、79-5為管理對閘道9_5的終端的登錄與認證、與閘道 9-5的内部狀態(例如通信狀態、休止狀態)的ras機構。在 此,所謂「終端的登錄」為將終端接續至開道,所謂「認 証」係表不根據終端的接續許可條件確認終端是否可正常 地利用。80-5係掌管閘道9_5内部的情報處理之 機構,81-5係間道9-5的操作輸出入 82-3係H323通信寇床田从日日#*/ 丁队買’ H323接續控制部,二用㈣23, 82-4係SIP通信程序用門H f端部,77_3係SCN介面’ &gt; 76-4#,SIP^^^/7'GW) * IP終端的IP通信電路二3 37: = CN介面。52_3係可接續 話機的通信電路,3通信程序之1p電 的通信電路,113、17^^接續SIP通信程序之1P電話機 通信電路。 刀別係連接至公眾交換電話網的 圖73的閘道9-5可能蛊笛 月匕興第2實施例的圖51的閘道9-1置 2049-3793-PF : RAY.ptd 第79頁 1245997 五、發明說明(76) 換,路由器74-5可能與路由器74-1置換,網域名稱词服器 78-5可能與網域名稱伺服器78-1置換,1^3機構79-5可能 與RAS機構79-1置換,情報處理機構80-5可能與情報處理 機構80-1置換,操作輸出入部81-5可能與操作輸出入部 81-1置換,收費部72-5可能與收費部72-1置換,H323接續 控制部7 5 - 3可能與Η 3 2 3接續控制部7 5 -1置換,Η 3 2 3終端部 76-3可能與Η323終端部76-1置換,SCN介面77-3可與SCN介1245997 V. Description of the invention (74) The IP audio and video device can perform inter-terminal communication. The DNS query response data or text data sent from the IP terminal 128-1 is converted into wireless transmission and reception by the wireless interface conversion unit 129-1. The input data format of the communication unit is input to the wireless transmission and reception unit 丨 27, and is transmitted to the wireless transmission and reception unit 123 via the wireless communication path 125, and is converted into a ιρ packet that can be input to the gateway in the wireless interface conversion unit 124-1. The data format is transmitted to the gate 22 via the communication circuit 124-2. In the wireless interface conversion unit 129-2, the data for call control of the telephone sent from the non-stand-alone IP telephone 128-2 or the voice data transmitted and received in digital form is converted into the input data format of the wireless transmission and reception unit. And is input to the wireless transmitting and receiving unit 127, and then passes through the wireless communication path 125, wireless% ^ 123, wireless interface conversion unit 124-i, and communication circuit 124-2, and becomes the data format of the ip packet that can be input to the gateway. , And was sent to the gate 122. The data for call control of 1? Audiovisual equipment sent from = audiovisual equipment 128-3, or the digitally expressed voice toiletry is transmitted and received in the wireless interface conversion unit 129-3. ^ 1 Enter a material form and input it to the wireless transmitting and receiving department 1 27, = the data of the packet is transmitted% \ circuit 124-2, and it becomes a Beco form which can be input to the IP packet of the intervening channel, and is sent to Gateway 122. In addition, the anti-characteristic process, such as from outlets wear: 詈]? 、 Beyond the gate 122, the telephone package is via the route 124-2, the wireless interface conversion paste-!, I ”; 123, the wireless communication path 125, the wireless transmission and reception unit 127 ,: the line interface conversion unit 129 -2, and reach the non-independent type and J machine without p. 78 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (75) Furthermore, 'the IP terminal 128-1 which is connected to the terminal receiving wireless device 126, Non-independent IP phone 128-2 and non-independent IP audio and video device 128-3 can be connected to other various terminals connected to the integrated IP forwarding network 120 through the integrated IP forwarding network 120, that is, IP terminals, analog telephones, ιρ A terminal such as a telephone or an IP audio and video device performs communication between the terminals. ° 5 · Fifth embodiment having a different structure of the gateway This embodiment has a structure of the gateway 9 —! Shown in FIG. 51 of the second embodiment. Different other embodiments will be described with reference to Fig. 73. 9-5 is a gateway, 74-5 is a router, 78_5 is a domain name server, 79-5 is a management terminal for login and authentication to the gateway 9_5, and The ras mechanism of the internal state of the gateway 9-5 (such as a communication state and a rest state). Here The so-called "terminal login" to continue to the end to clear the way, the so-called "certification" system table does not confirm whether the terminal can be used normally in accordance with the license conditions continue terminals. The 80-5 department is in charge of the intelligence processing inside the gateway 9_5. The operation output of the 81-5 department between the 9-5 is input to the 82-3 department H323 communication. 23, 82-4 series SIP communication program door H f end, 77_3 series SCN interface '&76; 4 #, SIP ^^^ / 7'GW) * IP communication circuit of IP terminal 2 3 37: = CN interface. 52_3 series can be connected to the communication circuit of the telephone, 1p communication circuit of the 3 communication program, 113, 17 ^^ 1P telephone communication circuit of the SIP communication program. The gateway 9-5 of FIG. 73 connected to the public switched telephone network may be the gateway 9-1 of FIG. 51 of the second embodiment 2049-3793-PF: RAY.ptd page 79 1245997 V. Description of the invention (76) Exchange, router 74-5 may be replaced with router 74-1, domain name server 78-5 may be replaced with domain name server 78-1, 1 ^ 3 agency 79-5 May be replaced with RAS agency 79-1, information processing agency 80-5 may be replaced with information processing agency 80-1, operation input / output section 81-5 may be replaced with operation input / output section 81-1, and charge section 72-5 may be replaced with charge section 72-1 replacement, H323 connection control unit 7 5-3 may be replaced with Η 3 2 3 connection control unit 7 5 -1, Η 3 2 3 terminal unit 76-3 may be replaced with Η323 terminal unit 76-1, SCN interface 77 -3 can be introduced with SCN

面77-1的機能置換。由此,在圖73的閘道9-5置換為圖51 的閘道9-1後,將IP終端接續至IP通信電路52-3處,並將 H323通信程序的IP電話!機接續至通信電路53-3處,將類 比電話機接續至通信電路17-3處,經由閘道9-5,與連接 至統合IP轉送網2的第2實施例之圖52的終端11-1〇、18-6 等接續,而可進行通信。H323-GW 82-3為&quot;H323通信程序 用的閘道通信介面機能部&quot;。 H323-GW 82-3及SIP-GW 82-4係對應於2個通信程序所 提供的通信電路介面。未來開發出新的通信方法時,在閉 道82-3及8 2-4的位置上,可增設新的通信方法用的閘道。 透過包含通信程序的複數種閘道通信介面機能部,可對應 於各種通信程序的電話接續控制。 6.使用電話管理伺服器的第6實施例 在圖74中,201係統合IP通信網,202係IP資料網, 203係IP電話網,204係聲音影像網,206- 1係通信公司1運 用管理的統合IP通信網的範圍,20 6-2係通信公司2運用管 理的統合IP通信網的範圍。參照圖74及圖75,說明電話通The function of surface 77-1 is replaced. Therefore, after the gateway 9-5 in FIG. 73 is replaced with the gateway 9-1 in FIG. 51, the IP terminal is connected to the IP communication circuit 52-3, and the IP telephone of the H323 communication program is connected! The receiver is connected to the communication circuit 53-3, the analog telephone is connected to the communication circuit 17-3, and the gateway 11-1 of FIG. 52 is connected to the second embodiment of the integrated IP transfer network 2 through the gateway 9-5. 〇, 18-6, etc., and can communicate. H323-GW 82-3 is "Gateway communication interface function department" for H323 communication program. H323-GW 82-3 and SIP-GW 82-4 correspond to the communication circuit interfaces provided by two communication programs. When a new communication method is developed in the future, a gateway for a new communication method can be added to the closed positions 82-3 and 8 2-4. Through a plurality of gateway communication interface function units including communication programs, telephone connection control corresponding to various communication programs can be performed. 6. The sixth embodiment using the telephone management server In FIG. 74, the 201 system is combined with the IP communication network, the 202 is an IP data network, the 203 is an IP telephone network, the 204 is an audio and video network, and the 206-1 is used by the communication company The range of the integrated IP communication network to be managed, 20 6-2 is the range of the integrated IP communication network that the communication company 2 uses to manage. Referring to Fig. 74 and Fig. 75, the telephone communication will be described.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第80頁 1245997 五、發明說明(77) 的準備說明從類比電話機2 1 3 - 5、經由媒體路由器 邱^通信電路21〇-1、網點裝置208-丨、IP電話網203内 。,到網點裝置209_2、通信電路21〇_5、媒體路由器 接續押制類Λ電話士機214-4 ’以進行電話通信之終端間通信 控制方法。在此、221_丨為各種路由 器,另外各種伺服器被設置在統合Ιρ通信網2〇1的内部, t種伺服器被授與”位址。如圖74所示,各種伺服器、路 ▲器、網點裝置.經由各種IP通信電路被接續。透過各ιρ通 信手段傳送接收IP封包,可進行資料交換。2094及2〇9 2 為電話閘道,例如從類比電話機2〇9_4經由公眾交換電話 網209-3可進行電話通信,與此相關者在其他實施例中加 以說明。再者,電話管理伺服器3135、314_5係大略相當 於圖1的接續伺服器1-5及卜6。閘道2〇9_1及2〇9_2係大略 相當於圖1的中繼接續伺服器卜7,這些閘道的機能在其他 實施例中加以說明。 213-1及214-1係收容類比電話機的?6又,213 — 2至213一 6及214-2至214-6為類比電話機。電話機213-2及213-3被 接續至PBX 213-1,電話機214-2及214-3係被接續至PBX 214-1 ’電話機213 -4至213-6被接續至媒體路由器212, 電話機214-4至214-6被接續至媒體路由器212-2。 媒體路由器212-1被授與ip位址&quot;EA01&quot;,而媒體路由 器212-2被授與IP位址πΕΑ02η。電話機213-4至213-6被授 與代表電話號碼’’Tel-No-Γ,電話機214-4至214-6被授與 代表電話號碼ffTel-No-2&quot;,電話機213-2、213-3、214-22049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 80 1245997 V. Preparation of the description of the invention (77) From the analog telephone 2 1 3-5, via the media router Qiu ^ communication circuit 21〇-1, the branch device 208- 丨, IP telephone network 203. To the branch office device 209_2, the communication circuit 21〇_5, and the media router, the method of controlling the inter-terminal communication for telephone communication of the type Λ telephone driver 214-4 'is carried out. Here, 221_ 丨 are various routers. In addition, various servers are set inside the integrated IP communication network 201, and t servers are given "addresses." As shown in Fig. 74, various servers and routers Are connected through various IP communication circuits. IP packets are transmitted and received through various communication methods, and data exchange can be performed. 2094 and 2092 are telephone gateways, for example, from the analog telephone 2009_4 to exchange telephones through the public. The network 209-3 can perform telephone communication, and related parties will be described in other embodiments. Furthermore, the telephone management servers 3135 and 314_5 are roughly equivalent to the connection servers 1-5 and 6 of FIG. 1. Gateway 2009_1 and 2009_2 are roughly equivalent to the relay connection server 7 in Fig. 1. The functions of these gateways will be described in other embodiments. 213-1 and 214-1 are the analog telephones? , 213 — 2 to 213-6 and 214-2 to 214-6 are analog telephones. Telephones 213-2 and 213-3 are connected to PBX 213-1, and telephones 214-2 and 214-3 are connected to PBX 214. -1 'Phones 213-4 to 213-6 are connected to the media router 212, and phones 214-4 to 214 -6 is connected to the media router 212-2. The media router 212-1 is assigned the ip address &quot; EA01 &quot;, and the media router 212-2 is assigned the IP address πΕΑ02η. The telephones 213-4 to 213-6 are assigned The delegate's telephone number `` Tel-No-Γ, telephones 214-4 to 214-6 are delegated to the telephone number ffTel-No-2 &quot;, and the telephones 213-2, 213-3, 214-2

1245997 五、發明說明(78) 、214 - 3分別被授與内線電話號碼&quot;2132”、π2133π、”2142 &quot;、”2143π。内線用的電話機213-2及213-3並不從媒體路 由器21 2-1與IP電話網2〇3側的電話機通信,同樣地,内線 用的電話機21 4-2及214-3不從媒體路由器212-2與IP電話 網203側的電話機通信。 &lt;&lt;電話通信的準備〉〉 希望使用IP電話的使用者227 - 1向屬於通信公司1的ip 電話受理者228-1請求使用ip電話服務(圖75的步驟 P100),IP電話受理者2 2 8-1從使用者227-1處取得IP電話 請求情報之使用者姓名與住址、通信費用的支付方法、使 用者的電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-Γ,並將授與媒體路由器212 -1 的外部IP位址&quot;ΕΑ0Γ、使用者用以接續媒體路由器212-1 的通信電路21 0-1的識別記號&quot;L21 0-1”、及此通信電路 210-1接續網點裝置208-1的網點裝置識別記號” NN —208-1 &quot;,通知使用者服務伺服器313-6 (步驟P1 〇1)。在此,使用 者227-1將IP位址&quot;ΕΑ0Γ提示給IP電話受理者228 — 1。 使用者將對應於使用者電話號碼&quot;Tel_N〇—丨,,的ιρ位址 1A01&quot;設定於媒體路由器212-i。接著,使用者服務伺服 器31 3-6將用以識別受理之電話使用者的使用者識別記號 &quot;UID-1&quot;授與使用者227-1,&quot;uuy&quot;被對應於外部1?位址 E A 0 Γ1 ,決定使用者2 2 7 -1用的内部! p位址&quot;丨a 〇 J &quot;,將前 述觉理得到的使用者姓名或住址、通信費用的支付方法、 使用者電話號碼π Tel-Νο-Γ、外部ip位址” EA〇1,,等情報, 一起保存於使用者服務伺服器之資料庫中(步驟pl〇2)。由1245997 V. Invention Description (78) and 214-3 were granted extension telephone numbers &quot; 2132 &quot;, π2133π, &quot; 2142 &quot;, and &quot; 2143π. 21 2-1 communicates with the telephone set on the IP telephone network 203 side. Similarly, the telephones 21 4-2 and 214-3 for the extension line do not communicate with the telephone set on the IP telephone network 203 side through the media router 212-2. &Lt; &lt; Preparation for telephone communication >〉 The user 227-1 who wishes to use the IP telephone requests the IP telephone acceptor 228-1 belonging to the communication company 1 to use the IP telephone service (step P100 in FIG. 75), and the IP telephone acceptor 2 2 8-1 The name and address of the user who obtained the IP phone request information from the user 227-1, the method of payment of the communication fee, the user's phone number &quot; Tel-No-Γ, and will be awarded to the media router 212 -1 External IP address &quot; ΕΑ0Γ &quot;, an identification mark &quot; L21 0-1 &quot; used by the user to connect to the communication circuit 210-1 of the media router 212-1, and this communication circuit 210-1 to connect to the network device 208-1 Network device identification mark "NN —208-1", notifying the user service server 3 13-6 (Step P1 〇1). Here, the user 227-1 presents the IP address &quot; ΕΑ0Γ to the IP phone receiver 228 — 1. The user will correspond to the user's phone number &quot; Tel_N〇-- 丨,, ιρAddress 1A01 &quot; is set to the media router 212-i. Then, the user service server 31 3-6 grants the user identification code &quot; UID-1 &quot; for identifying the telephone user accepted The person 227-1, &quot; uuy &quot; is corresponded to the external 1? Address EA 0 Γ1, and determines the internal used by the user 2 2 7 -1! The p address &quot; 丨 a 〇J &quot; User name or address, payment method of communication fee, user phone number π Tel-Νο-Γ, external IP address "EA〇1", and other information are stored together in the database of the user service server ( Step pl02). by

I麵I side

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第82頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 82 1245997

於電話機213-5使用對應於電話號碼,,1^11〇—1”的外部位 址π E A Ο 1π ’因而在使用〗p電話網2 〇 3的電話通信中,電話 機213-5的外部ip位址表現為” EA〇1 ”。 器31 3-6至少將前述請求者的 、外部IP位址’fEA01&quot;、内部IP 信方法的電話管理伺服器31 3 - 其次,使用者服務伺服 使用者電話號碼’’Tel-No -1’1 位址’’ ΙΑ0Γ,通知使用IP通 5(步驟P103)。Use the external address π EA 〇 1π corresponding to the telephone number for the telephone 213-5, so ^ EA 〇 1π 'Therefore, in the telephone communication using the telephone network 2 03, the external IP of the telephone 213-5 The address is expressed as "EA〇1". Device 31 3-6 will at least include the requester's external IP address' fEA01 &quot; and internal IP address method of the phone management server 31 3-Second, the user service server user The telephone number `` Tel-No -1'1 address '' ΙΑ0Γ informs the use of IP communication 5 (step P103).

電話I管理伺最器313 —5將此三種情報,也就是使用者 ,電話號碼&quot;Tel-Νο-Γ、外部ip位址&quot;EA〇1&quot;、及内部ιρ位址 IA0 Γ之相互對應的i組情報通知電話網域名稱伺服器 313-2(步驟Pl〇5)。電話網域名稱伺服器313_2根據以 RFn 996等定義的網域名稱伺服器的運用規則之資源記錄 等形式,保存使用者電話號碼&quot;Tel—No-丨”及„外部ιρ位址&quot; 與11内部IP位址&quot;(步驟p丨〇 6 )。 另外’電話官理伺服器313 - 5將4個位址,,EA01、EA81 、IA01、ΙΑ8Γ通知表管理伺服器313一3(步驟ρι〇7)。再 者電話$理飼服器31 3 - 5經常保存代理電話管理伺服器 313-1的外部ip位址&quot;EA81&quot;及内部1?位址&quot;ia8i&quot;。The telephone I management server 313-5 corresponds to the three types of information, namely the user, the telephone number &quot; Tel-Nο-Γ, the external IP address &quot; EA〇1 &quot;, and the internal ιρ address IA0 Γ. The i group of information notifies the telephone domain name server 313-2 (step P05). The telephone domain name server 313_2 saves the user's phone number &quot; Tel-No- 丨 &quot; and &quot; external address &quot; according to the resource record of the operating rules of the domain name server defined by RFn 996, etc., and 11 internal IP address &quot; (step p 丨 〇6). In addition, the telephone management server 313-5 notifies the table management servers 313-3 of the four addresses, EA01, EA81, IA01, and IA8Γ (step p7). In addition, the telephone management server 31 3-5 often stores the external IP address &quot; EA81 &quot; and the internal 1 &quot; ia8i &quot; of the agent telephone management server 313-1.

當表官理伺服器313 —3係對網點裝置2〇8 —i通知前述4 個位址&quot;EA01、EA81、IA01、IA81 &quot;時(步驟ρι〇8),網點身 置208-1保存圖76所示之網點裝置2 08 — !内部的位址管理^ 360- 1的第1記錄所示之4個位址ΠΕΑ〇1、ea8i &quot;(步驟P109)。在此,位址”IA〇1 ”係授與通信電路2i〇y 、周點裝置208- 1的接續點(邏輯端子)的1?位址,以下,稱 1245997When the watch server 313-3 informs the outlet device 2008-i of the aforementioned four addresses &quot; EA01, EA81, IA01, IA81 &quot; (step ρι〇8), the outlet is stored in 208-1 The point device 2 08 shown in FIG. 76 — Internal address management ^ 360-1 shows four addresses ΠΑΑΙ, ea8i &quot; (step P109). Here, the address "IA〇1" is the address of the connection point (logic terminal) of the communication circuit 2i0y and the cycle device 208-1, hereinafter referred to as 1245997.

為授與通信電路210-1的邏輯端子之内部IP位址。再者, 在此時點,位址管理表360- 1的第2行的記錄變成空白。 月’J述位址管理表3 6 0 -1的第1行的記錄稱為網點裝置的 位址管理表的I P通信記錄,其係根據送信端外部丨p位址 &quot;EA01&quot;、受信端外部IP位址&quot;EA81&quot;、送信端内部1?位址 &quot;I A0 Γ、受信端内部丨p位址”丨A8丨”加以定義。此丨p通信記 錄特別被稱為決定代理電話管理伺服器3 1 3 -1與媒體路由 器2 1 2- 1間的Ip通信路之網點裝置的位址管理表的丨p通信 記錄。It is the internal IP address of the logic terminal of the communication circuit 210-1. Furthermore, at this point, the record in the second line of the address management table 360-1 becomes blank. The record of the first line of the address management table 3 6 0 -1 of the month is called the IP communication record of the address management table of the network device, which is based on the external address of the sending end, the p address &quot; EA01 &quot;, and the receiving end. The external IP address &quot; EA81 &quot;, the internal 1? Address of the sender &quot; I A0 Γ, the internal of the receiver 丨 p address "丨 A8 丨" are defined. This communication record is particularly referred to as the communication record for determining the address management table of the network device of the IP communication path between the agent telephone management server 3 1 3 -1 and the media router 2 1 2-1.

同樣地,希望使用IP電話的使用者227-2向屬於通信 公司2的IP電話受理者228-2請求使用IP電話服務(圖75的 步驟P110),IP電話受理者228-2從使用者227-2處取得IP 電話請求情報之使用者姓名與住址、通信費用的支付方 法、使用者的電話號碼” Tel-No-2,,,並將授與媒體路由器 212-2的外部IP位址&quot;EA02”、使用者用以接續媒體路由器 212-2的通信電路210-5的識別記號” L210-5,'、及此通信電 路210-5接續網點裝置2〇9-2的網點裝置識別記號 &quot;NN-209-2Π,通知使用者服務伺服器314一6(步驟P111)。Similarly, the user 227-2 wishing to use the IP phone requests the IP phone receiver 228-2 belonging to the communication company 2 to use the IP phone service (step P110 in FIG. 75), and the IP phone receiver 228-2 requests the user from the user 227 -2 users who have obtained IP phone request information, address, payment method of communication fee, user's phone number "Tel-No-2", and will be given an external IP address of Media Router 212-2 & quot "EA02", the identification code of the communication circuit 210-5 used by the user to connect the media router 212-2 "L210-5, ', and the identification code of the network device connected to the network device 209-2 by this communication circuit 210-5 &quot; NN-209-2Π, notify the user service server 314-6 (step P111).

在此,使用者227-2將IP位址,1 ΕΑ02&quot;提示給IP電話受 理者228-2。 使用者將對應於使用者電話號碼” Tel-No-2,,的IP位址 EA02 α又疋於媒體路由器212-2。接著,使用者服務祠服 器31 4-6將用以識別受理之電話使用者的使用者識別記號 UID-2&quot;授與使用者227-2,對應於外部IP位址” ΕΑ02,',決Here, the user 227-2 presents the IP address, 1 EA 02 &quot; to the IP telephone manager 228-2. The user will correspond to the user's phone number "Tel-No-2," and the IP address EA02 α will again be on the media router 212-2. Then, the user service server 31 4-6 will be used to identify the acceptance The user identification code UID-2 of the telephone user is granted to the user 227-2, corresponding to the external IP address "ΕΑ02, ', the decision

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第84頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 84 1245997

五、發明說明(81) 定使用者227-2用的内部IP位址&quot;IA02” ,將前述受理得到 的使用者姓名或住址、通信費用的支付方法、使用者電話 號碼&quot;Tel-No-2&quot;、外部IP位址&quot;EA02&quot;等情報,一起保存於 使用者服務伺服器之資料庫中(步驟P112)。由於電話機 214-4使用對應於電話號碼&quot;Tel-No —2”的外部位址&quot;e\〇2,, ’因而在使用IP電話網203的電話通信中,電話機214一4的 外部IP位址表現為ΠΕΑ02Π。V. Description of the invention (81) Specify the internal IP address &quot; IA02 &quot; for the user 227-2, the user name or address, the payment method of the communication fee, and the user's phone number &quot; Tel-No -2 &quot;, external IP address &quot; EA02 &quot; and other information are stored together in the database of the user service server (step P112). Since the telephone 214-4 uses the corresponding telephone number &quot; Tel-No —2 " The external address &quot; e \ 〇2, 'Therefore, in the telephone communication using the IP telephone network 203, the external IP addresses of the telephones 214 to 4 are represented as ΠΕΑ02Π.

其次’使用诸服務伺服器314 — 6至少將前述請求者的 使用者電話號碼&quot;Tel - No-2”、外部ip位址&quot;ΕΑ〇2&quot;、内部^ 位址&quot;ΙΑ02”,通知使用IP通信方法的電話管理伺服器 314-5(步驟P113)。電話管理伺服器314 —5將此三種情報, 也就是使用者電話號碼” Tel—No —2&quot;、外部1?位址,,εα〇2π、 =内部ΙΡ位址&quot;ΙΑ02&quot;,通知電話網域名稱飼服器3ΐ4-2(步 ,Ρ115)。電話網域名稱伺服器314一2根據資源記錄等形 式,保存使用者電話號碼&quot;Tel—N〇-2”及 與内部IP位址&quot;IA02”之相万斟雍^,达/ 之相互對應的1組情報(步驟P116)。 另外,電話官理伺服器314_5將4個位址 U02、IA82&quot;通知表管理伺服器314_3(步驟ριι^Α82Secondly, 'use the service servers 314-6 to notify at least the user's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot; of the aforementioned requester, external IP address &quot; ΕΑ〇2 &quot;, internal ^ address &quot; ΙΑ02 " The telephone management server 314-5 using the IP communication method (step P113). The telephone management server 314-5 informs the telephone network of these three kinds of information, that is, the user's telephone number "Tel-No-2", an external 1? Address, εα〇2π, = internal IP address &quot; ΙΑ02 &quot; Domain name feeder 3ΐ4-2 (step, P115). The telephone domain name server 314-2 saves the user's phone number &quot; Tel-N0-2 &quot; and the internal IP address &quot; IA02 "phase is a group of information that corresponds to each other (step P116). In addition, the telephone management server 314_5 sends the four addresses U02, IA82 &quot; to the notification table management server 314_3 (step ριι ^ Α82

飼服話/㈣服11314-5經常保存代理電話管理 Γ = Λ :ΙΡ位址及内部IP位址&quot;IA82&quot;。 電話肩域名稱伺服器313_2及314_2具有與在網際網 子使用的網域名稱飼服器相同機,且 要時,可相互$赵恭 巾吁出機此,且在必 驟^“)。 、電話網域名稱伺服器所具有的情報(步Feed service / service service 11314-5 often save agent phone management Γ = Λ: IP address and internal IP address &quot; IA82 &quot;. The phone shoulder domain name servers 313_2 and 314_2 have the same machine as the domain name feeder used in the Internet, and if necessary, they can call each other out of this place, and it is necessary to "^"). The information that the phone domain name server has (step

12459971245997

當表官理伺服器31 4-3係對網點裝置2〇9-2通知前述4 個位址&quot;EA02、EA82、IA02、IA821,時(步驟P118),網點裝 置209-2保存圖77所示之網點裝置2〇9-2内部的位址管理表 ^60 —2的第1記錄所示之4個位址&quot;EA〇2、EA82、IA〇2、U82 (步驟PI 19)。在此,位址” IA〇2&quot;係授與通信電路21〇 —5與 網點裝置209-2的接續點(邏輯端子)的1?位址。再者,在 此1點,位址管理表360-2的第2行的記錄變成空白。此ιρ 通,記錄特別是決定代理電話管理伺服器314 —丨與媒體路 ^器21 2-2間的IP通信路之網點裝置的位址管理表的1?通When the official server 31 4-3 informs the outlet device 209-2 of the aforementioned four addresses &quot; EA02, EA82, IA02, IA821, (step P118), the outlet device 209-2 saves Figure 77 The address management table ^ 60-2 shown in the outlet device 209-2 shown in the first record of the four addresses &quot; EA〇2, EA82, IA〇2, U82 (step PI 19). Here, the address "IA〇2" is the address of the connection point (logical terminal) of the communication circuit 21-0 and the network device 209-2. Furthermore, at this point, the address management table The record of the second line of 360-2 becomes blank. This is the address management table of the network device that determines the IP communication path between the agent telephone management server 314 and the media router 21 2-2. 1? Pass

&lt;&lt;通信路確立階段〉〉 參照圖74、圖76至圖78,說明從電話機213一5對電話 機14-4之電話呼出的終端間通信接續控制方法。 ,媒體路由器212-1保有電話號碼”1^11〇 — 1&quot;及外部1{) 止EA01 ,媒體路由器212-2保有電話號碼,,Tei-No - 2,, j外:IP位址&quot;EA02,、在電話機213_5與其他電話機通話 &quot;寻,使用被授與媒體路由器^2 — 〗的電話號碼&quot;TeiN〇i ’而當電話機214-4與其他電話機通話時,使用被授與媒 -路由器212-2的電話號碼” Tel_N〇_2&quot;。 八&lt; &lt; Communication channel establishment stage> &gt; With reference to Fig. 74, Fig. 76 to Fig. 78, a method for controlling communication connection between terminals of telephone calls from the telephone set 21-15 to the telephone set 14-4 will be described. The media router 212-1 holds the phone number "1 ^ 11〇-1" and external 1 {} to EA01, and the media router 212-2 holds the phone number, Tei-No-2, and j: IP address &quot; EA02, talk to other telephones on telephone 213_5 &quot; find, use the phone number &quot; TeiN〇i 'which is granted to the media router ^ 2 &quot; and use the authorized media when phone 214-4 is talking to other telephones -The telephone number of the router 212-2 "Tel_N0_2 &quot;. Eight

&lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉 入通ΐίί電話機21 3 —5的送受話器(離鉤),撥號幸 〇通化對象處電話機214 —4的電話號碼” Tel—Ν〇_2,,,舍 竺至媒體路由器2丨2 —i時(步驟ρ2〇〇),媒體路 田 答(步驟Ρ201)。 田1&lt; &lt; Continuation stage >〉 Enter the telephone receiver 21 3-5 (off-hook), dial the telephone number of the telephone 214-4 at the destination of the communication, "Tel-N0_2,", When the media router 2 丨 2 —i (step ρ2〇), the media road field answers (step P201).

1245997 五、發明說明(83) -- 媒體路由器21 2-1形成至少包含送信端電話號碼 &quot;T e 1 - N 〇 - 1π、焚信端電話號碼&quot;T e 1 - N 〇 - 2 ’’、使用者個人情 報(User_Info·)的IP封包(圖79之3 79 ),透過傳送給網點 裝置208-1,開始電話的呼叫設定的手續(步驟p2〇4)。再 者’使用者個人情報(User-Info·)係在後述的程序之步驟 P219中可到達媒體路由器212-2者,例如由在使用者側管 理電話之呼叫的電話呼叫識別子(” C-id”)、ip電話之聲音 壓縮方式的識別.記號與聲音符號變換編解碼的識別記號^ 所構成。圖79的IP封包379的酬載部分稱為UDp區段,例如 送信端埠號碼與受信端埠號碼稱為” 5060”,可用以區別媒 體路由器212-1及212-2的内部的電話通信接續控制用的程 式與其他。 網點裝置208-1在接收ip封包時,檢索圖76所示的位 址管理表360- 1,檢索包含做為外部IP位址的送信端ιρ位 址&quot;EA01”、受信端IP位址”EA81&quot;的記錄。在本例\,找到 位址管理表360-1上起第1行的記錄,也就是” EA〇1、EA81 、IA01、IA81&quot;的記錄時,使用被記載在此記錄内部之第 3及第4個IP位址&quot;IA01”及”IA81&quot;,適用1?封包的膠囊化技 術,形成如圖80所示之内部IP封包的Ip封包38〇 ,並傳送 給IP位址為π ΙΑ8Γ的代理電話管理伺服器313 —丨(步驟p2〇5 )。在此,IP封包380之酬載部分為IP封包379。 代理電話管理伺服器313— 1接收IP封包38〇時,產生酬 載部分為IP封包379之IP封包381,並傳送給IP位址為 &quot;ΙΑ9Γ的電話管理伺服器313_5(步驟p2〇6)。電話管理伺1245997 V. Description of the invention (83)-The media router 21 2-1 forms at least the telephone number of the sending end &quot; T e 1-N 〇-1π, the telephone number of the burning end &quot; T e 1-N 〇- 2 ' 'The IP packet of the user's personal information (User_Info ·) (3 79 in Fig. 79) is transmitted to the network device 208-1 to start the procedure for setting the call (step p204). Furthermore, 'User-Info ·' refers to a person who can reach the media router 212-2 in step P219 of a program described later, for example, a telephone call identifier ("C-id "), The identification of the voice compression method of the IP phone. The symbol and the identification symbol for the conversion and encoding of the sound symbol are composed of ^. The payload part of the IP packet 379 in FIG. 79 is called a UDp section. For example, the sending port number and the receiving port number are called "5060", which can be used to distinguish the internal telephone communication connections of the media routers 212-1 and 212-2. Control programs and others. When the network device 208-1 receives the IP packet, it searches the address management table 360-1 shown in FIG. 76, and searches for the sender's address &quot; EA01 &quot; and the trusted end's IP address &quot; as the external IP address. EA81's record. In this example \, when you find the record in the first row from the address management table 360-1, that is, the record of "EA〇1, EA81, IA01, IA81 &quot;, use the third and third records recorded in this record. The four IP addresses &quot; IA01 &quot; and &quot; IA81 &quot; apply the 1? Packet encapsulation technology to form the IP packet 38o of the internal IP packet as shown in Figure 80, and send it to the agent with the IP address π ΙΑ8Γ The telephone management server 313 — (step p205). Here, the payload portion of the IP packet 380 is the IP packet 379. When the agent telephone management server 313-1 receives the IP packet 38, the payload portion is IP. The IP packet 381 of the packet 379 is transmitted to the telephone management server 313_5 whose IP address is "ΙΑ9Γ" (step p206).

1245997 五、發明說明(84) ,器313-5依據送信端電話號碼”1^14〇_1”與受信端電話 號碼’’Tel-No-2&quot;的組合,決定通信電路識別子(CIC—丨―2) :’例如 CIC-l-2 = &quot;Te 卜 No-l”+”Tel-No-2”,並將通信電路 識別子(CIC_1-2)保存於電話管理伺服器313 —5的内部。在 此’ ” +π表示列舉電話號碼(資料的連結)的意思。 ^電話管理伺服器313一5將前述步驟Ρ206中接收到的送 k端電話號碼之&quot;Tel-Νο-Γ及受信端電話號碼” Tel—ν〇 — 2,, 通知電話網域名稱伺服器313 —2(步驟ρ2〇7),從電話網域 名稱伺服器313-2接收1對1對應於電話號碼&quot;1^丨4〇 — 1&quot;的 外部IP位址&quot;ΕΑ01”、與内部ΙΡ位址&quot;ΙΑ〇1&quot;、及1對1對應於 電話號碼&quot;1^11〇-2”的1卩位址&quot;^02”與内部11&gt;位址&quot;1人〇2&quot; (步驟Ρ208)。在此,電話網域名稱伺服器313_2使用再歸 呼出的機能,對電話網域名稱伺服器314一2詢問並取得電 話號碼&quot;Tel-No-2”的IP位址情報。電話管理伺服器313一5 檢查從電話網域名稱伺服器313 —2處接收的ιρ位址&quot;ΕΑ〇ι&quot; ^在步驟P2 06中從IP封包381内部取得的送信端Ip位址 (EA01&quot;)是否一致,在不一致時中止電話接續的手續,在 一致時,將送信端電話機的IP位址&quot;EA〇1&quot;、内部1?位址 :ΙΑ〇1]、、受信端電話機的1?位址&quot;EA〇2,,、内部ιρ位址 2追加保存於前述保存的通信電路識別子(CIC-1-2) 糾二,上。再者,統合1 P通信網内部的伺服器間通信的I P 用内部IP位址,以傳送接收如圖82所示之形式的 其匕2。網點裝置不是伺服器。在網點裝置與代理電 話吕理伺服ϋ間傳送接收的IP封包為如關及圖84所示之1245997 V. Description of the invention (84), the device 313-5 determines the communication circuit identifier (CIC- 丨) based on the combination of the telephone number "1 ^ 14〇_1" of the sending end and the telephone number "Tel-No-2" of the receiving end. ―2): 'For example, CIC-l-2 = &quot; Te No-l "+" Tel-No-2 ", and save the communication circuit identifier (CIC_1-2) in the telephone management server 313-5 . Here "" + π means to enumerate phone numbers (links to information). ^ The telephone management server 313-5 will notify the telephone domain name server of "Tel-Nο-Γ" and the telephone number of the receiving end "Tel-νο-2" received in the foregoing step P206. 313-2 (step ρ2〇7), receiving a one-to-one correspondence with the telephone number &quot; 1 ^ 丨 4〇-1 &quot; from the telephone domain name server 313-2, and the internal IP address IP address &quot; ΙΑ〇1 &quot;, and 1-to-1 corresponding to the phone number &quot; 1 ^ 11〇-2 ", 1 卩 address &quot; ^ 02 &quot; and internal 11 &gt; address &quot; 1person〇2 &quot; (Step P208). Here, the telephone domain name server 313_2 uses the function of re-calling, and inquires the telephone domain name server 311-2 and obtains the IP address information of the telephone number "Tel-No-2". The telephone management server 313-5 Check whether the lp address &quot; ΕΑ〇ι &quot; received from the telephone domain name server 313-2 is the same as the IP address (EA01) of the sender obtained from the IP packet 381 in step P2 06. In case of inconsistency, the procedure for terminating the telephone connection will be terminated. In the case of agreement, the IP address of the sender's telephone "EA01", the internal 1 'address: ΙΑ〇1], and the 1' address of the receiver's telephone " ; EA〇2 ,, and internal ιρ address 2 are additionally stored in the previously saved communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2). Corrected, on. Furthermore, the IP used to integrate communication between servers in the 1 P communication network is integrated. The internal IP address is transmitted and received in the form shown in Figure 82. The network device is not a server. The IP packets transmitted and received between the network device and the agent telephone Lüli servo are shown in Figure 84 and shown in Figure 84. Of

1245997 五、發明說明(85) 膠囊化完成形式的IP封包,在網點裝置與媒體路由 送接收的IP封包為如圖79所示之適用外部1?位址ϋ 前階段之I Ρ封包。 JR 1匕 接著’電話管理祠服器313-5將包含送信端 IP位址&quot;ΕΑ01”、内部ΙΡ位址&quot;ΙΑ01”、送信端電話號石^的 ” Tel-No-l”、受信端電話號碼”Tel—N〇 —2&quot;、使用者u個人情 報(User Info·)、及通信電路識別子((:1(&gt;1—^的^封包 (IAM封包),經由通信公司1的代表伺服器步驟 P214)、並經由通信公司2的代表伺服器314一7(步驟p2i5) ,傳送給通信公司2的電話管理伺服器314 —5(步驟p216)。 電話管理伺服器314-5接收4個IP位址&quot;EA01、ΙΑ〇1、EA〇2 、IA02”、2個電話號碼” Tel—No-丨&quot;及” Tel—N〇-2,,、通信電 路識別子(CIC-1 -2)、及使用者個人情報(User—Inf〇.)' 使用者個人情報(User-Info·)以外者則保存於内部。 另外,内部位址&quot;IA92”的電話管理伺服器314-5將圖 83的IP封包383通知内部IP位址&quot;IA82&quot;的代理電話管理飼 服器314-1(步驟P21 7)。在此,IP封包383係包含送信端電 話機的IP位址’’ΕΑ0Γ、受信端電話機的ip位址&quot;EA〇2&quot;、送 4吕端電話號碼nTel-No-1”、受信端電話號碼” Tel-No-2,,、 及使用者附加情報(User-Info·)。因而,代理電話管理伺 服器314 -1形成圖84之IP封包384,並傳送給網點裝置 209-2(步驟P218),網點裝置209-2移除IP封包384之標頭 ’進行IP封包之逆膠囊化,以形成圖85所示之IP封包385 ’並傳送給媒體路由器212-2(步驟P21 9)。媒體路由器1245997 V. Description of the invention (85) The IP packet in the form of encapsulation, the IP packet sent and received at the branch device and the media router is the IP packet at the previous stage, as shown in Figure 79. JR 1k then 'Phone Management Temple Server 313-5 will contain the sender's IP address &quot; ΕΑ01 &quot;, the internal IP address &quot; ΙΑ01 &quot;, the sender's phone number ^ Tel-No-l, the trusted End phone number "Tel-N0-2", user u personal information (User Info ·), and communication circuit identifier ((: 1 (&gt; 1-^^^ packet (IAM packet), via communication company 1 The representative server (step P214) is transmitted to the telephone management server 314-5 of the communication company 2 via the representative server 314-7 (step p2i5) of the communication company 2 (step p216). The telephone management server 314-5 receives 4 IP addresses &quot; EA01, ΙΑ〇1, EA〇2, IA02 &quot;, 2 phone numbers &quot; Tel-No- 丨 &quot; and &quot; Tel-N〇-2, &quot;, communication circuit identifier (CIC-1 -2), and user personal information (User-Inf.) 'Are stored inside other than user personal information (User-Info ·). In addition, the internal address &quot; IA92 "phone management server 314- 5. The IP packet 383 of FIG. 83 is notified to the internal IP address "IA82" of the agent telephone management server 314-1 (step P21 7). Here, the IP packet Series 383 contains the IP address of the sender's phone `` ΕΑ0Γ, the IP address of the receiver's phone "EA〇2", the sender's phone number nTel-No-1 ", and the receiver's phone number" Tel-No- 2, and, and user-info. Therefore, the agent telephone management server 314-1 forms the IP packet 384 of FIG. 84 and transmits it to the network device 209-2 (step P218), and the network device 209 -2 Remove the header 'of the IP packet 384 and perform inverse encapsulation of the IP packet to form the IP packet 385' shown in FIG. 85 and transmit it to the media router 212-2 (step P21 9). The media router

1IHI 第89頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(86) 212_2取得送信端電話機的ip位址” ΕΑΟΓ、受信端電話機 的IP位址ΠΕΑ02”、送信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-Γ、受信端電 話號碼&quot;Tel - No - 2,,、及使用者附加情報(User-Info.)。 接著’媒體路由器212-2將通知電話著信的前述情報 之受信附加2個電話號碼” Tel-No-1 ”及&quot;Tel-No-2π送回給 電話管理伺服器314-5(步驟卩221、?222、?223 ),電話^ 理伺服器314-5從接收到的2個電話號碼” Tel-No-Γ及 &quot;Tel-Νο-2π中回復通信電路識別子(cjcu),接著將確 認包含通信電路識別子(dC-丨_2)的前述情報之受領的Ιρ 封包(ACM封包),經由電話管理伺服器313-5,傳送給媒體 路由器212-1(步驟P224至P229)。 傳送、、口媒體 其次,媒體路由器212-2將電話呼出(著信)通知電話 機214-4/步驟P230),電話機214_4 一知道有電話呼出就 發出電°舌呼出音。媒體路由器212-2將前述呼出之電話號 碼二,2&quot;的電話機為呼出中,附加二^ 及受信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-N〇~2&quot;,經由網點裝置 , '231),更經由代理電話管理伺服器(步驟p232 的電ϋ話管理饲服器3i4_5(步驟p233)。通信公司2 = 服器314-5使用從媒體路由器212-2被送交的 丨丨,回德lit带 鳊電話號碼丨丨TehNo — 2 ^Λ A識別子(CIC-1_2),接㈣成確認受領包 【广並僂:(CIC + 2)的前述情報之封包(CPG封 P236)電話管理伺服器313~5(步職4、P235、 電話督理伺服器313-5接收前述CpG封包,從cpG封1IHI Page 89 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (86) 212_2 Obtaining the IP address of the sender's phone "ΕΑΟΓ, the IP address of the receiver's phone ΠΕΑ02", the phone number of the sender &quot; Tel -No-Γ, the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2, ", and User-Info. Next, the 'media router 212-2 adds the two phone numbers "Tel-No-1" and "Tel-No-2π" to the telephone management server 314-5 (step 卩) 221,? 222,? 223), the telephone management server 314-5 returns the communication circuit identifier (cjcu) from the two received telephone numbers "Tel-No-Γ and" Tel-Nο-2π ", and then The received Iρ packet (ACM packet) containing the aforementioned information of the communication circuit identifier (dC- 丨 _2) is transmitted to the media router 212-1 via the telephone management server 313-5 (steps P224 to P229). Second, the media router 212-2 will call out (letter) and notify the phone 214-4 / step P230), and the phone 214_4 will make an electrical call as soon as it knows there is a call. The media router 212-2 will make the aforementioned call The telephone number of the phone number 2 and 2 is "Outgoing," and the phone number of the receiving party "Tel-N0 ~ 2" is added, through the network device, '231), and through the agent phone management server (step p232). Telephone conversation management feeder 3i4_5 (step p233). Communication Division 2 = The server 314-5 uses the phone number delivered from the media router 212-2, and returns the phone number to TelitNo. TehNo — 2 ^ Λ A identifier (CIC-1_2), and then confirms the receipt packet [Guang Bingji: (CIC + 2) the aforementioned information packet (CPG packet P236) the telephone management server 313 ~ 5 (step 4, P235, telephone supervision server 313-5 receives the aforementioned CpG packet and seals it from cpG

12459971245997

包讀出通信電路識別子(Cic一 1一2)。 接著,電話管理伺服器313-5使用通信電路識別子 (CIC-1-2),讀出在步驟P214中記錄保存的位址及電話號 碼,,當至少將送信端電話機接續的媒體路由器212— 1的1? 位址’’EA01”、受信端電話機接續的媒體路由器212 —2的1? 位址&quot;EA02&quot;、送信端電話號碼” Tel-N〇—丨”、受信端電話號 碼’’ Tel-No-2”傳送給代理電話管理伺服器31 3 — 1時(步驟 P237),經由網點裝置2〇8 —丨(步驟p238),通知媒體路由器 212-1(步驟?239)。媒體路由器212-1將受信端電話機The packet reads the communication circuit identifier (Cic-1, 1-2). Next, the telephone management server 313-5 uses the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) to read out the address and telephone number stored in step P214, and at least the media router 212-1 that will connect the sender's telephone 1? Address `` EA01 ", 1? Address &quot; EA02 &quot; of the media router 212-2 connected to the phone of the receiving end, phone number" Tel-N〇- 丨 "of the sending end, and phone number` `Tel -No-2 "is transmitted to the agent telephone management server 31 3-1 (step P237), and the network device 210-1-(step p238) is notified to the media router 212-1 (step? 239). Media Router 212-1 Will Receive Phone

214-4被呼出中通知送信端電話機213一5(步驟p24〇),送信 端電話機213-5發出呼出音。214-4 The outgoing call is notified to the sender telephone 213-15 (step p24), and the sender telephone 213-5 emits an outgoing tone.

一方面’當電話機214-4的使用者聽見電話呼出音, 拿起電話機的送受話器時(離鉤),IP電話機2丨4-4將離鉤 通知媒體路由器212-2(步驟P241),媒體路由器21 2-2將離 鉤通知經由網點裝置209-2(步驟P242),進而經過代理電 話管理伺服器(步驟P243),通知電話管理伺服器314-5(步 驟P244)。通信公司2的電話管理伺服器31 4-5從送信端電 話號碼’’Tel-Νο-Γ及受信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-2&quot;,回復通 信電路識別子(CIC-1-2),形成確認受領包含通信電路識 別子(CIC-1-2)之前述情報的ip封包(ANM封包),並傳送給 電話管理伺服器313 - 5(步驟P245、P246、P247)。電話管 理伺服器313-5接收ANM封包,從AN Μ封包中讀出通信電路 識別子(CIC-1-2)。 電話管理伺服器314-5使用在步驟Ρ2 45時保存的通信On the one hand, when the user of the telephone set 214-4 hears the outgoing call tone and picks up the handset of the telephone set (off hook), the IP phone 2 丨 4-4 notifies the media router 212-2 of the off hook (step P241) The router 21 2-2 notifies the off-hook notification via the network device 209-2 (step P242), and then via the agent telephone management server (step P243), and notifies the telephone management server 314-5 (step P244). The telephone management server 31 4-5 of the communication company 2 responds to the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) from the sending telephone number `` Tel-Nο-Γ ”and the receiving telephone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot;, An ip packet (ANM packet) confirming receipt of the aforementioned information including the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) is formed and transmitted to the telephone management server 313-5 (steps P245, P246, and P247). The telephone management server 313-5 receives the ANM packet and reads the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) from the AN M packet. The telephone management server 314-5 uses the communication saved at step P2 45

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第91頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 91 1245997

電路識別子(CIC-1-2),讀出在步驟P217時保存記憶的IP 位址及電話號碼。接著,電話管理伺服器314 —5將送信端 電話機的IP位址’’ΕΑΟΓ及内部ip位址”ιΑ〇1&quot;,受信端電話 機接續的媒體路由器21 2-2的IP位址&quot;ΕΑ02Π及内部ip位址 ’’ IA02”通知表管理伺服器314-3(步驟P250 ),表管理伺服 器314-3將通信電路識別子(dc-丨 —2)、送信端電話機的1? 位址&quot;EA01”及内部IP位址” IA01”、受信端電話機的”位址 E A 0 2及内部IP位址I a 0 2π保存於内部,同時保存於網點 裝置209-2内部的位址管理表360-2 (步驟Ρ251)。這個樣 子,就如圖77的位址管理表360-2的第2行的記錄所示。 電活管理伺服器3 1 3 - 5使用前述讀出的通信電路識別 子(CIC-1-2),讀出在步驟Ρ214時保存記憶的ip位址及電 話號碼。接著,電話管理伺服器31 3-5將通信電路識別子 (CIC-1-2)、送信側媒體路由器212-1的IP位址π ΕΑ0Γ及内 部IP位址’’ΙΑ0Γ,受信端媒體路由器212-2的IP位址” ΕΑ02 &quot;及内部IP位址&quot;ΙΑ02Π通知表管理伺服器313-3(步驟P252) ,表管理伺服器31 3-3將通信電路識別子(Cl01-2)、送信 端電話機的IP位址&quot;ΕΑ0Γ及内部IP位址&quot;I Α01&quot;、受信端電 話機的IP位址π EA02&quot;及内部IP位址&quot;IA02&quot;保存於其内部, 同時保存於網點裝置208-1内部的位址管理表360-1 (步驟 P2 53)。這個樣子,就如圖76的位址管理表360-1的第2行 的記錄所示。 圖76的位址管理表360-1的第2行的記錄係設定於網點 裝置内的’’位址管理表的IP通信記錄”,此I P通信記錄的内The circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) reads the IP address and telephone number stored in step P217. Next, the telephone management server 314-5 will send the IP address `` ΕΑΟΓ and the internal IP address "of the sender's telephone, and the IP address of the media router 21 2-2 connected to the receiver's telephone, &quot; ΕΑ02Π and The internal IP address "IA02" informs the table management server 314-3 (step P250). The table management server 314-3 will identify the communication circuit identifier (dc- 丨 -2), the 1? Address of the sender's telephone &quot; EA01 ”and internal IP address“ IA01 ”, the“ address EA 0 2 ”and internal IP address I a 0 2π of the receiving end telephone are stored internally, and are also stored in the address management table 360- 2 (step P251). This sample is shown in the second row of the address management table 360-2 in Figure 77. The electric activity management server 3 1 3-5 uses the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) read out above, and reads out the ip address and phone number stored in memory at step P214. Next, the telephone management server 31 3-5 sets the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2), the IP address of the transmitting-side media router 212-1 π ΑΑ0Γ and the internal IP address `` ΙΑ0Γ, and the receiving-end media router 212- 2 ’s IP address ”ΕΑ02 &quot; and internal IP address &quot; ΙΑ02Π notify the table management server 313-3 (step P252), and the table management server 31 3-3 sends the communication circuit identifier (Cl01-2) and the sender The IP address of the phone &quot; ΕΑ0Γ and the internal IP address &quot; I Α01 &quot;, the IP address of the trusted telephone set π EA02 &quot; and the internal IP address &quot; IA02 &quot; 1 internal address management table 360-1 (step P2 53). In this way, as shown in the second row of the address management table 360-1 in Figure 76. Figure 76 address management table 360-1 The second line of the record is set in the "IP communication record of the address management table" in the branch device.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第92頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 92 1245997

受信端外部I ρ位址 受信端I Ρ位址π I A 0 2π 今係依據送信端外部I P位址π ΕΑΟ Γ ΕΑ〇2”、送信端内部IP位址&quot;ΙΑΟΓ 而被定義。The external IP address of the receiving terminal The IP address of the receiving terminal π I A 0 2π is defined based on the external IP address of the transmitting terminal π ΕΑΟ Γ ΕΑ〇2 ", the internal IP address of the transmitting terminal &quot; ΙΑΟΓ.

位管理表360-1的第2行的1Ρ通信記錄係包含外部IP 址μ及外部IP位址&quot;EA〇2&quot;,以決定被授與外部1?位 1)1的媒體路由器212-1與被授與外部IP位址&quot;EA〇2” 的=路由器212_2間的Ip通信路。位址管理表36〇 2的第 二也決定媒體路由器21&quot;與媒體路The 1P communication record in the second row of the bit management table 360-1 contains the external IP address μ and the external IP address &quot; EA〇2 &quot; to determine the media router 212-1 that is granted the external 1 bit 1) 1. The IP communication route between the router and the external IP address &quot; EA〇2 &quot; = router 212_2. The second of the address management table 36〇2 also determines the media router 21 &quot; and the media route

再者,送信端外部IP位址,,EA01&quot;係i對1對應於電話號 K、 ei-No-1&quot;而決定,受信端外部ip位址&quot;ΕΑ〇2”係i對1對 應於電治號碼Tel-No-2”而決定,在發信端與受信端沒有 區別時,&quot;網點裝置的位址管理表的Ip通信記錄僅是決定 電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-1”與電話號碼” Tel—N〇 —2&quot;間的Ip通信路 的位址管理表的記錄。Furthermore, the external IP address of the sender, EA01 &quot; system i to 1 corresponds to the telephone number K, ei-No-1 &quot;, and it is determined that the external IP address of the sender &quot; EIA2 &quot; The telecontrol number Tel-No-2 "is determined. When there is no difference between the sender and the receiver, the IP communication record of the address management table of the network device is only to determine the telephone number" Tel-No-1 "and Record of the address management table of the IP communication channel of the telephone number "Tel-N0-2".

前述步驟P245係確認呼叫設定的應答情報,也就是通 知電話機2 13-5與電話機214-4間可以開始電話通信的手 續’電話官理飼服器31 4 - 5將例如通信電路識別子 (CIC-1 - 2)、送信端媒體路由器212-1的ip位址&quot;EA01&quot;、受 信端媒體路由器212-2的IP位址” EA02”、送信端電話號碼 &quot;Te卜No-Ι&quot;、受信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-2&quot;,以可以開始電 話通信的時刻為準,通知收費管理伺服器314-4(步驟 P254),收費管理伺服器314-4可記錄保存通信電路識別子 (CIC-1-2)、送信端電話號碼” Tel-No-1&quot;、受信端電話號The foregoing step P245 is a response information for confirming the call setting, that is, a procedure for notifying that the telephone communication can be started between the telephone 2 13-5 and the telephone 214-4. The telephone official feeding device 31 4-5 will, for example, be a communication circuit identifier (CIC- 1-2), IP address of sending media router 212-1 &quot; EA01 &quot;, IP address of receiving media router 212-1 &quot; EA02 &quot;, sending phone number &quot; Tebu No-I &quot;, receiving Terminal telephone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot;, based on the time when telephone communication can be started, notify the charge management server 314-4 (step P254). The charge management server 314-4 can record and save the communication circuit identifier (CIC -1-2), the phone number of the sending end "Tel-No-1", the phone number of the receiving end

1245997 五、發明說明(90) 碼&lt;Tel-No-2·’、送信端媒體路由器212一1的1?位址,,ea〇i,, 、受信端媒體路由器21 2-2的IP位址” EA02f,等(步驟P254) 1 同樣地,收費管理伺服器31 3-4可記錄保存送信端電 話號碼”Te卜No-1”、受信端電話號碼&quot;Te^N〇 —2&quot;、送信 電話機的IP位址”EA〇1”、受信端電話機的 、吏用者旱起送受話器應答電話呼出時,也就是將 pH由代理電話管㈣服器313—κ步驟 = :2 = =點裝置2,(步驟Ρ257)、並經由媒體 ) ’通知電話機213-5(步_)。 起,至將呼叫二2,#$213_5的送受話11的步驟moo 連串步驟,通知電話機213-5(步驟Ρ259)的一 連串步驟,稱為電話通信的接婧 、 間接續控制中,將從網點穿f 2^又 上述的終端 路由β ι 1經由通信電路Μ0 — 1, =器219 1代表伺服器313_7、314一7、路由 電路370-5接續至網點裝置2〇9_2 w1245997 V. Description of the invention (90) Code &lt; Tel-No-2 · ', 1? Address of sending media router 212-1, eaoi,, IP address of receiving media router 21 2-2 Address "EA02f, etc. (Step P254) 1 Similarly, the charge management server 31 3-4 can record and save the sender's phone number" Te Bu No-1 ", the recipient's phone number &quot; Te ^ N0-2 &quot;, The IP address “EA〇1” of the sending telephone, the receiver of the receiving telephone, and the user answering the phone call when the user starts the call, that is, the pH is controlled by the proxy phone server 313—κ step =: 2 = = point Device 2, (step P257), and via the media) 'Notify telephone 213-5 (step_). From step 2 to step 11 of sending and receiving call 11 which will call 2 2, # $ 213_5, a series of steps to notify telephone 213-5 (Step P259) A series of steps, called telephone communication connection and indirect continuity control, will pass through the network terminal f 2 ^ and the above-mentioned terminal route β ι 1 via the communication circuit M 0 — 1, 219 1 represents the server 313_7, 314-7, routing circuit 370-5 connected to the outlet device 209_2 w

電話網203㈣的「接續 。通^電路,稱為IP 路係被使用於傳逆技你」 者’接續控制電 包。被便用於傳送接收用於終端間通信接續控制⑽封 &lt;&lt;通信階段〉〉 參照圖8 6至圖8 q $ ^ 被傳送至媒體路由器(5步 j入至電話機213-5的聲音 為數位化的IP封包:並二二)’媒體路由器將聲音形成 ^並傳送給網點裝置208-U步驟P3〇1) 第94頁 2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(91) ° I P封包3 8 7被膠囊化而變換成内部丨p封包3 8 8,經由通信 電路370-3、路由器21 9-5、21 9-7、221 -1、21 9-10、 219-9、通信電路370-6,到達網點裝置2〇9-2(步驟P 302) ’透過移除標頭的逆膠囊化,變換丨p封包3 8 9,經由媒體 路由器212-2(步驟P303),而到達電話機214-4(步驟P304 ) 。電話機214-4的使用者的聲音以反方向的流程,也就是 經由媒體路由器212-2(步驟P305)、網點裝置209-2(步驟 P 3 0 6 )、路由器 2 1 9 - 9、21 9 -1 0、2 2 1 -1、2 1 9 - 7、21 9 - 5,The "connection." Circuit of the telephone network 203㈣, called the "IP circuit system, is used to transmit inverse technology to you" connection control packet. It is used to transmit and receive the communication connection control between terminals. &Lt; &lt; Communication stage >> Refer to Fig. 8 6 to Fig. 8 q $ ^ is transmitted to the media router (step 5 to the voice of the telephone 213-5) Digitized IP packets: and 22) 'Media router will form the sound ^ and transmit it to the network device 208-U Step P3 01) Page 94 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (91 ) ° IP packet 3 8 7 is encapsulated and transformed into internal 丨 p packet 3 8 8 via communication circuit 370-3, router 21 9-5, 21 9-7, 221-1, 21 9-10, 219- 9. Communication circuit 370-6 arrives at the outlet device 2009-2 (step P 302) 'By removing the header's inverse encapsulation, transforming the p packet 3 8 9 via the media router 212-2 (step P303) , And arrive at the telephone 214-4 (step P304). The voice of the user of the telephone 214-4 flows in the reverse direction, that is, via the media router 212-2 (step P305), the branch office device 209-2 (step P 3 0 6), and the router 2 1 9-9, 21 9 -1 0, 2 2 1 -1, 2 1 9-7, 21 9-5,

到達網點裝置208-1 (步驟P307),再經由媒體路由器212-1 (步驟P308),到達電話機213-5(步驟P309 )。 在上述通信階段中,IP封包387及389的酬載部分稱為 UDP區段,透過將送信端及受信端udp埠號改變為例如 &quot; 50 04&quot;、&quot; 50 0 6&quot;、&quot;5010&quot;、&quot;5012”、&quot;5016·’ 等,可能進行 傳送其他聲音的電話通信。由於包含數位化聲音的封包 388從網點裝置208- 1,經由通信電路370-3、路由器 219-5、219-7、221-1、219-10、219-9、通信電路370 -6 ,被轉送至接續網點裝置209-2的通信電路,此ip通信電 路被稱為IP電話網203内部的「聲音通信電路」,以與前 述接續階段中之IP電話網203的「接續控制電路」區別。Arrive at the branch office device 208-1 (step P307), and then via the media router 212-1 (step P308), and reach the telephone 213-5 (step P309). In the above communication phase, the payload part of IP packets 387 and 389 is called the UDP section. By changing the UDP port numbers of the sender and the receiver to, for example, &quot; 50 04 &quot;, &quot; 50 0 6 &quot;, &quot; 5010 &quot;, &Quot; 5012 ", &quot; 5016 · ', etc., it is possible to perform telephone communication for transmitting other sounds. Since the packet 388 containing the digitized sound is transmitted from the branch device 208-1 through the communication circuit 370-3, the router 219-5, 219-7, 221-1, 219-10, 219-9, and communication circuit 370-6 are transferred to the communication circuit of the connection point device 209-2. This ip communication circuit is called the "voice" in the IP telephone network 203 The "communication circuit" is distinguished from the "connection control circuit" of the IP telephone network 203 in the aforementioned connection stage.

在通信階段中,圖76的位址管理表360-1的第2行的記 錄’也就是送信端外部IP位址&quot;E A 0 1 &quot;、受信端外部I p位址 ” ΕΑ02Π、送信端内部ip位址&quot;IA01&quot;、受信端内部IP位址 π IA 0 2π的I P通信記錄,也就是用以決定電話號碼 n Tel-No-Γ及電話號碼” Tel-No-2&quot;間的IP通信路的位址管In the communication phase, the record in the second line of the address management table 360-1 in FIG. 76 is the external IP address of the sender &quot; EA 0 1 &quot;, the external IP address of the sender &quot; ΕΑ02Π, the sender Internal IP address &quot; IA01 &quot;, the IP communication record of the internal IP address π IA 0 2π of the trusted end, which is used to determine the IP between the telephone number n Tel-No-Γ and the telephone number "Tel-No-2" Address tube of communication circuit

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第95頁 1245997 五、發明說明(92) 理表的記錄。 〈&lt;釋放階段〉〉 參^圖9G說明之,電話機2 13-5的使用者因電話通信 結而回送^:話器,將電 212-1時(步驟P400 ),媒 =篮路由器 ^ ^ @ ^ , 呆體路由器212-1產生至少包含電話 的釋放要未的表示、送信端電話號碼,,Tei_N〇—丨&quot;、受 信端電^碼&quot;Τ‘ν〇 — 2 ”的Ip封包,當傳送給網點裝置 208-1時(步驟P401),網點奘罟冗 主』點裝置208 -1使用圖76的位址管理 tp 4+ :的第1二之記錄,產生將接收到的1P封包膠囊化的 、匕,並傳送給代理電話管理伺服器313 —丨(步驟p4〇2) 。其次,代理電話管理伺服器313-1形成包含 由器:始產生的電話之釋放要求的表示、送信州 Tel No-1 、及受信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-No —2&quot;的1?封包,並 傳送給電話管理伺服器(步驟p4〇3)。以上所述的步驟以〇1 、P40 2、P403中使用的ip封包的形式或Ip位址的設定方法 與電話通信接續階段中的步驟?2〇4、p2〇5、p2〇6相同。 電話管理伺服器31 3-5由2個電話號碼” Tel-No-Γ及 &quot;Tel-No-2”回復通信電路識別子2),形成包含電 話通信的釋放要求之表示與通信電路識別子(CICu)的 IP封包(REL封包),並傳送給通信公司!的代表伺服器 3j3 - 7(步驟P404)。前述IP封包經由通信公司2的代表伺服 器314-7(步驟P405),到達通信公司2管理下的電話管理 服器314-5(步驟P406)。 其次,電話管理伺服器313-5將透過步驟以⑽至以⑽ 1245997 五、發明說明(93) 報告進行釋放要求的釋放結束I P封包,經由代理電話管理 伺服器313-1、網點裝置208-1,送回給媒體路由器212-1 (步驟?407、卩408、?409)。又電話管理伺服器313-5將包 含通信電路識別子(CIC-1-2)的IP封包傳送給表管理伺服 器313-3(步驟P433)。由於表管理伺服器313-3在前述步驟 P252進行後,保存對應於通信電路識別子(CIC —丨_2)的位 址,確認已接收4個IP位址&quot;EA01、EA02、IA01、IA02&quot;的 清除指示,以清狳如圖76所示的網點裝置208-1内部的位 址管理表360-1的第2行之記錄,也就是送信端外部Ip位址 &quot;ΕΑ0Γ、受信端外部IP位址&quot;EA〇2&quot;、送信端内部Ip位址 IA 0 1 、受信端内部I P位址&quot;IA 0 2,’、IP通信記錄(步驟 P^4)。換言之,清除決定電話號碼&quot;Tel—No—丨&quot;及電話號 碼Tel-No-2&quot;間的IP通信路之位址管理表的記錄。 ^電話管理伺服器314 — 5經由步驟P406接收包含電話通 信的釋放要求的表示及通信電路識別子的ιρ封 包時,形成釋放要求的IP封包,並傳送給代理電話管理 服器314-1,表示釋放要求之指示的lp封包係經由網點 置209-2,到達媒體路由器212 —2(步驟p4n、p4l2、p4j p°4 ^者^電話管理伺服器31 4 —5為了報告已進行前述步驟 ,形成包含通信電路識別子的1?封 H將前述RLC封包傳送給通信公司2的代表伺服器 314-7(步驟P414)。前述RLC封包經 月艮器3U-7(步驟P415),到達通信公司】管理下的的^司 祠服器313-5(步驟Ρ416)β接收釋放結束之1?封包的\&amp;話理2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 95 1245997 V. Description of the invention (92) Record of the management table. <& Release Phase> As explained with reference to FIG. 9G, the user of the telephone set 2 13-5 sends back because of the telephone communication connection ^: when the telephone is turned on 212-1 (step P400), the media = basket router ^ ^ @ ^, The dead router 212-1 generates an IP packet containing at least the indication of the release of the phone, the phone number of the sending end, Tei_N〇— 丨 &quot;, the receiving end's code ^ 'Τ'ν〇-2 ” When transmitting to the network device 208-1 (step P401), the network device is redundant. The network device 208 -1 uses the address of FIG. 76 to manage tp 4+: the first two records, and generate 1P to be received. The packet is encapsulated and transmitted to the agent telephone management server 313 — (step p402). Second, the agent telephone management server 313-1 forms a representation of the release request of the phone including the router: Send a 1? Packet of the state Tel No-1 and the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot;, and send it to the telephone management server (step p4〇3). The steps described above include 0, P40 2 The method of setting the IP packet or IP address used in P403 and P403 and the steps in the connection phase of the telephone communication 2004, p205, and p206 are the same. The telephone management server 31 3-5 responds to the communication circuit identifier 2) with two telephone numbers "Tel-No-Γ and" Tel-No-2 ", and includes The release request of the telephone communication indicates the IP packet (REL packet) of the communication circuit identifier (CICu) and transmits it to the representative server 3j3-7 of the communication company! (Step P404). The aforementioned IP packet is transmitted by the representative server of the communication company 2. Device 314-7 (step P405), and arrive at the telephone management server 314-5 managed by the communication company 2 (step P406). Second, the telephone management server 313-5 will go through the steps from 1 to 1245997 V. Description of the invention (93) The release-end IP packet that reports the release request is sent back to the media router 212-1 via the agent telephone management server 313-1 and the network device 208-1 (steps 407, 卩 408, and 409). The telephone management server 313-5 transmits the IP packet containing the communication circuit identifier (CIC-1-2) to the table management server 313-3 (step P433). Since the table management server 313-3 performs the foregoing step P252 , Save the address corresponding to the identifier of the communication circuit (CIC — 丨 _2) Confirm that the clear instructions of 4 IP addresses &quot; EA01, EA02, IA01, IA02 &quot; have been received to clear the second line of the address management table 360-1 inside the network device 208-1 shown in Figure 76 Records, that is, the external IP address of the sender &quot; ΕΑ0Γ, the external IP address of the sender &quot; EA〇2 &quot;, the internal IP address of the sender IA 0 1, and the internal IP address of the sender &quot; IA 0 2, ' , IP communication record (step P ^ 4). In other words, the record of the address management table of the IP communication path between the telephone number &quot; Tel-No- 丨 &quot; and the telephone number Tel-No-2 &quot; is cleared. ^ The telephone management server 314-5 receives an IP packet containing the indication of the release request of the telephone communication and the communication circuit identifier via step P406, forms an IP packet of the release request, and transmits it to the agent telephone management server 314-1, indicating the release The requested lp packet is set to 209-2 via the network and reaches the media router 212-2 (steps p4n, p4l2, p4j p ° 4). ^ The telephone management server 31 4-5. The 1? Packet H of the communication circuit identifier transmits the aforementioned RLC packet to the representative server 314-7 of the communication company 2 (step P414). The aforementioned RLC packet passes through the router 3U-7 (step P415) and arrives at the communication company] under management The ^ Sici server 313-5 (step P416) β received the end of the release 1? Of the packet \ &amp; reason

1245997 五、發明說明(94) '一&quot;&quot; &amp;理伺服器3 1 3 - 5在將電話通信的結束通知收費理伺服 = 313-4時(步驟P442),收費管理伺服器313_4知道透過通 ,1路號碼(CIC-1-2)識別的電話通信結束,並將此結果 记錄在内部。 其次,電話管理伺服器314_5將包含通信電路識別子 (CIC^l-2)的IP封包傳送給表管理伺服器314 —3(步驟p43i) ,表管理伺服器314-3清除圖77所示之網點裝置2〇9 — 2内部 的,位址官理表3 6 0 - 2的第2行的記錄之内容” e A 〇 2 &quot;、&quot; E A 0 1,, 、’’IA02&quot;、&quot;IA01”的4個位址(P432 )。媒體路由器212_2透 過步驟P413知道電話通信的釋放要求時,將通話的切斷指 不送給電話機214-5(步驟P420 ),接著透過步驟P413將報 告釋放要求之進行的釋放結束的IP封包,送回給網點裝置 209-2、代理電話管理伺服器、電話管理伺服器、 314-5(步驟P421、P423、P424)。電話管理伺服器314 —5將 呼叫號碼之電話通信的結束通知收費管理伺 (步_),收費管理伺謂14—4得知透過通1= 碼(CIC-1-2)識別的電話通信結束,並將此結果記錄在内 &lt;〈電話通信接續控制的附帶事項&gt; &gt; ^在電話使用者長時間進行電話通信,而不結束電話通 k的情況中,也就是不進行圖9〇所示之電話結束的步驟 P400。此時,會有電話通信費非常高的問題。為了避免此 種,況,舉例而言,電話管理伺服器313-5長時間地,例 如每24小時’就詢問檢出收費管理伺服器313 —*,當檢出1245997 V. Description of the invention (94) '一 &quot; &quot; &amp; management server 3 1 3-5 When the end of the telephone communication is notified to the charging server = 313-4 (step P442), the charging management server 313_4 knows Through the communication, the telephone communication identified by the 1-channel number (CIC-1-2) is ended, and the result is recorded internally. Next, the telephone management server 314_5 transmits the IP packet containing the communication circuit identifier (CIC ^ l-2) to the table management server 314-3 (step p43i), and the table management server 314-3 clears the network point shown in FIG. 77 The contents of the record in the second line of the address official form 3 6 0-2 inside the device 209 — 2 "e A 〇2 &quot;, &quot; EA 0 1 ,, &quot; IA02 &quot;, &quot; 4 addresses of IA01 "(P432). When the media router 212_2 knows the release request of the telephone communication through step P413, it does not send the call disconnection finger to the phone 214-5 (step P420), and then sends the IP packet that reports the release completion of the release request through step P413 and sends Back to the network device 209-2, the agent telephone management server, the telephone management server, and 314-5 (steps P421, P423, and P424). The telephone management server 314-5 notifies the end of the telephone communication of the calling number to the charge management server (step _), and the charge management server 14-4 learns that the telephone communication identified by the pass 1 = code (CIC-1-2) is ended And record the result &lt; &lt; incidental matters of telephone communication connection control &gt; &gt; ^ In the case where the telephone user performs telephone communication for a long time without ending the telephone communication, that is, FIG. 9 is not performed. The call ends at step P400. At this time, there is a problem that the telephone communication fee is very high. In order to avoid this, for example, the telephone management server 313-5 asks to check out the charge management server 313 — * for a long time, for example, every 24 hours.

ΦΦ

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第98頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 98 1245997

五、發明說明(95) 長時間的電話通信時,可移除圖90的步驟P400至P4〇3,僅 單獨進行步驟P404、P407、P433、P442。 &lt;〈其他通信費用的徵收方法&gt;&gt;5. Description of the invention (95) For long-term telephone communication, steps P400 to P403 of Fig. 90 can be removed, and only steps P404, P407, P433, and P442 can be performed separately. &lt; Method of collecting other communication fees &gt; &gt;

有關通信費,例如將通信公司1用的收費情報收集飼 服器設置於統合I P通信網2 〇 1的内部,收集收費管理祠服 器3 1 3 - 4收集的收費情報,並通知使用者服務伺服器3 1 3 一 6 ,可由收費伺服器相電話使用者請求電話費用。通信公司 2可同樣地設置收費情報收集伺服器。在通信公司1與通信 公司2之間,使用經由通信公司代表伺服器131一7及314一7 的IP通信裝置,可交換上述收集到的收費情報。 &lt;〈通信公司為1公司的情況&gt;&gt; 在圖74的通信公司2的運用管理範圍206-2不存在,ip 電話網203變為通化公司1的運用管理範圍時,上述電話接 續階&amp;的動作為可能。因此,如圖91所示,通信公司2的 運用管理範圍206-2變更為通信公司1的運用管理範圍,通 信公司2的代表伺服器314-7廢止,在路由器219-1與路由 器219-2間以IP通信電路接續。如此,在前述電話通信的 接續階段中,圖78所示的步驟P214至p216變成圖92所示的As for the communication fee, for example, the charging information collecting feeder for the communication company 1 is installed in the integrated IP communication network 2 001, the charging information collected by the charging management temple server 3 1 3-4 is collected, and the user is notified of the service The server 3 1 3-6 can request the telephone fee from the charging server and the telephone user. The communication company 2 may similarly install a charge information collection server. The communication information collected above can be exchanged between the communication company 1 and the communication company 2 using the IP communication devices via the communication company representative servers 131-7 and 314-7. &lt; &lt; When the communication company is a company &gt; &gt; When the operation management range 206-2 of the communication company 2 in FIG. 74 does not exist, and the IP telephone network 203 becomes the operation management range of the Tonghua company 1, the above telephone connection stage &amp; motion is possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91, the operation management range 206-2 of the communication company 2 is changed to the operation management range of the communication company 1, the representative server 314-7 of the communication company 2 is abolished, and routers 219-1 and 219-2 At the same time, it is connected by IP communication circuit. As such, in the continuation phase of the aforementioned telephone communication, steps P214 to p216 shown in FIG. 78 become as shown in FIG. 92.

P214X ’圖78所示的步驟P224至P226變成圖92所示的 P224X ’圖78所示的步驟P234至P236變成圖92所示的 P234X ’圖78所示的步驟P245至P247變成圖92所示的 P245X,其他的步驟則相同。 ^通信公司2的一連串的電話通信的準備全部變更為通 仏公司1的電話通信的準備。在電話通信接續階段與電話P214X 'Steps P224 to P226 shown in FIG. 78 become P224X shown in FIG. 92' Steps P234 to P236 shown in FIG. 78 become P234X shown in FIG. 92 'Steps P245 to P247 shown in FIG. 78 become shown in FIG. 92 P245X, the other steps are the same. ^ All preparations for a series of telephone communications by the communication company 2 have been changed to preparations for the telephone communications of the communication company 1. With the telephone during the telephony connection phase

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第99頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 99 1245997

^§釋Ps段中的前述—連串的步驟中,剩 服器313-5與電話管理伺服器314_5間的丨下電話管理伺 公司1的代表伺服器313_7與通信公 5,並省略通信 主管的-連串步驟。進而,也可將電話管代表伺服器川-7 與電話管理飼服器314-5做為一體化的電話服器3丨3-5 如此,在前述電話通信接續階段巾, Ρ214Χ^Ρ224Χ.Ρ234Χ^Ρ245Χ,^,,^^72Γ Ρ233、Ρ244、Ρ250、Ρ251係分別變成圖93所示之ρ2 Ρ223Χ、Ρ233Χ、Ρ244Χ、Ρ250Χ、Ρ251Χ,其他的步驟則相 同。^ § The foregoing in the Ps paragraph—in a series of steps, the remaining server 313-5 and the telephone management server 314_5, the lower server management server 313_7 and the communication company 5 of the server management server 1, and the communication supervisor is omitted. -A series of steps. Further, the telephone server representative server Kawa-7 and the telephone management server 314-5 can also be used as an integrated telephone server 3 丨 3-5 In this way, in the aforementioned telephone communication connection stage, ρ214 × ^ 224 ×× P234 × ^ P245 ×, ^ ,, ^^ 72Γ P233, P244, P250, and P251 are respectively changed to ρ2, P223 ×, P233 ×, P244 ×, P250 ×, and P251 × as shown in FIG. 93. The other steps are the same.

&lt;〈與電話管理伺服器的接續控制有關的說明之丨〉&gt; 。在進行從電話管理伺服器313-5到代表通信公司的伺 服器31 3-7之通信的前述步驟Ρ214中,詢問電話網域名稱 伺服器31 3-2前,可以知道受信端電話號碼” Tel-N〇 —2&quot;是 否屬於(是否加入)自己的通信公司運用管理的IP電話網之 下’或者是否加入其他通信公司運用管理的IP電話網之 下,以如下的程序進行。 電話管理伺服器31 3-5使用”電話號碼的通信公司區分 表&quot;解決此一問題。利用圖94所示之電話號碼的通信公司 區分表的例子加以說明。做為通信公司區分表之連續號碼 1的記錄,在,,電話號碼&quot;欄上顯示π 81-3-5414-xxxx”、在&quot; 自己公司?π欄上顯示為π Νοπ、在π其他通信公司識別情報” 欄上顯示” C 〇 m -1 3 Οπ。&quot; X X X X&quot;代理 1 〇 進位的 ’ 〇 〇 〇 〇 ’’ 至’’ 9 9 9 9 ’’,在本例中,電話號碼81 -3-5414-0000 至81-3-5414-&lt; &lt; Description of connection control of telephone management server &gt; &gt;. In the previous step P214 for communication from the telephone management server 313-5 to the server 31 3-7 representing the communication company, you can know the telephone number of the trusted party before asking the telephone domain name server 31 3-2. Tel -N〇-2 &quot; Whether it belongs to (whether to join) the IP phone network managed by its own communications company 'or whether it joins the IP phone network managed by other communications companies' use, the following procedures are performed. 31 3-5 Use of "telephone number carrier list" to solve this problem. A description will be given using an example of a carrier classification table with a telephone number shown in FIG. As a record of the consecutive number 1 of the division table of the communication company, π 81-3-5414-xxxx is displayed in the phone number &quot; column, and π Νοπ is displayed in the &quot; own company? "Communication company identification information" column shows "C 0m -1 3 Οπ. &Quot; XXX X &quot; Agent 1 〇 Carry '〇〇〇〇〇' to '9 9 9 9', in this example, the phone Number 81 -3-5414-0000 to 81-3-5414-

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第100頁 1245997 五、發明說明(97) 9999係屬於透過Com-1 30被識別的通信公司運用管理的ip 電話網’通信公司區分表的連號2的記錄上的電話號碼 &quot;1 - 2245-5 678”係屬於透過Com-025被識別的通信公司運用 管理的IP電話網,通信公司區分表的連號3的記錄上之電 話號碼&quot;81 -47-325-3887&quot;係屬於電話管理伺服器31 3-5所 屬之通信公司運用管理的I P電話網。 &lt;〈與電話管理伺服器的接續控制有關的說明之2 &gt;&gt;2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 100 1245997 V. Description of the invention (97) 9999 belongs to the record of serial number 2 of the IP telephone network 'Communication company classification table managed by the communication company identified through Com-1 30 The phone number "1-2245-5 678" belongs to the IP phone network managed and managed by the communication company identified through Com-025. The telephone number on the record of connection number 3 of the communication company classification table "81 -47 -325-3887 &quot; is an IP telephone network managed and operated by a communication company to which the telephone management server 31 3-5 belongs. &Lt; <Explanation 2 concerning connection control of the telephone management server &gt; &gt;

在進行從電舁管理伺服器3 1 3- 5到代表通信公司的伺 服器313-7之通信的前述步驟P214中,即使是受信端電話 號碼&quot;Tel-No-2&quot;的IP電話機判明為屬於自己的通信公司的 運用管理之下,也可能知道其他電話管理伺服器接續之電 話號碼為’’ Tel-No-2’’的電話機,是否加入至何處的網點裝 置,如下說明。電話管理伺服器31 3-5透過,,電話號碼的電 話管理伺服器區分表”解決此問題。透過圖95所示之電話 號碼的電話管理伺服器區分表的例子加以說明。 通信公司區分表的連號1的記錄上之電話號碼 ” 81-47 -325-3887&quot;係加入電話管理伺服器313-5運用In the foregoing step P214 where communication is performed from the electronic management server 3 1 3- 5 to the server 313-7 representing the communication company, even the IP phone of the recipient's telephone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot; is identified as Under the operation and management of your own communication company, you may also know whether the telephone number of the telephone number "Tel-No-2" connected to other telephone management servers is added to the outlet device, as described below. The telephone management server 31 3-5 solves this problem through the "phone management server classification table for telephone numbers". An example of the telephone management server classification table for the telephone number shown in Fig. 95 will be explained. The phone number on the record of serial number "81-47 -325-3887" is added to the phone management server 313-5.

管理的網點裝置(也就是接續通信電路)。通信公司區分表 的連號2的記錄上之電話號碼” 8卜2245-56χχπ係加入電話 號碼&quot;81 -2245-5600”至&quot;81-2245-5699,,且電話管理伺服器 的IΡ位址為&quot;1 0 0 · 1 0 · 11 · 4 0π的通信公司運用管理的網點裝 置(也就是接續通信電路)。其次,通信公司區分表的連號 3的§己錄上之電話號碼&quot; 81-6-1234-χχχχ”係加入電話號瑪 為81 -6- 1234-0000至81 -6 — 1234 -9999的通信公司運用管理Managed outlet devices (ie, connected communication circuits). The telephone number on the record of serial number 2 of the carrier's division table is 8 2224-56 χχπ is added to the telephone number "81 -2245-5600" to "81-2245-5699, and the IP position of the telephone management server The address company with the address "1 0 0 · 1 0 · 11 · 4 0π uses the managed network device (that is, the connection communication circuit). Secondly, the telephone number on § 2 of the serial number 3 of the telecommunications company division table "81-6-1234-χχχχ" is added to the telephone numbers of 81 -6- 1234-0000 to 81 -6 — 1234 -9999. Communication company operation management

12459971245997

五、發明說明(98) 的網點裝置(也就是接續通信電路)。 &lt;〈透過運用管理伺服器之網路的運用管理 時斜im1的運用管理飼服器3i3—9係周期性地或是隨 带置么:管理範圍206- 1内部的資源,即網點 H 2、、路由器219一1、219一3、2.5、219-6 電居網,名稱伺服器313-2、電話管理伺服器 此番#代理電話官理伺服器31 3-1、表管理伺服器31 3-3 .θ ^ 3 6、電話閘道209-1等,透過使用Ιρ通信裝置, ^疋,過傳送接收嫌封包的方式,檢查此等資源是否正 吊,或是檢查資源間的通信電路是否正常(故障管理),並 =透過監視前述網内的ΙΡ封包是否過於擁擠(通信品質 巨理),一元化地運用管理通信公司1的運用管理範圍 206-1的内部❶包含運用管理之結果所得到的通信電路 、、周路資源的故障狀況盘通作σ皙此 服4 質狀況可經由使用者服務伺 服1§313 - 6報告給電話使用者227一1。 或r =二^信么、司2的運用管理飼月艮器314一9係周期地 :通時與通k么司2的運用管理範圍2〇6_2内部的各種 通^ ’以檢查此等資源是否正常,或是檢查資源間通二 電路,否正常(故障管理),並且,透過監視前述網内= 封包疋否過於擁擠(通信品質管理),一元化地運用管 信公司2的運用管理範圍2〇6 — 2的内部。運用管理的結= 經由使用者服務伺服器314一6報告電話使用者227 —2。 經由透過運用管理伺服器31 3-9及314-9的前述網路運5. The outlet device of the invention description (98) (that is, the connection communication circuit). &lt; <Through the use of the network of the management server, the management of the slant im1 is used to manage the feeders 3i3-9. Are the feeders 3i3-9 periodically or brought along ?: The resources within the management range 206-1, that is, the network H 2 、, routers 219-1, 219-3, 2.5, 219-6 Electric Home Network, name server 313-2, phone management server ## 电话 电话 官 理 SERVER31 3-1, table management server 31 3-3 .θ ^ 3 6. Telephone gateway 201-1, etc., by using the Ip communication device, ^ 疋, through transmission and reception of suspected packets, check whether these resources are hanging, or check the communication circuit between resources. Whether it is normal (fault management), and = by monitoring whether the IP packets in the aforementioned network are too crowded (communication quality giant), use the management of the communication company 1's operation management range 206-1 internally, including the results of operation management The fault status of the obtained communication circuit and Zhoulu resources is classified as σ. The quality status can be reported to the telephone user 227-1 through the user service server 1§313-6. Or r = two ^ letter, the management of the operation of the Division 2 314-9 series: Periodically and the operation of the Scope 2 operation management range 2 06_2 various internal communication ^ 'to check these resources Whether it is normal, or check whether the communication between the two circuits is normal (fault management), and by monitoring the aforementioned network = packets are not too crowded (communication quality management), use the management and management scope 2 of the management company 2 in a unified way 〇6 — 2 inside. Application management result = telephone user 227-2 is reported via user service server 314-6. Operate via the aforementioned network using the management servers 31 3-9 and 314-9

12459971245997

9(11^電話機213_5及11&gt;電話機214_4間的11&gt;轉送網 、由接4 °卩之電話網2〇3的終端間通信接續控制的信賴性可 被柃升。同樣地,經由透過收費管理伺服器313_4及314 的通信費之徵收裝置支撐著通信公司的網路運用之經濟基 礎,可提升IP轉送網201内部的電話網2〇3之終端間通信ς 續控制的信賴性。 對實施例進行摘要,並補充說明如後。亦即,ΙΡ轉送 網至少包含網點·裝置、電話管理伺服器、媒體路由器、電 話網域名稱伺服器、表管理伺服器,使用者i ( i =9 (11 ^ telephones 213_5 and 11 &gt; 11 &gt; transfer network between telephones 214_4, the reliability of connection control between the terminals of the telephone network 203 connected to the 4 ° telephone network 203 can be improved. Similarly, the management through the charge The communication fee collection devices of the servers 313_4 and 314 support the economic basis of the network operation of the communication company, and can improve the reliability of the continuous control of the communication between the terminals of the telephone network 203 in the IP transfer network 201. Make a summary and add a description as follows. That is, the IP forwarding network includes at least network points and devices, a telephone management server, a media router, a telephone domain name server, and a table management server. The user i (i =

1,2,· ·)係將個別的外部^位址&quot;EA—i&quot;設定於Ip轉送網 α的外部之使用者的媒體路由器上,使用者i的媒體路 由器上接續1個以上的電話機,前述媒體路由器經由通信 電路被接續至任一個前述網點裝置,在前述通信電路的網 點裝置側之終端部(邏輯端子)上被授與用於使用者i之通 4吕的内部IP位址π IA - i &quot;,在前述的媒體路由器上被授與使 用者個別的電話號碼。又,前述電話網域名稱伺服器保存 有使用者個別的電話號碼、前述媒體路由器的外部丨p位址 &quot;ΕΑ_ Γ及前述内部IP位址&quot;I a- i&quot;,前述電話網域名稱伺服1,2, ·) The individual external ^ address &quot; EA-i &quot; is set on the user's media router outside the IP transfer network α, and the user i's media router is connected to more than one telephone The aforementioned media router is connected to any of the aforementioned branch devices via a communication circuit, and an internal IP address π for the user i is provided to a terminal (logical terminal) on the branch device side of the aforementioned communication circuit. IA-i &quot; is assigned to the user's individual phone number on the aforementioned media router. In addition, the aforementioned telephone domain name server stores the individual telephone number of the user, the external 丨 p address of the media router &quot; ΕΑ_Γ, and the internal IP address &quot; I a-i &quot;, the aforementioned telephone domain name Servo

器在使用者個別的電話號碼被詢問時,會回答外部丨p位址 及内部IP位址,在網點裝置上設定有決定媒體路由器與代 理電話管理伺服器間的IP通信路的丨p通信記錄。 對發仏端電話機的要求’使用前述I P通信記錄,經由 代理電話伺服器被傳送至電話管理伺服器,前述電話管理 伺服器委由電話網域名稱伺服器,由送信端電話號碼取得When the user's individual phone number is inquired, the device will answer the external IP address and internal IP address, and set the IP communication record on the branch device to determine the IP communication path between the media router and the agent telephone management server. . The request for the originating telephone set ’uses the aforementioned IP communication record and is transmitted to the telephone management server via the proxy telephone server. The aforementioned telephone management server is assigned to the telephone domain name server and obtained from the sending telephone number.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第 103 頁 1245997 五、發明說明(100) — 送信端媒體路由器的外部IP位址與内部IP位址(&quot;Ef i IA-i”),另外,由受信端電話號碼取得受信端媒體路由器 的外部IP位址與内部IP位址(&quot;EA-j,IA-j&quot;),表管理彳司服^ 器係分別將此等I P位址設定於送信側網點裝置及受信^ _ 點裝置上,以做為用於送信端電話機與受信端電話機間 '的 電話通信之IP通信記錄。當由送信端側要求呼叫設定日^,’ 送信端側的媒體路由器將包含受信端電話號碼與送信端I 話號碼的I P封包送至送信端側的電話管理飼服器,送彳古端 側的電話管理伺服器由受信端電話號碼與送信端電話號碼 唯一地決定識別電話聲音用之通信電路的電路號碼。 其次,送信端側的電話管理伺服器將包含送信端電話 號碼、受信端電話號碼及電路號碼的「要求電話呼叫設定 之I AM封包」傳送給受信端的電話管理伺服器,受信端側 的電話管理伺服器將前述「I AM封包接收報告的acm封包」 經由送信端側的電話管理伺服器,傳送至送信端側媒體路 由器。再者,前述受信端側的媒體路由器對受信端側的電 話機要求電話呼叫設定。當發出電話機著信音時,媒體路 由器將著信呼出中通知受信端側的電話管理伺服器,受信 端側電話管理伺服器將「通知著信呼出中的CpG封包」傳 送給送信端側的電話管理伺服器,送信端側的電話管理伺 服器經由媒體路由器將著信呼出中通知送信端側的電話 機。 當受信端侧的電話機回答呼叫設定要求時,應答係經 由欠扣端側之媒體路由器通知受信端側之電話管理伺服2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 103 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (100) — External IP address and internal IP address (&quot; Ef i IA-i ") of the sending media router The phone number of the receiving end obtains the external IP address and internal IP address (&quot; EA-j, IA-j &quot;) of the media router of the receiving end, and the server management server sets these IP addresses on the sending side respectively. The branch device and the receiving device _ _ are used as IP communication records for the telephone communication between the sender's telephone and the receiver's telephone. When the sender requests a call to set the date ^, the media router on the sender's side Send the IP packet containing the phone number of the sender and the I phone number of the sender to the phone management server on the sender's side. The phone management server on the sender's side is uniquely determined by the phone number of the sender and the phone number of the sender. Identifies the circuit number of the communication circuit used for telephone voice. Second, the telephone management server on the sender side will include the "I AM packet for requesting phone call settings" including the phone number of the sender, the phone number of the receiver, and the circuit number. The letter sent by the end of the call management server, the trusted end side of the telephone management server will aforementioned "I AM packet is received reports acm packet" via messenger management server side of the phone, sent to messenger media side by the road-side device. Furthermore, the media router on the receiving end side requires a telephone call setting on the telephone on the receiving end side. When the phone is sending a tone, the media router will notify the call management server on the receiving side during the outgoing call, and the phone management server on the receiving side will transmit the "notify CpG packet in the outgoing call" to the phone on the sending end. The management server. The telephone management server on the sender side notifies the telephone on the sender side of the outgoing call via the media router. When the telephone set on the receiving end answers the call setting request, the response is notified to the telephone management server on the receiving end by the media router on the receiving end.

1245997 五、發明說明(101) 器,受信端侧的電話管理伺服器形成「表示對呼叫設定 求之應答的ANM封包」,並傳送給送信側的電話管理伺服 器,送信端側的電話管理伺服器將對呼叫設定要求的應答 通知送信端侧的媒體路由器,送信端側的電話機停止呼^ 音,並進行至通話階段。當送信端侧或受信端側電話機的 通話結束,並通知電話呼叫之切斷要求時,此切斷要求係 經由媒體路由器被通知給電話管理伺服器。 πΐΓΜ電話呼λ、叫「切斯要求側的電話管理伺服器使用電路號碼 ),形成要求電話通信結束的REL·封包」,並傳送供 f他的被切斷侧的電話管理伺服器,前述被切斷側 : 官理伺服器則送回「報告接收REL封包之rl =電話管理飼服器將電話通信的結束心 求側的媒體路由器。 W要 電=管^司服器在電話通信結束後,收集包含有電路 唬!、通信時刻、電話號碼的電話通信記錄,並可通 :官理飼服器及收費用飼服器。在電話管理錢器 服器間的終端間通信接續控制或2個電話管理繼 則ΓΡ?广端間通信接續控制中’傳送接收前述1AM、 由写門傳逆接V:EL、RLC。在電話管理飼服器與媒體路 田器間傳送接收用於終端間接續控制的Ip封包。 IP:包的酬載部分稱為區段,做為電話坪叫接續 ;,可处階段的唯一的埠號碼,在不同的電話通信 工制私式。又,在電話通話階段中,透過分配每個電話機1245997 V. Description of the invention (101) The phone management server on the receiving side forms an "ANM packet indicating a response to the call setting request" and sends it to the phone management server on the sending side, and the phone management server on the sending side The transmitter notifies the media router on the sender's side of the response to the call setting request, and the telephone on the sender's side stops calling, and proceeds to the call phase. When the call on the sender's or receiver's telephone ends, and a call disconnection request is notified, the disconnection request is notified to the telephone management server via the media router. The πΐΓΜ phone calls λ and calls "the telephone management server on the Chess request side uses the circuit number) to form a REL packet that requests the end of the telephone communication" and transmits it to the telephone management server on the disconnected side. Cut-off side: The official server returns "Report rl of receiving the REL packet = the phone management server to request the end of the phone communication to the media router on the side. W Yaodian = tube ^ server after the phone communication is over , Collect telephone communication records containing circuit fools !, communication time, telephone number, and can be communicated through: official feeding device and fee-based feeding device. In the telephone management device, the communication connection control between terminals or 2 A telephone management relay ΓΡ? Broad-end communication connection control 'transmit and receive the aforementioned 1AM, and write the door to reverse V: EL, RLC. Transmission and reception between the telephone management feeder and the media road field device for terminal indirect continuous control IP packet. IP: The payload part of the packet is called a segment, which is used as a phone call connection. It is a unique port number that can be used at different stages. It is also used in different telephony systems. Also, during the telephony stage Through Each phone

1245997 五、發明說明(102) 不同的UDP埠號碼,即使是唯_ 从 可對每個電話機傳送不同的聲音\ &amp; 媒體路由器也 伺服器,為了完成送信侧之電:二::的1個電話管理 話管理伺服器的機能,前述電^ ^ /器與受信側之電 冤治官理伺服器姆ώ我理雷每 管理伺服器,可進行送信端媒體政由哭命^ Α由代理電話 奖夕雷炷、S广桩罎P比俨;5带、路由器與笑信端媒體路由 器之電话通#接續&amp;段及電話釋放階段的。 前述電話管理伺服器為了知道受信端=二 於自己之通馆公司運用管理的1?電話網之下, 入其他通信公司運用管理的卯雷每姻夕丁 或者疋否加 碼的通信公司區分表。4 了知道呈有A姓可使用電話號 話機是否加入何處的網點裝置;==電話號碼的電 理區分表。通信公司的運=理=;號碼的電話管 π s理例服器,透過通信公司的 運用官理範圍之網點裝置或各種饲服器,與電話間道情報 交換,-元化地運用管理網路内冑,使網路内部的終端間 通佗接續控制的信賴性提升,或是與收費股管理伺服器合 作,以k升I P轉送網之終端間通信接續控制的信賴性。 7 ·媒體路由器之構造不同的第7實施例: 圖96係用以說明有關路由器之Ip位址及電話號碼的授 與方法之模式圖,圖9 7係說明網點裝置之I p封包的膠囊化 之相關事項的圖式,參照此等圖式加以說明。 媒體路由器530收容IP電話機515-1至515_4及類比電 話機516-1至516-3,從電路介面部533經由用以傳送接受 IP封包的邏輯通信電路539-;1至539 —3,接績至網點裝置 540。在此,物理通信電路5 38係包含邏輯通信電路539— i1245997 V. Description of the invention (102) Different UDP port numbers, even if only _ can transmit different voices to each phone \ &amp; media routers are also servers, in order to complete the transmission side of the electricity: two :: one The function of the management server of the telephone management server, the aforementioned server ^ ^ / server and the server of the trusted side of the management server, each management server, can perform the delivery of media management cry ^ Α by the agent phone Awards Xi Lei, S Guang Zun Tan P Biao; 5 bands, routers and routers and media services of the phone through the phone connection # connection &amp; and phone release phase. The aforementioned telephone management server, in order to know that the trusted terminal = 2 is under the 1? Telephone network managed and managed by its own communication company, enters into the communication company division table of the management of other telecommunications companies, such as mines, telephones, or not. 4 I know the network device where the phone number can be used if the phone number is A; The operation of the communication company is equal to the number of the telephone tube π s case server. Through the communication company ’s network equipment or various feeders, it exchanges information with the telephone. On the road, the reliability of communication connection control between terminals within the network is improved, or the reliability of communication connection control between terminals of the IP forwarding network is increased by cooperating with the charging server. 7 · Seventh Embodiment with Different Structure of Media Router: Fig. 96 is a schematic diagram for explaining the method of granting IP addresses and telephone numbers of routers, and Fig. 9 is a diagram illustrating the encapsulation of IP packets of a network device Relevant matters are described with reference to these drawings. The media router 530 accommodates IP telephones 515-1 to 515_4 and analog telephones 516-1 to 516-3, and from the circuit interface 533 to the logical communication circuit 539-; 1 to 539-3 for transmitting and receiving IP packets. Network point device 540. Here, the physical communication circuit 5 38 includes a logical communication circuit 539 — i

2049-3793.PF;RAY.ptd 第106頁 1245997 五、發明說明(103) 至539-3全部。 媒體路由器530進行電話呼叫控制其他之媒體路由器 530的主要處理’包含媒體路由器主要部531、具有與類比 電話機接續之介面的類比介面部53 2、電路介面533、位址 電話號碼對應表534、及電話機管理表535,媒體路由器主 要部531在其内部具有IP位址” EA01n、,,EA12,,、,fEA13&quot;及 n ADR”。IP位址π ΕΑ0Γ係與電話號碼” Tel-No-Γ 1對1對應 附加,IP位址π ΕΑ12Π係與電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-1 2,,1對1對應 附加,IP位址1' EA1 3&quot;係與電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-13&quot; 1對1對應 附加,此表示於位址電話號碼對應表534。授與ιρ電話機 f 與類比電話機的電話號碼係以位址管理表加以管理。因 而,在變更電話號碼時,即改寫位址管理表。 在媒體路由器主要部531的内部為埠538-1至538-7, 這些埠分別被授與&quot;1&quot;至&quot;7”的埠號碼,再者,這些埠經由 通信電路被直接接續至IP電話機,或者是經由類比介面部 532被間接地接續至類比電話機516-1至516-3。IP電話機 515-1至51 5-4上分別被授與&quot;id-5”至&quot;id-8,,的識別名及IP 位址&quot;AD01&quot;至&quot;AD04”,其被表示於電話機管理表535内埠 號碼為1至4的記錄上。電話機管理表内的” d,,係表示ip電 話機,&quot;A&quot;係表示類比電話機。埠5 32- 1上被授與ip位址 ❿ &quot;ΕΑ0Γ,埠532-2上被授與ip位址” ΕΑ12Π,埠532-3上被授 與IP位址’’ ΕΑ13&quot;。埠5 38-1及532-1以通信電路接續,琿 538-7及532-3係以通信電路接續。由於ip電話機515-1係 以通信電路517-1接續至埠538-1上,當IP電話機515-1經2049-3793.PF; RAY.ptd Page 106 1245997 V. Description of Invention (103) to 539-3. The media router 530 performs telephone call control and other main processing of the media router 530 'includes a media router main section 531, an analog interface 53 having an interface connected to an analog phone, a circuit interface 533, an address telephone number correspondence table 534, and In the telephone management table 535, the main part of the media router 531 has an IP address "EA01n ,,, EA12 ,,, fEA13 &quot; and n ADR". The IP address π ΕΑ0Γ is associated with the phone number "Tel-No-Γ 1 to 1 is added, and the IP address π ΕΑ12Π is associated with the phone number &quot; Tel-No-1 2, and 1 to 1 is added, and the IP address 1 is 'EA1 3 &quot; is associated with the telephone number &quot; Tel-No-13 &quot; 1 to 1 correspondence is added, which is shown in the address telephone number correspondence table 534. The telephone numbers granted to the ιρ telephone f and the analog telephone are based on the address management table Therefore, when the telephone number is changed, the address management table is rewritten. Ports 538-1 to 538-7 are located inside the main part 531 of the media router, and these ports are respectively granted with &quot; 1 &quot; to &quot; 7. ", And these ports are directly connected to the IP telephone via the communication circuit, or indirectly connected to the analog telephones 516-1 to 516-3 via the analog interface 532. The IP phones 515-1 to 51 5-4 are given with the identification names and IP addresses of "id-5" to "id-8", "AD01" to "AD04", which are indicated in The telephone management table 535 records the internal port numbers 1 to 4. The "d" in the telephone management table indicates an IP telephone, &quot; A &quot; indicates an analog telephone. The IP address is granted on port 5 32-1, and the IP address is granted on port 532-2. IP address ΕΑ12Π, IP address ΕΕ13 &quot; was assigned on port 532-3. Port 5 38-1 and 532-1 are connected by a communication circuit, and ports 538-7 and 532-3 are connected by a communication circuit. Because the IP telephone 515-1 is connected to the port 537-1 by the communication circuit 517-1, when the IP telephone 515-1 is

1245997 五、發明說明(104) 由媒體路由器5 3 0接續至網點裝置時,可使用I p位址 &quot;ΕΑ0Γ。同樣地,類比電話機51 6-3上被固定地分配IP位 址π EA131’。類比電話機5 16-3經由媒體路由器530接續至網 點裝置時,通常使用IP位址” EA1 3&quot;。此方式被顯示於位址 管理表5 3 5的埠1之記錄與埠7之記錄。 埠538-4及538-5以通信電路被接續,ip電話機5 15_4 係經由通信電路517-4、埠538-4及538-5、類比介面532、 及通信電路5 18-1,接續至類比電話機516 — i,ip電話機 5 1 5 - 4及類比電話機5 1 6 -1間可進行電話通信。同樣地,I p 電話機515 - 2係經由通信電路517 —2、埠538 —2及538-3、通 信電路5 17-3,接續至ip電話機51 5 — 3 ,兩1?電話機間可進 行電話通信。 2個類比電話機間的電話通信,透過類比介面部的機 月匕,也疋可能的。ip電話機515-1至515 -將聲音數位化並 以IP封,載送,其相反的機能則是將數位化的聲音回復成 類比,聲音。類比介面部將從類比電話機卩丨卜^^至5丨6 —3接 收的聲音數位化’並傳送給媒體路由器主要部5 31,其相 反的機能則是將從媒體路由器主要部531接收的數位化聲 音回復成類比聲音,並送給類比電話機。 &lt;&lt;用於電話接續之媒體路由器與網點裝置之一連串的程序 一當拿起IP電話機51 5-1的受話器時,呼出的1{)封包52〇 經由通信電路51 7-1被傳送給媒體路由器主要部531。在 此,被寫入至IP封包520内部的標頭之送信端ιρ位址為1245997 V. Description of the invention (104) When the media router 530 is connected to the outlet device, the IP address &quot; ΕΑ0Γ can be used. Similarly, the analog telephone 51 6-3 is fixedly assigned an IP address? EA131 '. When the analog telephone 5 16-3 is connected to the outlet device via the media router 530, the IP address "EA1 3" is usually used. This method is shown in the record of port 1 and the record of port 7 in the address management table 5 3 5. 538-4 and 538-5 are connected by the communication circuit. The IP telephone 5 15_4 is connected to the analog telephone through the communication circuit 517-4, port 538-4 and 538-5, the analog interface 532, and the communication circuit 5 18-1. 516 — i, IP phone 5 1 5-4 and analog phone 5 1 6 -1 can perform telephone communication. Similarly, IP phone 515-2 is via communication circuit 517 — 2, port 538 — 2 and 538-3. The communication circuit 5 17-3 is connected to the IP telephone 51 5-3. Telephone communication can be performed between two 1? Telephones. Telephone communication between two analog telephones is also possible through the analog phone on the face. IP telephones 515-1 to 515-Digitize the voice and send it with IP. The opposite function is to restore the digitized voice to an analog, voice. The analog interface will be from the analog phone 卩 丨 卜 ^^ 到5 丨 6 —3 The received sound is digitized 'and transmitted to the media router main section 5 31, The opposite function is to restore the digitized sound received from the main part 531 of the media router into an analog sound and send it to the analog phone. &Lt; &lt; A series of procedures for the media router and the outlet device for telephone connection is picked up at once When the IP phone 51 5-1 is a receiver, the outgoing 1 {) packet 520 is transmitted to the media router main unit 531 via the communication circuit 51 7-1. Here, it is written to the header of the IP packet 520 and sent The terminal address is

1245997 五、發明說明(105) AD01&quot;、受信端IP位址為’’ ADR”。媒體路由器主要部531將 ’’受理呼出’,的IP封包送回給IP電話機515-1。接著,在ip 電話機515-1的使用者撥號輸入通信對象處的電話號碼 Tel-No-4”時,在IP電話機515-1内部,產生包含在ip封 包的酬載上之送信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-1Π及通信對象處之 電活號碼π T e 1 - Ν 〇 - 4&quot;的電話之’’呼叫設定’,,並傳送給媒體 路由器530。 媒體路由器530接收在媒體路由器主要部531中之前述 ΪΡ封包,形成包含至少送信端電話號碼” Tel-Νο-Γ及受信 、電話號碼||161-1^〇-4|’的1?封包,透過傳送給網點裝置 5 4 0,開始呼叫設定的手續。 網點裝置540接收IP封包521時,檢索圖97所示之位址 管理表541,並檢索做為外部IP位址包含送信端]^位址 &quot;ΕΑ0 1&quot;、受信端I p位址” EA8 Γ的記錄,此時若找到位址管 理表541上起第1行之記錄,也就是”EA01、EA81、IA01、 ϊ A81&quot;的記錄,利用被記載於此記錄内部之第3個及第4個 的IP位址πΙΑ0Γ及ΙΑ81,,,產生使用IP封包之膠囊化技術 的内部I P封包5 4 2,並傳送給IP位址為,,I a 8 1π的代理電話 管理伺服器545。在此,IP封包542的酬載部分係IP封包 521。再者,上述中,由於物理通信電路5 38包含邏輯通信 電路539-1至539-3的全部,邏輯端子543-1至543-3全部具 有相同的内部I P位址值” I A0 Γ。 8 ·進行閉域電話通信的第8實施例 在圖98中,1001係統合IP通信網、1〇〇2係IP資料網、1245997 V. Description of the invention (105) AD01 &quot; The IP address of the receiving end is "ADR". The main part of the media router 531 returns the IP packet `` receiving the outgoing call "to the IP phone 515-1. Then, at ip When the user of the telephone 515-1 dials and enters the telephone number Tel-No-4 at the communication destination ", the IP phone 515-1 generates the telephone number of the sender included in the payload of the ip packet &quot; Tel-No The "call setting" of the telephone of "-1Π" and the call number π T e 1-Ν〇-4 "of the communication destination is transmitted to the media router 530. The media router 530 receives the aforementioned UDP packet in the main part 531 of the media router, and forms a 1 packet including at least the telephone number of the sending end "Tel-Nο-Γ and the trusted and telephone number || 161-1 ^ 〇-4 | ' By transmitting to the network device 5 4 0, the call setting procedure is started. When the network device 540 receives the IP packet 521, it searches the address management table 541 shown in FIG. 97, and searches for the external IP address including the sender. Address &quot; ΕΑ0 1 &quot;, the address of the receiving end I p address "EA8 Γ, if the record of the first line from the address management table 541 is found at this time, that is, the record of" EA01, EA81, IA01, ϊ A81 " Using the third and fourth IP addresses πΙΑ0Γ and Ι81, which are recorded in this record, an internal IP packet 5 4 2 using the encapsulation technology of the IP packet is generated and transmitted to the IP address as, , I a 8 1π agent telephone management server 545. Here, the payload part of the IP packet 542 is the IP packet 521. Furthermore, since the physical communication circuit 5 38 includes the logical communication circuits 533-1 to 539- All of 3, logic terminals 543-1 to 543-3 all have the same Internal IP address value "I A0 Γ. 8 · Eighth embodiment of closed-domain telephone communication In FIG. 98, the 1001 system is combined with the IP communication network, the 1002 series IP data network,

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第109頁 1245997 五、發明說明(106) 1 〇 〇 3係IP電話網、1 〇 〇 4係聲音影像網、1 0 0 5係通信公司1 運用管理的統合IP通信網的範圍、1 〇 〇 6係通信公司2運用 管理的統合IP通信網的範圍。1 002至1 004係均具有IP封包 之轉送機能的IP轉送網。在IP轉送網的内部可透過傳送接 收IP封包的IP通信裝置進行情報交換。在統合IP通信網 1 0 0 1外部使用的IP位址稱為外部I p位址,在内部使用的j p 位址稱為内部IP位址。1 080至1〇81係電話閘道,1〇82及 1 083係公眾交換電話網(PSTN),1〇84及1〇85係電話機。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 109 1245997 V. Description of the invention (106) 1 003 IP telephone network, 1 04 audio and video network, 1 0 5 communication company 1 Integration of operation management The range of the IP communication network, 2006 is the range of the integrated IP communication network that the communication company 2 operates and manages. 1 002 to 1 004 are all IP forwarding networks with the function of forwarding IP packets. Inside the IP transfer network, information can be exchanged through an IP communication device that transmits and receives IP packets. The IP address used externally in the unified IP communication network 1 0 01 is called the external IP address, and the j p address used internally is called the internal IP address. 1 080 to 1081 are telephone gateways, 1082 and 1 083 are public switched telephone networks (PSTN), and 1084 and 1085 are telephones.

以下說明從電話機1011經由媒體路由器1〇21、通信 電路1 040、網點裝置1〇31、IP電話網1〇〇3内部,到網點 裝置1032、通信電路1041、媒體路由器1〇22、電話機 1 〇 1 2,進行通信接續之”終端間通信接續控制方法”。 電話機1011至1013的使用者係事先決定各自的電話號 碼’及授與該等電話機接續之媒體路由器的外部位址的 值。參照圖1 0 0及圖1 〇 1加以說明,電話機丨〇丨丨係使用電 號碼,媒體路由器上授與外部=電話 &quot;ΕΑ1”,電話機U12係使用電話號碼&quot;Tel_N〇_2&quot;,媒體路 由器1 022上授與外部IP位址&quot;EA2&quot;,電話機1〇13係使用電The following description is from the telephone set 1011 via the media router 1021, the communication circuit 1 040, the branch point device 1031, the IP telephone network 1003, to the branch point device 1032, the communication circuit 1041, the media router 1022, and the telephone set 10. 1 2. "Method for controlling communication connection between terminals" for communication connection. The users of the telephones 1011 to 1013 determine in advance their respective telephone numbers' and the values of the external addresses of the media routers to which these telephones are connected. Illustrated with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. 10, the telephone set 丨 〇 丨 丨 uses an electric number, and the media router grants external = phone &quot; ΕΑ1 ", and the telephone set U12 uses a telephone number &quot; Tel_N〇_2 &quot; Media router 1 022 grants an external IP address &quot; EA2 &quot;

話號碼&quot;Tel-No-3&quot;,媒體路由器1 023上授與外部Ip位址 &quot;EA3&quot;。電話號碼伺服器1 026至1〇28 被提示時回答外部IP位址&quot;EA1&quot;在 Tel-No-2&quot;被提示時回答外部Ιρ位址&quot;ΕΑ2&quot;, …切被提示時回答外部Ιρ位址&quot;ΕΑ3&quot;。此 例如内線電話號碼&quot;100&quot;至199”等的電話號碼群以一定The phone number &quot; Tel-No-3 &quot; and the external IP address &quot; EA3 &quot; was granted on the media router 1 023. Phone number server 1 026 to 1028 Answer external IP address when prompted &quot; EA1 &quot; Answer external Iρ address when prompted &quot; ΕΑ2 &quot;, answer external Iρ when prompted Address &quot; ΕΑ3 &quot;. This group of phone numbers such as extension phone numbers &quot; 100 &quot; to 199 "

1245997 五、發明說明(107) 的規則,例如將1 0 0號透過對應於1的規則,對應附加網域 名稱&quot;1·&quot;,其可適用網域名稱伺服器(DNS)的習知技術。 &lt;&lt;電話通信的準備〉〉1245997 V. The rule of invention description (107), for example, the number 100 through the rule corresponding to 1 corresponds to the additional domain name &quot; 1 · &quot;, which can be applied to the knowledge of domain name server (DNS) technology. &lt; &lt; Preparation for telephone communication 〉〉

參照圖98及圖99加以說明,使用者1060向電話受理者 1061申請使用電話(圖99之步驟A100),電話受理者1〇61從 使用者1 060取得電話之申請情報之前述外部IP位址&quot;ΕΑΓ, 及1’ΕΑ2Π、使用者姓名、費用支付方式、通信電路1〇4〇的 識別記號” L-1 040”及網點裝置1031的識別記號π ΝΝ-1 031 π、通信電路1041的識別記號&quot;L-1041&quot;與網點裝置1 032的 識別記號&quot;ΝΝ-1 0 32’’等,並通知使用者服務伺服器ι〇4ΐ(步 驟A101)。使用者服務伺服器1041決定用以識別使用者 1 060的使用者識別記號&quot;UID-Γ,將透過前述受理所得的 外部IP位址ΠΕΑΓ及ΠΕΑ2Π、使用者姓名等使用者申請情報 保存在使用者服務伺服器1041所有的資料庫(步驟Α1 02)。Referring to FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, the user 1060 applies to the telephone receiver 1061 for use of the telephone (step A100 in FIG. 99), and the telephone receiver 1061 obtains the aforementioned external IP address of the application information for the telephone from the user 1 060. &quot; ΕΑΓ, and 1′ΕΑ2Π, user name, payment method, identification code "L-1 040" of communication circuit 1040, and identification code π ΝΝ-1 031 π of network device 1031, communication circuit 1041 The identification number &quot; L-1041 &quot; and the identification number &quot; NN-1 0 32 &quot; of the outlet device 1 032, etc. are notified to the user service server ι04A (step A101). The user service server 1041 decides a user identification code &quot; UID-Γ to identify the user 1 060, and stores the user application information such as the external IP addresses ΠΕΑΓ and ΠΕΑ2Π, the user name, etc. obtained through the foregoing acceptance. All the databases of the customer service server 1041 (step A102).

其次,使用者服務伺服器1 041將透過前述手續得到的 外部IP位址π ΕΑ1 ”及π ΕΑ2Π、通信電路的識別記號,,L-1 040,, 及&quot;L-1041&quot;、網點裝置的識別記號&quot;ΝΝ-1031&quot;及1,ΝΝ-1 032,, 通知給電話管理伺服器1 042時(步驟Α103),電話管理伺服 器1 042決定内部IP位址,,ΙΑ1,,及,,ΙΑ2”,將4個位址&quot;ΕΑ1、 EA2、IA1、IA2&quot;通知表管理伺服器1〇43(步驟A107)。在 此,内部IP位址&quot;IA1&quot;係授與通信電路1 040與網點裝置 1 〇 3 1之接續點的内部I p位址,&quot;I A2 π係授與通信電路1 〇41 與網點裝置1 0 3 2之接續點的内部I ρ位址,使用網點裝置的 識別記號” ΝΝ-1031&quot;及&quot;ΝΝ1 032&quot;與通信電路的識別記號Secondly, the user service server 1 041 will obtain the external IP addresses π ΕΑ1 ″ and π ΕΑ2Π obtained through the aforementioned procedures, the identification mark of the communication circuit, L-1 040, and &quot; L-1041 &quot; Identification number &quot; NN-1031 &quot; and 1, NN-1 032 ,, when notified to the telephone management server 1 042 (step A103), the telephone management server 1 042 decides the internal IP address, ΙΑ1, and ,,, "IAA2", the four addresses &quot; EA1, EA2, IA1, IA2 &quot; are notified to the table management server 1043 (step A107). Here, the internal IP address &quot; IA1 &quot; is the internal IP address assigned to the connection point of the communication circuit 1 040 and the network point device 1 〇31 1, and the &quot; I A2 π is assigned to the communication circuit 1 〇41 and the network point The internal I ρ address of the connection point of the device 1 0 3 2 uses the identification marks of the network point device "ΝΝ-1031 &quot; and &quot; ΝΝ1 032 &quot; and the identification marks of the communication circuit

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第111頁 1245997 五、發明說明(108) L-1 040及’’ L-1041”,在統合Ip轉送網1〇〇1的内部統一決 定的值,電話管理伺服器1〇42與1〇65透過前述”通信裝置 進行情報交換,以其他方法事先確認同一值。 表笞理伺服器1 〇 4 3將前述4個位址通知網點裝置1 〇 3 j 時(步驟A108),網點裝置保存前述4個位址&quot;EA1、EA2、 IA1、IA2’’以做為圖100所示之網點裝置内部的位址管理表 1034之第1記錄(步驟A1〇9)。位址管理表1〇34的第i行之記 錄被定義為具有外部IP位址&quot;EA1,,的媒體路由器1〇21與具 有外部IP位址&quot;EA2”的媒體路由器1〇22間之lp通信記錄。 IP通信記錄提供在產生内部Ip封包的Ip膠囊化中之ιρ標頭 内的位址情報。同樣地,做為位址管理表1〇34之第2行的 =錄,4個位址&quot;EA1、EA3、IA1、IA3&quot;被設定為1?通信記 錄0 同樣地,使用者1 062向電話受理者1〇63申請電話服 務,經過與前述相同的程序(圖99之步驟AU〇至步驟Aii9) ’在網點裝置1 032的内部,設定有具有圖1〇1所示之外部 IP位址&quot;EA2&quot;的媒體路由器1 022與具有外部Ip位址&quot;&quot;的 :體路由器1021間的IP通信記錄’又,透過與上述相同的 ^理’在位址管理表1 035的第!至4行的記錄上,設定有且 •有:部IP位址&quot;EA2&quot;的媒體路由器i 〇22與具有外部即位址 EA3的媒體路由器1〇23間的Ip通信記錄或是其他的ιρ 通信記錄。再者,使用者1 062向電話受理 設定媒體路由器1〇22與媒體路由器1021間的Ip通俨^錄。 因此,電話管理伺服器1〇42實行前述步驟&quot;A1〇7&quot;時, 1245997 五、發明說明(109) 也同時進行步驟&quot;A117_2&quot;(圖99),ιρ通信記錄的設定則依 靠表管理伺服器1〇66。 &lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉 使用者拿起電話機1011的受話器,撥號輸入通信對象 處電話機1012的電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-2&quot;,向媒體路由器1021 内部的媒體路由器管理部1〇56進行電話呼出(圖1〇2的步驟 A200 ),媒體路由器管理部1〇56確認電話呼叫(步驟Α2〇ι) 〇2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 111 1245997 V. Description of the invention (108) L-1 040 and "L-1041", values determined uniformly in the integrated IP transfer network 1001, telephone management The servers 1042 and 1065 exchange information through the aforementioned "communication device" and confirm the same value in advance by other methods. When the server 1 0 4 3 notifies the network device 1 0 3 j of the foregoing four addresses (step A108), the network device saves the aforementioned 4 addresses &quot; EA1, EA2, IA1, IA2 '' as the The first record of the address management table 1034 inside the branch device shown in FIG. 100 (step A109). The record in row i of the address management table 1034 is defined as between the media router 1021 having an external IP address "EA1", and the media router 1022 having an external IP address "EA2". lp communication record. The IP communication record provides address information in the ιρ header in the IP capsules that generate internal IP packets. Similarly, as the second line of the address management table 1034 = record, four The address &quot; EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3 &quot; is set to 1? Communication record 0 Similarly, the user 1 062 applies for telephone service to the telephone receiver 1063, and goes through the same procedure as above (step AU in FIG. 99). 〇 to step Aii9) 'Inside the branch device 1 032, a media router 1 022 having an external IP address &quot; EA2 &quot; shown in FIG. 101 and an external IP address &quot; &quot; The IP communication record between the routers 1021 is again set by the same logic as above on the records from line 1 to line 4 of the address management table 1 035. There are: • IP addresses of the department &quot; EA2 &quot; Record of IP communication between the media router i 〇22 and the media router 1023 with an external address EA3 It is another ιρ communication record. In addition, the user 1 062 accepts the IP address of the media router 1022 and the media router 1021 from the telephone. Therefore, the telephone management server 1042 executes the foregoing steps &quot; A1 〇7 &quot;, 1245997 V. Description of the invention (109) The steps &quot; A117_2 &quot; (Fig. 99) are also performed at the same time, and the setting of the communication record depends on the table management server 1066. &lt; &lt; Continuation stage 〉〉 Use The person picks up the receiver of the telephone 1011, dials and enters the telephone number "Tel-No-2" of the telephone 1012 at the communication destination, and makes a call to the media router management unit 1056 inside the media router 1021 (steps in FIG. 10) A200), the media router management unit 1056 confirms the telephone call (step A2〇ι).

A ^媒體路由器管理部1〇56向電話號碼伺服器1〇26提示電 話號碼” Tel-No-2&quot;(步驟Α202),取得對應的媒體路由器 Η22,之IP位址” ΕΑ2”(步驟Α203),形成包含有送信端電話 號碼&quot;Tel-No—Γ,、受信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-2,,、電話呼叫 識別子&quot;C-ID&quot;、及接續控制相關情報&quot;丨以卜丨”的電話呼叫 設定用的外部IP封包1 070 (圖1〇3),並傳送給網點裝置 1031 (步驟A204)。在此,外部IP封包1〇7〇的1?標頭之Ip位 址領域係以送信端IP位址為&quot;EA丨&quot;,受信端i p位址為&quot;EA2,, ’外部IP封包1 070的酬載部分為UDP區段,送信端埠號碼 為&quot;5060&quot;,受信端埠號碼為” 5〇6〇”為例。電話呼叫識別子 &quot;C-ID”係用以在電話通信中區別從電話發出呼叫後的接續 階段至聲音通信階段、釋放階段的電話呼叫與其他的電話 啤叫。接續控制相關情報&quot;Inf 0-丨&quot;至少包含在聲音通信階 段中使用的UDP埠號碼,例如&quot;5004 π,至於其他的内容可 包含聲音壓縮方式的識別記號、聲音符號變換編解碼識別 記號、及媒體路由器1021的ip位址&quot;ΕΑΓ。在此,媒體路A ^ The media router management unit 1056 presents the telephone number "Tel-No-2" to the telephone number server 1026 (step A202), and obtains the IP address "ΕΑ2" of the corresponding media router "22" (step A203). , Forming a telephone number of the sending end "Tel-No-Γ", a telephone number of the receiving end "Tel-No-2,", a telephone call identifier "C-ID", and connection control related information " The external IP packet 1 070 (FIG. 103) for setting the phone call is transmitted to the network device 1031 (step A204). Here, the IP address field of the 1? Header of the external IP packet 1007 is based on the sending IP address &quot; EA 丨 &quot; and the receiving IP address as &quot; EA2. The payload part of 1 070 is the UDP section, the sending port number is "5060 &", and the receiving port number is "5600" as an example. Phone call identifier "C-ID" is used to distinguish between phone calls and other phone calls from the connection phase to the voice communication phase and the release phase after the call is placed in the telephone communication. Connection control related information "Inf 0 -丨 & At least include the UDP port number used in the voice communication phase, such as &quot; 5004 π, as for other contents, it may include the identification mark of the sound compression method, the identification mark of the sound symbol conversion codec, and the IP of the media router 1021. Address &quot; ΕΑΓ. Here, Media Road

第113頁 1245997 五、發明說明(110) 由器管理部1 0 5 6及1 0 5 7透過事前決定的規則,設定並參照 電話呼叫識別子乂-IDn及接續控制相關情報” info-][”。 網點裝置1 0 3 1接收I P封包1 0 7 0時,確認被授與輸入I p 封包1070之通信電路1040的終端部(邏輯端子)的内部1?位 址為&quot;I A1”,I P封包1 〇 7 0的受信端外部I P位址&quot;e A 2 &quot;,並檢 索圖100所示的位址管理表1034。開始時檢索送信端内部 I P位址為&quot;I A1&quot;的IP通信記錄,接著檢索包含受信端外部 IP位址π EA2”的IP通信記錄是否在前述檢出的IP通信記錄 内。 其次,檢查IP封包1 070内的送信端外部ip位址” EA1 ” ψ 是否被包含於前述檢出的I P通信記錄内。此時,若找到位 址管理表1 034上起第1行,也就是,,EA1、EA2、IA1、IA2,, 的IP通信記錄,利用被記載於此IP通信記錄内部的第3與 第4之&quot;IA1&quot;及&quot;IA2&quot;,使用將新的IP標頭授與外部IP封包 1070的IP封包之膠囊化技術,形成如圖104所示的内部Ip 封包1071。 在位址管理表内部的IP通信記錄的前述檢索中,開始 時檢索送信端内部I P位址為&quot;IΑ Γ的記錄(有複數候補), 其次從前述檢索到的記錄中檢索受信端外部丨p位址為,,EA2 &quot;的IP通信記錄。可省略檢索送信端外部IP位址” EA1,,的步 驟。在前述IP封包膠囊化中,内部IP封包的標頭部之1?位 址區域上’設定有前述内部I p位址的送信端I p位址” IA1&quot; 與受信端IP位址π IA 2π。所形成的内部IP封包1 〇 71被傳送 至網點裝置1 032(步驟Α205 ),經由路由器1〇35-1至1〇35 - 6Page 113 1245997 V. Description of the invention (110) The device management unit 1 0 5 6 and 1 0 5 7 set and refer to the phone call identifier ID-IDn and connection control related information through rules determined in advance "info-] [" . When the branch device 1 0 3 1 receives the IP packet 1 0 7 0, it confirms that the internal part of the terminal (logical terminal) of the communication circuit 1040 of the input I p packet 1070 is addressed to "I A1", the IP packet 1 〇 0 0 of the recipient's external IP address &quot; e A 2 &quot;, and retrieve the address management table 1034 shown in Figure 100. At the beginning, retrieve the IP communication of the sender's internal IP address as &quot; I A1 &quot; Record, and then retrieve whether the IP communication record containing the external IP address of the trusted end π EA2 ”is in the aforementioned IP communication record detected. Next, check whether the external IP address “EA1” ψ of the sender in the IP packet 1 070 is included in the IP communication record detected above. At this time, if the first line from the address management table 1 034 is found, that is, the IP communication records of EA1, EA2, IA1, and IA2 ,, the third and fourth records recorded in the IP communication record are used. "&Quot; IA1 &quot; and &quot; IA2 &quot; use the encapsulation technology of an IP packet that grants a new IP header to an external IP packet 1070 to form an internal IP packet 1071 as shown in FIG. 104. In the foregoing search of the IP communication record in the address management table, at the beginning, the record with the internal IP address of the sender at &quot; IΑΓ is retrieved (there is a plurality of candidates), and then the external record is retrieved from the retrieved record p address is, EA2's IP communication record. The step of retrieving the sender's external IP address "EA1," can be omitted. In the aforementioned IP packet encapsulation, the sender with the aforementioned internal IP address is set on the address area 1? In the header of the internal IP packet. "I p address" IA1 "and the IP address of the trusted end π IA 2π. The formed internal IP packet 1 〇 71 is transmitted to the branch office device 1 032 (step A205), and via the routers 1035-1 to 1035-6

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

1245997 五、發明說明(111) ,而到達網點裝置1 032,網點裝置1 032移除IP封包1071 的標頭’進行IP封包的逆膠囊化,以回復IP封包1〇72(圖 105) ’並將IP封包1〇72傳送至媒體路由器1〇22(步驟A206) 在前述IP封包的逆膠囊化中,網點裝置1 〇 3 2可如次使 用值為”EA2、EA1、IA2、ΙΑΓ的IP通信記錄。亦即,在網 點裝置1032内部的位址管理表1035上存在有包含前述4個 IP位址的I P通信β記錄’由於在接收到的内部I p封包1 〇 71的 標頭内部的IP位址區域上為π ΙΑ2、ΙΑΓ,外部IP封包1072 内部的IP位址區域上為ΠΕΑ2、ΕΑΓ ,確認可進行逆膠囊 化。在4個位址(&quot;ΕΑ2、ΕΑ1、ΙΑ2、ΙΑ1”)一致的ΙΡ通信記 錄不存在時’不檢查IP封包1071内的受信端外部ip位址 &quot;EA2&quot;,且不進行逆膠囊化,而可廢棄接收的Ip封包。 媒體路由器管理部1 057從外部IP封包丨072取得送信端 電話號碼nTel-No-Ι1’、受信端電話號碼”Tei—N〇-2&quot;、電話 呼叫識別子&quot;C-ID&quot;、及接續控制相關情報&quot;丨以卜丨&quot;。媒體 路由器管理部1 057從&quot;Info-1&quot;内部取得例如&quot;5〇〇4&quot;以做為 在聲音通信階段中送信端電話機使用帝埠號碼,又,使用 電話呼叫識別子&quot;C-ID”,可用以區別前述著信的電話呼叫 與其他的電話呼叫。 以上說明的一連串步驟A204、A205、A206稱為呼叫設 定,透過&quot;I AM&quot;省略表示前述一連串步驟。 媒體路由器管理部1 057為了對於前述呼叫設定通知受 理呼叫設定,將包含電話呼叫識別子” C—ID&quot;、送信端1245997 V. Description of the invention (111), and when it reaches the branch device 1 032, the branch device 1 032 removes the header of the IP packet 1071 and performs the decapsulation of the IP packet to reply the IP packet 1072 (Figure 105). IP packet 1072 is transmitted to media router 1022 (step A206) In the aforementioned decapsulation of the IP packet, the branch device 1 032 can use the IP communication with the value "EA2, EA1, IA2, ΙΑΓ" as before That is, there is an IP communication β record containing the aforementioned 4 IP addresses on the address management table 1035 inside the branch point device 1032. “Because of the IP inside the header of the received internal IP packet 1 〇71 The address area is π ΙΑ2, ΙΑΓ, and the internal IP address area of the external IP packet 1072 is ΠΕΑ2, ΕΑΓ, confirming that decapsulation can be performed. At 4 addresses (&quot; ΕΑ2, ΕΑ1, ΙΑ2, ΙΑ1 ") When a consistent IP communication record does not exist, the external IP address of the trusted end "EA2" in the IP packet 1071 is not checked, and no reverse encapsulation is performed, and the received IP packet can be discarded. The media router management unit 1 057 obtains the sender's phone number nTel-No-11 ', the recipient's phone number "Tei-N0-2", the telephone call identifier "C-ID", and the connection control from the external IP packet. Relevant information &quot; 丨 Ib. &Quot; The Media Router Management Department 1 057 obtained from &quot; Info-1 &quot; internally, for example, &quot; 5〇〇4 &quot; as the sender's telephone in the voice communication stage using the port number, In addition, the use of a telephone call identifier "C-ID" can be used to distinguish the aforementioned telephone call from other telephone calls. The series of steps A204, A205, and A206 described above are called call settings, and "&quot; I AM &quot; is omitted to indicate the aforementioned series of steps. The media router management unit 1 057 includes a telephone call identifier "C-ID" in order to notify the caller of the caller settings as described above.

1245997 五、發明說明(112) 號碼’’Tel-Νο-Γ、受信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-2,,的IP封包送 回至媒體路由器管理部1 056 (步驟A2〇7、A208、AA209 )。 這一連串的步驟A207、A208、A209稱為呼叫設定受 理’以省略記號” ACM”表示。媒體路由器管理部1〇57使用 前述呼叫設定受理中的電話呼叫識別子” CM D”本身,可不 將送信端電話號碼” Tel-No-Γ及受信端電話號碼 &quot;Tel-No-2” 送回。 其次,當媒體路由器管理部1057將電話呼出傳送至電 話機1012(步驟A210),電話機1〇12為確認著信而回信(步 驟A211 ),並發出電話呼出音。媒體路由器管理部1〇57為 了通知對電話機1012呼出中,產生包含電話呼叫識別子 &quot;C-ID”、送信端電話號碼&quot;Teuo—i&quot;、受信端電話號碼 &quot;Tel-Νο-2π的IP封包,並送回給媒體路由器管理部1〇56( 步驟A212、A213、A214)。這一連串的步驟A212、A213、 A214稱為呼叫經過或呼出中,以省略記號&quot;CPG”表示。在 呼叫經過的步驟中,可以不送回送信端電話號碼 &quot;Tel-Νο-Γ及受信端電話號碼” Tel -No-2,,。媒體路由器管 理部1056將對受信端電話機1〇12呼出中通知送信端電話機 1011(步驟A215)。 一方面,當電話機1012的使用者聽到電話機的呼出音 ’拿起電話機的送受話器,並通知媒體路由器管理部 時(步驟A220),媒體路由器管理部1057產生包含前述電話 呼叫識別子nC-IDn、送信端電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-Γ、受信端 電話號碼&quot;Tel-No-2”、及接續控制相關情報” inf0 —2”的Ip1245997 V. Description of the invention (112) The IP packet with the number `` Tel-Nο-Γ, the telephone number of the receiving end &quot; Tel-No-2, '' is returned to the media router management unit 1 056 (steps A207, A208, AA209). This series of steps A207, A208, and A209 are referred to as a call setting manager 'and are indicated by omitting the symbol "ACM". The media router management unit 105 uses the phone call identifier "CM D" itself in the call setting acceptance described above, and does not need to return the sender's phone number "Tel-No-Γ" and the recipient's phone number "Tel-No-2" . Next, when the media router management section 1057 transmits the outgoing call to the telephone 1012 (step A210), the telephone 1012 replies to confirm the letter (step A211), and issues an outgoing call tone. The Media Router Management Department 1057 generates a caller ID "C-ID", the sender's phone number &quot; Teuo-i &quot;, and the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-Nο-2π in order to notify that the call to the telephone 1012 is in progress. The IP packet is sent back to the media router management unit 1056 (steps A212, A213, and A214). This series of steps A212, A213, and A214 is called as call passing or outgoing, and is indicated by omitting the "&quot; CPG". In the step through the call, the sender's phone number &quot; Tel-Nο-Γ and the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2 &quot; may not be returned. The media router management unit 1056 will make a call to the recipient's phone 1012 The sender's telephone 1011 is notified (step A215). On the one hand, when the user of the telephone 1012 hears the call out of the telephone 'takes up the handset of the telephone and notifies the media router management unit (step A220), the media router management unit 1057 Generate an IP including the aforementioned telephone call identifier nC-IDn, the sender's phone number &quot; Tel-No-Γ, the recipient's phone number &quot; Tel-No-2 ", and connection control related information" inf0-2 "

2049-3793-ΙΨ ; RAY.ptd 第 116 頁 1245997 五、發明說明(113) 封包’並通知媒體路由器1 〇 2 1内部的媒體路由器管理部 1056(步驟 A222、A223、A224)。這一連串的步驟 A222、 A223、A224稱為應答,以省略記號” ΑΝΜΠ表示。前述接續 控制相關情報’’ I n f 〇 - 2π中至少包含在聲音通信階段中使用 的UDP埠號碼,例如&quot;5〇〇6π。前述IP封包的形式係與圖1〇4 的内部I P封包1 0 71具相同的形式,可省略將送信端電話號 碼” Tel-No-Γ及受信端電話號碼” Tel—No-2”寫入ip封包内 部。對於前述電·話機1012的應答(步驟A220 ),媒體路由器 管理部1 056會加以確認(步驟A221)。2049-3793-IIΨ; RAY.ptd page 116 1245997 V. Description of the invention (113) Packet 'and notify the media router 1 0 2 1 of the internal media router management unit 1056 (steps A222, A223, A224). This series of steps A222, A223, and A224 is called a response, and is indicated by omitting the symbol "ANMΠ." The aforementioned connection control related information "I nf 0-2π contains at least the UDP port number used in the voice communication phase, such as &quot; 5 〇〇6π. The format of the aforementioned IP packet is the same as that of the internal IP packet 1 0 71 in FIG. 104, and it is possible to omit the telephone number “Tel-No-Γ and the telephone number of the recipient” Tel-No- 2 ”is written into the ip packet. The media router management unit 1 056 will confirm the response from the telephone 1012 (step A220) (step A221).

媒體路由器管理部1 056從,'Inf 0-2,,知道在通信階段使 用的受信端埠號碼,例如,’ 5 0 〇 6π,將電話機1 〇 1 2的應答 (離鉤)通知電話機1011(步驟Α225 ),電話機1011則加以確 認(步驟A226)。再者,可省略前述步驟A221及步驟A226。 根據上述結束電話呼出的接續階段。 再者,前述步驟中,步驟A2 00及A210稱為,,呼叫設定 π,步驟A201及A211稱為,,呼叫設定受理&quot;,步驟八215稱為&quot; 呼出’步驟Α220及Α225稱為&quot;應答&quot;,步驟Α221及Α226 ^ 為”應答確認&quot;。 &lt;&lt;通信階段〉〉 當電話機1011的使用者透過聲音開始會話時,聲音信 號被送至媒體路由器管理部1〇56(圖1〇6的步驟Α250),媒 體路由器管理部1056將聲音數位化,進而區分為適當的 度’形成圖107的外部IP封包1 073。然後,在外部1{)封包 1 0 73内部的UDP區段的酬載部分儲存前述數位化聲音,並The media router management unit 1 056 knows the number of the trusted port used in the communication phase from 'Inf 0-2', for example, '50 0〇6π, and notifies the phone 1011 of the response (off hook) of the phone 1011 ( Step A225), and the phone 1011 confirms (Step A226). In addition, the foregoing steps A221 and A226 may be omitted. End the continuation phase of the phone call as described above. Furthermore, in the foregoing steps, steps A2 00 and A210 are called, call setting π, steps A201 and A211 are called, call setting acceptance &quot;, step eight 215 is called &quot; outgoing calls' steps A220 and A225 are called &quot; Response &quot;, steps A221 and A226 are "response confirmation". &Lt; &lt; communication stage >〉 When the user of the telephone set 1011 starts a conversation by voice, the voice signal is sent to the media router management unit 1056 ( Step A250 in FIG. 10), the media router management unit 1056 digitizes the voice, and further divides it into appropriate degrees to form the external IP packet 1 073 in FIG. 107. Then, the external UDP packet 1 0 73 inside UDP The payload section of the segment stores the aforementioned digitized sound, and

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第117頁 1245997 五、發明說明(114) '~&quot;&quot;~&quot; ' &quot; —~ 將IP封包1 073傳送至網點裝置1031 (步驟A251)。UDp區段 内部的送仏端埠號碼在接續階段中係使用媒體路由器管理 部1 0 5 6及1 0 5 7相互交換而取得的送信端埠號碼&quot;5 〇 〇 4 &quot;及受 信端埠號碼π 5 0 0 6&quot;。 網點裝置1031接收IP封包1〇73時,在位址管理表内部 找出”EA1、EA2、IAl、IA2&quot;的1?通信記錄,使用此”通信 記錄,外部IP封包1 073被膠囊化而變成内部IP封包,經由 路由器1 035-1至1 035-6而到達網點裝置1〇32(步驟A252 )。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 117 1245997 V. Description of the invention (114) '~ &quot; &quot; ~ &quot;' &quot; — ~ IP packet 1 073 is transmitted to the outlet device 1031 (step A251). The sending port number in the UDp section is the sending port number &quot; 5 〇〇4 &quot; and the receiving port, which are obtained by using the media router management department 1056 and 1057 in the connection phase. The number π 5 0 0 6 &quot;. When the branch office device 1031 receives the IP packet 1073, it finds the 1? Communication record of "EA1, EA2, IAl, IA2 &quot; in the address management table. Using this communication record, the external IP packet 1 073 is encapsulated and becomes The internal IP packet reaches the network point device 1032 via the routers 1 035-1 to 1 035-6 (step A252).

然後’外部IP封包1 〇 7 5被回復,外部I p封包1 〇 7 &amp;經由 媒體路由器官理部1057(步驟A253),而到達電話機ι〇ΐ2( 步驟A254)。包含電話機1012的使用者的聲音之Ip封包以 與前述相反方向的流程,也就是經由媒體路由器管理部 1 0 57(步驟A260 )、網點裝置1〇32(步驟A261)、路由器 1 035-6至1 035-1,到達網點裝置1〇31(步驟A262),再經由 媒體路由器官理部1056(步驟A263),而到達電話機ι〇ιι( 步驟A264)。 β &lt;&lt;釋放階段〉〉 當電話機1011的使用者因電話通信結束而放回送受話 器,並將電話通信結束通知媒體路由器管理部時(圖丨丨〇之 步驟Α280),媒體路由器管理部1056形成至少包含表示電 話通信結束的情報及電話呼叫識別子&quot;C- ID”的I ρ封包。將 此IP封包傳送至網點裝置1〇31(步驟Α281),在網點裝置 1 〇 31中被膠囊化,通過I p轉送網1 〇 〇 3而到達網點裝置丨〇 3 2 (步驟A282),在網點裝置1〇32中被逆膠囊化,經由媒體路Then, the 'External IP packet 107' is replied, and the external IP packet 107 & passes through the media router management unit 1057 (step A253) and reaches the telephone ι〇2 (step A254). The IP packet containing the voice of the user of the telephone 1012 follows the flow in the opposite direction to that described above, that is, via the media router management unit 1057 (step A260), the network point device 1032 (step A261), and the router 1 035-6 to 1 035-1, arrive at the outlet device 1031 (step A262), and then pass through the media router administrative department 1056 (step A263), and reach the telephone ιιιι (step A264). β &lt; &lt; Release stage >〉 When the user of the telephone set 1011 puts the receiver back due to the end of the telephone communication, and notifies the media router management section of the end of the telephone communication (step A280 in FIG. 1056 forms an I ρ packet containing at least the information indicating the end of the telephone communication and the phone call identifier "C-ID". This IP packet is transmitted to the branch office device 1031 (step A281), and is encapsulated in the branch office device 1031. To the branch point device via the IP transfer network 1 03 (step A282), is decapsulated in the branch point device 1032, and passes through the media path.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第118頁 1245997 發明說明(115) 由器管理部1 057(步驟A283),而到達電話機1〇12(步驟 A284)。這一連串的步驟A281、A282、A283、A284稱為釋 放,以省略記號&quot;REL”表示。 其认’報告釋放結束的I P封包被反方向地通知(步驟 A2 86、A2 87、A2 88)。這一連串的步驟A286 'A2 87、A2 88 稱為釋放結束,以省略記號”RLCn表示。在步驟A281、 A282、A283等中使用的IP封包的形式或ip位址的設定方法 與電話通信的接.續階段中的步驟A2 04、A205、A206等相 同。 &lt;〈其他電話機間的通信〉〉 從電話機1011對具有電話號碼’’Tel-No-3’1的電話機 1 01 3進行電話通信也同樣可能,當詢問電話號碼伺服器 1 0 2 6時’對應於電話號碼” τ e 1 - N 〇 - 3 ’’的外部IP位址&quot;e A 3π 被回答。位址管理表1 034内部的IP通信記錄” EA1、ΕΑ3、 IA1、I A3”及位址管理表1 035内部的ip通信記錄&quot;ΕΑ3、ΕΑ1 、I A3、ΙΑΓ被用於IP封包的膠囊化與逆膠囊化。又,從 電話機1012對電話機1013進行電話通信,透過與前述相同 的終端間通信接續控制方法也是可能地。當電話通信結束 時’埠號碼11 5004&quot;及&quot;50 06π為空號,可用於下次的電話通 信0 &lt;〈通信公司為1公司的情況〉〉 在圖98的通信公司2的運用管理範圍1〇〇6不存在,而 IP電話網1003變為通信公司1的運用管理範圍時,上述電 話呼叫的接續階段、通話階段、釋放階段為可能。在此例2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 118 1245997 Description of the invention (115) The router management unit 1 057 (step A283) arrives at the telephone 1012 (step A284). This series of steps A281, A282, A283, and A284 is called release, and is indicated by the omission "REL". It acknowledges that the IP packet reporting the end of release is notified in the opposite direction (steps A2 86, A2 87, A2 88). This series of steps A286, A2 87, A2 88 is called the end of release, and is indicated by the omission of the symbol "RLCn". The IP packet format or IP address setting method used in steps A281, A282, A283, etc. is the same as that of telephone communication. Steps A2 04, A205, A206, etc. in the subsequent stage are the same. &lt; 〈Communication between other telephones 〉〉 Telephone communication from telephone 1011 to telephone 1 01 3 with telephone number `` Tel-No-3'1 is also possible. When inquiring telephone number server 1 0 2 6 '' The external IP address &quot; e A 3π &quot; corresponding to the telephone number "τ e 1-N 〇-3" was answered. The IP communication record inside the address management table 1 034 "EA1, EA3, IA1, I A3" and The IP communication records in the address management table 1 035 are used for encapsulation and inverse encapsulation of IP packets. Also, the telephone communication from the telephone 1012 to the telephone 1013 is the same as that described above. The connection control method of terminal-to-terminal communication is also possible. When the telephone communication ends, 'port numbers 11 5004' and '50 06π are vacant numbers, which can be used for the next telephone communication 0 &lt; <the case where the communication company is one company> 〉 When the operation management range 1006 of the communication company 2 in FIG. 98 does not exist, and the IP telephone network 1003 becomes the operation management range of the communication company 1, the connection phase, call phase, and release phase of the telephone call are possible. In this case

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997

用总^=5、的運用管理範圍1006變更為通信公司1的運 矣:^ 通仏公司1的代表伺服器1與通信公司2的代 司服器1036-1至ι〇36 —2廢止,路由器1〇35 —7與路由器 1 〇 3 5 -1間以IP通信電路接續。 &lt;〈媒體路由器的其他實施例〉〉 參照圖111 ’說明媒體路由器的其他實施例。媒體路 器1021-1包含如圖98所示的媒體路由器1〇21的機能,媒 體路由器管理部1〇56 —丨包含媒體路由器管理部1〇56的機能 ,電話號碼伺服器1〇26 —丨包含電話號碼伺服器1〇26的機 ,。1 040-1係至網點裝置的通信電路。1〇8〇-1係接續控制 4 ’ 1 0 81 -1係電話控制部,丨〇 8 2係媒體路由器運用管理部 ’ 1 083係電話號碼•腳位(pin)號碼· udp埠號碼對應表。 媒體路由器運用管理部1 082透過記錄電話通話的機能與媒 體路由器内部的故障檢出等而包含信賴性管理機能。電話 控制部1081-1利用經由通信電路接續電話機丨〇1丨—丨至 1011-4 ’具有在電話通信中的協定變換、聲音符號變換、 變動(flue tuat ion)控制、將類比聲音與數位聲音變換或 逆變換並傳送接收的機能。1 084係電路介面部,包含有通 信電路1040-1及傳送接收ip封包的機能。媒體路由器運用 管理部105 6-1可進行與媒體路由器管理部1056同樣的電話 接續控制及釋放控制,亦即參照圖1 〇 2說明的電話接續控 制,及參照圖11 0說明的電話釋放控制。 電話號碼•腳位號碼· UDP埠號碼對應表1 083顯示電 話號碼&quot;T e 1 - N 〇 -1 ’’係1 : 1對應於電話控制部1 〇 8 1 -1内的腳Change the operation management range 1006 of the total ^ = 5 to the operation of the communication company 1: ^ The representative server 1 of the communication company 1 and the server 1036-1 to ι〇36-2 of the communication company 2 are abolished, Router 1035 —7 and router 103 5 -1 are connected by an IP communication circuit. &lt; &lt; Other embodiment of media router &gt; &gt; Another embodiment of the media router will be described with reference to FIG. 111 '. The media router 1021-1 includes the function of the media router 1021 as shown in FIG. 98, the media router management section 1056 — 丨 includes the function of the media router management section 1056, and the telephone number server 1026 — 丨Machine containing telephone number server 1026. 1 040-1 is the communication circuit to the outlet device. 1 080-1 series connection control 4 '1 0 81 -1 series telephone control section, 〇〇8 2 series media router operation management section' 1 083 series telephone number • pin number • udp port number correspondence table . The media router operation management unit 1 082 includes a reliability management function through a function of recording a telephone call and a fault detection in the media router. The telephone control unit 1081-1 uses a telephone connected via a communication circuit 丨 〇1 丨-to 1011-4 'to have protocol conversion, voice symbol conversion, flue tuat ion control in telephone communication, analog sound and digital sound Transform or inverse transform and transmit the received function. The 1 084 series circuit interface includes communication circuit 1040-1 and the function of transmitting and receiving IP packets. The media router operation management unit 105 6-1 can perform the same telephone connection control and release control as the media router management unit 1056, that is, the telephone connection control described with reference to FIG. 102 and the telephone release control described with reference to FIG. 110. Phone number, pin number, and UDP port number correspondence table 1 083 shows the phone number &quot; T e 1-N 〇 -1 ′ ’1: 1 corresponds to the pin in the telephone control unit 1 〇 8 1 -1

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第120頁 1245997 五、發明說明(117) 位號碼,’ T1 ’’,又UDP埠號碼&quot;50 04’’係1 : 1對應於腳位號碼 ΤΓ。以下同樣地,電話號碼&quot;Tei -N〇—12&quot;係1 : 1對應於 腳位號碼&quot;T2&quot;及UDP埠號碼&quot;5006π,電話號碼,,Tel-Νο-13π 係1 :1對應於腳位號碼”T3,f&amp;UDP埠號碼&quot; 5008”,電話號 碼’’ Tel-No-14”係1 : 1對應於腳位號碼&quot;T4&quot;及UDP埠號碼 &quot;5010”。由於上述,例如在使用電話號碼” Tel—仏—丨”的情 形,UDP埠號碼參照電話號碼•腳位號碼· UDp埠號碼對應 表1 083為’’ 50 04π 4。UDP埠號碼用以做為識別聲音通信用的 習知RTP之埠號碼(聲音通信用RTP埠號碼)。 圖112之1083-1係表示電話號碼•腳位號碼· udp埠號 碼對應表的其他實施例,可與1 〇83交換。此例申電話號碼 &quot;Tel-No-Γ係代表電話號碼,電話機1〇11-1至1〇11—4具有 相同的電話號碼161-No-Γ’,由於UDP埠號碼為不同的 &quot; 5004&quot;至&quot;5010&quot;,電話機1〇11一1至1〇11一4使用不同的琿號 碼可以進行聲音通信,在同一時刻不會互相干擾。 圖113之1083-2係表示電話號碼•腳位號碼· udp埠號 碼對應表的其他實施例,可與1 〇 8 3交換。在此例子中,具 有電話號碼&quot;Te卜No-12&quot;的電話機iou-2在先撥出電話, UDP谭號碼π 5004π即被授與。其他的電話機loll]、 1 0 11 -3、1 0 11 -4,在開始電話通信的接續階段,被授與其 他未分配的UDP埠號碼&quot; 5006&quot;及&quot; 5008”等,在前述電話呼 叫的釋放階段,則中止(返還)前述被授與的UDp埠號碼的 授與。接續控制部1 080-1透過適當地變更腳位號碼與UDp 埠號碼的對應結合’可實現如前述的代表電話號碼。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 120 1245997 V. Description of the invention (117) Digit number, 'T1', and UDP port number &quot; 50 04 '', 1: 1 corresponds to the pin number ΤΓ. In the same way, the telephone number &quot; Tei-N0-12 &quot; is 1: 1, which corresponds to the pin number &quot; T2 &quot; and the UDP port number &quot; 5006π, the telephone number, and Tel-Nο-13π, which corresponds to 1: 1. For the pin number "T3, f & UDP port number" 5008 ", the phone number" Tel-No-14 "is 1: 1 corresponding to the pin number" T4 "and UDP port number" 5010 ". Due to the above, for example, in the case of using the telephone number “Tel— 仏 — 丨”, the UDP port number refers to the correspondence between the phone number, the pin number, and the UDp port number. Table 1 083 is “’ 50 04π 4 ”. The UDP port number is used as a conventional RTP port number (an RTP port number for voice communication) for identifying voice communication. 1083-1 of FIG. 112 is another example of the correspondence table of telephone numbers, pin numbers, and udp port numbers, and can be exchanged with 1.083. In this example, the telephone number &quot; Tel-No-Γ is a representative telephone number, and the telephones 1011-1 to 1011-4 have the same telephone number 161-No-Γ ', because the UDP port number is different &quot; 5004 &quot; to &quot; 5010 &quot;, telephones 1011-11 to 1011-14 can use different phone numbers for voice communication, and will not interfere with each other at the same time. 1083-2 of FIG. 113 shows another example of the telephone number, pin number, and udp port number correspondence table, which can be exchanged with 1083. In this example, the telephone iou-2 with the telephone number &quot; Te 卜 No-12 &quot; dials the call first, and the UDP Tan number π 5004π is granted. Other telephones (loll), 1 0 11 -3, 1 0 11 -4, at the beginning of the connection phase of the telephone communication, were assigned other unassigned UDP port numbers &quot; 5006 &quot; and &quot; 5008 ", etc. In the release phase of the call, the grant of the aforementioned UDp port number is suspended (returned). The connection control section 1 080-1 can appropriately achieve the representative as described above by appropriately changing the correspondence between the pin number and the UDp port number. telephone number.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第121頁2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 121

1245997 五、發明說明(118) &lt;〈媒體路由器的其他實施例〉〉 參照圖1 1 4,說明媒體路由器的其他實施例。媒體路 由器1021-2包含圖98所示之媒體路由器1021的機能,接續 控制部1 080-2包含圖111所示之接續控制部1 080- 1的機 ' 能,電話控制部108 1-2包含電話控制部108 1-1的機能。 1 040-2係用以接續至網點裝置的通信電路。媒體路由 器管理部1056-2包含媒體路由器管理部1〇56的機能,電話 號碼伺服器1026-2包含電話號碼伺服器1〇26的機能。 1 085-1 係 PBX 控制部,1 085-2 係PBX ,1 086 及 1 087 係路由 器,1 088係媒體路由器的運用管理部,1 089係用於網際網 路的通信電路,1090及1091係具有傳送接收IP封包之機能 的IP終端,1 092係具有傳送接收聲音影像機能的動態影像 送受信機。IP終端1 090及1091、動態影像送受信機1〇92係 一起經由IP通信電路而被接續至路由器1087。又,從路由 器1 087,經由IP通信電路被接續至LAN丨093。接續控制部 1 080-2及電話號碼伺服器1〇26-2、路由器1 086及1 087係透 過通信電路1 0 8 9而被相互地接續。 PBX 1085-2係收容複數個電話機的私設分局交換機, PBX控制部1 085-1係位於接續控制部logo-2及PBX 1 085-2 間,以進行兩者的介面交換(聲音碼交換及聲音壓縮等)。 由於變成如此,媒體路由器1〇21 - 2經由電話控制部1〇81 - 2 直接收容多數的電話機,或可經由ΡΒχ 1〇85 —2加以收容。 此等電話機可經由I ρ轉送網與其他電話機進行電話通信。 為了使媒體路由器1021-2如上所述,從通信電路1245997 V. Description of the invention (118) &lt; &lt; Other embodiment of media router &gt; &gt; With reference to Figs. The media router 1021-2 includes the functions of the media router 1021 shown in FIG. 98, the connection control unit 1 080-2 includes the functions of the connection control unit 1 080-1 shown in FIG. 111, and the telephone control unit 108 1-2 includes Function of the telephone control unit 108 1-1. 1 040-2 is a communication circuit used to connect to outlet devices. The media router management section 1056-2 includes the function of the media router management section 1056, and the telephone number server 1026-2 includes the function of the telephone number server 1026. 1 085-1 series PBX control section, 1 085-2 series PBX, 1 086 and 1 087 series routers, 1 088 series media router operation management section, 1 089 series for internet communication circuit, 1090 and 1091 series The IP terminal with the function of transmitting and receiving IP packets, 1 092 is a dynamic video transmitter and receiver with the function of transmitting and receiving audio and video. The IP terminals 1 090 and 1091 are connected to the router 1087 via an IP communication circuit. The router 1 087 is connected to the LAN 093 via an IP communication circuit. The connection control unit 1 080-2, the telephone number server 1026-2, and the routers 1 086 and 1 087 are connected to each other through the communication circuit 1089. PBX 1085-2 is a private branch exchange that houses a number of telephones. PBX control section 1 085-1 is located between the connection control section logo-2 and PBX 1 085-2 for interface exchange between the two (voice code exchange and voice Compression, etc.). Because of this, the media router 1021-2 can directly accommodate most telephones via the telephone control unit 1081-2, or can be accommodated via PBχ 1085--2. These telephones can communicate with other telephones via the IP transfer network. To make the media router 1021-2 as described above, the communication circuit

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第122頁 1245997 五、發明說明(119) 1040-2輸入的ip封包可經由路由器1〇86及通信電路1〇89到 達接續控制部1 080-2,又,ip封包可由相反的方向,也就 是從接續控制部1080-2轉送給通信電路1〇89、路由器 1 086、通信電路1〇4〇-2。同樣地,從通信電路1 040-2輸入 的IP封包可經由路由器1086、通信電路1〇89、路由器 1 087、通信電路,到達lan 1093内部的IP終端1090、IP終 端1091、或動態影像送受信機1〇92。又,ip封包可反方向 地轉送,即可從IP終端1〇9〇、ip終端1〇91、或動態影像送 受信機1092轉送至通信電路、路由器1087、通信電路 1089、路由器1086、通信電路1〇4〇-2。 &lt;&lt;發信優先性控制〉〉 接著,說明有關媒體路由器1 〇 21 -2的發信優先性控制 的機能。圖11 5係媒體路由器1 〇 21 _ 2内部的一部分,顯示 接續至媒體路由器1021-2的IP終端與LAN的接續狀態之模 式圖。但是,中途的通信電路則省略記載,1〇85 —21係從 電話號碼伺服器1026-2被送出的ip封包,1085-22係從接 續控制部1 080-2被送出的IP封包,1085-23係從LAN 1093 被送出的IP封包,1085 - 24係從IP終端1〇91被送出的IP封 包,1 085-25係從動態影像送受信機1 092被送出的IP封 包。又,IP封包1085-21至1085-25係經由乙太網路 (Ethernet)1089及路由器1086,被送至通信電路1〇4〇-2。 在IP封包1085-21至1085-25的酬載為TCP或UDP區段 時,在這些區段内部包含有送信端埠號碼及受信端埠號碼2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 122 1245997 V. Description of the invention (119) The ip packet input by 1040-2 can reach the connection control unit 1 080-2 via router 1086 and communication circuit 1089, and, The ip packet can be transferred from the opposite direction, that is, from the connection control unit 1080-2 to the communication circuit 1089, the router 1 086, and the communication circuit 104-4. Similarly, the IP packet input from the communication circuit 1 040-2 can reach the IP terminal 1090, the IP terminal 1091, or the moving image transmitting / receiving machine inside the LAN 1093 through the router 1086, the communication circuit 1089, the router 1 087, and the communication circuit. 1092. In addition, the ip packet can be forwarded in the reverse direction, that is, it can be forwarded from the IP terminal 1090, the IP terminal 1091, or the moving image transmitting and receiving device 1092 to the communication circuit, the router 1087, the communication circuit 1089, the router 1086, and the communication circuit 1. 〇〇〇〇〇 2-0. &lt; &lt; Transmission Priority Control> &gt; Next, the function of the transmission priority control of the media router 1021-2 will be described. Fig. 11 is a model diagram showing a part of the internal part of the 5 series media router 1 〇 21 _ 2 connected to the IP terminal connected to the media router 1021-2 and the LAN. However, the description of the communication circuit in the middle is omitted. 1085-21 is an IP packet sent from the telephone number server 1026-2, 1085-22 is an IP packet sent from the connection control unit 1 080-2, 1085- 23 is an IP packet sent from LAN 1093, 1085-24 is an IP packet sent from IP terminal 1091, and 1 085-25 is an IP packet sent from moving image sender 1 092. In addition, the IP packets 1085-21 to 1085-25 are transmitted to the communication circuit 1040-1 via the Ethernet 1089 and the router 1086. When the payloads of IP packets 1085-21 to 1085-25 are TCP or UDP sections, these sections contain the sender port number and the trusted end port number.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第123頁 1245997 五、發明說明(120) Φ 圖116之1085-3係顯示決定前述ip封包從乙太網通信 電路1 089被送到通信電路1〇4〇-2的順序之發信優先性控制 管理表1 085-3。IP封包從乙太網通信電路1〇89側輸入,通 過路由器1086輸出至通信電路1〇4〇 — 2時,檢查通過的ip封 包之内部的酬載是否是TCP區段或UDP區段,當其為TCP區 段或UDP區段時,檢查其内部的送信端埠號碼。當ιρ封包 在相近的時間到達路由器1 〇 8 6時,包含送信端埠號碼為 &quot;108&quot;的TCP區段或UDP區段的ip封包會最優先被傳送,接 著則是包含送信端埠號碼為&quot;5 〇 6 0,,、&quot; 5 0 0 4&quot;或&quot;5 0 2 0&quot;的 TCP區段或UDP區段的IP封包被傳送。 記載於發信優先性控制管理表1 085-3中的埠號碼的值 可變更為其他值。又,可將發信優先性控制管理表1〇85一 3 變更為圖117的發信優先性控制管理表1085-4。在使用發 信優先性控制管理表1〇85-4的例子中,送信端IP位址 &quot;150· 1· 2· 3Π且送信端埠號碼為” ι〇8”的1{)封包最優先,其 次的優先性為送信端IP位址&quot;丨92·丨.2· 3”且送信端埠號碼 為π 5 0 6 0 ”、” 5 0 0 4 ’’ 或&quot;5 0 2 0&quot;的 IP 封包。 在上述實施例中,媒體路由器1 〇 2 1 - 2以透過發信優先 性控制管理表1 085-3指定的埠號碼做為基準,或是以透過 發信優先性控制管理表1〇85-4指定的IP位址及埠號碼做為 基準’其具有決定從IP封包送出給通信電路1〇4〇-2的IP封 包之送出順序的機能。 其次,參照圖118加以說明。媒體路由器1〇21-3及 1021-4經由ip轉送網1001 —被接續,IP終端1〇91 —j、動態2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 123 1245997 V. Description of Invention (120) Φ Figure 1085-3 shows that the aforementioned ip packet was sent from Ethernet communication circuit 1 089 to communication circuit 104. -2 order of sending priority control management table 1 085-3. When an IP packet is input from the Ethernet communication circuit 1089 side, and is output to the communication circuit 1040-2 through a router 1086, it is checked whether the internal payload of the passed IP packet is a TCP segment or a UDP segment. When it is a TCP segment or a UDP segment, check its internal sender port number. When the ιρ packet arrives at the router 106 in a similar time, the IP packet containing the TCP segment or UDP segment with the sending port number "108" will be transmitted with the highest priority, followed by the sending port number. IP packets in the TCP segment or UDP segment that are "5 0 0 0", "5 0 0 4" or "5 0 2 0" are transmitted. The value of the port number described in the transmission priority control management table 1 085-3 may be changed to another value. The transmission priority control management table 1085-3 can be changed to the transmission priority control management table 1085-4 of FIG. 117. In the example using the sending priority control management table 1085-4, the 1 {) packet with the sender IP address &quot; 150 · 1 · 2 · 3Π and the sender port number "ι〇8" has the highest priority , Followed by the priority of the sender's IP address &quot; 丨 92 · 丨 .2 · 3 &quot; In the above-mentioned embodiment, the media router 1 0 2 1-2 is based on the port number specified by the transmission priority control management table 1 085-3, or is based on the transmission priority control management table. The IP address and port number designated by 1085-4 are used as a reference. It has a function of determining the sending order of the IP packets sent from the IP packet to the communication circuit 1040-2. Next, it will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The media routers 1021-2 and 1021-4 are connected via the IP forwarding network 1001—the IP terminal 1091—j, dynamic

1^1 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第124頁 1245997 五、發明說明(121) 影像送受信機1 0 92- 1、LAN 1 093- 1係被接續至媒體路由器 1021-3,在LAN 1 093 - 1的内部包含有IP終端1〇9〇-1。同樣 地,IP終端109 1-2、動態影像送受信機1〇92-2、LAN 1093-2係被接續至媒體路由器i〇21-4,在LAN 1093-2的内 部包含有IP終端1090 -2。媒體路由器1021-3及1021-4係包 含圖114的媒體路由器1〇21-2的機能。因為如上所述,舉 例而言,在I P終端1 〇 9 〇 -1與I P終端1 〇 9 1 - 2間、I P終端 1091-1與IP終端1〇90 —2間、動態影像送受信機— i與動1 ^ 1 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 124 1245997 V. Description of the invention (121) Video transmitter and receiver 1 0 92-1, LAN 1 093-1 is connected to the media router 1021-3, and on LAN 1 The inside of 093-1 contains the IP terminal 1090-1. Similarly, the IP terminal 109 1-2, the moving image transmitting and receiving device 1092-2, and the LAN 1093-2 series are connected to the media router i〇21-4. The IP terminal 1090-2 is included in the LAN 1093-2 . The media routers 1021-3 and 1021-4 include the functions of the media router 1021-2 of FIG. 114. As described above, for example, between the IP terminal 1 009-1 and the IP terminal 1 009 1-2, between the IP terminal 1091-1 and the IP terminal 1 090-2, the moving image transmitting and receiving device-i And move

態影像送受信機1 〇 9 2 - 2間,可經由媒體路由器1 〇 21 - 4傳送 接收IP封包。 對此實施例摘要如下。I p轉送網包含2個以上的網點 裝置’媒體路由器經由IP通信電路被接續至任一個前述網 點裝置,内部IP位址被授與至前述丨p通信電路的網點裝置 側的終端部’在各媒體路由器上分別授與有各外部I p位Status image transmission and receiving device 1092-2 can transmit and receive IP packets via the media router 1021-4. This embodiment is summarized as follows. The IP transfer network includes two or more branch devices. The media router is connected to any one of the branch devices via an IP communication circuit, and the internal IP address is granted to the terminal section on the branch device side of the communication circuit. Each external IP bit is granted on the media router

在内部具有電話號碼伺服器,且媒體路由器係經由通 信電路接續1個以上的電話機。又,做為網點裝置内部的 位址官理表的記錄’包含有前述外部丨p位址及前述内部^ p 位址,至少預先設定決定IP膠囊化方法的1?通信記錄,在 呼設定I P封包内部至少使用送信端電話號碼及受信端電 話號碼,再者,在接續控制中複數電話機使用共同的埠號 碼,又,電話機每個個別的聲音通信透過分配電話機每個 不同的埠號碼,媒體路由器包含PBX控制部或電話控制部 的二方或兩方,媒體路由器可經由IP通信電路接續至具有 傳送接收IP封包的機能之IP終端,或LAN,或是具有將聲There is a telephone number server inside, and the media router is connected to more than one telephone via a communication circuit. In addition, as a record of the address management table inside the network device, the above-mentioned external address and the internal ^ p address are included, and at least 1? Communication records that determine the IP encapsulation method are set in advance. In the packet, at least the sender's phone number and the recipient's phone number are used. In addition, multiple telephones use a common port number in the connection control. In addition, each individual voice communication of the telephone is performed by assigning each different port number of the telephone to the media router. Including two or two parties of the PBX control unit or the telephone control unit, the media router can be connected to the IP terminal with the function of transmitting and receiving IP packets through the IP communication circuit, or the LAN, or the

1245997 五、發明說明(122) 音影像儲存於I P封包並加以傳送接收之機能的聲音影像送 受信機。媒體路由器包含發信優先性控制管理表,使用從 接續媒體路由器之電話機、I P終端、或動態影像送受信機 等被送至媒體路由器而來的IP封包内之TCP區段或UDP區段 的送彳§端埠號碼’進而使用送信端IP位址,根據發信優先 性控制管理表的指定,可以優先性高的順序送出至網點裝 置側的通信電路。 9 ·進行閉域電話通信的第9實施例: 在圖11 9中,11 0 0係IP轉送網,在I p轉送網11 〇 〇外部 使用的IP位址稱為外部IP位址,在内部使用的IP位址稱為 内部IP位址。媒體路由器111 5至11 1 7分別被授與外部I p位 址&quot;ΕΑΓ至&quot;EA3&quot;。電話機1121至1124被授與電話號碼 &quot;10Γ、&quot;102&quot;、&quot;103&quot;、&quot;1〇4”,電話機 1125 至 1128 被授與 電話號碼&quot;211”、&quot;212&quot;、&quot;213”、”214”,電話機 1129 至 11 3 2 被授與電話號碼&quot;3 Ο Γ、·· 3 0 2&quot;、&quot; 3 0 3&quot;、,,3 0 4 ”。 電話號碼伺服器11 3 5至11 3 7與在網際網路等被廣泛地 使用的網域名稱伺服器(DNS)具有相同的機能,在本實施 例中’當電話號碼被提示時,回答收容具有該電話號碼的 電话機之媒體路由的外部I p位址。例如,當對電話號碼 伺服器1135詢問電話號碼’’ 21 2Π時,回答收容具有電話號 碼&quot;212”之電話機11 26的媒體路由器1116的外部ΙΡ位址 π ΕΑ2Π 。 &lt;&lt;電話通信的準備〉〉 網點裝置11 01至11 03設定IP通信記錄以分別做為内部1245997 V. Description of the Invention (122) Audio and video are stored in IP packets and transmitted and received. The media router includes a transmission priority control management table, and uses TCP, UDP, or UDP segments in the IP packets sent from the media router to the media router, such as a telephone, IP terminal, or moving image send receiver. § Port number 'further uses the sender's IP address and can be sent to the communication circuit on the branch device side in order of high priority according to the designation of the sender priority control management table. 9 · Ninth embodiment of closed-domain telephone communication: In FIG. 11, 1 100 is an IP forwarding network, and the IP forwarding network 1 100 is used as an external IP address and is used internally The IP address is called the internal IP address. The media routers 111 5 to 11 1 7 are respectively assigned external IP addresses &quot; ΕΑΓ to &quot; EA3 &quot;. Phones 1121 to 1124 were given phone numbers &quot; 10Γ, &quot; 102 &quot;, &quot; 103 &quot;, &quot; 104 &quot; and phones 1125 to 1128 were given phone numbers &quot; 211 &quot;, &quot; 212 &quot;, &quot;; 213 "," 214 ", and telephones 1129 to 11 3 2 were given telephone numbers &quot; 3 Ο Γ, ... 3 0 2 &quot;, &quot; 3 0 3 &quot; ,, 3 0 4". The telephone number server 11 3 5 to 11 3 7 has the same function as a domain name server (DNS) widely used in the Internet and the like. In this embodiment, 'when a telephone number is prompted, answer the containment. The external IP address of the media router of the telephone with that telephone number. For example, when the telephone number server 1135 is inquired about the telephone number "21 2Π," the external IP address π ΕΑ2Π of the media router 1116 housing the telephone 11 26 with the telephone number "212" is answered. &Lt; &lt; Preparation >〉 Branch devices 11 01 to 11 03 Set IP communication records as internal

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第126頁 1245997 五、發明說明(123) ^址s理表11 1 0至1 1 1 2的記錄。例如設定,,E A丨、E A 3、 通r:以田做為位址管理表1110的第2行的記錄,前述IP 係用於具有外㈣位址&quot;EA1&quot;的媒體路由器1115 與=有外部IP位址&quot;EA3&quot;的媒體路由器1117間的電話 =告位址&quot;⑷”被授與至邏輯IP通信電路1144之網點 :、1側的終端部(邏輯端子),内部IP位址&quot;IA3&quot;被授 田至邏輯ip通信電路1146之網點裝置11〇3的終端部。說明 進行從電話機1121經由媒體路由器1115、ιρ轉送網 門、媒體路由器1117至電話機1131的電話通信之&quot;終端 間通信接續控制方法&quot;。 &lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉 使用者旱起電話機1121的受話器,撥號輸入通信對象 、話機1131的電話號碼&quot;3〇3”,經由電話控制部1對 媒體路由器1115内部的媒體路由器管理部1138電話呼出 (圖120之步驟A300 ),且媒體路由器管理部1138確認電話 H(步驟A301)。媒體路由器管理部1138將電話號碼,,3〇3 &quot;提不於電話號碼伺服器1135(步驟A3〇2),取得媒體路由 器1117的IP位址”EA3&quot;(步驟A3〇3),接著,形成包含送信 端電話,碼’’101’,、受信端電話號碼,,303”、電話呼叫識別 子ID 、及做為接續控制相關情報的UDp埠號碼&quot;5〇〇4&quot; 之外部IP封包1134,並傳送至網點裝置n〇1(步驟A3〇4)。 /、、,在此例中,外部IP封包1134的1?標頭内之Ip位址區域 係送彳s端IP位址為&quot;ΕΑΓ及受信端ip位址為”EA3&quot;,外部ιρ 封包11 34的酬載部分係UDp區段,送信端埠號碼為 第127頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(124) 5 0 6 0ff,受信端埠號碼為&quot;5 〇 6 〇 w 當網點裝置11 01接收IP封包n 34時,使用從位址管理 ^m〇上起第2行,也就是&quot;EA1、EA3、IA1、IA3&quot;的1?通 L。己錄,適用IP封包的膠囊化技術,形成内部IP封包1140 ,並送向網點裝置1103(步驟A305)。内部IP封包114〇係經 由路由益1105、1106、1107,到達網點裝置11〇3,網點 裝置11 03移除IP封包的標頭,進行Ip封包的逆膠囊化以 回復IP封包1134,並將ip封包1134傳送給媒體路由器管理 部1117(步驟A306 )。這一連串的步驟A3〇4、A3〇5、A3〇6稱 為呼叫設定’以省略記號&quot;丨am&quot;表示。 媒體路由器管理部1139從前述接收的ιρ封包中取得送 k端電話號碼&quot;101&quot;、受信端電話號碼&quot;3〇3&quot;、媒體路由器 ljl5iIP位址&quot;EA1&quot;、電話呼叫識別子&quot;CID&quot;、及做為接 二控制相關情報在送信端電話機的聲音通信階段中使 UDP蟑號碼&quot;5004&quot;,並送回電話呼叫的確認(步驟A3〇7、 A308、A309)。這一連串的步驟八3〇7、A3〇8、A3〇9稱為呼 =設定受理’以省略記號&quot;ACM&quot;表示。接著,媒體路由器 g,=139將通知電話呼出(著信)較封包傳送給電話機 ^驟人310),電話機1131則回信(步驟A311)。電話機 1131-知道電話啤出時就發出電話呼…媒體路Π: 理部1139將電話機1131呼出中送回給媒體路由器管理部 ㈣時(步驟A312、A313、A314),媒體路由器管理部1138 將艾仏鈿電活機11 31為呼出中通知送信端 驟腿)。這-連串的步驟A312、A313、觀稱為呼叫2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 126 1245997 V. Description of the invention (123) ^ Address s The record of the table 11 1 0 to 1 1 1 2 For example, setting, EA 丨, EA3, and r: Take Tian as the record in the second row of the address management table 1110. The aforementioned IP is for the media router 1115 with external address &quot; EA1 &quot; and = 有External IP address &quot; EA3 &quot; Telephone between media routers 1117 = Comment address &quot; ⑷ "is granted to the network point of logical IP communication circuit 1144 :, 1 terminal (logical terminal), internal IP address &quot; IA3 &quot; It is awarded to the terminal section of the network device 11103 of the logical IP communication circuit 1146. It is explained that the telephone communication is transferred from the telephone 1121 through the media routers 1115, ιρ, the media router 1117 to the telephone 1131. &quot; Control method for communication between terminals &quot; &lt; &lt; Connection phase >〉 The user sets up the receiver of the telephone 1121, dials and enters the telephone number of the communication target, the telephone 1131 &quot; 3 03 &quot; The media router management unit 1138 inside the router 1115 makes a call (step A300 in FIG. 120), and the media router management unit 1138 confirms the phone H (step A301). The media router management unit 1138 refers to the telephone number 3303 and the telephone number server 1135 (step A302) to obtain the IP address of the media router 1117 "EA3" (step A3〇3), and then, An external IP packet 1134 containing the sender's phone number "101", the recipient's phone number, 303 ", the phone call identification sub ID, and the UDp port number &quot; 5004 &quot; as the information related to the connection control is formed And transmits it to the network device no1 (step A304). / 、、, In this example, the IP address area in the 1? Header of the external IP packet 1134 is the IP address of the sender's IP address is "quote and the IP address of the trusted end is" EA3 ", and the external IP packet is The payload part of 11 34 is the UDp section. The sending port number is 2049-3793-PF on page 127; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the invention (124) 5 0 6 0ff, the receiving port number is &quot; 5 〇 6 〇w When the network device 11 01 receives the IP packet n 34, it uses the second line from the address management ^ m〇, which is the "L1" of "EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3". The IP packet encapsulation technology is applied to form an internal IP packet 1140 and send it to the branch device 1103 (step A305). The internal IP packet 114〇 is routed to the branch device 1103, the branch device 11 via the route 1105, 1106, and 1107. 03The header of the IP packet is removed, the IP packet is decapsulated to reply the IP packet 1134, and the IP packet 1134 is transmitted to the media router management unit 1117 (step A306). This series of steps A304, A305 "A3〇6" is called as "call setting". It is indicated by omitting the mark "quotam." The media router management unit 1139 was once Receive the phone number of the sending k from the received ιρ packet, "101", the phone number of the receiving party, "3〇3", the media router ljl5iIP address, "EA1", the phone call identifier, "CID", and as the next two The control-related information makes the UDP cockroach number &quot; 5004 &quot; in the voice communication phase of the sender's telephone set and returns the confirmation of the telephone call (steps A307, A308, A309). This series of steps 308, A3. 8. A3〇9 is called as “call = setting acceptance” with the omission of “ACM”. Then, the media router g, = 139 will send the notification call (letter) to the phone via a packet (step 310), phone 1131 Then reply (step A311). The phone 1131-I will make a phone call when I know the phone is out ... Media Road Π: The processing unit 1139 sends the phone 1131 back to the media router management unit when it is out (step A312, A313, A314), The Media Router Management Department 1138 will notify the sender of Ai Dian Live Machine 11 31 as an outgoing call). This-a series of steps A312, A313, and Guan are called calls.

1245997 五、發明說明(125) 過或呼出中,以省略記號&quot;CpG,,表示。 Μ電話機1131的使用者拿起電話 心通知媒體路由器管理部1139==㈣器時(離 器管理部_回信(步m321 ^體路由 5|營理立P彳彳q q # 土、—人 ^ ^ 進而媒體路由 器目理41139形成包含有送信端電話號碼&quot;ι〇ι&quot; 電話號碼&quot; 303”、電話呼叫識別子&quot;C_ID&quot;、 = :8關話機聲音通信階段中使用的_埠號;工 A322、A323 A^f送回給媒體路由器管理部1138(步驟 A323、A324)。媒體路由器管理部1138從接收的 報中知道受信端電話機使用的UDp埠號碼,,5〇〇8,,。媒體路 由器管理部1138將來自電話機1131的離鉤通知通知電話 1121(步驟A325),電話機1121回信(步驟A326 :應答確認) 二前述一連串的步驟A322、A323、A324稱為應答,以省略 ,號表示。前述應答確認之步驟A321及八326可選擇 疋否貫施。透過上述,電話的接續階段結束。 &lt;&lt;通信階段〉〉1245997 V. Description of the invention (125) It is indicated by omitting the mark "&quot; CpG" during the call or call. The user of the Μ telephone 1131 picked up the phone and notified the media router management department 1139 == when the device (from the device management department _ reply (step m321 ^ body routing 5 | Yingli Li P 彳 彳 qq # 土 、 — 人 ^ ^ Furthermore, the media router objective 41139 forms a message containing the sender's phone number &quot; ι〇ι &quot; phone number &quot; 303 &quot;, a phone call identifier &quot; C_ID &quot;, == 8 port number used in the voice communication stage of the phone; A322, A323 A ^ f are returned to the media router management unit 1138 (steps A323, A324). The media router management unit 1138 knows the UDp port number used by the trusted telephone set from the received message. The router management unit 1138 notifies the call 1121 (step A325) of the disconnection notification from the telephone 1131, and the telephone 1121 replies (step A326: response confirmation). The aforementioned series of steps A322, A323, and A324 are called responses, and are omitted by asterisks. Steps A321 and 8326 of the aforementioned response confirmation can choose whether to carry out or not. Through the above, the connection phase of the telephone ends. &Lt; &lt; Communication phase >〉

當電話機1121的使用者透過聲音開始會話時,聲音信 號被送至媒體路由器管理部1138(圖12〇的步驟A35〇),媒 體路由器管理部11 3 8在將電話控制部11 3 3數位化的聲音儲 存於IP封包内部的UDP區段的酬載部分後,傳送至網點裝 置1101(步驟A351)。前述UDP區段内部的送信端埠號碼在 前述接續階段中取得的送信端槔號碼&quot;50〇4”及受信端埠號 碼&quot;5008丨丨。 〜 網點裝置1101接收包含數位化聲音的前述IP封包1Q73When the user of the telephone set 1121 starts a conversation through voice, the voice signal is sent to the media router management section 1138 (step A35 in FIG. 12). The media router management section 11 3 8 digitizes the telephone control section 11 3 3 The voice is stored in the payload portion of the UDP section inside the IP packet, and then transmitted to the network point device 1101 (step A351). The transmitting terminal port number in the aforementioned UDP section is obtained from the transmitting terminal number &quot; 50〇4 &quot; and the receiving terminal port number &quot; 5008 丨 丨 obtained in the aforementioned continuation stage. ~ The branch point device 1101 receives the aforementioned IP containing digitized voice Packet 1Q73

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第129頁 1245997 五、發明說明(126) ---- 時,將之膠囊化以做為内部lp封包1141,内部ιρ封包!⑷ 绞由路由器11 〇 5、11 〇 6、11 〇 7而到達網點裝置丨i 〇 3 (步驟 A352)。網點裝置11〇3移除内部^封包丨14丨的内部π標頭 。,行IP逆膠囊化,所得到的外部丨p封包被送至媒體路由 器管理部1139(步驟Α353 ),而到達電話機1131(步驟Α354) 。包含電話機1131的使用者的數位化聲音之Ιρ封包以與前 述相反方向的流程到達電話機1121 (步驟Α36〇至八364)。 &lt;〈釋放階段〉〉 當電話機1121的使用者通知電話通信結束時(圖12〇之 步驟Α380 ),經由與在其他實施例中說明的相同的一連串缓, 步驟(步驟Α381至Α383),到達電話機1131(步驟Α384)。此 電話通信的結束報告係透過步驟A386至4388被送回給媒體 路由器管理部1138。前述一連串的步驟A38 0、A381、A382 、A38 3、A384稱為釋放,以省略記號&quot;REL&quot;表示。再者, 其他的一連串的步驟A386、A38 7、A388稱為釋放結束,以 省略記號nRLCn表示。 其他電話機間的通信,例如從電話機11 2 1對具有電話 號碼” 212”的電話機1126可進行電話通信,透過同樣的終 端間通信接續控制方法,從電話機11 32對具有電話號碼 &quot;213&quot;的電話機1127也可進行電話通信。 •’ &lt;〈電話號碼祠服器的詳細說明〉〉 對電話號碼伺服器詳細地加以說明。當著眼於具有 100位數字的電話號碼之電話機接續至媒體路由器ni5, 具有200位數字電話號碼之電話機接續至媒體路由器11162049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 129 1245997 V. Description of the invention (126) ---- When it is encapsulated as an internal lp packet 1141, internal lp packet!绞 The router 110.5, 110.6, and 1107 reach the branch device 丨 i 3 (step A352). The dot device 1103 removes the internal π header of the internal ^ packet 丨 14 丨. After the IP is inversely encapsulated, the obtained external packet is sent to the media router management unit 1139 (step A353) and reaches the telephone set 1131 (step A354). The Ip packet containing the digitized voice of the user of the telephone set 1131 reaches the telephone set 1121 in a flow in the opposite direction to that described above (steps A36 to 8364). &lt; <Release Phase >> When the user of the telephone set 1121 notifies the end of the telephone communication (step A380 of FIG. 12), the same sequence of steps (steps A381 to A383) as those described in the other embodiments are reached Telephone 1131 (step A384). This telephone communication end report is returned to the media router management section 1138 through steps A386 to 4388. The aforementioned series of steps A38 0, A381, A382, A38 3, and A384 are called releases, and are indicated by omitting the symbol "REL". In addition, the other series of steps A386, A38 7, and A388 are called the end of release, and are indicated by the omission symbol nRLCn. For communication between other telephones, for example, the telephone 11 2 1 can perform telephone communication with the telephone 1126 having the telephone number “212”. Through the same method of controlling communication between terminals, the telephone 11 32 pairs with the telephone number &quot; 213 &quot; The telephone 1127 can also perform telephone communication. • '&lt; <Detailed description of telephone number server >> The telephone number server will be described in detail. When looking at a phone with a 100-digit phone number connected to the media router ni5, a phone with a 200-digit phone number connected to the media router 1116

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第130頁 1245997 五、發明說明(127)2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 130 1245997 V. Description of the invention (127)

,具有3 0 0位數字電話號碼之電話機接續至媒體路由器 111 7時,如圖1 2 1所示可決定電話號碼的樹狀結構。網域 (domai η) 1151至1153為在路由器1150下級的同一級樹狀結 構之形式。網域11 5 1係提供與1 〇 〇位數字的電話號碼有關 的情報,網域11 52係提供與200位數字的電話號碼有關的 情報,網域11 5 3係提供與3 0 0位數字的電話號碼有關的情 報。100位數字的電話號碼以” 1· ”表示其網域名稱,20 0位 數字的電話號碼2 ·’’表示其網域名稱,3 0 0位數字的電 話號碼以” 3· ”表示其網域名稱,如圖122整理所示。在圖 122中,” 1ΧΧ”表示1〇〇位數字的電話號碼,&quot;2χχ,,表示2〇〇 位數字的電話號碼,” 3ΧΧ&quot;表示300位數字的電話號碼。When a telephone set with a 300-digit telephone number is connected to the media router 111 7, the tree structure of the telephone number can be determined as shown in FIG. 1 21. The domains (domai n) 1151 to 1153 are in the form of the same level tree structure below the router 1150. Domain 11 5 1 provides information related to 100-digit telephone numbers, Domain 11 52 provides information related to 200-digit telephone numbers, and Domain 11 5 3 provides information related to 300-digit telephone numbers. Information about your phone number. A 100-digit phone number indicates its domain name with "1 ·", a 200-digit phone number indicates its domain name, and a 300-digit phone number indicates its network name with "3 ·" Domain name, as shown in Figure 122. In FIG. 122, "1XX" indicates a 100-digit telephone number, &quot; 2χχ, indicates a 200-digit telephone number, and "3 × X &quot; indicates a 300-digit telephone number.

再者,電話號碼伺服器11 3 5適用有關網域名稱伺服器 DNS的公開技術,可授與代理管理路由器115〇之電話號碼 伺服器的機能之機能。管理路由器1丨5 〇之電話號碼伺服器 的機能係當詢問” 1. ”時,回答直接管理網域1151之電話^ 碼伺服器1135的IP位址” ΕΑ1”,對” 2· ”及&quot;3·&quot;的詢問則分U 別回答π ΕΑ2Π及&quot;EA3”。當電話號碼伺服器被詢問各個直接 管理的網域名稱時,在中間的過程中回答其他電話號碼饲 服器的IΡ位址,對於最終者則回答對應於被詢問的網域名 稱之IP位址(圖123)。因為如此,當對電話號碼伺服器 11 36詢問&quot;3·&quot;時,可取得對應於”3·”的IP位址&quot;EA3”。如 此,在電話號碼伺服器間重覆詢問之「電話號碼伺服器的 重撥機能」的具體實現方法可採用公開的網域名稱伺服器 的重撥機能。In addition, the telephone number server 11 3 5 is applicable to the public technology related to the domain name server DNS, and can delegate the function of the telephone number server of the router 1150 to the proxy management function. The function of the phone number server of the management router 1 丨 5 〇 When asked "1", answer the IP address of the phone 1135 of the direct management network ^ Code server 1135 "ΕΑ1", and "2 ·" and &quot; 3 · &quot; Inquiry is divided into U and π ΕΑ2Π and &quot; EA3 ". When the phone number server is asked for each directly managed domain name, it answers the IP of other phone numbers in the middle process Address, and for the final one, answer the IP address corresponding to the domain name being asked (Figure 123). Because of this, when the telephone number server 11 36 is asked for &quot; 3 · &quot;, the corresponding " 3 · "IP address &quot; EA3". In this way, the specific implementation method of the "redial function of the telephone number server" that is repeatedly asked between the telephone number servers may adopt the redial function of the public domain name server.

1245997 五、發明說明(128) &lt;&lt;電話號碼伺服器的其他實施例〉〉 如圖124所不,經由通信電路將媒體路由器1191 1197接續至IP轉送網119〇的網點裝置118〇至1184中之一 接續至公司A所屬的媒體路由器1191之電話機的一’ 係通知其他的公司B或公司c之公開的電話號碼&quot;二馬 。在此,”做為電話號碼係與空白同樣而可東略,&quot; X ”係i 0進位數之&quot;00&quot;至&quot;99&quot;。接續至公司A所^媒體x 由器1193之電話機的電話號碼也是公司的電話號碼Ux X ’’。、接續至公司A所屬的媒體路由器1195之電話機的 號碼為對其他公司公開的電話號碼&quot;j 一3 χ χ fl及對公司A ^ 外未么開的内線電話號碼&quot;8 χ χ &quot;。接續至公司B所屬 體路,由器1192之電話機的電話號碼係公開的電話號碼&quot; χ xn。接續至公司β所屬的媒體路由器1194之電話機的電 話號碼係公開的電話號碼&quot;2 — 2 χ χ,,。接續至公司c所屬的 ,媒體路由器11 96之電話機的電話號碼係公開的電話號碼 π 3- χ χ χ ”。&quot; χ χ χ ”表示1〇 進位的&quot;〇〇〇&quot;至&quot;99g&quot;。接續 至公司Α所屬的媒體路由器1197之電話機的電話號碼係對 公司A以外未公開的内線電話號碼&quot;7 χ χ,,。 圖1 25係將上述電話號碼的體系表現為電話號碼的樹 狀結構,1185係路由網域(route domain),1186係以公司 A之未公開的内線電話號碼做為對象的網域,11 8 7係以公 司A之公開的電話號碼做為對象的網域,11 8 8係由公司B之 公開的電話號碼構成的網域,;[丨89係以公司C之公開的電 話號碼做為對象的網域。再此,11 86的網域名稱&quot;##&quot;乃是1245997 V. Description of the invention (128) &lt; &lt; Other embodiments of the telephone number server &gt;> As shown in Figure 124, the media router 1191 1197 is connected to the network point device 1180 to 1184 of the IP transfer network 119〇 via a communication circuit. One of them connected to the telephone of the media router 1191 to which the company A belongs is to notify the other company B or the public telephone number of the company c. Here, "As the phone number is the same as the blank but can be omitted," X "is the" 00 "to" 99 "of the i 0 digit. The telephone number of the telephone connected to the media x router 1193 at company A is also the company's telephone number Ux X ''. 2. The number of the telephone connected to the media router 1195 of company A is the phone number publicly known to other companies &quot; j-3 χ χ fl and the internal telephone number of company A ^ outside the company &quot; 8 χ χ &quot; . Connected to company B's body, the phone number of router 1192 is the public phone number &quot; χ xn. The telephone number of the telephone connected to the media router 1194 to which the company β belongs is the public telephone number &quot; 2-2 χ χ ,. Connected to the company c, the phone number of the media router 11 96 is the public phone number π 3-χ χ χ "." Χ χ χ "means a 10-rounded" quota. 〇〇〇 "to" 99g &quot;. The telephone number of the telephone connected to the media router 1197 of the company A belongs to the unlisted extension phone number outside the company A &quot; 7 χ χ ,. Figure 1 25 shows the above phone number system as a tree structure of phone numbers, 1185 is a routing domain, and 1186 is a network domain that targets the undisclosed extension phone number of company A. 11 8 7 is a domain targeted by the public phone number of company A, 11 8 8 is a domain composed of the public phone number of company B, [丨 89 is targeted by the public phone number of company C Domain. Here again, the domain name of 11 86 &quot;## &quot; is

surface

12459971245997

五、發明說明(129) 在公司A所屬的媒體路由器1195及1197的内部使用的秘密 的網域名稱,不包含數字,且網域名稱的長度規定為20個 文字長度的值。如此,從公司B及公司C的媒體路由器 Π 92、1194、1196,知道公司A專用的秘密網域名稱”#Γ 的值,或者取得網域名稱&quot;##π變得困難。例如對” ##&quot;的詢 問’並不回答IP位址。由於此一結果,從公司Β或公司C要 存取具有公司A的内線電話號碼之電話機變得困難,使用 内線電話號碼變游困難也就意味著安全性的提升。 當從電話機1198撥號輸入受信端電話號碼,,Tei-No - 2 &quot;&quot;2 - 1 4 5π時,媒體路由器11 9 5内部的媒體路由器管理部 1195-1將電話號碼&quot;2-145&quot;如圖126的變換表Η85-1所示, 變換成電話號碼的網域名稱的形式” 1 · 2. ”。其次,當對媒 體路由器1195内部的電話號碼伺服器1195 —2提示並詢問 1·2·π時’電話號碼祠服器如圖127的表1185-2所示,回 答對應於”1· 2·&quot;的媒體路由器1192之IP位址”MR2”。 再者’從内線號碼為” 700”的公司a的電話機,是否對 電話號碼&quot;2-100&quot;的公司B的電話機呼出,係依據網域名稱 伺服器孳設定狀況,任一個均可實施。 摘要以上如下。亦即,IP轉送網包含2個以上的網點 裝置’媒體路由器係經由邏輯IP通信電路接續至任一個前 述網點褒置,在前述邏輯IP通信電路的網點裝置侧的終端 部上授與内部IP位址,各媒體路由器上分別授與外部ιρ位 址,在内部具有電話號碼伺服器,且媒體路由器經由通信 電路接續1個以上的電話機。做為網點裝置内部的位址管V. Description of the Invention (129) The secret domain name used inside the media routers 1195 and 1197 to which Company A belongs does not contain numbers, and the length of the domain name is specified as a value of 20 characters. In this way, from the media routers UI 92, 1194, and 1196 of company B and company C, it is difficult to know the value of the secret domain name "# Γ" dedicated to company A, or to obtain the domain name &quot;## π. For example, " ## &quot; Query 'does not answer the IP address. As a result of this, it is difficult to access the telephone set with the internal telephone number of company A from company B or company C, and the difficulty of using the internal telephone number to change the mobile phone also means that the security is improved. When dialing the telephone number of the receiving end from the telephone 1198, Tei-No-2 &quot; 2-1 4 5π, the media router management unit 1195-1 inside the media router 11 9 5 changes the telephone number &quot; 2-145 &quot;; As shown in the conversion table Η85-1 of FIG. 126, the domain name of the telephone number is converted into the form "1 · 2.". Secondly, when prompting and asking 1 · 2 · π for the telephone number server 1195-2 inside the media router 1195, the telephone number server is shown in Table 1185-2 of Figure 127, and the answer corresponds to "1 · 2 · &quot; The IP address of the media router 1192 "MR2". Also, "Does the phone of company a with the internal number" 700 "call out to the phone of company B with the phone number" 2-100 "? Any of the domain name server settings can be implemented. The above is summarized as follows. That is, the IP transfer network includes two or more network devices. The media router is connected to any one of the foregoing network devices via a logical IP communication circuit. An internal IP address is granted to a terminal unit on the network device side of the aforementioned logical IP communication circuit, and an external address is granted to each media router. A telephone number server is internally connected, and the media router is connected to more than one via the communication circuit. Phone. Used as an address control inside the outlet device

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997

五、發明說明(130) 理表的記錄,包含俞奸、丨 少預先設定決MP膠囊及前述内部1P位址,至 公司B、公司(:之間S!法的1p通信記錄,在公司A、 内部,使用公司A、公-Ίβ疋的1P通“己錄設定於網點裝置 (&quot;卜χΧΧ&quot;Λ_χνΊΒ&quot;、公司c之間有效的電話號碼 話通信網。 Χ Χ ”、&quot;3_…&quot;),可設定閉域電 從電話號碼為&quot;1~00”的公司Α的電話機對 匕200&quot;的公司a的電話機呼出,對電話號碼十為電2話丄碼: =:Β的電話機呼出,對電話號碼為&quot;3-1〇〇&quot;的公司c的電 話:呼出,對内線電話號碼為&quot;7。〇&quot;及&quot;_,::= ”700”之八仃 信。又,從内線電話號碼 的電話機,對内線電話號碼&quot;800,,之公司Α的 對電話號碼為&quot;&quot;〇〇,,的公司A的電話機呼 仃電話通信。至於從電話號碼為&quot;2- 1 〇〇”的公 司之電話機,對内線電話號碼為&quot;8〇〇&quot;的公司A之電話機 呼出、,依據前面”##”的說明,則為不可行。 一田a司的數目為N時,可如下所述。為了在預定的公 ” L 一么司A —2 · · ·,公司A-N( N &gt; 2 )間進行電話通 信,設定IP通信記錄,可進行閉域電話通信。又,接續至 公司A-1、公司a一2、 · ·、公司A_N( N &gt; 2 )間有效的閉 域電話通信網之公司A-1的電話機可與公司Ay的内線電話 機進灯電活通信,但公司A-1以外公司的電話機則無法與 公司A-1的内線電話機進行電話通信。 1 0 ·閉域電話通信與開域電話通信併用的第丨〇實施例V. Description of the invention (130) The records of the management table, including Yu Lu, 丨 pre-set MP capsules and the aforementioned internal 1P address, 1p communication records to company B, company (: S! Law between, in company A Internally, using company A, public-Ίβ 疋 's 1P communication "has been set on the network device (&quot; 卜 χΧΧ &quot; Λ_χνΊΒ &quot;, a valid telephone number between the company c telephone communication network. Χ Χ" ", &quot; 3 _... &quot;), you can set the closed area power to call from the phone of company A with the phone number &quot; 1 ~ 00 "to the phone of company a with 200 &quot; Outgoing call to company c with the phone number &quot; 3-1〇〇 &quot;: Outgoing call to the intercom phone number &quot; 7.〇 &quot; and &quot; _, :: = "700" of Yasushi In addition, from the telephone of the extension telephone number, to the extension telephone number &quot; 800, the company A's telephone number is &quot; &quot; 〇〇, and the telephone of the company A calls the telephone communication. &quot; 2- 1 〇〇 "company's telephone, the internal telephone number is & quot The call from the company A of the company 800 is not feasible according to the description of "##" above. When the number of YATA a company is N, it can be described as follows. One company A-2 · · ·, company AN (N &gt; 2) for telephone communication, set IP communication records, can perform closed-domain telephone communication. In addition, it continues to company A-1, company a-2, ... , Company A_N (N &gt; 2) a valid closed area telephone communication network company A-1's phone can communicate with the company Ay's internal telephone into the light and live communication, but company phones other than company A-1 can not communicate with company A An internal telephone set of -1 performs telephone communication. 1 0 · Embodiment 1 in which closed-domain telephone communication and open-domain telephone communication are used together

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第134頁 1245997 五、發明說明(131) 在圖128中,1200係ip轉送網,媒體路由器1201至 1 206係分別被授與外部IP位址&quot;EA1π至” EA6”。電話機1208 被授與電話號碼&quot;100Γ,電話機1 2 09被授與電話號碼 &quot; 1 002”,電話機1210被授與電話號碼&quot;1〇1&quot;,電話機1211 被授與電話號碼”102”,電話機1212至1215則分別被授與 電話號碼1’ 30 0 Γ至” 30 04,,。接續媒體路由器1 202的電話機 1216 至1219 分別具有電話號碼,,234-200 1 &quot;至&quot;234-2004,,。 又 2 0 0 4丨丨 3 04丨,, 204,,〇2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 134 1245997 V. Description of the invention (131) In Figure 128, the 1200 series IP forwarding network, and the media routers 1201 to 1 206 are respectively assigned external IP addresses &quot; "EA6". Phone 1208 was given a phone number "100Γ", phone 1 2 09 was given a phone number "1 002", phone 1210 was given a phone number "1〇1", and phone 1211 was given a phone number "102" Telephones 1212 to 1215 were assigned telephone numbers 1 '30 0 Γ to "30 04," respectively. The telephones 1216 to 1219 connected to the media router 1 202 each have a telephone number, 234-200 1 &quot; to &quot; 234-2004 ,. Another 2 0 0 4 丨 丨 3 04 丨 ,, 204 ,, 〇

電話機1220至1223被授與電話號碼|'2001 ”至 電話機1 224至11 27分別被授與電話號碼π 30 Γ至 電話機1 228至1231分別被授與電話號碼,,201”至 在此,電話號碼,f 1 X X,,、,,2 X X ’,、&quot; 3 X X,,係公 司A專用的内線電話號碼,&quot;X &quot;係表示〇至9的1〇進位的數 子。電話號碼&quot;1 X X X &quot;係公司A的電話號碼,電話號碼,,2 x x X π係公司B的電話號碼,電話號碼” 3 X X X ’,係公司C 的電話號碼。這3個電話號碼,,1 X X X ”、” 2 χ χ X &quot;、&quot; 3Telephones 1220 to 1223 were assigned telephone numbers | '2001 ”to telephones 1 224 to 11 27 were assigned telephone numbers π 30 Γ to telephones 1 228 to 1231 were assigned telephone numbers, 201” to here, telephone The number, f 1 XX ,,,,, 2 XX ',, &quot; 3 XX ,, is an internal telephone number for company A exclusive use, &quot; X &quot; is a decimal number representing 0 to 9. Phone number &quot; 1 XXX &quot; is the phone number of company A, the phone number, and 2 xx X π is the phone number of company B, and the phone number "3 XXX 'is the phone number of company C. These 3 phone numbers, , 1 XXX "," 2 χ χ X &quot;, &quot; 3

x x ’’係用以構成用在公司A、公司β、公司c間的電話通 仏之邏輯閉域電話網的電話號碼,稱為閉域電話號碼。 而電話號碼” 234-200 Γ至&quot;234-2004&quot;則為用以與不特定的 對象電活通信之電話號碼,稱為開域電話號碼。 電話號碼伺服器1134、1 272及11 37至11 42係具有與在 ^ 舍^ Λ 等上使用的網域名稱伺服器(DNS )相同的機能, 二二不電話號碼時,回答收容具有該電話號碼的電話機之 、=路由器的外部Ip位址。例如,當 服器 113 7質問雷紅咕 ^ u 、Ί尾話唬碼π 300 1 &quot;時,回答收容具有電話號碼x x '' is a telephone number used to constitute a logical closed-domain telephone network for telephone communication between company A, company β, and company c, and is called a closed-domain telephone number. The telephone numbers "234-200 Γ to" 234-2004 "are telephone numbers used to communicate with unspecified objects, and are called open domain telephone numbers. Telephone number servers 1134, 1 272, and 11 37 to 11 42 series has the same function as the domain name server (DNS) used in ^ ^ ^ Λ etc. If you don't have a phone number, answer the external IP address of the router that holds the phone number = router For example, when the server 113 7 questioned Lei Honggu ^ u and the end-of-word bluff code π 300 1 &quot;, the answer contained the phone number

2049-3793^;^.^2049-3793 ^; ^. ^

12459971245997

的電話機1212之媒體路由_6的外部Ip位址 &lt;〈用於電話通信之終端間接續控制的準備〉〉External IP Address of Media Router_6 of Telephone 1212 &lt; <Preparation for Terminal Indirect Continuous Control for Telephone Communication >>

»如圖128所示,網點裝置1 244至1 248在内部分別為位 址官理表1 250至1 255,設定有與在其他各實施例中說明的 一樣的I Ρ通信記錄。例如,設定” Ε Α丨、Ε Α 3、丨A i、丨Α 3,,, 做為位址管理表1 250的第1行的IP通信記錄,前述Ip通信 記錄係被用於具有外部IP位址&quot;EA1”的媒體路由器12〇1 ^ 具有外部IP位址” EA3&quot;的媒體路由器1 203間的電話通信。 内部IP位址” ΙΑΓ被授與邏輯IP通信電路1 257的網點裝置 1 2 4 4側的終端部(邏輯端子)上,内部I p位址&quot;I a 3,,則被授 與邏輯IP通信電路1 258的網點裝置1 248側的終端部上。 參照圖1 2 8及圖1 2 9說明用以從電話號碼&quot;1 〇 〇 1&quot;之電話 機1 208經由IP轉送網1 200至電話號碼&quot;301&quot;的電話機丨224 進行電話通信之”終端間通信接績控制方法”。 &lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉»As shown in FIG. 128, the branch point devices 1 244 to 1 248 are internal address tables 1 250 to 1 255, respectively, and set the same IP communication records as described in the other embodiments. For example, setting "Ε Α 丨, Ε Α3, 丨 Ai, 丨 A3," as the IP communication record of the first line of the address management table 1 250, the aforementioned IP communication record is used to have an external IP The media router 1201 with the address &quot; EA1 &quot; has a telephone communication between the media routers 1 and 203 with the external IP address &quot; EA3 &quot;. The internal IP address &quot; The internal IP address &quot; I a 3, on the terminal part (logical terminal) on the side of 2 4 4 is granted to the terminal part on the side of the network device 1 248 of the logical IP communication circuit 1 258. 1 2 and FIG. 1 2 9 to describe a “terminal for performing telephone communication from a telephone number“ 1 001 ”telephone 1 208 via an IP transfer network 1 200 to a telephone number“ 301 ”telephone 224 Inter-communication performance control method ". &lt; &lt; Continuation stage 〉〉

拿起電話機1208的受話器,撥號輸入通信對象處電話 機1 224的電話號碼”301”,呼出信號被傳向媒體路由器 1 260 (步驟H30 0 ),媒體路由器1 260確認電話呼叫(步驟 H3 01)。媒體路由器管理部1260檢查保存於其内部的圖175 之表1 255- 1,得知對應於電話號碼&quot;30Γ的電話號碼之網 域名稱為” 3· #· a&quot;,對電話號碼伺服器1137詢問電話號碼 網域名稱”3.#.a”(步驟H302 ),電話號碼伺服器1137根據 圖176之表1255-2所示的規則回答媒體路由器1204的IP位Pick up the receiver of telephone 1208, dial and enter the phone number "301" of telephone 1 224 at the communication destination, the outgoing signal is transmitted to media router 1 260 (step H30 0), and media router 1 260 confirms the telephone call (step H3 01). The media router management unit 1260 checks Table 1 255-1 of FIG. 175 stored in it, and learns that the network domain name corresponding to the telephone number &quot; 30Γ is called "3 · # · a &quot; 1137 asks for the telephone number domain name "3. #. A" (step H302), and the telephone number server 1137 answers the IP bit of the media router 1204 according to the rules shown in Table 1255-2 of Fig. 176

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第136頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 136 1245997

址&quot;EA4”(步驟 H3〇3)。 其次’形成至少包含送信端電話號碼” 1〇〇1&quot;、受俨端 1 9AAC ^ 1®U部1P封包131〇(圖130),並傳送給網點裝置 路由。再者,在1P封包1310中,可包含由媒體 = I^26G參與的電話呼叫之識別號碼、聲音壓縮方式、Address "EA4" (step H3〇3). Secondly, "formally include at least the sender's phone number" 1001 ", the receiver 19AAC ^ 1®U section 1P packet 131 (Figure 130), and send Branch device routing. Furthermore, the 1P packet 1310 may include the identification number of the phone call in which the media = I ^ 26G, the voice compression method,

曰碼變換等的識別名稱等所構成的關連情報&quot;I nf〇-丨”。 網點裝置1244在接收IP封包1310時,使用位址管理表 \250上起第2行,也就是”EA1、EA4、IA1、IA4”的IP通信 忑錄適用1p封包的膠囊化技術,形成並傳送内部ιρ封包 1311(圖131)。内部ip封包1311係經由圖128所示的路由器 1 263、1 264到達網點裝置1 246(步驟H3〇5),網點裝置1246 進行1 P封包的逆膠囊化,回復IP封包,並將前述回復的IP 封包傳送給媒體路由器12〇4(步驟H306)。 媒體路由器管理部1265從前述接收的ip封包中至少取 得送“端電話號碼” 1 〇 〇 1 ”、受信端電話號碼&quot;3 〇〗&quot;、通話 用UDP埠號碼” 5〇〇4&quot;後,傳回電話呼出的確認(步驟H3〇7、 H308、H309)〇 其次’媒體路由器管理部1265將電話呼出(著信)傳給 電話機1224(步驟H310)。電話機1224回信給媒體路由器管f 理部1265(步驟H311),進而發出電話呼出音。媒體路由器 官理部1265將電話機1224呼出中經由媒體路由器管理部 1 260通知受信端電話機12〇8(步驟H312、H313、H314、 H315)。在步驟H314中,將送信端電話號碼” looi”、受信Related information composed of identification names, such as code conversion, etc. ". When the network device 1244 receives the IP packet 1310, it uses the second line from the address management table \ 250, that is," EA1, EA4, IA1, IA4 ”IP communication records are suitable for 1p packet encapsulation technology to form and transmit internal ιρ packets 1311 (Figure 131). Internal IP packets 1311 reach the network via routers 1 263, 1 264 as shown in Figure 128 Device 1 246 (step H305), and the branch device 1246 performs inverse encapsulation of the 1 P packet, returns the IP packet, and transmits the returned IP packet to the media router 1204 (step H306). Media router management unit 1265 Obtain at least the "end phone number" 1 〇01 ", the recipient phone number" 3 〇〗 ", and the UDP port number for calls" 5000 "from the received ip packet, and then return the phone to call out Confirmation (steps H307, H308, H309). Secondly, the media router management unit 1265 sends the call (letter) to the phone 1224 (step H310). The phone 1224 writes back to the media router management unit 1265 (step H311). ) To make a call Voice out. The media router management unit 1265 will notify the receiving end phone 12 08 via the media router management unit 1 260 during the outgoing call of the telephone set 1224 (steps H312, H313, H314, H315). In step H314, the sender's phone number will be sent " looi ", trusted

1245997 五、發明說明(134) 電話说碼3 0 1 、用於電活機1 2 2 4之通話送信的U D P埠號 碼π 5 0 0 8π通知電話機1 2 0 8。 當電話機1224的使用者拿起電話機的送受話器時,電 話機1224通知媒體路由器管理部1265(步驟Η320)。媒體路 由器管理部1265透過步驟H320經由媒體路由器1 260將應答 回答給送信端電話機1 208 (步驟H32 2、H323、H324、H325) 。電話機1 208確認向媒體路由器1 2 60的應答(步驟H321), 媒體路由器1265確認向電話機1224的應答(步驟H326)。在 此,步驟Η 321及步驟Η 326可選擇是否實施。如上述,電話 的接續階段結束。 在前述的接續階段中,外部IΡ封包内部為UDP區段, 送信與受信的UDP埠號碼例如使用” 5060π。 &lt;〈通信階段〉〉 電話機1208的使用者與電話機1224的電話通信係與其 他實施例中說明的相同,使用位址管理表1 2 5 0内部第2行 的IP通信記錄,也就是&quot;ΕΑ1、ΕΑ4、ΙΑ1、ΙΑ4&quot;的記錄,及 位址管理表1 253内部第1行的IP通信記錄,也就是,,EA4、 EA1、IA4、IA1&quot;的記錄。從電話機1208對媒體路由器管理 部1 260傳送聲音(步驟H350),在媒體路由器管理部1260 中,前述聲音被數位化且被轉記至外部^封包1312(圖132 )的酬載部分,而到達網點裝置1 2 4 4。然後,被I ρ膠囊化 變換成内部IP封包1313(圖133)後,轉送IP轉送網丨2〇〇的 内部,而到達網點裝置i 246,被逆膠囊化且到達媒體路 由器管理部1 265 (步驟H351至H353)。在此,前述被數位化1245997 V. Description of the invention (134) The telephone code 3 0 1 and the U D P port number used for the call sending of the electric machine 1 2 2 4 code π 5 0 0 8π inform the telephone 1 2 0 8. When the user of the telephone set 1224 picks up the handset of the telephone set, the telephone set 1224 notifies the media router management section 1265 (step Η320). The media router management unit 1265 responds to the sender telephone 1 208 via the media router 1 260 through step H320 (steps H32 2, H323, H324, H325). The telephone 1 208 confirms the response to the media router 1 2 60 (step H321), and the media router 1265 confirms the response to the telephone 1224 (step H326). Here, steps Η 321 and Η 326 can choose whether or not to implement them. As mentioned above, the connection phase of the telephone ends. In the aforementioned continuation phase, the internal IP packet is a UDP segment internally, and the sending and receiving UDP port numbers are, for example, "5060π." <Communication Phase> The telephone communication system between the user of telephone 1208 and telephone 1224 and other implementations The example is the same, using the IP communication record in the second line of the internal address management table 1250, that is, the record of "ΕΑ1, ΕΑ4, ΙΑ1, ΙΑ4", and the first line in the internal address management table 1 253 IP communication record, that is, a record of EA4, EA1, IA4, IA1 &quot;. Voice is transmitted from the telephone set 1208 to the media router management section 1 260 (step H350), and in the media router management section 1260, the aforementioned sound is digitized And it is transferred to the payload part of the external packet 1312 (Figure 132), and reaches the branch device 1 2 4 4. Then, it is encapsulated into an internal IP packet 1313 (Figure 133), and then transferred to the IP transfer network.丨 The inside of the 200, and reached the branch device i 246, is decapsulated and reaches the media router management section 1 265 (steps H351 to H353). Here, the foregoing is digitized

mi ram 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第138頁 1245997mi ram 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 138 1245997

的聲音被變換為類比聲音,而到達電話機丨224(步驟 。從電話機12 24向電話機1208之逆方向的電話聲音也同 地被傳送(步驟H360至H364)。在通話階段中,外部Ip封包 1312内部為UDP區段,從電話機1 20 8傳送的UDP埠號碼為 ” 5 0 0 4π ’電話機1 2 0 8接收的UDP埠號碼為&quot;5 〇 〇 8,,。 &lt;&lt;釋放階段〉〉 當電話機1 208的使用者通知電話通信的結束時(圖ι29 之步驟Η380 ),經由與其他實施例同樣的一連串的步驟(步 驟Η3 81至Η383),到達電話機1224(步驟Η3 84)。從媒體路 由器管理部1265通知媒體路由器管理部1260釋放結束(步 驟H38 6至H388)。在上述釋放階段中,外部Ip封包的形式 與在前述的接續階段中使用的IP封包丨3丨〇相同,酬載部分 為UDP區段,送信及受信UDP埠號碼例如為” 5〇6〇π。 &lt;&lt;使用媒體路由器内部的電話號碼伺服器之其他例&gt;&gt; 當拿起電話機1208的受話器,撥號輸入通信對象處之 其他企業所屬的電話機1220的電話號碼” 2001 &quot;時,媒體路 由器管理部1 2 6 0檢查保存於其内部的表1 2 5 5 -1,得知對應 於電話號碼π 2 0 0 Γ的電話號碼之網域名稱為&quot;b · ”。接著, 向電話號碼伺服器11 3 7詢問電話號碼網域名稱&quot;b ·,,,電話 號碼伺服器1137透過回答接續電話機1220之媒體路由器 1 205的IP位址&quot;EA5”,在不同的企業所屬的電話機12〇8與 電話機1 2 2 0間,利用同樣的終端間通信接續控制方法,也 可以進行電話通信。 在上述的終端間通信接續控制方法中,不使用I p轉送The voice is converted into an analog voice and reaches the phone 224 (step. The phone sound from the phone 12 24 to the opposite direction of the phone 1208 is also transmitted in the same place (steps H360 to H364). During the call phase, the external IP packet 1312 The internal is a UDP section. The UDP port number transmitted from the telephone set 1 20 8 is "50 0 4π ', and the UDP port number received by the telephone set 1 2 0 8 is &quot; 5 0008. &lt; &lt; Release stage> 〉 When the user of the telephone set 1 208 notifies the end of the telephone communication (step Η380 in FIG. 29), through the same series of steps (steps Η381 to Η383) as in the other embodiments, the phone 1224 is reached (step Η384). The media router management unit 1265 notifies the media router management unit 1260 that the release is completed (steps H38 to H388). In the above-mentioned release phase, the form of the external IP packet is the same as the IP packet used in the aforementioned connection phase. The load part is a UDP section, and the sending and receiving UDP port numbers are, for example, "5060π". &Lt; &lt; Other examples of using the phone number server inside the media router &gt; &gt; When picking up the phone 1208 When the receiver dials and enters the phone number of the telephone 1220 of the other company to which the communication partner belongs "2001", the media router management unit 1 2 60 checks the internal table 1 2 5 5 -1 and learns that it corresponds to the telephone. The domain name of the telephone number of the number π 2 0 0 Γ is called &quot; b · ". Then, the telephone number server 11 3 7 is asked about the telephone number domain name &quot; b ·, and the telephone number server 1137 answers through The IP address &quot; EA5 &quot; of the media router 1 205 connected to the telephone 1220 can be used for the same terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method between the telephone 1208 and the telephone 120 which belong to different enterprises. In the above-mentioned inter-terminal communication connection control method, I p transfer is not used

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第139頁 1245997 ~~~--------- 五、發明說明(136) 網1 200内部的電話號碼伺服器1134及1 272,代以使用媒體 路由器1 2 0 1内部的電話號碼祠服器11 3 7。又,其特徵為使 用已經設定於位址管理表1250及1253、1252内的ip通信記 錄。 &lt;&lt;使用I P轉送網内的電話號碼伺服器,以產生丨P通信記錄 的電話通信方法〉〉 參照圖134,說明從電話號碼為,,100Γ之電話機1208 對電話號碼為” 234_200 1 &quot;的電話機1216之電話通信的終端 間通信接續控制方法。 &lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉 當拿起電話機1208的受話器時,呼出信號被傳至媒體 路由器管理部1260(步驟V0),媒體路由器管理部1260確認 電話呼出(步驟VI),媒體路由器管理部1 260檢查保存其内 部(圖175之)表1 255-1,得知對應於電話號碼&quot;234-2〇〇1” 之電話號碼的網域名稱為&quot;〇 · π。接著,向電話號碼伺服器 U37詢問電話號碼網域名稱”〇·&quot;(步驟V2),電話號碼伺服 •器11 37則對媒體路由器管理部1 260回答用以存取管理前述 〇·的電話5虎碼飼服器1272之代理電話管理伺服器1270的 外部IP位址” ΕΑ8Γ (步驟V3)。 其_人’媒體路由器管理部1 2 6 0以送信端I p位址做為媒 體路由器1201的IP位址&quot;EA1&quot;,以受信端1?位址做為前述、 取得的IP位址&quot;EA81” ’形成包含送信端電話號碼&quot;1〇〇1&quot;、 受信端電話號碼” 234-2001 &quot;、用於電話聲音通信的UDp埠 號碼&quot;5006&quot;、及附加情報&quot;Info-2&quot;的ip封包132〇(圖135)2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 139 1245997 ~~~ --------- V. Description of the invention (136) Telephone number servers 1134 and 1 272 inside the network 1 200, using the media instead Router 1 2 0 1 phone number inside server 11 3 7. It is also characterized by using the IP communication records already set in the address management tables 1250, 1253, and 1252. &lt; &lt; A telephone communication method using a telephone number server in the IP forwarding network to generate a communication record of P >>> With reference to FIG. 134, a description will be given from a telephone number of 100Γ to a telephone number of 1208 to a telephone number of "234_200 1 &quot; Control method for communication connection between terminals of telephone communication of telephone set 1216. &lt; &lt; connection stage >〉 When the receiver of telephone set 1208 is picked up, the outgoing signal is transmitted to the media router management section 1260 (step V0), media router management The unit 1260 confirms the outgoing call (step VI), the media router management unit 1 260 checks and saves its internal (Figure 175) Table 1 255-1, and learns that the phone number corresponding to the phone number &quot; 234-2〇〇1 " The domain name is called &quot; 〇 · π. Next, the telephone number server U37 is inquired about the telephone number domain name "〇 ·" (step V2), and the telephone number server 11 37 answers the media router management unit 1 260 to access and manage the aforementioned telephone 5 The external IP address of the agent telephone management server 1270 of the tiger code feeder 1272 "ΕΑ8Γ (step V3). Its _person 'Media Router Management Department 1 2 60 uses the IP address of the sender as the IP address of the media router 1201 &quot; EA1 &quot; and the IP address of the receiver 1 as the aforementioned, obtained IP address &quot; "EA81" "formed to include the sender's phone number &quot; 10〇1 &quot;, the recipient's phone number &quot; 234-2001 &quot;, the UDp port number for telephone voice communications &quot; 5006 &quot;, and additional information &quot; Info- 2 &quot; ip packet 132〇 (Figure 135)

12459971245997

,並傳送給網點裝置1 244(步驟V4)。IP封包1 320的酬載部 分為UDP封包,其送信端及受信端埠號碼同為”5〇6〇 ”。前 述附加情報係在媒體路由器1 2 6 0的内部使用的情報,例如 為了使用電話機的聲音壓縮方式(G.711或G729A)或聲音碼 變換、用以識別電話的呼叫之號碼。後述的電話管理伺服 器1271或代理電話管理伺服器1 270與前述附加情報無關。 網點裝置1 244係使用被授與至輸入外部ip封包丨32〇的邏輯 通信電路1 2 5 7的·終端部的内部I p位址&quot;I a Γ,,及IP封包 1 320内的受信端IP位址&quot;EA81&quot;,檢索圖128的位址管理表 1250内的IP通#記錄。再者,確認ip封包132〇内的送信端 IP位址&quot;Ε Α Γ1係包含於I p通信記錄中,在本例中,使用被 記載於位址管理表1 250上起第4行的記錄,也就是ΠΕΑ1、 ΕΑ81、ΙΑ1、ΙΑ8Γ的記錄内部的第3個與第4個1?位址,也 就是’’ ΙΑ1”及&quot;I Α81π,適用ip封包的膠囊化技術,形成ΙΡ 封包1321 (圖136),並傳送給内部ip位址為&quot;ΙΑ81,,的代理 電話管理伺服器1 270 (步驟V5)。And transmits it to the network device 1 244 (step V4). The payload part of IP packet 1 320 is divided into UDP packets, and the port numbers of the sender and the receiver are both “506”. The additional information described above is information used internally in the media router 1260, for example, a number used to identify a telephone call in order to use a voice compression method (G.711 or G729A) or voice code conversion of a telephone. The telephone management server 1271 or the proxy telephone management server 1 270 described later has nothing to do with the aforementioned additional information. The branch point device 1 244 uses a logical communication circuit 1 2 5 7 that is given to an input external IP packet 32 0. The internal IP address &quot; I a Γ &quot; of the terminal section, and the trusted address in the IP packet 1 320 End IP address &quot; EA81 &quot;, retrieve the IP communication # record in the address management table 1250 of FIG. 128. In addition, confirm that the IP address of the sender in the IP packet 1320 is included in the IP communication record. In this example, the fourth line from the address management table 1250 is used. Records, that is, the third and fourth 1? Addresses inside the records of ΠΕΑ1, Ε81, ΙΑ1, ΙΑ8Γ, that is, "ΙΑ1" and &quot; I Α81π, apply the IP packet encapsulation technology to form an IP packet 1321 (Fig. 136), and sends it to the agent telephone management server 1 270 with the internal IP address &quot; IA81, (step V5).

當代理電話管理伺服器1 270接收IP封包1321時,形成 IP封包1321的酬載部分,及將前述位址,,EA1、IA1、EA81 、ΙΑ8Γ包含於酬載部分的ιρ封包1322(圖137),並傳送給 電話管理伺服器1271(步驟V6)。在此,代理電話管理伺服 器1 2 7 0係使用預先保存的電話管理伺服器丨2 7 1的I P位址 π ΙΑ9Γ 〇 &lt;〈發信電話數目的控制〉〉 電話管理伺服器1271從接收到的IP封包1 322取出送信When the agent telephone management server 1 270 receives the IP packet 1321, it forms the payload portion of the IP packet 1321 and includes the aforementioned address, EA1, IA1, EA81, and IA8Γ in the payload portion 1322 (Figure 137) And send it to the telephone management server 1271 (step V6). Here, the agent telephone management server 1 2 7 0 uses the IP address of the telephone management server 丨 2 7 1 which is stored in advance π ΙΑ9Γ 〇 <Control of the number of outgoing telephones> The telephone management server 1271 receives from IP packet 1 322 to get out

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第141頁 1245997 五、發明說明(138) 端側的媒體路由器1201的位址&quot;EA1” ,與圖160的發信電路 管理表1 3 2 6 - 5比較,有關I P位址為” EA丨”的記錄,將使用 中的電路數目增加π 1π,然後與電路數目上限比較。在本 實施例中,由於使用中的電路數目為&quot;2&quot;,電路數目的上 限為” 5”,因此進行下一個手續。再者,電話管理祠服器 1271在使用中的電路數目比電路數目的上限大時,就不進 行以後的接續階段而中斷。或者,形成說明中斷理由的j ρ 封包,經由代理電話伺服器1 270,通知送信端媒體路由器 管理部1 260。電話管理伺服器1271可選擇是否進行發信^ 路控制。 ° &lt;&lt;電路號碼的管理〉〉 電話管理伺服器1271讀出IP封包1 322 (圖137),以取 得送信端電治號碼” 1 0 01&quot;及受信端電話號碼&quot;2 3 4 - 2 0 01 &quot;, 從這兩個電話號碼中算出用以管理聲音通信用的電路之電 路號碼’CIC-2 (CIC .Circuit Identification Code)。 其次,在CIC管理表1 323(圖138)的記錄上寫入電路號 碼&quot;CIC-2&quot;、送信端電話號碼&quot;1001”、受信端電話號碼~ ” 234-2001 &quot;、電話機1208接續的媒體路由器12〇1之外部ip 位址&quot;ΕΑΓ及内部IP位址”IA1”、電話代理伺服器127〇的外 部IP位址&quot;ΕΑ8Γ及内部IP位址” IA81,,、電話代理伺服器 1271的IP位址&quot;ΙΑ9Γ、程序區段” I AM”、及寫入時刻(年月 日時分秒)&quot;St-2&quot;。 接著,電話管理伺服器1 271將詢問關於受信端電話號 碼’’234-200Γ之IP位址的ip封包1324(圖139)顯示於電話2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 141 1245997 V. Description of the invention (138) The address of the media router 1201 on the end side &quot; EA1 "is compared with the transmission circuit management table 1 3 2 6-5 of Fig. 160 For the record with IP address “EA 丨”, the number of circuits in use is increased by π 1π, and then compared with the upper limit of the number of circuits. In this embodiment, since the number of circuits in use is &quot; 2 &quot;, the number of circuits The upper limit is "5", so the next procedure is performed. In addition, when the number of circuits in use of the telephone management temple server 1271 is larger than the upper limit of the number of circuits, the subsequent connection phase is not interrupted. Or, a description is formed The j ρ packet of the reason for interruption is notified to the sender's media router management unit 1 260 via the agent telephone server 1 270. The telephone management server 1271 can choose whether or not to perform transmission control. ° &lt; &lt; Management of circuit number> 〉 The phone management server 1271 reads out the IP packet 1 322 (Figure 137) to obtain the sender's telegram number "1 0 01" and the recipient's phone number "2 3 4-2 0 01", from these two Phone number Routing number of the electrical circuit used to manage voice communication 'CIC-2 (CIC .Circuit Identification Code). Next, write the circuit number &quot; CIC-2 &quot;, the sender's phone number &quot; 1001 &quot;, the recipient's phone number ~ &quot; 234-2001 &quot;, and the telephone 1208 to the CIC management table 1 323 (Figure 138). The external IP address of the media router 1201 &quot; ΕΑΓ and the internal IP address "IA1", the external IP address of the telephone proxy server 1270 &quot; EAA8Γ and the internal IP address "IA81, and the telephone proxy server IP address of the server 1271 &quot; ΙΑ9Γ, program section "I AM", and writing time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) &quot; St-2 &quot;. Then, the telephone management server 1 271 will ask about the telephone of the recipient IP packet 1324 (Figure 139) with the IP address of `` 234-200Γ '' is displayed on the phone

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第142頁 1245997 五、發明說明(139) 號碼伺服器1 272上(步驟V7),電話號碼伺服器1 272將包含 電話機1 2 1 6接續的媒體路由器1 2 〇 2的外部I p位址,,E a 2&quot;及 内部IP位址’’IA2&quot;、電話代理伺服器1 275的外部Ip位址 ’’EA82”及内部IP位址” IA82,,、及電話管理伺服器1 274的1? 位址’’ ΙΑ92Π的^封包1 325回答給電話管理伺服器1271 (步 驟V8)。電話管理伺服器1271將從電話號碼伺服器1 272取2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 142 1245997 V. Description of the invention (139) On the number server 1 272 (step V7), the telephone number server 1 272 will contain the telephone 1 2 1 6 connected media router 1 2 〇2 external IP address, E a 2 &quot; and internal IP address `` IA2 &quot;, external IP address `` EA82 '' and internal IP address IA82 of the telephone proxy server 1 275, and, The 1? Address of the telephone management server 1 274 is addressed to the telephone management server 1271 with a packet 1 325 of the address ΙΑ92Π (step V8). The phone management server 1271 will fetch from the phone number server 1 272

得的5 個 IP 位址 ΠΕΑ2Π、,,ΙΑ2Π、&quot;EA82&quot;、&quot;IA82H 追加至CIC官理表1323(圖138),此結果顯示於cic管理表 1 326-1 (圖141)的第2行記錄之1?位址項目的攔位。 電話管理伺服器1271參照CIC管理表1 326-1 (圖141)的 I P位、址隋報,從封包1322(圖137)形成IP封包1327(圖142) (稱為IAM封包),將1?封包1 327傳送給電話管理伺服器 1 274(步驟V9)。在此,IP封包1 327的送信端1?位址為^電話 管理伺服器的&quot;IA91”,受信端ip位址為電話管理伺服器 1 274的&quot;I/A92”。電話管理伺服器1271進行至後述的步驟 V1 6的等待狀態,同時啟動對應附加於電路號碼,,[I [ 2&quot;之 步驟V16的等待計時器。在此計時器屆滿時,開始與後述 步驟V6 0相同的通話電路的釋放手續。 &lt;〈著信電路數目的控制&gt;&gt; 電活官理伺服器1274從接收到的IP封包1327(圖142) 中取出受信端側的媒體路由器12〇2的位址&quot;EA2” ,與(圖 161,),著信電路管理表1 326 —6比較,將使用中的電路數目 增加π 1 &quot;,並與電路數目的上限比較。在本實施例中,有 關位址ΕΑ2”的記錄,由於使用中的電路數目為” 2&quot;,電路 第143頁The obtained five IP addresses ΠΕΑ2Π ,, ΙΑ2Π, &quot; EA82 &quot;, &quot; IA82H were added to the CIC official table 1323 (Figure 138), and the result is shown in the first section of the cic management table 1 326-1 (Figure 141) 1 line of the 2 line record. The telephone management server 1271 refers to the IP address and address report of the CIC management table 1 326-1 (Figure 141), and forms an IP packet 1327 (Figure 142) (referred to as an IAM packet) from the packet 1322 (Figure 137). The packet 1 327 is transmitted to the telephone management server 1 274 (step V9). Here, the address of the sender 1 of the IP packet 1 327 is "IA91" of the phone management server, and the IP address of the receiver is "I / A92" of the phone management server 1 274. The telephone management server 1271 proceeds to the waiting state of step V16 to be described later, and simultaneously starts the waiting timer corresponding to the circuit number, [I [2 &quot; of step V16. When this timer expires, the release procedure of the call circuit is started in the same manner as step V60 described later. &lt; &lt; Control of the Number of Lettering Circuits &gt; &gt; The electric activity management server 1274 takes out the address of the media router 1202 on the trusted side from the received IP packet 1327 (Figure 142), "EA2", Compared with (Fig. 161,), letter circuit management table 1 326-6, the number of circuits in use is increased by π 1 &quot; and compared with the upper limit of the number of circuits. In this embodiment, the address EA2 " Record, because the number of circuits in use is "2", circuits 第 143 页

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(140) 數目的上限為’胃7” ,因此進入下一手續。電話管理词服。 1 2 74可選擇是否使用著信電路管理表1 326 —6進行著 11 控制。 S電路 &lt;&lt;電路號碼的管理〉〉 當電話管理伺服器1 274接收IP封包1 327時,取出勺人 於該酬載部分的電路號碼&quot;CIC-2,,、程序區段”丨AM,,、^ ^ 端電話號碼π 100Γ’、受信端電話號碼” 234-200 1 ”、Ip ^ 4 (,,ΕΑΓ、&quot; IA1&quot;、ΠΕΑ8Γ、π IA81&quot;、&quot; ΙΑ9Γ、&quot;EA2” 立址 ”IA2&quot;、&quot;EA82&quot;、”IA82”、”IA92&quot;),寫入並記錄以做 話管理伺服器1 274管理的CIC管理表1 326-2 (圖143)的記 錄。此寫入的時刻,’ St-3,,也寫入至CIC管理表1 326-2的^ 電話管理伺服器1 274使用從後續的IP封包1 327取得的 情報’形成IP封包1 3 2 8 (圖1 4 4 ),並傳送給代理電話管理' 飼服器1 275 (步驟VI 0)。IP封包1 328的酬載包含UDP區段及 位址領域,並將送信端媒體路由器丨2〇丨的丨p位址&quot;EA丨,,追 加至前述UDP區段的内部。前述位址領域包含Ip位址” EA2 、IA2、EA82、IA82丨,。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (140) The upper limit of the number is 'Stomach 7', so proceed to the next procedure. Telephone management of word service. 1 2 74 You can choose whether to use the letter circuit management table 1 326 —6 performs 11 control. S circuit &lt; &lt; Management of circuit number &gt;> When the telephone management server 1 274 receives the IP packet 1 327, it takes out the circuit number of the person in the payload part &quot; CIC-2 Program section "丨 AM", ^ ^ end phone number π 100Γ ', trusted end phone number "234-200 1", Ip ^ 4 (,, ΕΑΓ, &quot; IA1 &quot;, ΠΕΑ8Γ, π IA81 &quot; , &Quot; ΙΑ9Γ, &quot; EA2 "stands for" IA2 "," "EA82", "IA82", "IA92"), write and record the CIC management table 1 326 managed by the talk management server 1 274 (Figure 143). At the time of writing, 'St-3' is also written to the CIC management table 1 326-2 ^ The telephone management server 1 274 uses the information obtained from the subsequent IP packet 1 327 ' An IP packet 1 3 2 8 (Figure 1 4 4) is formed and transmitted to the agent's phone management 'feeder 1 275 (step VI 0). I The payload of P packet 1 328 includes a UDP section and an address field, and adds the p address &quot; EA 丨 &quot; of the sending-end media router 丨 2 丨 to the aforementioned UDP section. Contains IP addresses "EA2, IA2, EA82, IA82 丨.

代理電話管理伺服器1 275使用從IP封包1 328中取得的 情報’形成IP封包1329(圖145),並傳送給網點裝置1247 。送信端位址為’’ IA82,,、受信端位址為&quot;丨A2&quot;的IP封包 1 3 2 9到達網點裝置1 2 4 7 (步驟V11 ),網點裝置1 2 4 7將接收 到的IP封包1329逆膠囊化,並形成ip封包133〇(圖146)後 ’將IP封包1330傳送給媒體路由器管理部1267(步驟V12)The agent telephone management server 1 275 uses the information obtained from the IP packet 1 328 to form an IP packet 1329 (Fig. 145) and transmits it to the branch office device 1247. The sender's address is "IA82", and the recipient's address is "quot; 丨 A2". The IP packet 1 3 2 9 arrives at the branch device 1 2 4 7 (step V11), and the branch device 1 2 4 7 will receive the The IP packet 1329 is inversely encapsulated and formed into an IP packet 133 (Figure 146). 'The IP packet 1330 is transmitted to the media router management unit 1267 (step V12).

1245997 五、發明說明(141)1245997 V. Description of the Invention (141)

媒體路由器管理部1267接收IP封包1330,確認包含於 内部的受信端電話號碼&quot;234-200 Γ是否可能著信,若可能 著信,則將呼出(著信)通知電話機1216(步驟V20)。進而 ,讀出並保存IP封包1 3 3 0的内容,也就是送信端電話號碼 π1〇〇Γ、受信端電話號碼&quot; 234-200 Γ、送信端的IP位址 ΠΕΑΓ、送信端的UDP埠號碼&quot; 5006&quot;、及附加情報lnf0 —2。 媒體路由器管理部1 267為了通知電話機1216的著信可能性 (區分著信可能或不可能),產生包含送信端電話號碼 &quot;1〇〇1π、受信端電話號碼&quot; 2 34-200 Γ及著信可能性的ip封 包,並通知電話管理伺服器1 274(步驟V13、V14、V15)。 再者,在步驟V13、V14、V15中使用的IP封包的形式 與在後述的步驟V22、V23、V24中使用的IP封包的形式相 同0 電話管理伺服器1 274接收媒體路由器管理部1 267形成 傳送的前述IP封包,從前述接收到的ip封包中取出送信端 電話號碼&quot;1001”、受信端電話號碼&quot;234-200Γ及著信可能 性的情報。然後,從前述2個電話號碼中算出電路號碼 ’CIC-2”,形成包含電路號碼” CIC_2&quot;及電話機1216的著信 可能性的情報的IP封包1331(圖147)(稱為ACM封包),並傳痛I 送給電話管理伺服器1271(步驟V16)。電話管理伺服器 1271從接收到的IP封包1331中取出電路號碼” CIC —2&quot;及程 序區段&quot;ACM”,停止對應附加於在前述步驟v9的時點設定 的電路號碼,’ C 1C-2”的ACM等待計時器,檢查電話管理伺服The media router management unit 1267 receives the IP packet 1330, and confirms whether or not the telephone number of the trusted terminal included in the "234-200 Γ" is likely to be a letter. If it is possible, the phone 1216 is called out (by a letter) (step V20). Furthermore, the content of the IP packet 1300 is read out and saved, that is, the phone number of the sending end π100〇Γ, the phone number of the receiving end &quot; 234-200 Γ, the IP address of the sending end, and the UDP port number of the sending end & quot 5006 &quot;, and additional information lnf0-2. The media router management unit 1 267, in order to notify the telephone 1216 of the possibility of writing (to distinguish between possible and impossible letters), generates a phone number including the sender &quot; 1001π, a phone number on the recipient &quot; 2 34-200 Γ and Letter the possible IP packet and notify the phone management server 1 274 (steps V13, V14, V15). The format of the IP packet used in steps V13, V14, and V15 is the same as the format of the IP packet used in steps V22, V23, and V24 described later. 0 The telephone management server 1 274 receives the media router management unit 1 267. The aforementioned IP packet is transmitted from the aforementioned received IP packet and the information of the sender's phone number &quot; 1001 &quot;, the recipient's phone number &quot; 234-200Γ and information on the possibility of writing are taken out. Then, from the aforementioned two phone numbers, Calculate the circuit number 'CIC-2' to form an IP packet 1331 (Figure 147) (referred to as an ACM packet) containing the circuit number "CIC_2" and information on the possibility of writing by telephone 1216, and send it to the telephone management server 1271 (step V16). The telephone management server 1271 takes out the circuit number "CIC-2" and the program section "ACM" from the received IP packet 1331, and stops corresponding to the circuit set at the time point set in the previous step v9. Number, 'C 1C-2' ACM wait timer, check phone management servo

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第145頁 1245997 五、發明說明(142) 器1271,保存的cic管理表(圖141),找出電路號碼為 1 CIC-2&quot;的記錄,將前述記錄的程序區段欄改寫為前述程 序區段n ACM”。 其次’電話管理伺服器1271產生表示接收前述ACM封 包之IP封包(包含電話機1 21 6的著信可能性的情報),並通 知媒體路由器管理部1 260 (步驟VI 7、V18、VI 9)。再者, 在步驟V17、V18、V19中使用的IP封包的形式與在後述的 步驟V26、V2 7、V28中使用的IP封包的形式相同。步驟V17 、V18、V19可選擇是否實施。 當電話機1216將電話呼出中報告媒體路由器管理部 1267時(步驟V21),為了通知電話機1216為電話呼出中, 形成包含送信端電話號碼&quot;1〇〇1&quot;、受信端電話號碼&quot;234一 2001 &quot;、用於電話機聲音通信的UDP埠號碼&quot;5〇〇8”、及附加 情報Info-3的IP封包1 332 (圖148),並傳送給網點裝置 1 247(步驟V22)。網點裝置1 247使用位址管理表1 254的位 址值為ΠΕΑ2、EA82、IA2、IA82&quot;的記錄,將IP封包1332膠 囊化,而形成IP封包1332-1(圖149)。IP封包1332-1被傳 送給代理電話管理伺服器1 275(步驟V23),代理電話管理 伺服器1 275形成IP封包1 332-2(圖150),並傳送給電話管 理伺服器1 274(步驟V24)。 電話管理伺服器1 274從接收到的IP封包1 332-2中取出 送信端電話號碼π1〇〇1&quot;及受信端電話號碼” 234-200 Γ,由 前述2個電話號碼算出電路號碼” Cl C-2”,形成IP封包1333 (圖1 51)(稱為CPG封包),並傳送給電話管理伺服器1271 (2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 145 1245997 V. Description of the invention (142) Device 1271, cic management table (Figure 141), find the record with circuit number 1 CIC-2 &quot; The program section column is rewritten to the aforementioned program section n ACM ". Next, the 'telephone management server 1271 generates an IP packet indicating the reception of the aforementioned ACM packet (information including the possibility of a letter from the telephone 1 21 6), and notifies the media router management Part 1 260 (steps VI 7, V18, VI 9). The format of the IP packets used in steps V17, V18, and V19 is the same as the format of the IP packets used in steps V26, V2, and V28 described later. Steps V17, V18, and V19 are optional. When the phone 1216 reports the outgoing call to the media router management unit 1267 (step V21), in order to notify the phone 1216 that the outgoing call is in progress, the phone number of the sender is formed. 〇1 &quot;, the telephone number of the receiving end &quot; 234-2001 &quot;, the UDP port number &quot; 5〇008 &quot; for telephone voice communication, and the IP packet 1 332 of additional information Info-3 (Figure 148), and Send to outlet device 1 247 (Step V22). The network device 1 247 uses the record of the address management table 1 254 with the address value ΠEA2, EA82, IA2, IA82 &quot; to encapsulate the IP packet 1332 to form an IP packet 1332-1 (Fig. 149). The IP packet 1332-1 is transmitted to the agent telephone management server 1 275 (step V23), and the agent telephone management server 1 275 forms an IP packet 1 332-2 (FIG. 150), and transmits it to the telephone management server 1 274 (step V24). The telephone management server 1 274 extracts the sender's phone number π1001 &quot; and the recipient's phone number "234-200 Γ" from the received IP packet 1 332-2, and calculates the circuit number "Cl C from the two phone numbers mentioned above. -2 "to form an IP packet 1333 (Fig. 51) (referred to as a CPG packet) and send it to the phone management server 1271 (

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第146頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 146 1245997

步驟V25)。IP封包1 333包含從Ip封包1 332 2中取得的⑽p 蜂號碼’’ 50 08,1及附加情報Inf〇-3。 電話管理伺服器1271從接收到的IP封包1 333中取出電 路號碼&quot;CIC-2”、程序區段” CPG”、UDp埠號碼” 5〇〇8,,及附 ,加情報Info-3 ,將CIC管理表U26—丨(圖U1&gt;的電路號碼 &quot;CIC-2”的記錄之程序區段改寫為”cpG&quot;,讀出Ιρ位址&quot;εαι 、IA1、EA81、ΙΑ8Γ、送信端電話號碼” 1001&quot;、受信端電 話號碼” 234-200 1 ”,使用這些取得的情報,形成Ip封包 1 333-1 (圖152),並傳送給代理電話管理伺服器(步驟V26) 〇 代理電話管理伺服器1 270使用包含於接收到的Ip封包 1 333-1的情報,形成ip封包1 333 一 2(圖153),並傳送給網 點裝置1 2 4 4 (步驟V 2 7 ),網點裝置1 2 4 4將接收到的I p封包 1 333-2逆膠囊化,形成IP封包1 333 -3 (圖154),並傳送給 媒體路由器管理部1 260 (步驟V28)。媒體路由器管理部 1260從接收到的IP封包1333-3讀出並保存送信端電話號碼 &quot;100Γ、受信端電話號碼&quot; 234-200 Γ、受信端的ip位址 &quot;EA2”、受信端的UDP埠號碼” 5008”、及附加情報inf0 —3。 媒體路由器管理部1260將受信端電話呼出中通知電話 機 1 208(步驟V29)。 其次,當電話機1216的使用者對電話呼出應答時(步 驟V 31),電話機1216為了通知電話機1216的應答,將包含 送信端電話號碼&quot;1 〇 〇 1 ’’及受信端電話號碼,1 2 3 4 _ 2 0 0 1 &quot;的I p 封包傳送給電話管理伺服器1274(步驟V32、V33、V34)。Step V25). The IP packet 1 333 includes the ⑽p bee number '' 50 08,1 obtained from the IP packet 1 332 2 and the additional information Inf0-3. The telephone management server 1271 extracts the circuit number "CIC-2", the program section "CPG", and the UDp port number "5008" from the received IP packet 1 333, and attached with the information Info-3, Rewrite the program section of the record of the CIC management table U26— 丨 (Figure U1 &gt; Circuit Number &quot; CIC-2 &quot;, and read out the Ιρaddress &quot; εαι, IA1, EA81, ΙΑ8Γ, the sender's telephone The number "1001" and the phone number of the receiving end "234-200 1", using these obtained information, form an IP packet 1 333-1 (Figure 152), and send it to the agent phone management server (step V26). Agent phone management The server 1 270 uses the information contained in the received IP packet 1 333-1 to form an IP packet 1 333-2 (Figure 153), and transmits it to the network device 1 2 4 4 (step V 2 7), the network device 1 2 4 4 Decapsulates the received IP packet 1 333-2 to form an IP packet 1 333 -3 (Figure 154), and transmits it to the media router management unit 1 260 (step V28). The media router management unit 1260 starts from The received IP packet 1333-3 reads out and saves the phone number of the sender &quot; 100Γ, the phone of the receiver Code "234-200 Γ", the IP address of the receiving end "EA2", the UDP port number of the receiving end "5008", and additional information inf0-3. The media router management unit 1260 notifies the telephone set of the receiving end to the telephone set 1 208 ( Step V29). Second, when the user of the telephone 1216 answers the outgoing call (step V 31), in order to notify the telephone 1216 of the response, the telephone 1216 will include the telephone number of the sender &quot; 1 〇〇1 &quot; and the telephone of the recipient. The number, 1 2 3 4 _ 2 0 0 1 &quot; I p packet is transmitted to the telephone management server 1274 (steps V32, V33, V34).

2049-3793-PF : RAY.ptd 第147頁 12459972049-3793-PF: RAY.ptd Page 147 1245997

電活管理伺服器1 2 7 4從前述接收到的i p封包中取出送 信端電話號碼π 1 0 0 1π及受信端電話號碼” 2 3 4 - 2 0 0 1 &quot;,由前 述2個電話號碼算出電路號碼&quot;c 1C-2,,,形成至少包含電S 號碼&quot;CIC-2”的IP封包1 3 34(圖155)(稱為ΑΝΜ封包),並傳 送給電話管理伺服器1271(步驟V35)。電話管理伺服器 1271從接收到的IP封包1 334中取出電路號碼&quot;ciC-2,,及程 序區段n ANM’f,檢查電話管理伺服器1271保存的CIC管理表 1 326-1 (圖141 ),找出電路號碼為&quot;CIC一2&quot;的記錄,將前述 記錄的程序區段欄改寫為前述程序區段&quot;A n Μ&quot;。 其次,電話管理伺服器1271將前述MM封包的受信, 也就是將電話機1 2 1 6應答電話呼出通知媒體路由器管理部 1260(步驟V36、V37、V38),媒體路由器管理部1260將呼 出信號送給電話機1 208(步驟V39)。 &lt;&lt;IP通信記錄的設定〉〉 電話管理伺服器1 274從在前述步驟V34中通過電話管 理伺服器1 2 7 4的I P封包中取得電路號碼” c丨c一 2 ”,從電話 管理伺服器1 274所有的CIC管理表1 326-2中找出電路號碼 為&quot;CIC-2&quot;的記錄,從此記錄内部取出Ip位址” EA2&quot;、The electric activity management server 1 2 7 4 takes out the sender's phone number π 1 0 0 1π and the recipient's phone number from the received ip packet "2 3 4-2 0 0 1 &quot; Calculate the circuit number &quot; c 1C-2, and form an IP packet 1 3 34 (Fig. 155) (referred to as an ANM packet) containing at least the electric S number &quot; CIC-2 "and send it to the telephone management server 1271 ( Step V35). The telephone management server 1271 takes out the circuit number &quot; ciC-2, and the program section n ANM'f from the received IP packet 1 334, and checks the CIC management table 1 326-1 held by the telephone management server 1271 (Fig. 141), find the record with the circuit number &quot; CIC-2 &quot;, and rewrite the program section column of the aforementioned record to the aforementioned program section &quot; A nM &quot;. Second, the telephone management server 1271 notifies the aforementioned MM packet, that is, the telephone 1 2 1 6 answers the outgoing call to the media router management unit 1260 (steps V36, V37, V38), and the media router management unit 1260 sends the outgoing signal to Telephone 1 208 (step V39). &lt; &lt; Setting of IP communication record >〉 The telephone management server 1 274 obtains the circuit number “c 丨 c-2” from the IP packet of the telephone management server 1 2 7 4 in the previous step V34, and manages it from the telephone. Find the record with the circuit number "CIC-2" in all the CIC management tables 1 326-2 of server 1 274, and take out the IP address "EA2" from this record,

’’ΕΑΓ、&quot; ΙΑ2Π、&quot; ΙΑΓ,並傳送給表管理伺服器1276(步騍 V42),表管理伺服器1 276設定以做為網點裝置1247内部的 位址管理表1 254之第2行的記錄&quot;ΕΑ2、ΕΑ1、ΙΑ2、ΙΑ1”(步 驟V43) 〇 ’ 同樣地’電話管理伺服器1271從在前述步驟V35中通 過電話管理伺服器1 2 71的IΡ封包中取得電路號碼” c I C〜2,,'' ΕΑΓ, &quot; ΙΑ2Π, &quot; ΙΑΓ, and sent to the table management server 1276 (step V42), the table management server 1 276 is set as the second address management table 1 254 inside the network device 1247 Record of line &quot; EAA2, EAA1, IAA2, IAA1 "(step V43) 〇 'Similarly, the" telephone management server 1271 obtains the circuit number from the IP packet of the telephone management server 1 2 71 in the aforementioned step V35 "c IC ~ 2 ,,

1245997 五、發明說明(145) ,從電話管理伺服器1271所有的CIC管理表1323中找出電 路號碼為1’ C I C _ 2π的記錄,從此記錄内部取出I p位址&quot;e a 1π 、” ΕΑ2”、ΠΙΑ1Π、ΠΙΑ2Π,並傳送給表管理伺服器1 273(步 驟V44),表管理伺服器1 273設定以做為網點裝置1 244内部 的位址管理表1250之第5行的記錄&quot;EA1、ΕΑ2、ΙΑ1、ΙΑ2Π (步驟V45)。 &lt;&lt;接續階段的變化〉〉 再者,媒體潞由器管理部1 267可將對於步驟V31的應 答確認傳送給電話機1216(步驟V41 ),同樣地,電話機 1 208可將對於步驟V39的應答確認傳送給媒體路由器管理 部1 260 (步驟V40)。步驟V41及步驟V40可選擇是否實施。 又,在前面說明的接續階段中,雖然電話機1 21 6之通 話用UDP埠號碼及附加情報係在步驟V22至V29傳送,但可 代之以在步驟V32至V39進行。 &lt;&lt;通信階段〉〉 電話機1208的使用者與電話機1216的電話通信係與其 他實施例中說明的相同,使用位址管理表1 2 5 0内部在前述 接續階段中被設定的第5行的IP通信記錄(ΠΕΑ1、EA2、IA1 、ΙΑ2Π )及位址管理表1 254内部第2行的IP通信記錄(&quot;ΕΑ2 、EA1、IA2、ΙΑΓ )。電話機1 208的聲音被數位化,且被 記載於IP封包1355(圖156)的酬載。在此,使用在前述接 續階段中取得的受信端位址及UDP埠號碼。亦即,送信端 位址為媒體路由器1 2 0 1的IP位址π E A1π,受信端位址為受 信端電話機1216接續的媒體路由器1 202的IP位址&quot;ΕΑ2&quot;,1245997 V. Description of the invention (145), find out the record with the circuit number 1 'CIC _ 2π from the CIC management table 1323 owned by the telephone management server 1271, and take out the IP address &quot; ea 1π, "ΕΑ2 from this record. ", ΠΙΑ1Π, ΠΙΑ2Π, and transmitted to the table management server 1 273 (step V44), the table management server 1 273 is set as the record of the fifth line of the address management table 1250 inside the network point device 1 244 &quot; EA1 , EA2, IA1, IA2II (step V45). &lt; &lt; Changes in the continuation stage >〉 Furthermore, the media player management unit 1 267 can transmit a response confirmation to step V31 to the telephone 1216 (step V41). Similarly, the telephone 1 208 can transmit the response to step V39. The response confirmation is transmitted to the media router management unit 1 260 (step V40). Steps V41 and V40 are optional. In the continuation phase described above, although the UDP port number and additional information of the telephone 1 21 6 are transmitted in steps V22 to V29, they can be performed in steps V32 to V39 instead. &lt; &lt; Communication stage >〉 The telephone communication between the user of the telephone set 1208 and the telephone set 1216 is the same as that described in the other embodiments, and the address management table 1 2 5 0 is used to set the fifth line in the connection phase. IP communication record (ΠΕΑ1, EA2, IA1, ΙΑ2Π) and the IP communication record (&quot; ΕΑ2, EA1, IA2, ΙΓ) of the second row inside the address management table 1254. The voice of the telephone 1 208 is digitized and recorded in the payload of the IP packet 1355 (Fig. 156). Here, the trusted end address and the UDP port number obtained in the aforementioned continuation phase are used. That is, the sender's address is the IP address of the media router 1 2 0 1 π E A1π, and the recipient's address is the IP address of the media router 1 202 connected to the receiver's telephone 1216 &quot; ΕΑ2 &quot;,

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第149頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 149 1245997

並以” 50 06&quot;做為送信端UDP埠號碼,以&quot;5〇〇8 UDP埠號碼。傳送來自電話機12〇8的類比聲音(為端 利用媒體路由器管理部聲音被數位化且變成聲立 1 335,然後被傳送給網點裝置1 244 (步驟V51)。 十匕、 膠囊化變成IP封包1 336 (圖157),經由IP通信電路$ ’, 過圖128的路由器1 263、路由器1 264,到達網點裝再經 1 247(步驟V52),在此被逆膠囊化,然後到達媒體 管理部1 267(步驟V53),回復為類比聲音並到達電話機。 1216(步驟V54)。從電話機1216被傳送的類比聲音以與前 述相反的方向被傳送(步驟V55至V59)。 ”則 &lt;&lt;釋放階段〉〉 當電話機1208的使用者通知電話通信的釋放時(圖 之步驟V60) ’經由媒體路由器管理部1260、網點裝置· 1 244、代理電話管理伺服器1 270,通知電話管理伺服器 1271(步驟V60至V63),電話管理伺服器1271將結束時刻 &quot;Ed-Γ寫入至CIC管理表1 326-1中電路號碼為” CIC-2Π的記 錄之結束時刻的攔位。其次,形成釋放IP封包丨337(圖 158)(稱為REL封包),並通知電話管理伺服器1 274(步驟 V64),電話管理伺服器1 274將電話通信的釋放經由代理電 話管理伺服器1 275通知電話機1216(步驟V71至V74)。並 且,電話管理伺服器1 274將結束時刻&quot;Ed-2n寫入至C 1C管 理表1 32 6-2中電路號碼為&quot;CIC-2&quot;的記錄之結束時刻的攔 位。為了報告接收到釋放IP封包1 3 3 7,形成釋放結束IP封 包1 338 (圖159)(稱為RLC封包),並送回給電話管理伺服器And "50 06" as the sender's UDP port number, and "5 0008 UDP port number. Send analog sound from the phone 1208 (for the use of the media router management department, the sound is digitized and turned into a stand 1 335, and then it is transmitted to the network device 1 244 (step V51). Ten capsules, encapsulated into IP packets 1 336 (Figure 157), via the IP communication circuit $ ', router 1 263, router 1 264 in Figure 128, Arrive at the outlet and go through 1 247 (step V52), where it is decapsulated, and then arrive at the media management department 1 267 (step V53), reply to the analog sound and reach the phone. 1216 (step V54). It is transmitted from the phone 1216 The analog sound is transmitted in the opposite direction (steps V55 to V59). "Then &lt; &lt; Release Phase >>> When the user of the telephone set 1208 notifies the release of the telephone communication (step V60 in the figure) 'via the media router Management unit 1260, branch office equipment 1 244, agent telephone management server 1 270, notifies the telephone management server 1271 (steps V60 to V63), and the telephone management server 1271 writes the end time &quot; Ed-Γ to the CIC management table 1 326-1 The middle circuit number is “CIC-2Π” at the end of the recording. Secondly, an IP packet is released 337 (Figure 158) (referred to as the REL packet), and the telephone management server 1 274 is notified (step V64). The telephone The management server 1 274 notifies the telephone 1216 of the release of the telephone communication via the agent telephone management server 1 275 (steps V71 to V74). Further, the telephone management server 1 274 writes the end time &quot; Ed-2n to the C 1C management Table 1 32 The stop time at the end of the record with the circuit number &quot; CIC-2 &quot; in 6-2. In order to report the release of the released IP packet 1 3 3 7, the formation of the released end IP packet 1 338 (Figure 159) (called RLC packet) and send it back to the phone management server

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第150頁 1245997 五、發明說明(147) 1271(步驟V70)。 電話管理伺服器1271在步驟V64之後將釋放指示經由 代理電話管理伺服器1 270、網點裝置1 244,通知媒體路 由器管理部1260(步驟V65、V66、V67)。媒體路由器管理 部1 267將釋放指示通知電話機1216(步驟V74),同時並將 釋放報告經由代理電話伺服器通知電話管理伺服器丨2 74 ( 步驟V75、V76、V77)。 &lt;&lt;IP通信記錄的清除〉〉 在步驟V64之後,電話管理伺服器丨271將寫入至釋放 IP封包1 337中的電路號碼”CIC — 2”傳送給表管理伺服器 1 273(步驟V78),清除對應於網點裝置1244内部的電路號 碼&quot;C I C- 2π的位址管理表1 2 5 〇之記錄(在此例中係内容為 &quot;ΕΑ1、ΕΑ2、ΙΑ1、I Α2&quot;的IP通信記錄)(步驟V79)。在步 驟V70之後’電話管理伺服器1 274將寫入至釋放結束IP封 包1 3 3 8中的電路號碼&quot;c IC - 2π傳送給表管理伺服器1 2 7 6 (步 驟V80),清除對應於網點裝置1 247内部的電路號碼&quot;CIC — 2 的位址管理表1 254之記錄(在此例中係内容為” 、EA1 、IA2、IA1&quot;的IP通信記錄)(步驟V81)。 〈&lt;通話情報的收集〉〉 當IP轉送網1200内部的運用管理伺服器1277在適當預 定的時刻或是每個時間間隔詢問電話管理伺服器丨2 7丨時 (圖162的步驟V200 ),以在CIC管理表中是否寫入結 束時刻等做為線索’檢出電話通信結束的記錄。然後,將 送信端電話號碼、受信端電話號碼、開始時刻、結束時刻2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 150 1245997 V. Description of the invention (147) 1271 (step V70). After step V64, the telephone management server 1271 notifies the media router management section 1260 via the agent telephone management server 1 270 and the branch device 1 244 (steps V65, V66, and V67). The media router management section 1 267 notifies the telephone set 1216 of the release instruction (step V74), and notifies the telephone management server 2 74 of the release report via the agent telephone server (steps V75, V76, V77). &lt; &lt; Clearing of IP communication records >〉 After step V64, the telephone management server 丨 271 transmits the circuit number “CIC — 2” written in the release IP packet 1 337 to the table management server 1 273 (step V78), clear the record of the address management table 1 2 5 〇 corresponding to the circuit number &quot; CI C-2 2 inside the branch point device 1244 (in this example, the contents are &quot; ΕΑ1, ΕΑ2, ΙΑ1, I Α2 &quot; IP communication record) (step V79). After step V70, the 'telephone management server 1 274 transmits the circuit number "c IC-2π written to the release end IP packet 1 3 3 8 to the table management server 1 2 7 6 (step V80), and clears the correspondence Record of the circuit number &quot; CIC — 2 address management table 1 254 inside the branch device 1 247 (in this example, it is the IP communication record of "EA1, IA2, IA1 &quot;) (step V81). &lt; Collecting call information >〉 When the application management server 1277 inside the IP transfer network 1200 inquires the telephone management server at an appropriate predetermined time or every time interval (step V200 in FIG. 162), In the CIC management table, whether the end time or the like is written as a clue is used to detect the end of the telephone communication. Then, the sender's phone number, the recipient's phone number, the start time, and the end time are recorded.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第151頁 1245997 五、發明說明(148) 等電話通信記錄通知電話管理伺服器1271 (步驟V201 ),清 除電話通信結束的CIC管理表1326-1的記錄。同樣地,當 運用管理伺服器1 277詢問電話管理伺服器1 274時(步驟 V202 ),以在CIC管理表1 326-2中是否寫入結束時刻等做為 線索,檢出電話通信結束的記錄。然後,將送信端電話號 碼、受信端電話號碼、開始時刻、結束時刻等電話通信記 錄通知電話管理伺服器1 274(步驟V203 ),清除電話通信結 束的CIC管理表13 26_2的記錄,也就是可收集送信端電話 號碼、受信端電話號碼、開始時刻、結束時刻等,用於電 話通信的收費等。再者,前述通話情報的收集可選擇是否 _ 實施。· &lt;〈發信電路管理與著信電路管理〉〉 在前述的接續階段中,電話管理伺服器1271在(圖142 的)IAM封包1 327形成時(步驟V9),將對應於圖160之發信 電路管理表1 3 2 6 _ 5送信側之媒體路由器的位址,,e a 1,,之使 用中的電路數目增加Π1Π。同樣地,電話管理伺服器1274 將對應於圖1 61之著信電路管理表1 3 2 6 - 6受信端側之媒體 路由器的位址&quot;ΕΑ2&quot;之使用中的電路數目增加&quot;1&quot;。 在前述釋放階段中,電話管理伺服器1271在圖158之 REL封包1 337形成時(步驟V64),將對應於圖16〇之發传電 · 路管理表_-5送信侧之媒體路由器的位 中的電路數目減少” Γ。同樣地,電話管理伺服器i 274在 圖159的RLC封包1 338形成時(步驟V70),將對應於圖161之 著信電路管理表1 326-6受信端側之媒體路由器的位址&quot;EA22049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 151 1245997 V. Description of the invention (148) The phone management server 1271 is notified to the phone management server 1271 (step V201), and the record of the CIC management table 1326-1 at the end of the phone communication is cleared. Similarly, when the management server 1 277 is used to inquire the telephone management server 1 274 (step V202), whether or not the end time is written in the CIC management table 1 326-2 is used as a clue to detect the record of the end of the telephone communication. . Then, the phone management server 1 274 is notified of the telephone communication records of the sender's phone number, the recipient's phone number, the start time, and the end time (step V203), and the record of the CIC management table 13 26_2 at the end of the phone communication is cleared. Collect the phone number of the sending end, the phone number of the receiving end, the start time, the end time, etc., and the charges for the telephone communication. Moreover, the collection of the aforementioned call information can be _ implemented. · <Transmission circuit management and transmission circuit management> In the aforementioned connection phase, when the telephone management server 1271 (FIG. 142) IAM packet 1 327 is formed (step V9), it will correspond to FIG. 160 Sending circuit management table 1 3 2 6 _ 5 The address of the media router on the sender side, ea 1, and the number of circuits in use increases by Π1Π. Similarly, the telephone management server 1274 will increase the number of circuits in use &quot; 1 &quot; by the address of the media router &quot; ΕΑ2 &quot; corresponding to the letter circuit management table 1 3 2 6-6 of FIG. . In the foregoing release phase, when the REL packet 1 337 of FIG. 158 is formed (step V64), the telephone management server 1271 will correspond to the bit of the media router on the transmission side of the transmission and routing management table_-5 of FIG. 160. The number of circuits in the circuit is reduced "Γ. Similarly, when the telephone management server i 274 forms the RLC packet 1 338 in Fig. 159 (step V70), it will correspond to the letter circuit management table 1 in Fig. 161. Address of Media Router &quot; EA2

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第152頁 1245997 五、發明說明(149) π之使用中的電路數目減少π 1 ”。再者,前述發信電路管理 與著信電路管理可選擇是否實施。 〈〈接續階段的其他例〉〉2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 152 1245997 V. Description of the invention (149) The number of circuits in use of π is reduced by π 1 ". Furthermore, the aforementioned transmission circuit management and the management of the transmission circuit can be selected whether to implement. 〈〈 Other examples of continuation stage 〉〉

在前述接續階段(步驟V0至V45)中,可追加應答確認 的步驟(步驟V90至V96),參照圖163加以說明。當媒體路 由器管理部1260接收應答的通知時(步驟V38),可形成並 送回代表應答確認的通知之IΡ封包,前述應答確認用的I ρ 封包係經由網點裝置1 244、代理電話管理伺服器1 270、 電話管理伺服器1271、電話管理伺服器1274、電話代理 伺服器1 275、及網點裝置1 247,而被送給媒體路由器管 理部1 267(步驟V90至V96)。如此,可提升通信的信賴性。 &lt;&lt;釋放階段的其他例〉〉 前述釋放階段(步驟V60至V77)可以下面的步驟取代, 參照圖1 6 3加以說明。 當電話機1208的使用者通知電話通信的釋放時(圖168 的步驟vi〇〇),經由媒體路由器管理部126〇、網點裝置 1 244、代理電話管理伺服器1 270、電話管理伺服^ ι27ι 、電話管理伺服器1274、代理電話管理伺服器1 275、及 網點裝置1 247、媒體路由器管理部1 267,而通知電話 1216(步驟7100至¥108)。當媒體路由器管理部1 267接收 述釋放的通知時(步驟V107),為了通知釋放接收’以與^ 述相反的方向’也就是經由網點裝置1247、代理電話'敦則 理伺服器1275、電話管理伺服器1274、電話管理伺服 1271、代理電話管理伺服器1 270、網點裝置1244,通^In the aforementioned continuation stage (steps V0 to V45), a step (steps V90 to V96) of response confirmation may be added, and described with reference to FIG. 163. When the media router management unit 1260 receives the notification of the response (step V38), it can form and return an IP packet representing the notification of the response confirmation. The aforementioned I ρ packet for the response confirmation is transmitted through the network device 1 244 and the agent telephone management server. 1 270, the telephone management server 1271, the telephone management server 1274, the telephone agent server 1 275, and the branch office device 1 247 are sent to the media router management section 1 267 (steps V90 to V96). This improves communication reliability. &lt; &lt; Other examples of release phase &gt;> The aforementioned release phase (steps V60 to V77) may be replaced by the following steps, and described with reference to FIG. 16. When the user of the telephone set 1208 notifies the release of the telephone communication (step vi〇〇 of FIG. 168), via the media router management section 126〇, the branch device 1 244, the agent telephone management server 1 270, the telephone management server ^ 2727, the telephone The management server 1274, the agent telephone management server 1 275, the branch office device 1 247, and the media router management section 1 267, and the notification telephone 1216 (steps 7100 to ¥ 108). When the media router management unit 1 267 receives the notification of the release (step V107), to notify the release, it receives 'in the opposite direction to the above', that is, via the branch device 1247, the agent's telephone, the "Tunnel management server 1275, and the telephone management Server 1274, phone management server 1271, agent phone management server 1 270, network point device 1244, communication ^

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第153頁 (150) 1245997 五 媒體路由器管理部1 260 (步驟vlll至V118)。接著,釋放結 束的通知以與則述相同的路徑,也就是經由網點裝置 1 247 :,理電話管理伺服器1 275、電話管理伺服器1274 、電居官理饲服器1 2 71、代理電話管理伺服器1 2 7 0、網 點裝置1244 ’通知媒體路由器管理部126〇(步驟¥121至 V127)。又’對用於網點裝置1 244内部的位址管理表125〇 及網點裝置1 247内部的位址管理表丨254内部的聲音通信之 記錄的清除與前述步驟”〇及78]1或前述步驟V78&amp;V79相2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 153 (150) 1245997 5 Media Router Management Department 1 260 (steps vll11 to V118). Then, the notification of the end of the release follows the same path as described above, that is, via the branch device 1 247: the phone management server 1 275, the phone management server 1274, the electric house management feeder 1 2 71, and the agent phone The management server 1270 and the branch device 1244 'notify the media router management section 1260 (steps ¥ 121 to V127). Also, 'Clear the voice communication records used in the address management table 125 inside the branch point device 1 244 and the address management table inside the branch point device 1 247 254 and the foregoing steps "〇 and 78] 1 or the foregoing steps V78 &amp; V79 phase

同。透過釋放接收與釋放結束2次程序,可提高信賴性。 &lt;&lt;TCP技術的採用〉〉 在前述接續階段及釋放階段中,電話管理伺服器1 2 71 與電話管理伺服器1 274間的通信,也就是透過UDP通信實 施步驟V9、V16、V25、V35、V64、V70,可以代之以透過 TCP通信實施,參照圖164至圖169,說明如下。with. Reliability can be improved by releasing the receiving and ending procedures twice. &lt; &lt; Adoption of TCP technology &gt; In the foregoing connection phase and release phase, the communication between the telephone management server 1 2 71 and the telephone management server 1 274 is to implement steps V9, V16, V25, V35, V64, and V70 can be implemented through TCP communication instead. Referring to FIGS. 164 to 169, the description is as follows.

圖164是透過TCP通信實施步驟V9的例子,從電話管理 伺服器1271傳送包含為了確立TCP連接的SYN指定之TCP封 包1 390-1至電話管理伺服器1 274,電話管理伺服器1274 則回答包含通信開始了解的ACK表示之TCP封包1391-1,從 電話管理伺服器1271將包含與IP封包1327同一内容(呼叫 設定I AM的通知)的TCP封包1 392-1傳送給電話管理伺服器 1 2 74(步驟V9t)。接著,從電話管理伺服器1271將包含用 於TCP連接結束的FIN指定之TCP封包1 393-1傳送給電話管 理伺服器1 274,從電話管理伺服器1 274將用於確認結束 的TCP封包1 394-1送回給電話管理伺服器1271。Figure 164 is an example of implementing step V9 through TCP communication. The telephone management server 1271 transmits a TCP packet 1 390-1 containing the SYN designation for establishing a TCP connection to the telephone management server 1 274. The telephone management server 1274 responds with The TCP packet 1391-1 indicated by the ACK indicated by the communication is transmitted from the telephone management server 1271 to the TCP management packet 1 392-1 containing the same content as the IP packet 1327 (notice of the call setting I AM) to the telephone management server 1 2 74 (step V9t). Next, from the phone management server 1271, a TCP packet 1 393-1 containing the FIN designation for the end of the TCP connection is transmitted to the phone management server 1 274. From the phone management server 1 274, the TCP packet 1 for confirming the end is transmitted. 394-1 is returned to the phone management server 1271.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第154頁 1245997 五、發明說明(151) -- 圖165係透過TCP通信實施步驟V16的例子,從電話管 理伺服器1 274傳送包含為了確立Tcp連接的SYN指定之Tcp 封包1 390-2至電話管理伺服器1271,電話管理伺服器 1271則回答包含通信開始了解的ACK表示之Tcp封包1391一2 ,從電話管理伺服器1 274將包含與ip封包1331同一内容 (呼叫設定受理ACM的通知)的TCP封包1 392 — 2傳送給電話管 理伺服器1271(步驟VI 6t)。接著,從電話管理伺服器 將包含用於TCP連接結束的fin指定之TCP封包1 393 — 2傳送 給電話管理伺服器1271,從電話管理伺服器1271將用於 確認結束的TCP封包1394-2送回給電話管理飼服器1274。 圖166係透過TCP通信實施步驟V25的例子,從電話管 理伺服器1271傳送包含為了確立TCP連接的SYN指定之τ/ρ 封包1390-3至電話管理伺服器1274,電話管理伺服器 1274則回善包含通扣開始了解的ack表示之TCP封包1391 - 3 ,從電話管理伺服器1271將包含與^封包丨333同一内容 (呼叫經過CPG的通知)的TCP封包1 3 92 —3傳送給電話管理 服器1274(步驟V25t)。接著,從電話管理伺服器丨以丨將 含用於TCP連接結束的FIN指定之TCP封包1393-3傳送給電 話管理伺服器1 274,從電話管理伺服器1 274將用於^認 結束的TCP封包1394_3送回給電話管理彳司服器1 271。 ' 圖167係透過TCP通信實施步驟V35的例子,其特徵 從電話管理祠服器1271將包含與IP封包1 334同一内容 叫經過ΑΝΜ的通知)的TCP封包1392-4傳送給電話管理飼 器1 274(步驟V35t),可與前述其他方法同樣地實施。接2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 154 1245997 V. Description of the invention (151)-Figure 165 is an example of implementing step V16 through TCP communication. The phone management server 1 274 transmits the SYN designation including the establishment of a TCP connection. Tcp packet 1 390-2 to the telephone management server 1271, and the telephone management server 1271 responded with a Tcp packet 1391-2 containing the ACK indication that the communication started to understand. From the telephone management server 1 274, it will contain the same content as the IP packet 1331. The TCP packet 1 392-2 (notification of call setting acceptance ACM) is transmitted to the telephone management server 1271 (step VI 6t). Next, the TCP management packet 1 393-2 containing fin specified for the end of the TCP connection is transmitted from the telephone management server to the telephone management server 1271, and the TCP packet 1394-2 for confirming the end is transmitted from the telephone management server 1271 Call back to manage the feeder 1274. FIG. 166 is an example of implementing step V25 through TCP communication. The phone management server 1271 transmits a τ / ρ packet 1390-3 containing the SYN designation for establishing a TCP connection to the phone management server 1274, and the phone management server 1274 returns. Contains TCP packets 1391-3 indicated by ack, which began to be understood by Tongkou. From the telephone management server 1271, TCP packets 1 3 92 —3 containing the same content as ^ packet 丨 333 (call notification via CPG) are transmitted to the telephone management server. Device 1274 (step V25t). Then, from the phone management server, the TCP packet 1393-3 containing the FIN specified for the end of the TCP connection is transmitted to the phone management server 1 274, and from the phone management server 1 274, the TCP for the end of the acknowledgement is transmitted. The packet 1394_3 is returned to the telephone management server 1 271. 'Figure 167 is an example of implementing step V35 through TCP communication. The feature is that the phone management server 1271 sends a TCP packet 1392-4 containing the same content as the IP packet 1 334 called ANM notification to the phone management feeder 1 274 (step V35t) can be implemented in the same manner as the other methods described above. Pick up

12459971245997

著,圖168係透過TCP通信實施步驟v“的例子, 從電話管理飼服器127i將包含與1?封包1 337同一内容(= 放REL的通知)的TCP封包1 392_5傳送給電話管理伺服器釋 1274(步驟V64t),可與前述其他方法同樣地實施。 圖169係透過TCP通信實施步驟V7〇的例子,其特徵 從電話管理伺服器1 274將包含與IP封包1 338同一内容(釋 放結束RLC的通知)的TCP封包1392_6傳送給電話管理伺服 器1271(步驟V7〇t),可與前述其他方法同樣地實施。 〈〈控制電路與通話電話的分離〉〉Fig. 168 shows an example of implementing step "v" through TCP communication. From the telephone management server 127i, a TCP packet 1 392_5 containing the same content as 1? Packet 1 337 (= notification of REL) is transmitted to the telephone management server. Note 1274 (step V64t) can be implemented in the same way as the other methods described above. Figure 169 is an example of implementing step V70 through TCP communication, and its features from the phone management server 1 274 will contain the same content as the IP packet 1 338 (end of release RLC notification) TCP packet 1392_6 is transmitted to the telephone management server 1271 (step V70t), and can be implemented in the same manner as the other methods described above. "<Separation of Control Circuit and Telephone">

其次,說明在開域通信通信中,用於終端間接續控制 的IP通k電路與用於聲音通信的通信電路可以分離。 用於終端間接續控制的IP封包1322、1327、1328、 1331、1 332-2、1 333、1 333-1、1 334、1 337、1 338 轉送連 接代理電話管理伺服器1270、電話管理伺服器1271、電 話管理祠服器1274、代理電話管理伺服器1275之任一 ip 通信電路的範圍1 289(圖170)。另一方面,用於聲音通信 的IP封包1 335及1 336轉送連接網點裝置1 244、路由器 1291、路由器1292、網點裝置1247的IP通信電路的範圍 1 2 9 3 (圖1 7 0 )。用於終端間接續控制的! p通信電路相當於 交換通信網之共通線信號網之電路,而用於聲音通信中的 通信電路則可對應於交換通信網的聲音通信電路。 根據上述,網點裝置1 244具有將由媒體路由器1201傳 送的終端間通信接續用的IP封包傳送給路由器1 263 ,且將 聲音通信用的IP封包分離地傳送給路由器1291的機能,若Next, it is explained that in the open domain communication communication, the IP communication circuit for indirect continuous control of the terminal and the communication circuit for voice communication can be separated. IP packets 1322, 1327, 1328, 1331, 1 332-2, 1 333, 1 333-1, 1 334, 1 337, 1 338 for indirect continuous control of terminal forwarding connection agent telephone management server 1270, telephone management servo The range 1 289 of any of the IP communication circuits of the server 1271, the telephone management server 1274, and the agent telephone management server 1275 (FIG. 170). On the other hand, the IP packets 1 335 and 1 336 used for voice communication forward the range of the IP communication circuits 1 244, router 1291, router 1292, and node device 1247 connected to the network device 1 2 9 3 (FIG. 170). For terminal indirect continuous control! The p communication circuit is equivalent to a circuit of a common line signal network of a switched communication network, and a communication circuit used in voice communication may correspond to a voice communication circuit of a switched communication network. According to the above, the branch point device 1 244 has a function of transmitting the IP packet for communication between terminals transmitted by the media router 1201 to the router 1 263 and separately transmitting the IP packet for voice communication to the router 1291.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(153) 著眼於反方向的I P封包的流程,則將終端間通信接續用的 I p封包與聲音通信用的I p封包合流,並傳送給媒體路由器 120卜 〈&lt;電話號碼的樹狀結構與電話DNS伺服器〉〉 圖1 71所示之樹狀結構係公司B的電話號碼伺服器11 4 0 管理的電話號碼的樹狀結構,在路由器丨2 5 〇的下位,網域 1251至1 254具有相同位階的樹狀結構關係,網域1251係管 理與電話號碼” lx X X π(1〇〇〇位數字的電話號碼)有關的 IP位址,網域1 252係管理與電話號碼&quot;2 x x x &quot;有關的ip 位址,網域1 253係管理與電話號碼” 3 χ χ χ,,有關的IP位 4 址,網域1 254則是管理與其他電話號碼有關的ιρ位址。圖 1 72所示之樹狀結構係公司a的電話號碼伺服器11 42管理的 電話號碼的樹狀結構,在路由器丨2 51的下位,網域 1251-2、1251-3及1 254具有相同位階的樹狀結構關係,網 域125 1-2係管理公司a的電話號碼” j χ χ χ ”,網域i 251 -3 係管理公司A的網域”#&quot;,網域1251一4係管理與公司a的内 線電話號碼” 1 x x ”有關的IP位址,網域1251-5係管理與 公司A的内線電話號碼&quot;2χ χ &quot;有關的ιρ位址,網域1251一6 則是管理與公司A的内線電話號碼,,3 χ χ ”有關的I p位址。 在此’網域是公司Α專用的秘密值,不對其他公司 公開。換言之,對於來自公司A以外的公司B或公司C等所 屬的電話號碼伺服器的詢問,電話號碼伺服器丨丨42並不回 答與網域π 以下之網域1151-4至丨151-6有關的情報。網 域1 2 5 4則管理與其他電話號碼相關的丨ρ位址。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the Invention (153) Focusing on the IP packet flow in the reverse direction, the IP packet used for communication between terminals and the IP packet used for voice communication are merged and transmitted. For the media router 120, <&lt; tree structure of telephone numbers and telephone DNS server &gt;> The tree structure shown in FIG. 71 is the tree structure of the telephone numbers managed by the telephone number server 11 4 0 of company B, In the lower position of the router 丨 2 50, the network domains 1251 to 1 254 have the same hierarchical tree structure relationship, and the network domain 1251 manages the IP related to the phone number "lx XX π (1000-digit phone number) Address, domain 1 252 manages the IP address associated with the phone number &quot; 2 xxx &quot;, domain 1 253 manages the IP address associated with the phone number "3 χ χ χ, the relevant IP address 4 address, domain 1 254 manages ιρ addresses related to other phone numbers. The tree structure shown in FIG. 72 is the tree structure of the phone numbers managed by the phone number server 11 42 of the company a. It is lower than the router 2 51, and the network domains 1251-2, 1251-3, and 1 254 have the same structure. Hierarchical tree structure relationship, network domain 125 1-2 is the phone number of management company a "j χ χ χ", domain i 251 -3 is the domain of management company A "# &quot;, domain 1251-4 It manages the IP address related to the internal phone number “1 xx” of company a, and the domain 1251-5 manages the internal phone number related to the internal phone number of company A &quot; 2χ χ &quot;, the network domain is 1251-1-6 It manages the IP address associated with the internal telephone number of company A, 3 χ χ ”. Here, the 'domain' is a secret value dedicated to company A and will not be disclosed to other companies. In other words, the phone number server 丨 丨 42 does not answer questions about the phone number servers affiliated with company B or company C other than company A, which are related to the domains 1151-4 to 151-6 below the domain π Intelligence. The domain 1 2 5 4 manages the addresses associated with other phone numbers.

1245997 五、發明說明(154) 圖173所示之樹狀結構係公司a的電話號碼伺服器1137 管理的電話號碼的樹狀結構,在路由器1 2 5 〇 -1的下位,網 域1251至1 254具有相同位階的樹狀結構關係,網域丨251係 管理與公司A所屬的電話號碼有關的1?位址,網域丨252係 管理與公司B的電話號碼&quot;2 X X x,,有關的IP位址,網域 1 253係管理與公司C的電話號碼” 3 X x x ”有關的IP位址, 網域1 254則是管理與其他電話號碼有關的Ip位址。網域 1251-2係管理公,A的電話號碼”丨χ χ χ ”,網域丨25 1-3係 管理公司Α的網域”#”,網域! 251 -4係管理與公司Α的内線 電話號碼π 1 X X π有關的I p位址,網域丨2 51 - 5係管理與公 司Α的内線電話號碼&quot;2 X X,,有關的丨ρ位址,網域1 2 5 1 - 6則 是管理與公司A的内線電話號碼,,3 χ χ &quot;有關的〗p位址。 在此,網域π #&quot;是前述公司Α專用的秘密值。又,圖 1 74所示之樹狀結構係公司X的電話號碼伺服器丨丨39管理的 電話號碼的樹狀結構,在路由器丨2 5 〇 - 2的下位,網域 1 254-2及1 254具有相同位階的樹狀結構關係,網域1 254一2 係管理公司X所屬的電話號碼,網域1 254則是管理與其他 電話號碼有關的IP位址。 圖175的表1255-1係表示媒體路由器管理部126〇將接 續至媒體路由器1201的電話機丨2〇8至1211做為通信對象處 的電話號碼變換為網域名稱的方法,就是將表— i的第 1行的電話號碼π 1 X X x ”,例如電話號碼”;I 〇 〇丨”以電話號 碼網域名稱&quot;1· a· π表現,將表的第2行的電話號碼 &quot;2 X X X ”以電話號碼網域名稱” b · ”表現,將表1 2 5 5 -1的 1^1 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第158頁 1245997 五、發明說明(155) 第7行的其他電話號碼以電話號碼網域名稱&quot;〇· ’’表現,其 他行也是一樣。電話號碼伺服器11 3 7根據圖1 7 6的表 1 2 5 5 - 2,例如電話號碼網域名稱1 · a •被询問時’就回答 IP位址π E A1,,,當電話號碼網域名稱&quot;匕· ”被詢問時’就回 答IΡ位址&quot;E A 5π,電話號碼網域名稱&quot;〇 ·&quot;被詢問時’就回 答IP位址ΠΕΑ8Γ。1245997 V. Description of the invention (154) The tree structure shown in Figure 173 is the tree structure of the phone numbers managed by the phone number server 1137 of the company a, which is lower than the router 1 2 5 0-1, and the network domains 1251 to 1 254 has a tree structure relationship of the same rank. The domain 丨 251 manages the 1? Address related to the phone number to which company A belongs, and the domain 丨 252 manages the phone number of company B &quot; 2 XX x. Domain 1 253 manages IP addresses related to the phone number "3 X xx" of company C, and Domain 1 254 manages IP addresses related to other phone numbers. The domain 1251-2 is the management company, A's phone number "丨 χ χ χ", the domain 丨 25 1-3 is the domain "#" of the management company A, the domain! 251-4 series manages the IP address associated with the internal telephone number π 1 XX π of the company A, the domain 丨 2 51-5 series manages the internal telephone number of the company A &quot; 2 XX, and the related ρ Address, the domain 1 2 5 1-6 is the p address that manages the internal telephone number of company A, 3 χ χ &quot;. Here, the domain π # &quot; is a secret value dedicated to the aforementioned company A. In addition, the tree structure shown in FIG. 74 is the tree structure of the phone numbers managed by the company's phone number server 丨 丨 39. It is lower than the router 丨 2 5 〇-2, and the network domains 1 254-2 and 1 254 has a tree structure relationship of the same rank. Domain 1 254-2 is the phone number of management company X, and domain 1 254 is the management of IP addresses related to other phone numbers. Table 1255-1 in FIG. 175 shows the method by which the media router management unit 126 transforms the telephone numbers connected to the media router 1201 from 2008 to 1211 into the domain names. The phone number π 1 XX x ”in the first row of the phone number, for example, the phone number”; I 〇〇 丨 ”is represented by the phone number domain name &quot; 1 · a · π, and the phone number in the second row of the table &quot; 2 XXX "Expressed as a telephone number domain name" b · ", will be 1 ^ 1 2049-3793-PF of Table 1 2 5 5 -1; RAY.ptd page 158 1245997 V. Description of the invention (155) Line 7 Other phone numbers are represented by the phone number domain name &quot; 〇 &quot;, and the other lines are the same. Phone number server 11 3 7 According to Table 1 2 of Figure 1 7 6 2 5 5-2, such as phone number domain name 1 · a • When asked 'return IP address π E A1, when the phone number The domain name "quotes the IP address" when asked, "EA 5π, and the phone number domain name", when asked, answers the IP address ΠΕΑΓ.

圖177的表1256-1係表示媒體路由器管理部1264將接 續至媒體路由器1203的電話機1228至1231做為通信對象處 的電話號碼變換為網域名稱的方法,就是將表1256-1的第 1行的電話號碼,'1 X X X π以電話號碼網域名稱&quot;1 · a·&quot;表 現,將表1 255-1的第2行的電話號碼&quot;1 X X &quot;以電話號碼網 域名稱π 1. #· a· π表現,將表1 256-1的第5行的其他電話號 碼以電話號碼網域名稱&quot;〇 ·&quot;表現,其他行也是一樣。電話 號碼伺服器1142根據圖178的表1 25 6-2,例如電話號碼網 域名稱π 1· a· ”被詢問時,就回答IP位址&quot;ΕΑ1&quot;,當電話號 碼網域名稱π 1 · #· a· ”被詢問時,就回答ip位址” EA1&quot;,電 話號碼網域名稱&quot;0·&quot;被詢問時,就回答Ip位址” EA8Γ。Table 1256-1 in FIG. 177 shows the method by which the media router management unit 1264 converts the telephone numbers 1228 to 1231 connected to the media router 1203 as the communication target to the domain name, which is the first of Table 1256-1 Line phone number, '1 XXX π is represented by phone number domain name &quot; 1 · a · &quot;, the phone number in line 2 of Table 1 255-1 &quot; 1 XX &quot; is represented by phone number domain name π 1. # · a · π expression, the other phone numbers in line 5 of Table 1 256-1 are expressed by phone number domain name &quot; 〇 · &quot; The telephone number server 1142 is based on Table 1 25 6-2 of FIG. 178. For example, when the telephone number domain name π 1 · a · ”is asked, it answers the IP address &quot; ΕΑ1 &quot;. When the telephone number domain name π 1 · # · A · "When asked, answer the IP address" EA1 ", and phone number domain name" 0 · "When asked, answer the IP address" EA8Γ ".

圖179的表1257-1係表示媒體路由器管理部丨266將接 續至媒體路由器1 205的電話機1 220至1 223做為通信對象處 的電話號碼變換為網域名稱的方法,就是將表1257-1的第 1行的電話號碼π 1 X X X ”以電話號碼網域名稱&quot;a•&quot;表現, 將表1 257-1的第2行的電話號碼”2χ χ χ &quot;以電話號碼網域 名稱1 b· ’’表現,將表1 256-1的第4行的其他電話號碼以電 話號碼網域名稱” 0· ”表現,其他行也是一樣。電話號碼伺Table 1257-1 of FIG. 179 shows the method for the media router management section 266 to convert the telephone numbers 1 220 to 1 223 connected to the media router 1 205 as the communication target to the domain name, which is to change the table 1257- The phone number π 1 XXX in the first line of 1 is expressed by the phone number domain name &quot; a • &quot;, and the phone number in the second line of Table 1 257-1 "2χ χ χ" is used in the phone number domain The name 1 b · "is expressed, and the other phone numbers in line 4 of Table 1 256-1 are represented by the phone number domain name" 0 · ", and the same is applied to other lines. Phone number

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第159頁 1245997 五、發明說明(156) 服器1140根據圖180的表1 257-2,例如電話號碼網域名稱 n a·&quot;被詢問時,就回答I p位址” EA1,,,當電話號碼網域名 稱&quot;b·&quot;被詢問時,就回答ip位址&quot;EA5”,電話號碼網域名 稱&quot;〇·&quot;被詢問時,就回答IP位址&quot;ΕΑ8Γ。 電話號碼伺服器11 37至11 42係使用網域名稱伺服器 (DNS)公知的重撥機能,呼出其他的電話號碼伺服器,以 取得其他的電話號碼伺服器直接管理的I p位址。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 159 1245997 V. Description of the invention (156) The server 1140 according to Table 1 257-2 of Figure 180, such as the telephone number domain name na · &quot; When asked, answer I "p address" EA1, when the telephone number domain name &quot; b · &quot; is asked, answer the ip address &quot; EA5 ", the telephone number domain name &quot; 〇 · &quot; when asked, Answer the IP address &quot; ΕΑ8Γ. The telephone number servers 11 37 to 11 42 use the known redial function of a domain name server (DNS) to call other telephone number servers to obtain IP addresses directly managed by other telephone number servers.

將上述摘要·如下。亦即,媒體路由器1與媒體路由器2 係經由IP轉送網被接續,電話機1被接續至媒體路由器1 ’電話機2被接續至媒體路由器2,電話機1及電話機2使 用媒體路由器1内部的電話號碼伺服器,可不使用Ip轉送 網内部的電話號碼伺服器,而進行電話通信。再者,媒體 路由器1或媒體路由器2上可接續複數個電話機。又,1?轉 送網包含固有的電話號碼伺服器,電話機1及電話機2可使 用媒體路由器1内部的電話號碼伺服器,存取Ip轉送網内 的電話號碼伺服器,對電話機2進行電話通信。 IP轉送網係包含2個以上的網點裝置,媒體路由器經 由邏,IP通信電路,被接續至任一個前述網點裝置,在前 述邏輯IP通k電路的網點裝置侧的終端部上被授與内部(pThe summary is as follows. That is, the media router 1 and the media router 2 are connected via the IP transfer network, the telephone set 1 is connected to the media router 1 ′, the telephone set 2 is connected to the media router 2, and the telephone set 1 and the telephone set 2 use the internal telephone number servo of the media router Device, can not use the phone number server inside the IP transfer network, and carry out telephone communications. Furthermore, a plurality of telephones can be connected to the media router 1 or the media router 2. The 1-to-1 transmission network includes a unique telephone number server, and the telephones 1 and 2 can use the telephone number server inside the media router 1 to access the telephone number server in the IP forwarding network to perform telephone communication with the telephone 2. The IP transfer network includes two or more branch devices, and the media router is connected to any of the branch devices via logic and IP communication circuits, and is internally granted to the terminal section on the branch device side of the logical IP communication circuit ( p

2址,在各媒體路由器上則被授與外部IP位址,在内部具 電話號碼伺服器,且媒體路由器係經由通信 的電話機上。前述外部IP位址及通信記錄被預 疋’以做為網點裝置内部的位址管理表的 通、的接續階段係由呼叫嗖定n A M% 了1 η又疋UAM)、呼叫設定受理(ACM)2 addresses, external IP addresses are assigned to each media router, a telephone number server is provided internally, and the media router is on the telephone via which the communication is performed. The aforementioned external IP address and communication records are preliminarily used as the connection and connection phases of the internal address management table in the network device. The call is set by the call setting n AM% (1 n and UAM), the call setting acceptance (ACM )

1245997 五、發明說明(157) 、呼叫經過(CPG)、應答(ANM)構成的一連串步驟所形成 的,另外,電話通信的釋放階段係由釋放(REL)及釋放結 束(RLC)構成的一連串步驟所形成。再者,在應答非所問 ANM)之後可實施應答確認(ACK),在釋放(REL)與釋放結束 (RLC)之間可實施釋放受理。 ° 進一步摘要之,在發信側的電話管理伺服器與著信側 的電話管理伺服器之間,傳送接收I AM封包、acm ^包: CPG封包、ANM封包、REL封包、RLC封包。在限定通信對象 f閉域電話通信中,使用媒體路由器内部的電話號碼伺服 器,又,在未限定通信對象的開域電話通信中,透過使用 媒體路由器内部的電話號碼伺服器,可使用丨P轉送網内部 的電話號碼伺服器。在開域電話通信中,在終端間接續押 制中使用的ip通信電路可與在聲音通信中使用的通信電ς 分離。電話管理伺服器具有CIC管理表,可記錄送信端電 話號碼、受信端電話號碼、電話通信的開始時刻及結束時 刻。。運用管理伺服器詢問電話管理伺服器,取得送信端電 活號碼、受信端電話號碼、電話通信的開始時刻及結 刻,可用於收費。 叮 的第11實施例 11 ·進行從公眾電話網之電話轉送 &lt;&lt;準備&gt;&gt; '1245997 V. Description of the invention (157), call pass (CPG), response (ANM) formed by a series of steps. In addition, the release phase of telephone communication is a series of steps composed of release (REL) and release end (RLC) Formed. Furthermore, an acknowledgement (ACK) can be performed after the response to the non-questioned ANM), and release acceptance can be performed between release (REL) and release complete (RLC). ° To further summarize, between the phone management server on the sending side and the phone management server on the writing side, I AM packets, acm ^ packets are transmitted and received: CPG packets, ANM packets, REL packets, RLC packets. In the limited communication target f closed-domain telephone communication, the telephone number server inside the media router is used, and in the open domain telephone communication of the unrestricted communication target, by using the telephone number server inside the media router, it can be forwarded using 丨 P Phone number server inside the network. In the open-domain telephone communication, the IP communication circuit used in the indirect renewal of the terminal can be separated from the communication cable used in the voice communication. The telephone management server has a CIC management table, which can record the telephone number of the sending end, the telephone number of the receiving end, and the start time and end time of the telephone communication. . Use the management server to inquire the telephone management server to obtain the sender's activation number, the recipient's phone number, and the start time and end of the telephone communication, which can be used for charging. Eleventh Embodiment 11-Performs phone transfer from the public telephone network &lt; &lt; Preparation &gt; &gt; ''

nq-2圖181&quot;加以說明。電話機5 20具有電話號碼 8510 ’經由電話電路517,接續至交換機513。 Ϊ電路524 1係接、續交換機5 14-1與閘道52H,介 面為^ s共通線信號線與通話電路的nni,在共通線信號 1245997 五、發明說明(158) 線上傳送依據共通線信號方式規定的信號單元。閘道 5 21-1被授與對一般公開的Gw邏輯名稱(閘道邏輯名稱),, JiW52ir與從公眾電話交換網515側可識別的信號局碼 &quot;#1 234”。加入者交換機513、51 1係預先在内部保存前述 GW邏輯名稱” GW5211”及信號局碼” # 1 234,,。通信電路52扣2 接續交換機514-2及52卜2,介面為麗1。在通信電路的閘 道5 2 1 - 2側終端上被授與電話號碼,,〇 3 — 1111 — 2 2 2 2,,。 &lt;&lt;NNI電路著信轉送的準備〉〉nq-2 Figure 181 &quot; illustrates. The telephone set 5 20 has a telephone number 8510 'connected to a switch 513 via a telephone circuit 517. ΪCircuit 524 1 is connected to switch 5 14-1 and gateway 52H. The interface is ^ s common line signal line and nni of the call circuit. The common line signal is 1245997. 5. Description of the invention (158) The line is transmitted according to the common line signal Mode specified signal unit. Gateway 5 21-1 is granted to the general public Gw logical name (Gateway logical name), JiW52ir and the signal office code "# 1 234" recognizable from the public telephone switching network 515 side. Joiner switch 513 , 51 1 saves the aforementioned GW logical name “GW5211” and signal office code ”# 1 234 ,. The communication circuit 52 is connected to the switches 514-2 and 52b 2 and the interface is Li 1. The telephone number is assigned to the terminal on the communication circuit's 5 2 1-2 side, 〇 3 — 1111 — 2 2 2 2. &lt; &lt; Preparation for NNI Circuitry Forwarding by Letter >〉

電話機520的所有者將電話機52〇從電話電路517切 離,並接續至接續媒體路由器527的通信電路528,以做 為電話機530。電話機53〇的電話號碼為” 〇3_5414 —85ι〇&quot;。 電,機520的使用者532通知電話機52〇在公眾交換電話網 之又理533上電話機530的位置,也就是,將閘道&quot; 接,改換至做為入口的Ip轉送網52 2上(圖182的步驟h〇i) 又,理533將更内容,也就是前述電話號碼&quot;一 邏輯名稱” GW52U’’經由通信電路534,通知交相 機513(步驟Η02)。交換機513使用前述 邏輯名稱&quot;GW5211&quot;變換成俨铼Α饭&quot;们 ^ r , R , ,換成仏旒局碼#1 234 ,在該轉送處The owner of the telephone set 520 cuts off the telephone set 52 from the telephone circuit 517 and connects it to the communication circuit 528 connected to the media router 527 as the telephone set 530. The telephone number of the telephone 53 is "〇3_5414 -85ι〇". The user of the telephone 520 informs the telephone 52 about the location of the telephone 530 on the public switched telephone network 533, that is, the gateway &quot; Then, change to the IP transfer network 52 2 as the entrance (step h〇i of FIG. 182), and the theory 533 will change the content, that is, the aforementioned phone number "a logical name" GW52U "via the communication circuit 534 To notify the camera 513 (step Η02). Switch 513 uses the aforementioned logical name &quot; GW5211 &quot; to convert it to 俨 铼 Α 饭 &quot; ^ r, R, and replace it with 仏 旒 局 Code # 1 234 at the transfer place

道5°21 1的Γΐ者電話號碼,,〇3-541 4 — 851 0,,及轉送處閘 道52卜1的虎局碼π#1 234”(步驟Η03)。 &lt;&lt;ΝΝΙ電路著信轉送〉〉 當從電話號碼為,,047-325 —389 7&quot;的電話 端電話號碼,,〇 3 - 5 1 /I 0 C 1 η丨丨Α 微U向又仏 機為王?恭山14一85 10發出呼叫時(步驟H05),交換 又出的呼叫(步驟_)。接著,從交換機511經The telephone number of the user at 5 ° 21 1 is 03-541 4 — 8510, and the tiger code π # 1 234 ”at the transfer gate 52 52 (step Η03). &Lt; &lt; NΝΙ circuit Forwarding by letter 〉〉 When the phone number is 047-325 —389 7 &quot; and the phone number of the phone, 〇3-5 1 / I 0 C 1 η 丨 丨 A Wei U is king again? Christine When a call is made from step 14 to 85 10 (step H05), the outgoing call is exchanged (step _). Then, from switch 511 via

12459971245997

由通信電路512至交換機513,以對電話機52〇進行 出的程;Η步獅8)。交換機513找出預先記憶在5呼 部516上的電話號碼&quot; 03-5414-8510 &quot;及轉送處閘 信號局碼&quot;#1 234&quot;(步驟Η09),將前述取得的斧 /1的 &quot;#1234&quot;通知交換細(步驟Η10)。交換機川:Κ 到的問道52W之位址的前述信號局碼&quot;#1 234”做為收 端,形成包含前述轉送處之受信端電話號碼&quot;〇3 — 54 ^。 851j&quot;的信號單元,並傳送至訊息部時,前述信號單元瘦 由父換機514-1(步驟H11),並經過通信電路524 —i而 閘道52卜1(步驟H12)。之後,經過路由器525-丨,並經 電話管理伺服器525 (H15),再經過接續控制用電路524一5 、路由器525-2、接續控制用電路524一4、網點裝置523一2 (步驟H16),進而經過通信電路526到達媒體路由器527 驟H17)。媒體路由器527將對於前述電話接續要求之電話 呼叫欠理的通知以反向傳送時,前述電話呼叫受理的通知 係經由網點裝置523-2(步驟H21),進而經過電話管理飼 器=5(步驟H22),到達閘道5^4(步驟H23)。閘道52ι^ 將前述電話發呼受理,經由交換機514 —丨(步驟H25),通知 交換機511 (步驟H26)。 &quot;其次,媒體路由器527經由通信電路528呼出電話號碼 為&quot;〇3-5414-851 0”的電話機53〇時(步驟1128),該著信呼出 中通知係以與前述相反的方向,也就是經由媒體路由器 527、網點裝置523-2、接續控制用電路524-4、電話管理 伺服器525、閘道52卜1、交換機514 —j、交換機511,而 1245997From the communication circuit 512 to the switch 513, the process is performed on the telephone set 52; Liaobu Lions 8). The switch 513 finds out the telephone number "03-5414-8510" and the transfer gate signal code "# 1 234" (step Η09) which is memorized in the 5th call part 516 in advance, and changes the ax / 1 obtained above. &quot;# 1234 &quot; Notification exchange details (step Η10). Switch Chuan: The above-mentioned signal office code "# 1 234" at the address of 52W to K is used as the receiving end, forming a signal including the telephone number of the receiving end of the forwarding point "03-54 ^. 851j" When the unit is transmitted to the message department, the aforementioned signal unit is replaced by the parent 514-1 (step H11), and passes through the communication circuit 524-i and the gate 52b1 (step H12). After that, it passes through the router 525- 丨And through the telephone management server 525 (H15), and then through the connection control circuit 524-5, router 525-2, connection control circuit 524-4, and network device 523-2 (step H16), and then through the communication circuit 526 Arrive at Media Router 527 (Step H17). When Media Router 527 reverses the notification of a phone call that is not required for the above-mentioned telephone connection, it forwards the notification of the phone call acceptance via the outlet device 523-2 (step H21), and then Phone management device = 5 (step H22), arrive at the gate 5 ^ 4 (step H23). The gate 52m ^ accepts the aforementioned call, and via the switch 514 — (step H25), notifies the switch 511 (step H26) &Quot; Second, Media Router 527 via The letter circuit 528 dials out the phone number "03-5414-851 0" at 5300 hours (step 1128). The notification during the outgoing call is in the opposite direction to that described above, that is, via the media router 527 and the outlet device. 523-2, connection control circuit 524-4, telephone management server 525, gateway 52b, switch 514-j, switch 511, and 1245997

被通知給發呼的電話機51〇(步驟H3〇至H37)。當電話機53〇 的使用者拿起送受話器時(離鉤),電話機53〇將應答通知 通知媒,路由器527 (步驟H40),之後與上述相同,經由媒 體路由器527、網點裝置523 —2、接續控制用電路524 —4、 電話管理伺服器525、閘道521 —i、交換機514 —1、交換機 511 ’而被通知給發呼的電話機51〇(步驟Η^〜Η47)。 做為前述步驟Hll、H12、H15,將用於被傳送接收之 電話呼叫接續的·接續控制用資料稱為丨AM訊息,將步驟 H2 3、H25、H26間之接續控制用資料稱為ACM訊息,將步驟 H33、H3 5、H36間的接續控制用資料稱為CPg訊息,將步驟 H43、H45、H46間的接續控制用資料稱為ANM訊息。在前述 電話呼叫接續階段中,其特徵為前述訊息(IAM、ACM、cpG 二ANM)不通過網點裝置523 — !。換言之,前述訊息係在閘 道5 2卜1與電話管理伺服器5 2 5間直接被傳送接收。 如上述,電活機5 1 0與電話機5 3 〇間的通信接續程序結 束,透過電話機510與電話機53〇間的聲音可進行通話。再 者,從電話機510被傳送的聲音係經由交換機5Π、交換機 514-1、通信電路524- 1,到達閘道521 — 1,在閘道521 — 1中 變成數位化的聲音,然後到達網點裝置5 2 3 — i、通信電路The calling telephone set 51 is notified (steps H30 to H37). When the user of the telephone 53〇 picks up the handset (off-hook), the telephone 53 will notify the notification media of the response, the router 527 (step H40), and then the same as above, via the media router 527, the outlet device 523-2, and connection. The control circuit 524-4, the telephone management server 525, the gateway 521-1, the switch 514-1, and the switch 511 'are notified to the calling telephone set 51 (steps Η ~ Η47). As the foregoing steps H11, H12, and H15, the connection control data used for the telephone call connection being transmitted and received are referred to as AM messages, and the connection control data between steps H2 3, H25, and H26 are referred to as ACM messages. The data for connection control between steps H33, H35, and H36 are called CPg messages, and the data for connection control between steps H43, H45, and H46 are called ANM messages. During the aforementioned telephone call connection phase, it is characterized in that the aforementioned messages (IAM, ACM, cpG ANM) do not pass through the outlet device 523 — !. In other words, the aforementioned message is directly transmitted and received between the gateway 522 and the telephone management server 525. As described above, the communication connection procedure between the electric machine 5 10 and the telephone 5 300 is terminated, and a call can be made through the sound between the telephone 510 and the telephone 53. Furthermore, the sound transmitted from the telephone set 510 reaches the gateway 521-1 through the switch 5Π, the switch 514-1, and the communication circuit 524-1, and becomes a digitized sound in the gateway 521-1, and then reaches the outlet device. 5 2 3 — i, communication circuit

524-3、路由器525-2、聲音通信用的通信電路524一6、網 點裝置523-2、及媒體路由器527,在媒體路由器527中, 數位化的聲音被類比化,並到達電話機53〇。又,從電話 機5 3 0被傳送的聲音係經由與上述相反的通信路被傳達, 而到達電話機5 1 0。524-3, router 525-2, communication circuit for voice communication 524-6, network device 523-2, and media router 527. In the media router 527, the digitized voice is analogized and reaches the telephone 53. The voice transmitted from the telephone 5 30 is transmitted via the communication path opposite to the above, and reaches the telephone 5 10.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(161) 在電話的通話結束中,電話的呼叫釋放從電話機5 1 0 被送出至交換機511(步驟H50),經過交換機514-1(步驟 H51),被通知給閘道521-1 (步驟H53),呼叫釋放結束的通 知從閘道521 -1被送出給交換機511 (步驟H54、H55)。 其次,閘道52卜1將在前述程序中取得的電話呼叫的 釋放經由IP轉送網522,送出給電話機530 (步驟H61至H64) ’呼叫釋放結束的通知從媒體路由器5 2 7被送回給閘道 52卜1(步驟H65〜H67)。可以反方向,也就是從電話機530 向公眾電話交換網515,進行呼叫釋放的原因透過其他實 施例加以說明。前述步驟H51、H53、H61的電話呼叫釋放 的接續控制用資料稱為REL訊息,步驟H67、H54、H55的接 續控制用資料稱為RLC訊息。 再者’當不進行上述步驟H01至H03,而電話機520的 所有者532將電話機530的位置,也就是閘道” (JW52 1 Γ,,從 電話號碼為&quot;0 3 - 5 41 4 - 8 5 1 0 ’’的電話機5 2 0接續改換至做為 入口的IP轉送網522的預告,經由通信電路517通知交換機 513後,可將電話機520接續改換之電話機53〇的位置(圖 182的步驟H01X),接著,交換機513使用前述保存的情報 ,將GW邏輯名稱” GW5211”變換成信號局碼” #1 234”,可採 用將電話號碼” 03-541 4-851 0”及轉送處閘道521 —丨 二 局碼”#1234”保存在該轉送處理部516上的方法(步驟 #如上述,經由NNI電路的電話著信轉送的說明結 接著說明根據UNI的電話著信轉送。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (161) At the end of the call of the phone, the call release from the phone is sent from the phone 5 1 0 to the switch 511 (step H50) and passes through the switch 514-1 (step H51), is notified to the gateway 521-1 (step H53), and the notification of the end of the call release is sent from the gateway 521-1 to the switch 511 (steps H54, H55). Next, the gateway 52b1 sends the release of the telephone call obtained in the foregoing procedure to the telephone 530 via the IP transfer network 522 (steps H61 to H64). The notification of the end of the call release is returned from the media router 5 2 7 Gate 52 and 1 (steps H65 to H67). It can be reversed, that is, the reason for calling release from the telephone set 530 to the public telephone exchange network 515 is explained in other embodiments. The connection control data of the call release in steps H51, H53, and H61 described above are called REL messages, and the connection control data of steps H67, H54, and H55 are called RLC messages. Furthermore, when the above steps H01 to H03 are not performed, and the owner 532 of the telephone 520 sets the position of the telephone 530, that is, the gateway "(JW52 1 Γ, from the telephone number &quot; 0 3-5 41 4-8 5 1 0 ”telephone 5 2 0 connection to the IP forwarding network 522 as the entrance notice, after the communication circuit 517 notified the switch 513, the telephone 520 connection can be changed to the location of the telephone 53 0 (step in Figure 182 H01X). Then, the switch 513 uses the previously saved information to transform the GW logical name "GW5211" into a signal office code "# 1 234". The telephone number "03-541 4-851 0" and the gateway at the transfer point can be used. 521 — 丨 The method of storing the second station code "# 1234" on the transfer processing unit 516 (Step # As described above, the description of the telephone letter transfer via the NNI circuit is described below. Next, the telephone letter transfer by UNI is explained.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(162) &lt;&lt;UNI電路著信轉送的準備〉〉 參照圖1 8 1及圖1 8 3加以說明。電話機5 2 0的所有者將 電話機520從電話電路517切離,並接續至通信電路528上 以做為電話機530。電話機530的電話號碼為,,03-541 4 -8510&quot;。其次,電話機52〇的使用者532將接續改換電話機 520通知受理5 33 (步驟H01),受理533將變更内容經由通 信電路534,通知交換機513(步驟H〇2)。交換機513在該轉 送處理部51 6上,.記憶著電話號碼”03_54 1 4-85 1 0,,及被授 與至通信電路524-2的轉送處閘道5 2卜2侧終端部上的電話 號碼” 03-1 1 1 1 -2222,,(步驟H03-2)。 &lt;&lt;UNI電路著信轉送&gt;&gt; 在本例中,不同處為取代交換機51 4 — 1而使用交換機 51 4-2 ’另外,使用閘道52卜2取代閘道52卜1。。根據此 理由,交換機514-2及閘道52卜2間的終端間通信接續控制 程序變成新的步驟Η12-2及步驟Η13-2,說明如下。 當從電話號碼為” 047-325-389 7”的電話機510對受信 端電話號碼” 03-541 4-851 0π發呼時(步驟Η05-2),交換機 511受理發呼(步驟Η06-2)。其次,從交換機511,經過通 信電路512至交換機513(步驟Η08-2),對電話機520進行電2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (162) &lt; &lt; Preparation of UNI circuit letter transfer &gt;> With reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. The owner of the telephone set 520 cuts off the telephone set 520 from the telephone circuit 517 and connects it to the communication circuit 528 as the telephone set 530. The telephone number of the telephone 530 is 03-541 4 -8510 &quot;. Next, the user 532 of the telephone 52 notifies the reception 5 33 of the subsequent change of the telephone 520 (step H01), and the reception 533 notifies the exchange 513 of the change via the communication circuit 534 (step H02). The switch 513 stores the telephone number "03_54 1 4-85 1 0" on the transfer processing section 5116, and the transfer terminal 5 to the transfer terminal 2 on the side of the transfer section which is granted to the communication circuit 524-2. Phone number "03-1 1 1 -2222, (step H03-2). &lt; &lt; UNI circuit forward by letter &gt; &gt; In this example, the switch 51 4-1 is used instead of the switch 51 4-2 'In addition, the gateway 52b 2 is used instead of the gateway 52b 1. . For this reason, the procedure for controlling communication between terminals between switches 514-2 and gateways 52 and 2 has been changed to new steps Η12-2 and Η13-2, which are explained below. When a call is made from the phone 510 with the phone number “047-325-389 7” to the phone number of the recipient 03-541 4-851 0π (step Η05-2), the switch 511 accepts the call (step Η06-2) Next, from the switch 511, through the communication circuit 512 to the switch 513 (step Η08-2), the telephone 520 is powered

話呼出。交換機513找出預先記憶在轉送處理部5丨6上的電 話號碼” 03-54 1 4-85 1 0”及被授與至轉送處閘道52卜2的輸 入電路524-2的終端部上的電話號碼” 03-^^22221步驟 H09-2),將前述取得的電話號碼”〇3 —lm—2222”通知交換 機511(步驟H10-2)。交換機511將前述接收到的閘道521一2Call out. The switch 513 finds out the telephone number “03-54 1 4-85 1 0” previously stored in the transfer processing section 5 丨 6 and the terminal section of the input circuit 524-2 that is given to the transfer gate 52 and 2 Phone number "03-^^ 22221 step H09-2), and notify the switch 511 (step H10-2) of the phone number" 03-lm-2222 "obtained previously. The switch 511 will report the previously received gateway 521- 2

第166頁 1245997 五、發明說明(163) 的輸入電路的電話號碼”0 3-mi-2 222”當做受信端,形成 並傳送包含有前述轉送處之受信端電話號碼„ 〇3_5414一 8 5 1 0 ’’的信號單元時,前述信號單元到達交換機5 1 &amp; — 2 (步 驟Η1卜2)。當包含於前述信號單元的電話接續要求 (SETUP),經由通信電路524-2被送給閘道52卜2時(步驟 H12-2),閘道521-2將受理前述步—2的電話呼叫接續 要求通知交換機5 14-2(步驟H1 3-2)。另外,經過網點裝1 523-1(步驟Η14-2),再經過路由器525-2,經由電話管理 伺服器525 (Η1 5-2),再經過路由器525 —2、接續控制用電Page 166 1245997 V. Telephone number "0 3-mi-2 222" of the input circuit of the invention description (163) as the receiving end, forming and transmitting the telephone number of the receiving end including the aforementioned forwarding point 〇 3_5414 one 8 5 1 When the signal unit of 0 ”is reached, the aforementioned signal unit reaches the switch 5 1 &amp; — 2 (steps 1 and 2). When the telephone connection request (SETUP) included in the aforementioned signal unit is sent to the gate via the communication circuit 524-2 At the time of road 52 and 2 (step H12-2), the gateway 521-2 will accept the telephone call connection request of step 2 described above and notify the switch 5 14-2 (step H1 3-2). In addition, the outlet is installed 1 523- 1 (step Η14-2), then through router 525-2, through the telephone management server 525 (Η1 5-2), and then through router 525-2, and then control the power consumption

路524-4、網點裝置523-2 (步驟Η16-2),經過通信電路 526,而到達媒體路由器527(步驟H17-2)。 當媒體路由器527反向傳送對前述電話接續要求之電 治呼叫文理的通知時,前述電話呼叫受理的通知係經由網 點裝置523-2 (步驟H21-2),並經過電話管理伺服器525 (步 驟H22-2),再經過網點裝置523 —丨(步驟们3 —2),到達閘 521 2(步驟H24-2)。閘道521-2將前述電話發呼受理經由 交換機\14-2(步驟H25-2),通知交換機511(步驟H26」2)。 、”其次,媒體路由器527經過通信電路528呼出電話號碼 為0 3-541 4-85 1 0”的電話機53〇時(步驟H28_2),其著信呼Route 524-4 and the branch point device 523-2 (step Η16-2) pass through the communication circuit 526 and reach the media router 527 (step H17-2). When the media router 527 reversely transmits the notification of the telephony call literature and the phone connection request, the notification of the phone call acceptance is via the network device 523-2 (step H21-2) and the phone management server 525 (step H22-2), and then pass through the network point device 523 — (steps 2-3), and reach the gate 5212 (step H24-2). The gateway 521-2 passes the telephone call acceptance via the switch \ 14-2 (step H25-2) and notifies the switch 511 (step H26 "2). "Secondly, the media router 527 calls the telephone number 0 3-541 4-85 1 0 via the communication circuit 528 at 5300 hours (step H28_2), and the letter calls

出中通知係與前述反向,也就是經過媒體路由器527(步驟 30-2)、網點裝置523 — 2(步驟H31-2)、電話管理伺服器 步驟H32 —2)、網點裝置523-1 (步驟H33-2)、閘道521一 驟二β驟2)、交換機514 —2(步驟H35-2)、交換機511(步 驟H36-2),通知發呼的電話機51〇(步驟H37 —2)。The out-of-office notification is the reverse of that described above, that is, via the media router 527 (step 30-2), the branch device 523-2 (step H31-2), the telephone management server step H32-2), and the branch device 523-1 ( Step H33-2), Gateway 521 Step 2 β Step 2), Switch 514-2 (Step H35-2), Switch 511 (Step H36-2), and notify the calling telephone 51 (Step H37-2) .

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第167頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p.167 1245997

當電話機530的使用者拿起送受話器時(離鉤),電話 機530將應答通知通知媒體路由器5 27(步驟H4〇 —2),以”下 與上述相同,經過媒體路由器527、網點裝置523一2、 管理伺服^器525、網點裝£523M、閘道52卜2、交換機” 514 2、父換機511,通知發呼的電話機51〇(步驟2〜 H47 2 )。在則述電話呼叫接續階段中,為了閘道I — ?及 電話管理伺服器525之間的接續階段,進行經由網點裝置 523- 1之訊息的傳送接收。When the user of the telephone 530 picks up the handset (off-hook), the telephone 530 notifies the media router 5 27 of the response notification (step H4—0-2). 2. The management server 525, the outlet is installed with 523M, the gateway is 52b, the switchboard 514, the parent switch 511, and the calling telephone 51 is notified (step 2 to H47 2). In the connection phase of the telephone call described above, for the connection phase between the gateway I-? And the telephone management server 525, transmission and reception of messages via the branch point device 523-1 is performed.

如上述’電話機510與電話機5 3〇間的通信接續程序結 束,透過電話機510與電話機53〇間的聲音,可進行通話。 &lt;〈通話階段與釋放階段〉〉 一通話階段與釋放階段與前述NN丨電路著信轉送的例子 相同’其不同點為,使用交換機514 — 2取代交換機514 — 1, 並且使用閘道521-2取代閘道521 — 1(步驟{150-2至1153-2、 H54-2 至H55-2 、H60-2 至H63-2 、H65-2 至H68-2)。 &lt;〈經由UNI之著信轉送的其他實施例&gt;&gt;As described above, the communication connection procedure between the 'telephone 510 and the telephone 530 is completed, and a call can be made through the sound between the telephone 510 and the telephone 530. &lt; <Talk Phase and Release Phase> A call phase and release phase are the same as the example of the aforementioned NN 丨 circuit letter transfer. The difference is that the switch 514-2 is used instead of the switch 514-1, and the gateway 521- 2 replaces the gateway 521 — 1 (steps {150-2 to 1153-2, H54-2 to H55-2, H60-2 to H63-2, H65-2 to H68-2). &lt; &lt; Other Embodiments Forwarded by UNI Letter &gt; &gt; &gt;

▲參照圖181及圖184加以說明。電話機52〇的所有者將 電話機52^從電話電路517切離,並接續至接續媒體路由器 527的通信電路528以做為電話機53 0,與前述實施例之UNI 電路著信轉送的準備相同。 &lt;&lt;UNI電路著信轉送〉〉 在/tUNI電路著信轉送的實施中,交換機511及交換機 514-2係經由交換機513傳送接收接續控制用的訊息,說 如下。▲ Description will be made with reference to FIGS. 181 and 184. The owner of the telephone set 52 cuts off the telephone set 520 from the telephone circuit 517 and connects it to the communication circuit 528 of the media router 527 as the telephone set 530, which is the same as the preparation for the UNI circuit in the foregoing embodiment. &lt; &lt; UNI circuit letter transfer >>> In the implementation of the / tUNI circuit letter transfer, the switch 511 and the switch 514-2 transmit and receive messages for connection control via the switch 513, as follows.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd ------ 第168頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd ------ Page 168 1245997

當從電話號碼為,,047-325-389 7Π的電話機510對受信 端電話號碼”〇3-54 1 4-85 1 0π發呼時(步驟Η05-3),交換機 511受理發呼(步驟Η〇6-3)。其次,從交換機511,經過通 信電路512至交換機513,對電話機52〇進行電話呼出(步驟 Η08-3),。交換機513找出預先記憶在轉送處理部516上的電 話號碼f’ 03-54 1 4-85 1 0&quot;及被授與至轉送處閘道52卜2的輸 入電路524 —2的終端部上的電話號碼,1 03- 1 1 1 1 -2222,,(步驟 Ji〇9-3) ’接著,將閘道52卜2的輸入電路的電話號碼 03 1111 2222當做受信端’形成並傳送包含有前述轉送 ,,,信端電話號碼” 03 —54 1 4 —85 1 〇”的信號單元時,前述 信號單元到達交換機514-2(步驟H11-3)。當包含於前述信 號單元的電話接續要求(SETUP),經由通信電路524 —2被^ 給閘道521-2時(步驟H12-3),閘道521一2將受理前述步驟 H12 —3的電話呼叫接續要求通知交換機514-2(步驟H1 3-3) 。另外,經過網點裝置523 —丨(步驟H14_3),再經過路由器 525-2,經由電話管理伺服器525 (H15 — 3),再經過路由器w 525-2、接續控制用電路524一4、網點裝置523一2(步驟° Η16 3),經過通信電路526,而到達媒體路由器52了(步驟 當媒體路由器5 2 7反向傳送對前述電話接續要求之 •,裝置 2(步驟Η2卜3),並經過電話管理伺服器525 (牛 驟H22-3),再經過網點裝置“^(步驟H23—到 ^ 52卜2(步驟H24-3)。間道521—2將前述電話發呼受道 1245997When a call is made from the telephone 510 of the telephone number 047-325-389 7Π to the telephone number of the recipient "03-54 1 4-85 1 0π (step Η05-3), the exchange 511 accepts the call (step Η 〇6-3). Next, from the switch 511, through the communication circuit 512 to the switch 513, make a call to the telephone 52 (step Η08-3). The switch 513 finds the telephone number stored in the transfer processing unit 516 in advance. f '03-54 1 4-85 1 0 &quot; and the telephone number on the terminal of input circuit 524-2, which is assigned to the transfer gate 52 52 2, 1 03- 1 1 1 1 -2222, ( Step Ji〇9-3) 'Next, use the telephone number 03 1111 2222 of the input circuit of the gate 52 and 2 as the receiving end' to form and transmit the telephone number of the receiving end including the above-mentioned transfer, "03 -54 1 4- 85 1 〇 ”signal unit, the aforementioned signal unit reaches the switch 514-2 (step H11-3). When the telephone connection request (SETUP) included in the aforementioned signal unit is transmitted to the gateway 521 via the communication circuit 524-1 At -2 (step H12-3), the gateway 521-12 will accept the telephone call connection request of the previous step H12-3. Switch 514-2 (step H1 3-3). In addition, through the network device 523 — (step H14_3), then through the router 525-2, through the telephone management server 525 (H15 — 3), and then through the router w 525- 2. Connection control circuit 524-4, network point device 523-2 (step ° Η 16 3), and then reached the media router 52 via the communication circuit 526 (step when the media router 5 2 7 reversely transmits the above-mentioned telephone connection requirements • Device 2 (steps 2 and 3), and pass through the telephone management server 525 (Niu Su H22-3), and then pass through the outlet device "^ (steps H23-to ^ 52b 2 (steps H24-3). 521-2 Send and receive the aforementioned telephone 1245997

交換機514-2(步驟H25-3),再經由交換機513(步驟H26-3) ,通知交換機511(步驟H27-3)。 其-人’媒體路由器527經過通信電路528啤出電話號碼 為&quot; 03-5414-8510”的電話機530時(步驟H28-3),其著传, 出中通知係與前述反向,也就是經過媒體路由器527(步驟 H30-3)、網點裝置523-2 (步驟H31-3)、電話管理伺服 525 (步驟H32-3)、網點裝置523-1 (步驟H33-3)、閘道°Switch 514-2 (step H25-3), and via switch 513 (step H26-3), notify switch 511 (step H27-3). When its-person 'media router 527 passes the communication circuit 528 to produce a telephone 530 with the phone number "03-5414-8510" (step H28-3), its biography, the outgoing notification is the reverse of the aforementioned, that is, Pass the media router 527 (step H30-3), the branch office device 523-2 (step H31-3), the telephone management servo 525 (step H32-3), the branch office device 523-1 (step H33-3), the gateway °

52卜2(步驟H34-3)、交換機514-2(步驟H35-3)、交換機 513(步驟H36-3)、交換機511(步驟H37-3),通知發呼的電 話機510(步驟H38-3)。當電話機53 0的使用者拿起送受'話 器時(離鉤),電話機530將應答通知通知媒體路由器 步驟H40-3),以下與上述相同,經過媒體路由器μ?、網 道52卜2、交換機514-2、交換機513、交換機511,通知I 呼的電話機510(步驟H41-3〜H48-3)。 如上述,電話機510與電話機5 30間的通信接續程序結 &lt;&lt;通話階段與釋放階段〉〉 通話階段與釋放階段與前述UN I電路著信轉送的 相同,其不同點為,交換機511與交換機514一2係經由 機5 1 3傳送接收接續控制用的訊息。 父、 根據以上的原理’接續公眾電話交換網5丨5的類 話機510可經由IP轉送網522,與接續至具有在公眾 換網中使用的電話號碼&quot;03-541 4-8 51 0”的媒體路^器^7父 1245997 五、發明說明(167) 之類比電活機5 3 0,進行終端間通信。另外,媒體路由器 根據其他實施例中說明,可設置於LAN内部。根據此理 由’將具有在公眾電話交換網中使用的電話號碼&quot;〇 3 - 5 41 4 -8510的電話機接續至lan内部的媒體路由器,由接續至 公眾電活交換網5 1 5的類比電話機5 1 〇,經由I p轉送網,接 續具有電話號碼” 03-54 1 4-85 1 0”之LAN内部的類比電話機 ’可進行終端間通信。52 2 (step H34-3), switch 514-2 (step H35-3), switch 513 (step H36-3), switch 511 (step H37-3), and notify the calling telephone 510 (step H38-3 ). When the user of the telephone 53 0 picks up the receiver (off-hook), the telephone 530 notifies the media router of the response notification (step H40-3). The following is the same as above, via the media router μ ?, channel 52b2, The switch 514-2, the switch 513, and the switch 511 notify the phone 510 of the I call (steps H41-3 to H48-3). As described above, the communication connection procedure between the telephone 510 and the telephone 5 30 ends <&lt; the call phase and the release phase >> The call phase and the release phase are the same as those of the aforementioned UN I circuit, but the difference is that the switch 511 and The switches 514 to 2 transmit and receive messages for connection control via the machine 5 1 3. Father, according to the above principle, 'the telephone 510 connected to the public telephone switching network 5 丨 5 can be connected to the telephone number used in the public switching network via the IP forwarding network 522 and "03-541 4-8 51 0" Media Router ^ 7 Parent 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (167) The analog live machine 5 3 0 performs inter-terminal communication. In addition, the media router can be installed inside the LAN according to the description in other embodiments. For this reason 'The telephone with the telephone number used in the public telephone switching network &quot; 〇3-5 41 4 -8510 is connected to the media router inside the lan, and the analog telephone 5 1 5 connected to the public telephone switching network 5 1 5 Through the IP transfer network, the analog telephone set in the LAN with a telephone number of "03-54 1 4-85 1 0" can be used for inter-terminal communication.

摘要以上所述,為將對接續公眾電話交換網之電話機 的電話呼叫接續要求,轉送給接續IP轉送網的電話機之技 術’公眾電話交換網5 1 5的中繼交換機5 1 4 -1與IP轉送網 522的閘道521-1係以NNI介面通信電路524- 1接續,將接續 至加入者交換機513的電話號碼為” ΤΝ-Γ的電話機520,做 為電活號碼π TN-1 ’’接續至接續ip轉送網522的媒體路由器 527 ’從接續至加入者交換機511之電話號碼為&quot;TN-2,,的電 活機51 0,對電話號碼” ΤΝ-Γ’電話呼叫接續要求時,前述 ,續要求到達加入者交換機513,透過加入者交換機51 3的 著信轉送機能,前述接續要求係經由中繼交換機、 NNI介面通信電路52H、閘道52卜1、Ip轉送網522、媒體 路由器5 2 7,到達電話機5 3 0。Abstract As mentioned above, in order to transfer the call requirements of telephones connected to the public telephone switching network, the technology is transferred to the telephones connected to the IP forwarding network. 'Public telephone switching network 5 1 5 relay switch 5 1 4 -1 and IP The gateway 521-1 of the transfer network 522 is connected by the NNI interface communication circuit 524-1, and the telephone number connected to the subscriber exchange 513 is "TEL 520 of TN-Γ" as the electrical number π TN-1 '' Connected to the media router 527 connected to the IP forwarding network 522 'The telephone number from the connection to the subscriber exchange 511 is &quot; TN-2, and the active machine 51 0, when the telephone number "TN-Γ' is required to connect to the telephone As mentioned above, the continuation request arrives at the subscriber exchange 513 and passes the letter transfer function of the subscriber exchange 513. The aforementioned continuation request is via the relay exchange, the NNI interface communication circuit 52H, the gateway 52b, the IP transfer network 522, and the media. Router 5 2 7 and phone 5 3 0.

又’公眾電話交換網515的加入者交換機51 4 —2與IP轉 送網522的閘道52卜2係以UNI介面通信電路524-2接續,將 接,續至公眾電話交換網515之加入者交換機513的電話號碼 為” TN-1”的電話機520,做為電話號碼” TN —丨”接續至接續 IP轉送網的媒體路由器527,從接續至加入者交換機511The switch 51 4-2 of the subscriber of the public telephone exchange network 515 and the gateway 52 of the IP transfer network 522 are connected by the UNI interface communication circuit 524-2 and will be connected to the subscribers of the public telephone exchange network 515. The telephone number 520 of the exchange 513 is the telephone 520 of the "TN-1", and the telephone number "TN — 丨" is connected to the media router 527 connected to the IP forwarding network, and connected to the subscriber switch 511.

1245997 五、發明說明(168) 之電話號碼為Π T N - 2,’的電話機5 1 0,對電話號碼&quot;τ N - 1&quot;電 話呼叫接續要求時,前述接續要求到達加入者交換機5 j 3 ,透過加入者交換機513的著信轉送機能,前述接續要求 係經由加入者交換機51 4-2、UNI介面通信電路524-2、閘 道52卜2、IP轉送網522、媒體路由器527,到達電話機 530 ° 1 2 ·進行由公眾電話網之電話轉送的第丨2實施例: &lt;&lt;準備〉〉 .1245997 V. Description of the invention (168) The phone number is Π TN-2, 'the phone 5 1 0, when the phone number &quot; τ N-1 &quot; is required for the phone call connection, the aforementioned connection request reaches the subscriber exchange 5 j 3 Through the letter transfer function of the joiner switch 513, the aforementioned connection request reached the telephone via the joiner switch 51 4-2, the UNI interface communication circuit 524-2, the gateway 52b, the IP transfer network 522, and the media router 527. 530 ° 1 2 · The second embodiment of telephone transfer from the public telephone network: &lt; &lt; Preparation >〉.

在圖185中,540係IP轉送網,541至545係網點裝置, 546-1至546-5係中繼裝置(路由器),55〇及554係”包含電 路情報的閘道ff ’ 5 5 1、5 5 2、5 5 3係閘道。此等網點裝置、 中繼裝置及閘道係經由具有各種I p封包轉送機能的通信電 路’直接或是經由前述中繼裝置間接地被接續。555至556 係公眾電話交換網(PSTN),557至5 66係交換機,570至573 係電話機’ 59 7及598係電話機,57 6至578係具有網路-網In Figure 185, 540 series IP forwarding network, 541 to 545 series branch devices, 546-1 to 546-5 series relay devices (routers), and 550 and 554 series "Gateway containing circuit information ff '5 5 1 , 5 5 2, 5 5 3 series of gateways. These branch devices, relay devices and gateways are connected directly or indirectly through the aforementioned relay device through communication circuits with various IP packet transfer functions. 555 To 556 are Public Telephone Switching Networks (PSTN), 557 to 5 are 66 switches, 570 to 573 are telephones' 59 7 and 598 are telephones, 57 6 to 578 are network-network

路介面(NNI)的通信電路,580至581係具有使用者—網路介 面(UNI)的通信電路,583係具有IP封包轉送機能的通信電 路’584及585係IP轉送網輸入電路表,586至59〇係1?轉送 網輸出電路表。591係媒體路由器。593至594係電話號碼 伺服器’其經由通信電路被接續至路由器5 4 6 — 1或是路由 器546-3。接續至NNI通信電路的閘道55〇、554分別被授與 用以從公眾電話交換網側識別之信號局碼及用以從丨p轉送 網5 4 0識別的I P位址。 包含電路情報的閘道5 5 0上被授與通信事業者識別碼NNI communication circuit, 580 to 581 are communication circuits with user-network interface (UNI), 583 are communication circuits with IP packet transfer function '584 and 585 are IP transfer network input circuit tables, 586 To 5900 series 1? Transfer network output circuit table. 591 is a media router. 593 to 594 are telephone numbers. The server 'is connected to the router 5 4 6-1 or the router 546-3 via a communication circuit. The gateways 55 and 554 connected to the NNI communication circuit are respectively given a signal office code for identification from the public telephone exchange network side and an IP address for identification from the p transfer network 540. The telecommunication operator identification code is given to the gate 5 5 0 containing circuit information

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第172頁 1245997 五、發明說明(169) 包含電路情報的閉道554上被授與通信事業識別 的〇uv 。閘道551上被授與信號局碼&quot;#2222&quot;,閘道552 ^電路580側之入口上被授與電話號碼&quot;〇3_4444_4〇〇〇 备電活號碼伺服器593至594提示電話號碼時,具有回 :I t此電話號碼之閘道的IP位址或是具有此電話號碼的 的1p”的機能,1p轉送網輸出電路表 電节_碼ί τ;:對ΐ於則㉛閘道或媒由器戶斤有的全部 06 - 3333 - 4444丨丨 092 - 555 - 6666 丨丨 07-3333-4444π 093-555-6666丨丨 &quot;㈣⑴-⑽電=7二電:號碼為 电居機5 71的電話號碼為 Φ 電話機572的電話號碼為 電話機597的電話號碼為 電話機598的電話號碼為 其經由各通信電路被接續至公眾電 話交換網555或556内部的任_個$\ 眾 電話號碼&quot; 045-m-8888&quot;,話機573具有 路由器591。 其絰由通k電路被接續至媒體 圖186係例示IP轉送網輪入電路表584 行記錄的情況中,受信端電話 合在弟 0000^6-9999-9999^^:. ^ ^06-0000- 的閘道的區段是NNI,閘道的;,二以,續通信電路 此例中,該閉道為55!。第5=^ = ^&quot;#2222&quot;。在 1丁的δ己錄也一樣。又,A筮9 行’受信端電話號碼的範圍A ,,n 〇 〇 ”。一,的電話機】為用09二°0:^ 區段為UNI,接續閘道的電話於 / β電路的閘道之 就碼顯不為03-4444-4000&quot;2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 172 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (169) Ouv, which is authorized to communicate on the closed road 554 containing circuit information. The signal office code "# 2222" is granted on the gateway 551, and the telephone number is granted on the entrance on the side of the circuit 552 ^ circuit 580. "3_4444_4 00" backup phone number server 593 to 594 reminds the telephone number At the time, it has the function of returning: It is the IP address of the gateway of this phone number or 1p "with this phone number. All the channels or media owned by the householder are 06-3333-4444 丨 丨 092-555-6666 丨 丨 07-3333-4444π 093-555-6666 丨 &quot; ㈣⑴-⑽ 电 = 7 二 电: The number is electric The phone number of the home phone 5 71 is Φ, the phone number of the phone 572 is the phone number of 597, the phone number of phone 598 is the phone number of the mobile phone which is connected to the public telephone exchange network 555 or 556 via various communication circuits. Phone number "045-m-8888", phone 573 has router 591. It is connected to the media by the k circuit. Figure 186 illustrates the case where the IP forwarding network turns into the circuit table 584. Brother 0000 ^ 6-9999-9999 ^^ :. ^ ^ 06-0000- The section of the gateway is NNI, of the gateway; Second, the communication circuit continues in this example, the closed channel is 55 !. 5 = ^ = ^ &quot;# 2222 &quot;. The same is true for δ in 1 Ding. Also, line A 筮 9 'Receiving end phone The range of numbers is A ,, n 〇 ″. First, the phone] uses the 09 °° 0: ^ section as the UNI, and the telephone connected to the gateway is in the / β circuit. The code is not 03-4444-4000 &quot;

12459971245997

至&quot; 03-4444-4099丨,的笳 hj。+ / 丨山 行的記錄、第4行的記錚也一在/二’該開道為552。第3 &amp;内_勺入、/亲也一樣。P轉送網輸入電路表585 的内合包含與ip轉送網輸人電路表584同樣的内容。 圖187係例示IP轉送網輸出電路表58 行記錄的情況中,受信端電㈣碼的Μ從内4在第1 06:00 00-0000:至&quot;06_9999_9999&quot;的電話機上,用以接續 通#電路的閘道(GW)或媒體路由器(MR)接續至^轉送網, GW或MR的IP位址·係顯示為” 1〇. 24〇 24〇丨&quot;至&quot;ι〇. 24〇. 24〇To &quot; 03-4444-4099 丨, 笳 hj. + / 丨 The record of the mountain line and the record of the fourth line are also on the / two '. The opening is 552. The 3rd & inner_should be the same. The internal combination of the P transfer network input circuit table 585 contains the same content as the ip transfer network input circuit table 584. Figure 187 illustrates the case where the 58 lines of the output circuit table of the IP forwarding network are recorded. The M of the receiving party's electronic code is from the 4th to the 10th 06:00 00-0000: to "06_9999_9999" for the connection. #The gateway (GW) or media router (MR) of the circuit is connected to the ^ transfer network, and the IP address of the GW or MR is displayed as "10.2.24〇24〇 丨" to "quot.ι〇. 24〇 .24〇

255”,第2行的記錄也一樣。Ip轉送網輸出電路表587至. 590的内容係包含與^轉送網輸出電路表586相同的情報。 &lt;〈電話機間的通信接續控制——1〉&gt; 從圖185係例示從電話號碼為” 〇3-nil —2222”的發信 端的電話機570,對電話號碼為” 〇6_3333_4444&quot;的受信端 之電話機571的電話接續。圖188所示的59〇 —i係表示公眾 電話交換網555内部的電話接續,5 90-2係表示IP轉送網 5 4 0内部的電活接續,5 9 0 - 3係表示公眾電話交換網5 5 6内 部的電話接續。參照圖1 8 8及圖1 8 9加以說明。 從電話機570撥號π〇〇χγ 一〇6 - 3333 - 4444&quot;進行電話呼出 時(圖188的步驟J01),交換機557確認呼出(步驟j〇2),交 換機5 5 7使用刚述撥號情報包含的通信事業識別碼 ’’0 0ΧΥ”,找出接續至包含被授與”〇〇Χγ”的電路情報的閘道 550之交換機558,將前述撥號時取得的發信端電話號碼 ”03-11 U-2222” 及”〇〇χγ-〇6-3333-4444” 傳送至交換機 558(步驟J03)。然後,交換機558將發信端電話號碼255 ", the same is the record in the second line. The IP transfer network output circuit tables 587 to 590 contain the same information as the ^ transfer network output circuit table 586. &lt; <Control of communication connection between telephones-1> &gt; From FIG. 185, it is exemplified that the telephone from the telephone 570 of the sender with the telephone number "〇3-nil-2222" is connected to the telephone 571 of the receiver with the telephone number "〇6_3333_4444". The 590-i shown in FIG. 188 indicates the telephone connection in the public telephone switching network 555, the 5 90-2 indicates the electrical connection in the IP forwarding network 540, and the 590--3 indicates the public telephone switching network. 5 5 6 Internal telephone connection. Description will be made with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. When dialing π〇〇χγ 〇 -3333-4444 from telephone 570 &quot; to make an outgoing call (step J01 in Fig. 188), switch 557 confirms the outgoing call (step j〇2), and switch 5 5 7 uses the information contained in the dialing information just described. Communication business identification code "0 0χΥ", find the switch 558 connected to the gateway 550 containing the circuit information of "00〇γ", and send the telephone number of the sender obtained at the time of dialing "03-11 U -2222 "and" 〇〇χγ-〇6-3333-4444 "are transmitted to the switch 558 (step J03). Then, the switch 558 sends the telephone number of the sender.

1245997 五、發明說明(丨7〗) __ ’’03-i m-2222&quot;及受芦 — 包含電路情報的間道55〇( ^驟06-3333-4444”傳送給 550參照包含電路情報的閘道55〇 )卸包含電路情報的閘道 表584,以受信端電話機的電話浐°的IP轉送網輸入電路 ,亦即做為用以將通信電路接庐①馬做為參數(parameter) ” 06-3333-4444”的電話機 ^ ^言端電話號碼 顧介面,得知做為信號局n存取情報,間道具有 並送回給交換機558(步驟^ ^局碼係&quot;#2222&quot;, 續至信號局碼為&quot;#2222&quot;的H、f &gt;二人,乂換機558尋找接 到交換機559,將包含故=t交換機’在此例中係找 存取情報的信號局‘# 程序取得之對開道的 mm&quot;及發信端電話號碼&quot;omn一 2222及又仏鳊電話號碼”〇6 —3333 換機559 (步驟j06)。 的脣報轉运給父 交換機559經由NNI通信電路577將發信端電話號碼 、、— 1 1 1 卜2222’’、受信端電話號碼,,06-3333-4444” 轉 送至#號局碼為” #2222,,的閘道551 (步驟J07)。閘道551形 成包含透過前述程序取得的送信端”〇3_im—2222”、受信 端電話號碼” 06-3333-4444π之ip封包。IP封包的送信端Ip 位址係被授與閘道551 (閘道551本身知道)的IP位址,受信 端IP位址係用以接續通信電路的通信對象處,在本例中為^ 閘道554的IP位址” ι〇· 24 0· 240· Γ ,從閘道551内部的(圖 187的)IP轉送網輸出電路表586,以受信端電話機的電話 號碼做為參數,亦即使用對應於受信端電話號碼 ” 06-3333 - 4444” 的 IP 位址之一的 ”ι〇·240·240·1”。前述閑1245997 V. Description of the invention (丨 7〗) __ ''03 -i m-2222 &quot; and Shoulu—the circuit containing circuit information 55〇 (^ Step 06-3333-4444 ”is transmitted to 550 with reference to the gate containing circuit information Road 55〇) Unload the gateway table 584 containing circuit information, and use the IP transfer network of the telephone at the receiving end to input the circuit, that is, use it to connect the communication circuit ① as a parameter ”06 -3333-4444 "phone ^ ^ end phone number Gu interface, learned that as a signal station n to access information, the channel has and sent back to the switch 558 (step ^ ^ Office code system &quot;# 2222 &quot;, continued To H, f &gt; the signal station code is &quot;# 2222 &quot;, the changer 558 looks for the switch 559 and will include the switch 'in this example, the signal station for accessing information'. The program obtained the opposite mm &quot; and the sender's phone number &quot; omn-2222 and the phone number "〇6-3333 to exchange 559 (step j06). The lip report is transferred to the parent switch 559 via NNI communication Circuit 577 will send the phone number of the sender,-1 1 1 2222 ", the phone number of the recipient, 06-3333-4444 "Transfer to the gateway # 551 with the office code" # 2222, "(step J07). The gateway 551 forms the sender terminal" 03-im-2222 ", which contains the telephone number of the receiver 06-3333-4444π IP packet. The IP address of the sending end of the IP packet is the IP address granted to the gateway 551 (the gateway 551 knows itself), and the IP address of the receiving end is used to communicate with the communication circuit. The target location, in this example, is the IP address of gateway 554 "ι〇 · 24 0 · 240 · Γ, from the IP transfer network output circuit table 586 inside the gateway 551 (Fig. 187) to the receiving end telephone As the parameter, that is, "ι〇 · 240 · 240 · 1" which is one of the IP addresses corresponding to the phone number of the trusted end "06-3333-4444".

Η 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第175頁 1245997 五、發明說明(172) 道551,取代找出閘道554的IP位址的手續,從閘道551送 出向電話號碼伺服器593詢問用以接續具有受信端電話號 碼&quot;0 6-333 3-4444”的電話機之閘道的IP位址之π詢問IP封 包”,可得到並使用電話號碼伺服器593的回答(選擇)。 在前述的交換機的機能中,π步驟J04n及”步驟J05n可 使用電話交換網的共通線信號方式•交易機能部的訊息。 根據前述被形成的I P封包係由閘道5 5 1被送出,經過 路由器546-1、電話管理伺服器549-1(步驟J08),再經過 路由器546-1、路由器546-5、電話管理伺服器549-5(步驟 J09),經過路由器546-5、閘道554 (步驟J10),經過NNI通 信電路578,到達交換機562 (步驟J11)。前述IP封包 包含發信端電話號碼” 03-1 1 1 1 -222 2',、受信端電話號碼 ’丨 06-3333-44441' 〇 接著’包含發信端電話號碼” 0 3-1 1 1 1 -2222,1、受信端 電店號碼&quot;〇 6 - 3 3 3 3 - 4 4 4 4π的呼叫設定要求被轉送至交換機 561(步驟J12),接收前述呼叫設定要求的交換機56ι將呼 叫設定要求的確認通知送回給交換機557 (步驟J14至步驟 J20)。其次,交換機561呼出電話機571 (步驟J13),在將 電話機哞出中送回交換機561時(步驟J22),交換機561將 受信端電話機571的呼出中通知送信端電話機57〇(步驟 J23〜步驟J3〇)。電話機57ι離鉤時,表示電話通信開始的 IP封包被通知送信端電話機570 (步驟J32至步驟J40),電 話通信開始。 如上述’電話機5 7 0與電話機5 7 1間的終端間通信接續Η 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 175 1245997 5. Description of the invention (172) Channel 551, instead of finding out the IP address of gateway 554, sent from gateway 551 to telephone number server 593 for inquiry You can obtain and use the answer (selection) of the telephone number server 593 by connecting π to the IP packet with the IP address of the gateway of the telephone with the telephone number of the receiving end "0 6-333 3-4444". Among the functions of the aforementioned exchange, π steps J04n and "step J05n" can use the common line signal method of the telephone exchange network and the information of the transaction function department. According to the foregoing, the IP packet formed is sent out through the gateway 5 5 1 and passes through Router 541-1, telephone management server 541-1 (step J08), and then pass through router 541-1, router 546-5, telephone management server 549-5 (step J09), pass through router 546-5, gateway 554 (Step J10), via the NNI communication circuit 578, to the switch 562 (Step J11). The aforementioned IP packet contains the sender's phone number "03-1 1 1 1 -222 2 ', and the recipient's phone number' 丨 06-3333 -44441 '〇 followed by' including the sender's phone number '0 3-1 1 1 1 -2222,1, the recipient's store number &quot; 〇6-3 3 3 3-4 4 4 4π call forwarding request is forwarded To the switch 561 (step J12), the switch 56i receiving the call setting request sends a confirmation notification of the call setting request to the switch 557 (step J14 to step J20). Next, the switch 561 dials out the phone 571 (step J13), When the telephone is sent back to the switch 561 (step J22), the switch 561 notifies the sender's phone 57o (step J23 to step J3〇) of the outgoing call from the sender's phone 571 (step J23 to step J3〇). When the phone 57 goes off the hook, the IP packet indicating the start of telephone communication is notified to the sender's phone 570 (step J32 Go to step J40), the telephone communication starts. As described above, the communication between the terminals between the telephone 5 7 0 and the telephone 5 7 1 is continued.

五、發明說明(173) 2制的程序結束,可進行電話機57。與電話機57ι間的通 釋放= 二電:機57°送出電話的呼叫 呼叫釋放步驟J42),從交換機557將 , 、、Ό束通知送回至電話機570(步驟J43)。接 用在父換機557、交換機蘭、替πι «ρ» 549-1、雷^田間祕卜電話管理飼服器 換Ifi丨ί 伺服器549_5、閘道554、交換機562、交 =二、東Λ機571間依序傳送接收呼叫釋放的通知與啤 放、,,°束的通知,實施接續的釋出(步驟J44至J59)。 ,前述步驟的交換機或電話管理飼服器上 制貧料相當於共通線信號的接續控制訊息,例如=9控5. Description of the invention (173) The procedure of the second system is completed, and the telephone 57 can be performed. Call release with phone 57m = second call: phone 57 ° sends out a call call release step J42), from the switch 557, the, ,, and beam notifications are returned to the phone 570 (step J43). Connected to the parent switch 557, the switch blue, replace the «ρ» 549-1, and replace the field manager phone management server with Ifi 丨 ί server 549_5, gateway 554, switch 562, traffic = two, east The Λ machine 571 sequentially transmits the notification of receiving the call release, the notification of the beer release, and the ° bundle, and implements the subsequent release (steps J44 to J59). The above steps of the switch or the telephone management feeder are used to control the feed line equivalent to the connection control signal of the common line signal, for example, 9 control

:自 17 、自J36、J5°、151係分別相當於IAM訊息、ACM 吼心、CPG訊息、ANM訊息、REL訊息、RLC訊息。 對以上的”電話機間的通信接續控制一丨,,摘要如下。 亦即,以I P轉送網做為中繼網,接續公眾電話交換網 =2電話機間的通信接續控制方法,送信端電話機使用送 k端電活號碼、通信事業者識別碼及受信端電話號碼發 呼’在透過通信事業者碼特定的j p轉送網側閘道中,經由 參照π到IP轉送網内部的輸入電路表”,取得用以接續Ip轉 送網的輸入閘道之信號局碼。在輸入閘道中,以受信端電 話號碼做為參數,透過參照該閘道内的&quot;到〗p轉送網外部 的輸出電路表”,取得用以從Ip轉送網内部將通信電路接 續到公眾電話交換網的輸出閘道的丨p位址,對前述取得的 IP位址’轉送包含發信端電話號碼及受信端電話號碼的J p: Since 17, since J36, J5 °, and 151 are equivalent to IAM message, ACM roar, CPG message, ANM message, REL message, RLC message. The above control of the communication connection between telephones is summarized as follows. That is, the IP transfer network is used as a relay network, and the public telephone exchange network = 2 communication connection control method between telephones. The k-terminal electric number, carrier identification code, and telephone number of the receiving end call "in the JP forwarding network gateway specified by the telecommunication operator code, by referring to π to the input circuit table inside the IP forwarding network". The signal office code of the input gateway following the IP transfer network. In the input gateway, take the telephone number of the receiving end as a parameter, and by referring to the output circuit table outside the "to p transfer network outside the gateway", get the communication circuit from the IP transfer network to the public telephone exchange. The IP address of the output gateway of the network, to the IP address obtained above, is forwarded to J p including the phone number of the sender and the phone number of the receiver.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第177頁 1245997 五、發明說明(174) 封包給輸出閘道。在輸出閘道中,根據前述接收的丨p封包 所包含的發信端電話號碼及受信端電話號碼,向公眾電話 交換網進行發呼,經由交換機轉送至受信端電話。 做為前述其他的方法,&quot;丨p轉送網外部的輸出電話情 報”係詢問電話號碼伺服器,由前述電話號碼伺服器回答 ° 1Ρ轉送網内部的輸入電路情報”係I ρ轉送網外部上具有 ΝΝ I通信電路的閘道之信號局碼,”丨ρ轉送網外部的輸出電 路情報lf係I Ρ轉送網外部上具有通信電路的閘道的丨ρ位 址。 〈〈電話機間的通信接續控制--2&gt;&gt; ^ 參照圖1 9 0及圖1 9 1加以說明。 從電話號碼為’’ 〇 3 - 1 1 1 1 - 2 2 2 2,,的發信端之電話機5 7 0 ’到電話號碼為,’ 〇 9 2 - 5 5 5 - 6 6 6 6,,的受信端的電話機5 7 2的 電話接續。當從電話機570撥號輸入,,〇〇χυ-〇92-555-6666” 並要求電話接續時(圖19〇之步驟κ〇1)交換機557應答(步驟 Κ02)。交換機557使用包含於前述被撥號輸入的情報中之 通k事業者識別碼’’ 〇 0 X Υ π,找出接續至包含被授與〇 X γ „ 的電路情報之閘道550的交換機558,將前述撥號輸入時取 得的發信端電話號碼&quot;03- 1 1 1 1 -222 2&quot;及” 00ΧΥ-092-555- 6666”傳送至交換機558(步驟κ〇3)。 φ 交換機558將發信端電話號碼” 〇3-1 1 1 1 —2222π及受信 端電話號碼’’ 〇 9 2 - 5 5 5 - 6 6 6 6π傳送給包含電路情報的閘道 550 (步驟Κ04),包含電路情報的閘道55〇係參照包含電路 情報的閘道550内部的IP轉送網輸入電路表584,找出i個2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 177 1245997 V. Description of the invention (174) The packet is sent to the output gateway. In the output gateway, a call is made to the public telephone exchange network based on the sender's phone number and the receiver's phone number contained in the aforementioned received p packet, and the call is forwarded to the receiver's phone via the switch. As the other method mentioned above, "quoting the output telephone information outside the transfer network" is to inquire the telephone number server, and the telephone number server answers the input circuit information inside the 1P transfer network "to the outside of the transfer network. The signal office code of the gateway with the ΝΙ communication circuit, "丨 the output circuit information outside the transfer network lf is the address of the gateway with the communication circuit on the outside of the IP transfer network. 〈〈 communication connection between telephones Control--2 &gt; &gt; ^ Refer to FIG. 190 and FIG. 911 for explanation. From the telephone number '' 〇3-1 1 1 1-2 2 2 2, the originating telephone 5 7 0 'To the phone number is,' 〇9 2-5 5 5-6 6 6 6 ,, the telephone connection of the phone 5 7 2 of the receiving end. When dialed from the phone 570, 〇〇χυ-〇92-555-6666 When the telephone connection is required (step κ〇1 in FIG. 19), the switch 557 answers (step K02). The switch 557 finds the switch 558 connected to the gateway 550 containing the circuit information granted 〇 γ γ by using the communication operator identification code '' 〇0 X Υ π included in the information that was dialed in. The sender's telephone number "03- 1 1 1 1 -222 2" and "00ΧΥ-092-555-6666" obtained during the aforementioned dial entry are transmitted to the switch 558 (step κ〇3). The switch 558 will send Letter phone number "〇3-1 1 1 1 -2222π and phone number of the receiver" 〇9 2-5 5 5-6 6 6 6π is sent to the gateway 550 containing the circuit information (step K04), including the circuit information The gate 55 is the input circuit table 584 of the IP forwarding network inside the gate 550 containing circuit information, and finds i

1245997 五、發明說明(175) 電话號碼11 0 3 - 4 4 4 4 - 4 Ο Ο Οπ以做為用以將通信電路接續至受 信端電話號碼為&quot;092-555-6666”的電話機之閘道的存取情 報,並通知交換機558 (步驟Κ05)。其次,交換機558尋找 接續至閘道電話號碼π 03-4444-400 0”的交換機,在此例中 係找出交換機5 6 0,將包含做為透過前述程序取得的對閘 道之存取情報的電話號碼’’ 03-4444-4000Π、發信端電話號 碼’’ 03-1 1 1 1 -2222”及受信端電話號碼,,〇 92-555-6666,,之情 報轉送至交換機560 (步驟Κ06)。交換機560係將,,03-1111 - 2222π及受信端電話號碼”〇92-555-6666,,經由UNI通信電 路580轉送至被授與電話號碼”〇3-4444-4000,,的閘道552( 步驟Κ07)。閘道552將接收到這2個電話號碼報告交換機 560(步驟Κ08)。1245997 V. Description of the invention (175) The telephone number 11 0 3-4 4 4 4-4 Ο Ο Οπ is used to connect the communication circuit to the telephone set of the receiver's telephone number "092-555-6666" The gateway ’s access information and informs the switch 558 (step K05). Second, the switch 558 looks for the switch connected to the gateway phone number π 03-4444-400 0 ”, in this case, find the switch 5 6 0, Will include the phone number `` 03-4444-4000Π, the sender's phone number '' 03-1 1 1 1 -2222, and the recipient's phone number as access information to the gateway obtained through the aforementioned procedure, 〇92-555-6666, the information is transferred to the switch 560 (step K06). The switch 560 is, 03-1111-2222π, and the telephone number of the receiving end "〇92-555-6666, through the UNI communication circuit 580 To the gateway 552 to which the telephone number "03-4444-4000" was granted (step K07). The gateway 552 will receive these two phone numbers and report to the switch 560 (step K08).

•當閘道552接收前述情報時,檢索(圖187之)ΙΡ轉送網 輸出電路表587,以受信端電話號碼” 〇92-555 —6666&quot;做為 參數,取得用以接續通信電路的通信對象處之閘道,在此 例中為閘道553的IP位址” ι〇· 240. 2 41· Γ,形成包含前述 取知的發信端電話號碼” 〇3-1 1 1 1 -2 222π及受信端電話號碼 092-555-6666”的IP封包。前述形成的Ιρ封包之送信端ιρ 位址係被授與閘道552 (閘道552本身知道)的ip位址,受信 端ip位址係前述取得的閘道553之1?位址,,1〇· 24〇· 24i. i,,口 再者,在前述閘道552找出閘道553的1?位址的手續 由閘道552向電活就碼伺服器594提示受信端電話 〇92-555 - 6666” ,並送出詢問閘道553的1?位址的值之^詢• When the gateway 552 receives the aforementioned information, it retrieves (Fig. 187) the IP transfer network output circuit table 587, and uses the telephone number of the receiving end "〇92-555-6666" as a parameter to obtain the communication object for connecting the communication circuit. Gateway in this example is the IP address of gateway 553 "ι〇 · 240. 2 41 · Γ, forming the sender's phone number containing the previously learned" 〇3-1 1 1 1 -2 222π And the recipient's phone number 092-555-6666 "IP packet. The sending end ιρ address of the aforementioned Iρ packet is the IP address of the gateway 552 (the gateway 552 itself knows), and the IP address of the receiving end is the address 1 of the gateway 553 obtained earlier, 1 〇 · 24〇 · 24i.i, I, again, find out the 1? Address of the gateway 553 in the aforementioned gateway 552, the gateway 552 to the telecom server 594 to remind the recipient phone 〇92- 555-6666 "and send a query asking for the value of the 1? Address of gateway 553

1245997 發明說明(176) 問IP封包”(圖190之步驟KK1),而可由電話號碼伺服器594 得到回答(圖190之步驟ΚΚ2),或是將電話號碼伺服器594 的内容預先轉送至閘道552的内部,可用做”轉送網輸出 電路表(但疋,步驟ΚΚ1與ΚΚ2係可選擇性的)。 其次’從前述形成的閘道5 5 2被送出的丨ρ封包係經過 網點裝置543及路由器546_2,再經過電話管理伺服器 5^9-2(步驟Κ09),經由路由器546 — 3、路由器546一4、電話 官理伺服器549-4(步驟K10),經過網點裝置545而到達閘 道553(步驟K11)。其次,閘道553將包含發信端電話號碼 03 -1111-2222”及受信端電話號碼&quot;〇92 — 555-6666”的情報 經過UNI通信電路581通知交換機563(步驟K12)。交換機 5 63將接收這2個電話號碼回信告知閘道553 (步驟K13)。 交換機5 6 3將包含發信端電話號碼” 〇 3 _丨丨丨丨__ 2 2 2 2 &quot;及 受#知電話號碼092-555-6666&quot;的呼叫設定要求轉送給交 換機564 (步驟K14),交換機564將接受前述呼叫設定要°求 回信告知交換機557 (步驟K16〜步驟K22)。交換機564呼出 電話機572 (步驟K1 5),電話機5 72將電話呼出中通知交換 機564(步驟K24)。交換機564將呼出受信端電話機5?2通知 送信端電話機570 (步驟K25〜步驟K32)。電話機被通知離 時(步驟K 3 3 )’電活通#開始可能通知被通知至送信端σ 話機570 (步驟Κ35〜步驟Κ42),開始電話通信。 &quot; 如上述,電話機570與電話機5 72間的終端間通作接浐 控制的程序結束,可進行電話機57〇與電話機572間^通二1245997 Invention description (176) Ask for IP packet "(step KK1 in Fig. 190), and can be answered by the telephone number server 594 (step KK2 in Fig. 190), or the content of the telephone number server 594 is forwarded to the gateway in advance Inside the 552, it can be used as a "transmission network output circuit table (however, steps KK1 and KK2 are optional). Secondly, the 丨 ρ packet sent from the gateway 5 5 2 formed above passes through the network device 543 and the router 546_2, and then passes through the telephone management server 5 ^ 9-2 (step K09), and then passes through the router 546-3, the router 546 1-4. The telephone management server 549-4 (step K10) passes through the network point device 545 and reaches the gateway 553 (step K11). Next, the gateway 553 will send the information including the sender's phone number 03 -1111-2222 "and the recipient's phone number" 〇92-555-6666 "to the switch 563 via the UNI communication circuit 581 (step K12). The switch 5 63 will reply to the gateway 553 by receiving the two telephone numbers (step K13). The switch 5 6 3 forwards the call setting request including the sender's phone number "〇3 _ 丨 丨 丨 丨 __ 2 2 2 2 &quot; and the recipient phone number 092-555-6666 &quot; to the switch 564 (step K14 ), The switch 564 will accept the aforementioned call setting request and inform the switch 557 (step K16 to step K22). The switch 564 dials out the phone 572 (step K1 5), and the phone 5 72 notifies the switch 564 of the outgoing call (step K24). The switch 564 notifies the calling telephone 570 of the calling terminal 5 to the calling telephone 570 (steps K25 to K32). When the telephone is notified of departure (step K 3 3), the call of the telecom ## may be notified to the sending terminal σ telephone 570 (Step K35 to Step K42), start telephone communication. &Quot; As mentioned above, the procedure for the connection control between the terminal 570 and the terminal 5 72 is completed, and the communication between the terminal 57 and the terminal 572 can be performed.

1245997 五 發明說明(177) 釋放送出從電^的呼叫 換機557、交換機56〇、閉道阳、電話 =收在交 電話管理伺服器549-4、閘道553、交換吕機5/3、、 、電話機572間的呼叫釋放的通知 叫:、機564 ’進行電話呼叫的釋放(步驟Κ46〜κ6^釋放結束的通知 從接電二?之通信接續控制-2&quot; ’為用以 ==交==進行通信的as 二轉其不同點主要為”ρ轉送網日内之部通上接入續電控^ I:轉送網外部上具伽通信電路1245997 Fifth invention description (177) Release call sender 557, switch 560, closed road, telephone = send call management server 549-4, gateway 553, switch 5/3 The notification of call release between telephone 572 is called, telephone 564 'Release of telephone call (step K46 ~ κ6 ^ Notification of the end of release from receiving call 2? Communication connection control-2 &quot;' is used for == 交== The second point of communication is as follows. The main difference is that "ρ is connected to the continuous power control on the transfer network within the day. I: The communication network is equipped with a Gamma communication circuit.

部的輸出電路情報&quot;係在1?轉送網外有 通#電路的閘道的I P位址。 /、有UN I &lt;〈電話機間的通信接續控制--3&gt;&gt; 咖Λ此接當/電,卿 550要喪ίΐΛ,父換機558向包含電路情報的閘道 ΐΛ夺’在道550内部使用1Ρ轉送網輸入電路表584 接Ϊ至寻信號局碼&quot;#2222&quot;以做為用以將通信電路 道的存,碼為&quot;〇93_555 _6666&quot;的電話機之對閘 清報,在此,交換機559與閘道551係經過1通The output circuit information of the ministry is the IP address of the gateway with the #circuit outside the 1? Transmission network. / 、 With UN I &lt; <Control of communication connection between telephones--3 &gt; &gt; Λ 接 当 电 电 / ,, Qing 550 will be lost 父 父, the father changed 558 to the circuit containing the circuit information 夺 夺 rob '' 550 internally uses a 1P transfer network input circuit table 584 to connect to the signal hunting code "# 2222" as the communication circuit, the code is "〇93_555 _6666" to clear the phone gate, Here, the switch 559 and the gate 551 pass through

1245997 五、發明說明(178) 信電路5 77被接續。 其次,閘道551詢問閘道551内部的IP轉送網輪出電路 表586或是電話號碼伺服器593,以取得用以將通信電路接 續至具有受信端電話號碼’’ 〇 9 3 - 5 5 5 - 6 6 6 6 ’’的電話機之閘道 553的ip位址,形成包含發信端電話號碼”〇3 —lln〜2222,· 及受信端電話號碼” 0 93-555-6666π的IP封包。前述形成的 ίΡ封包從閘道551被送出,經過路由器546-1、電話管理伺 服器549-1、路由器546-1、路由器546-5、電話管理伺服 器549-5、路由器546-5、網點裝置545,到達閘道553。1245997 V. Description of the invention (178) The signal circuit 5 77 is connected. Next, the gateway 551 inquires the IP forwarding network turn-out circuit table 586 or the telephone number server 593 inside the gateway 551 to obtain the communication circuit for connecting to the telephone number with the trusted end '' 〇9 3-5 5 5 -The IP address of the gateway 553 of the 6 6 6 ”telephone set forms an IP packet containing the sender's phone number“ 〇3 —lln ~ 2222, · and the recipient's phone number ”0 93-555-6666π. The aforementioned P packet is sent out from the gateway 551, and passes through the router 541-1, the telephone management server 541-1, the router 547-1, the router 546-5, the telephone management server 549-5, the router 546-5, and the branch. Device 545 arrives at gate 553.

一 之後,包含從IP封包得到的發信端電話號碼&quot;03-ΐιπ - 2222” f受信端電話號碼” 〇93-555 —6666”的終端間接續情 由交換機563及交換機566,到達電話機598,電話機 與電話機598間的終端間通信接續控制結束。 通信㈤Y接續控制——3&quot;與&quot;電話機間的 入雷敗拌* 類似,其對比點為π ιρ轉送網内部的輸 之信號係在1p轉送網外部上具有nni通信電路的閘道 網外部^:右^二轉送網外部的輸出電路情報π係在1p轉送 «電』通信電路的閘道之1p位址。 電f機間的通信接續控制一—4»After that, the terminal containing the sender's phone number obtained from the IP packet &quot; 03-ΐιπ-2222 "f the recipient's phone number" 〇93-555-6666 "indirectly continued from the switch 563 and switch 566 to the phone 598 The control of the communication connection between the terminals between the telephone and the telephone 598 is ended. Communication ㈤Y connection control-3 &quot; is similar to the failure of the telephone *. The contrast point is that the signal of the internal transmission of the π ρρ transmission network is at Gateway network with nni communication circuit on the outside of the 1p relay network ^: Right ^ The output circuit information π outside the relay network is at the 1p address of the gateway of the 1p relay «electricity" communication circuit. Connection Control 1—4 »

4足電話號石馬兔η n q 電話號碼為u—2222”的發信端電話機57q到 接續。 〜4444&quot;的受信端之電話機597的電話 在此例中,你上 4444”,要求電咭接綠話機5 70撥號輸入,,οοχγ —07-3333 - ‘,父換機5 5 8要求包含電路情報的閘4-foot phone number Shima Tu η nq Phone number 57-2 from the sender to the receiver. ~ 4444 &quot; Phone 597 from the receiver on the receiver. In this example, you call 4444. Green telephone 5 70 dial-up input, οοχγ —07-3333-', the parent switch 5 5 8 requires a gate containing circuit information

1245997 五、發明說明(179) 道550,在閘道550内部使用IP轉送網輸入電路表584,交 換機558取得電話號碼” 03-4444-40 00”以做為用以將通信 電路接續至受信端電話號碼為” 07-3333-4444,,的電話機之 對閘道的存取情報。其次,閘道5 5 2詢問閘道5 5 2内部的I P 轉送網輸出電路表587或是電話號碼伺服器594,以取得用 以將通#電路接續至具有受信端電話號碼„ 〇 7 — μ Μ _ 4 4 4 4π ,的電5舌機之閘道5 5 4的I Ρ位址’形成包含發信端電話號碼 &quot;03-11Π-2222”及受信端電話號碼” 07-3333 —4444”的1{)封 包。前述形成的IP封包從閘道552被送出,經過網點裝置 ❿ 543、路由器546-2、電話管理伺服器549- 2、路由器546-2 、路由器546-1、路由器546-5、電話管理伺服器549-5、 路由器546-5,到達閘道554。 ” 之後,包含從1 p封包得到的發信端電話號碼 03-1 m-2222”及受信端電話號碼” 〇7 —3333 —4444,,的終端 間接續情報經由交換機562及交換機565,到達電話機597 ,電話機570與電話機597間的終端間通信接續控制結束。1245997 V. Description of the invention (179) Channel 550, using the IP transfer network to enter the circuit table 584 inside the gateway 550, the switch 558 obtains the telephone number "03-4444-40 00" as the connection circuit for the communication end The telephone number is "07-3333-4444," and the access information of the gateway to the gateway. Secondly, the gateway 5 5 2 asks the gateway 5 5 2 for the internal IP forwarding network output circuit table 587 or the telephone number server. 594, to obtain the IP address of the gateway 5 5 4 used to connect the communication circuit to the telephone terminal „〇7 — μ Μ _ 4 4 4 4π ′ to form a transmission message including End phone number &quot; 03-11Π-2222 "and the receiving end phone number" 07-3333-4444 "1 {) packet. The IP packet formed above is sent out from the gateway 552 and passes through the branch device ❿ 543, the router 546- 2. Phone Management Server 549- 2. Router 546-2, Router 541-1, Router 546-5, Phone Management Server 549-5, Router 546-5, and reach gateway 554. " The phone number of the sender 03-1 m-2222 obtained by the packet and the phone number of the receiver "〇7 3333-4444 ,, INFORMATION CONTINUED indirectly via the terminal 562 and switches the switch 565, reached to the telephone 597, the inter-terminal between telephone 570 and the telephone communication connection control 597 ends.

以上的”電話機間的通信接續控制—4&quot;與,,電話機間的 通信接續控制--1”類似,其對比點為”丨卩轉送網内部的輸 入電路情報π係在ip轉送網外部上具有UNI通信電路的閘道 之電話號碼,” IP轉送網外部的輸出電路情報&quot;係在ιρ 網外部上具有NNI通信電路的閘道之lp位址。 疋 &lt;&lt;電話機間的通信接續控制—5&gt;&gt; 從電話號碼為”03-liU—2222”的發信端電話機57〇到 接續至媒體路由器591之電話機573 (但是,電話號碼為 1245997The above "communication connection control between telephones—4" is similar to the communication connection control between telephones--1 ", the comparison point is" 丨 卩 The internal input circuit information of the transfer network π is provided on the outside of the IP transfer network. The telephone number of the gateway of the UNI communication circuit, "The output circuit information outside the IP transfer network" is the lp address of the gateway with the NNI communication circuit outside the ιρ network.疋 &lt; &lt; Control of communication connection between telephones—5 &gt; &gt; From sender telephone 57 with telephone number “03-liU-2222” to telephone 573 connected to media router 591 (however, telephone number 1245997

045-777-8888”的電話機)的電話接續。 從電话機570撥號輸入” 00XY-045-777-8888&quot;要求電' 接續時(圖192的步驟L01),交換機557應答(步驟l〇2),交 換機557使用前述撥號情報包含的通信事業識別碼” 〇〇χγ” ,找出接續至包含被授與”00ΧΥ”的電路情報的閘道55〇之 交換機558,將前述撥號時取得的發信端電話號碼 ” 0 3-1 1 1 1 -22 22” 及&quot;0 0ΧΥ-045-777-8888” 傳送至交換機 558(步驟L03)。&lt; ' 交換機5 5 8將發信端電話號碼&quot;〇 3 - 1 1 1 1 — 2 2 2 2π及受传 端電話號碼” 045-777-8888”傳送給包含電路情報的閘&amp;道口 550 (步驟L04),閘道550係參照IP轉送網輸入電路表584, ’ 找出電話號碼” 03-4444-4000”以做為用以將通信電路接續 至受信端電話號碼為,,045-777-8888”的電話機之對閉道^ 存取情報,並通知交換機558(步驟L05)。其次,交換機 558找出接續至閘道電話號碼” 03 — 4444 —4〇〇〇”的交換機 5 6 0,將包含做為透過前述程序取得的電話號碼 &quot; 03-4444-4000”、發信端電話號碼”〇3-lln-2222,,及受信 端電話號碼π 045-777-8888”之情報轉送至交換機56〇(步驟 L06)。交換機560係將”〇3- 1 1 1 1 -22 22”及受信端電話號碼 &quot; 045-777-8888&quot;經由通信電路580轉送至被授與電話^碼 , &quot;03-4444-4000”的閉道552 (步驟L〇7)。閘道552將接^到 至少這2個電話號碼回信告知交換機56〇 (步驟L〇8)。 其次’閘道552形成包含透過前述通信接續控制取得 的發信端電話號碼”03 —Η H —2222”及受信端電話號碼045-777-8888 "telephone) phone connection. Dial" 570XY-045-777-8888 "from phone 570 and enter" requires electrical connection "(step L01 in Figure 192), switch 557 answers (step 102) ), The switch 557 uses the communication business identification code “〇〇χγ” included in the aforementioned dialing information to find the switch 558 connected to the gateway 55 which contains the circuit information to which “00χΥ” has been granted. The phone number of the sender "0 3-1 1 1 1 -22 22" and "0 0ΧΥ-045-777-8888" are transmitted to the switch 558 (step L03). &Lt; 'The switch 5 5 8 will send the phone number of the sender &quot; 〇3-1 1 1 1-2 2 2 2π and the recipient's telephone number "045-777-8888" are transmitted to the gate 550 (step L04) containing the circuit information. The gate 550 refers to the IP forwarding Enter the circuit table 584, 'Find the telephone number "03-4444-4000" as the pair of closed circuits for connecting the communication circuit to the telephone number of the receiving end, "045-777-8888" ^ Access Information and notify the switch 558 (step L05). Next, the switch 558 finds the switch 5 6 0 connected to the gateway phone number “03 — 4444 — 4 00”, and will include the phone number “03-4444-4000”, send the letter The phone number of the remote terminal “〇3-lln-2222, and the phone number of the trusted terminal π 045-777-8888” are transferred to the switch 56 (step L06). The switch 560 will send “〇3- 1 1 1 1 -22 22 "and the telephone number of the receiving end" 045-777-8888 "are forwarded via the communication circuit 580 to the closed channel 552 of the authorized telephone number," 03-4444-4000 "(step L07). The gateway 552 will reply to at least these two telephone numbers and inform the exchange 56 (step L08). Next, the “gateway 552” includes the sender's phone number “03 —Η H — 2222” and the recipient's phone number obtained through the aforementioned communication connection control.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第184頁 1245997 五、發明說明(181) -- &quot;045-777-8888&quot;的IP封包。IP封包之送信端Ip位址係被授 與間道552(閘道552本身知道)的IP位址,受信端1?位址係 用以接續通信電路的通信對象處,在本例中係媒體路由器 591之IP位址&quot;&quot;,從IP轉送網輸出電路表 出受信端電話號碼&quot;045-777-8888,,以做為參數。 從前述形成的由閘道5 5 2被送出的電話呼叫接續要求 之IP封包係經過網點裝置543、路由器546-2、電話^理飼 服器549-2、路由器546-2、路由器546-3、電話管理&amp;伺服 器549-3、路由器546-3、網點裝置545而到達媒體路由器 591 (步驟L10〜L1 6)。媒體路由器591將接收前述電話呼^ 接續要求回信告知交換機557(步驟L2〇〜步驟L25),w進而, ^媒體路由器591呼出電話機573(步驟L18),而電話機回 信時(步驟L27),媒體路由器591將受信電話呼出中通知送 信端電話機570 (步驟L29〜步驟L35)。當電話機573離鉤時、 (步驟L36),將表示電話通信開始可能的應答通知送信端 電活機570 (步驟L38〜步驟L44),電話通信開始。 如上述,電話機570與電話機5 73間的終端間通信接續 ,制的程序結束,可進行電話機57〇與電話機573間的通、 在電話的通信結束中,從電話機570送出電話的呼叫 釋放之通知給交換機557 (步驟L45),從交換機557送回呼 叫釋放結束的通知給電話機57〇 (步驟U6)。透過此呼叫釋 及呼叫釋放結束的通知,電話機57〇與交換機557 間的接續被釋放。接著’利用依序傳送接收在交換機5572049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 184 1245997 V. Description of the invention (181)-&quot; 045-777-8888 &quot; IP packet. The IP address of the sending end of the IP packet is the IP address granted to the gateway 552 (known by the gateway 552 itself). The address of the receiving end 1? Is the communication target for connecting the communication circuit. In this example, it is the media. The IP address of the router 591 &quot; &quot;, from the output circuit of the IP forwarding network, lists the telephone number of the receiving end &quot; 045-777-8888 as a parameter. The IP packets for the call connection request sent from the gateway 5 5 2 formed from the foregoing pass through the network device 543, the router 546-2, the telephone admin server 549-2, the router 546-2, and the router 546-3. , Phone management &amp; server 549-3, router 546-3, and branch office device 545 to reach the media router 591 (steps L10 to L16). The media router 591 will receive the aforementioned telephone call ^ and notify the exchange 557 of the connection request response (step L20 to step L25), and further, the media router 591 calls the telephone 573 (step L18), and when the telephone returns a message (step L27), the media router 591 notifies the sender telephone 570 of the outgoing call (step L29 to step L35). When the telephone 573 is disconnected (step L36), the sender 570 (step L38 to step L44) is notified of the response indicating that the telephone communication is possible (step L38 to step L44), and the telephone communication is started. As described above, the communication between the terminals of the telephone 570 and the telephone 5 73 is continued, and the system is terminated. The communication between the telephone 57 and the telephone 573 can be performed. When the communication of the telephone is completed, the call release notification from the telephone 570 is released. To the switch 557 (step L45), the call release completion notification is returned from the switch 557 to the telephone 57 (step U6). Through this call release and notification of the end of the call release, the connection between the telephone 57 and the exchange 557 is released. Then ’using sequential transmission and reception at the switch 557

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第185頁 1245997 五、發明說明(182) 、交換機5 6 0、閘道5 5 2、電話管理伺服器5 4 9 - 2、電話管 理伺服器5 4 9 - 3、媒體路由器5 9 1、電話機5 7 3間的呼叫釋 放的通知與呼叫釋放結束的通知,實施接續的釋放(步驟 J47〜J60) 〇 摘要以上的’’電話機間之通信接續控制—-5,,,與&quot;電話 機間之通#接續控制--1π相似,其主要的對比點為電話接 繽處為接績至媒體路由器的電話機。 &lt; &lt;電話機間之通zf言接續控制—_ 6 &gt; &gt; 參照圖193加以說明。540- 1係ip轉送網,550-1及 554- 1係閘道’ 1 〇〇〇係「輸入電路情報伺服器」,其他的 裝置、電話機或公眾交換網等與圖185所示的裝置或電話 機等相同’以相同的標號標示之。本實施例係取代(圖1 85 之)包含電路情報的閘道55〇,改為使用包含ip轉送網輸入 電路表之輸入電路情報伺服器1〇〇〇,取代圖188之步驟J〇4 與步驟J05,使用圖194之步驟j〇4x與步驟J〇5x。 輸入電路情報伺服器1 0 0 0係被授與可從公眾電話交換 網555識字的通信事業者識別碼” 〇〇χγ&quot;,與用以從公眾電 話交換網5 5 5識別的信號局碼。從電話號碼為” 3 —丨1丨j 一 2&lt;222”的發信端電話機570到電話號碼為” 〇6-3333-4444,,的 受信端之電話機571之電話接續。參照圖194加以說明。 從電話機570撥號輸入” οοχγ —0 6 —3333 —4444&quot;進行電話 呼出時(圖194的步驟j01),交換機557確認呼出(步驟 J02),父換機557使用前述撥號情報包含的通信事業者識 別碼’’00ΧΥ”,找出接續至被授與&quot;〇〇χγ,,的輸入σ電路情報伺2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 185 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (182), Switch 5 60, Gateway 5 5 2. Telephone Management Server 5 4 9-2, Telephone Management Server 5 4 9- 3. Media router 5 9 1. Notification of call release and notification of call release between telephones 5 7 3, implement continuous release (steps J47 ~ J60) 〇 The summary of `` communication connection control between telephones-5 ,,, Similar to ”电话机 之 之 通 # 接 控制 --1π”, the main point of comparison is that the phone is connected to the media router. &lt; Communication between telephones zf connection control-_ 6 &gt; &gt; A description will be given with reference to FIG. 193. 540-1 series IP transfer network, 550-1 and 554-1 series gateway '10000 series "input circuit information server", other devices, telephones or public exchange networks, etc. with the device shown in Figure 185 or Telephones and the like are identified by the same reference numerals. This embodiment replaces (Figure 1 85) the gateway 55, which contains circuit information, and uses an input circuit information server 100, which includes the input circuit table of the ip transfer network, instead of steps J04 and 188 in Figure 188. Step J05 uses step j04x and step J05x of FIG. 194. The input circuit information server 1 0 0 is a carrier identification code "〇χγ" that is literate from the public telephone exchange network 555, and a signal office code for identifying from the public telephone exchange network 5 5 5. From the telephone number 570 of the sender of the phone number "3-1-1-2 &lt; 222" to the telephone number of the receiver 571 of the phone number "06-3333-4444", the connection is continued. This will be described with reference to FIG. 194. Dial-in from the telephone 570 "οοχγ —0 6 —3333 —4444" When making a phone call (step j01 in FIG. 194), the switch 557 confirms the call (step J02). Code "00χΥ" to find the input σ circuit information server that continues to be granted &quot; 〇〇χγ,

12459971245997

五、發明說明(183) ,器1 0 0 0之交換機5 58,將前述撥號時取得的發信端電咭 唬碼,1 0 3- 1 1 1 1 -2222&quot;及” 00ΧΥ-〇6-3 333-4444,,傳送至交拖 機558(步驟J03)。交換機558將發信端電話號碼”03 —Uu 2222”及受信端電話號碼” 〇6_3333_4444”傳送給輸入電 情報伺服器1 00 0 (步驟J〇4x),輸入電路情報伺服器1〇〇〇 參照輸入電路情報伺服器1 0 0 0内部的IP轉送網輸入電路肩 5 84 ’以受信端電話機的電話號碼做為參數,亦即做為用、 ,將通信電路接續至受信端電話號碼&quot;〇6 —3333 —4444,,V. Description of the invention (183), the switch 5 58 of the device 1 0 0, the sender's electric bluff code obtained during the aforementioned dialing, 1 0 3- 1 1 1 1 -2222 &quot; and "00ΧΥ-〇6- 3 333-4444, and send it to the tractor 558 (step J03). The switch 558 sends the sender's phone number “03 —Uu 2222” and the recipient's phone number “〇6_3333_4444” to the input electronic information server 1 0 0 0 ( Step J〇4x), the input circuit information server 100 refers to the internal circuit of the IP relay network input circuit of the input circuit information server 1 0 0 0 ', taking the telephone number of the trusted telephone as a parameter, that is, doing For use, connect the communication circuit to the telephone number of the receiving end &quot; 〇6 —3333 —4444,

f機之對閘道的存取情報,閘道具有關!介面,得知做為&lt; 信號局的閘道之信號局碼係,,#2222 ”,並送回給交換機…、 558(步驟j〇5x)。以下,透過實施前述步驟j〇6〜,進右 電話機570與電話機571間的終端間通信接續控制程序,^ 進行電話機570與電話機571間的通話。同樣地,可 2機570與電話機572、597、598、573之間的終端間通^ ^接續控制的程序。 〈〈網點裝置的實施例&gt;&gt; 有關在前述終端間通信接續控制方法中使用的網點粟 置’參照圖1 9 5加以說明。f machine access information to the gateway, the brake props related! Interface, it is known that the signal office code of the gateway of the "signal office, # 2222", and returns it to the switch ..., 558 (step j〇5x). Next, by implementing the foregoing step j〇6 ~, Enter the connection control program for communication between terminals on the right telephone 570 and telephone 571, and ^ make a call between telephone 570 and telephone 571. Similarly, it can communicate between terminals 570 and telephones 572, 597, 598, and 573 ^ ^ Procedure for connection control. "<Example of network point device> &gt; The network points used in the aforementioned method for controlling communication between terminals are described below with reference to FIG. 195.

^ς540 — 1係1P轉送網,543_丨及545 —1係網點裝置,552-1 ^5544/閘道,547一1及548-1係中繼裝置,分別透過通 。一路被接續。閘道5 5 2 - 1上被授與I ρ位址” a,,,閘道 1上被授與1P位址”b”,進而在網點裝置543-1的閘道 側的與通信電路的接點上被授與丨p位址&quot;X,,,網點裝 5 — 1的閘道554- 1側的與通信電路的接點上被授與Ip位^ ς 540 — 1 series 1P transfer network, 543_ 丨 and 545 — 1 network point device, 552-1 ^ 5544 / gateway, 547-1 and 548-1 series relay devices, respectively through communication. Along the way. The gateway 5 5 2-1 is given an I ρ address "a,", and the gateway 1 is given a 1P address "b", and furthermore, on the gateway side of the branch point device 543-1, the communication circuit The IP address is given to the contact, and the IP address is given to the contact of the 5-5 gate 554-1 and the communication circuit.

12459971245997

址&quot;y ’’。5 4 3 - 1 T係保存前述4組i p位址&quot;a&quot;、” bπ、” χ 的位址管理表。545-IT係保存前述4組1?位址” b”、 n y Xπ的位址管理表。 從閘道552-1被送至閘道554 — 1的11)封包{^1( — 1到達、, 信端I Ρ位址為’’ a&quot;、受信端I ρ位址為” b ”的網點裝置5 4 ^送 時’參照位址管理表5 4 3 - 1 T。在本例,内部情報” a ”、 nbn、lfx”、y&quot;之中,由於前面3個1?位址,,a„、,,b,f、,,^ IP封包的PCK-1内部的3個IP位址一致,取出位址管理X表與 543-1内部的其他ip位址” y”,進行授與”標頭的Ip膠囊 化,形成新的IP封包PCK-2。PCK-2係從網點裝置543-1被 送出至通信電路,經過路由器547—i,到達網點聿《I 置545-1,在此移除透過前述Ip膠囊化被授與的Ip標頭,、 進行逆膠囊化,回復IP封包PCK-3,然後經過通信電路被 送至閘道554-1。位址管理表545-1被使用於與前述反方 法的I P封包傳送。 網點裝置543-1及545-1具有進行IP膠囊化與逆膠囊化 的機能,因此保存位址管理表。閘道的〗p位址係登錄保存 於網點裝置5 4 3 - 1及5 4 5 - 1的位址管理表内。 &lt;〈網點裝置的其他實施例&gt;&gt; 參照圖196,說明網點裝置543-2及545-2的其他實施❿ 例0 540-2係IP轉送網,543-2及545-2係網點裝置,552 - 2 及554-2係閘道,547-2及548-2係中繼裝置,分別透過通 4吕電路被接續。閘道5 5 2 - 2上被授與I p位址n a ”,閘道Address &quot; y ’’. 5 4 3-1 T stores the address management table of the aforementioned four groups of IP addresses &quot; a &quot;, "bπ," χ. The 545-IT system stores the aforementioned four sets of 1? Address "b", n y Xπ address management tables. The 11) packet {^ 1 (— 1 arrives from gateway 552-1 to gateway 554-1, and the IP address of the receiving end is "a &quot; and the IP address of the receiving end is" b " The network point device 5 4 ^ Send time 'refers to the address management table 5 4 3-1 T. In this example, the internal information "a", nbn, lfx ", y &quot;, because of the first three 1? Addresses, a „,,, b, f ,,, ^ The IP addresses of the three IP addresses in PCK-1 are the same. Take out the address management X table and other IP addresses“ y ”in 543-1 and grant them. The IP of the header is encapsulated to form a new IP packet PCK-2. The PCK-2 is sent from the branch point device 543-1 to the communication circuit, and passes through the router 547-i to reach the branch point "I Set 545-1. This removes the IP header granted through the aforementioned IP encapsulation, performs inverse encapsulation, returns the IP packet PCK-3, and then is sent to the gateway 554-1 via the communication circuit. The address management table 545-1 is It is used for the IP packet transmission in the anti-method described above. The branch point devices 543-1 and 545-1 have the function of IP encapsulation and reverse encapsulation, so they maintain the address management table. The p address of the gateway is registered and saved in Outlets 5 4 3-1 and 5 4 5-1 are located in the address management table. &Lt; &lt; Other Embodiments of Branch Device &gt; &gt; Referring to FIG. 196, another implementation of the branch device 543-2 and 545-2 will be described. Example 0 540-2 series IP transfer network, 543-2 and 545-2 series branch devices, 552-2 and 554-2 series gateways, 547-2 and 548-2 series relay devices, respectively through the 4 Lu circuit Connected. Ip address na was granted on gateway 5 5 2-2, gateway

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第188頁 1245997 五、發明說明(185) 554-2上被授與IP位址&quot;b”。543-2T係保存前述IP位址” a” 的位址管理表,545-2T係保存前述ip位址” b”的位址管理 表。 從閘道552-2被送至閘道554-2的IP封包pcK-11到達送 4吕端I P位址為π a ’’、受信端I p位址為” b&quot;的網點裝置5 4 3 - 2 時’參照位址管理表5 4 3 - 2。在本例中,由於内部情報,,a ” 與I P封包P C K - 11内部的送信端之I p位址一致,若許可將 PCK-11轉送至IP轉送網540内部,是可理解的。其次, ?(:1(-11可直接變為?〇(-12。?(:1(-12係從網點裝置54 3-2被 送出至通信電路,經過路由器547-2、548-2,到達網點裝 置545-2。在此,由於PCK-12的受信端IP位址&quot;b,,被記錄於 位址管理表545-2T的内部,PCK-12直接做為PCK-13,經過 通信電路被送至閘道554-2。網點裝置543-2及545-2確認 許可收容IP封包至IP轉送網540-2内部,或可確認在ip轉 送網540-2的外部存在ip位址”bn。閘道的ip位址係登錄 保存於網點裝置543-2及545-2的位址管理表内。 以上’摘要網點裝置的機能,在本實施例中,網點裝 置從I P轉送網外部將IP封包收容至IP轉送網内部時,有授 與新的IP標頭以進行IP膠囊化的類型,及不進行IP膠囊化 的類型兩種。閘道的IP位址係被登錄保存於網點裝置的位 址管理表内。 1 3 ·控制線與聲音線分離以接續公眾電話交換網的第丨3實 施例 說明控制通信電路與聲音通信電路分離,經由丨p轉送2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 188 1245997 V. Description of the invention (185) 554-2 was granted an IP address &quot; b ". The 543-2T is the address that holds the aforementioned IP address" a " Management table, 545-2T is the address management table that stores the aforementioned IP address "b". The IP packet pcK-11 sent from gateway 552-2 to gateway 554-2 arrives at 4th end of the IP address. When π a ”and the network device 5 4 3-2 of the receiver I p address is“ b ”, refer to the address management table 5 4 3-2. In this example, due to internal information, a ”is the same as the IP address of the sender inside the IP packet PCK-11. It is understandable if PCK-11 is allowed to be transferred to the IP transfer network 540. Secondly, ? (: 1 (-11 can be directly changed to? 〇 (-12.? (: 1 (-12 is sent from the network device 54 3-2 to the communication circuit, passes through the routers 547-2, 548-2, and reaches the network Device 545-2. Here, since the IP address of the trusted end of PCK-12 &quot; b, is recorded in the address management table 545-2T, PCK-12 is directly used as PCK-13, and is transmitted through the communication circuit. Send to the gateway 554-2. The branch devices 543-2 and 545-2 confirm permission to house the IP packets inside the IP forwarding network 540-2, or they can confirm that an IP address exists outside the IP forwarding network 540-2 "bn. The gateway's ip address is registered and stored in the address management table of the branch point device 543-2 and 545-2. The above summarizes the functions of the branch point device. In this embodiment, the branch point device sends an IP packet from the outside of the IP transfer network. When contained within the IP forwarding network, there are two types of IP headers that are granted new IP headers and types that are not IP encapsulated. The IP address of the gateway is The network apparatus stored in the log bit address management table 13 and the sound control lines line-separated connection of the public switched telephone network implementation Shu 3 illustrates the control circuit and the communication circuit separating voice communication, via transfer Shu p

2049-3793-PF » RAY.ptd 第189頁 1245997 五、發明說明(186) 網及公眾電話交換網(PSTN )的電話機間通信接續控制方 法。 在圖197中’1500係IP轉送網,1501係公眾電話父換 網,1 5 0 2係具有膠囊化機能的閘道,1 5 0 3係中繼閘道, 1 5 0 8及1 5 2 0係電話機,1 5 1 8係中繼交換機,1 5 1 9係加入者 交換機,1 5 0 5係透過共通線信號方式的控制通信電路, 1 5 0 6係聲音通信電路。1 5 0 7係控制I P通信電路,1 5 〇 9係聲 音IP通信電路。1 544及1 547係網點裝置,1 570係代理電話 伺服器,1 57 1係電話管理伺服器,1 572係電話號碼伺服 器,1 573係表管理伺服器,1521、1 522、1 523、1524分別 為路由器。1513係中繼控制部(STP),1516係聲音控制部 〇 圖197所示的IP轉送網的内部資源(裝置或伺服器)的 一部可對應於圖128或圖170所示的IP轉送網的内部資源之 一部,電話機1 508、媒體路由器1 560、網點裝置1 544、 代理電話伺服器1 570、電話管理伺服器1571、電話號碼 伺服器1 572、表管理伺服器1 573、網點裝置1 547係分別對 應於電話機1 208、媒體路由器1201、網點裝置1 244、代 理電話伺服器1 270、電話管理伺服器1271、電話號碼伺服 器1272、表管理伺服器1 273、網點裝置1 247。 &lt;&lt;中繼控制部的機能〉〉 在本發明中,共通線信號方式係以點(P〇 i n t )表示信 號局,以點碼(Point Code)表示信號局碼。中繼閘道1503 内部的中繼控制部1 5 1 3,從公眾電話交換網1 5 〇 1看來為共 I晒2049-3793-PF »RAY.ptd Page 189 1245997 V. Description of the invention (186) Network and public telephone exchange network (PSTN) telephone communication connection control method. In Figure 197, '1500 is an IP forwarding network, 1501 is a public telephone parent switching network, 1502 is a gateway with an encapsulation function, 1503 is a relay gateway, 1508 and 1 5 2 0 series telephones, 15 1 8 series relay switches, 15 1 9 series subscriber exchanges, 150 5 series control communication circuits through common line signal method, and 150 6 series voice communication circuits. 15 0 7 series control IP communication circuit, 150 9 series audio IP communication circuit. 1 544 and 1 547 series outlets, 1 570 series agent telephone server, 1 57 1 series telephone management server, 1 572 series telephone number server, 1 573 series meter management server, 1521, 1 522, 1 523, 1524 are routers. 1513 series relay control unit (STP), 1516 series sound control unit. A part of the internal resources (device or server) of the IP transfer network shown in FIG. 197 may correspond to the IP transfer network shown in FIG. 128 or 170. Of internal resources, telephone 1 508, media router 1 560, branch office device 1 544, agent telephone server 1 570, telephone management server 1571, telephone number server 1 572, meter management server 1 573, branch office device The 1 547 series correspond to the telephone 1 208, the media router 1201, the branch point device 1 244, the agent telephone server 1 270, the telephone management server 1271, the telephone number server 1272, the meter management server 1 273, and the branch point device 1 247, respectively. &lt; &lt; Function of the relay control section &gt; In the present invention, the common line signal method is to indicate a signal office by a point (Point), and to indicate a signal office code by a point code. The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 inside the relay gateway 1503 appears to the public telephone exchange network 1 50 1 as a total of 1

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第190頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 190 1245997

通線信號方式的中繼信號局(STP),被授與信號局位址 PC 3 。中、%控制部丨5丨3管理信號局位址管理表1 5 2 7 (圖 208 ),檢索此信號局位址管理表,可取得公眾電話交換網 1501内的交換機之信號局位址。中繼閘道15〇3將寫入至在 NNI通信電路1 505上傳送的信號單元内之電路號碼,fcic-n,, 或信號鏈接選擇”SLS-η”的產生規則規定為與公眾電話交 換網1 5 0 1相同的規則。The trunk signal station (STP) of the line signal mode is given the signal station address PC 3. The middle and% control department 丨 5 丨 3 manages the signal office address management table 1 5 2 7 (Figure 208). Searching this signal office address management table can obtain the signal office address of the switch in the public telephone exchange network 1501. The relay gate 1503 will write the circuit number, fcic-n, or signal link selection "SLS-η" in the signal unit transmitted on the NNI communication circuit 1 505, to specify the exchange with the public telephone Net 1 50 0 1 same rules.

中繼控制部1513被授與IP位址,’GW03”,將被儲存於從 控制IP通信電路1 507被送來的IP封包之電話呼叫控制的各 種訊息(jAM、ACM、CPG、ANM、REL·、RLC等)變換成儲存於 共通線信號方式之信號單元的各種訊息(IAM、ACM、cp(j、 ANM、REL、RLC等),並傳送給控制通信電路工5〇5。又, 反方向地,中繼控制部丨5丨3具有將被儲存於從控制通信電 路1 505被送來的信號單元之電話呼叫控制用的各種訊息, 變換成儲存於IP封包之訊息,並傳送給控制”通信電路的 ,機能1被授與中繼控制部1513的1]?位址&quot;GW〇3,,或信號局 PC*-3係被授與中繼閘道15〇3的1?位址或信號局碼。 &lt;&lt;聲音控制部的機能〉〉The relay control unit 1513 is given an IP address, 'GW03', and will store various messages (jAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL) in the call control of the IP packet sent from the control IP communication circuit 1 507. ·, RLC, etc.) are converted into various messages (IAM, ACM, cp (j, ANM, REL, RLC, etc.) stored in the signal unit of the common line signal method, and transmitted to the control communication circuit worker 505. Directly, the relay control section 5 5 has various messages for telephone call control stored in the signal unit sent from the control communication circuit 1 505, and converts them into messages stored in the IP packet, and transmits them to the control. "In the communication circuit, function 1 is assigned to the relay control unit 1513's address" GW03, or the signal station PC * -3 is assigned to the relay gateway 1503 Address or signal station code. &Lt; &lt; Function of the sound control section 〉〉

聲音控制部1516將被儲存於從聲音IP通信電路15〇9送 來的ip封包之聲明,變換成可轉送公眾電話交換網15〇1内 的形式,例如適合ISDN的一次群介面(pRI、23B + D)的資料 通信路的聲音碼框,並傳送給聲音通信電路15〇6。又, 反f*向地,聲音控制部1 5 1 6具有將從公眾電話交換網1 5 0 1 的聲音通信電路15〇6被送來的聲音碼框變換成Ip封包形The voice control unit 1516 converts the statement stored in the ip packet sent from the voice IP communication circuit 1509 into a form that can be forwarded to the public telephone exchange network 1501, such as a primary group interface suitable for ISDN (pRI, 23B) + D) The sound code frame of the data communication path, and transmits it to the sound communication circuit 1506. In addition, in the direction of f *, the voice control unit 15 16 has a voice code frame sent from the voice communication circuit 1506 of the public telephone switching network 15 0 1 into an IP packet shape.

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第191頁 1245997 五、發明說明(188) &quot; -- 式,並傳送至聲音IP通信電路丨509的機能。聲音控制部且 有用以在内部傳送接收聲音I P封包的丨p位址,提供媒體 徑接續表的設定。 &lt;〈電話號碼伺服器〉〉 當電話號碼伺服器1 572詢問電話號碼時,回答用以 具有受到詢問的電話號碼之電話機進行通信的丨p位址。在 電話通信處為中繼閘道的情況中,回答被授與中繼閘道的 IP位址的值,在·電話通信處為具有膠囊化機能的閘道的情 況中,回答接續至閘道處的媒體路由器的丨p位址。 &lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉 從電話機1 508對電話機1 520進行電話通信。在本實施 例中,代理電話伺服器1 570的IP位址” EA81”係向Ip轉送網 I 500的使用者公開,媒體路由器156〇保存前述1{)位址 ”EA81”。當拿起電話機1 508的受話器時,呼出信號被傳給 媒體路由器1 560 (圖198之步驟N01),媒體路由器156〇確認 電話呼出(步驟N 0 2 )。其次,媒體路由器丨5 6 〇以送信端j p 位址做為媒體路由器”“的^位址&quot;EA1 ”,以受信端1{&gt;位 址做為代理電話伺服器1 570的外部Ip位址&quot;EA81”,形成包 含做為送信端的電話機15〇8之電話號碼” ΤΝ—Γ,、做為受信 端的電話機1 520之電話號碼” ΤΝ-2”、做為送信端之電話^ ,| 508用以傳送電話聲明的UDp埠號碼”5〇〇6,,、及附加情報 II Info-2”的IP封包153〇(圖199),並傳送給網點裝置1 544( 步驟N03)。IP封包153〇的酬載部分為UDp封包,其送信端 及受信端埠號碼皆為’,5 0 6 0 π。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 191 1245997 V. Description of the invention (188) &quot;-and transfer it to the function of the voice IP communication circuit 509. The voice control unit also has a p address for transmitting and receiving voice IP packets internally, and provides settings for the media connection table. &lt; &lt; Phone number server &gt; &gt; When the telephone number server 1 572 inquires the telephone number, it answers the pp address for communication with the telephone having the telephone number in question. In the case where the telephone communication station is a relay gateway, answer the value of the IP address assigned to the relay gateway, and in the case where the telephone communication office is a gateway with a capsule function, the answer is continued to the gateway. The IP address of the media router at. &lt; &lt; Continuation stage >〉 Telephone communication is performed from the telephone set 1 508 to the telephone set 1 520. In this embodiment, the IP address “EA81” of the proxy telephone server 1 570 is disclosed to the users of the IP forwarding network I 500, and the media router 1560 stores the aforementioned 1 {) address “EA81”. When the receiver of the telephone set 1 508 is picked up, the outgoing signal is transmitted to the media router 1 560 (step N01 in FIG. 198), and the media router 156 confirms the outgoing call (step N 0 2). Secondly, the media router 5 6 〇 uses the sending end jp address as the media router "" ^ address &quot; EA1 ", and the receiving end 1 {&gt; address as the external IP address of the proxy telephone server 1 570 The address &quot; EA81 "forms the telephone number" TN-Γ "which contains the telephone set 1508 as the sending end, the telephone number" TN-2 "which is the telephone set 1520 of the receiving end, and the telephone as the sending end ^, | 508 is used to transmit the IP packet 153 (Figure 199) of the UDp port number "5006," and the additional information II Info-2 declared by the telephone, and transmits it to the branch device 1 544 (step N03). The IP packet The payload of 153 is a UD packet, and the port numbers of the sender and the receiver are both ', 5 0 6 0 π.

1245997 五、發明說明(189) 網點裝置1544輸入外部IP封包1530,適用在其他實施 例說明的I P膠囊化技術,形成内部I P封包丨5 3丨(圖2 〇 〇 ),1245997 V. Description of the invention (189) The outlet device 1544 inputs the external IP packet 1530, which is applicable to the IP encapsulation technology described in other embodiments to form an internal IP packet 5 3 丨 (Figure 2 00).

將IP封包1531傳送給内部IP位址為,,ΙΑ8Γ的代理電話伺服 器1 570 (步驟N04)。代理電話伺服器1 570當接收IP封包 1 5 3 1時,形成將I p封包1 5 3 1内部包含的I p位址’’ E A1、IA1 、ΕΑ81、ΙΑ81Π包含於酬載部分的ip封包1532-1(圖201), 並傳送給電話管理伺服器1571(步驟N05)。在此,代理電 話伺服器1 5 7 0係使用預先保存的電話管理伺服器1 5 71的IP 位址π IA91π。 &lt;&lt;CIC管理表的形成〉〉 電話管理伺服器1 5 7 1接收I P封包1 5 3 2 -1,在電話管理 伺服器1 5 7 1管理的C I C管理表的記錄上,寫入電話管理伺 服器1571的IP位址,,ΙΑ9Γ、程序區段” I ΑΜΠ、送信端電話 號碼ΠΤΝ-Γ、受信端電話號碼” ΤΝ—2”、媒體路由器1 560之 外部IP位址’’ ΕΑΓ及内部IP位址&quot;IΑ Γ、IP封包1 532-1内部 的聲音通信用埠號碼&quot;5006&quot;、代理電話伺服器1 570的外部 IP位址’’ E A 8 Γ’及内部I P位址’· IA 8 Γ’ 、及寫入時刻(年月日 時分秒)f,St-2ff (圖202之CIC管理表1571-1)。 其次,電話管理伺服器1 5 71將詢問受信端電話號碼 ΠΤΝ-2Π的IP封包1 53 2-2(圖203 )顯示於電話號碼伺服器 1 572 (步驟N06),電話號碼伺服器1 572將接續到電話機 1520的裝置類的ip位址&quot;GW03n儲存於ip封包1532-3(圖204 )並且回答(步驟N07)。再者,接續到電話機^?!)的裝置類 為中繼閘道1 5 0 3内部的中繼控制部1 5 1 3。The IP packet 1531 is transmitted to the proxy telephone server 1 570 whose internal IP address is IA8Γ (step N04). When the agent telephone server 1 570 receives the IP packet 1 5 3 1, it forms an IP address that contains the IP packet 1 5 3 1 ”E A1, IA1, Ε81, Ι8181, and the ip packet included in the payload part. 1532-1 (FIG. 201), and transmits it to the telephone management server 1571 (step N05). Here, the agent telephone server 1570 uses the IP address π IA91π of the telephone management server 1 71 which is saved in advance. &lt; &lt; Formation of CIC management table 〉〉 The telephone management server 1 5 7 1 receives the IP packet 1 5 3 2 -1 and writes the telephone number on the record of the CIC management table managed by the telephone management server 1 5 7 1 IP address of the management server 1571, IA9Γ, program section "I ΑΜΠ, sender's phone number ΠΝ-Γ", receiver's phone number "TN-2", external IP address of the media router 1 560 ΕΑΓ and Internal IP address &quot; IA Γ, IP packet 1 532-1 internal voice communication port number &quot; 5006 &quot;, external IP address of agent telephone server 1 570 `` EA 8 Γ 'and internal IP address' · IA 8 Γ ′ and the writing time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) f, St-2ff (CIC management table 1571-1 in Figure 202). Second, the telephone management server 1 5 71 will ask the telephone number of the trusted terminal ΠΤΝ -2Π's IP packet 1 53 2-2 (Figure 203) is displayed on the telephone number server 1 572 (step N06), and the telephone number server 1 572 stores the IP address of the device connected to the telephone 1520 &quot; GW03n in IP packet 1532-3 (Figure 204) and answer (step N07). Furthermore, the device connected to the phone ^ ?!) Internal relay gateway 1503 the relay control unit 1513.

HI I 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第193頁 1245997 五、發明說明(190) &lt;&lt;電路號碼的管理〉〉 電話管理伺服器1 571將從電話號碼伺服器1 572取得的 中繼控制部151 3的IP位址” GW03n追加至CIC管理表1571-1 (圖202 ),進而對於電話管理伺服器1571的^位址” IA91&quot; 及中繼控制部1513的IP位址” GW03,’ ,根據電話管理伺服器 1571規定的規則,決定CIC號碼nCIC-2,,,並寫入至CIC管 理表。其顯示於C 1C管理表1571-2(圖205)的記錄。 接著電話管理伺服器1571參照CIC管理表1571-2(圖 205),從 IP 封包 1532-1(圖 201)形成 IP 封包 1534(圖 206) (I AM封包),將I p封包1 5 3 4傳送給中繼控制部1 5 1 3 (步驟 N09)。在此,IP封包1 534的受信端ip位址為中繼控制部 1513 的 IP 位址&quot;GW03ff。 &lt;&lt;中繼控制部的動作〉〉 當中繼控制部1 5 1 3接收I P封包1 5 3 4 (圖2 0 6 )時(步驟 N09),從IP封包1 534取出送信段ip位址” IA91&quot;、受信端Ip 位址GW03”、電路號碼,’ CIC-2”、程序區段,1 IΑΜΠ、送信端 電話號碼,1 ΤΝ-Γ、受信端電話號碼” ΤΝ —2”、媒體路由器 1 560的外部ip位址&quot;EA1&quot;及内部1?位址” IA1”、聲音通^用 璋號碼5 0 0 6 、代理電話伺服器1 5 7 0的外部I p位址” £ a 81π 及内部I Ρ位址&quot;IΑ8 Γ ,做為中繼控制部1 5丨3管理的c丨c管 理表1513-1(圖207 )的記錄,與時刻”St-3” 一起寫入記錄 進而,中繼控制部1 5 1 3檢索信號局位址管理表1 $ 2 7 ( 圖2〇8),提示受信端電話機152〇的電話號碼,,TN —2”,取得HI I 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 193 1245997 V. Description of the invention (190) &lt; &lt; Management of circuit numbers >〉 Telephone management server 1 571 Relay obtained from telephone number server 1 572 The IP address “GW03n of the control unit 1513” is added to the CIC management table 1571-1 (FIG. 202), and the IP address “IA91 &quot; of the telephone management server 1571 and the IP address of the relay control unit 1513” GW03 are added. 'According to the rules specified by the telephone management server 1571, the CIC number nCIC-2, is determined and written to the CIC management table. It is displayed in the record of the C 1C management table 1571-2 (Figure 205). Then the telephone management server The router 1571 refers to the CIC management table 1571-2 (Figure 205), forms an IP packet 1534 (Figure 206) (I AM packet) from the IP packet 1532-1 (Figure 201), and transmits the IP packet 1 5 3 4 to the relay. The control unit 1 5 1 3 (step N09). Here, the IP address of the receiving end of the IP packet 1 534 is the IP address of the relay control unit 1513 &quot; GW03ff. &Lt; &lt; Action of the relay control unit &gt;> When the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 receives the IP packet 1 5 3 4 (Figure 2 06) (step N09), it takes out the IP address of the transmission segment from the IP packet 1 534 "IA91 & "Receiver IP address GW03", circuit number, 'CIC-2 ", program section, 1 IAMΠ, sender's phone number, 1 TN-Γ, receiver's phone number" TN-2 ", media router 1 560's external IP address &quot; EA1 &quot; and internal 1? Address "IA1", common voice number 5 0 0 6 and external IP address of agent telephone server 15 7 0 "£ a 81π and The internal IP address &quot; IAA8 Γ, as a record of the c 丨 c management table 1513-1 (Fig. 207) managed by the relay control unit 1 5 丨 3, is written into the record together with the time "St-3", and, The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 retrieves the signal station address management table 1 $ 2 7 (Figure 2 08), and prompts the telephone number of the receiving end telephone 1520, TN — 2 ”to obtain

1245997 五、發明說明(191) 管理電話機1 520之交換機151 9的信號局位址” PC-i 9”。再 者,中繼控制部1 5 1 3根據公眾電話交換網〗5〇〗預先決定的 規則,決定電路號碼” C I C - 3π、信號鍵接選擇&quot;s l S _ 3,,。中 繼控制部1513將中繼控制部15 13的信號局位址”pc-3,,、前 述取得的” PC-19”、前述信號鏈接選擇” SLS —3”、及前述電 路號碼” C 1C-3”,與媒體路徑識別子” mp —7π —起,寫入做 為位址接續表1 525的新的記錄,結果位址接續表係如 1525-1 所示(圖 209)。 、 接著’中繼控制部1 5 1 3形成包含前述信號局位址 fPC-3”、前述取得的” pC—19”、前述電路號碼,,CIC_3”及信 號鏈接選擇”SLS-3”、從ip封包1 534取得的訊息” IAM”、: 數” Para-2”的信號單元1 535 (圖21〇),並傳送給控制通作 電路1 50 5 (步驟N10)。 &quot; &lt;〈中繼控制部與聲音控制部的聯合動作&gt; &gt; 中繼控制部1 5 1 3將前述媒體路徑識別子&quot;Mp — 7,,、膠 化用的内部IP位址&quot;IA-1&quot;、前述媒體路由器156〇的外 位址&quot;EA1”、聲音通信用埠號碼&quot;5〇〇6”,經由情報電 1515,通知聲音控制部1516(圖211的步驟15ΐ3_υ, 控制部1516將前述通知的情報寫入以做為媒體路徑 1 528的記錄,並報告寫入結束(步驟1516_η。前述:j 徑識別子係用以識別在2電話機間的電話呼叫(接痒、 釋放)使用的聲音通信路。媒體路徑接續表1 528_丨^ H 之圯錄係顯不寫入前,而媒體路徑接續表1 528-則是顯示寫人的結果。再者,聲音控制部151“1245997 V. Description of the invention (191) Manage the signal office address "PC-i 9" of the switch 151 9 of the telephone set 1 520. In addition, the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 determines the circuit number "CIC-3π, signal keying selection" and "sl S _ 3" according to the predetermined rules of the public telephone switching network [50]. The relay control unit 1513 sets the signal office address "pc-3" of the relay control unit 15-13, the "PC-19" obtained above, the aforementioned signal link selection "SLS-3", and the aforementioned circuit number "C1C-3", Starting with the media path identifier "mp — 7π", write a new record as the address continuation table 1 525, and the resulting address continuity table is shown in 1525-1 (Figure 209). 1 5 1 3 forms a message including the aforementioned signal station address fPC-3 ”, the aforementioned“ pC-19 ”, the aforementioned circuit number, CIC_3”, and the signal link selection “SLS-3”, and the message obtained from the IP packet 1 534 "IAM", "Number of Para-2" signal units 1 535 (Figure 21〇), and transmitted to the control communication circuit 1 50 5 (step N10). &Quot; &lt; <Relay control section and sound control section Joint operation &gt; &gt; The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 uses the aforementioned media path identifier &quot; Mp-7, Internal IP address &quot; IA-1 &quot;, the external address of the aforementioned media router 1560 &quot; EA1 &quot;, and the voice communication port number &quot; 5006 &quot;, via the telephony 1515, notify the voice control unit 1516 ( In step 15ΐ3_υ of FIG. 211, the control unit 1516 writes the notified information as a record of the media path 1 528 and reports the end of writing (step 1516_η. The aforementioned: j path identification sub-system is used to identify the telephone between the two telephones. Voice communication path used for calling (itching, release). Media path continuation table 1 528_ 丨 ^ H The recording is not shown before writing, and media path continuation table 1 528- shows the results of the writer. Again Or sound control section 151 "

1245997 五、發明說明(192) =曰控制邛1516向聲音通信電路15〇6傳送聲音的邏輯通俨 電路,將該邏輯通信電路識別子送信通道··以。 Channe卜S表不),寫入以做為媒體路徑接續表1528 錄。 旧‘ &lt;&lt;交換網的動作與ACM訊息〉〉1245997 V. Description of the invention (192) = A logic communication circuit that controls 1516 to transmit sound to the sound communication circuit 1506, and identifies the logical communication circuit as a sub-sending channel ... Channe (No. S), write it as a media path to connect to Table 1528. Old ‘&lt; &lt; exchange network action and ACM message >〉

父換機1518係經由控制通信電路15〇5接收信號單元 1535(步驟N10),其次,將信號單元1 535轉送給交換機 1519(步驟Nil) “交換機1519接收信號單元1 535確認内部 ^含的受信端電話號碼”TN-2”是否可能著信,若可能著 信,則將著信通知通知電話機152〇(步驟N12),進而形成 通知信號單元1 535之受信的信號單元1 538 —丨(圖218),並 回信,前述信號單元經由交換機1518(步驟N13),到達中 繼控制部1 5 1 3 (步驟N1 4)。中繼控制部丨5丨3根據接收到的 信號單元1 5 3 8 -1的標記情報,參照位址接續表丨5 2 5 —丨(圖 2 0 9 )’取得用以形成I p封包的位址情報,形成I p封包° 1551 (ACM訊息)(圖219),並將IP封包1551傳送給電話管理 伺服器1571(步驟N1 5)。The parent switch 1518 receives the signal unit 1535 via the control communication circuit 1550 (step N10), and then transmits the signal unit 1 535 to the switch 1519 (step Nil). "The switch 1519 receives the signal unit 1 535 to confirm the internal trusted Is it possible that the end phone number "TN-2" is a letter, and if it is possible, then notify the phone 1520 (step N12) of the letter, and then form the signal unit 1 538 of the signal unit 1 535 — 丨 (Figure 218), and wrote back that the aforementioned signal unit reached the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 (step N1 4) via the switch 1518 (step N13). The relay control unit 丨 5 丨 3 according to the received signal unit 1 5 3 8 -1 tag information, refer to the address continuation table 丨 5 2 5 — 丨 (Figure 2 0 9) 'Get the address information used to form I p packets, forming I p packets ° 1551 (ACM message) (Figure 219) And transmits the IP packet 1551 to the telephone management server 1571 (step N15).

電話管理伺服器1 5 7 1從接收到的I p封包1 5 5 1取出電路 號碼n nCIC-2n及程序區段” ACMn,檢查電話管理伺服器 1571保存的C 1C管理表1571-2(圖20 5 ),找出自己的ip位址 &quot;IA91&quot;、對象的IP位址&quot;GW03”、及電路號碼&quot;cic-2&quot;的記 錄’將CIC管理表1571-2的遠§己錄的程序區分搁改寫為前 述程序區段” ACMn。接著,電話管理伺服器1571形成表示 接收前述ACM訊息的IP封包,並通知媒體路由器1 560 (步驟The telephone management server 1 5 7 1 took out the received IP packet 1 5 5 1 and took out the circuit number n nCIC-2n and the program section "ACMn", and checked the C 1C management table 1571-2 (Figure 1) held by the telephone management server 1571. 20 5), find out the record of own IP address &quot; IA91 &quot;, target IP address &quot; GW03 &quot;, and circuit number &quot; cic-2 &quot; The program section is rewritten as the aforementioned program section "ACMn. Then, the telephone management server 1571 forms an IP packet indicating the reception of the aforementioned ACM message, and notifies the media router 1 560 (step

12459971245997

N17、N18、N19)〇 &lt;〈媒體路徑接續表&gt;&gt; 在步驟N1 G結束後,中繼控制部丨5丨3將媒體路徑識別 子1?-7”添加至聲音控制部1516上,並要求1?位址與埠號 碼時(圖212之步驟1513 —2),聲音控制部1516將聲音控制&quot; 部1516形成並送出至ip轉送網15〇〇内部的聲音1?通信電路 1 5 0 9上的I P封包之膠囊化用的内部〗p位址” j A丨,,、送信端 IP位址ΠΕΑ3&quot;及UDP封包的埠號碼” 5 008π,回答給中繼控制 部1 5 1 3 (步驟1 5 1 6 - 2 )。經由媒體路徑識別子識別的聲音通 4吕路,根據在聲音控制部1 5 1 6内部授與的I ρ位址(” I a 3、 EA3、· · ’’)與埠號碼(” 5004、500 6、· · ”),可決定多 數的聲音通信路。再者,聲音控制部丨5丨6確保從交換機 1518接收的邏輯聲音通信電路,決定其識別子,,CH_y (受 信通道:以Channel-R表示),並記錄於媒體路徑接續表 1528-3(圖216)的記錄上。 中繼控制部1 5 1 3從聲音控制部1 5 1 6接收聲音控制部 1516内的内部IP位址” IA1”、送信端外部Ip位址ffEl3n ^ UDP封包的埠號碼” 5008”,決定對應於ip位址&quot;EA3”的内 IP位址” IA3”,並寫入至CIC管理表1513 -1(圖207 ),结/ Φ 變成CIC管理表15 13-2(圖217)(並且,不包含代理電=管 理伺服器的位址)。又,中繼控制部1513預先保存1個以&amp;上 的聲音控制部用的内部IP位址,以其中1個做為前述内 IP 位址π ΙΑ3Π。 &lt;&lt;CPG訊息的傳送〉〉(N17, N18, N19). 〈Media path continuation table〉 After the step N1 G is completed, the relay control section 5-7 adds media path identifiers 1 to 7 ”to the sound control section 1516. When requesting an address and port number (step 1513-2 in Figure 212), the voice control unit 1516 forms and sends the voice control unit 1516 to the internal voice of the IP transfer network 1500. The communication circuit 1 5 Internal IP address “j A 丨” for encapsulation of IP packets on 0 9 ”, IP address of sender ΠΑ3 &quot; and port number of UDP packet” 5 008π, reply to relay control unit 1 5 1 3 (Step 1 5 1 6-2). The sound identified by the media path identifier passes through Lu Lu, according to the I ρ address ("I a 3, EA3, ..." ') And the port number ("5004, 500 6, ..."), can determine the majority of voice communication channels. In addition, the sound control unit 丨 5 丨 6 ensures the logical sound communication circuit received from the switch 1518, determines its identifier, CH_y (received channel: represented by Channel-R), and records it in the media path connection table 1528-3 (Figure 216). The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 receives the internal IP address “IA1” in the sound control unit 1516 and the external IP address of the transmitting end ffEl3n ^ UDP packet port number “5008” from the sound control unit 1 5 1 6 and determines the correspondence. The internal IP address "IA3" at the ip address &quot; EA3 "is written to the CIC management table 1513 -1 (Figure 207), and the knot / Φ becomes the CIC management table 15 13-2 (Figure 217) (and, Does not include proxy server = management server address). In addition, the relay control unit 1513 stores an internal IP address for the voice control unit on &amp; in advance, one of the internal IP addresses is used as the internal IP address. π ΙΑ3Π. &lt; &lt; CPG message transmission &gt;

12459971245997

&gt;電話機1 520將電話呼出中報告交換機1519時(步驟N2〇 ),交換機1519形成並傳送通知電話呼出中的信號單元 (CPG訊息),前述信號單元經由交換機518(步驟N2i)到達 :繼控制,1513(步驟N22)中繼控制部1513根據接收到的 前述信號單元的標記情報,參照位址接續表1 525_丨(圖2〇9 ),以取付用以形成I p封包的位址情報,形成丨p封包形式 的CPG訊息1 552 (圖220 ),前述IP封包被傳送給電話管理伺 服器1571(步驟N23)。電話管理伺服器1571將前述電話呼 出中的通知,經由媒體路由器156〇,通知電話機15〇8(步 驟N25至N28)。中繼控制部1513形成前述cpg訊息時,從 C I C官理表1 5 1 3-2 (圖2 1 7 )取得聲音控制部内的送信端外部 I位址&quot;EA3”、内部IP位址” IA3”及UDp封包的埠號碼,,5〇〇8,, ’並寫入至CPG訊息1 552。電話管理伺服器1571可從接收 到的CPG封包1 552中取出外部IP位址” EA3”、内部lp位址 IA3及埠號碼π 5008π ’並寫入至管理表1571 — 2(圖205)。 &lt;&lt;ΑΝΜ訊息的傳送〉〉&gt; When telephone 1 520 reports the outbound call to switch 1519 (step N20), switch 1519 forms and transmits a signal unit (CPG message) that informs the outbound call that the signal unit arrives via switch 518 (step N2i): following control 1513 (Step N22) The relay control unit 1513 refers to the address continuation table 1 525_ 丨 (Fig. 209) according to the received tag information of the aforementioned signal unit to obtain the address information used to form the IP packet. A CPG message 1 552 (FIG. 220) is formed in the form of a p packet, and the aforementioned IP packet is transmitted to the telephone management server 1571 (step N23). The telephone management server 1571 notifies the aforementioned telephone call 1580 via the media router 1560 (steps N25 to N28). When the relay control unit 1513 forms the aforementioned cpg message, it obtains the external I address &quot; EA3 &quot; and internal IP address &quot; IA3 of the transmitting end in the voice control unit from the CIC official table 1 5 1 3-2 (Figure 2 17). ", And the port number of the UDp packet ,, 5008 ,, 'and write it to the CPG message 1 552. The phone management server 1571 can take the external IP address from the received CPG packet 1 552" EA3 ", internal lp address IA3 and port number π 5008π 'and write it to the management table 1571 — 2 (Figure 205). &lt; &lt; Transfer of ANM message >〉

其次’當電話機1520的使用者應答電話呼出時(步驟 Ν30),交換機1519形成並傳送通知應答的信號單元(ΑΝΜ訊 息),前述信號單元經由交換機1 5 1 8 (步驟ν 31 ),到達中繼 控制部1513(步驟Ν32)。中繼控制部1513根據接收到的前 述信號單元的標記情報,參照位址接續表1 525_丨(圖2〇9) ,形成I P封包形式的ANM訊息1 5 5 3 (圖2 2 1 ),I P封包1 5 5 3被 傳送給電話管理伺服器1571(步驟N33)。然後,電話管理 伺服器1 5 71將前述電話應答的通知,經由媒體路由器丨5 6 〇 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 笛】〇Q 百 ' 1245997Secondly, when the user of the telephone set 1520 answers the outgoing call (step N30), the switch 1519 forms and transmits a signal unit (ANM message) for notifying the response, and the aforementioned signal unit reaches the relay via the switch 1 5 1 8 (step v 31). The control unit 1513 (step N32). The relay control unit 1513 refers to the address continuation table 1 525_ 丨 (Fig. 209) according to the received tag information of the aforementioned signal unit, and forms an ANM message 1 5 5 3 (Fig. 2 1) in the form of an IP packet. The IP packet 1 5 5 3 is transmitted to the telephone management server 1571 (step N33). Then, the telephone management server 1 71 receives the notification of the aforementioned telephone call via the media router 5 6 0 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd flute] 0 100 '1245997

五、發明說明(195) ,通知電話機1508(步驟N 35至N38)。亦即,IP封包1554( 圖223 )從電話管理伺服器1571被送到代理電話伺服器1570 (步驟N 3 5 ),I P封包1 5 5 5 (圖2 2 4 )從代理電話伺服器1 5 7 0被 送到網點裝置1 544(步驟N36),IP封包1 556 (圖225 )從網點 裝置1544被送到媒體路由器1560(步驟N37)。5. Description of the invention (195), informing the telephone set 1508 (steps N 35 to N38). That is, the IP packet 1554 (FIG. 223) is sent from the telephone management server 1571 to the proxy telephone server 1570 (step N 3 5), and the IP packet 1 5 5 5 (FIG. 2 2 4) is transmitted from the proxy telephone server 1 5 70 is sent to the branch office device 1 544 (step N36), and the IP packet 1 556 (FIG. 225) is sent from the branch office device 1544 to the media router 1560 (step N37).

中繼控制部1 5 1 3形成前述ANM訊息時,從C IC管理表 1 5 1 3 - 2 (圖2 1 7 )中取得聲音控制部内的送信端外部I p位址 &quot;EA3”、内部IP位址&quot;I A3”及UDP封包的埠號碼&quot;5〇〇8,f,並 寫入至ANM訊息1 553電話管理伺服器1571可從接收到的應 答封包1 553中取出外部ip位址” eA3”、内部IP位址” ια3π及 埠號碼π 50 08π,並寫入至CIC管理表1571-2(圖205 )。 〈〈CIC管理表1571的寫入時序〉〉 電話管理伺服器1 5 71取出前述外部I p位址&quot;£ a 3 ',、内 部IP位址,’I A3”及埠號碼” 50 08&quot;,並寫入CIC管理表1571 - 2 的時序係在前述說明中的接收CPG訊息的步驟N23,或是接 收ANM訊息的步驟N33中進行。 &lt;〈透過中繼控制部的IP通信記錄之設定&gt;&gt; 中繼控制部,在前述步驟N33中,從CIC管理表1513一3When the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 forms the aforementioned ANM message, it obtains the external IP address of the sender in the voice control unit from the IC management table 1 5 1 3-2 (Figure 2 17), "EA3", internal The IP address &quot; I A3 &quot; and the port number of the UDP packet &quot; 5008, f are written to the ANM message 1 553. The telephone management server 1571 can take out the external IP bit from the received response packet 1 553 Address "eA3", internal IP address "ια3π and port number π 50 08π, and write it to the CIC management table 1571-2 (Figure 205)." <Writing sequence of CIC management table 1571> "Phone management server 5 71 Take out the external IP address &quot; £ a 3 ', the internal IP address,' I A3 &quot; and the port number &quot; 50 08 &quot;, and write the sequence into the CIC management table 1571-2. Step N23 of receiving a CPG message or step N33 of receiving an ANM message is performed. &Lt; &lt; Setting of the IP communication record through the relay control section &gt; &gt; Management table 1513 one 3

(圖2 2 2 )的記錄内部,取出I p位址” e A 3&quot;、E A1 ”、,,IA 3π、 π ΙΑ1”,並傳送至表管理伺服器1 57 6(步驟Ν41),表管理伺 服器1 576設定為網點裝置丨547内部的位址管理表之ιρ通信 記錄” ΕΑ3、ΕΑ1、ΙΑ3、ΙΑ1”(步驟Ν42)。又,前述位址管 理表之記錄的形態及記錄的位址設定方法係在其他實施例 中加以說明。(Fig. 2 2 2) inside the record, take out the IP address "e A 3 &quot;, E A1" ,, IA 3π, π ΙΑ1 ", and transfer it to the table management server 1 57 6 (step N41), the table The management server 1 576 is set as the communication record "ΕΑ3, Ε1, ΙΑ3, ΙΑ1" of the address management table in the network point device 547 (step N42). In addition, the form and bit of the record of the aforementioned address management table The address setting method is described in other embodiments.

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第199頁 1245997 五、發明說明(196) &lt;&lt;透過電話管理伺服器之IP通信記錄的設定&gt;&gt; 同樣地’電話管理伺服器1 5 71係在前述步驟n 3 5中, 從CIC管理表的記錄内部取出IP位址&quot;ΕΑΓ1、,,ΕΑ3Π、ΠΙΑ1» 、’’ΙΑ3&quot;,並傳送給表管理伺服器1 573 (步驟Ν43),表管理 伺服器1 5 7 3設定為網點裝置1 5 4 4内部的位址管理表之丨p通 信記錄π EA1、EA3、I Al、ΙΑ3Π (步驟N44)。 &lt;&lt;通信階段〉〉 電話機150 8.之使用者與電話機1520之電話通信為與其 他實施例中說明的相同的步驟,網點裝置丨544内部的位址 官理表之IP通己錄’也就是ΠΠΕΑ1、ΕΑ3、ΙΑ1、ΙΑ3Π的 讀, 舌己錄與網點裝置1 5 4 7内部的位址管理表之ι ρ通信記錄,,ε a 3 、EA1、IA3、IΑΓ的記錄被使用。 電話機1508的聲音被數位化,且被加入至Ιρ封包1561 (圖2 2 6 )的酬載上。在此,在前述接續階段中取得的受信 端位址及UDP琿號碼被使用。亦即,送信端位址係媒體路 由器1 5 6 0的I Ρ位址’’ Ε Α Γ ,受信端位址係受信端電話機 1 5 2 0接續的聲音控制部1 5 1 6内部的I p位址” £ a 3π ,媒體路 由器用於傳送聲音的UDP埠號碼為”5〇〇6” ,聲音控制部 1 51 6用以傳送聲音的U D P埠號碼為&quot;5 〇 〇 8,,。 類比聲音從電活機1 5 0 8被傳送,在媒體路由器丨5 6 〇聲❶ 音被數位化而變成聲音IP封包1561(圖226 ),並被送到網 點裝置1 544,在網點裝置中,IP通信記錄&quot;EA1、EA3、IA1 、IA3”被使用,以進行IP膠囊化,而變成^封包1 562 (圖 227),經由IP通信電路,再經過路由器丨524,到達網點裝2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 199 1245997 V. Description of the invention (196) &lt; &lt; Setting of IP communication record via telephone management server &gt; Similarly, 'Phone management server 1 5 71 series In the aforementioned step n 3 5, the IP address &quot; ΕΑΓ1 ,, ΕΑ3Π, ΠΙΑ1 »,` `ΙΑ3 &quot; is taken from the record of the CIC management table, and is transmitted to the table management server 1 573 (step N43), the table The management server 1 5 7 3 is set as the communication record π EA1, EA3, I Al, ΙΑ3Π of the address management table in the network device 1 5 4 4 (step N44). &lt; &lt; Communication stage >〉 The telephone communication between the user of the telephone 150 and the telephone 1520 is the same procedure as described in the other embodiments, and the IP address of the address management table inside the network device 544 is recorded. That is, the reading of ΠΠΕΑ1, Ε3, ΙΑ1, ΙΑ3Π, the communication record of the tongue and the address management table in the network device 1 5 4 7, the records of ε a 3, EA1, IA3, and IΑΓ are used. The voice of the telephone 1508 is digitized and added to the payload of the Ip packet 1561 (FIG. 2 2 6). Here, the address of the trusted terminal and the UDP frame number obtained in the aforementioned continuation phase are used. That is, the address of the transmitting end is the IP address '' Ε Α Γ of the media router 1560, and the address of the receiving end is the internal IP of the voice control unit 1 5 1 6 connected to the telephone of the receiving end 1520. Address "£ a 3π, the UDP port number used by the media router to transmit sound is" 5006 ", and the UDP port number used by the sound control unit 151 6 to transmit sound is" quote 5.0 ", analogy The sound is transmitted from the electric machine 1 508, and it is digitized at the media router 560. The sound is digitized into a voice IP packet 1561 (Figure 226), and sent to the branch office device 1 544. In the branch office device, The IP communication record "EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3" is used for IP encapsulation, and becomes ^ packet 1 562 (Figure 227). It passes through the IP communication circuit, and then passes through the router 524 and reaches the outlet.

1245997 發明說明(197) 置1 547。在此,使用前述ip通信記錄” EA3、EA1、IA3、 ΙΑΓ ,進行逆膠囊化,而變成”封包1 563 (圖228 ),儲存 數位化聲音的I Ρ封包1 5 6 3到達I Ρ聲音控制部1 5 1 6。聲音控 制部取出包含於IP封包1 563的送信端IP位址&quot;ΕΑΓ、送信 端埠號碼π 5006π、受信端ip位址” EA3”、受信端埠號碼 &quot;50 08&quot;,參照媒體路徑接續表1 528 —3(圖216)。使用送信 端IP位址ΠΕΑΓ、送信端淳號碼” 50 0 6”、受信端Ip位址 EA3π、受信端埠號碼” 5 〇 〇 8 ’'之媒體路徑記錄,I ρ封包 1 563内的數位化聲音變換成被聲音通信電路15〇6傳送的形 態之聲音碼框1 564(圖229 ),聲音碼框1 564經由交換機 1518到達交換機1519,聲音從電話機152〇被輸出,儲存於 從電話機1 5 2 0被送出的聲音碼框之聲音係以與上述相反的 方向被傳送到達電話機1 5 〇 8。 &lt;&lt;釋放階段〉〉 §電活機1508的使用者通知電話通信的釋放時(圖198 之步驟N50),媒體路由器156〇將電話呼叫釋放通知送給電 話管理伺服器1571(步驟N51至N53),電話管理伺服器1571 將釋放結束回信告知媒體路由器156〇 (步驟N64至N66)。1245997 Description of the Invention (197) Set to 1 547. Here, the aforementioned IP communication record "EA3, EA1, IA3, ΙΑΓ" is used for inverse encapsulation to become "packet 1 563 (Fig. 228)", and the IP packet 1 5 6 3 storing the digital voice reaches the IP voice control Department 1 5 1 6. The voice control unit takes out the IP address of the sender included in the IP packet 1 563, "ΕΑΓ", the port number of the sender π 5006π, the IP address of the receiver "EA3", and the port number of the receiver "50 08", referring to the media path connection. Table 1 528-3 (Figure 216). Using the media path record of the sender's IP address ΠΕΑΓ, the sender's original number "50 0 6", the receiver's IP address EA3π, and the receiver's port number "5 008", the digitization in I ρ packet 1 563 The voice is converted into a voice code frame 1 564 (Figure 229) transmitted by the voice communication circuit 1506. The voice code frame 1 564 reaches the switch 1519 through the switch 1518. The voice is output from the telephone 1520 and stored in the slave 15 The sound of the sent out voice code frame is transmitted to the telephone set 1 5 0 8 in the opposite direction to the above. &Lt; &lt; Release Phase >〉 § When the user of the mobile phone 1508 notifies the release of the telephone communication (Fig. Step N50 of 198), the media router 156 sends a call release notification to the telephone management server 1571 (steps N51 to N53), and the telephone management server 1571 notifies the media router 156 of the release completion response (steps N64 to N66).

又’電話管理伺服器1 5 71將通知電話呼叫釋放的I ρ封 f 1 565(圖230 )送到中繼控制部151 3(步驟N55),中繼控制 ,巧13將通知釋放結束的Ip封包1 5 66 (圖231)回信告知電 居苔理伺服器1 5 7 1 (步驟N 6 2 )。中繼控制部1 5 1 3將電話呼 叫釋放通知送到中繼交換機1518(步驟N56),中繼交換機 1 5 1 8將釋放結束回信告知中繼控制部1 5 1 3 (步驟N6 1 )。In addition, the telephone management server 1 5 71 sends an I ρ seal f 1 565 (Figure 230) to notify the release of the telephone call to the relay control unit 1513 (step N55), and the relay controller 13 notifies the Ip of the release completion The packet 1 5 66 (Fig. 231) sends a letter to inform the electric management server 1 5 7 1 (step N 6 2). The relay control unit 1 5 1 3 sends a call release notification to the relay switch 1518 (step N56), and the relay switch 1 5 1 8 notifies the relay control unit 1 5 1 3 of the release completion response (step N6 1).

第201頁 1245997Page 201 1245997

又,中繼交換機1518將電話呼叫釋放通知 1519(步驟N57),交換機1519將釋放結束回信主知中繼 換機1518(步驟N60) ’交換機1519將電話啤‘作號二 送給電話機1 520 (步驟N58)。 θ ~得 &lt;&lt;媒體路徑記錄的清除〉〉 在前述步驟N55中,中繼控制部1513指示清除聲音控 制部1 5 1 6上之媒體路徑接續表1 5 2 8 - 3 (圖2 1 6 )的該媒體路 徑之記錄(圖213之步驟1513-3),聲音控制部151^報告清 除該媒體路徑的記錄(步驟1516-3)。又,該記錄可用1&quot;^^前 述電話呼叫(接續/通話/釋放)的運用記錄(可選擇)。' &lt;&lt; IP通信記錄與CIC管理表記錄的清除〉〉 電話管理伺服器1571在步驟N55之後,將寫入至釋放 IP封包1 5 6 5中的電路號碼n C I C - 2π傳送給表管理伺服器 1 573 (步驟Ν73),清除網點裝置1 544内部的電路號碼 nCIC-2”對應的IP通信記錄”EA1、EA3、IA1、ΙΑ3Π(步驟 Ν74)。並且,清除電話管理伺服器1571管理的CIC管理表 1571-2(圖205 )的該電話機之記錄。又,電話管理伺服器 1571可將該記錄用於前述電話呼叫(接續/通話/釋放)的運 用記錄(可選擇)。 中繼控制部1 51 3將寫入至釋放結束IΡ封包1 5 6 6中的電•黪 路號碼nCIC-2n傳送給表管理伺服器1 576 (步驟Ν71),清除 網點裝置1 547内部的IP通信記錄·’ EA3、EA1、IA3、ΙΑΓ (步驟N72)。並且,清除中繼控制部1513管理的CIC管理表 1513-3(圖222)的該電話機之記錄。又,可將該記錄用於In addition, the relay switch 1518 notifies 1519 of the telephone call release (step N57), and the switch 1519 returns a call for the completion of the release to the relay switch 1518 (step N60). Step N58). θ ~ &lt; &lt; Clearing of media path records >〉 In the foregoing step N55, the relay control section 1513 instructs to clear the media path connection table 1 5 1 6 on the sound control section 1 5 2 8-3 (Fig. 2 1 6) The record of the media path (step 1513-3 in FIG. 213), and the sound control unit 151 ^ reports to clear the record of the media path (step 1516-3). In addition, this record can be used for the above-mentioned telephone call (connection / call / release) (optional). '&lt; & Clear of IP communication record and CIC management table record >〉 After step N55, the telephone management server 1571 transmits the circuit number n CIC-2π written in the released IP packet 1 5 6 5 to the table management The server 1 573 (step N73) clears the IP communication record "EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3Π" corresponding to the circuit number nCIC-2 "in the branch office device 1 544" (step N74). And, the record of the telephone set in the CIC management table 1571-2 (FIG. 205) managed by the telephone management server 1571 is cleared. Further, the telephone management server 1571 can use this record for the operation record (optional) of the aforementioned telephone call (connection / call / release). The relay control unit 1 51 3 transmits the electric and circuit numbers nCIC-2n written to the end-of-release IP packet 1 5 6 6 to the table management server 1 576 (step N71), and clears the IP inside the network device 1 547 Communication records' EA3, EA1, IA3, and IAl (step N72). Then, the record of the telephone set in the CIC management table 1513-3 (FIG. 222) managed by the relay control unit 1513 is cleared. Also, this record can be used for

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第202頁 1245997 五、發明說明(199) 運用記錄。 摘要以上如下。 在具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道與中繼閘道間’電話的 接續控制IP通信電路與聲音IP通信電路被分離,依序經由 電話機1、具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道與中繼閘道、NN I介 面通信電路、公眾電話交換網、電話機2,可在2個電話機 間進行電話通信。又,具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道内的電2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 202 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (199) Application Record. The summary is as follows. Between the terminal gateway with the capsule function and the relay gateway, the connection control IP communication circuit of the telephone and the voice IP communication circuit are separated, and are sequentially passed through the telephone 1, the terminal gateway with the capsule function, and the relay gateway. , NN I interface communication circuit, public telephone exchange network, and telephone set 2 can perform telephone communication between two telephone sets. In addition, the electricity in the terminal gateway with the capsule function

話管理伺服器與Λ中繼閘道内的中繼控制部係一同具有個別 的CIC管理表,使用前述個別的CIC管理表,進行電路號碼 的管理。中繼閘道内的中繼控制部使用包含I Ρ封包内部的 位址情報及信號單元内的標記情報之位址接續表,進行IΡ 封包與信號單元的變換。 中繼控制部檢索信號局位址管理表,並提示受信端電 話機的電話號碼,以取得管理該電話機的交換機之信號局 位址。又,中繼控制部係根據公眾電話交換網預先決定的 規則,決定電路號碼、信號鏈接選擇。 聲音控制部使用中繼閘 徑接續表,進行儲存數位化 電路之聲音通信電路之内部 包含I Ρ封包内部的位址情報 址接續表,進行I ρ封包與信 有用以在内部傳送接收IP封 接續表的設定。又,聲音控 網接收或傳送的邏輯聲音通 道内的聲音控制部内的媒體路 聲音之IP封包及傳送NNI通信 的聲音h號之變換。又,使用 及信號單元内的標記情報的位 號單元之變換。聲音控制部具 包的IP位址,以提供媒體路徑 制部確保用以從公眾電話交換 信電路,決定其識別子。具有The call management server and the relay control unit in the Λ relay gateway have separate CIC management tables, and use the aforementioned individual CIC management tables to manage circuit numbers. The relay control unit in the relay gateway uses the address continuation table containing the address information inside the IP packet and the tag information in the signal unit to convert the IP packet and the signal unit. The relay control unit searches the signal station address management table and prompts the telephone number of the telephone of the receiving end to obtain the signal station address of the switch that manages the telephone. The relay control unit determines the circuit number and signal link selection based on the rules predetermined by the public switched telephone network. The voice control unit uses the relay gate connection table to store the digital information circuit. The voice communication circuit contains the IP address inside the IP packet. The IP packet and the letter are used to transmit and receive the IP packet. Table setting. In addition, the voice control network receives or transmits the logical voice channel in the voice control section of the media channel voice IP packet and transmits the voice of the NNI communication. In addition, the conversion of the bit unit of the tag information using the and signal units is performed. The voice control unit has a packaged IP address to provide the media path. The system ensures that the circuit is used to exchange telecommunications from the public telephone and determines its identifier. have

1245997 五、發明說明(200) &quot; 膠囊化機旎的終端閘道包含中繼控制部及網點裝置,網點 ,,具有IP膠囊化及逆膠囊化的機能,中繼控制部包含電 铦官理伺服器、電話號碼伺服器、代理電話伺服器、表管 理饲服器,從媒體路由器輸入至網點裝置的lp封包中,電 居呼,控制I P封包被轉送給中繼控制部,聲音丨p封包被分 岔至聲音1?通信電路。結果,電話機1508及1520可經由IP 轉送網1 5 0 0、公眾電話交換網丨5 〇丨,進行電話通信。 1 4 ·使用I P轉送做為中繼網的第丨4實施例: 在圖232中’ 14〇〇係ip轉送網,14〇1及14〇2係中繼閘 道’ 1 4 0 3係具有膠囊化機能的閘道,丨4 〇 5至丨4 〇 7係公眾電 忐交換網(PSTN),1 408至1411係加入者交換機,1412及 1 41 3係中繼交換機,;[41 5及1 41 6係適用共通線信號方式的 控制通信電路,1 4 1 7及1 41 8係聲音通信電路。又,控制通 信電路1415及聲音通信電路1417係交換機1412與中繼閘道 1401之間的NNI通信電路,控制通信電路1416及聲音通信 電路141 8係交換機1 41 3與中繼閘道1 4 0 2之間的NN I通信電 路。1438及1439係位址接續表,1441及1442係閘道位址管 理伺服器’ 1 4 4 3及1 4 4 4係信號局位址管理伺服器。1 4 2 9及 1 4 3 0係媒體路徑接續表。在本發明中,共通線信號方式以 點表示信號局,以點碼表示”信號局位址”。1245997 V. Description of the invention (200) &quot; The terminal gateway of the capsule machine includes relay control unit and network device, the network has the functions of IP encapsulation and reverse encapsulation, and the relay control unit includes the electronic controller. Server, phone number server, proxy phone server, meter management feeder, input from media router to lp packet of outlet device, call home, control IP packet is forwarded to relay control unit, voice 丨 p packet It is branched to the sound 1? Communication circuit. As a result, the telephones 1508 and 1520 can perform telephone communication via the IP transfer network 15 00 and the public telephone exchange network 丨 5 丨. 1 4 · The fourth embodiment of using IP forwarding as a relay network: In FIG. 232, the '1400-series IP forwarding network, and the 1401 and 1402 relay gateways' 1 4 0 3 series have The gateway of capsule function, 丨 405 to 丨 4 07 is the public electrical switching network (PSTN), 1 408 to 1411 is the subscriber switch, 1412 and 1 41 are 3 relay switches, [41 5 and 1 41 6 is a control communication circuit suitable for the common line signal method, 1 4 1 7 and 1 41 8 is a voice communication circuit. The control communication circuit 1415 and the audio communication circuit 1417 are NNI communication circuits between the switch 1412 and the relay gateway 1401, and the control communication circuit 1416 and the audio communication circuit 141 are 8 switches 1 41 3 and the relay gateway 1 4 0 2 NN I communication circuit. 1438 and 1439 series address continuation table, 1441 and 1442 series gateway address management server '1 4 4 3 and 1 4 4 4 series signal station address management server. 1 4 2 9 and 1 4 3 0 are media continuity tables. In the present invention, the common line signal method uses a dot to indicate a signal office, and a dot code to indicate a "signal office address".

中繼閘道1 4 0 1的I P位址為’’ GW 〇 5M,中繼控制部1 4 2 3保 存則述IP位址n GW05”,同樣地,中繼閘道! 402的IP位址為 n G W 0 6 ’’ ’中繼控制部1 4 2 4保存前述I p位址” g W 0 6&quot;。 &lt;&lt;電話機1420與電話機1421間的通信&gt;&gt;The IP address of the relay gateway 1 4 0 1 is ”GW 〇5M, and the relay control unit 1 4 2 3 stores the IP address n GW05”. Similarly, the relay gateway! For the n GW 0 6 '' 'relay control section 1 4 2 4 save the aforementioned IP address "g W 0 6 &quot;. &lt; &lt; Communication between telephone 1420 and telephone 1421 &gt; &gt;

1245997 五、發明說明(201) 首先,說明從電話機1 4 2 0經由公眾電話交換網丨4 〇 5 、IP轉送網1 400、公眾電話交換網14〇6,到電話機1421 之電話通信的終端間通信接續控制方法。 &lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉 當拿起電話機1 420的受話器時,呼出信號被傳向交換 機1 408(圖233之步驟HA01),交換機1 408確認電話呼出(步 驟HA02),交換機1 408將電話呼叫設定要求通知中繼交換 機1412(步驟HA03)。然後,中繼交換機1412接收前述呼叫 設定要求,形成共通線信號方式的信號單元丨45丨,前述作 號單元1451經由控制通信電路1415,被轉送給中繼閘道β 1401内的中繼控制部1 423 (步驟Η Α04)。信號單元1451的受 信端信號局碼為1?(:-Γ,送信端信號局碼為&quot;〇Ρ(&gt;1&quot;,信 號鏈接選擇為&quot;SLS-Γ,電路號碼為&quot;CIC —丨&quot;,訊息為,ΙΙΑΜ ,參數為Para-1Π,前述參數”para—1”的内容係包含電 話機1 420的電話號碼” TN—丨”及電話機1421的電話號碼 TN-2 。圖232所示的信號單元1451内的訊息,,MSG-Γ表示 ,’ιαμπ 〇 &lt;〈中繼控制部1 4 2 3的動作〉〉1245997 V. Description of the invention (201) First, the description will be made from the telephone set 1420 through the public telephone exchange network 丨 405, the IP transfer network 1400, the public telephone exchange network 1406, and the telephone communication terminal to the telephone 1421. Communication connection control method. &lt; &lt; Connection stage >〉 When picking up the handset of phone 1 420, the outgoing signal is transmitted to switch 1 408 (step HA01 in FIG. 233), switch 1 408 confirms the outgoing call (step HA02), and switch 1 408 calls The call setting request notifies the relay exchange 1412 (step HA03). Then, the relay switch 1412 receives the call setting request and forms a signal unit of the common line signal method. The numbering unit 1451 is transferred to the relay control unit in the relay gateway β 1401 via the control communication circuit 1415. 1 423 (step Η Α04). The signal office code of the receiving end of the signal unit 1451 is 1? (:-Γ, the signal office code of the transmitting end is &quot; 〇Ρ (&gt; 1 &quot;, the signal link selection is &quot; SLS-Γ, and the circuit number is &quot; CIC —丨 &quot;, the message is ΙΑΑΜ, the parameter is Para-1Π, the content of the aforementioned parameter "para-1" includes the telephone number "TN- 丨" of telephone 1 420 and the telephone number TN-2 of telephone 1421. Figure 232 As shown in the message in the signal unit 1451, MSG-Γ indicates, 'ιαμπ 〇 &lt; <operation of the relay control unit 1 4 2 3 >>

中繼控制部1 423接收信號單元1451(步驟HA04)。圖 2 5 6係顯示中繼控制部1 4 2 3將信號單元1 4 5 1變成I P封包的 程序。中繼控制部1 4 2 3接收信號單元1 4 5 1 (圖2 5 6之步驟 S1461-2) ’取出信號單元1451内部的信號局標記” DPC—i、 OPC-1、SLS-1、CIC-ln(步驟S1461-3),檢查在位址接續 表1 438内部,信號局標記,也就是包含受信端信號局碼The relay control unit 1 423 receives the signal unit 1451 (step HA04). Figure 2 5 6 shows the procedure for the relay control unit 1 4 2 3 to convert the signal unit 1 4 5 1 into an IP packet. The relay control unit 1 4 2 3 receives the signal unit 1 4 5 1 (step S1461-2 in FIG. 2 5 6) 'take out the signal bureau mark inside the signal unit 1451' DPC-i, OPC-1, SLS-1, CIC -ln (step S1461-3), check that the signal office flag is inside the address continuation table 1 438, that is, the signal office code of the receiving end is included

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(202) (DP/)、送信端信號局碼(〇pc)、信號鏈接選擇(儿幻、電 路號碼(CIC)的記錄是否存在(步驟1461_4)。在本例中, =於在位址接續表1438-丨(圖244)内沒有一致的記錄,將 别述信號局標記追加寫入至位址接續表1 438(步驟5146卜5 ),中繼控制部1423取出參數&quot;卩技^一丨&quot;内的電話機1421之 ,話號碼&quot;TN-2&quot;,中繼控制部1 423詢問閘道位址管理伺服 器1441,而得到管理前述電話號碼&quot;TN_2&quot;之閘道的ιρ位址 的回答(步驟S146卜6)。在本例中,取得中繼閘道“”的 =位址&quot;D-ad-x&quot;。在此,閘道位址管理伺服器丨以丨及&quot;“ =入10位電話號碼的全部或是前6位(市外局號與電話局 戒),並輸出管理詢問的電話號碼之閘道的Ip位址。 ❿ 再者,閘道位址管理飼服器1441及1442透過將電話號 碼置回至網域名稱上,可利用網域名稱飼服器(dns)公知 的技術加以實現。而且,在詢問電話號碼的數目少的時 候,可以IP位址管理表(圖234)取代閘道位址管理 飼服器。在此,IP位址管理表係將電話號碼與該中 繼閘道㈣位址的對應歸納成表,當指定電話號便 可得到對應的中繼閑道的IP位址。又,115位址管理表係血 在其他實施例中說明的1P轉送網輸出電路表相同的目的? 也就是用以檢索電話號碼與IP位址的對靡。 中繼控制部1423保存中繼閘道14〇1的”位址&quot;s_ad_x :,形成1P封包1452 °IP封包1452的受信端115位址為 • D-ad-x&quot;,达信端IP位址為”S_ad_x&quot;,電路號碼為&quot;cic_x ,訊息為&quot;IAM&quot;,參數&quot;Para —x&quot;係包含電話機i42〇的電話2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (202) (DP /), sender signal office code (〇pc), signal link selection (child magic, circuit number (CIC) records exist (steps 1461_4). In this example, = there is no consistent record in the address continuation table 1438- 丨 (Figure 244), and write another signal signal mark to the address continuation table 1 438 (step 5146, 5) , The relay control unit 1423 takes out the telephone number 1421 in the parameter &quot; 卩 技 ^ 一 丨 &quot;, the telephone number &quot; TN-2 &quot;, the relay control unit 1 423 queries the gateway address management server 1441, and obtains Manage the answer of the ιρ address of the gateway of the aforementioned telephone number &quot; TN_2 &quot; (step S146 to 6). In this example, get the = address of the relay gateway "" &quot; D-ad-x &quot;. Therefore, the gateway address management server 丨 and 丨 and "" enter all or the first 6 digits of the 10-digit telephone number (city outside bureau number and telephone bureau ring), and output the gateway of the management inquiry telephone number P The IP address of the gateway. ❿ Furthermore, the gateway address management feeders 1441 and 1442 can benefit from putting the phone number back on the domain name. The domain name feeder (dns) is well-known technology to realize it. Moreover, when the number of inquired telephone numbers is small, the IP address management table (Figure 234) can be used instead of the gateway address management feeder. Here, The IP address management table is a table that summarizes the correspondence between the telephone number and the address of the relay gateway. When the phone number is specified, the IP address of the corresponding relay idle channel can be obtained. In addition, the 115 address management table is The purpose of the output circuit table of the 1P transfer network described in other embodiments is the same? That is, it is used to retrieve the match between the telephone number and the IP address. The relay control unit 1423 stores the "address of the relay gateway 1401". &quot; s_ad_x :, the receiving end 115 address forming the 1P packet 1452 ° IP packet 1452 is • D-ad-x &quot;, the sending end IP address is "S_ad_x &quot;, the circuit number is &quot; cic_x, and the message is &quot; IAM &quot;, parameter &quot; Para —x &quot; is a telephone that includes the telephone i42〇

1245997 五、發明說明(203) 唬碼’ ΤΝ-Γ及電話機1421的電話號碼” TN_2”。前述訊息與 參數分別由信號單元1 4 5 1取得(參照圖2 3 6 )。中繼控制部 ,|423根據一定的規則為”s-ad-X”及”D —ad — x”決定電路號碼 C 1C-χπ (圖256之步驟S1 46 1-7)。例如,將剛剛產生的電 路號碼的值保存於内部的記憶體中,一個一個地用以進行 加算,並使用下面的計算式。 C I C-X = C I C_x + 1 mod 6553 6 · · · (4) 中繼控制部丨4 2 3的位址接續表1 4 3 8在中繼控制部1 4 2 3 接收彳s號單元1 4 5 1之前的時點為空白,其顯示為位址接續 表1 438-1 (圖244)。當中繼控制部1 423形成IP封包1 452 時’結合信號單元1451内部的標記情報” DPC-l、0PC-1、 ^ SLS-1、CIC-1”與IP封包1 452内部的標記情報” S 一 ad_x、 D - ad-x、CIC-xn ’並且決定用以要求對於聲音控制部1427 的聲音通信路之媒體路徑識別子” ΜΡ-8Π,且追加寫入至位 址接續表的内部(圖256之步驟S146卜8)。其顯示於位址接 續表 1438-2(圖 245)。 位址接續表1 4 3 8 - 2的記錄内部的訊號局位址項目 (&quot;DPC-l、0PC-Γ )中,左側的’’ DPC-Γ係保存位址接續表 1438-2的中繼接續閘道1401的信號局位址。同樣地,位址 接續表1438-2的IP位址項目(&quot;S-ad-x、D-ad-x’’)中,左側‘ 的’’ S - ad - X ’’係保存位址接續表1 4 3 8 - 2的中繼接續閘道 1 4 0 1的IP位址。該記錄的右端係媒體路徑識別子” jjp _ &amp; ”。 &lt;&lt;中繼控制部與聲音控制部的聯合動作〉〉 參照圖232加以說明。中繼控制部1423係經由情報電1245997 V. Description of the invention (203) Blunt code ‘TN-Γ and the phone number“ TN_2 ”of the telephone 1421. The foregoing information and parameters are respectively obtained by the signal unit 1 4 5 1 (refer to FIG. 2 3 6). The relay control unit, | 423 determines the circuit number C 1C-χπ for "s-ad-X" and "D-ad-x" according to certain rules (step S1 46 1-7 in Fig. 256). For example, the value of the circuit number just generated is stored in the internal memory and used to add one by one, and the following calculation formula is used. CI CX = CI C_x + 1 mod 6553 6 The time before 1 is blank, and it is displayed as address continuation table 1 438-1 (Figure 244). When the relay control unit 1 423 forms an IP packet 1 452, 'combined with the tag information inside the signal unit 1451 "DPC-1, 0PC-1, ^ SLS-1, CIC-1" and the tag information inside the IP packet 1 452 "S Ad_x, D-ad-x, CIC-xn 'and decide to request the media path identifier "MP-8Π" for the voice communication path of the voice control unit 1427, and add it to the address continuation table (Figure 256) Step S146 to 8). It is shown in the address continuation table 1438-2 (Figure 245). The address continuation table 1 4 3 8-2 records the internal signal station address items (&quot; DPC-1, 0PC-Γ). The `` DPC-Γ '' on the left holds the address continuation table 1438-2. Continue to the signal office address of gateway 1401. Similarly, in the IP address entry (&quot; S-ad-x, D-ad-x '') of the address continuation table 1438-2, the "S-ad-X" on the left side is the saved address Continue to Table 1 4 3 8-2 for the IP address of the gateway 1 4 0 1. The right end of this record is the media path identifier "jjp_ &amp;". &lt; &lt; Joint operation of relay control section and sound control section &gt; The relay control unit 1423

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第 207 頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 207 1245997

路1 429- 1將前述媒體路徑識別子” Mp_8”提示至聲音控制部 142*7上(圖251之步驟1 423-1 ),聲音控制部1 427確9保工提供。 給聲,音通信用的聲音控制部1 427的内部模組之内部Ip位址 &quot;IA5”、外部IP位址” EA5&quot;、聲音通信用埠號碼,,,經 由情報電路1 429-1,向中繼控制部1 423報告(步驟1 427一〇 。另外’聲音控制部1 427決定識別將聲音碼框傳送給聲音 通信電路1417的邏輯通信電路之邏輯通信電路識別子 曰 ”CH-1”,並決定識別從聲音通信電路1417接收聲音碼框的 邏輯 通信電路之邏輯通信電路識別子” CH-2”,將前述邏輯 通信電路識別子&quot;CH-1”及&quot;CH-2”寫入至媒體路徑接續表 1429 ’結果就變成媒體路徑接續表1429 —i (圖248)。、 再者,在邏輯通信電路1417為ISDN通信電路的1次群 速度介面電路(PRI)時,邏輯通信電路識別子係由ISDN通 仏裝置的裝置號碼及指定特定的β通道(使用者情報的邏輯 傳送電路)之號碼組成。 中繼控制部1 4 2 3將中繼閘道1 4 〇 1的I ρ位址&quot;GW 0 5η、上 述取得或產生的CIC號碼,’CIC-2&quot;、信號單元1451内部的電 話號碼&quot;ΤΝ-1”、&quot;ΤΝ-2”、IP位址” ΕΑ5”及” ΙΑ5”、埠號碼 &quot;5010’1寫入至CIC管理表。結果變成CIC管理表Huy (圖 240 )。但是,程序區段由於係在步驟HA〇4之後而為,,IAM,, 。又,中繼控制部1 4 2 3係預先保存1個以上的聲音控制部 1 4 2 7的内部I ρ位址,且以其中1個做為前述内部丨ρ位址 &quot;IA5,,。The channel 1 429-1 prompts the aforementioned media path identifier “Mp_8” to the sound control unit 142 * 7 (step 1 423-1 in FIG. 251), and the sound control unit 1 427 confirms that it is provided by the insurance company. The internal IP address &quot; IA5 &quot;, the external IP address &quot; EA5 &quot; of the internal module of the voice control unit 1 427 for voice communication, and the voice communication port number, via the information circuit 1 429-1, Report to the relay control unit 1 423 (step 1 427-10. In addition, the 'sound control unit 1 427 decides to recognize the logical communication circuit identifier of the logical communication circuit that transmits the voice code frame to the audio communication circuit 1417, "CH-1", And decided to identify the logical communication circuit identifier "CH-2" of the logical communication circuit that received the voice code frame from the audio communication circuit 1417, and write the aforementioned logical communication circuit identifiers "CH-1" and "CH-2" to the media Path continuity table 1429 'The result becomes the media path continuity table 1429-i (Figure 248). Moreover, when the logical communication circuit 1417 is the primary group speed interface circuit (PRI) of the ISDN communication circuit, the logical communication circuit identifies the subsystem It consists of the device number of the ISDN communication device and the number that specifies a specific β channel (the logical transmission circuit for user information). The relay control unit 1 4 2 3 will relay the I ρ address of the relay gateway 1 4 〇1 &quot; GW 0 5η, the above-obtained or generated CIC number, 'CIC-2 &quot;, the phone number inside the signal unit 1451 &quot; TN-1 ", &quot; TN-2", the IP address "ΕΑ5" and "ΙΑ5", the port The number &quot; 5010'1 is written to the CIC management table. The result becomes the CIC management table Huy (Figure 240). However, the program section is performed after step HA04, and IAM, and the relay control The unit 1 4 2 3 stores one or more internal I ρ addresses of the sound control unit 1 4 2 7 in advance, and uses one of them as the aforementioned internal 丨 ρ address &quot; IA5 ,.

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

1245997 發明說明(205) &lt;&lt;IP轉送網内的轉送〉〉 中繼控制部1 4 2 3將經由前述形成(圖2 5 6之步驟S1 4 6 1 -9)的IP封包1 452傳送給ip轉送網14〇〇内部(步驟S1461-10 ),IP封包1452經由控制通信電路、路由器1431、 控制通#電路1 4 3 1 - 2,到達中繼閘道1 4 〇 2内的中繼控制部 1 424(步驟HA05)。 &lt;〈中繼控制部1 424 : CIC管理表及位址接續表的設定〉〉1245997 Description of the invention (205) &lt; &lt; Transfer in the IP transfer network >>> The relay control unit 1 4 2 3 will transmit the IP packet 1 452 formed through the foregoing (step S1 4 6 1 -9 of FIG. 2 5 6). To the IP forwarding network 1400 (step S1461-10), the IP packet 1452 passes through the control communication circuit, the router 1431, and the control pass #circuit 1 4 3 1-2 to the relay in the relay gateway 1 4 〇 2 The control unit 1 424 (step HA05). &lt; <Relay Control Unit 1 424: Setting of CIC Management Table and Address Connection Table >>

中繼控制部J424接收IP封包1452(圖257之步驟S1462 2)。從IP封包1452取出IP位址、訊息、電路號碼、參數 (步驟S1 462-3 )。在此,受信端ip位址為” D —ad_x&quot;,送信 端IP位址為”S-ad-χπ,電路號碼為” CIC_X”,訊息為&quot;IAM··The relay control unit J424 receives the IP packet 1452 (step S1462 2 in FIG. 257). Take out the IP address, message, circuit number, and parameters from the IP packet 1452 (step S1 462-3). Here, the IP address of the receiving end is "D —ad_x", the IP address of the transmitting end is "S-ad-χπ, the circuit number is" CIC_X ", and the message is" IAM ·· "

’參數為’’Para-X&quot;,參數&quot;Para-xn係包含電話機1420的電 話號碼&quot;TN-1&quot;及電話機1421的電話號碼” ΤΝ-2Π。檢查在位 址接續表1439-1(圖246)的内部,是否存在對應的IP位址 &quot;S-ad-X”、&quot;D-ad-x’•及電路號碼(步驟sl 462-4)。由於在 本例中不存在,取出前述IP位址” S-ad-χπ、,,D-ad-X,,及電 路號碼位址nCIC-xn,並寫入至位址接續表1 439-1 (步驟 S1462-5),中繼控制部1424將受信端電話機的電話號碼 ’’ ΤΝ-2Π提示給信號局位址管理伺服器1 444,以取得管理具 有電話號碼1’ΤΝ-2”的電話機1421之交換機1409的信號局位 址DPC-2··(步称S1462-6) ’並寫入至圖246的位址接續表 1439-1(步驟S1462-7)。結果,位址接續表變成1439-2(圖 247)。該記錄的右端為媒體路徑識別子” mp-9,,。 中繼控制部1424根據由公眾交換網1 406預先決定的規'The parameter is `` Para-X &quot;, the parameter &quot; Para-xn is the telephone number of the telephone 1420 &quot; TN-1 &quot; and the telephone number of the telephone 1421 &quot; TN-2Π. Check the address connection table 1439-1 ( (Figure 246), is there a corresponding IP address &quot; S-ad-X &quot;, &quot; D-ad-x '? And a circuit number (step sl462-4). Since it does not exist in this example, take out the aforementioned IP address "S-ad-χπ ,, D-ad-X, and circuit number address nCIC-xn, and write it to the address continuation table 1 439-1 (Step S1462-5), the relay control unit 1424 presents the telephone number '' ΤΝ-2Π of the receiving end telephone to the signal station address management server 1 444 to acquire and manage the telephone having the telephone number 1′TN-2 ”. The signal office address DPC-2 of the switch 1409 of 1421 (step name S1462-6) 'is written to the address connection table 1439-1 of FIG. 246 (step S1462-7). As a result, the address continuation table becomes 1439-2 (Figure 247). The right end of this record is the media path identifier "mp-9". The relay control unit 1424 is based on the rules predetermined by the public exchange network 1 406.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第209頁 1245997 五、發明說明(206) 則決定電路號碼” CIC-2&quot;、信號鏈接選擇n SLS-2”,形成包 含訊息為” I AM,,及參數,,Para_2n的信號單元1453(步驟 S1 462-8 ),並傳送給控制通信電路1416(步驟S1 462-9 )。 &lt;〈中繼控制部與聲音控制部的聯合動作&gt;&gt; 參照圖2 3 2加以說明。中繼控制部1 4 2 4係經由情報電 路1 430- 1將前述媒體路徑識別子” MP —9”、前述取得的聲音 控制部1 427内模組的内部ip位址” IA5,,、外部ip位址” ΕΑ5Π 、及聲音控制部1 4 2 7用於傳送聲音的埠號碼” 5 〇 1 〇,,,提示 至聲音控制部1428上(圖252之步驟1424-1 ),聲音控制部 1428將聲音控制部丨428的内部模組之内部ΙΡ位址” ΙΑ6”、 外部IP位址’’ ΕΑ6”、及聲音控制部1 428用以傳送聲音的埠 號碼&quot;5012”,向中繼控制部1424報告(步驟1 428-n。在此 程序中,聲音控制部1428將2對1{)位址及埠號碼(外部1?位 址” EA5”及埠號碼”5010”、内部Ip位址” IA6,,、外部ιρ位址 EA6及埠號碼5012”)寫入至媒體接續表143〇。另外,聲 曰$制邻1 8決定識別將聲音碼框傳送給聲音通信電路 -询!!路之邏輯通信電路識別子,,CH-3’,,並決 2 Ui t #電路1418接收聲音碼框的邏輯通信電路 子” CH-3”及” CH —4” ^ =至:二:將前述邏輯通信電路識別 忐搵舻故π拉接士冩至媒體路徑接續表1430,結果就變 成媒體路徑接續表1 430-1 (圖249)。 媒體路徑接續表1 4304 3 &quot;EA5”、送信端埠號碼”5 ^^疋虽接收达信端1?位址 端槔號碼&quot;5〇12、IP封包(。酬=端1P位址,,EA6&quot;、受信 、酬载為UDP)時,將該UDP酬載内 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 209 1245997 V. The description of the invention (206) determines the circuit number "CIC-2", the signal link selection n SLS-2 ", forming the message containing" I AM, "and parameters The signal unit 1453 of Para_2n (step S1 462-8) is transmitted to the control communication circuit 1416 (step S1 462-9). &Lt; <Joint operation of the relay control section and the sound control section &gt; &gt; Refer to the figure 2 3 2 for explanation. The relay control unit 1 4 2 4 uses the information circuit 1 430-1 to identify the aforementioned media path identifier “MP-9” and the internal IP address of the module in the previously acquired voice control unit 1 427 ”. IA5 ,, external IP address "ΕΑ5Π, and the port number of the sound control unit 1 4 2 7 for transmitting sound" 5 〇 〇 ,, to the sound control unit 1428 (step 1424-1 in Figure 252) The sound control unit 1428 assigns the internal IP address “ΙΑ6” of the internal module of the sound control unit 428, the external IP address “ΕΑ6”, and the port number used by the sound control unit 1 428 to transmit sound &quot; 5012 " To report to the relay control unit 1424 (step 1 428-n. In this procedure, the sound The control unit 1428 assigns 2 to 1 {) addresses and port numbers (external 1? Address "EA5" and port number "5010", internal IP address "IA6", and external IP address EA6 and port number 5012 ") Write to the media connection table 143〇. In addition, the voice control system $ 18 decides to recognize and transmit the voice code frame to the voice communication circuit. ! Router's logical communication circuit identifier, CH-3 ', and the decision 2 Ui t #circuit 1418 logic communication circuit receiving the voice code frame "CH-3" and "CH-4" ^ = to: two: will The aforementioned logical communication circuit recognizes the old π pull connection to the media path connection table 1430, and the result becomes the media path connection table 1 430-1 (FIG. 249). Media path continuation table 1 4304 3 &quot; EA5 ", sender port number" 5 ^^ 疋 Although I received the receiver terminal 1? Address terminal number "5012, IP packets (. Pay = terminal 1P address, , EA6 &quot;, trusted, payload is UDP), the UDP payload is within 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

第210頁 1245997Page 210 1245997

的數位化聲音傳送鈐馮 別子” CH-3” ’當從;i = t通信電路1418的邏輯通信電路識 聲音時,將t卜釤办^輯信電路識別子&quot;CH — 4&quot;接收數位化 车曰吟’將此數位化签立 信端埠號碼&quot;5。12&quot;、存於送信端1p位址&quot;EA6&quot;、送 ”5010” 、又端1P位址”EA5&quot;、受信端埠號碼 部。、、匕(酬载係ϋΕ»Ρ),並傳送給IP轉送網1400内 又,決定用以將聲 通信電路,決定具邏輯 與淳號碼一起寫入至媒 媒體路徑接續表1 430-1 〈〈公眾電話交換網1 4 0 6 信號單元1453到達 單元1453被轉送至公眾 機1 409(步驟HA07)。交 電話機1421是否被許可 設定要求(著信通知)通The digital voice transmission "Feng Biezi" "CH-3" "When from; i = t communication circuit 1418 logic communication circuit to recognize the sound, the t b "Yin" to digitally sign the letter port number "5.12", stored at the sender's 1p address "EA6", send "5010", and the 1P address "EA5", the trusted port number department .. (Payment system: ϋ »»), and transmit it to the IP forwarding network 1400. It is decided to use the audio communication circuit, and it is decided to write the logic and the Chun number to the media path together. Table 1 430-1 〈< Public telephone exchange network 1 4 0 6 Signal unit 1453 Arrival unit 1453 is forwarded to public machine 1 409 (step HA07). Whether or not the telephone 1421 is allowed to set requirements (letter notification)

音傳送給聲音通信電路1418的邏輯 通信電路識別子&quot;CH-2&quot;,將IP位址 體路徑接續表1 430。寫入的結果為 (圖 249)。 的動作〉〉 中繼交換機1413(步驟HA06),信號 電話交換網1 4 0 6中,然後到達交換 換機1 409檢查電話號碼為&quot;TN-2',的 著信,若許可著信,則將電話呼叫 知電話機1421(步驟HA08)。 其次’交換機1 409形成圖237所示的信號單元1454。 在信號單元1 454内部的受信端信號局位址為 DPC-3”、送信端信號局位址為&quot;〇pc —3&quot;、信號鏈接選擇為 1 SLS-3&quot;、電路號碼為&quot;CIC-3”。在此,&quot;opc-3,,的值為 ,DPC-2&quot;的值,&quot;DPC-3” 的值為,,0PC —2” 的值,” SLS —3Γ 的值 為”SLS-2”的值,”CIC-3”的值為” CIC_2,,的值。亦即,信 號局位址係交換前述步驟的送信端信號局與受信端信號局 的位址的值’信號鏈接選擇及電路號碼的值則是不變。The tone is transmitted to the logic communication circuit identifier "CH-2" of the voice communication circuit 1418, and the IP address body path is connected to Table 1 430. The written result is (Figure 249). Action >> Relay switch 1413 (step HA06), the signal telephone exchange network 1 4 0 6 and then arrive at the exchange switch 1 409 to check the letter with the telephone number &quot; TN-2 ', if permission is granted, Then, the telephone is called to the telephone 1421 (step HA08). Next, the 'switch 1 409' forms a signal unit 1454 shown in FIG. Inside the signal unit 1 454, the receiving end signal office address is DPC-3 ", the transmitting end signal office address is" quot; 0pc —3 ", the signal link selection is 1 SLS-3, and the circuit number is" CIC " -3 ". Here, the value of &quot; opc-3, "is the value of DPC-2, the value of &quot; DPC-3" is the value of 0PC-2, and the value of "SLS-33Γ" is SLS-2 ", The value of" CIC-3 "is the value of" CIC_2, ". That is, the address of the signal office is the value of the signal link selection and circuit number of the sender's signal office and the signal of the receiver's signal station in the previous steps.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第211頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 211 1245997

交換機1 409將信號單元1454轉送至公眾電話交換網14〇6的 内部,k號單元1454通過交換機1413(步驟HA11),經由控 制通信電路1416,到達中繼閘道丨4 02内部的中繼控制部 1 424(步驟HA12)。 中繼控制部1 424接收信號單元1454(圖256之S146卜2 )’取出信號單元1454内部的信號局標記(sl461-3),檢查 在位址接續表1 439内部是否有與信號局標記” DPC —3、 OPC-3、SLS-3、CIC-3”的内容相同的記錄(步驟S1462-4) 。在本例中,由於在位址接續表1439_2内有一致的記錄, 接著就形成如圖238所示的IP封包1455(圖256之S1461 - 9) ,並傳送至IP轉送網1 400内(S1461-10)。1卩封包1455内的 送、端I P位址為’’ S - a d - uπ,受信端IP位址為,,d - a d - u,,,電 路號碼為’,CIC-un。在此,&quot;S-ad-ιΓ的值為&quot;D-ad-χπ的 值’ ”D-ad-un的值為”S-ad-xn的值,’’CIC-ιΓ的值為 &quot;CIC-χπ的值。亦即,中繼局閘道的位址為在前述步驟 ΗΑ 05中交換ip封包1452的IP位址之送信端與受信端的值, 電路號碼的值則不變。I p封包1 4 5 5經過控制通信電路 1 4 3 1 - 2、路由器1 4 3 1、控制通信電路1 4 3 1 - 1,到達中繼控 制部1 423(圖233之步驟HA13)。中繼控制部1 423接收IP封 包1 455 (圖257之S1462 - 2),從IP封包1 455中取出IP位址 ’S-ad-u”及&quot;D-ad-un、電路號碼&quot;CIC-u&quot;。然後,由於在 位址接續表1 438内部,標記情報’’ S-ad-un與,,D-ad-x,,一 致’標記情報n D-ad-u’'與” S-ad-xn —致,電路號碼” ciC-u 1與’’ CIC-xn —致,而形成圖239所示的信號單元1 456(圖Switch 1 409 forwards the signal unit 1454 to the inside of the public telephone switching network 1406. Unit k 1454 passes through the switch 1413 (step HA11) and reaches the relay gateway via the control communication circuit 1416. 4 02 Relay control inside Part 1 424 (step HA12). The relay control unit 1 424 receives the signal unit 1454 (S146 and 2 in FIG. 256). 'Remove the signal bureau mark (sl461-3) inside the signal unit 1454, and check whether there is a signal bureau mark in the address connection table 1 439. DPC-3, OPC-3, SLS-3, CIC-3 "with the same contents (step S1462-4). In this example, because there is a consistent record in the address continuation table 1439_2, an IP packet 1455 (S1461-9 in Figure 256) is formed as shown in Figure 238, and is transmitted to the IP forwarding network 1 400 (S1461 -10). The IP address of the sender and receiver in the packet 1455 is ’’ S-a d-uπ, and the IP address of the receiver is, d-a d-u,, and the circuit number is ’, CIC-un. Here, the value of "S-ad-ιΓ" is the value of "D-ad-χπ" "The value of D-ad-un" is the value of "S-ad-xn", and the value of "CIC-ιΓ" is " ; The value of CIC-χπ. That is, the address of the relay gateway is the value of the sending end and the receiving end of the IP address of the IP packet 1452 exchanged in the foregoing step ΗΑ 05, and the value of the circuit number is unchanged. The IP packet 1 4 5 5 passes the control communication circuit 1 4 3 1-2, the router 1 4 3 1, the control communication circuit 1 4 3 1-1, and reaches the relay control section 1 423 (step HA13 in Fig. 233). The relay control unit 1 423 receives the IP packet 1 455 (S1462-2 in FIG. 257), and takes out the IP address 'S-ad-u' and "D-ad-un, circuit number" CIC from the IP packet 1 455. -u &quot;. Then, since the address continuation table 1 438, the tag information `` S-ad-un and, D-ad-x, coincides with the tag information n D-ad-u '' and `` S -ad-xn is the same, the circuit numbers "ciC-u 1 and" CIC-xn are the same, and the signal unit 1 456 shown in Fig. 239 (Fig.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第212頁 1245997 發明說明(209) 257之S1462-8)。接著,傳送至控制通信電路1415 (S1462-9),信號單元1456到達中繼交換機1412(步驟 HA14),信號單元1 456被轉送到公眾電話交換網14〇5中, 並到達交換機1 408 (步驟HA1 5)。 另一方面,電話機1421經由步驟HA〇8接收著信通知, 將表示電話呼出中的信號單元回信告知交換機14〇9(步驟 HA20),父換機1409將通知電話呼出中的信號單元([?6訊 息)通知交換機1413(步驟HA21)。交換機1413將前述信號 單元經由控制通信電路1416傳送給中繼閘道14〇2的中繼控 制部1 424(步驟HA22),中繼控制部1424參照其内部的位址 接續表1 439-2,透過圖256所示之前述同樣的程序,形成 通知前述電話呼出中的IP封包。前述形成的Ip封包通過控 制通信電路1431-2、路由器1431、控制通信電路, 到達中繼控制部1 423(步驟HA23)。 中繼控制部1 423接收IP封包’形成通知前述電話呼出 中的信號單元’並將前述信號單元傳送給控制通信電路 1415(S1462-9)。前述信號單元係通過中繼交換機:|412(步 驟HA24),到達交換機1 408(步驟HA25)。交換機14〇8將電 話機1421呼出中通知電話機1420(步驟HA26)。 其次,當電話機1421的使用者對電話呼出應答時(步 驟HA30),之後就從交換機14〇9傳送通知應答的信號單 元’經過父換機1 41 3 (步驟H A 3 1 ),到達中繼控制部1 &amp; 2 4 ( 步驟HA32)。在中繼控制部1 424中參照位址接續表1 439, 形成通知應答的IP封包(ANM),前述ip封包經由控制通信 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p.212 1245997 Description of the Invention (209) 257 (S1462-8). Then, it is transmitted to the control communication circuit 1415 (S1462-9), the signal unit 1456 reaches the relay switch 1412 (step HA14), the signal unit 1 456 is transferred to the public telephone switching network 1405, and reaches the switch 1 408 (step HA1 5). On the other hand, the telephone set 1421 receives the letter notification via step HA08, and returns the signal unit indicating that the phone is outbound to the exchange 1409 (step HA20). 6 message) notifies the switch 1413 (step HA21). The switch 1413 transmits the aforementioned signal unit to the relay control unit 1 424 of the relay gateway 142 via the control communication circuit 1416 (step HA22). The relay control unit 1424 refers to its internal address connection table 1 439-2, Through the aforementioned same procedure shown in FIG. 256, an IP packet is notified to inform the aforementioned telephone call. The IP packet formed as described above reaches the relay control unit 1 423 through the control communication circuit 1431-2, the router 1431, and the control communication circuit (step HA23). The relay control unit 1 423 receives the IP packet 'to form a signal unit notifying the aforementioned telephone call and transmits the aforementioned signal unit to the control communication circuit 1415 (S1462-9). The aforementioned signal unit passes through the relay switch: | 412 (step HA24) and reaches the switch 1 408 (step HA25). The exchange 1408 notifies the telephone set 1420 while the telephone set 1421 is being called (step HA26). Second, when the user of the telephone set 1421 responds to the outgoing call (step HA30), the signal unit notifying the response is transmitted from the switch 1409 through the parent switch 1 41 3 (step HA 3 1) to the relay control. Part 1 &amp; 2 4 (step HA32). The relay control unit 1 424 refers to the address continuation table 1 439 to form a notification response IP packet (ANM). The aforementioned IP packet passes control communication 1245997

電路1431-2、路由器1431、控制通信電路1431 —丨,到達中 繼控制部1 423 (步驟HA33)。在中繼控制部1 423中參照位址 接續表1 438,形成通知應答的信號單元,經由控制通信電 路1415,再經過交換機1412(步驟HA34),到達交換機 1408(步驟HA35)。交換機1 408將應答信號送給電話機 1 420 (步驟HA36)。 ” 〈〈位址接續表的完成〉〉 參照圖232加以說明。中繼控制部1 423將前述媒體路 徑識別子1?-8”、前述取得的聲音控制部1 428内的模組的 内部位址&quot;IA6&quot;、外部IP位址” EA6”、聲音控制部1 428用以 傳送聲音的埠號碼&quot;5012”提示給聲音控制部1 427時(圖253 之步驟1 423-2),聲音控制部1 427將前述Ip位址&quot;U6、 ΕΑ6Π及前述埠號碼” 5〇ΐ2π寫入至媒體路徑接續表1 429m (圖248 ),完成媒體路徑接續表1 42 9 —2 (圖25〇),並向中繼 控制部1 4 2 3報告(步驟1 4 2 7 - 2 )。 在前述接續階段中,用以設定電話機丨4 2 〇及丨4 2丨之電 話電路的公眾電話交換網14〇5設定的電路號碼&quot;CK — 丨,,與 IP轉送網1 400設定的電路號碼” CIC — x”,在位址接續表 38中具有對應關係,IP轉送網14〇〇設定的電路號碼 CIC-X與公眾電話交換網14〇6設定的電路號碼,,CiC_2&quot;, φ 在位址接續表1439中具有對應關係。這兩個對應關係在電 話機1 420及1421之電話通信中始終是一定的。 &lt;&lt;通信階段〉〉 透過以上的程序’在電話機142〇與電話機1421間的通The circuit 1431-2, the router 1431, and the control communication circuit 1431- 丨 reach the relay control unit 1 423 (step HA33). The relay control unit 1 423 refers to the address continuation table 1 438 to form a signal unit for notification response, passes through the control communication circuit 1415, and then passes through the switch 1412 (step HA34) to reach the switch 1408 (step HA35). The exchange 1 408 sends an answer signal to the telephone set 1 420 (step HA36). "<Completion of the address continuation table>" The description will be made with reference to Fig. 232. The relay control unit 1 423 sets the media path identifiers 1 to 8 above, and the internal addresses of the modules in the sound control unit 1 428 obtained above. &quot; IA6 &quot;, external IP address "EA6", port number of voice control unit 1 428 used to transmit voice &quot; 5012 "when prompted to voice control unit 1 427 (step 1 423-2 in Figure 253), voice control Department 1 427 wrote the aforementioned IP address &quot; U6, ΕΑ6Π, and the aforementioned port number "50〇2π into the media path connection table 1 429m (Figure 248), and completed the media path connection table 1 42 9-2 (Figure 25) And report to the relay control unit 1 4 2 3 (step 1 4 2 7-2). In the aforementioned continuation phase, the circuit number &quot; CK- 丨 set by the public telephone exchange network 1405, which is used to set the telephone circuits of the telephone sets 丨 4 2 0 and 丨 4 2 丨, and the circuit set with the IP transfer network 1 400 The number "CIC — x" has a corresponding relationship in the address continuation table 38. The circuit number CIC-X set by the IP forwarding network 1400 and the circuit number set by the public telephone switching network 1406, CiC_2 &quot;, φ in The address connection table 1439 has a corresponding relationship. These two correspondences are always constant in the telephone communication of the telephones 1 420 and 1421. &lt; &lt; Communication stage >〉 Through the above procedure, communication between the telephone set 1420 and the telephone set 1421 is performed.

2049-3793-PFiRAY.ptd 12459972049-3793-PFiRAY.ptd 1245997

上*透過以上的程序,在電話機142〇與電話機 話變成可能,而進行聲音通信(步驟H )。 :、 被送出的=:在交換咖8中被… 的托號與茸曰仏唬後,被送給交換機丨4丨2,經^ 電路U17,再經過中繼閘道14〇1内的聲音控制部i / u 經過聲音通信電路1 433- 1、路由器1 433、聲音 1 433-2、中繼閘道1 402内的聲音控制部1 428,經^ 信電路1 41 8、耷換機1 4 1 3、交換機1 4 〇 9,到達電話機曰 1421。從電話機1421至電話機1420係與前述說明反方向被Through the above procedure, it becomes possible to make a telephone call with the telephone set 1420 to perform voice communication (step H). :, Sent out =: After being fooled and exchanged in the exchange coffee 8, it was sent to the switch 丨 4 丨 2, through ^ circuit U17, and then through the sound in the relay gate 1401 The control unit i / u passes through the voice communication circuit 1 433-1, router 1 433, voice 1 433-2, and the voice control unit 1 428 in the relay gateway 1 402, via the communication circuit 1 41 8, and the switch 1 4 1 3, Switch 1 4 09, arrived at the phone 1421. Telephone 1421 to telephone 1420 are opposite to

轉迗,聲音與電話接續控制的通信電路可在交換機14〇8盥 交換機1 40 9間分離。 〃 &lt;&lt;釋放階段〉〉 當使用者放下受話器時,通信的釋放從電話機142〇被 通知至交換機1 408 (圖23 3的步驟HA40),交換機14〇8將釋 放訊息(REL)通知交換機1412(步驟HA41)。交換機1412 — 接收釋放§fl息’即將釋放結束訊息(r l C )送回給交換機 1408(步驟HA55),交換機1412將釋放訊息(REL)通知中繼 控制部1 423(步驟HA42)。中繼控制部1423將釋放結束訊息 (RLC)送回給交換機1412(步驟HA54),中繼控制部1 423將 釋放訊息(REL)通知中繼控制部1 424 (步驟HA43),然後, 中繼控制部1 424將釋放結束訊息(RLC)送回給中繼控制部 1423(步驟HA53)。中繼控制部1424將釋放訊息(REL)通知 交換機1413(步驟HA44),交換機1413將釋放結束訊息 (RLC)送回給中繼控制部1424(步驟HA52),交換機1413將In turn, the communication circuit for voice and telephone connection control can be separated between switch 1408 and switch 1409. 〃 &lt; &lt; Release stage 〉〉 When the user puts down the receiver, the release of the communication is notified from the phone 1420 to the switch 1 408 (step HA40 in FIG. 23), and the switch 1408 notifies the switch of the release message (REL). 1412 (step HA41). Switch 1412—Receive the release §fl message 'and send the release end message (r l C) back to switch 1408 (step HA55). Switch 1412 notifies the relay control unit 1 423 of the release message (REL) (step HA42). The relay control unit 1423 returns a release end message (RLC) to the switch 1412 (step HA54), the relay control unit 1 423 notifies the relay control unit 1 424 of the release message (REL) (step HA43), and then, the relay The control unit 1 424 returns a release end message (RLC) to the relay control unit 1423 (step HA53). The relay control unit 1424 notifies the switch 1413 of the release message (REL) (step HA44), the switch 1413 returns a release end message (RLC) to the relay control unit 1424 (step HA52), and the switch 1413 sends

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第215頁 1245997 五、發明說明(212) 釋放訊息(REL)通知交換機14〇9(步驟HA45)。交換機1409 將釋放結束訊息(RLC)送回給交換機1413(步驟HA51),交 換機1409將釋放通知通知電話機丨421(步驟HA46)。 中繼控制部1 423在步驟HA42中(圖258之步驟S1463- 2 )’判定前述信號單元為釋放訊息(REL)時(步驟sl 463-3、 S1 463-4、S1 463-5 ),清除位址接續表的該記錄(步驟 S1 463- 6 )。結果,位址接續表1 439 —2(圖247)的記錄變為 如位址接續表1439-1(圖246 )所示的空欄。 〈&lt;媒體路徑記錄的清除〉〉 中繼控制部1423在前述步驟HA43中 ........... 指示清除聲音1 制部1 427上媒體路徑接續表1 429 —2 (圖25〇)的該媒體路徑 &quot;MP-8&quot;的記錄(圖254之步驟1 423_3),聲音控制部1 427報 告該媒體路徑接續表之記錄的清除(步驟1 427 —3 )。又,中 繼控制部1 424在前述步驟N53中,指示清除聲音控制部 1428上媒體路徑接續表143〇 —丨(圖24 9)的該媒體路徑 ==錄=之步驟1424 —2),聲音控制部報 。以媒體路徑接,表之記錄的清除(步驟1 428 —2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 215 1245997 V. Description of the invention (212) The release message (REL) informs the switch 1409 (step HA45). The exchange 1409 returns a release completion message (RLC) to the exchange 1413 (step HA51), and the exchange 1409 notifies the telephone set 421 of the release notification (step HA46). When the relay control unit 1 423 determines in step HA42 (step S1463- 2 in FIG. 258) that the aforementioned signal unit is a release message (REL) (steps sl 463-3, S1 463-4, and S1 463-5), it clears This record of the address continuation list (step S1 463-6). As a result, the record of the address continuation table 1 439-2 (FIG. 247) becomes an empty column as shown in the address continuation table 1439-1 (FIG. 246). <& Clearing of Media Path Records >> The relay control unit 1423 instructs to clear the media path connection table 1 429 —2 on the sound 1 control unit 1 427 in the aforementioned step HA43. 25〇) of the record of the media path &quot; MP-8 &quot; (step 1 423_3 of FIG. 254), the sound control unit 1 427 reports the erasure of the record of the media path connection table (step 1 427-3). Also, in step N53, the relay control unit 1 424 instructs to clear the media path continuation table 143 of the sound control unit 1428 (see FIG. 24 9) for the media path == record = step 1424-2), The control department reported. By media path, the record of the table is cleared (step 1 428 —

該記錄可用於運用記錄。 I &lt;〈電話機1 42 0與電話機1 422間的通信》 從電話機1 422,經由媒體路由器14〇4、呈膠 機能的終端閘道14G3、巾_道魔 電、有膠囊化 ,打電話給電話機1421的終端間通信, 也就是有關電話機1—媒體路由器— 广控制方法 換網-電話機2的終端間通信接續、法:-:眾電話交 貝衩制方法,在其他實施例This record can be used for operational records. I &lt; <Communication between Telephone 1 42 0 and Telephone 1 422》 From telephone 1 422, via media router 1404, the terminal gateway 14G3, which functions as a glue, and the phone's magic channel, with encapsulation, call The communication between the terminals of the telephone 1421, that is, related to the telephone 1—the media router—the radio control method, the network exchange—the communication between the terminals of the telephone 2, and the method is as follows:

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第216頁 1245997 丨 一丨_ —— 五、發明說明(213) 中加以說明。與前述反方向的電話機2_公眾電 -IP轉送網-媒體路由器-電話機κ終端間通信 = 法透過大約相同的程序,可依據容易類推的程序實 電話機1 420,經由公眾電話交換網14〇5,再經 道&quot;^、具有膠囊化機能的終端間道14〇3、媒體路由繼閘 1 404,打電話給電話機1 422的終端間通信接續控制^, 說明在其他實施例中具有膠囊化機能的閘道之機能,可透 過與前述說明大旅相同的程序實施。另外,從電話機142〇 ’經由公眾電活父換網1 4 0 5,再經由中繼閘道1 4 〇 1、具 有膠囊化機能的終端閘道1 4 03、媒體路由器1 404,經過、 UNI通信電路1419、公眾電話交換網14〇7,打電話給電 話機1 4 2 3的終端間通信接續控制方法係,說明在其他實施 例中透過經由UN I通信電路之公眾電話交換網的終端間通 信接續控制程序,可透過與前述說明大概相同的程序實 施。 摘要以上如下。在2個電話機間的終端間接續控制中 ,依序經由電話機1、公眾電話交換網1、N NI介面通信電 路1、IP轉送網所屬之中繼閘道1與中繼閘道2、NNI介面 通信電路2、公眾電話交換網2、電話機2。其他的方 法,則是依序經由電話機1、公眾電話交換網1、N NI介面 通信電路1、IP轉送網所屬之中繼閘道1與具有膠囊化機 能的閘道、媒體路由器、電話機2。 1 5.不將聲音線I P膠囊化的第1 5實施例·· 本實施例係將其他實施例中的網點裝置變更為不I p膠 2049-3793-PF » RAY.ptd 第217頁 1245997 五、發明說明(214) 囊化的終端裝置,終端閘道變更為非膠囊化終端閘道,中 繼閘道變更為非膠囊化中繼閘道。聲音lp封包不Ip膠囊 化,移除了表管理伺服器及代理電話伺服器。 / 在圖260中,1 600係IP轉送網,1601係公眾電話交換 網,1 6 02係非膠囊化終端閘道,16〇3係終端裝置,16〇4係 終端閘道控制部(SEP),1 60 5係非膠囊化中繼閘道,mm' 係中繼控制部(STP),1 6 07係聲音控制部,16〇8係中繼交 換機,1 60 9係加入者交換機,161〇係電話號碼&quot;TN—丨&quot;的電 活機’ 1 611係電話號碼&quot;T N - 2&quot;的電話機,1 6 1 2及1 6 1 3係控 制IP通信電路,1 6 1 4及1 61 5係聲音I p通信電路,i 6丨6係共 通線信號方式之控制通信電路,1 6丨7係聲音通信電路, U20係位址管理表,1671係電話管理伺服器,i672係電話 號碼伺服器。非膠囊化中繼閘道丨6 〇 5為可與非膠囊化終端 間道1 6 0 2相互通信的中繼閘道。可使用媒體路由器丨6 6 〇或 電話機等IP轉送網的外部之裝置類的丨p位址稱為外部丨p位 址’不可使用I P轉送網1 6 〇 〇外部之裝置類的丨p轉送網丨6 〇 〇 内部專用的I P位址稱為内部I p位址。電話管理伺服器1 6 71 具有外部IP位址&quot;EA91&quot;及内部IP位址,1 I Α9Γ,其分開使用 可提升情報安全性。 &lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉 ▲ 以從電話機1 6 1 〇向電話機1 6 11進行電話通信為例。當 卞起電話機1610的受話器時,呼出信號被傳送給媒體路由 器1 660 (圖261之步驟B〇1),媒體路由器166〇確認電話呼出 (步驟B02)。接著,形成包含送信端ιρ位址&quot;ΕΑ1 π、受信端 I! 第218頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(215) IP位址’,ΕΑ91Π、電話號碼’’TN-1”、電話號碼&quot;TN-2&quot;、聲音 傳送用痒5虎碼” 5〇〇6π、附加情報” Inf〇_2„的ιρ封包163〇( 圖,262 ),,\並傳送給終端裝置1 603 (步驟B03)。在此,IP位 址EA1係媒體路由器丨6 6〇的ιρ位址,π位址,,EA91 &quot;係電 話管理伺服器1671的外部IP位址,Ip封包163〇的酬載部分 係UDP封包’送信端及受信端埠號碼均為,,5 0 6 0 π。 &lt;〈經由終端裝置的封包過濾器〉〉2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 216 1245997 丨 a 丨 _ _-5. Description of invention (213). In the opposite direction to the aforementioned telephone 2_Public electricity-IP transfer network-Media router-Telephone κ Terminal communication = Method Through approximately the same procedure, the telephone 1 420 can be implemented according to an easily analogous procedure, via the public telephone exchange network 1405 ^, Via the channel &quot; ^, the inter-terminal channel 1403 with an encapsulation function, the media routing relay 1404, and the inter-terminal communication connection control by calling the telephone 1 422 ^, indicating that there is encapsulation in other embodiments The function of the functioning gateway can be implemented through the same procedures as in the previous tour. In addition, from the telephone set 142 ′ through the public electrical live network switching network 1 405, and then through the relay gateway 1 401, the terminal gateway 1 4 03 with the capsule function, the media router 1 404, and the UNI Communication circuit 1419, public telephone exchange network 1407, and a method for controlling inter-terminal communication connection of a telephone set 1 2 2 3, explaining the inter-terminal communication through the public telephone exchange network via the UN I communication circuit in other embodiments The continuation control procedure can be implemented by the same procedure as that described above. The summary is as follows. In the indirect continuous control of the terminal between the two telephones, the telephone 1, the public telephone exchange network 1, the NNI interface communication circuit 1, the relay gateway 1 and the relay gateway 2, and the NNI interface to which the IP forwarding network belongs are sequentially connected. Communication circuit 2, public telephone exchange network 2, telephone 2. The other methods are sequentially through the telephone set 1, the public telephone exchange network 1, the NNI interface communication circuit 1, the relay gateway 1 to which the IP forwarding network belongs, and the gateway, media router, and telephone 2 with the capsule function. 1 5. The 5th embodiment without encapsulating the sound line IP · This embodiment is to change the outlet device in other embodiments to not IP glue 2049-3793-PF »RAY.ptd Page 217 1245997 5 2. Description of the invention (214) The encapsulated terminal device is changed to an unencapsulated terminal gateway, and the relay gateway is changed to an unencapsulated relay gateway. The sound lp packet is not encapsulated in IP, and the table management server and proxy telephone server are removed. / In Figure 260, 1 600 series IP forwarding network, 1601 series public telephone switching network, 160 series non-encapsulated terminal gateway, 1603 series terminal device, 1604 series terminal gateway control unit (SEP) 1 60 5 series non-encapsulated relay gateway, mm 'series relay control section (STP), 16 07 series sound control section, 160 series relay switch, 160 series 9 subscriber switch, 161. Department of telephone number &quot; TN- 丨 &quot; electric machine '1 611 Telephone of telephone number &quot; TN-2 &quot;, 1 6 1 2 and 1 6 1 3 control IP communication circuit, 1 6 1 4 and 1 61 5 series voice I p communication circuit, i 6 丨 6 series common line signal control communication circuit, 1 6 丨 7 series voice communication circuit, U20 series address management table, 1671 series telephone management server, i672 series telephone number server. The unencapsulated relay gateway 605 is a relay gateway that can communicate with the unencapsulated terminal channel 1602. You can use media routers. 66 or external devices such as telephones. IP addresses are called external. P addresses are not allowed. IP forwarding networks are not available. 1 6 are external devices such as p.丨 6 00 internal dedicated IP address is called the internal IP address. The telephone management server 1 6 71 has an external IP address &quot; EA91 &quot; and an internal IP address, 1 I Α9Γ, which can be used separately to improve intelligence security. &lt; &lt; Continuation stage >〉 ▲ Let's take a telephone communication from the telephone 1610 to the telephone 1611 as an example. When the receiver of the telephone 1610 is picked up, the outgoing call signal is transmitted to the media router 1 660 (step B01 in FIG. 261), and the media router 1660 confirms the outgoing call (step B02). Then, it contains the address of the sending terminal, ΙΑπ, the receiving terminal I! Page 218 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the invention (215) IP address', ΕΑ91Π, phone number `` TN -1 ", phone number &quot; TN-2 &quot;, itch 5 tiger code for voice transmission" 5〇〇 6π, additional information "Inf〇_2" ιρ packet 163〇 (Figure, 262), and send it to The terminal device 1 603 (step B03). Here, the IP address EA1 is the media address of the media router, 66 address, π address, and EA91 &quot; is the external IP address of the telephone management server 1671, and the payload part of the IP packet 1630 is a UDP packet. 'The port numbers of the sender and receiver are both, 5 0 6 0 π. &lt; <packet filter via terminal device >>

當終端裝置J 6 03接收IP封包1 63 0時,檢查包含於1?封 包内部的送信端IP位址”EA1 ”、送信端埠號碼&quot;5〇6〇” 、受信端IP位址” ΕΑ9Γ、受信端埠號碼,,5〇6〇,,全部是否有 被登錄以做為位址管理表162〇内部的記錄。在本例中,由 於包含以做為位址管理表丨6 20 —丨(圖263)的第j行的記錄, 心鳊裝置1 6 0 3將IP封包1 6 3 0内部的受信端I p位址&quot;E a 9丨”變 換成電話管理伺服器的内部IP位址”A91&quot;( 次,根據位址管理細Η内的該記錄之(右出介其面 &quot;IF 1612”的指定,送出至控制ΙΡ通信電路1612以做為ιρ 封包1631(步驟Β04)。再者,在接收到的Ιρ封包163〇内部 的IΡ位址及埠號碼不登錄至位址管理表丨6 2 〇的情況中,廢 棄IP封包1630。如上述,進行封包的過濾。When the terminal device J 6 03 receives the IP packet 1 63 0, it checks the sender IP address "EA1", the sender port number &quot; 5〇〇〇, and the recipient IP address "ΕΑ9Γ contained in the 1? Packet. 3. Whether the port number of the trusted terminal, 5060, has been registered as the internal record of the address management table 1620. In this example, since it contains a record that is used as the jth row of the address management table 丨 6 20 — 丨 (Figure 263), the heartbeat device 16 0 3 sends the IP packet 1 6 3 0 as the trusted end I p Address &quot; E a 9 丨 "is converted to the internal IP address of the telephone management server" A91 "(times, according to the designation of the record in the address management details (the right side of the interface &quot; IF 1612") And sends it to the control IP communication circuit 1612 as the ιρ packet 1631 (step B04). Furthermore, the IP address and port number inside the received Ιρ packet 1630 are not registered in the address management table 丨 6 2 〇 In this case, the IP packet 1630 is discarded. As described above, the packet is filtered.

&lt;&lt;CIC管理表的形成〉〉 電話管理伺服器1671接收IP封包1631,將電話管理伺 服器1 671的内部IP位址I A9 Γ’、程序區段” J AM„ 、送作端 電話號·,,ΤΝ-Γ、受信端電話號碼” TN —2&quot;、前述1?位&quot;址 π ΕΑΓ、前述聲音傳送用的埠號碼” 5〇〇6&quot;、寫入時刻(年月&lt; &lt; Formation of CIC Management Table 〉〉 The telephone management server 1671 receives the IP packet 1631, and sends the internal IP address I A9 Γ 'of the telephone management server 1 671, the program section "J AM", and sends it to the end phone No. ,, TN-Γ, telephone number of the receiving end "TN-2", the aforementioned 1-digit "address π ΕΑΓ", the aforementioned port number for voice transmission "5000", the time of writing (year

1245997 五、發明說明(216) ^ 日時分秒)n St 6&quot;,寫入至電話管理伺服器1671内部保存的 CIC管理表之記錄上,以做為CIC管理表1671-1(圖264)。 其次,電話管理伺服器丨671將詢問受信端電話號碼” tn — 2,, 的IP封包1 63 2- 1 (圖265 )顯示於電話號碼伺服器1 672 (步驟 B06),電話號碼伺服器1 672則將Ip位址” GW03&quot;儲存於1?封 包1632-2(圖266)上並且回答(步驟β〇7)。在此,前述ip位 址’'GW0 3&quot;係成為中繼閘道1 6 0 5的1?位址。 &lt;&lt;電路號碼的管理〉〉 電話管理伺服器1671根據對於IP位址” IA91π及IP位址 &quot;GW03&quot;決定的Cl C號碼形成規則,決定cic號碼&quot;CIC-2,,, 與IP位址’’ GW0 3’’ 一起寫入至CIC管理表。此結果被記錄於 CIC管理表1671-2(圖267)的記錄中。接著,電話管理伺服 器1671參照IP封包1631及CIC管理表1671-2,形成IP封包 1 634(圖268)(IAM封包),並將ip封包1 634傳送給中繼閘道 1 605 (步驟B09)。 〈&lt;中繼控制部的動作〉〉 當中繼控制部1 606接收IP封包1 634(圖268)時(步驟 B09),從IP封包1634取出送信端ip位址” ΙΑ9ι”、受信端IP 位址’’GW03’1、電路號碼&quot;CIC-2”、程序區段&quot;ΙΑΜΠ、送信端 電話號碼π ΤΝ- 1 ’’、受信端電話號碼&quot;τν-2,,、外部IΡ位址 &quot;ΕΑ1&quot;、聲音傳送用埠號碼” 5006 π,與時刻&quot;St- 7·,一起寫 入記錄,以做為中繼閘道1 6 0 5内部保存的c I C管理表 1 605- 1 (圖26 9 )的記錄。 並且,中繼控制部1 60 6檢索信號局位址管理表1 62 7(1245997 V. Description of the invention (216) ^ Day, hour, minute and second) n St 6 &quot; is written to the record of the CIC management table stored in the telephone management server 1671 as the CIC management table 1671-1 (Figure 264). Secondly, the phone management server 671 will ask the IP address of the receiving end "tn — 2 ,, 1 63 2- 1 (Figure 265) and display it on the phone number server 1 672 (step B06), and the phone number server 1 672 stores the IP address "GW03" in the 1? Packet 1632-2 (Figure 266) and answers (step β〇7). Here, the aforementioned IP address' 'GW0 3' is a 1? Address of the relay gateway 1660. &lt; &lt; Management of Circuit Numbers &gt;> The telephone management server 1671 decides the cic number &quot; CIC-2, and, based on the Cl C number formation rule determined for the IP address "IA91π and the IP address" "GW03". The IP address `` GW0 3 '' is written into the CIC management table. The result is recorded in the CIC management table 1671-2 (Figure 267). Then, the telephone management server 1671 refers to the IP packet 1631 and the CIC management. Table 1671-2 forms the IP packet 1 634 (Figure 268) (IAM packet), and transmits the ip packet 1 634 to the relay gateway 1 605 (step B09). << Action of the relay control unit> When the control unit 1 606 receives the IP packet 1 634 (Figure 268) (step B09), it takes out the sending end IP address “ΙΑ 9ι”, the receiving end IP address `` GW03'1, the circuit number &quot; CIC -2 ", program section &quot; ΙΑΜΠ, sender's phone number π ΤΝ-1", recipient's phone number &quot; τν-2 ,,, external IP address &quot; ΕΑ1 &quot;, voice transmission port number "5006 π, with the time &quot; St-7 ·, write the record together as the internal c saved in the relay gateway 1 6 0 5 Records of the IC management table 1 605-1 (FIG. 26 9), and the relay control unit 1 60 6 searches the signal station address management table 1 62 7 (

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第220頁 1245997 五、發明說明(217) ' --------- ,提示電話號碼m',以取得管理電話機1611之 ^換^_,信號局位址&quot;Pc,&quot;。中繼控制部16〇6根據 擇&quot;么sL;n奐網16〇L預先決定的規則’決定信號鏈接選 、首電唬碼C~3&quot;。中繼控制部1 60 6將中繼閘 ^ 0 、仏旒局位址’’ PC-3”、前述取得的&quot;PC-09&quot;、前述 。说鏈接選擇&quot;SLS-3&quot;、前述電路號碼&quot;CIC_3&quot;、前 、IP位址&quot;IA91&quot;、電路號碼&quot;cic_2&quot;,與新 的媒體路徑識別汗&quot;ΜΡ-7&quot;—起寫入,以做為位址接續表 25的新圮錄。結果,位址接續表變成丨^卜丨所示(圖 =1)。接著,中繼控制部1 6 06形成包含有前述信號局位址 09j與” PC-3”、前述信號鏈接選擇” SLS_3 ”與電路號碼 一 C-3&quot;、訊息&quot;IAM&quot;、電話號碼” TN-i ”及„TN_2&quot;的信號單 元1635(圖272),並傳送給控制通信電路1616(步驟β1〇)。 &lt;&lt;中繼控制部與聲音控制部的聯合動作&gt;〉 中繼控制部1 6 0 6將前述媒體路徑識別子&quot;Mp _ 7 ”、前述 外部IP位址” EA1&quot;、聲音傳送用埠號碼&quot;5〇〇6„,經由情報 電路1 629通知聲音控制部16〇7。聲音控制部16〇7將前述通 ,的情報寫入以做為媒體路徑接續表丨6 2 8的記錄。並且, ,音控制部1 6 0 7決定用以將聲音從聲音控制部丨6 〇 7傳送至 聲音通信電路1617的邏輯通信電路,寫入該邏輯通信電路 識別子n CH-1π以做為媒體路徑接續表1 628的記錄。以上的 結果顯示於媒體路徑接續表1 628-1 (圖273)。 &lt;〈交換網的動作與ACM訊息〉〉 交換機1 6 0 8係經由控制通信電路丨6丨6接收信號單元 1245997 五、發明說明(218) 1 635(步驟B10),將信號單元1 63 5轉送給交換機16〇9(步驟 B11 )。父換機1 6 0 9接收信號單元丨6 3 5,確認内部包含的受 信端電話號碼” TM-2”是否可能著信,若可能著信,則將著 信,知,知電話機1611(步驟B12)。並且,形成並送回通 =信號單元1 635的接收之信號單元1 635_丨(圖27 5 ),信號 單元係經由交換機1 6 0 8 (步驟b 1 3 ),到達中繼閘道1 6 〇 5 (步 驟B1 4 )。中繼控制部1 6 0 6根據接收到的信號單元丨6 3 5 —丨的 標記情報’參照位址接續表1 625一丨(圖271),取得用於1{) 封包形成的位址情報。形成IP封包1651(ACM訊息)(圖2 76 ) ,將IP封包1651送給電話管理伺服器1671(步驟β15)。電 話管理词服器1671從接收的1?封包1651中取出電路號碼 &quot;CIC-2”及程序區段&quot;ACM&quot;,檢查電話管理伺服器1671保 存的CIC管理表1671 - 2(圖26 7),找出自己的ip位址&quot;IA91” | 2對象的IP位址&quot;GWO3”、電路號碼” CIC 一2”的記錄,將nc 官理表1 671 - 2的該記錄之程序區段攔改寫為” ACM„。 接著,電話管理伺服器1671形成表示接收前述ACM訊 息的IP封包,並通知媒體路由器166〇(步驟B18、B19)。 &lt;〈媒體路徑接續表〉〉 與前述步驟B10並行,或是在步驟B1〇結束之後,中繼 控制部1 606將媒體路徑識別子,,MP-7”提示給聲音控制部 1 6 0 7,同時要求IP位址與埠號碼。於是,聲音控制部丨6 〇 7 將聲音控制部1 6 07送出給聲音Ip通信電話1615的1?封包之 送信端IP位址” EA7”與UDP封包之埠號碼,,5〇〇8,,回答給中及 控制部1 60 6。聲音控制部1 6 07確保從交換機16〇8接收之邏 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第222頁 1245997 五、發明說明(219) 輯聲音通信電路’將其識別子”CH-2”記錄於媒體路徑接續 表1 628 -2 (圖274)的記錄上。媒體路徑接續表的記錄之左 側變成聲音控制部1 607之IP位址” EA7”及埠號碼”50 〇8”, 右側變成通信對象處的IP位址” ΕΑΓ及埠號碼” 5〇〇6π。中 繼控制部1 60 6接收IP位址” ΕΑ7&quot;及埠號碼&quot;5008,,,寫入c 1C 管理表1 60 5- 1 (圖2 6 9 )。其結果則變為cic管理表1 6 0 5-2 (圖279)。 &lt;&lt;CPG訊息的傳送〉〉2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 220 1245997 V. Description of the invention (217) '---------, prompt the phone number m' to obtain the management telephone 1611 ^ change ^ _, signal bureau Address &quot; Pc, &quot;. The relay control unit 1606 determines the signal link selection and the first electric power code C ~ 3 according to the "selection rule" of the network 160L. The relay control unit 1 60 6 sets the relay gate ^ 0, the office address "PC-3", the "PC-09" obtained above, the foregoing. Said link selection "SLS-3", the foregoing circuit Number &quot; CIC_3 &quot;, front, IP address &quot; IA91 &quot;, circuit number &quot; cic_2 &quot;, and the new media path identification Khan &quot; MP-7 &quot; —are written as the address continuation table 25 The new record. As a result, the address continuity table becomes as shown in (Figure = 1). Then, the relay control unit 1 06 composes the signal office address 09j and "PC-3", and the aforementioned signals. The link selects "SLS_3" and the circuit unit "C-3", message "IAM", telephone number "TN-i" and "TN_2" signal unit 1635 (Figure 272), and transmits it to the control communication circuit 1616 (step β1 〇). &lt; &lt; Joint operation of the relay control section and the sound control section &gt;> The relay control section 1 6 0 6 sets the aforementioned media path identifier &quot; Mp_7 &quot;, the aforementioned external IP address &quot; EA1 &quot;, for voice transmission The port number &quot; 5000 &quot; is notified to the voice control unit 1607 via the intelligence circuit 1 629. The voice control unit 1607 writes the above-mentioned communication information as a record of the media path connection table 6 2 8 In addition, the sound control unit 16 0 7 determines a logical communication circuit for transmitting sound from the sound control unit 6 07 to the sound communication circuit 1617, and writes the logical communication circuit identifier n CH-1π as a medium. Record of path continuity table 1 628. The above results are shown in media path continuity table 1 628-1 (Figure 273). &Lt; &quot; Operation of switching network and ACM information &quot;> Switch 1 6 0 8 is controlled by communication circuit 6丨 6 receiving signal unit 1245997 V. Description of the invention (218) 1 635 (step B10), transfer the signal unit 1 63 5 to the switch 1609 (step B11). The parent switch 1 6 0 9 receives the signal unit 丨 6 3 5. Check if the phone number “TM-2” of the trusted end included It is possible to write a letter, if it is possible to write a letter, know, know the phone 1611 (step B12). And, form and send back the signal unit 1 635_ 丨 (Figure 27 5) received by the signal unit 1 635 (Figure 27 5) The signal unit is via the switch 16 0 8 (step b 1 3) and reaches the relay gateway 1 6 05 (step B 1 4). The relay control unit 1 6 0 6 is based on the received signal unit 6 3 5 — 丨 Marking information 'refers to the address continuation table 1 625- 丨 (Figure 271), and obtains the address information used for the formation of 1 {) packets. The IP packet 1651 (ACM message) is formed (Figure 2 76), and the IP packet is 1651 is sent to the telephone management server 1671 (step β15). The telephone management server 1671 takes out the circuit number "CIC-2" and the program section "ACM" from the received 1? Packet 1651, and checks the telephone management server CIC management table 1671-2 saved in 1671 (Figure 26 7), find out the record of its own IP address &quot; IA91 "| 2 object's IP address &quot; GWO3", circuit number "CIC-2", put nc The program section block of this record in Official Table 1 671-2 was rewritten as "ACM". Next, the telephone management server 1671 forms an IP packet indicating reception of the aforementioned ACM message, and notifies the media router 1660 (steps B18, B19). &lt; <Media path continuation table >> In parallel with the foregoing step B10, or after the end of step B10, the relay control unit 1 606 presents the media path identifier, "MP-7" to the sound control unit 1 6 0 7, The IP address and port number are required at the same time. Therefore, the voice control unit 丨 6 〇7 sends the voice control unit 16 07 to the voice IP communication phone 1615 to send the IP address “EA7” of the 1 packet of the packet and the port of the UDP packet. The number, 5008, answers to the control and control unit 1 60 6. The sound control unit 16 07 ensures the logic 2049-3793-PF received from the switch 1680; RAY.ptd Page 222 1245997 V. Invention Explanation (219) The audio communication circuit "records its identifier" CH-2 "on the record of the media path connection table 1 628-2 (Fig. 274). The left side of the record of the media path connection table becomes the voice control unit 1 607 IP address "EA7" and port number "50 008", the right side becomes the IP address of the communication target "ΕΑΓ and port number" 50〇6π. The relay control unit 1 60 6 receives the IP address "ΕΑ7 &quot; The port number &quot; 5008 ,, is written into the c 1C management table 1 60 5- 1 (Fig. 2 6 9). The result becomes the cic management table 16 0 5-2 (Figure 279). &lt; &lt; CPG Message Transmission 〉〉

當電話機將電話呼出中報告交換機16〇9時(步驟B2〇) ’交換機形成並傳送通知電話呼出中的信號單元(CpG訊 息),前述信號單元經由交換機丨6 〇 8 (步驟B2丨),到達中繼 閘道1 6 05 (步驟B22)。中繼控制部1 6 0 6參照根據接收到的 前述信號單元之標記情報之位址接續表丨625 —丨(圖271 ), 取得用以形成IP封包的位址情報,形成Ip封包形式的cpG 訊息1 6 5 2 (圖2 7 7 )。I P封包被傳送給電話管理伺服器丨6 7 i (步驟B23),電話管理伺服器1671將前述電話呼出中通知 經由媒體路由器1660通知電話機1610(步驟B2 6至B 28)。When the telephone reports the outgoing call to the switch 1609 (step B2〇) 'The switch forms and transmits a signal unit (CpG message) that informs the outgoing call of the telephone, and the aforementioned signal unit arrives via the switch 6104 (step B2 丨) and arrives at Relay gateway 1 6 05 (step B22). The relay control unit 16 0 6 refers to the address continuation table 丨 625 — 丨 (Fig. 271) based on the received tag information of the aforementioned signal unit, obtains the address information used to form the IP packet, and forms cpG in the form of an IP packet. Message 1 6 5 2 (Figure 2 7 7). The IP packet is transmitted to the telephone management server 6 7 i (step B23), and the telephone management server 1671 notifies the aforementioned outgoing call via the media router 1660 to notify the telephone 1610 (steps B2 6 to B 28).

中繼控制部1 60 6形成CPG訊息時,從CIC管理表1 605 - 2 (圖279 )取得外部IP位址ΠΕΑ7Π及埠號碼,,5008π,寫入Cpg 訊息1 6 52。電話管理伺服器1671可從接收到的cpG封包 1 6 52取出外部ip位址” ea7,,及埠號碼” 5〇〇8”,並寫入管理 表 1671—2(圖267)。 &lt;&lt; A N Μ訊息的傳送〉〉 接著’當電話機161 1的使用者應答電話呼出時(步驟When the relay control unit 1 606 forms a CPG message, it obtains the external IP address ΠΕΑ7Π and the port number, 5008π, from the CIC management table 1 605-2 (Fig. 279), and writes it into the Cpg message 162. The telephone management server 1671 can take out the external IP address "ea7" and the port number "5008" from the received cpG packet 1 6 52 and write it into the management table 1671-2 (Fig. 267). &Lt; &lt; AN Μ message transmission >> then 'when the user of telephone 1611 answers the outgoing call (step

2049.3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第223頁 1245997 五、發明說明(220) B30),交換機1 6 09形成並傳送通知應答的信號單元(ANM訊 息),前述信號單元經由交換機16〇8(步驟B31),到達中繼 控制部1 6 0 6 (步驟B 3 2)。中繼控制部1 6 0 6參照根據接收到 的前述信號單元之標記情報之位址接續表1 625- 1 (圖271) ,形成IP封包形式的ANM訊息1 65 3 (圖278 )。IP封包1 65 3被 傳送給電話管理伺服器1671(步驟B33),電話管理伺服器 1671將前述應答通知經由媒體路由器166〇通知電話機 1610(步驟B36至B38)。亦即,IP封包1656(圖282),從電 話管理伺服器1 671,經由終端裝置1 603 (步驟B36),被送 給媒體路由Is 1660(步驟B37)。 中繼控制部1 6 0 6形成AN Μ訊息時,從c I C管理表1 6 0 5 - 2 (圖279 )取得外部ip位址” ΕΑ3,1及埠號碼” 5008&quot;,寫入ΑΝΜ 訊息1 6 53。電話管理伺服器1671可從接收到的應答封包 1 653取出外部IP位址” EA7”及埠號碼”5〇〇8”,並寫二管理 表 1671-2(圖267)。 &lt;&lt;CIC管理表的寫入時序〉〉 電話管理伺服器1671取出前述外部Ip位址” EA7&quot;及埠 號碼” 5 008&quot; ’並寫入cic管理表1671-2,形成CK管理表 167卜3 (圖28 0 )的時序為在前述說明中接收cp(J訊息的步驟 B23,或是接收ANM訊息的步驟B33。 &lt;〈位址管理表的寫入&gt;&gt; 電話管理伺服器1671從CIC管理表1671_3(圖28〇) 中,取出送信端電話機1610接續的媒體路由考 fi〇的外 -位址&quot;EA1&quot;、媒體路由器166。用以=二的號外碼2049.3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 223 1245997 V. Description of the invention (220) B30), the switch 1 6 09 forms and transmits a notification response signal unit (ANM message), and the aforementioned signal unit passes the switch 1608 (step B31) To reach the relay control section 1660 (step B 3 2). The relay control unit 16 0 6 refers to the received addressing table 1 625-1 (Fig. 271) of the tag information of the aforementioned signal unit, and forms an ANM message 1 65 3 (Fig. 278) in the form of an IP packet. The IP packet 1 65 3 is transmitted to the telephone management server 1671 (step B33), and the telephone management server 1671 notifies the telephone 1610 of the aforementioned response notification via the media router 1660 (steps B36 to B38). That is, the IP packet 1656 (Fig. 282) is sent from the telephone management server 1 671 to the media router Is 1660 via the terminal device 1 603 (step B36) (step B37). When the relay control unit 16 0 6 forms the AN M message, it obtains the external IP address “ΕΑ3,1 and the port number” 5008 &quot; from the IC management table 16 0-5-2 (Figure 279), and writes the ANM message 1 6 53. The telephone management server 1671 can retrieve the external IP address "EA7" and the port number "5008" from the received response packet 1 653, and write the second management table 1671-2 (Figure 267). &lt; & Writing sequence of CIC management table 〉〉 The telephone management server 1671 takes out the aforementioned external IP address “EA7” and the port number “5 008” and writes it into the cic management table 1671-2 to form the CK management table 167. The sequence of Bu 3 (Fig. 28 0) is the step of receiving cp (J message B23 or ANM message step B33 in the foregoing description. &Lt; Writing the address management table &gt; &gt; The telephone management server 1671 From the CIC management table 1671_3 (Fig. 28), take out the external-address &quot; EA1 &quot; and the media router 166 of the media routing test fi0, which is connected to the sender's telephone 1610. The external code is = 2

1245997 五、發明說明(221) — 一· 5 0 0 6 、聲音控制部1 6 0 7内部的外部丨p位址&quot;£ a 7 &quot;、及聲 音控制部用以傳送聲音的埠號碼,,5〇〇8&quot;,並與聲音送出介 面IF1614’ 一起寫入至終端裝置16〇3的位址管理表162〇上 (步驟B39)。此結果係顯示於位址管理表162〇-2 (圖281 )的 第3 行之 §己錄 EA1、5006、5008、IP1614,,。 &lt;&lt;通信階段〉〉 電話機1 6 1 0的使用者與電話機丨6丨丨之電話通信係盥在 其他實施例中說用的一樣。電話機161〇的類比聲音被數位 化,被放至IP封包1661(圖283)的酬載上。IP封包1661的 送^端位址為媒體路由器1 6 6 〇的丨p位址” E A丨,,、受信端位 址為前述取得之聲音控制部16〇7内部的Ip位址&quot;EA7,,、媒 體路由器的聲音送信埠號碼為”5〇〇6&quot;、聲音控制部16〇7用 以傳送聲音的UDP埠號碼為,f 5 0 〇 8,,。 ^由於1p封包1661内部的ip位址及埠號碼被包含於位址 官理表1620-2的第3行之記錄',EA1、5006、EA7、5008、 IF1614&quot;,IP封包1661透過輸出電路介面”jF1614&quot;的指 定’被送出給聲音IP通信電路1614以做為ip封包1 6 62,經 由路由器1 624、聲音IP通信電路1615,到達中繼閘道16〇6 的聲音控制部1 6 0 7。 采曰控制部1 6 0 7從接收到的IP封包1 6 6 2取出I p位址及 埠號碼&quot;EA1、50 06、EA7、5 008”,在媒體路徑接續表 1 6 28-2的内部(圖2 74),檢索IP位址及埠號碼一致的記 錄。在此,由於媒體路徑接續表的第丨行之記錄包含的ιρ 位址與埠號碼一致,IP封包1 662被視為正規的IP封包,並 1245997 五、發明說明(222) 且被接收。在不一致時,前述丨p封包被廢棄。 接著,IP封包1 662内的數位化聲音被變換為由聲音通 信電路1617傳送之形態的聲音碼框1 664(圖284 ),聲音碼 框1 6 6 4經由交換機1 6 〇 8到達交換機1 6 〇 9,從電話機1 61 1輸 出聲音,被儲存於從電話機1 611被傳送的聲音碼框之聲音 被反向傳送,到達電話機1 6 1 0。 &lt;&lt;釋放階段〉〉 當電話機1610的使用者通知電話通信的釋放時(圖261 之步驟B50),媒體路由器1 660將電話呼叫釋放通知送給 電話管理伺服器1671(步驟B51至B52),電話管理伺服器 1671將釋放結束送回給媒體路由器166〇(步驟B64至B66) 。電話管理伺服器1 6 71將通知電話呼叫釋放的I p封包 1 665 (圖285)送給中繼控制部1 60 6 (步驟B55),中繼控制部 1606將通知釋放結束的ip封包1666送回給電話管理伺服器 1671(步驟B6 2),中繼控制部16〇6將電話呼叫釋放通知送 給中繼交換機1 6 08 (步驟B56)。中繼交換機1 608將釋放結 束送回給中繼控制部1 60 6 (步驟B61),中繼交換機1 608將 電話呼叫釋放通知送給交換機16〇9(步驟B67),交換機 1 609將釋放結束送回給中繼交換機16〇8(步驟B6〇),交換 機1 609將電話呼叫切斷信號送給電話機1611(步驟B58)。 &lt;1 &lt;&lt;媒體路徑記錄的清除&gt;&gt; 在前述步驟B55中,中繼控制部1 60 6指示聲音控制部 1 607,根據媒體路徑接續表丨628 -2 (圖274),指示前述設 定的該媒體路徑之記錄的清除,並指示CIC管理表1 6〇5-21245997 V. Description of the invention (221)-1 · 5 0 6, internal and external 丨 p address of the sound control unit 丨 p address &quot; £ a 7 &quot;, and the port number used by the sound control unit to transmit sound, "5008", and write it to the address management table 1620 of the terminal device 1603 together with the sound output interface IF1614 '(step B39). This result is shown in line 3 of the address management table 1620-2 (Figure 281) § Recorded EA1, 5006, 5008, IP1614 ,. &lt; &lt; Communication Phase >〉 The telephone communication between the user of the telephone 1610 and the telephone 丨 6 丨 丨 is the same as that used in the other embodiments. The analog voice of the telephone 1610 is digitized and placed on the payload of the IP packet 1661 (Figure 283). The sending end address of the IP packet 1661 is the “p address” EA of the media router 1666, and the receiving end address is the IP address inside the sound control unit 1607 obtained from the aforementioned “EA7”. The number of the voice transmission port of the media router is "5006", and the number of the UDP port used by the voice control unit 1607 to transmit voice is "f 5 0 08". ^ Because the IP address and port number inside the 1p packet 1661 are included in the third line of the address table 1620-2, EA1, 5006, EA7, 5008, IF1614 &quot;, the IP packet 1661 passes through the output circuit interface "The designation" jF1614 "is sent to the voice IP communication circuit 1614 as the IP packet 1 6 62, via the router 1 624, the voice IP communication circuit 1615, and reaches the voice control section 1606 of the relay gateway 1606. The control unit 1 6 0 7 takes out the IP address and port number from the received IP packet 1 6 6 2 &quot; EA1, 50 06, EA7, 5 008 &quot;, and connects to the media path in Table 1 6 28-2 (Figure 2 74), retrieve records with the same IP address and port number. Here, because the lp address contained in the record of the first line of the media path continuity table is consistent with the port number, IP packet 1 662 is regarded as a regular IP packet, and 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (222) is received. When inconsistent, the aforementioned p packets are discarded. Next, the digitized voice in the IP packet 1 662 is converted into a voice code box 1 664 (Figure 284) in the form transmitted by the voice communication circuit 1617, and the voice code box 1 6 6 4 reaches the switch 16 through the switch 1 6 08. 〇9, the sound is output from the telephone set 1 61 1 and the sound stored in the voice code frame transmitted from the telephone set 1 611 is transmitted in the reverse direction and reaches the telephone set 16 1 0. &lt; &lt; Release Phase >〉 When the user of the telephone 1610 notifies the release of the telephone communication (step B50 in FIG. 261), the media router 1 660 sends a telephone call release notification to the telephone management server 1671 (steps B51 to B52) The telephone management server 1671 returns the release completion to the media router 166 (steps B64 to B66). The telephone management server 1 6 71 sends an IP packet 1 665 (FIG. 285) to notify the release of the telephone call to the relay control unit 1 60 6 (step B55), and the relay control unit 1606 sends an IP packet 1666 notifying the release completion The call is returned to the telephone management server 1671 (step B6 2), and the relay control unit 1606 sends a telephone call release notification to the relay switch 1 6 08 (step B56). The relay switch 1 608 returns the release completion to the relay control unit 1 60 6 (step B61), the relay switch 1 608 sends a telephone call release notification to the switch 1609 (step B67), and the switch 1 609 releases the release end It returns to the relay switch 1608 (step B60), and the switch 1 609 sends the telephone call disconnection signal to the telephone 1611 (step B58). &lt; 1 &lt; &lt; Clearing of media path records &gt; &gt; In the foregoing step B55, the relay control section 1 60 6 instructs the sound control section 1 607 to follow the media path connection table 628-2 (Fig. 274), Instructs the clearing of the record of the media path set previously, and instructs the CIC management table 1660-2

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第226頁 1245997 五、發明說明(223) (圖279)的該記錄之清除。進而,清除在前述電話通信的 接續控制中設定的位址接續表1 6 2 5 - 1 (圖2 7 1 )的該記錄。 &lt;&lt;位址管理表與Cl C管理表記錄之清除&gt;&gt; 電4管理伺服器1 6 71指示終端裝置1 6 〇 3,清除前述 電話通信之接續控制中設定的CIC管理表1671-3(圖280)的 該記錄,同時清除終端裝置1 603管理的位址管理表162〇一2 (圖281)的該記錄(步驟B 69)。 &lt;〈終端裝置的變北&gt;&gt; 終端裝置1603也可能不進行變更接受之ip封包内部的 位址之機能(N A T機能)。在此例中,電話管理伺服器之外 部IP位址’’ EA 91π與内部I p位址” I A9 1,’ 一致。 &lt;〈終端裝置的其他變化〉〉 在終端裝置1603内部的位址管理表1 62 0中可不包含ip 位址,而表示為位址管理表丨62〇-3(圖287)。在此例中, 不進行I P位址的登錄係在電話機的終端間接續控制上使用 埠说碼5 0 6 0 ,在電話的聲音通信中使用槔號碼&quot;5 〇 〇 4&quot;至 &quot;5048&quot;,而廢棄其他的埠號碼之1?封包。藉以,禁止電話 以外的IP封包之傳送接收。 由上述,電話機1610及1611可經由IP轉送網16〇〇、公 眾電話交換網1 6 0 1進行電話通信。中繼閘道包含中繼控制 部及聲音控制部,中繼控制部包含接續對應表及信號局位 址管理表。聲音控制部包含媒體路徑接續表。聲音控制部 規定聲音通信電路1617内的邏輯通信通道,將通道識別子 ’’ CH- Γ寫入至媒體路徑接續表。使用非膠囊化終端閘道及2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 226 1245997 V. Clearing of the record of the description of the invention (223) (Figure 279). Further, the record of the address connection table 1 6 2 5-1 (FIG. 2 7 1) set in the connection control of the aforementioned telephone communication is cleared. &lt; &lt; Clearing of address management table and Cl C management table &gt; &gt; The electric 4 management server 1 6 71 instructs the terminal device 1 6 〇3 to clear the CIC management table 1671 set in the above-mentioned telephone communication connection control. -3 (FIG. 280), and clears the address management table 1620-2 (FIG. 281) managed by the terminal device 1 603 (step B 69). &lt; Change of terminal device &gt; &gt; The terminal device 1603 may not change the function of the internal address of the received IP packet (N AT function). In this example, the external IP address "EA 91π" of the telephone management server is consistent with the internal IP address "I A9 1,". &Lt; <Other changes of terminal device >> The address inside the terminal device 1603 The management table 1 62 0 may not include an ip address, but is expressed as an address management table 丨 62〇-3 (Figure 287). In this example, the registration without an IP address is indirectly controlled by the terminal of the telephone. Use port speaking code 5 0 60, use the phone number "5 004" to "5048" in the voice communication of the phone, and discard 1 packet of other port numbers. Therefore, IP packets other than the phone are prohibited From the above, the telephones 1610 and 1611 can perform telephone communication through the IP transfer network 160, and the public telephone exchange network 1601. The relay gateway includes a relay control section, a sound control section, and a relay control section. Contains the connection correspondence table and the signal station address management table. The sound control section includes the media path connection table. The sound control section specifies the logical communication channel in the sound communication circuit 1617, and writes the channel identifier `` CH-Γ '' to the media path connection table. .use Encapsulated gateway and terminal

交換網之第1 6 1245997 、發明說明(224) 置^囊匕Ϊ、塵閘道,根據非膠囊化終端閘道内部的終端裝 的理表,進行通過登錄1 Ρ位址及埠號碼之1 Ρ封包 、、匕過濾。或者,根據前述位址管理表,可進行通過 封包的ΙΡ封包過渡…可在以二 ” 口父、、、祠之電話機與接續至I ρ轉送網之電話機間進行電 話通信。 1 6 ·控制線與聲音線分離且接續至公眾電話 實施例: 在圖288中,1 700及1701是IP轉送網,17〇2是公眾電 話交換網(PSTN),1 703及1 704是具有膠囊化機能的終端閘 道,1 7 05是接續至共通線信號方式的控制電路1 738之中繼 閘道,1 7 0 6及1 7 0 7係接續至IP通信電路的中繼閘道,丨7 j 〇 至1 71 3及1 71 8為中繼控制部,1 7 1 4及1 71 5為網點裝置, 1716及1717為聲音控制部,1 720及1721為電話機,1 72 5至 1729為控制通信電路,1731至1736為聲音通信電路。1725 至1736為IP通信電路。1738為共通線信號方式的控制通信 電路,1739為聲音通信電路。網點裝置1714及1715具有j 膠囊化機能,在其他實施例中加以說明。IP轉送網^〇〇及 1 7 0 1係不同的通信公司運用的點之個別的I p轉送網,j p封 包經由通信電路1727及1734之任一方可轉送至他方。、The first 6 1245997 of the switching network and the description of the invention (224) Set up the dagger, dust gateway, according to the terminal equipment inside the non-encapsulated terminal gateway, through the registration 1 IP address and port number 1 P packet, dagger filter. Or, according to the aforementioned address management table, IP packet transition through packets can be performed ... Telephone communication can be performed between the telephones connected to the parent port, the ancestral temple, and the telephone connected to the IP transfer network. 1 6 · Control line Example separated from the voice line and connected to the public telephone: In Figure 288, 1 700 and 1701 are IP forwarding networks, 1702 is the public telephone exchange network (PSTN), and 1 703 and 1 704 are terminals with encapsulation function. Gateway, 1 07 05 is the relay gateway connected to the control circuit 1 738 of the common line signal mode, 1 0 07 and 1 7 0 7 are relay gateways connected to the IP communication circuit, 7 j 〇 to 1 71 3 and 1 71 8 are relay control sections, 1 7 1 4 and 1 71 5 are branch point devices, 1716 and 1717 are sound control sections, 1 720 and 1721 are telephones, 1 72 5 to 1729 are control communication circuits, 1731 to 1736 are sound communication circuits. 1725 to 1736 are IP communication circuits. 1738 is a common line signal control communication circuit and 1739 is a voice communication circuit. The branch point devices 1714 and 1715 have a capsule function, which is added in other embodiments. Note. The IP forwarding network ^ 〇〇 and 170 1 are different Communications use of individual point transfer network I p, j p sealed packet via the communication circuit 1727 and 1734 according to any one of the other party can be transferred to.,

具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道1 70 3内的中繼控制部171〇 如其他實施例中的說明,包含電話管理伺服器、代理電节 伺服器、電話號碼伺服器、表管理伺服器,同樣地中繼控 制部1 7 1 3也包含電話管理伺服器、代理電話伺服器、雷^The relay control unit 171 in the terminal gateway 1 70 3 having a capsule function, as described in other embodiments, includes a telephone management server, a proxy power server, a telephone number server, and a meter management server. The ground relay control unit 1 7 1 3 also includes a telephone management server, an agent telephone server, and a mine ^

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第228頁2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 228

1245997 五、發明說明(225) 號碼伺服器、表管理伺服器。 &lt;&lt;接續階段〉〉 以從電話機1 720至電話機172丨進行電話通信為例。在 ,289中,uoom係表示Ip轉送網17〇〇的範圍,17為例係^ 表示IP轉送網πίπ的”。當拿起電話機172〇 係 ,呼出信號被傳送給媒體路由器1 722(步驟Ε01),媒體路 由器1 722確認電話呼出(步驟Ε〇2)。其次,媒體路由器 1722形成包含有·做為送信端的電話機172〇之電話號碼 &quot;ΤΝ-1”、做為受信端的電話機1721之電話號碼,ιτν—2&quot;的 話呼叫接續要求的I Ρ封包,並傳送給網點裝置丨7丨4。網點 裝置1714輸入前述IP封包,適用在其他實施例說明的”膠 囊化,形成内部IP封包,將前述内部Ip封包傳送給具有膠 囊化機能之終端閘道1 70 3内的中繼控制部1710(步驟Ε〇 3) 網點裝置1714將在前述步驟e〇3中送回的IP封包送回 給媒體路由器1 722(步驟E04),形成電話呼叫接續要求的 IP封包1750,並送出給控制ip通信電路1725。1?封包 1 750經由控制IP通信電路1 726到達中繼控制部1711(步驟 E05) αΙΡ封包1750包含送信端IP位址”S-ad-4”、受信端IP 位址nD_ad-4”、電路號碼”CIC-4n、訊息&quot;iam”、參數 &quot;Para-4”。前述參數包含電話號碼”TN-1”及&quot;TN-2,,。 受 信端IP位址&quot;D-ad-4Π係中繼控制部1 713的IP位址之第} 例,及中繼控制部1 7 1 2的IP位址之第2例。在前述第i例 中,IP封包1 750直接經過控制通信電路到達中繼閘道丨71 21245997 V. Description of the invention (225) Number server and table management server. &lt; &lt; Continuation stage >〉 Take telephone communication from the telephone set 1 720 to the telephone set 172 as an example. In 289, uoom indicates the range of the IP forwarding network 1700, and 17 is an example. ^ Indicates the IP forwarding network π ”. When the telephone 1720 is picked up, the outgoing signal is transmitted to the media router 1 722 (step E01). ), The media router 1 722 confirms the outgoing call (step E 02). Next, the media router 1722 forms a telephone containing the telephone number &quot; TN-1 &quot; of the telephone 1720 as the sending end and the telephone 1721 as the receiving end. If the number is ιτν-2 &quot;, then the IP packet required for connection is called and transmitted to the network device 丨 7 丨 4. The network point device 1714 inputs the aforementioned IP packet, which is suitable for the “encapsulation” described in the other embodiments to form an internal IP packet, and transmits the aforementioned internal IP packet to the relay control unit 1710 in the terminal gateway 1 70 3 having an encapsulation function ( Step E03) The network point device 1714 returns the IP packet returned in the foregoing step e03 to the media router 1 722 (step E04), forms an IP packet 1750 required for the telephone call connection, and sends it to the control IP communication circuit. 1725. 1? Packet 1 750 reaches the relay control unit 1711 via the control IP communication circuit 1 726 (step E05) αIP packet 1750 contains the sender IP address "S-ad-4" and the recipient IP address nD_ad-4 " , Circuit number "CIC-4n, message", "iam", parameter "Para-4". The aforementioned parameters include the telephone number "TN-1" and "TN-2,". The IP address of the trusted end &quot; D- ad-4Π is the second example of the IP address of the relay control section 1 713 and the second example of the IP address of the relay control section 1 7 1 2. In the foregoing i-th example, the IP packet 1 750 directly passes Control communication circuit reaches relay gateway 丨 71 2

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第 229 頁 1245997 五、發明說明(226) 内的中繼控制部1712(步驟e〇6)。 中繼控制部1 7 11及1 7 1 2從I p封包1 7 5 〇内部記錄丨p位址 &quot;S - ad-4&quot;、”D-ad-4”、電路號碼” CIC —4&quot;、&quot;UM”、電話 號碼’’ TN-1及TN-2”等,以做為如其他實施例說明的c IC 管理表1711-1(圖2 90 )。t繼控制部1712保存在其他實施 例中說明的電話號碼伺服器。在前述第2例中,當中繼控 制部17 12接收IP封包時,使用前述電話號碼伺服器,從受 信端電話號碼’’TN-2”檢索ip封包175〇的1{)轉送網17〇1内部 中新的受信端ip位址,用以做為IP封包175〇的受信端1{)位 址。中繼控制部1712送出的IP封包1751係與lp封包175〇相 同,或是設定上述新的I p位址之封包。 IP封包1751經由控制通信電路1 728、1 729,到達具 有封包機能的終端閘道1 704之中繼控制部1713(步驟e〇G 。中繼控制部1 7 1 3係由其他實施例中說明的電話管理 器、代理電話伺服器、電話號碼伺服器、表管理伺服 構成。中繼控制部1713内部的電話管理伺服器係基於p 包1751,將通知電話呼出要求的1?封包送給媒體路由 媒體路由器1723接收前述ip封包(步驟。 媒體路由器1 723將電話呼叫設定要求通知 1721(步驟E09),並送回通知接收步驟別8的1?封勺 E11)。中繼控制部1713形成並送回ACM封包(步驟f^ 述ACM封包通過t繼控制部1 71 2、1 7 1 1,到達中 ’則 1710(步驟E13、E14)。當電話機1721將呼出中通繼控制部 體路由器時(步驟E20),經過媒體路由5| σ通知媒 沿1 、中繼控制2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 229 1245997 V. Relay control unit 1712 in the description of the invention (226) (step e〇6). The relay control unit 1 7 11 and 1 7 1 2 internally record from the IP packet 1 7 5 〇 p address &quot; S-ad-4 &quot;, "D-ad-4", circuit number "CIC —4" , "UM", phone numbers "TN-1 and TN-2", etc., as the IC management table 1711-1 (Figure 2 90) as described in the other embodiments. The following control section 1712 is stored in other The telephone number server described in the embodiment. In the second example described above, when the relay control unit 17 12 receives the IP packet, it uses the aforementioned telephone number server to retrieve the IP packet 175 from the telephone number "TN-2" of the receiving end. The new trusted end IP address in the 1 {) forwarding network 1701 is used as the trusted end 1 {) address of the IP packet 1750. The IP packet 1751 sent by the relay control unit 1712 is the same as the lp packet 1750, or a packet with a new IP address set as described above. The IP packet 1751 passes through the control communication circuits 1 728 and 1 729 to the relay control unit 1713 (step e0G.) Of the terminal gateway 1 704 with the packet function. The relay control unit 1 7 1 3 is described in other embodiments. Telephone manager, agent telephone server, telephone number server, and table management server. The internal telephone management server of the relay control unit 1713 is based on p packet 1751, and sends a 1? The media router 1723 receives the aforementioned IP packet (step. The media router 1 723 notifies the telephone call setting request 1721 (step E09), and sends back the notification reception step 1 1 to the packet E11). The relay control unit 1713 forms and sends Return the ACM packet (step f ^ The ACM packet arrives through the relay control unit 1 71 2, 1 7 1 1 and arrives at '1717 (steps E13, E14). When the telephone 1721 will call out the relay control unit router ( Step E20), notify media edge 1 and relay control via media route 5 | σ

1245997 五、發明說明(227) 部1713、1712、1711、1710、媒體路由器1722,電話呼 出中被通知給電話機1720(步驟E21至E26)。當電話機1721 應答時,經過媒體路由器1 7 2 3、中繼控制部1 7 1 3、1 7 1 2 、1711、171 0、媒體路由器1 72 2,電話機1721的應答被 通知給電話機1 7 20,而可進行通話(步驟E30至E36)。 在電話機1 7 2 0與電話機1 7 2 1間進行聲音通信(步驟 E38)。從電話機π 20被傳送的聲音係被儲存於媒體路由器 1 722中的數位化,的ip封包,經由網點裝置丨714、通信電路 1731、1732、1733、聲音控制部1716、通信電路1734、 聲音控制部1 717、通信電路1 73 5、1 736、網點裝置171 5 ’到達媒體路由器1723 ’在此數位化的聲音變成類比聲 音’到達電話機1 7 2 1。在網點裝置1 7 1 4及1 7 1 5中,I P封包 的膠囊化與逆膠囊化於其他實施例中說明。當電話機丨7 2 〇 提出釋放要求時(步驟E 4 0 ),如其他實施例的說明,在進 行一連串的電話呼叫釋放及釋放結束的手續後,電話通信 結束(步驟E41至E45,步驟E51至E55)。 &lt;&lt;各種網路的接續〉〉 圖2 9 1係表示公眾電話交換網與丨p轉送網的接續,包 含其他實施例的圖式。1 7 6 0及1 7 61係公眾電話交換網 (PSTN),1 762及1 7 63係IP轉送網,1 764及1 765係加入者交 換網(LS),1 766及1 767係中繼交換機,1 768至1771係具有 膠囊化機能的終端閘道,1 7 7 2及1 7 7 3係中繼閘道,1 7 7 6至 17 79係媒體路由器,1 78 0至1 785係電話機。各交換機包含 中繼控制部及聲音控制部,具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道及1245997 V. Invention Description (227) Sections 1713, 1712, 1711, 1710, and Media Router 1722 were notified to the telephone 1720 during the outgoing call (steps E21 to E26). When the telephone 1721 answers, it passes through the media router 1 7 2 3. The relay control unit 1 7 1 3, 1 7 1 2, 1711, 1710, and the media router 1 72 2. The response of the telephone 1721 is notified to the telephone 1 7 20 To make a call (steps E30 to E36). Voice communication is performed between the telephone 1720 and the telephone 1721 (step E38). The voice transmitted from the telephone π 20 is digitized and stored in the media router 1 722. The ip packet passes through the branch point device 714, the communication circuit 1731, 1732, 1733, the sound control unit 1716, the communication circuit 1734, and the sound control. Part 1 717, communication circuit 1 73 5, 1 736, and branch office device 171 5 'reached the media router 1723' the digitized voice becomes analog voice 'and reached the telephone 1 7 2 1. In the outlet devices 17 1 4 and 17 15, the encapsulation and reverse encapsulation of IP packets are described in other embodiments. When the telephone set 77.2 asks for release (step E40), as explained in other embodiments, after a series of procedures for releasing and ending the telephone call, the telephone communication ends (steps E41 to E45, steps E51 to E55). &lt; &lt; Connection of various networks> &gt; Fig. 291 shows the connection between the public telephone switching network and the p-transmission network, and includes drawings of other embodiments. 1 7 6 0 and 1 7 61 are public telephone switching networks (PSTN), 1 762 and 1 7 63 are IP forwarding networks, 1 764 and 1 765 are subscriber switching networks (LS), 1 766 and 1 767 are trunks Switchboards, 1 768 to 1771 series terminal gateways with encapsulation, 1 7 7 2 and 1 7 7 3 series relay gateways, 1 7 7 6 to 17 79 series media routers, 1 78 0 to 1 785 series telephones . Each switch includes a relay control unit and a voice control unit, a terminal gateway with an encapsulation function, and

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第231頁 1245997 五、發明說明(228) 中繼閘道也包含中繼控制部及聲音控制部。前述交換機及 問道之間利用控制通信電路及聲音控制電路連接。在中繼 閘道1 7 7 2及具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道丨7 6 8及丨7 6 9之間的 控制電路間設置網點裝置,在中繼閘道丨773及具有膠囊化 機能的終端閘道1 7 70及1 771之間的控制電路間設置網點裝 置。由於此點在其他實施例中說明,在圖2 9 i中就省略。 由於上述,例如,電話機1 7 82及1 785經 Π76 &gt; . tMf^1 772 閘道1 7 73、具有膠囊化機能的閘道1771、媒體路由器 1779,透過終端間通信接續控制,可進行電話通信: ^在電話機1 7 80與電話機Π85之間,經由交換&amp;1 764、 父換機1 766、中繼閘道1 772、中繼閘道1 773、呈右腺壸介 機能的閘道1671、媒體路由器1 779,透過終端間 續控制,可進行電話通信。又,電話機178〇蛊電节j 間,經由交換機1 764、交換機1 766、中繼閘道電° 換機1 76 6及 =7,3可:換;:交換機1 765,透過終二 、戈控制,可進仃電話通信。但是,本例對於交 1767在地理上遠離的情況是有效的 &lt;&lt;使用非膠囊化終端閘道的例子〉〉 與上述同樣的各種網路的接續係如圖292 用具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道1768至1771, 不’不使 化的終端閘道1 768χμ771χ。不使用中繼閉道 ,而使用可與具有非膠囊化機能的終端閘道 、2及1 773 膠囊化中繼閘道1772x及1773x。 互通#的非2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 231 1245997 5. Description of the invention (228) The relay gateway also includes a relay control unit and a sound control unit. The switch and the question channel are connected by a control communication circuit and a sound control circuit. Set up a network point device between the relay gateway 1 7 7 2 and the terminal gateway with the capsule function 丨 7 6 8 and 丨 7 6 9, and the relay gateway 773 and the capsule with the capsule function A network point device is installed between the control circuits between the terminal gateways 1 70 and 1 771. Since this point is described in other embodiments, it is omitted in FIG. 2 i. Due to the above, for example, the telephones 1 7 82 and 1 785 via Π76 &gt;. TMf ^ 1 772 gateway 1 7 73, the gateway 1771 with the capsule function, the media router 1779, can be controlled through communication between terminals Communication: ^ Between phone 1 7 80 and phone Π85, via exchange &amp; 1 764, parent switch 1 766, relay gateway 1 772, relay gateway 1 773, and gateway functioning as a right gland. 1671. The media router 1 779 can perform telephone communication through continuous control of terminals. In addition, between the telephone 178 and the electric section j, through the switch 1 764, the switch 1 766, and the relay gateway, the switch 1 76 6 and = 7, 3 can be changed: switch 1 765. Control, can enter telephone communication. However, this example is effective for the case where Jiao 1767 is geographically distant. &Lt; &lt; Example of using an unencapsulated terminal gateway &gt;> The connection system of various networks similar to the above is shown in Figure 292. Terminal gateways 1768 to 1771, not 'unusual' terminal gateways 1 768 x 771 x. Instead of using closed trunks, use terminal gateways with non-encapsulated functions, 2 and 1 773 encapsulated relay gateways 1772x and 1773x.互通 # 的 非

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第232頁 1245997 五、發明說明(229) 〜 --一 &quot; --2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 232 1245997 V. Description of the invention (229) ~ --- &quot;-

如以上說明,在電話機1 782及電話機1 785之間,電話 機1 780及電話機1785之間,電話機1 780及電話機1781之 間二透過與别述同樣的終端間通信接續控制,可進行電話 通#。由於上述,經由電話機1、媒體路由器1、IP轉送 網1所屬的具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道及中繼閘道,經由 1=轉送網2所屬的其他中繼閘道與其他具有膠囊化機能的 終端閑道’依序經由媒體路由器2、電話機2,可在2個電 話機間進行電話.通信。經由電話機1、媒體路由器1、IP 轉送網1所屬的非膠囊化機能的終端閘道及非膠囊化機能 的中繼閘道’經由IP轉送網2所屬的其他中繼閘道與其他 具有膠囊化機能的終端閘道,依序經由媒體路由器2、電 話機2 ’可在2個電話機間進行電話通信。 從通信公司X運用的丨p轉送網i 7 〇 〇,到通信公司γ運用 的IP轉送網1 7 0 1,以丨p轉送網丨7 〇丨之中繼控制部丨7丨2做為 受信端輸入I P封包的例子中,當前述中繼控制部丨7丨2接收 前述IP封包時,詢問電話號碼伺服器,取得有關包含於前 述IP封包内部之受信端電話號碼&quot;TN_2”的接續之IP轉送網 之其他中繼控制部1 71 3的IP位址,將前述取得的IP位址更 新設定的IP封包轉送至前述其他的中繼控制部。As explained above, between the telephones 1 782 and 1 785, between the telephones 1 780 and 1785, and between the telephones 1 780 and 1781, the communication between the terminals can be controlled through the same communication as described above. . Due to the above, via the telephone gateway 1, the media router 1, and the IP forwarding network 1 to which the terminal gateway and the relay gateway having the capsule function belong, via 1 = other relay gateways to which the relay network 2 belongs and other capsule gateway functions The terminal's idle lanes can be used for telephone and communication between the two telephones through the media router 2 and the telephone 2 in this order. Via the non-encapsulated terminal gateway and the non-encapsulated relay gateway that the telephone 1, the media router 1, and the IP relay network 1 belong to, and the other relay gateways that belong to the IP relay network 2 and other capsules The functional terminal gateway can perform telephone communication between two telephones via the media router 2 and the telephone 2 'in this order. From the 丨 p transfer network i 7 〇 used by the communication company X to the IP transfer network 1 7 0 1 used by the communication company γ, the relay control unit 丨 7 丨 2 of the 丨 p transfer network 丨 7 丨 is used as the trust In the example of the IP packet input from the remote end, when the aforementioned relay control unit 丨 7 丨 2 receives the aforementioned IP packet, it queries the telephone number server to obtain the connection of the trusted party's telephone number &quot; TN_2 "included in the aforementioned IP packet. The IP address of the other relay control unit 1 71 3 of the IP transfer network forwards the IP packet set by the aforementioned update of the obtained IP address to the other relay control unit.

1 7 ·進行多點發送通信的第1 7實施例: 參照圖2 9 3至圖2 9 5說明本實施例。在IP轉送網1 8 0 0的 内部設置網點裝置1801至1 8 05及1 80 7至1 809。網點裝置及 路由器透過IP通信電路,直接地或經由網點裝置或路由器 間接地接續。具有IP封包送受機能的終端1810-1至1810 -1 7 · Seventeenth embodiment for performing multicast communication: This embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 2 3 to 2 9 5. Network branch devices 1801 to 180 and 1 80 7 to 1809 are installed inside the IP transfer network 1 800. The branch device and the router are connected through the IP communication circuit directly or through the ground between the branch device and the router. Terminals 1810 to 1810 with IP packet sending and receiving functions-

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd

1245997 五、發明說明(230) 1 9經由I P通信電路,被接續至網點裝置。1 8丨丨—1至丨8丨5 一 i 係網點裝置的位址管理表,1 8 1 7 - 1至1 8 1 9 - 1係路由器的通 路表。 圖2 9 4之1 8 6 8係表示多點發送通信中實現終端間通信 接續控制機能的伺服器類的主要所在,1 857係多點發送管 理伺服器,1 855及1 85 6係使用者服務伺服器,1 853及1854 係受理者,1851係多點發送服務提供者,1 852係多點發送 服務購入者’ 1 8 5 0係路由器,1 8 5 9係樹建造伺服器,1 8 5 8 係IP轉送網1 8 0 0的資源管理伺服器,丨8 6丨至丨8 6 3係表管理1245997 V. Description of the invention (230) 1 9 is connected to the outlet device via the IP communication circuit. 1 8 丨 丨 —1 to 丨 8 丨 5 An address management table for i-series network devices, 1 8 1 7-1 to 1 8 1 9-1 router table. Figure 2 9 4 of 1 8 6 8 is the main server class that realizes the function of connection control between terminals in multicast communication. 1 857 is the multicast management server. 1 855 and 1 85 6 are the users. Service server, 1 853 and 1854 are recipients, 1851 is a multicast service provider, 1 852 is a multicast service purchaser '1 8 5 0 router, 1 8 5 9 tree construction server, 1 8 5 8 series IP forwarding network 1 8 0 0 resource management server, 丨 8 6 丨 to 丨 8 6 3 series table management

伺服器。1 8 4 1至1 8 4 5係多點發送記錄設定時,超出預定外 的IP封包被輸出的通信電路。I p轉送網丨8 〇 〇内部的伺服器 或路由器類被授與IP位址,具有透過傳送接收1?封包可相 互情報交換的I P通信手段。在本實施例中,終端或伺服器 具有固有的IP位址外,可授與複數個多點發送lp位址。 終端1 81 0 - 2在多點發送服務中,為傳送多點發送資料 的送1終端。多點發送資料係包含數位化的聲音或傳真資 料,靜止影像或動態影像等的所謂的多點發送資料。 &lt;&lt;通信記錄〉〉 'server. 1 8 4 1 to 1 8 4 When the 5 is a multicast record setting, a communication circuit is output in which an IP packet that is out of schedule is output. IP transfer network 丨 〇 〇 Internal servers or routers are given IP addresses and have IP communication means that can exchange mutual information by transmitting and receiving 1? Packets. In this embodiment, the terminal or server has a unique IP address and can be assigned a plurality of multicast lp addresses. Terminal 1 81 0-2 In the multicast service, a 1 terminal for transmitting multicast data. The multicast data includes so-called multicast data including digitized audio or facsimile data, still images, and moving images. &lt; &lt; Communication history >〉 '

位址管理表的行稱為通信記錄或丨p通信記錄。例如, 位址管理表1811-1的第2行” I〇1、E〇1、以6、I26、g〇3 F02稱為外部ip位址&quot;E〇1,t與外部ιρ位址&quot;㈣&quot;間的通信 ^,或決定具有外部1?位址” E〇1,,的終端181〇 —2與具有夕 :甬广 端1810, 通^己錄的内容為&quot;a、b、c、d、e、f”_u^The rows of the address management table are called communication records or communication records. For example, the second row of the address management table 1811-1 "I〇1, E〇1, 6, I26, and G〇3 F02 are called external IP addresses &quot; E〇1, t and external address &quot;; ㈣ &quot; communication ^, or decided to have an external address "E〇1", the terminal 1810-2 and have the evening: 甬 广 端 1810, the contents of the record are &quot; a, b, c, d, e, f "_u ^

第234頁 1245997 五、發明說明(231) 1 a” ,第2個項目為” bn 第3個位址項目稱為&quot;c 以下相同。項目為位址時 例如 將通# s己錄的第1項目稱炎拉沾 辨為授與送彳吕側邏輯端早「冰立 IP通信電路與網點裝置的邏輯拯的详俨^知子(外4 、科接點)的迗仏端内部I P位 址,第2項目稱為送信端外苦卩I p 1 口卜丨F位址,第3項目線兔畚往各山 外部IP位址,第4項目稱為授盥A %為又仏鈿 ^ ^ 仅興文化端邏輯端子的受信端 内部IP位址,第5項目稱為内邱τ p #勺Μ仏山+幻又彳口知 q門4 i Ρ封包的輸出處指定,箆β 項目稱為外部IP澍包的輸出處指定。 处扣疋第b &lt;&lt;2終端間的IP轉送〉〉Page 234 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (231) 1 a ”, the second item is“ bn The third address item is called &quot; c The same below. When the item is an address, for example, the first item of the ## self-recorded, called Yanlachan, is identified as the logic end of the sending and receiving side. (4, Branch contact) The internal IP address of the remote end. The second item is called the IP address of the external end of the transmitting end. The IP address is F. The third line is the external IP address of each mountain. The 4 item is called the grant A% is again 仏 钿 ^ ^ Only the internal IP address of the trusted end of the logical terminal of the Xing cultural side, the 5th item is called Neiqiu τ p # spoonΜ 仏 山 + 幻 又 彳 口 知 q 门 4 The designation of the output position of the IP packet, and the "β" item is referred to as the designation of the output position of the external IP packet. The b &lt; &lt; &lt; 2 IP transfer between terminals >〉

圖293的終端1810-2上授與外部ιρ位址&quot;Ε〇ι&quot;,通信 路1 822之網點裝置1801側終端上授與内部Ip位址&quot;ι〇ι&quot;, 圖295之終端1810-16上授與外部Ip位址” E26 &quot;,通信電路 1 8 2 6 6的網點裝置1 8 0 4側終端上授與内部丨p位址&quot;丨2 6 ”。 網點裝置的位址管理表1811 —丨至1815_丨内部的數值,透過 ,其他實施例說明同樣的方法,顯示啟始值被設定的狀 態’在以下透過I P封包轉送加以說明。The external IP address is granted to the terminal 1810-2 in FIG. 293, and the internal IP address is granted to the terminal 1801 side of the network device 1822 on the communication path. The terminal 1810 is shown in FIG. -16 grants external IP address "E26", and the communication circuit 1 8 2 6 6 network point device 1 8 0 4 side terminal grants internal 丨 p address "丨 2 6". The address management table of the network device 1811 — 18 to 1815_ 丨 internal values, through the same method described in other embodiments, shows the status of the initial value is set ′ will be described below by IP packet transfer.

終端1810-2將送信端外部1?位址,,E〇1 ”、受信端外部 IP位址&quot;E26”的外部ip封包1 829-1送出給通信電路1822, 網點裝置1801接收外部ip封包。其次,網點裝置 !8〇1確認位址管理表1811 —丨的第2行的記錄” l〇1、E〇1、 6、I 2 6、G 0 3、F 0 2&quot;包含前述取得的3個丨p位址,也就是 授與通信電路1810-2的終端部之内部1{&gt;位址&quot;1〇1&quot;、接收 =外邛IP封包1 8 2 9 -1内的送信端外部I p位址” £ 〇 1 ”、受信 端外部I p位址” E 2 6 ”,使用前述記錄包含的&quot;j 〇 ij 2 6 ” ,The terminal 1810-2 sends the external IP address 1 of the sending end, E〇1 ", the external IP address of the receiving end" E26 "to the communication circuit 1822, and the network device 1801 receives the external IP packet. . Next, the outlet device! 801 confirms the record of the second line of the address management table 1811-"101, E〇1, 6, I 2 6, G 0 3, F 0 2" including the previously acquired 3丨 p address, that is, internal 1 {&gt; address &quot; 1〇1 &quot; of the terminal part of the communication circuit 1810-2, receiving = external IP packet 1 8 2 9 -1 sending end external I p address "£ 〇1", the external IP address of the trusted end "E 2 6", the &quot; j 〇ij 2 6 '' contained in the previous record,

1245997 發明說明(232) 形成内部ip封包,做為内部IP封包1 829_2送出給前述記錄 包含的”603’’所指定的通信電路1 82 3_2。在前述11)膠囊化 的程序中,由於該通信記錄,,ΙΟΙ、E01、E26、I 26、G03、 F0 2”的内部封包輸出指定” G〇3”(第5項目)為〇以外,lp膠 ,囊,化形成並輸出内部IP封包,在前述内部封包輸出指定為 〇的If况中’忒I p封包不膠囊化,而轉送至網點裝置之 多出的通信電路1841。1245997 Description of the invention (232) Form an internal IP packet and send it as internal IP packet 1 829_2 to the communication circuit specified by "603" contained in the aforementioned record 1 82 3_2. In the aforementioned 11) encapsulated program, due to the communication Record, IIOI, E01, E26, I 26, G03, F0 2 "internal packet output designation" G03 "(item 5) is other than 0, lp gel, capsule, formation and output of internal IP packets, in In the case where the aforementioned internal packet output is designated as 0, the '忒 IP packet is not encapsulated, and is forwarded to the extra communication circuit 1841 of the branch device.

路由器1809接收内部ip封包1829-2,將複製内部ip封 包1 829-2所得的内部IP封包1 829 —3送出給路徑表1819—i指 定的輸出介面&quot;G21”所指定的通信電路1 824_2。網點裝置 1804接收内部ip封包1829-3,位址管理表1814一丨第3行的 記錄’’ 126、E26、E01、1〇1、G36、F16”確認包含内部”封 包1 829-3内的3個IP封包&quot;I26、E01、101&quot;,透過除去内部 IP封包1829-3的IP標頭,進行逆膠囊化,回復外部1?封 包,並送出給該記錄内部包含的輸出介面&quot;F丨6,,所指定的 通信電路1 8 26-6,以做為外部IP封包1 829-4。終端181〇一 16接收外部ip封包1 829-4。 &lt;〈終端的種類〉〉The router 1809 receives the internal IP packet 1829-2, and sends the internal IP packet 1 829-3 obtained by copying the internal IP packet 1 829-2 to the output interface specified by the path table 1819-i &quot; G21 &quot; communication circuit 1 824_2 The branch device 1804 received the internal IP packet 1829-3, and the record in the third line of the address management table 1814_ "126, E26, E01, 101, G36, F16" confirmed that it contains the internal "packet 1 829-3 The three IP packets &quot; I26, E01, 101 &quot; are decapsulated by removing the IP header of the internal IP packet 1829-3, replying to the external 1? Packet, and sending it to the output interface contained in the record. F 丨 6, the designated communication circuit 1 8 26-6 is used as the external IP packet 1 829-4. The terminal 1810-16 receives the external IP packet 1 829-4. &Lt; <type of terminal >>

終端181 0-1至1810- 1 9係具有資料傳送接收機能的資 料終端,具有傳送接收數位化聲音的機能之電話機,可傳 送^位化聲音的聲音傳送終端(也就是有線聲音傳送用的 ,仏機)、、,可接收數位化聲音的聲音接收終端(也就是有線 聲音傳送用的受信機),具有數位化聲音與影像的送受信 機能的聲音影像送受信終端或τν會議終端、,可傳送數位化Terminals 181 0-1 to 1810-1 9 are data terminals with data transmission receiver capabilities, telephones with the function of transmitting and receiving digitized sound, and voice transmission terminals capable of transmitting digitized sound (that is, for wired sound transmission, )) ,,, sound receiving terminal that can receive digitized sound (ie, receiver for wired sound transmission), sound and video sending and receiving terminal or τν conference terminal with digitized sound and video transmitting and receiving function, can transmit digital Turn into

1245997 五、發明說明(233) 聲音與動態影像的聲音影像送信終端(也就是有線聲音影 像送信機),可接收數位化聲音與動態影像的聲音影像受 信終端(也就是有線TV受信機),前述終端可為在其他實施 例中說明的媒體路由器及接續至媒體路由器的資料終端、 電活機或聲音影像裝置之任一個的組合。由前述任一個終 端的送信資料或受信資料,由於也儲存於I P封包的酬載部 分’以下所述的多點發送的技術可適用所有的終端。 &lt;&lt;多點發送通信.實施的準備〉〉 說明終端1 8 1 0 - 2為多點發送送信終端,終端 1810 -11、1810—13、1810 -14、1810 -17、1810 - 18為多點 發送受信終端的情況中之送信終端與受信終端之間的終端 間通信接續控制方法。 圖2 9 6係以正整數表示每個通信電路在I p轉送網丨8 〇 〇 内部中接續網點裝置及路由器間的通信電路之費用,網點 裝置1801與路由器1 807間的通信費用為” Γ ,網點裝置 1801與路由器1 809間的通信費用為” 2” ,網點裝置18〇2與 路由器1 807間的通信費用為” 2” ,網點裝置1 802與路由器 1 809間的通信費用為&quot;1” ,路由器1 8 07與路由器1 808間的 通信費用為ΠΓ ,路由器1807與路由器1809間的通信費用 為” 3” ,路由器1 80 8與路由器1 80 9間的通信費用為&quot;3” ,路 由器1 8 08與網點裝置1 80 3間的通信費用為,’ Γ ,路由器 1 8 08與網點裝置1 8 04間的通信費用為”4” ,路由器1 80 9與 網點裝置1 8 0 4間的通信費用為π 1,,,路由器1 8 0 9與網點裝 置1 8 0 5間的通信費用為” 1 ”。1245997 V. Description of the invention (233) Audio and video transmission terminal (also known as wired audio and video transmitter) for sound and moving images, an audio and video reception terminal (also known as cable TV receiver) that can receive digital audio and dynamic images. The terminal may be a combination of the media router described in the other embodiments and any one of a data terminal, an electric machine, or an audiovisual device connected to the media router. Since the transmission data or the trusted data of any of the aforementioned terminals is also stored in the payload portion of the IP packet, the multicast technology described below can be applied to all terminals. &lt; &lt; Multicast communication. Preparation for implementation >〉 The terminal 1 8 1 0-2 is a multicast transmission terminal, and the terminals 1810 -11, 1810-13, 1810 -14, 1810 -17, 1810-18 are In the case of multicast transmission of a trusted terminal, an inter-terminal communication connection control method between the sending terminal and the trusted terminal. Figure 2.6 shows the cost of the communication circuit between the network device and the router in the internal connection of each communication circuit in the IP transfer network with a positive integer. The communication cost between the network device 1801 and the router 1 807 is "Γ The communication fee between the branch device 1801 and the router 1 809 is “2”, the communication fee between the branch device 1802 and the router 1 807 is “2”, and the communication cost between the branch device 1802 and the router 1 809 is &quot; 1 ”, the communication cost between router 1 8 07 and router 1 808 is ΠΓ, the communication cost between router 1807 and router 1809 is“ 3 ”, and the communication cost between router 1 80 8 and router 1 80 9 is &quot; 3” The communication cost between the router 1 8 08 and the branch point device 1 80 3 is' Γ, and the communication cost between the router 1 8 08 and the branch point device 1 8 04 is “4”, and the router 1 80 9 and the branch point device 1 8 0 4 The communication fee between the routers is π1, and the communication fee between the router 1809 and the network device 1805 is "1".

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第237頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 237 1245997

五、發明說明(234) 在IP轉送網1800的内部上,圖296除了包含其他路由 器或通信電路,還圖示有關算出通信費用的路由器或網點 裝置。送信電路的通信費用為” 2 ” ,受信電路的通信費用 為π 3π等’根據送信方向與受信方向的不同而決定,在本 實施例則將送信電路與受信電路的通信費用設定為相同的 值0 圖294的網路資源管理伺服器1 8 58將1?轉送網丨8〇〇内 部的路由器或伺服器通信電路等各種資源的機能等儲存於 其内部的資料庫。圖297係表示網路資源管理伺服器丨8 58 保存的網點裝置或路由器間的通信電路的通信費用之費用 表1 869。費用表1 8 69内的記號” Ν18〇1”表示網點裝置18〇1 ,’’R1 8 07”表示路由器1 8 07。費用表1 869係以一覽表的形 式表示圖296所示的通信電路費用,例如費用表1 86 9的 行第7列的π 1 π表示從網點裝置丨8 〇丨至路由器丨8 〇 7的通信費 用為1 費用表1869的第2行第9列的”2”表示從網點裝、 置1801至路由器18〇9的通信費用為” 2” ,費用表1 869的第 3行第7列的’’ 2Π表示從網點裝置18〇2至路由器18〇7的通信 費用為”2” ,費用表1 86 9的第3行第9列的”1,,表示從網^ 裝置1802至路由器的通信費用為π 1’,,以下以同樣的 方式表示。 接著,參照圖2 9 8至圖3 0 0,說明用於多點發送通信之 程序。多點發送資料等的送信者1851(圖294)向受理者 1 8 5 3申响’將終端1 § 1 〇 — 2接續至網點裝置1 8 〇 1以做為多點 發送資料等的送信終端(圖3 00之步驟化1)。受理者1 85 3將V. Description of the Invention (234) In the interior of the IP forwarding network 1800, FIG. 296 includes, in addition to other routers or communication circuits, a router or a network device for calculating communication costs. The communication cost of the transmitting circuit is "2", the communication cost of the receiving circuit is π 3π, and the like is determined according to the difference between the sending direction and the receiving direction. In this embodiment, the communication costs of the sending circuit and the receiving circuit are set to the same value. 0 Figure 294's network resource management server 1 8 58 stores the functions of various resources such as routers or server communication circuits inside the 1-transmission network in the internal database. FIG. 297 is a table 1869 showing the communication cost of the communication circuit between the network device and the router stored in the network resource management server. The symbol "N18〇1" in the fee schedule 1 8 69 indicates the network device 18001, and "R1 8 07" means the router 1 8 07. The fee schedule 1 869 shows the communication circuit fee shown in FIG. 296 in the form of a list. For example, π 1 π in the 7th column of the row 1 86 9 indicates that the communication cost from the branch device 丨 8 〇 丨 to the router 丨 8 〇 7 is 1 and the "2" in the 2nd row and 9th column of the fee table 1869 The communication cost from the installation and installation of 1801 to the router 1809 is "2", and the "2Π" in the third row and column 7 of the fee table 1 869 indicates that the communication cost from the network device 1802 to the router 1807 is "2", "1" in the third row and the ninth column of the fee table 1 86 9 indicates that the communication fee from the network device 1802 to the router is π 1 ', which is expressed in the same manner below. Next, a procedure for multicast communication will be described with reference to FIGS. 998 to 300. The sender of the multicast data, etc. 1851 (Figure 294) applied to the receiver 1 8 5 3 'connect terminal 1 § 1 0-2 to the network device 1 8 〇1 as the transmission terminal of multicast data, etc. (Fig. 3 Step 1). Recipients 1 85 3 will

12459971245997

送信識別情報與費用支付方法,跟送信終端情況187〇(圖 298) —起輸入至使用者服務伺服器1855(步驟Ms2)。在 此’运信終端情報1 870包含將多點發送送信用的線端 1810-2接續至網點裝置1801的情報。送信終端情報187〇内 的記號&quot;N1 8 0 Γ表示網點裝置丨8 〇丨,„ τ 1 8丨〇 — 2,,表示終端 I、8 If-2。使用者服務伺服器丨855將取得的送信識別情報或 送信費用支付方法,與送信終端情報丨87〇 一起傳送认多點 發送管理伺服器·1 857(步驟MS3),多點發送管理伺服°器”’ 1 857將接收到的前述情報保存於該資料庫(步驟μ§4)。 接著’說明終端1810-11、i81〇 —13、181()—14、 1 8 1 0 -1 7、1 8 1 0 - 1 8的使用者接收多點發送資料等的例子。 此等使用者1 852向受理者1 854申請接收多點發送資料等 (步驟MSI 1)。受理者1 854將使用者識別情報或受作費用支 付方法,與受信終端情報1871 —起輸入至使用者/艮務伺服 器1 856 (步驟MS12)。在此,受信終端情報1871 (圖2 99 )係 包含將多點發送資料受信用的終端— 及181〇一13接續 至網點裝置1 8 0 3 ’將終端1 8 1 0 -1 4接續至網點|詈1w 、 受信終端情報18 71内的記號” N1 8 03”表示網點裝置18〇3, T1810-11&quot;表示終端1810-11 ’其他的記法也是一樣。 使用者服務伺服器1 856將前述取得的受信識別情報或 費用支付方法’與受信終端情報1871 —起傳^給多=發送 管理伺服器1 857 (步驟MS13),多點發送管理饲服器1857 將接收到的前述情報保存於其資料庫(步驟msh) /當多點The transmission identification information and the payment method are input to the user service server 1855 (step Ms2) together with the transmission terminal situation 1870 (Fig. 298). Here, the "transport terminal information 1 870" includes information for connecting the multicast terminal 1810-2 to the branch terminal device 1801. The symbol &quot; N1 8 0 Γ in the sending terminal information 187〇 indicates the network device 丨 8 〇 丨, „τ 1 8 丨 〇-2, which indicates the terminal I, 8 If-2. The user service server 丨 855 will obtain The delivery identification information or delivery fee payment method is transmitted together with the delivery terminal information 丨 87 ° to the multicast management server 1 857 (step MS3), the multicast management server "'1 857 will receive the aforementioned Information is stored in this database (step μ§4). Next, examples of the users of the terminals 1810-11, i81〇-13, 181 ()-14, 1 8 1 0 -1 7, 1 8 1 0-18, etc. will receive multicast data. These users 1 852 apply to the recipient 1 854 for receiving multicast data, etc. (step MSI 1). The acceptor 1 854 inputs the user identification information or the payment method, and the trusted terminal information 1871 to the user / service server 1 856 (step MS12). Here, the trusted terminal information 1871 (Figure 2 99) includes a terminal that receives credit for multicast data—and 1810-13 connected to the network device 1 8 0 3 'connects the terminal 1 8 1 0 -1 4 to the network. | 詈 1w, the symbol "N1 8 03" in the trusted terminal information 18 71 indicates the network device 1803, and T1810-11 &quot; indicates the terminal 1810-11. The other methods are the same. The user service server 1 856 transmits the previously-obtained trusted identification information or payment method 'and the trusted terminal information 1871 to the multiple = send the management server 1 857 (step MS13), and sends the management feeder 1857 in multiple points. Keep the aforementioned information received in its database (step msh) / Dangdu

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第 239 頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 239 1245997

發送官理伺服器1 8 57接收步驟MS4及步驟MS14的雙方時, 將多點發运識別情報ID- k授與送信終端情報丨8 7 〇及使用者 終知情報1 8 7 1,將此等情報送給樹建造伺服器丨8 5 9 (圖 294)(步驟MS18)。樹建造伺服器ι859向資源管理伺服器 1858要求費用表1869(步驟MS19),取得費用表1869(步驟 MS20)。樹建造伺服器1 8 59使用多點發送樹狀結構算出模 ,1 859 -1 (圖294 ),決定透過多點發送識別情報ID — k所決 疋的多點發送樹狀結構(圖3 0 1 ),也就是利用多點發送技 術決定IP封包的轉送通信路,形成對網點裝置的位址管理When the transmitting official server 1 8 57 receives both of steps MS4 and MS14, the multi-point shipping identification information ID-k is given to the transmitting terminal information 丨 8 7 〇 and the user's final information 1 8 7 1 and so on The information is sent to the tree construction server 8 5 9 (Fig. 294) (step MS18). The tree construction server 859 requests the resource management server 1858 for the fee list 1869 (step MS19), and obtains the fee list 1869 (step MS20). The tree construction server 1 8 59 calculates the module using the multicast tree structure, 1 859 -1 (Figure 294), and determines the multicast tree structure determined by the multicast identification ID — k (Figure 3 0). 1), that is, the use of multicast technology to determine the communication path of IP packet forwarding, to form the address management of the network device

表追加情報(圖3 02至圖3 05 )或路由器的路徑表追加情報 (圖306至圖308),保存於樹建造伺服器1859的内部(步驟 MS21)。 &lt;〈透過樹狀結構伺服器的多點發送樹狀結構之結構乃 其次,樹建造伺服器1 8 5 9向表管理伺服器1 § 61要求分 別將位址管理表追加情報1 8 11 - 2追加至位址管理表The table additional information (Fig. 3 02 to Fig. 3 05) or the router's path table additional information (Fig. 306 to Fig. 308) are stored in the tree construction server 1859 (step MS21). &lt; <The structure of sending a tree structure through the multi-point transmission of the tree structure server is the next, the tree construction server 1 8 5 9 sends to the table management server 1 § 61 requests additional information for the address management table 1 8 11- 2 Added to the address management table

1811-1,將路徑表追加情報1817-2追加至路徑表1817-1 (步驟MS22),表管理伺服器1861報告對於前述要求的設定 (步驟MS25),樹建造伺服器1859向表管理伺服器1862要求 分別將位址管理表追加情報1 81 3 - 2追加至位址管理表 1813- 1,將位址管理表追加情報181 4-2追加至位址管理表 1814- 1,將路徑表追加情報1818-2追加至路徑表1818 - 1 (步驟MS23)。然後,表管理伺服器1 862報告對於前述要求 的設定(步驟MS26),樹建造伺服器1859向表管理伺服器 1 8 6 3要求分別將位址管理表追加情報1 81 5 - 2追加至位址管1811-1, adding route table additional information 1817-2 to route table 1817-1 (step MS22), the table management server 1861 reports the setting for the aforementioned request (step MS25), and the tree construction server 1859 reports to the table management server 1862 required to add address management table information 1 81 3-2 to the address management table 1813-1 and add address management table information 181 4-2 to the address management table 1814-1 to add path tables The information 1818-2 is added to the route table 1818-1 (step MS23). Then, the table management server 1 862 reports the setting of the aforementioned requirements (step MS26), and the tree construction server 1859 requests the table management server 1 8 6 3 to add the address management table additional information 1 81 5-2 to the respective positions. Site management

2〇49-3793.PF;RAY.ptd 第240頁 1245997 五、發明說明(237) 理表1815-1,將路徑表追加情報1819j追加至路徑表 1819-1 (步驟MS24)。在此,表管理伺服器“⑸被接續至靠 近網點^置的路由器。位址管理表追加情報或路徑表追加 情報的意思在I p封包轉送的流程中加以說明。當樹建造伺 服器1 8 59確認前述步驟MS25至仏27結束時,透過將多點發 送情報追加至網點裝置内的位址管理表或路由器之路徑表 的方式,將在步驟MS18中要求的樹狀結構建造的結束報告 多點發送管理伺嚴器1 85 7(步驟MS28)。透過以上的手續,〇49-3793.PF; RAY.ptd Page 240 1245997 V. Description of the invention (237) Processing table 1815-1, adding path table additional information 1819j to path table 1819-1 (step MS24). Here, the table management server "is connected to a router located close to the network. The meaning of the address management table addition information or the path table addition information is explained in the flow of IP packet transfer. When the tree construction server 1 8 59 Confirm that at the end of steps MS25 to 仏 27, by adding multicast information to the address management table or router's path table in the network device, the end report of the tree structure construction required in step MS18 will be increased. Click the delivery management server 1 85 7 (step MS28). Through the above procedures,

用於多點發送通信的終端間通信接續控制的前半部分,也 就是樹狀結構的建造結束。 &lt;〈多點發送樹狀結構&gt;&gt;The first half of the communication connection control between terminals for multicast communication, that is, the end of the construction of the tree structure. &lt; &lt; Multicast Transmission Tree Structure &gt; &gt;

圖301所示的前述多點發送樹狀結構的意思如下。當 &lt;缟1 8 1 0 2送出的外部I P封包到達網點裝置1 8 〇 1時,變成 内部ip封包,前述内部IP封包向路由器18〇7及路由器18〇9 的2個方向分歧,到達路由器18〇7的内部即封包通過路由 器1807,接著通過路由器18()8,到達網點裝置18()3。其他 的内4IP封包到達路由器18〇9,路由器18〇9將前述内部^ 封包以2個方向,也就是送出給網點裝置18〇4及18〇5。網 點裝置1 803將接收到的内㈣封包逆膠囊化而回復成 ip封包,將回復的外部”封包送出給終端181〇11及。 1810 13網點裝置1 8 0 4將接收到的内部丨p封包逆膠囊 而回復成外部IP封包,將回復的外部 化 -14。網點裝置18〇5將接收到 ^ 而回復成外部封包,將回復的 化 1245997 五、發明說明(238) 1810 - 17及1810 - 18。如上述,在多點發送通信中,由於ιρ 封包被轉送至樹狀結構上看到的通信路形 稱為多點發送樹狀結構。 路的形狀 &lt;&lt;利用多點發送技術的樹狀結構之建造〉〉 冰在前述步驟化22至以24中,從樹建造伺服器1 8 59到表 =理伺服器1861至1 863的通信係以通信信賴性高的Tcp通 接通信)進行。但是,複數個表管理伺服器被接續至 轉达網内的多數的路由器,分擔網點裝置的位址管理表 或路由器的路徑表的啟始設定或記錄改寫機能。本實施例 1至少(3個)稱為路由器18〇7至18〇9為例。在其他實施例 則,定’ IP轉送網内的路由器數目為多數,例如路由器數 目為1 〇萬,表管理伺服器的數目也相當多。 絲、、,在此作丨中,從樹建造伺服器向多數的表管理伺服器, 送=址g理表追加情報或路徑表追加情報,通信流量過 沾:L 5方法。因此’用以從樹建造伺服器向前述1 0萬台 : 器轉送位址管理表追加情報或路徑表追加情報的路 =之記錄,在建錢轉送網的時點,設定於各路由器。 ::2 ί各路由器的通信記錄全部,將1P封包轉送至多 的腺^ -大結構上。如此,可抑制從樹建造伺服器到多數 位址管理表追加情報或路徑表追加情 &lt;〈位址管理表&gt;&gt; 參照圖3〇9至圖311加以說明日寺,在位址管理表1811的 第1仃上包含位址管理追加情報1811—2,在位址管理表The meaning of the aforementioned multicast tree structure shown in FIG. 301 is as follows. When the external IP packet sent by <缟 1 8 1 0 2 arrives at the network device 1 8 0 1, it becomes an internal IP packet. The internal IP packet diverges in two directions of router 1807 and router 18 0 9 and reaches the router. Inside the 1807, the packet passes through the router 1807, and then passes through the router 18 () 8 to reach the network device 18 () 3. The other inner 4IP packets reach the router 1809, and the router 1809 sends the aforementioned inner ^ packets in two directions, that is, it sends them to the network device 1804 and 1805. The branch device 1 803 decapsulates the received internal packet and returns it as an ip packet, and sends the returned external packet to the terminal 181011 and 1810 13 branch device 1 8 0 4 sends the received internal packet. Reverse the capsule and return to an external IP packet, and externalize the response to -14. The outlet device 1805 will receive the ^ and reply to an external packet, which will return 1245997. V. Description of the invention (238) 1810-17 and 1810- 18. As mentioned above, in multicast communication, the shape of the communication path seen as the ιρ packet is forwarded to the tree structure is called the multicast tree structure. The shape of the path &lt; &lt; Construction of tree structure >> In the previous steps 22 to 24, the communication system from the tree construction server 1 8 59 to the table server 1861 to 1 863 communicates with Tcp with high communication reliability) However, a plurality of table management servers are connected to most routers in the relay network, and share the address management table of the network device or the initial setting or record rewriting function of the router's path table. This embodiment 1 at least ( 3) called routing For example, in other embodiments, the number of routers in the IP forwarding network is set to be a majority, for example, the number of routers is 100,000, and the number of table management servers is also quite large. In this work, from the tree-building server to most table management servers, send additional information or routing table additional information, communication traffic is too contaminated: L 5 method. Therefore 'used to build from the tree The server forwards the records of the above 100,000 units: the address management table additional information or the path table additional information to the record of the route =, which is set to each router when the money transfer network is built :: 2 ί The communication record of each router All the 1P packets are forwarded to many glands ^-Large structure. In this way, it is possible to suppress the addition of information from the tree construction server to the majority of address management tables or the addition of path tables &lt; <address management table &gt; &gt; 309 to 311 are used to explain Nichiji. The address management table 1811 includes the address management additional information 1811-2 on the first frame, and the address management table

1245997 五、發明說明(239) 1813的第1行上包含位址管理追加情報1813_2,在位址管 理表1 8 1 4的第1行上包含位址管理追加情報1 8 1 4 - 2 ,在位 址管理表1815的第1行上包含位址管理追加情報1815-2。 圖3 0 9的通信電路1 8 2 2的網點裝置1 8 〇 1側的終端上授 與内部IP位址”101”,圖311的通信電路1 826-1的網點裝 置1 803側的終端上授與内部ip位址” 120”及&quot;IM2”,通信電 路1 8 2 6 - 2的網點裝置1 8 0 3側的終端上授與内部I p位址 ’’ 122”及’’ I M2”,·通信電路1 826- 3的網點裝置1 8 04側的終 端上授與内部IP位址”124&quot;及&quot;IM2,,,通信電路1826-4的 網點裝置1 8 0 5侧的終端上授與内部I p位址&quot;I 2 7,,及&quot;IΜ 2 &quot;, 通信電路1 8 2 6 - 5的網點裝置1 8 0 5側的終端上授與内部I ρ 位址&quot;I 28”及” ΙΜ2Π。在此,内部ip位址&quot;m21,係用於多點 發送的位址之實施例。 &lt;&lt;位址管理表的表示方法〉〉 位址管理表18 11至1815的記錄内部項目的記錄順序, 在先前技術的說明中將記錄内部項目透過” E1、E 2、11、 I 2&quot;的順序表示,在本實施例中項目的順序變更位置為 γ 1、E1、E2、12” ,僅是表示上不同,本質上沒有差異。 從1P位址為’’ Ε01 ”的終端181 0-2被送出的IP封包1 83 0係經 過通信電路1 82 2到達網點裝置1801 〇IP封包1 8 30的受信 端位址”M2’’係多點發送外部IP位址,做為具體的數值,例 如’’ 224· 1· 2· 3”,在此,” 224”代表IETF規定的多點發送位 址。多點發送内部1?位址”丨M2”的具體數值,例如&quot;225 1 2· 3Π 。 · · m 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第243頁 1245997 五、發明說明(240) &lt;&lt;路由器的路徑表〉〉 參照圖3 1 0加以說明,包含路徑表1 8 1 7至1 8 1 9,寫入 可轉送接收到的IP封包之通信電路。在路徑表1817的第2 行上包含路徑表追加情報1817-2,在路徑表1818的第2行 上包含路徑表追加情報1818-2 ’在路徑表1819的第2行上 包含路徑表追加情報18 19-2。舉例而言,在路徑表1817的 第2行的記錄中,受信端IP位址為”IM2”的1?封包係透過邏 輯通信電路名稱G12被指定的通信電路ι 824_ι,在路徑表 1 8 1 8的第2行的記錄中,受信端I p位址為&quot;丨M2&quot;的I p封包係 透過邏輯通信電路名稱G27被指定的通信電路ι 825。又, 路徑表1819的第2行的記錄寫入n IM2&quot;及,,G21、G22,,,受信 端IP位址的I P封包被轉送至透過邏輯通信電路名稱“ 1指 定的通信電路1824-2及透過邏輯通信電路名稱G22指定的 通信電路1 824-3。 &lt;&lt;IP封包的轉送〉〉 其次,說明從自終端18 1〇-2的外部ip封包的傳送起一 連串的IP封包轉送的步驟,圖312的18〇〇 —丨係表示Ip轉送 網1800内的IP封包之傳送接收。終端181〇 — 2將外部Ip封包 1 830傳送給通信電路1 822(圖312的步驟D1),當網點裝置 1801接收外部IP封包183〇時,被授與輸入ιρ封包183〇之通 信電路1 8 2 2的終端部(邏輯端子)的内部丨p位址為&quot;丨〇丨”, 確認IP封包1 830的受信端外部Ip位址為,,M2”,檢索位址管 理表1 8 11内部’開始的送信端内部丨p位址為”丨〇丨”,接著 檢索包含受信端外部IP位址為&quot;M2,,的記錄(第1 ιρ封包接1245997 V. Description of Invention (239) The first line of 1813 contains address management additional information 1813_2, and the first line of address management table 1 8 1 4 contains address management additional information 1 8 1 4-2, The first line of the address management table 1815 contains address management additional information 1815-2. The internal point IP address "101" is granted to the terminal device 1 8 〇1 of the communication circuit 1 8 2 2 in Fig. 3 09, and the terminal 803 side of the network point device 1 826-1 to the communication circuit 1 826-1 in Fig. 311 Internal IP addresses "120" and "IM2" are granted, and network point devices 1 8 2 6-2 on the communication circuit 1 8 0 3 are granted internal IP addresses "122" and "I M2 ", The internal circuit IP address is granted to the terminal on the network device 1 8 04 side of the communication circuit 1 826-3" 124 "and" IM2 ", the terminal on the network side 1 8 0 5 side of the communication circuit 1826-4 The internal I p address &quot; I 2 7, and &quot; I 2 &quot;, the network point device of the communication circuit 1 8 2 6-5 and the internal I p address are granted to the terminal 1 8 0 5 I 28 "and" IM2Π. Here, the internal IP address &quot; m21, is an embodiment of an address for multicast transmission. &lt; &lt; Representation method of the address management table >〉 The address management table 18 11 to 1815 records the order of recording internal items. In the description of the prior art, the internal items of the record are passed through "E1, E 2, 11, I 2" ; The order indicates that, in this embodiment, the order change position of the items is γ1, E1, E2, 12 ", which is only different in terms of expression, and there is no difference in essence. The IP packet sent from the terminal 181 0-2 whose 1P address is "Ε01" 1 83 0 is transmitted to the branch device 1801 through the communication circuit 1 82 2 〇 The IP address 1 8 30 is the trusted end address "M2" Multicast external IP address as a specific value, such as "224 · 1 · 2 · 3", where "224" represents the multicast address specified by the IETF. Multicast sends an internal 1? Address The specific numerical value of "丨 M2", such as &quot; 225 1 2 · 3Π. · · M 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 243 1245997 V. Description of the invention (240) &lt; &lt; Route table of the router >〉 A description will be given with reference to FIG. 3, and a communication circuit including a routing table 1 8 1 7 to 1 8 1 9 is written to transmit and receive an IP packet. The second line of the routing table 1817 includes a routing table additional information 1817- 2. Include route table additional information 1818-2 on the second line of the route table 1818 'Include route table additional information 18 19-2 on the second line of the route table 1819. For example, on the second line of the route table 1817 In the line record, the 1? Packet with the IP address of the receiving end "IM2" is the communication circuit designated by the logical communication circuit name G12. 824_ In the record of the second line of the path table 1 8 1 8, the IP packet with the IP address of the receiving end as &quot; 丨 M2 &quot; is the communication circuit 825 designated by the logical communication circuit name G27. Also, the path The record in the second line of Table 1819 writes IM2, and, G21, G22, and IP packets of the recipient's IP address are forwarded to the communication circuit 1824-2 designated by the logical communication circuit name "1 and through the logic Communication circuit 1 824-3 designated by communication circuit name G22. &lt; &lt; Transfer of IP Packets &gt;> Next, the steps of a series of IP packet transfers from the transmission of an external IP packet from the terminal 18 1-2 will be described. 180-1 in FIG. 312 indicates the IP transfer network 1800. Transmission and reception of IP packets within. The terminal 1810-2 transmits the external IP packet 1 830 to the communication circuit 1 822 (step D1 in FIG. 312). When the network device 1801 receives the external IP packet 1830, it is authorized to enter the communication circuit 18 of the input packet 1830. 2 2 The internal part of the terminal (logic terminal) 丨 p address is &quot; 丨 〇 丨 ”, confirm that the external IP address of the trusted end of IP packet 1 830 is, M2”, retrieve the address management table 1 8 11 internal 'The beginning of the sender's internal 丨 p address is "丨 〇 丨", and then retrieve the record containing the external IP address of the trusted end as &quot; M2 ,, (the first packet packet connection

--- 第244頁 2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(241) 收檢查),進而檢查是否包含前述檢索的記錄内之ip封包 1 830内的送信端外部1{)位址,,E〇1 f,(第2 ιρ封包接收檢查) 在本例中,找出包含從位址管理表1811上起第1行的 &quot;ΠΠ、Ε〇1、M2、IM2、G02、G03、0” 的記錄,使用此記錄 内部的IP位址” I 〇 1 ”及”丨M2” ,形成送信端丨p位址為,,丨〇 i,,--- Page 244 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (241) Acceptance check), and then check whether the ip packet 1 830 of the sender outside the searched record contains 1 {) bit outside the sender Address, E〇1 f, (2 ιρ packet reception check) In this example, find &quot; ΠΠ, E〇1, M2, IM2, G02, G03, 0 "record, using the IP address" I 〇1 "and" 丨 M2 "inside this record to form the sending end 丨 p address is ,,,

、受信端IP位址為” IM2”(IP封包膠囊化),送出給膠囊化 後的邏輯通信電潞名稱G〇2用的通信電路1 823M,以做為 内部IP封包1831-1 (步驟D2),並且送出至膠囊化後的邏輯 通信電路名稱G03用的通信電路1 82 3-2,以做為内部ip封 包1831-2(步驟D3)。在前述程序中,在位址管理表an上 不包含外部IP封包1 830的受信端1?位址時,外部lp封包 1830被廢棄(第1 ip封包接收檢查)。前述檢查是否包含前 述檢索的記錄内之IP封包183〇内的送信端外部1?位址 ’’ E0 1&quot;的步驟可省略,此時,不進行前述第2 I p封包接收 檢查。The IP address of the receiving end is "IM2" (IP packet is encapsulated), and it is sent to the communication circuit 1 823M for the encapsulated logical communication electronic name G02 as the internal IP packet 1831-1 (Step D2 ) And send it to the communication circuit 1 82 3-2 for the encapsulated logical communication circuit name G03 as the internal IP packet 1831-2 (step D3). In the foregoing procedure, when the address 1 of the trusted end 1 of the external IP packet 1 830 is not included in the address management table an, the external lp packet 1830 is discarded (the first ip packet reception check). The aforementioned step of checking whether the sender's external 1 'address'' E0 1 &quot; in the IP packet 1830 in the previously retrieved record can be omitted. At this time, the aforementioned second IP packet receiving check is not performed.

經過通信電路1823-1轉送的内部IP封包1831-1到達 路由器1807,由於内部ip封包的受信端1?位址為 &quot;IM2&quot;,根據路徑表1817的第2行之” IM2、G12&quot;,被送出給 邏輯通信電路名稱G12用的通信電路1 824-1,以做為内部 IP封包1831-3(步驟D4)。在此,IP封包1831-1被複製而成 為IP封包1831-3。内部IP封包1831-3到達路由器1808,由 於内部IP封包1831-3的受信端IP位址為,,IM2”,根據路徑 表1818的第2行之’’IM2、G27n,被送出給邏輯通信電路名The internal IP packet 1831-1 forwarded by the communication circuit 1823-1 reaches the router 1807. Since the address of the trusted end 1 of the internal IP packet is &quot; IM2 &quot;, according to the second line of the path table 1817, "IM2, G12", It is sent to the communication circuit 1 824-1 for the logical communication circuit name G12 as the internal IP packet 1831-3 (step D4). Here, the IP packet 1831-1 is copied to become the IP packet 1831-3. Internal The IP packet 1831-3 arrived at the router 1808. Because the IP address of the trusted end of the internal IP packet 1831-3 is, IM2 ", it is sent to the logical communication circuit name according to" IM2, G27n "in the second line of the path table 1818.

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第245頁 1245997 五、發明說明(242) 稱G27用的通信電路1825,以做為内部IP封包1831-4(步 驟D5) °在此,封包18 3卜3被複製而成為IP封包1831 -4 。另一方面’經過通信電路1823-2被轉送的内部IP封包 1831—2到達路由器1809,由於内部IP封包1831-2的受信端 IP位址為” IM2fl,根據路徑表1819的第2行之,,以2、621、 G22 ’被送出給邏輯通信電路名稱G2i用的通信電路 1 824一$ ’以做為内部IP封包1831 -5(步驟D7),並且被送出 給邏輯通信電路名稱G22用的通信電路1 824-3,以做為内 部IP封包1831-6(步驟D8)。在此,IP封包丨83丨―2被複製而 成為IP封包183 1-5及IP封包183 1-6。路由器的路徑表1817 =1,81 9及網點裝置的路徑表可具有公知的罩幕,其在本例 中省略。 署部^封包1831—4係經由通信電路1 825到達網點j 於位址管理表1813的第1行的記錄&quot;IM2、M2 二&quot;、I〇1、〇、F10、F12”左起 4 個項目&quot;IM2、M2、e〇i、 M2&quot; ^ 部1P 封包1831-4 内的4 個位址&quot;101、IM2、E01 才頭一音,内部1P封包1831M如其他實施例說明’去除! U施逆膠囊化’回復外部1p封包183〇。被回復的2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 245 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (242) The communication circuit 1825 for G27 is called as the internal IP packet 1831-4 (step D5). Here, the packet 18 3 b 3 It is copied into an IP packet 1831 -4. On the other hand, the internal IP packet 1831-2 transferred through the communication circuit 1823-2 reaches the router 1809. Because the trusted IP address of the internal IP packet 1831-2 is "IM2fl, according to the second line of the path table 1819, "2,621, G22" is sent to the communication circuit 1 824- $ for logical communication circuit name G2i as the internal IP packet 1831 -5 (step D7), and is sent to the logical communication circuit name G22 The communication circuit 1 824-3 is used as the internal IP packet 1831-6 (step D8). Here, the IP packet 丨 83 丨 -2 is copied to become the IP packet 183 1-5 and the IP packet 183 1-6. The router The route table 1817 = 1,81 9 and the route table of the outlet device may have a well-known mask, which is omitted in this example. The department ^ packet 1831-4 arrives at the outlet j via the communication circuit 1 825 in the address management table Record of the 1st line of 1813 "IM2, M2 II", I01, 〇, F10, F12 "4 items from the left" "IM2, M2, e〇i, M2" ^ Department 1P packet 1831-4 The first four addresses are "101, IM2, and E01. The internal 1P packet is 1831M, as explained in other embodiments." Reply external packet 183〇 1p. Responded

F1M 被送出給該第1行的記錄内部的輸出介面F1 〇 F12的指定通信電路,也就是輸 ?面Fl〇 I,],以做為外部IP封包1832-1(步二〇:疋的通?電 給輸出介面F12指定的通信電路1 82 6 ,著送 ⑽32-2(步驟M3)〇ip封包⑻^到2,:做為外部Π 封包1832-2到達終端1810-13。 ]達”端1810-H ’F1M is sent to the internal communication interface F1 of the first line of the record. F12 The designated communication circuit of F12, that is, output? F10I,] as an external IP packet 1832-1 (step 20: the communication of 疋 to the communication circuit 1 82 6 designated by the output interface F12, and send ⑽ 32-2 (step M3) 〇ip packet ⑻ ^ 到 2: As an external Π packet 1832-2 arrives at the terminal 1810-13.] 达 "端 1810-H '

1245997 五、發明說明(243) &quot;&quot;&quot;&quot; _同樣地,内部IP封包1831—5經由通信電路1 824 — 2到 ·, 置1 8〇4。由於位址管理表1 814的第1行的記錄 、E〇1、101、0、F14’’ 左起 4 個項目 ”IM2、M2、 g 、1〇1&quot;與内部IP封包1831_5内的4個位址&quot;I〇1、IM2、 =一致,内部IP封包1831—5如其他實施例說明,去 払頭,實施逆膠囊化,回復外部Ip封包183〇。被回復 m /!^述/ P封包係被送出給該第1行的記錄内部的輸出介面 ί If定通信電路,也就是輸出介面F14指定的通信電路 3,以做為外部1p封包1 832 -3(步驟D1 4)。IP封包 « 1832-3 到達終端181〇 — η。 # °卩1p封包1 832 6係經由通信電路1 824-3到達網點 、pm 05。由於位址管理表1815的第1行的記錄” IM2、M2 、101、〇、F17、F18&quot;左起4 個項目 ” IM2、M2、E01、 /、内部IP封包183卜6内的4個位址&quot;I〇1、IM2、e〇i、 M2 —致’内部IP封包1831_6如其他實施例說明,去除ιρ ί TP ^施逆膠囊化,回復外部1P封包1830。被回復的前 FU的/一係^达出給該第1行的記錄内部的輸出介面F1 7及 4電路,也就是輸出介面F17指定的通信電路 二,^^外廣封包1 832_4(步_7),輸出介面 1M日疋的通彳§電路1 82 6_5,以做為外部ιρ封包1 832 5 ,驟D18) °IP 封包 1832-4 到達終端181〇_17,Ip 1832-5 到達終端1810-18。 &lt;〈ACK封包或NACK封包的爆裂的預防〉〉 終端181 0-11為了將外部Ip封包1 832 1的接收向送信1245997 V. Description of the invention (243) &quot; &quot; &quot; &quot; _ Similarly, the internal IP packet 1831-5 passes through the communication circuit 1 824-2 to ·, and is set to 1804. Due to the record in the first line of the address management table 1 814, E01, 101, 0, and F14 "4 items from the left" IM2, M2, g, 101 "and 4 of the internal IP packet 1831_5 Address &quot; I01, IM2, = consistent, internal IP packet 1831-5, as described in other embodiments, de-hop, implement inverse encapsulation, reply external IP packet 1830. Reply m /! ^ 述 / P The packet is sent to the output interface inside the record of the first line. If the communication circuit is designated, that is, the communication circuit 3 designated by the output interface F14, as an external 1p packet 1 832 -3 (step D1 4). IP packet «1832-3 Arrived at the terminal 181〇— η. # ° 卩 1p packet 1 832 6 arrived at the branch, pm 05 via the communication circuit 1 824-3. Due to the record in the first line of the address management table 1815" IM2, M2, 101, 〇, F17, F18 &quot; 4 items from left "" IM2, M2, E01, /, 4 addresses in the internal IP packet 183 and 6 "&quot; I01, IM2, e〇i, M2-to ' The internal IP packet 1831_6, as explained in other embodiments, removes ιρ ί ^ ^ reverse inverse encapsulation, and returns an external 1P packet 1830. The returned former FU / one line ^ is given to the first line The internal output interface F1 7 and 4 circuits, that is, the communication circuit 2 designated by the output interface F17, ^^ Wide packet 1 832_4 (step _7), the output interface 1M sundial communication circuit § circuit 1 82 6_5 As an external ιρ packet 1 832 5, step D18) ° IP packet 1832-4 arrives at terminal 1810-17, IP 1832-5 arrives at terminal 1810-18. &Lt; <Prevention of burst of ACK packet or NACK packet> Terminal 181 0-11 sends a message to receive external IP packet 1 832 1

12459971245997

五、發明說明(244) 端終端1810-2報生 ,,M2,,、受俨媳认。,終端1 8 1 0 —1 1形成送信端外部I P位址 送出至通位址” E〇1”的外部IP封包m3,考慮 點裝置1 803接收外H1的情形(圖312之步驟D21)。當網 封包内*的送作端; 包1 833時’ 4認接收到的外部1p 接收到的外部Ip=亩Z址&quot;M 2&quot;係、多點發送位址,前述 1843。被轉送至封?^ 包溢出的通信電路 封包5封包通化電路1 843之前述外部1p 收外HP二h同樣地,在網點裝置1 804從終端181 0_14接 匕時(步驟D22),或網點裝置1 805從終端 -7接收外部1?封包時(步驟D23),前述接收到的外部 、、被直接轉送給通信電路1844或1845。被轉送至封 匕溢出的通“電路1844或1845之外部IP封包被廢棄。 接著,說明網點裝置1 8 03將接收到的IP封包1 8 33轉送 至溢出的通信電路1843之具體的方法。網點裝置丨8〇3確 ,被授與輸入IP封包1833的通信電路1826-1的終端部(邏 輯端子)的内部IP位址為” IM2”、IP封包1 833的受信端外部 IP位址&quot;E 0 Γ’ ’檢索位址管理表1 81 3内部的通信記錄,檢 索包含開始的送信端内部IP位址為&quot;I jj 2,,,接著受信端外 部IP位址π E 0 Γ’的通信記錄,並且檢查是否包含前述檢索 的記錄内之I Ρ封包1 8 3 3内的送信端外部I ρ位址” 2&quot;。在本 例中,由於位址管理表1813的第1至第3的位址項目全部 根據上述’可抑制接收多點發送資料的所有終端向多 點發送資料送信端終端送出終端個別報告的IP封包,結果 可預防在IP轉送網内部的ACK封包或NACK封包的爆滿。V. Description of the invention (244) The terminal terminal 1810-2 reports that M2, M2, and M2 are recognized. The terminal 1 8 1 0 — 1 1 forms the external IP address of the sender and sends the external IP packet m3 to the general address “EO1”. Consider the case where the point device 1 803 receives the external H1 (step D21 in FIG. 312). When the packet in the network packet is sent as the end; when packet 1 833 is received, the received external 1p is received. The received external Ip = mu Z address &quot; M 2 &quot; is a multicast address, the aforementioned 1843. Forwarded to a cover? ^ Packet overflow communication circuit packet 5 packet communication circuit 1 843 of the aforementioned external 1p receiving external HP 2h Similarly, when the branch device 1 804 is connected from the terminal 181 0_14 (step D22), or the branch device 1 805 is from the terminal- 7 When receiving an external 1? Packet (step D23), the previously received external is directly transferred to the communication circuit 1844 or 1845. The external IP packet that was forwarded to the circuit overflowing the communication circuit 1844 or 1845 is discarded. Next, the specific method for the branch point device 1 033 to forward the received IP packet 1 8 33 to the overflowing communication circuit 1843. The branch point The device 丨 803 confirms that the internal IP address of the terminal (logical terminal) of the communication circuit 1826-1 that is input to the IP packet 1833 is "IM2", and the external IP address of the trusted end of the IP packet 1 833 &quot; E 0 Γ '' Retrieve the internal communication record of the address management table 1 81 3, and search for the internal IP address of the sender that starts with &quot; I jj 2 ,, and then the external IP address of the receiver π E 0 Γ ' Communication record, and check whether the sender's external I ρ address "2" in the IP packet 1 8 3 3 in the previously retrieved record is included. In this example, since the first to third address items of the address management table 1813 are all based on the above-mentioned 'all terminals that can inhibit the reception of multicast data are sent to the multicast data sender terminal and the IP packet of the terminal's individual report is sent. As a result, the ACK packet or NACK packet in the IP forwarding network can be prevented from being full.

致故迖擇此记錄,其次由於此通信記錄的第5項目(内 部封包輸出指定)為”。&quot;,故不進糾封包18二項囊目:内 而直接將1P封包1 8 33轉送給溢出通信電路1 843 / 1245997 、發明說明(245) ^ 在從終端1810〜13、181〇-14、1810-17、1810-18 將=信端IP位址” M2”、受信端Ip位址&quot;E〇1&quot;的外部ιρ封 ,迗給網點裝置的情況中,透過與上述相同的程序,被轉 迗給各網點裝置的溢出通信電路。如上述,從受信終端 18 1 0 1 1至送&gt;fs端終端1 8丨〇 一 2,即使送出用以確認接收前 述夕點發送IP封包的ACK封包,由於不通過網點裝置18〇3 可預防因ACK封包的爆滿(ACK implosion)造成IP轉送網 的擁擠。有關封包溢出通信電路上的1?封包之使用後述。 的日^序’透過如多點發送技術,預先決定I p封包轉送的時 刻’即使在預定的時刻不配送IP封包的情況中,也傳送 NACK封包。 &lt;&lt;有線廣播的實現〉〉 終端1 81 0 _ 2為可傳送數位化聲音的聲音送信終端,終 端 1810-11、1810-13、1810-14、1810-17、1810-18 為數 位化聲音受信終端時,I p封包1 8 3 0的傳送變成有線聲音廣 播。又,終端1 8 1 0 -2為可傳送數位化聲音動態影像的聲音 動態影像送信終端,終端1 8 1 〇 -1 1、1 8 1 0 -1 3、1 8 1 0 _ 1 4、 1 8 1 0 -1 7、1 8 1 0 _ 1 8為數位化聲音動態影像受信終端時,I pFor this reason, I chose this record, and because the 5th item (designation of the internal packet output) of this communication record is ".", I will not enter the correction package 18. The two items: directly forward the 1P packet 1 8 33 Give overflow communication circuit 1 843/1245997, description of the invention (245) ^ In the slave terminals 1810 ~ 13, 1810-14, 1810-17, 1810-18 will be = the IP address of the client "M2", the IP address of the recipient &quot; E〇1 &quot; In the case of an external seal, which is transmitted to the branch network device, it is transferred to the overflow communication circuit of each branch network device through the same procedure as described above. As described above, from the trusted terminal 18 1 0 1 1 to Send &gt; fs-end terminal 1 8 丨 〇2, even if sending ACK packet to confirm receipt of the aforementioned IP packet sent by the eve, since it does not pass through the network device 1803, it can prevent IP caused by ACK implosion. Congestion of the transfer network. The use of 1? Packets on the communication circuit of the packet overflow will be described later. The sequence of the day is 'determining the time of IP packet transfer in advance through such as multicast technology' even if the IP packet is not delivered at a predetermined time. In the case, NACK packets are also transmitted. &Lt; &lt; Wired Implementation of broadcasting> Terminal 1 81 0 _ 2 is a voice transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital audio, and terminals 1810-11, 1810-13, 1810-14, 1810-17, and 1810-18 are digital audio receiving terminals. The transmission of the IP packet 1 8 3 0 becomes a wired audio broadcast. In addition, the terminal 1 8 1 0 -2 is an audio dynamic image transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital audio dynamic images, and the terminals 1 8 1 〇-1 1, 1 8 1 0 -1 3, 1 8 1 0 _ 1 4, 1 8 1 0 -1 7, 1 8 1 0 _ 1 8 When it is a digital audio dynamic video receiving terminal, I p

取代ACK封包,而在網點裝置18〇3從終端接收 NACK封包時’由於可根據同樣的原理廢棄NACK封包,可預 防NACK封包的爆滿。終端181〇 —η至181〇 —19傳送NACK封包Instead of the ACK packet, when the network device 1803 receives the NACK packet from the terminal, the NACK packet can be discarded according to the same principle, which can prevent the NACK packet from being full. Terminals 1810 —n to 1810 —19 transmit NACK packets

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第249頁 1245997 五、發明說明(246) — - 封包1 8 30的傳送變成有線巧廣播。 &lt;〈多點發送樹狀結構的修正〉&gt; 、透過多點發送資料的受信終端之增減等,可修正多點 發送樹狀結構。受理者丨854預先從多點發送管理伺服器 1 857取得並保存多點發送服務的内容與多點發送識別情報 ID~k(k = l、2、X X X )的對應關係。使用者1 85 2向受理者 1 8 5 4使用接續至網點裝置丨8 〇 4的終端丨8丨〇 —丨5,申請多點 發送服務資料的接收(圖313的步驟MS31)。受理者1 854從 使用者1 852取得受信者識別情報、費用支付方法、終端關 連情報(使用網點裝置1 804與終端Uio — ;! 5),並且從由使 用者得到的多點發送服務的内容特定多點發送識別情報 ID k。受理者1 8 5 4將這些情報輸入至使用者服務伺服器 1 856 (步驟MS32)。 其次,使用者服務伺服器1 8 5 6將前述取得的受信者識 別If報、費用支付方法、終端關連情報、或多點發送識別 情報ID-k傳送給多點發送管理伺服器1 857(步驟MS33),多 點發送管理伺服器1 857將前述受信終端情報保存於其資料 庫(步驟MS34)。多點發送管理伺服器1 857將多點發送識別 情報ID-k及終端關連情報(網點裝置1 8〇4與終端181 〇 — 1 5的 使用)傳送給樹建造伺服器1 8 5 9。樹建造伺服器1 8 $ 9向資 ¥ 源管理伺服器1 858要求費用表(步驟MS36),並取得費用表 (步驟MS37)。 樹建造伺服器1 8 5 9使用多點發送樹狀結構算出模組 1 859-1,算出追加多點發送識別情報ID — k&amp;終端關連情報2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 249 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (246) —-The transmission of packet 1 8 30 becomes a cable broadcast. &lt; &quot; Revision of the multicast tree structure &quot;, and the increase or decrease of the receiving terminal through the multicast data transmission, etc., the multicast tree structure can be corrected. The recipient 854 obtains and saves the correspondence between the contents of the multicast service and the multicast identification information ID ~ k (k = 1, 2, X X X) from the multicast management server 1 857 in advance. The user 1 85 2 requests the recipient 1 8 5 4 to use the terminal connected to the network device 丨 8 〇 4 丨 8 丨 ○ 5 to apply for the reception of the multipoint transmission service data (step MS31 in FIG. 313). Recipient 1 854 obtains trustee identification information, fee payment method, and terminal connection information from user 1 852 (using network device 1 804 and terminal Uio —; 5), and sends the content of the service from the multicast obtained by the user The specific multicast ID k is transmitted. The recipient 1 8 5 4 inputs the information to the user service server 1 856 (step MS32). Next, the user service server 1 8 5 6 transmits the above-obtained trustee identification If report, payment method, terminal connection information, or multicast identification information ID-k to the multicast management server 1 857 (step MS33), the multicast management server 1 857 stores the aforementioned trusted terminal information in its database (step MS34). The multicast management server 1 857 transmits the multicast identification information ID-k and the terminal-related information (use of the branch device 1 804 and the terminal 181 〇 — 15) to the tree construction server 1 8 5 9. The tree construction server 1 8 $ 9 requests the resource management server 1 858 to request the fee list (step MS36), and obtain the fee list (step MS37). The tree construction server 1 8 5 9 uses the multicast tree structure calculation module 1 859-1 to calculate the additional multicast identification information ID — k &amp; terminal related information

1245997 五、發明說明(247) 的多點發送樹狀結構,產生給網點裝置的管理表追加情報 及路由器的路徑表變更情報(步驟MS38),並保存於樹建造 伺服器1 859的内部。其次,樹建造伺服器1 859利用將位址 管理變更情報追加至網點裝置18〇4的位址管理表1814, 向表管理伺服器1 8 62要求(步驟MS40),表管理伺服器 1 8 6 2報告對别述要求的設定(步驟μ § 4 1 ),樹建造祠服器 1 8 5 9向多點發送管理伺服器丨8 5 7報告多點發送樹狀結構 的變更結束(步驟MS42)。多點發送管理伺服器1 85 7將步 驟MS31中使用者1 8 52的申請手續結束,經過使用者服務^伺 服器1 856(步驟MS43),並經過受理者1 854(步驟MS44), 向使用者1 85 2報告(步驟1^45)。 位址管理表1 8 1 4係透過表管理伺服器丨8 6 2被設定。 位址管理表變更情報將位址管理表1814的第i行的第6項 目F14 ft:更為(F14、F15)n,追加指定接續至邏輯通信 電路&quot;F 15&quot;的終端18 10-15以做為受信終端。結果,位址管 理表1814的第1行的記錄被變更為&quot;ΙΜ2、Μ2、Ε(Π、1〇1、 0 ' (F14、F15)n °1245997 5. The multicast tree structure of the description of the invention (247) generates additional information to the management table of the branch device and routing table change information of the router (step MS38), and is stored in the tree construction server 1 859. Next, the tree construction server 1 859 uses the address management table 1814 that adds address management change information to the network device 1804, and requests the table management server 1 8 62 (step MS40), and the table management server 1 8 6 2 Report the setting of other requirements (step μ § 4 1), the tree building temple server 1 8 5 9 sends to the multicast management server 丨 8 5 7 reports the end of the change to the multicast tree structure (step MS42) . The multicast management server 1 85 7 ends the application procedure of the user 1 8 52 in step MS31, passes the user service ^ server 1 856 (step MS43), and passes the recipient 1 854 (step MS44) to the user. Report by 1 85 2 (step 1 ^ 45). The address management table 1 8 1 4 is set through the table management server 丨 8 6 2. The address management table change information adds the F14 ft of item 6 in the i-th row of the address management table 1814 to (F14, F15) n, and adds the terminal 18 10-15 which is connected to the logical communication circuit "F 15" As a trusted terminal. As a result, the record in the first line of the address management table 1814 was changed to &quot; IM2, M2, E (Π, 101, 0 '(F14, F15) n °

在終端18 10-11廢止多點發送資料的接收的情況中,使 用者1 8 52向受理者申請廢止終端181〇一11的多點發送資料 接收,結果,從圖311的位址管理表1813的第i行”M2、 M2、E01、I01、〇、(F10、F12)” 的第 6 項目&quot;(fi〇、π2)π 中,指定清,接續至終端1810 —丨!的邏輯通信電路” F1〇,,。 結果,位址官理表1813的第i行被變更為,,im2、m2、 E01、101、〇、F12&quot; 〇In the case where the terminal 18 10-11 abolishes the reception of the multicast data, the user 1 8 52 applies to the recipient to cancel the multicast data reception of the terminal 1810-11. As a result, from the address management table 1813 in FIG. 311 In the i-th line of "M2, M2, E01, I01, 〇, (F10, F12)", "6" (fi0, π2) π, specify the clear, and continue to the terminal 1810 — 丨! Logical communication circuit "F1〇 ,. As a result, the i-th row of the address official table 1813 is changed to, im2, m2, E01, 101, 〇, F12 &quot; 〇

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第251頁 1245997 五、發明說明(248) 本貫知例為不變更路由器 至1809的路徑表產生路徑表變對路由器1807 =及_位址管理表產更生=信^ ==點 址管理表的變更。的路徑表或網點裝置的位 &lt;〈多點發送樹狀結構的釋放〉〉 放月用束多點發送服務的多點發送樹狀結構的釋 放紅序。夂理者1 854預先從多點發送管理伺服器Μ” 並保存多點發送服務的内容與多點發送識別情報一 1、2、X X X )的對應關係。多點發送資等的送信 透過前述手續形成的多點發繼 的釋放(圖313的步驟MS60)。受理者1 853根據送信識別情 報與多點發送識別情報11}4,將多點發送樹狀結構的釋放 輸^至使用者服務伺服器1 8 55 (步驟MS61)。使用者服務伺 服器1 8 55將前述送信識別情報與多點發送樹狀結構的釋放 一起,送給多點發送管理伺服器1 8 57(步驟MS62),多點 發送官理伺服器1 8 5 7根據接收到的送信識別情報及前述 多點發送樹狀結構的釋放情報(包含多點發送識別情報 ID-k),將多點發送服務的結束記錄於該資料庫上(步驟 MS63)。其次,多點發送管理伺服器1 857向樹建造伺服器 1 859指示可透過多點發送識別情報…^識別的多點發送樹 狀結構的釋放(步驟MS64)。 第252頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(249) 樹建造伺服器1 859根據多點發送識別情報ID-k,指示 向表管理伺服器1 8 6 1至1 8 6 3,將網點裝置的位址管理表 的附加情報1811 -2、1813-2、1814-2、1815-2(圖 302 至圖 305)從位址管理表1811、1813、1814、1815中清除,並 且將路由器的路徑表的附加情報1817-2、1818- 2、1819-2 (圖306至圖308)從路徑表1817、1818、1819中清除(步驟 MS66至MS68),接收報告(步驟MS70至MS72)。接著,樹建 造伺服器1 85 9在扃資源管理伺服器1 858要求,設定多點發 送識別情報I D-k及多點發送樹狀結構時,將提供多點發送 通信的I P轉送網1 8 0 0内部的資源返還給資源管理伺服器 1 858 (步驟MS73),接收報告(步驟MS74)。樹建造伺服器 1 859向多點發送管理伺服器1 85 7報告多點發送樹狀結構 的釋放手續的結束(步驟MS7 7)。並且,多點發送管理%服 器1 85 7將多點發送樹狀結構的釋放手續結束,經過使用 者服務伺服器1 85 5(步驟MS78),並經過資料详卢典饰土 順步驟,向資料送信者1851報\貝(=;广〇)理者另 外’省略步驟MS78至MS80也是很好的選擇。透過以上的手 續’利用多點發送技術的終端間通信接續控制的後半部 分,也就是多點發送樹狀結構的釋放結束。 &lt;&lt;溢出通信電路的使用〉〉 說明溢出通信電路1843至1845的使用方法。圖314之 1801至1 805係網點裝置,1810-2係傳送多點發送資料的終 端’ 1810-11至1810-13係接收多點發送資料的終端,188〇 至1 882係接續至輸出電路1 843至1845的溢出通信電路伺服2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 251 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (248) This conventional example generates a path table change to the router 1807 without changing the path table from the router to 1809. Letter ^ == Changes to the address management table. Bits of the path table or network device &lt; &quot; Release of the multicast tree structure &quot; The manager 1 854 pre-manages the multicast management server M ”and saves the correspondence between the content of the multicast service and the multicast identification information 1,2, XXX). The delivery of multicast data, etc., goes through the aforementioned procedures. Release of the formed multipoint relay (step MS60 in FIG. 313). The recipient 1 853 inputs the release of the multicast tree structure to the user service server according to the transmission identification information and the multicast identification information 11} 4. 1 8 55 (step MS61). The user service server 1 8 55 sends the aforementioned transmission identification information together with the release of the multicast tree structure to the multicast management server 1 8 57 (step MS62). The delivery server 1 8 5 7 records the end of the multicast service in the data based on the received transmission identification information and the release information of the aforementioned multicast tree structure (including the multicast identification information ID-k). Database (step MS63). Second, the multicast management server 1 857 instructs the tree construction server 1 859 to allow identification information to be transmitted through the multicast ... ^ The release of the identified multicast tree structure (step MS64). 252 pages 2049-3 793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (249) The tree construction server 1 859 sends the identification information ID-k according to multiple points, and instructs the table management server 1 8 6 1 to 1 8 6 3 to install the network device. The additional information of the address management table 1811 -2, 1813-2, 1814-2, 1815-2 (Figure 302 to Figure 305) is cleared from the address management table 1811, 1813, 1814, 1815, and the path of the router The table's additional information 1817-2, 1818-2, and 1819-2 (Figures 306 to 308) are cleared from the route tables 1817, 1818, and 1819 (steps MS66 to MS68), and the report is received (steps MS70 to MS72). Then, The tree construction server 1 85 9 requests the resource management server 1 858 to set the multicast identification information I Dk and the multicast tree structure. The IP forwarding network 1 8 0 0 which provides multicast communication The resource is returned to the resource management server 1 858 (step MS73), and the report is received (step MS74). The tree construction server 1 859 reports to the multicast management server 1 85 7 the end of the procedure for releasing the multicast tree structure ( Step MS7 7). Also, the multicast management server 1 85 7 sends the multicast tree structure After the release procedure is completed, go through the user service server 1 85 5 (step MS78), and go through the steps of detailing the data to decorate the soil, and report to the data sender 1851. \ ((;; 〇)) The manager also 'omit step MS78 To MS80 is also a good choice. Through the above procedure, the second half of the inter-terminal communication connection control using the multicast technology, that is, the release of the multicast tree structure is ended. &lt; &lt; Use of Overflow Communication Circuits &gt;> A description will be given of how to use the overflow communication circuits 1843 to 1845. Figure 314 of 1801 to 1 805 series of network point devices, 1810-2 series of terminals to transmit multicast data '1810-11 to 1810-13 series of terminals to receive multicast data, 1880 to 1 882 series connected to output circuit 1 843 to 1845 Overflow communication circuit servo

1245997 五、發明說明(250) 器1 880至1 88 2。從終端1810〜1丨送出的圖311之”封包1833 ,也就是送信端IP位址” M2”、受信端1?位址,,Ε〇ι,,的1?封 包,透過位址管理表1813第1行的記錄” ΙΜ2、Μ2、Ε〇ι、 101、0、F10、F12&quot;内部第5項目值&quot;〇&quot;,轉送至溢出通信 電路1 843。前述記錄的内部封包輸出指定(第5項目)為&quot;〇n 前述IP封包被轉送至溢出通信電路,内部封包輸出指 定為&quot;(Γ以外時,I P封包不會被轉送至溢出通信電路。 參照圖315加以說明,從終端1810_u被送°出的送信 外部IP位址為&quot;M2&quot;的IP封包到達網點裝置18〇3(步驟κ ,前述IP封包經由溢出通信電路1 843到達溢出通庐 伺服器1 880 (步驟MC2)。在送信端1?位址為&quot;M2&quot;的^ 從終端uio-u被送出時,該IP封包到達網點裝置18〇3 \ 驟MC3),前述IP封包經過溢出通信電路1 843到達溢 二 電路伺服器1 880 (步驟MC4)。在送信端外部Ιρ位址 。 的IP封包從終端1810_13被送出時,該1?封包到絪 置1 803 (步驟MC5),前述IP封包經過溢出通信電路丨“ ^ 達溢出通信電路伺服器1 880 (步驟MC6)。 在本例中,溢出通信電路伺服器188〇接收 端外部位址&quot;M2&quot; ’也就是送信端外部1?位址為多:= IP位址的IP封包。終端1810_Ui181013傳送Ip ^送 5送信端的終端位址記載於該IP封包的 、’1245997 V. Description of the invention (250) Devices 1 880 to 1 88 2. The "packet 1833" of Figure 311 sent from the terminal 1810 ~ 1 丨 is the IP address of the sender "M2", the 1 packet of the receiver 1 address, Ειι ,, through the address management table 1813 The record of the first line "IM2, M2, EOM, 101, 0, F10, F12 &quot; internal 5th item value &quot; 〇 &quot; is transferred to the overflow communication circuit 1843. The internal packet output designation (item 5) of the aforementioned record is &quot; 〇n. The aforementioned IP packet is transferred to the overflow communication circuit, and when the internal packet output is designated as &quot; (other than Γ, the IP packet is not transferred to the overflow communication circuit. Illustrated with reference to FIG. 315, an IP packet with an external IP address of &quot; M2 &quot; sent from the terminal 1810_u reaches the network point device 1803 (step κ, the aforementioned IP packet reaches the overflow through the overflow communication circuit 1 843) Server 1 880 (step MC2). When the sender 1? Address is "M2" ^ is sent from the terminal uio-u, the IP packet reaches the network point device 1803 \ MC3), the aforementioned IP packet passes The overflow communication circuit 1 843 reaches the overflow second circuit server 1 880 (step MC4). When the IP packet outside the sender's IP address is sent from the terminal 1810_13, the 1 packet is set to the set 1 803 (step MC5), The aforementioned IP packet passes through the overflow communication circuit 丨 "^ to the overflow communication circuit server 1 880 (step MC6). In this example, the overflow communication circuit server 188 receives the external address of the receiving terminal &quot; M2 &quot; 1? Address is more IP address = IP packets. 1810_Ui181013 transmitting terminal Ip ^ 5 messenger sending terminal address is described in the end of the IP packet, '

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第254頁 由於決定規則分別設定終端1810_u為送信端外=即, &quot;E20&quot;、終端181〇_12為送信端外部Ip位址&quot;^广= = mo-13為送信端外部IP位址&quot;E22„,溢出通信電路= 1245997 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p.254 Due to the decision rules, the terminal 1810_u is set to be outside the sender = that is, &quot; E20 &quot;, and the terminal 1810_12 is the external IP address of the sender &quot; ^ 广 = = mo -13 is the external IP address of the sender "E22", overflow communication circuit = 1245997 1245997

五、發明說明(251) 至1 882可使用达信端終端的IP位址,特定送信端終端的外 部IP位址。由此,在送信端終端可 ACK封包或NACK封包時,可特定送信端的終端。 溢出通信電路1 880可總結透過上述方法取得的3個伙 端的情報’經過網點裝置1 8 03(步驟MD1),並且經過1?轉 送網1 8 00内部及網點裝置1801(步驟MD2),通知多點發送 資料的送信終端1810-2(步驟MD3)。因為為了實施步驟〇1 至MD3 ’可能在溢出通信電路伺服器188〇與終端181〇_2間 轉送ip封包,在網點裝置ι801内的位址管理表1811内^ 與網點裝置1 80 3内的位址管理表ι813内部,設定進行°Ip 膠囊化及逆膠囊化的記錄。 以上的結果,多點發送資料送信終端丨8丨〇 _ 2可知道終 ^1810-11至1810-13是否接收多點發送資料(送達確認機 能)。此時,可抑制IP透過ACK封包或NACK封包的增大等, IP轉送網1800内部的通信量增大。 從溢出通信電路伺服器1 880,使用多點發送位址&quot;M2,, ’將IP封包傳送給終端1810-Π至1810-13(步驟me 1至ME4) ’或疋從溢出通信電路伺服器1 8 8 〇,使用I p位址” e 2 1,,, 設定包含在位址管理表1813上膠囊化用的位址的記錄, 可將1?封包傳送給終端181〇-12(步驟1〇1、1〇2)。 參照圖3 1 6加以說明,溢出通信電路伺服器丨8 8 〇傳送 接收IP封包時’可與多點發送送信終端丨8丨〇 — 2進行情報交 換(步驟MG1至MG3)。又,溢出通信電路伺服器丨881傳送接 收ip封包時,可與多點發送送信終端181〇-2進行情報交換5. Description of the invention (251) to 1 882 can use the IP address of the terminal on the telecom terminal, and specify the external IP address of the terminal on the sender terminal. Therefore, when the transmitting terminal can ACK or NACK, the transmitting terminal can be specified. The overflow communication circuit 1 880 can sum up the information of the three parties obtained through the above method through the branch device 1 8 03 (step MD1), and then transfer to the internal network 1 8 00 and the branch device 1801 (step MD2). The transmission terminal 1810-2 for transmitting data is clicked (step MD3). In order to implement steps 〇1 to MD3, it is possible to forward IP packets between the overflow communication circuit server 188 and the terminal 1810_2, in the address management table 1811 in the branch point device 801 and the branch point device 1 80 3 Inside the address management table ι813, records of ° Ip encapsulation and reverse encapsulation are set. As a result of the above, the multicast data sending terminal 丨 8 丨 〇 _ 2 can know whether the terminal ^ 1810-11 to 1810-13 received the multicast data (delivery confirmation function). At this time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of IP packets transmitted through the ACK packet or the NACK packet, etc., and increase the traffic in the IP transfer network 1800. From the overflow communication circuit server 1 880, use the multicast address "M2," 'Transfer IP packets to the terminals 1810-Π to 1810-13 (steps me 1 to ME4)' or "From the overflow communication circuit server 1 8 8 〇, using IP address "e 2 1,", to set a record containing the address for encapsulation on the address management table 1813, can send 1? Packets to the terminal 1810-12 (step 1 〇1, 〇2). Explained with reference to FIG. 3, 16, the overflow communication circuit server 丨 8 8 〇 when transmitting and receiving IP packets' can exchange information with the multicast transmission terminal 丨 8 丨 2 — (step MG1 To MG3). In addition, when the overflow communication circuit server 丨 881 transmits and receives IP packets, it can exchange information with the multicast transmission terminal 1810-2.

第255頁 1245997 五、發明說明(252)Page 255 1245997 V. Description of the invention (252)

(步驟MH1至MH3),溢出通信電路伺服器1 882傳送接 =時,可與多點發送送信終端181〇_2進行情報交換(步驟于 至J 13)。由此’溢出通信電路伺服器對每個續 點裝置的多點發送資料受信終端傳送接收”封包二至、,: 送資料送信終端181〇-2必須對所有的多點發送 J 端傳送接收ΙΡ封包,可減少多點發送資料送信終端&amp;^ 的工作量。在終端181 0-11要求不接收多點發送資料 部分的IP封包等的情況中,可經由溢出通信、 傳送該缺損的IP封包。 电峪q服器再 &lt;〈位址管理表的其他實施例〉〉 圖309的位址管理表1811也可以圖317的位址管理 1811-5的形態實施。在實施例中省略位址管理表i 記錄的第2項目(送信端外部IP位址),形成位址管理表、 1 8 11 - 5的記錄。例子,省略位址管理表i 8丨工 錄”」01、E01、E26、126、G03、F02,,的第2 項目&quot;E〇]T,;立 址管理表1811-5的第3行的記錄變成”1〇1、E26、126、 G〇3、F02”。有關前述第2項目省略時的網點裝 化機能,也在本實施例中說明。 ^ 圖309的位址管理表1811也可以圖318的位址管理表 1811-6的形態實施。本例係使用ιρ網點裝置的 &amp; 的罩幕技術。 ^尸膠曩化中 , 從終端部的内部ip位址為,,I or的通信電路1 8 22中, 當輸入受信端外部IP位址為ΠΕ26”、送信端外部Ip位址為 • Ε〇Γ的外部IP封包時,相當於從位址管理表! 811_6上起(Steps MH1 to MH3), when the overflow communication circuit server 1 882 transmits data, it can exchange information with the multicast transmission terminal 1810_2 (steps to J 13). From this, the "overflow communication circuit server transmits and receives the multicast data receiving terminal of each continuous point device" packet 2 to ,: The data transmitting terminal 1810-2 must transmit and receive IP to all multicast points. Packets can reduce the workload of multicast data sending terminal & ^. In the case where terminal 181 0-11 requests not to receive the IP packets of the multicast data part, etc., the defective IP packet can be transmitted via overflow communication The server server &lt; <other embodiment of the address management table >> The address management table 1811 of FIG. 309 can also be implemented in the form of the address management 1811-5 of FIG. 317. The address is omitted in the embodiment. The second item of the management table i record (the external IP address on the sender side) forms the address management table and records of 1 8 11-5. For example, the address management table i 8 丨 work record "" 01, E01, E26 is omitted " , 126, G03, F02, and the second item &quot; E0] T ,; the record in the third line of the site management table 1811-5 becomes "101, E26, 126, G03, F02". The dot modification function when the second item is omitted is also described in this embodiment. ^ The address management table 1811 of FIG. 309 can also be implemented in the form of the address management table 1811-6 of FIG. 318. This example uses the &amp; mask technology of ιρ outlets. ^ In the corpse gelation, from the internal IP address of the terminal, I or the communication circuit 1 8 22, when the input external IP address of the receiving end is Π26 ", and the external IP address of the transmitting end is Ε〇 When the external IP packet of Γ is equivalent to the address management table! From 811_6

1245997 五、發明說明(253) 第1行與第3行的記錄,有關 外部IP罩幕” M-t 2”及*述外^的記錄係:檢查受信端 址&quot;E26&quot;的&quot;and,,演算結果,:、匕内的受信端外部ip位 部IP位址”M2x” 一致(下列否與第1行記錄内受信端外 關第3行的記錄係檢查受信冰^在本例中為不一致,有 部ip封包内的受信端外部;p位二;,幕,前述外 是否與第3行記錄内受作端外 的and '演算結果, (6)式)。在本例.中為1,二P/ ^26x&quot;—致(下列 下列(7 )式進行比較。 、β知1Ρ位址同樣地透過1245997 V. Description of the invention (253) The records of the first and third rows, the records about the external IP mask "Mt 2" and the above description: check the trusted end address &quot; E26 &quot; and ,,, The calculation result: The IP address “M2x” of the external ip position of the trusted end in the dagger is the same (the following is not the same as the record in the third line of the trusted client ’s external relations in the first line of the record. The trusted line is not consistent in this example. , There is an external part of the trusted end in the ip packet; p bit two ;, the act, whether the aforementioned outside is the result of the and 'calculation of the external end in the third line record, (6)). In this example, it is 1, 2 P / ^ 26x &quot;-the same (comparison of the following (7) below.), Β knows that the 1P address is also transmitted through

If C’M-t2&quot; and &quot;Ε26” = &quot;Μ2χ&quot;) χ χIf C’M-t2 &quot; and &quot; Ε26 ”= &quot; Μ2χ &quot;) χ χ

If (&quot;M-t26 and &quot;Ε26&quot; = &quot;Μ26&quot;) χ χ χ (βIf (&quot; M-t26 and &quot; Ε26 &quot; = &quot; Μ26 &quot;) χ χ χ (β

If (&quot;M-hOl&quot; and '·Ε〇1= &quot;ΜΟΙχ&quot;) χ χ χ (7) 根據以上的比較結果,選擇第3行的 錄内的内部記錄&quot;101&quot;及&quot;126&quot;被用以_ I 的 部1?封包。 被用以進行膠囊化,形成内 圖309的位址管理表1811係分別表示為如圖319及圖 320所示的表18U —7及18&quot;_8,可被實施於此種形態的記 憶體上的表。亦即,將位址管理表1811的第之記錄 &quot;m、E〇l、M2、IM2、G02、G03、〇&quot;分成表 18n_7 的第 i 行的記錄·' 101、E01、M2、IM2、MT-1、〇&quot;,及表18u_8 的第1行之記錄&quot;MT-i、G02、G03”。也就是,有關多點發 送的分歧係記載於表1811-8。 摘要上述,將多點發送服務提供者的情報及多點發送 服務購入者的情報,經由使用者服務伺服器接受,藉以使If (&quot; M-hOl &quot; and '· Ε〇1 = &quot; ΜΟΙχ &quot;) χ χ χ (7) Based on the above comparison results, select the internal record in the record in the third line &quot; 101 &quot; and &quot; 126 &quot; Part 1? Packet used for _I. The address management table 1811, which is used for encapsulation to form the internal map 309, is shown as tables 18U-7 and 18 &quot; _8 shown in Figure 319 and Figure 320, respectively, and can be implemented on this type of memory. Table. That is, the first record &quot; m, E01, M2, IM2, G02, G03, 0 &quot; of the address management table 1811 is divided into the record of the i-th row of the table 18n_7, "101, E01, M2, IM2 , MT-1, 〇 &quot;, and the record of the first line of table 18u_8 &quot; MT-i, G02, G03 &quot;. That is, divergences regarding multicast transmission are recorded in Table 1811-8. The information of the multicast service provider and the information of the multicast service purchaser are received by the user service server, so that

1245997 五、發明說明(254) ^多=發送樹狀結構的設定。並且,樹建造祠服器係透過 ,:3置或路由器間的通信電路,向資源管理伺服器詢問 姓m 2接續情報或通信電路費用,藉以使用多點發送樹狀 、、'。構的設定。樹建造伺服器將給網點裝置内的位址管理表 加情報或給路由器内的路徑表之附加情報,通知 ”表管理伺服器,以決定多點發送樹狀結構。並且, 们服!2 ?路徑表上設定多點發送通信記錄,從樹建造 利用多點發送通信記錄,可將多點發送服務用的樹 定用的位址管理表追加情報或路徑表追加情報轉 迗給表管理伺服器。 付 作,f f通^ 1路饲服器與接續至網點裝置的終端個別通 ‘點ί逆U用傳送多點發送資料’實現高信賴度的 受:ί終端接收數位化聲音。:且二= 複以音動態影像,藉以使 影像。進而,U 像終端接收數位化聲音動態 ip封勹祜鏟、官理表的内部封包輸出指定為&quot;0&quot;時, ί P封包被轉送至溢出通作雷 時,IP封包不被轉送至2 參數為&quot;〇,·以外 的判定值&quot;0&quot;若具有定值信電路。内部封包輸出指定 出包含以多點發送IP位址做t可以是其他的特定值。檢 廢棄該IP封包,可排㈣、U/运信端位址的1?封包時, 做為㈣址登錄端二封 於網點裝置的位址管理矣u將文彳5知夕點發送位址登錄 衣上,在輸入網點裝置的外部丨p封 2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd _ 第258頁 1245997 發明說明(255) 包的標頭内之受信端多點發送位址不被登錄於位址管理表 上時’網點裝置透過廢棄該I p封包,可防止登錄外的I p封 包混入至I P轉送網内部。同樣地,做為第2位址登錄檢 查’將送信端位址登錄於網點裝置的位址管理表上,在輸 入網點裝置的外部丨p封包的標頭内之送信端位址不被登錄 於位址管理表上時,網點裝置透過廢棄該丨p封包,可防止 登錄外的I P封包混入至I p轉送網内部。 透過不許在Λ受信者側的網點裝置的位址管理表上登錄 多點發送位址,從多點發送I ρ封包受信者送向多點發送 I Ρ封包送信者的IΡ封包受信確認用的ACK封包不能通過網 點裝置,可預防因ACK封包的爆滿或NACK封包的爆滿造成 IP轉送網的擁擠。 以路由器的I ρ位址做為受信端位址,則不許可登錄, 不將多點發送表的改寫等危險的丨ρ封包從丨ρ轉送網外部送 入IP轉送網内部的路由器,或者,不許可對IP轉送網内部 之多點發送的運用管理伺服器的丨ρ位址的登錄,從〗ρ轉送 網外部不可能向I ρ轉送網内部的運用管理伺服器存取,以 提升情報安全性。做為第2位址登錄檢查,限定包含多點 發送資料的I P封包之送信端,抑制不正行為者的不正行為 之發生。並且,在不正行為進行時,容易特定1?封包的送 信端’可提高I P轉送網的情報安全性。 1 8·進行多點發送通信的第丨8實施例: 參照圖321至圖324說明本實施例。在IP轉送網1 90 0的 内部設置網點裝置1901至1 905及路由器1 907- 1至1 907-41245997 V. Description of the invention (254) ^ Multi = setting of sending tree structure. In addition, the tree-building temple server uses the communication circuit between 3 or routers to inquire the resource management server for the surname m 2 to continue the information or communication circuit cost, so as to send the tree shape using multiple points. Structure setting. The tree construction server will add information to the address management table in the network device or additional information to the routing table in the router, and notify the "table management server" to decide the multicast tree structure. And, we serve! 2? The multicast communication record is set on the route table. From the tree construction, the multicast communication record can be used to transfer the address management table additional information for the multicast service tree or the route table additional information to the table management server. By the way, ff pass ^ 1-way feeder and the terminal connected to the outlet device individually communicate with each other by 'pointing and transmitting data at multiple points' to achieve a high degree of reliability: the terminal receives digital sound .: and two = The audio video is duplicated to make the video. Furthermore, the U-Video terminal receives the digital audio dynamic IP shovel, the internal packet output of the official table is designated as &quot; 0 &quot;, and the P packet is forwarded to the overflow channel. During thunder, IP packets are not forwarded to 2. If the parameter is "Judgment value other than", "if there is a fixed value circuit. The internal packet output is specified to include a multicast IP address as t, which can be other The specific value of. Checking and discarding the IP packet, when it is possible to sort 1 packet at the U / transport terminal address, it is used as the address registration terminal and is sealed in the address management of the network device. Click on the sending address to register, and enter the outside of the input point device. 2020-3793-PF; RAY.ptd _ page 258 1245997 Description of the invention (255) The multicast address in the header of the packet is not When registered on the address management table, 'the network device can discard the IP packet to prevent it from being mixed into the IP forwarding network by discarding the IP packet. Similarly, as the second address registration check, it will send the end bit. When the address is registered on the address management table of the branch device, when the sender address in the header of the external packet that is input to the branch device is not registered on the address management table, the branch device discards the packet. It can prevent IP packets outside the registration from being mixed into the IP transfer network. By not registering the multicast address on the address management table of the network device on the Λ-recipient side, the I-packet recipients are sent from the multicast to the multiple Point sending IP packet sender's IP packet receiving acknowledgement ACK The packet cannot pass through the network device, which can prevent the congestion of the IP forwarding network caused by the fullness of the ACK packet or the fullness of the NACK packet. If the I ρ address of the router is used as the trusted end address, login is not allowed and the multicast table is not sent. Dangerous 丨 ρ packets such as rewriting are sent from the outside of the ρ transfer network to the router inside the IP transfer network, or registration of multiple addresses sent from the IP transfer network using the management server ’s IP address is not allowed. 〗 It is impossible for the outside of the ρ forwarding network to access the internal application management server of the ρ forwarding network to improve the security of the information. As the second address registration check, the sending end of the IP packet containing the multicast data is limited to suppress The occurrence of wrongdoing by wrongdoers. In addition, it is easy to specify the sending end of a packet when the wrongdoing is performed, which can improve the information security of the IP transfer network. 1 8 · Eighth Embodiment for Multicast Communication: This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 324. Set up branch devices 1901 to 1 905 and routers 1 907-1 to 1 907-4 inside the IP forwarding network 1 90 0

1245997 五、發明說明(256) 。網點裝置及路由器係透過IP通信電路,直接地或經由網 點裝置或路由器間接地接續。具有I P封包送受機能的終端 1 9 1 0 - 2至1 9 1 0 - 7 0經由I P通信電路接續至網點裝置。1 g 11 至1 9 1 5係網點裝置的位址管理表。1 9 11 -3、1 9 1 1 -4、 1 9 11 - 5、1 9 1 2 - 3、1 9 1 2 - 4、1 91 2 - 5係多點發送服務代理伺 服器’1913-3、1913-4、1913-5係溢出通信電路伺服, 1 9 4 1至1 9 4 5係溢出通信電路。在本實施例中,終端或伺服 器除了具有固定的I P位址外,也具有複數個多點發送I p 位址,交換I P封包而可相互地交換情報。 &lt;〈送信終端與送信事務伺服器&gt;&gt; 終端1910-2及1910-5係在多點發送服務中傳送多點發 送資料的送信終端。終端191〇一〇6及192〇-〇8係用於多點發 送服務的送信事務伺服器。送信事務伺服器係具有資料庫 或情報處理機構,與多點發送服務代理伺服器交換情報, 同時分擔一部分的多點發送資料送信終端的情報處理。 &lt;&lt;通信記錄的輪出處指定〉〉1245997 V. Description of Invention (256). The branch point device and router are connected directly or indirectly through the branch point device or router through the IP communication circuit. Terminals with IP packet sending and receiving functions 1 9 1 0-2 to 19 1 0-7 0 are connected to the outlet device via the IP communication circuit. 1 g 11 to 1 9 1 Address management table for 5 series outlets. 1 9 11 -3, 1 9 1 1 -4, 1 9 11-5, 1 9 1 2-3, 1 9 1 2-4, 1 91 2-5 series multicast service proxy server '1913-3 , 1913-4, 1913-5 series overflow communication circuit servo, 1 9 4 1 to 1 9 4 5 series overflow communication circuit. In this embodiment, in addition to the fixed IP address, the terminal or server also has a plurality of multicast IP addresses, exchanges IP packets, and can exchange information with each other. &lt; &lt; Transmission terminal and transmission transaction server &gt; &gt; Terminals 1910-2 and 1910-5 are transmission terminals that transmit multicast data in a multicast service. The terminals 1910106 and 1920-008 are transmission service servers for multipoint transmission services. The transmission server has a database or an information processing organization, and exchanges information with the multicast service agent server, and at the same time, it shares the information processing of the multicast transmission terminal. &lt; &lt; Designation of Root Source of Communication Records 〉〉

將位址管理表的通信記錄的第5項目稱為内部I P封包 的輸出$,定,前述項目值為&quot;0”以外時有指定,為&quot;0&quot;時 則沒有$曰疋。同樣地,將位址管理表通信記錄的第6項目 ,二=部IP,封包的輸出處指定,前述項目值為&quot;〇&quot;以外時 ^定’為0&quot;時則沒有指定。例如,有關位址管理表 F3〇 1 第 ' 仃之通信記錄,,IM2、M2、E02、I02、0、(F1U 右 ’内部Ip封包的輸出處指定為&quot;0,,,也就是沒 曰疋1出處’外部IP封包的輸出處指定為,,FI 1至F30、The fifth item of the communication record of the address management table is referred to as the output $ of the internal IP packet. It is determined that the value of the foregoing item is specified other than &quot; 0 ", and the value of &quot; 0 &quot; is not provided. , The sixth item of the address management table communication record, two = part IP, is specified at the output of the packet, and the value of the aforementioned item is not specified when it is set to 0 &quot; other than &quot; 〇 &quot;. For example, the relevant bit Address management table F3〇1 Communication record of the second one, IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, (F1U right 'The output of the internal IP packet is designated as &quot; 0, which is also the name of the "1 source" The output of the external IP packet is specified as, FI 1 to F30,

第260頁 1245997Page 260 1245997

F91n ’也就表示邏輯通信電路fii至F30及F91。在此,邏 輯通信電路F11至F30係通信電路196〇 —丨丨至^“-別, 輯通信電路F91係通信電路196〇_91。 &lt;〈溢出通信電路〉〉 溢出通信電路伺服器係從受信終端將送回到送信終端 的ACK封包或NACK封包等的IP封包經由溢出通信電路收集 ,轉送至多點發送位址不同的多點發送服務代理伺服器。 &lt;&lt;多點發送IP封包的轉送1&gt;&gt; ° 從圖3 2 1的終端1 9 1 0 - 0 2,送信端外部I p位址” e 〇 2&quot;、 受信端外部IP位址” M2”的外部IP封包1 930被送出(圖325之 步驟Q1)’到達網點裝置1 9 〇 1,使用位址管理表1 9丨!的 第1行之通信記錄” 102、E02、M2、IM2、X X X 、〇”,形 成内部IP封包1931-1及1931-2,内部IP封包到達路 由器1 9 07- 1 (步驟Q2),變成内部ip封包1931—3,到達網點 裝置1903(步驟Q3)。另一方面,内部ip封包1931一2到達 路由器1 907-2 (步驟Q4),在路由器1907-2中,内部IP封包 1931-2被複製而分為2個,内部ip封包1931-4到達網點^ 置1 904(步驟Q5),内部IP封包1 93卜5到達網點裝置 、 1 905(步驟Q6)。 &amp; 網點裝置1 90 3接收内部IP封包1931-3時,使用位址 管理表1913的第1行之通信記錄&quot;IM2、M2、E02、I 〇2、 〕、F11至F30、F91” ,將内部IP封包1931-3逆IP膠囊化, 回復為外部IP封包(與外部IP封包丨93丨―3相同的内容)。复 次’將回復的外部I p封包根據前述通信記錄的第6項目’、F91n 'also means the logical communication circuits fii to F30 and F91. Here, the logic communication circuits F11 to F30 are communication circuits 1960— 丨 丨 to ^ “-other, the communication circuit F91 is a communication circuit 1960_91. &Lt; <Overflow communication circuit >> The overflow communication circuit server is from The trusted terminal collects the IP packets such as ACK packets or NACK packets returned to the sending terminal via the overflow communication circuit, and forwards them to the multicast service proxy server with a different multicast address. &Lt; &lt; Multicast IP packets Forwarding 1 &gt; ° From the terminal 1 9 1 0-0 2 in Fig. 3 21, the external IP address "e 〇2" of the sender and the external IP address 1 930 of the external IP address "M2" of the receiver are Submit (step Q1 in Fig. 325) 'arrive at the outlet device 1 9 〇1, use the address management table 1 9 丨! The communication record of the first line of "102, E02, M2, IM2, XXX, 〇" forms internal IP packets 1931-1 and 1931-2, and the internal IP packets reach the router 1 9 07-1 (step Q2) and become internal The IP packet 1931-3 arrives at the network point device 1903 (step Q3). On the other hand, the internal IP packet 1931-12 arrives at router 1 907-2 (step Q4). In router 1907-2, the internal IP packet 1931-2 is duplicated and divided into two, and the internal IP packet 1931-4 arrives at the branch. ^ Set 1 904 (step Q5), the internal IP packets 193 to 5 reach the outlet device, 1 905 (step Q6). &amp; When the branch device 1 90 3 receives the internal IP packet 1931-3, it uses the communication record of the first line of the address management table 1913 &quot; IM2, M2, E02, I 〇2,], F11 to F30, F91 ", Encapsulate the internal IP packet 1931-3 in reverse IP, and reply to the external IP packet (the same content as the external IP packet 丨 93 丨 3). Repeatedly “reply the external IP packet according to item 6 of the aforementioned communication record. ',

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第261頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p.261 1245997

^11至F3 0、F91” ’送出給終端至 =務代理飼服器191&quot;(步_7、Q7x)。在此及U 、,至/910-30除了被授與外部IP位址&quot;E11&quot;至&quot;E3〇„^ 11 to F3 0, F91 "'Send to the terminal to the agent agent feeder 191 &quot; (step_7, Q7x). Here and U, to / 910-30 in addition to being granted an external IP address &quot; E11 &quot; to &quot; E3〇 „

Uli與多點發送位址&quot;Mr。多點發送服務代理伺服 M /與外部IP位址,,E91&quot;,及多點發送位址 。夕點發廷服務代理伺服器1911_3與終端19l〇 ii 1910-30大約同時間接收多點發送服務的資料(步驟 本實施例的特徵。 J為 —當網點裝置1 904接收内部1{)封包1931_4時,Uli and multicast address &quot; Mr. Multicast service proxy server M / with external IP address, E91 &quot;, and multicast address. Xidianfating service agent server 1911_3 and terminal 1910ii 1910-30 receive the data of the multicast service at about the same time (the characteristics of this embodiment. J is-when the network device 1 904 receives the internal 1 {) packet 1931_4 ,

址官理表1914的第1行之通信記錄&quot;ΙΜ2、Μ2、Ε〇2、ι〇2 〇、F31至F50、F93&quot;,將内部Ip封包193卜4逆1?膠囊化、 回復為外部IP封包,將前述回復的外部Ip封包送出給終 1910-31至1910-50及多點發送服務代理伺服器1911_4(步 驟Q8、Q8x)。在此,終端1910_31至191〇_5〇除了被授鱼 部IP位址&quot;E31&quot;至&quot;E5〇&quot;外,還被授與多點發送位址&quot;M2:。 夕點發送服務代理伺服器1 9 11 - 4被授與外部IP位址&quot;E 9 3&quot; ’及多點發送位址&quot;M2ff。The communication record of the first line of the address management table 1914 "IM2, M2, E02, ι〇2〇, F31 to F50, F93", encapsulate the internal IP packet 193, 4 reverse 1? The IP packet sends the external IP packet of the aforementioned reply to the terminal 1910-31 to 1910-50 and the multicast service proxy server 1911_4 (steps Q8 and Q8x). Here, the terminals 1910_31 to 1910_50, in addition to the IP addresses &quot; E31 &quot; to &quot; E5〇 &quot; of the fisheries department, are also granted multicast addresses &quot; M2 :. Evening point delivery service proxy server 1 9 11-4 was granted an external IP address &quot; E 9 3 &quot; &quot; multicast address &quot; M2ff.

μ當網點裝置1 90 5接收内部ip封包1931 — 5時,使用位 址管理表1915的第1行之通信記錄&quot;ΙΜ2、μ、e〇2、1〇2、 〇、F51至F70、F95”,將内部IP封包1931—5逆lp膠囊化, =復為外部I P封包。然後,將回復的外部Ip封包送出給終 、191〇 - 51至1910-70及多點發送服務代理飼服器Μ&quot; 一 5( 步驟Q9、Q9x)。在此,終端1910-51至1910-70除了被授盥 外部IP位址&quot;E51&quot;至&quot;E70,,外,還被授與多點發送位址”μ When the branch device 1 90 5 receives the internal IP packet 1931-5, the communication record of the first line of the address management table 1915 is used. "IM2, μ, e〇2, 102, 0, F51 to F70, F95 ", Encapsulate the internal IP packet 1931-5 with reverse lp, = return to the external IP packet. Then, send the returned external IP packet to the terminal, 1910-51 to 1910-70 and the multicast service proxy feeder. Μ &quot; 5 (steps Q9, Q9x). Here, the terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 are also granted multicast addresses in addition to the external IP addresses &quot; E51 &quot; to &quot; E70 ,. site"

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第262頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 262 1245997

&lt;〈透過受信終端送出IP封包丨〉〉 終端191G-U至191HQ係將各㈣封包之正常接 知运馆終端的ACK封包,將其接收不良通知送信終端 NACK封包,及其他例如用以回答詢問的1{)封包,傳送仏 部IP位二為&quot;EOf的送信端終端191〇 —〇2,其程序說明二 下。但是,送信·端位址以多點發送Ip位址&quot;M2,,, IP位址,'E02,,為例。 人丨〇响 終端1910-11至1910_30形成傳送給終端^“以的^ 封包(步驟Q10) ’送出給網點裝置(步驟Qu)。當網點裝置 1 903接收外部IP封包時,網點裝置由於對應前述輸入的外 部ip封包之位址管理表1913的第!行之通信記錄&quot;IM2、 M2、E02、I02、〇、F11至F3〇、F91&quot;的内⑽封包輸出處 指定並無指定,也就是該通信記錄的第5項目為&quot;〇&quot;,前述 IP封包直接被轉送給封包溢出輸出電路丨943(步驟Q12)。 &lt; &lt;溢出通信電路伺服器的機能J〉&gt; 溢出通信電路伺服器1913一3係從溢出通信電路1 943接 收IP封包1 946-1 (圖328)(圖327之步驟MPS1),確認外部IP 封包1946-1的送信端ip位址為”M2&quot;(步驟Mps2)。然後,形彳. 成送出給處理根據多點發送位址&quot;M2,,特定的多點發送服務 之多點發送服務代理伺服器191丨一3的Ip封包1 94 6一2,送出 前述IP封包(步驟MPS3)。在此,IP封包1 946-2的送信端IP 位址為溢出通信電路伺服器丨913_3的Ip位址” E9〇”,受信&lt; 〈Send IP packet through a trusted terminal 丨 〉〉 Terminals 191G-U to 191HQ will normally receive each ACK packet to the ACK terminal of the terminal, and notify the sending terminal of the NACK packet if it is not received properly, and others, for example, to answer The enquired 1 {) packet is transmitted to the sending end terminal 1910—02 of the IP address of the crotch, and the procedure description is as follows. However, the sending address is a multicast IP address &quot; M2, &quot;, IP address, &quot; E02, &quot; as an example. The person 丨 〇 The terminals 1910-11 to 1910_30 form a packet transmitted to the terminal ^ "(^ Q10) 'Send to the outlet device (step Qu). When the outlet device 1 903 receives an external IP packet, the outlet device corresponds to the aforementioned The input address of the external IP packet address management table 1913! The communication records of "IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, F11 to F3〇, F91" are specified and not specified at the output of the inner packet, that is, The fifth item of the communication record is &quot; 〇 &quot;, the aforementioned IP packet is directly transferred to the packet overflow output circuit 943 (step Q12). &Lt; &lt; Function of the overflow communication circuit server J &gt; The server 1913-3 received the IP packet 1 946-1 from the overflow communication circuit 1 943 (Figure 328) (step MPS1 of Figure 327), and confirmed that the IP address of the sender of the external IP packet 1946-1 was "M2" (step Mps2). Then, the form is sent to the processing based on the multicast address &quot; M2, the multicast service proxy server of the specific multicast service 191 丨 3 3 IP packets 1 94 6-2 and sends the aforementioned IP Packet (step MPS3). Here, the IP address of the sending end of the IP packet 1 946-2 is the IP address “E9〇” of the overflow communication circuit server 丨 913_3, and the recipient

2049-3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第263頁 1245997 五、發明說明(260) --- 端ip位址為多點發送服務代理伺服器1911—3的”位址 。1 P封包1 9 4 6 — 2從溢出通信電路伺服器1 9 1 3 - 3被送 (圖3 25之步驟Q1 3),經過網點裝置19〇3到達多點發送服 務代理飼服器1911 - 3(步驟Q14)。此時,使用位址管理表 1913 的第 12 行之通信記錄”I9〇、e90、Ε91、Ι91、χ χ χ 、F90” 與第 l〇 行的通信記錄,,I91、Ε9ι、Ε9〇、ΐ9〇、χ χχ 、F 9 1π ° 多點發送服務代理伺服器1911_3在前述接收到的1{)封 匕為NACK封包時要求再傳送多點發送資料。多點發送服務 ,代,飼服器1911-3事先接收在前述步驟q7x中透過Ip位址 M2,區分的多點發送資料,此多點發送資料可用於前述再 ,运要求。多點發送服務代理伺服器丨9丨丨一3將被要求再傳 送的多點發送資料再傳送給網點裝置19〇3(步驟Q1 5),多 點發送資料到達終端191〇 —丨丨至““ —3〇(步驟Q16)。此 時’使用位址管理表1 9丨3的第3行之通信記錄”丨9丨、E9 1、 M2、IM2、X X X 、F91”與第2行的通信記錄” IM2、M2、 E91 、I91 、〇 、F11 至F30&quot; 〇 &lt;〈多點發送服務代理伺服器的機能丨&gt;&gt; 多點發送服務代理伺服器丨9丨丨_ 3檢查接收到的丨p封包 1 94 6-2的内容’形成IP封包,其儲存表示受信確認的ACk ^包匯集於一覽表等的情報,或是表示從終端接收到的受 佗不良通知的NACK封包匯集於一覽表等的情報、終端的個 ,報告等的匯集情報,並送出給送信端終端191 〇_〇2,或 疋從送信端終端1910-02接收送回的ιρ封包(圖325之步驟2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 263 1245997 5. Description of the invention (260) --- The end IP address is the "address" of the multicast service proxy server 1911-3. 1 P packet 1 9 4 6 — 2 is sent from the overflow communication circuit server 1 9 1 3-3 (step Q1 3 in Fig. 3 25), and reaches the multicast service agent feeder 1911-3 through the network device 1903 (step Q14). At the time, the communication record "I90, e90, E91, I91, χ χ χ, F90" in the 12th line of the address management table 1913 and the communication record in the 10th line are used, I91, Ε9ι, Ε9〇, ΐ9〇 , Χ χχ, F 9 1π ° The multicast service proxy server 1911_3 requests the retransmission of multicast data when the previously received 1 {) packet is a NACK packet. The multicast service, generation, feeder 1911 3 Receive the multicast data distinguished through the IP address M2 in the previous step q7x in advance. This multicast data can be used for the aforementioned re-transportation requirements. The multicast service proxy server 丨 9 丨 丨 3 will be required The retransmitted multicast data is retransmitted to the network device 1903 (step Q1 5), and the multicast data reaches the terminal 191. — 丨 丨 to ““ —30 (Step Q16). At this time, 'Use the communication record of the third line of the address management table 1 9 丨 3' ”9 丨, E9 1, M2, IM2, XXX, F91” and Communication record of the second line "IM2, M2, E91, I91, 〇, F11 to F30 &quot; 〇 &lt; <function of multicast service proxy server 丨 &gt; &gt; multicast service proxy server 丨 9 丨 丨_ 3 Check the contents of the received 丨 p packet 1 94 6-2 'to form an IP packet, which stores information indicating that the ACk ^ packets that have been confirmed by the trust are collected in a list or the like, or that indicates the notification of receiving a bad notification received from the terminal. The NACK packet is collected in the information such as the list, the number of terminals, and the report, etc., and sent to the sending terminal 191 〇_〇2, or the ιρ packet received from the sending terminal 1910-02 (Figure 325) step

1245997 五、發明說明(261) 在此,前述lP封包的IP位址為多點發送服務 ί伺服器1911-3的外部Ip位址” E91,,及送信端終端 y 〇 2的外部1 P位址11 Ε〇2π ,使用位址管理表1 91 3的第7 行=通信記錄” Ι91、Ε91、Ε〇2、Ι〇2、χ χ χ 、F9i&quot;與位 址官理表1911的第2行的通信記錄&quot;I〇2、E〇2、E91、I91 、x x x 、F02 至F3 0n 〇 &lt;&lt;透過受信終端送出Ip封包2〉&gt; ^舳1 9 1 0 31至1 9 1 〇 - 5 0在步驟Q 8中接收多點發送資料 =91 0-31至19 10-50形成用以確認受信的Ip封包(圖 網點之/詈驟ΓΙ/送出給網點裝置1 904(步驟Q2i)。當 \ ^ 2 卜邛1 p封包時,由於對應前述外部I p封包之 官理表1914的第1行之通信記錄” IM2、M2、E〇2、1〇2 定iF31/F50、F93)&quot;的内部IP封包輸出處指定並無指 广心:^信記錄的釘項目為”卜外部㈣包不被 )。〃囊化而直接被轉送給封包溢出輸出電路1 944(步驟Q22 〈&lt;溢出通信電路伺服器2&gt;&gt; 收外^部出IP通射%電路^切服器1913 — 4係從溢出通信電路1 944接 然德,泌士 i山°忍外部1 P封包的送信端1 p位址為&quot;M2 &quot;。 發送服‘之:點:f理根據多點發送位址,,M2,’特定的多點 務之多點發运服務代理祠服器i9n—4驗封包,將 伺月^器由電路191 4 —1送出給多點發送服務代理 出通二雷政们5之步驟Q24)。在此例t,其特徵為溢 出通k電路伺服器1913一4與多點發送服務代理伺服器1245997 V. Description of the invention (261) Here, the IP address of the aforementioned IP packet is the external IP address of the server 191-3 of the multicast service "E91", and the external 1 P bit of the transmitting terminal y 〇2 Address 11 Ε〇2π, using the 7th line of the address management table 1 91 3 = communication record "Ι91, Ε91, Ε〇2, ΙΟ2, χ χ χ, F9i &quot; and address official table 1911 2 Communication records &quot; I〇2, E〇2, E91, I91, xxx, F02 to F3 0n 0 &lt; &lt; Ip packet 2 sent through a trusted terminal 2> &gt; ^ 舳 1 9 1 0 31 to 1 9 1 〇- 50 0 Receive multicast data in step Q 8 = 91 0-31 to 19 10-50 form the IP packet for confirming the trusted IP address (/ 詈 of the network of the network 詈 ΓΙ / sent to the network device 1 904 (step Q2i ). When \ ^ 2 邛 1 p packet, due to the communication record corresponding to the first line of the official table 1914 of the aforementioned external IP packet, IM2, M2, E〇2, 102, iF31 / F50, F93 ) &quot; The designation of the internal IP packet output does not refer to the ambiguity: the nail item recorded in the letter record is "the external packet will not be blocked). It is encapsulated and directly transferred to the packet overflow output circuit 1 944 (step Q22 <&lt; overflow communication circuit server 2 &gt; &gt; receiving outside IP pass through% circuit ^ server 1913-4 series from overflow communication The circuit 1 944 is connected, and the stubborn mountain endures the sender 1 p address of the external 1 P packet as &quot; M2 &quot;. Sending service 'of: Point: f based on the multicast address, M2, 'Specific multi-point service, multi-point shipping service agent server i9n-4 inspects the packet, and sends the server from the circuit 191-4-1 to the multi-point sending service agent. Step 2 of the thunder government 5 . In this example t, it is characterized by overflow communication circuit server 1913-4 and multicast service proxy server

1245997 五、發明說明(262)1245997 V. Description of the invention (262)

1 911 - 4間係以通信電路1 91 4 —丨接續。 〈〈多點發送服務代理伺服器的機能2&gt;&gt; 多點發送服務代理伺服器1911_4在前述 先接收多點發送資料。多點發送服務代理伺服=;中事 被要求再傳送的多點發送資料再傳送給網點 = 驟Q25),多點發送資料到達終端191〇_31至ΐ9ι〇_5〇 =(步 Q26)。此時,使用位址管理表1914的第3行之钚^ 、F93&quot;與第 2 ,,IM2、M2、E93、193、〇、F3^F5〇”。 〇 錄 多點發送服務代理伺服器1911 —4檢查接收到的ιρ封包 的内容,形成儲存ACK封包匯集情報,NACK封包匯集情 報、終端個別匯集情報的1?封包,並送出給送信端終端 1910-02,或是從送信端終端191〇 — 〇2接收送回的Ip封包 (圖325之步驟Q4 5至Q48)。在此,使用位址管理表1914的 第7 行的通信記錄” 193、Ε93、Ε〇2、Ι〇2、χ χ χ 、ρ93 ”與 位址官理表1 9 1 1的第3行的通信記錄&quot;丨〇 2、E 0 2、E 9 3、 193、χ χ χ 、F021丨。 〈〈透過受信終端送出IP封包3&gt;&gt; 終端1910 - 51至1910-70在步驟Q 9中接收多點發送資 料。終端1910-51至1910-70產生用以確認受信等的IP封包 (圖325之步驟Q30),並送出給網點裝置19〇5(步驟q3i)。 網點裝置1 9 0 5將前述外部j p封包轉送給封包溢出輸出電 路1945(步驟Q32)。溢出電路通信伺服器1913一5從溢出通 信電路1 9 4 5接收前述外部I p封包,前述丨p封包經由通信電1 911-4 are connected by a communication circuit 1 91 4 — 丨. << Function of Multicast Service Agent Server 2 &gt; &gt; The multicast service agent server 1911_4 receives the multicast data before the foregoing. Multicast service agent servo =; China Affairs. Multicast data requested for retransmission is then transmitted to the network point (step Q25), and the multicast data arrives at the terminals 1910_31 to ΐ9ι〇_5〇 = (step Q26). At this time, the third line of the address management table 1914, ^^, F93 &quot; and the second line, IM2, M2, E93, 193, 〇, F3 ^ F5〇 "are used. 〇Record multicast service proxy server 1911 —4 Check the content of the received ιρ packet to form a 1 packet that stores ACK packet collection information, NACK packet collection information, and terminal individual collection information, and sends it to the sender terminal 1910-02, or from the sender terminal 191. — 〇2 Receive the returned IP packet (steps Q4 5 to Q48 in FIG. 325). Here, the communication record of line 7 of the address management table 1914 is used. ”193, EI93, EO2, IO2, χ χ χ, ρ93 "and the communication record of the third line of the address official form 191 1 1 &quot; 丨 〇2, E 0 2, E 9 3, 193, χ χ χ, F021 丨. 〈〈 Trusted terminal Send IP packet 3 &gt; &gt; Terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 receive the multicast data in step Q 9. The terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 generate IP packets to confirm the trust etc. (step Q30 in Figure 325) And sends it to the branch office device 1905 (step q3i). The branch office device 905 forwards the aforementioned external jp packet to the packet overflow output circuit 19. 45 (Step Q32). The overflow circuit communication server 1913-5 receives the external I p packet from the overflow communication circuit 1 9 4 5 and the aforementioned p packet passes the communication circuit.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第266頁 1245997 五、發明說明(263) 路1915-1送出給多點發送服務代理伺服器1911一5(圖325 之步驟Q34)。 多點發送服務代理伺服器1 9 11 - 5在前述步驟Q9 X中事 先接收多點發送資料。多點發送服務代理伺服器丨9丨丨一 5將 被要求再傳送的多點發送資料再傳送給網點裝置19〇5 (步 驟Q35) ’多點發送資料到達終端191〇一51至191〇一7〇(步驟 Q36) 〇 多點發送服潘代理伺服器19 U —5檢查接收到的ιρ封包 的内容’形成儲存ACK封包匯集情報等的ip封包,並送出 給送彳s端終端1910-〇2,或是從送信端終端1910-02接收送 回的IP封包(圖3 25之步驟Q4 9至Q52)。多點發送服務代理 伺服器1911-5直接與終端1910-70傳送接收ip封包而可交 換情報(步驟Q38、Q39)。此時,使用位址管理表1915的第 9行的通信記錄”Ι95、Ε95、Ε7〇、Ι7〇、χ χ χ 、F95&quot;盥第 10 行的通信記錄”I7〇、E70、E95、I95、χ χ χ 、F7〇r。 在本例中其特徵為多點發送服務代理伺服器1 g 1 1 一 5提供 直接與終端1910-70通信的服務。 ’、 &lt;&lt;多點發送IP位址” M5&quot;的封包轉送&gt;&gt; =圖322的終端1910-05送出送信端外部^位址&quot;e〇5&quot; 詈=Γ、1部Γ春位址&quot;M5&quot;的外部1p封包1 932,經由網點裝 置1 90 2被1?膠囊化,變成内部115封包1 933_1及1933-2, 分別經由路由器1 9 07-3及19〇7 —4 ,在此,内部㈣包被逆膠囊化置1 903至1905 91 51Qln Qn 了匕椴圯胗震化,而被傳送給終端191 0- 21至191〇-3()、終端191()_41至191()_5{)、2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 266 1245997 V. Description of the invention (263) Route 1915-1 is sent to the multicast service proxy server 1911-5 (step Q34 in Figure 325). The multicast service proxy server 1 9 11-5 receives the multicast data first in the previous step Q9 X. Multicast service proxy server 丨 9 丨 丨 -5 Retransmit the multicast data required for retransmission to the network device 1905 (step Q35) 'The multicast data arrives at the terminals 191051 to 19101 7〇 (Step Q36) 〇Multicast server 19 U-5 checks the contents of the received ιρ packet 'forms an ip packet storing ACK packet collection information and sends it to the sending terminal 1910-〇 2, or receive the returned IP packet from the sender terminal 1910-02 (steps Q4 9 to Q52 in Figure 3 25). The multicast service proxy server 1911-5 directly transmits and receives IP packets to and from the terminal 1910-70 to exchange information (steps Q38 and Q39). At this time, the communication record of the ninth line of the address management table 1915 "I95, E95, E70, I70, χ χ χ, F95 &quot; the communication record of the tenth line" I70, E70, E95, I95, χ χ χ, F7〇r. In this example, it is characterized in that the multicast service proxy server 1 g 1 1-5 provides a service for directly communicating with the terminals 1910-70. ', &Lt; &lt; Multicast IP address &quot; M5 &quot; Packet Forwarding &gt; &gt; = Terminal 1910-05 in Figure 322 sends out the sender's external ^ address &quot; e〇5 &quot; 詈 = Γ, 1 section Γ The external 1p packet 1 932 of the spring address &quot; M5 &quot; is encapsulated by 1? Via the branch device 1 90 2 and becomes the internal 115 packets 1 933_1 and 1933-2, respectively via the routers 1 9 07-3 and 1907 — 4. Here, the internal bag is reverse-encapsulated and set to 1 903 to 1905 91 51Qln Qn, which is transmitted to the terminal 191 0-21 to 191〇-3 () and terminal 191 () _ 41 To 191 () _ 5 {),

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第267頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 267 1245997

1910-70。前述程序係如圖326所示,與圖3 的第1點為,取代送信終端1910_02,而以終 间的主要 為送信終端,取代路由器1907-1及1907-2,^丨0 做 順及簡-4。轉送IP封包的㈣係變更如m由器 不〇 如上述,接續至網點裝置的複數受信側 具有固有的外⑽位址外,具有丨個以上決%除了刀別 服務。 接又1個以上的多點發送 &lt;〈送信事務伺服器〉〉 再者,主要的第2點為,多點發送服務代理 1912-3至191 2-5將前述ACK匯集情報ip封包、Nack匯^产 報IP封包、包含個別終端的匯集情報的1?封包傳送仏送月 事務伺服器191 0-08,同時可接收從送信事務伺服器191〇 -08送出的資料。送信事務伺服器191〇_〇8及送信終端191〇 -05也傳送接收IP封包以交換情報(圖326之步驟R55)。多 點發送服務代理伺服器1912-3( IP位址” E92&quot;)及送信事務 伺服器1910-08( IP位址&quot;E08”)間之IP封包的傳送接θ收係使 用位址管理表1912的第5行的通信記錄”108、E08、E92、 192、x x x 、F08n與位址管理表1 913之第8行的通信記 錄&quot;192、E92、E08、I08、x X X 、F92”。多點發送服務 代理伺服器1 9 1 2 - 4 ( I P位址π E 9 4u )及送信事務伺服器1 9 1 0 -0 8間之I P封包的傳送接收係使用位址管理表1 9 1 2的第6行 的通信記錄ΠΙ08、E08、E94、I94、X X X 、F08,,與位址1910-70. The foregoing procedure is shown in Figure 326, and the first point of FIG. 3 is to replace the sending terminal 1910_02, and the main terminal is the sending terminal, instead of the routers 1907-1 and 1907-2. -4. The change in the system of forwarding IP packets is as described above. As mentioned above, the plural trusted side connected to the branch device has its own external address, and it has more than one% of the services except knife services. One or more multicast transmissions &lt; &lt; transmission transaction server &gt; &gt; Furthermore, the main second point is that the multicast service agents 1912-3 to 191 2-5 collect the aforementioned ACK information ip packets, Nack It can send IP packets, 1-packets containing the aggregated information of individual terminals, and send them to the monthly transaction server 191 0-08. At the same time, it can receive data sent from the transmission transaction server 1910-08. The transmission transaction server 1910_08 and the transmission terminal 1910-05 also transmit and receive IP packets to exchange information (step R55 in FIG. 326). The transmission and reception of IP packets between the multicast service proxy server 1912-3 (IP address "E92") and the transmission transaction server 1910-08 (IP address "E08") uses an address management table The communication record of the fifth line of 1912 "108, E08, E92, 192, xxx, F08n and the communication record of the eighth line of the address management table 1 913" "192, E92, E08, I08, x XX, F92". The multicast service proxy server 1 9 1 2-4 (IP address π E 9 4u) and the transmission transaction server 1 9 1 0-0. The transmission and reception of IP packets are performed using the address management table 1 9 1 The communication record of the 6th line of 2II08, E08, E94, I94, XXX, F08, and the address

2049-3793-PF ϊ RAY.ptd 第268頁 1245997 五、發明說明(265) 管理表1914之第8行的通信記錄” I94、E94、E08、108、 XXX 、F 9 4 π 〇 多點發送服務代理伺服器19 12一5( IP位址&quot;Ε96&quot;)及送 信事務祠服器1 9 1 0 - 〇 8間之I p封包的傳送接收係使用位址 管理表1912的第7行的通信記錄,,I〇8、E08、E96、196、X X X 、F0 8n與位址管理表ι915之第8行的通信記錄” 196、 E96、E08、I08、X X X 、F96n。送信事務伺服器 1910-08CIP位址π E08” 及送信終端191 〇-〇5( IP位址&quot;E05,,)之間 的IP封包的傳送接收係使用位址管理表1 91 2的第8行的通2049-3793-PF ϊ RAY.ptd Page 268 1245997 V. Description of the invention (265) Communication record in line 8 of management table 1914 "I94, E94, E08, 108, XXX, F 9 4 π 〇 Multipoint transmission service The proxy server 19 12-5 (IP address &quot; E96 &quot;) and the transmission service server server IP packet between 1 9 1 0-0 8 are transmitted using the 7th line of the address management table 1912 Record, communication records of 108, E08, E96, 196, XXX, F0 8n and the 8th row of the address management table 915, "196, E96, E08, I08, XXX, F96n. The transmission and reception of IP packets between the transmission server 1910-08CIP address π E08 ”and the transmission terminal 191 〇-〇5 (IP address &quot; E05 ,,) uses the 8th address management table 1 91 2 OK

4吕記錄ΠΙ08、E08、E05、I〇5、X X X 、F08n 與第 9 行的通 4吕各己錄 105、E05、E08、I〇8、X X X 、F05n 〇 &lt;〈溢出通#電路伺服器與多點發送服務代理伺服器〉〉 溢出通、電路祠服器與多點發送服務代理飼服器的機 月b與多點發送I P位址fl Μ 2 &quot;的例子一樣。當溢出通信電路祠 服裔1913-3係從溢出通信電路1943輸入IP封包時(圖327之 步驟MPS1),檢查IP封包的多點發送ip位址為&quot;M2”或,,M5„ 專(步驟MPS2) ’分送給多點發送服務代理飼服器igii — g及 多點發送服務代理伺服器1912-3(步驟MPS3)。 &lt;〈多點發送IP位址的啟始設定及取消〉〉4 Lu records Π08, E08, E05, 105, F08n, and the ninth line of communication 4 Lu Geji 105, E05, E08, I08, XXX, F05n, &lt; overflow communication circuit controller It is the same as the multicast service proxy server 〉〉 overflow, circuit server, and multicast service proxy feeder b, and the multicast IP address fl Μ 2 &quot; example. When the overflow communication circuit 1913-3 is inputting an IP packet from the overflow communication circuit 1943 (step MPS1 in FIG. 327), check that the multicast IP address of the IP packet is &quot; M2 "or, M5" Special ( Step MPS2) 'distribute to the multicast service agent feeder igii-g and the multicast service agent server 1912-3 (step MPS3). &lt; <Initial Setting and Cancellation of Multicast IP Addresses >>

IP轉送網1 9 00的管理者具有改寫網點裝置的位址管理 表1 9 11至1 9 1 5的通信記錄的權限。在網點裝置1 9 〇 1内的 位址管理表1 9 1 1上,追加多點發送服務送信用的終端 1910-7所使用的通信記錄π I 07、E07、M7、IM7、 ' 、 0”(但是,”M7”係多點發送IP位址),將多點發送址、The administrator of the IP transfer network 1 9 00 has the authority to rewrite the address management table of the network point device 1 9 11 to 1 9 1 5. On the address management table 1911 in the network device 1910, a communication record π I 07, E07, M7, IM7, ', 0 "used by the multicast service terminal 1910-7 for credit is added. (However, "M7" is a multicast IP address), the multicast address,

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第269頁 1245997 五、發明說明(266) ' ---- M7的路徑情報追加至路由器19〇7—丨至i9〇7 —4内的路徑表 ^在網點裝置1 903内的位址管理表19丨3上,追加多點 ,迗服務受信用的終端丨910 —n至1910—20所使用的通信記 ,錄,|\7、M7、E07、107、0、F11 至F20、F91-1”。但是,2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 269 1245997 V. Description of the invention (266) '---- The path information of M7 is added to the path table of router 1907- 丨 to i9〇7-4 at the outlet Add multiple points to the address management table 19 丨 3 in the device 1 903, and serve the credit-receiving terminals. 910 —n to 1910-20, the communication records, | 7, M7, E07, 107, 0, F11 to F20, F91-1 ". However,

Mr^疋與’’ M7”相同的多點發送1?位址,pi 1至F20係接續至 終^1910 - 11至1910 - 2〇的輸出電路介面,F91-1係接續至 新a又疋之多點發送服務代理伺服器的輸出電路介面。丨9 〇 〇 運用官理者係將多點發送I p位址” M7,,設置於終端1 91 〇1 j 至 1910-20 上。 » 同樣地,在網點裝置1 904内的位址管理表1914上, 追加多點發送服務受信用的終端丨9丨〇 _ 31至1 9 1 0 - 4 0所使用 的通信記錄,'IM7、M7、E07、I〇7、0、F31 至 F40、 Ρ9 3-Γ ,在網點裝置1 90 5内的位址管理表1915上,追加多 點發送服務受信用的終端1 9 1 〇 - 5 1至1 91 0 - 6 0所使用的通信 記錄&quot;IM7、M7、E07、I〇7、〇、F51 至F60、F95-ln。透過 以上的手續,終端1910-11至1910-20、終端1910-31至 1910-40、終端1910-51至1910-60接受新的多點發送服 務。終端1 91 0_3 0接受可透過I p位址&quot;M5”識別的多點發送 IP服務,使用位址管理表19 13的第4行的通信記錄&quot;IM5、 M5、E05、I05、0、(F21 至 F30、F92)” 内的第6 項目,’(F21 至F3 0、F92)n與位址管理表191 3之第5行的通信記錄” 1^«5、1«5、£92、192、0、(?21至?30),,内的第6項目&quot;(F21 至F30)”。由於記錄nF30”對應於終端1910-30,故變更該 記錄。亦即,做為位址管理表1 9 1 3的第4行的通信記錄 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第270頁 1245997 五、發明說明(267) ’’ IM5、M5、E05、1〇5、〇、( F2 1 至F2 9、F92 ),,與第 5 行的通 4吕記錄’· IM5、M5、E92、I92、0、(F21 至F29)11。透過變 更上述的通信記錄,終端丨9丨〇_3 〇可取消可透過多點發送 IP位址π M5’’識別的多點發送服務。 &lt;〈接續送信事務伺服器的網點裝置;&gt; ;&gt; 在前述實施例中,送信終端1 9 1 〇 — 〇 5與送信事務伺服 器1 9 1 0 - 0 8係接續至相同的網點裝置1 9 〇 2,將接續至網點 裝置1 901的終端1 91 〇-〇7( I Ρ位址&quot;Ε07π )重新設定於送信 事務伺服器,終端1 9 1 〇-〇8( IΡ位址&quot;Ε08,,不用做送信事務 飼服器’在送信終端191〇_〇5接續至網點裝置19〇2的狀態 中’送信事務伺服器191 0 — 07也可接續至網點裝置19(Π。 也就是’送信終端與送信事務伺服器可接續至不同的網點 裝置。 此時’送信事務伺服器丨91 〇-〇7、傳送接收IP封包的 多點發送服務代理伺服器1 912一3至1912-5及送信終端 1910-05將送信事務伺服器的ιρ位址變更為&quot;E〇7&quot;。並且, 將位址管理表1913的第8行的記錄,1 192、E92、E08、108、 XXX 、F92” 變更為 ” i92、E92、E〇7、I〇7、xxx 、 F92” ’將位址管理表19 14的第8行的記錄,,194、E94、 E08、108、xxx 、F94 &quot;變更為” I94、E94、e〇7、i07、 X X X 、F941’,將位址管理表1915的第8行的記錄&quot;196、 E96、E08、1〇8、X χ χ 、F96” 變更為” ι96、E96、E〇7、 107、xxx 、F96 丨丨。 並且’將送信事務伺服器1910-07與送信終端191〇一〇5 1245997 五、發明說明(268) 送 間的通信記錄π I 07、E07、E05、105、X x x 、FQ7n 信事務伺服器1910-07與多點發送服務代理伺服器丨g 至1912-5 間的通信記錄” I07、E〇7、E92、192、^ x 〇3 F07、Ι07、Ε07、Ε94、Ι94、χχχ、f〇7,,、”1〇 E07、E96、196、χ χ x 、F07”追加至位址管理表ΐ9ι' 上。並且,在位址管理表1912上,追加用於送信終 1910-05與送信事務伺服器191〇-〇7間的位址管理 的記錄”105、E05、E07、107、X X X 、F05”。又,内 終端19 10-08與送信終端191 〇 — 〇5間的通信記錄&quot;ι〇8 /除 E08/E05、I05、X X x 、F08”或與多點發送服務代理 服器1912-3至1912-5間的通信記錄” I〇8、E〇8、E92、 ° I92、xxx 、F08n 等。 &lt;&lt;送信終端與送信事務伺服器之一體化》 並且,授與送信終端1910 —02與送信事務伺服器 1910-1 6相同的IP,可將送信事務伺服器191〇 —〇6的機能一 體化地包含於送信終端191〇 —〇2的機能中。在此,送信事 務伺服器1910-06的機能與送信終端191〇 — 〇2的機能係透過 TCP埠號碼或UDP埠號碼區分。 &lt;&lt;溢出通信電路之變化&gt;&gt; 圖324之溢出通信電路伺服器1913-5將從溢出通信電 路1 945接收到的IP封包的多點發送”位址分類區分為 通信電路1915-1與1915 — 2的傳送手段,做為此手段的變 化,說明設置溢出IP封包分類機能部的方法。圖32 9之 1 90 5-1係網點裝置,1915-1係位址管理表,1 92 5 —丨係外部Mr ^ 疋 is the same multicast address as "M7", pi 1 to F20 are connected to the end ^ 1910-11 to 1910-2 output circuit interface, F91-1 is connected to the new a and 疋The output circuit interface of the multi-point sending service proxy server. 丨 9 〇 Use the official system to send the multi-point sending IP address "M7" on the terminal 1 91 〇 j to 1910-20. »Similarly, to the address management table 1914 in the branch point device 1 904, the communication records used by the multicast service receiving terminal 丨 9 丨 〇_ 31 to 1 9 1 0-4 0 are added, 'IM7, M7, E07, I〇7, 0, F31 to F40, and P9 3-Γ, add the multicast service receiving terminal 1 9 1 to the address management table 1915 in the branch device 1 90 5 Communication records used from 1 91 0 to 60 &quot; IM7, M7, E07, I07, 0, F51 to F60, F95-ln. Through the above procedures, terminals 1910-11 to 1910-20, terminals 1910-31 to 1910-40, and terminals 1910-51 to 1910-60 accepted the new multicast service. Terminal 1 91 0_3 0 accepts multicast IP services that can be identified by the IP address &quot; M5 &quot;, and uses the communication record of line 4 of the address management table 19 13 &quot; IM5, M5, E05, I05, 0, (F21 to F30, F92) "Item 6," (F21 to F3 0, F92) n and the communication record of line 5 of the address management table 191 3 "1 ^« 5, 1 «5, £ 92 , 192, 0, (? 21 to? 30), within the 6th item &quot; (F21 to F30). Since the record nF30 "corresponds to the terminal 1910-30, the record is changed. That is, as the communication record 2049-3793-PF in the fourth row of the address management table 1 9 1 3; RAY.ptd page 270 1245997 5 , Description of the invention (267) '' IM5, M5, E05, 105, 0, (F2 1 to F2 9, F92), and the 4th record of the 5th line '· IM5, M5, E92, I92, 0, (F21 to F29) 11. By changing the above communication records, the terminal 丨 9 丨 〇_3 〇 can cancel the multicast service that can be identified by multicast IP address π M5 ". &Lt; <continued delivery A branch point device of the transaction server; &gt;; &gt; In the foregoing embodiment, the transmission terminal 1 9 1 0-〇5 and the transmission transaction server 19 1 0-0 8 are connected to the same branch point device 1 9 〇2 The terminal 1 91 〇-〇7 (IP address &quot; E07π) connected to the network point device 1 901 is reset to the transmission transaction server, and the terminal 1 9 1 〇-〇8 (IP address &quot; E08), Do n’t need to send mail service feeder 'In the state where the sending terminal 1910_〇5 is connected to the outlet device 1902', the sending mail server 191 0 — 07 can also be connected Continue to the network point device 19 (Π. That is, 'the transmission terminal and the transmission transaction server can be connected to different network point devices. At this time,' the transmission transaction server 丨 91 〇-〇7, the multicast service agent transmitting and receiving IP packets The server 1 912-3 to 1912-5 and the transmission terminal 1910-05 changed the address of the transmission transaction server to &quot; E〇7 &quot;. Furthermore, the record in the eighth line of the address management table 1913, 1 192, E92, E08, 108, XXX, F92 "changed to" i92, E92, E07, I07, xxx, F92 "'The record in the 8th row of the address management table 19-14, 194, E94 , E08, 108, xxx, F94 &quot; changed to "I94, E94, e07, i07, XXX, F941 ', the record in the eighth line of the address management table 1915 &quot; 196, E96, E08, 1〇 8, X χ χ, F96 "was changed to" ι96, E96, E07, 107, xxx, F96 丨 丨. And 'the transmission transaction server 1910-07 and the transmission terminal 1910105 1245997 5. Description of the invention (268) Communication record of delivery π I 07, E07, E05, 105, X xx, FQ7n. Transaction server 1910-07 and multicast service agent Server communication records between g and 1912-5 "I07, E07, E92, 192, ^ x 〇3 F07, Ι07, Ε07, Ε94, Ι94, χχχ, f〇7 ,," 1〇E07, E96, 196, χ χ x, F07 ”are added to the address management table ΐ9ι ′. Further, a record "105, E05, E07, 107, X X X, F05" for address management between the end of transmission 1910-05 and the transmission transaction server 1910-7 is added to the address management table 1912. In addition, the communication record between internal terminal 19 10-08 and transmission terminal 191 〇—〇5 &quot; ι〇8 / except E08 / E05, I05, XX x, F08 '' or with the multicast service proxy server 1912-3 Communication records from 1912-5 "I08, E08, E92, ° I92, xxx, F08n, etc. &lt; &lt; Integration of transmission terminal and transmission transaction server &quot; Furthermore, the transmission terminal 1910-02 is given the same IP as the transmission transaction server 1910-16, and the function of the transmission transaction server 1910-6 can be provided. It is integrated into the function of the transmission terminal 1910-2. Here, the function of the transmission server 1910-06 and the function of the transmission terminal 1910-02 are distinguished by the TCP port number or the UDP port number. &lt; &lt; Change of overflow communication circuit &gt; &gt; The overflow communication circuit server 1913-5 of FIG. 324 distinguishes the "multicast transmission of the IP packet received from the overflow communication circuit 1 945" into the communication circuit 1915 The transmission means 1 and 1915-2 are changed as this means, and the method for setting the overflow IP packet classification function unit will be described. Figure 32 9 of 1 90 5-1 series of network device, 1915-1 series of address management table, 1 92 5 — 丨 External

第272頁 1245997 五、發明說明(269) 電路介面部,1911-5X係透過與圖32 4之19 U—5同機能的多 點發送IP位址” M2 π特定的多點發送服務代理伺服器, 19Κ-5Χ係透過與圖324之1912 —5同機能的多點發送丨^立 址15”特定的多點發送服務代理伺服器。1913 —且 與溢出通信電路伺服器丨91 3一5類似的機能之溢出ιρ封包分 類機能部。 溢出IP封包分類機能部若接收送信端為多點發送ιρ 址拉的 '部1ρ封·包,當該通信記錄的溢出參數之指定值為 時,判別送信端多點發送ΙΡ位址,經由 或1915-2Χ轉送至該多點發送服務代理飼服^路1915 &lt;〈有線廣播或媒體配信通信系統的實現&gt;&gt; 多點發送資料係包含數位化聲音、傳真資料、 Ϊ可:態ί像等任一種的多點發送資料。在終端1910-〇/ 為可傳运數位化聲音的聲音送信終端,終端^丨❶-丨工至 i士Mi — 70*為數位化聲音受信終端時,ΙΡ封包1 930的傳送變 ϊΐίΠ廣播的傳送,可實現使用Ιρ轉送的有線聲音廣 播通仏系統。又,在終端1910-02為可傳送數位化、 態衫像的聲音動態影像送信終端,終端i 9丨0-1 i至1910一 7 0為數位化聲音動態影像受信終時,^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 同樣的方法,可實現使用傳送接收數位化 靜止〜像的1/轉送之有線傳真通信系統。 數位化聲音受信終端或聲音動態 含對多點發送資料之受信資料(廣播内容)二以= 1245997 五、發明說明(270) 端個別情報之IP封包,傳送給送信終端191〇一〇2。多點發 務代理伺服器從複數個受信終端接收丨p封包,可將包 iU 3包含的情報編集成一覽表或短文的匯集情報等的 山ί匕傳送給送信終端或送信事務伺服器。並且,送俨綠 事務飼服器可將包含對接收包含匯集情報的】;封 :2 s平淪的IP封包送回給多點發送服務代理伺服器 典ίβ Ϊ現可進行多點發送資料送信側與多點發送資料 報交換的有線廣播通信系、统。如上述,多點發 料W 2理伺服器仲介多點發送資料送信側與多點發送資 情報交換。傳送的媒體為書籍或報A,音樂或 ::送通ίίί”信系統可實現做為多點發送服務的書籍 數位化儲存的聲音與動態影像的情報。 寺 &lt;&lt;摘要〉〉 ‘過I P通信電路接續至铜纸捉里L 的外部位址外’可置的終端除了具有固定 務的多點發逆ΤΡ#4|·、 土 1上之決定每個多點發送服 切Ν ^點赞送I Ρ位址,送玖 # 點發送資料的送信終端僂為複數個。並且,多 部被轉送,透過送達至複數個終端發=在:轉二網内 發送服務。受信側終端透過依賴 ^ 、夕點 重新設定或是取消多點發送服務之J 2J用者’可隨時 二發送服務代理祠服器可接續心上點二送 多點發送服務代理伺服$可#垃#的網點裝置。 # Τ &lt;接續至多點發送服務代理伺Page 272 1245997 V. Description of the invention (269) Circuit interface, 1911-5X is a multi-point sending IP address with the same function as 19 U-5 in Figure 32 "M2 π specific multicast service proxy server 19K-5 × is a multicast service proxy server with the same function as that shown in Figure 324-1912-5. 1913-And the overflow communication circuit server 丨 91 3-5 similar function of the overflow packet classification function. If the overflow IP packet classification function unit receives a 'part 1ρ packet that sends a multicast address from the sending end, when the specified value of the overflow parameter of the communication record is determined, the sending end judges the multicast address of the IP address via or 1915-2 × Forwarding to the multicast service agent feeding service ^ Road 1915 &lt; <Implementation of Cable Broadcasting or Media Distribution Communication System &gt; &gt; The multicast data contains digital audio, fax data, and can be: status Like any kind of multicast data. When the terminal 1910-〇 / is a voice transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital sound, and the terminal ^ 丨 ❶- 丨 工 到 i 士 Mi — 70 * is a digital voice receiving terminal, the transmission of IP packet 1 930 becomes broadcast. Transmission, can realize the wired sound broadcast communication system using Ip transfer. In addition, the terminal 1910-02 is a digital audio and video transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital and shirt-like images, and the terminals i 9 丨 0-1 i to 1910-1 70 are digital audio and video transmission terminals at the end, ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ The same method can be used to realize a wired facsimile communication system that uses transmission and reception to digitize still to 1 / transfer of images. Digitized voice trusted terminal or voice dynamics. Trusted data (broadcast content) with multi-point transmission data. II = 1245997 V. IP packet of individual information at the end of the invention description (270) is transmitted to the sending terminal 1910102. The multipoint delivery proxy server receives packets from a plurality of trusted terminals, and can transmit information such as the integrated list of information contained in the packet iU 3 or the aggregated information of short texts to the delivery terminal or the delivery transaction server. In addition, the sender can send a packet containing the received information to the receiver]. The packet: 2 s flat IP packet is returned to the multicast service proxy server code. Β can now send multicast data. The cable broadcast communication system and system that exchange data with multiple points. As described above, the multi-point transmission server 2 mediates the multi-point transmission data sending side and the multi-point transmission information exchange. The media to be transmitted is books or newspapers A, music or :: Send through the letter system can realize the digital storage of information on the sound and moving pictures of books as a multicast service. Temple &lt; &lt; Summary 〉〉 The IP communication circuit is connected to the external address of L in the copper paper trap. In addition to the settable terminal, in addition to the fixed-point multi-point reverse transmission ## | There are multiple sending terminals that send IP addresses and send # points to send data. And, many of them are transferred and sent to multiple terminals by sending = sending services in the second network. The receiving-side terminal relies on relying ^ The J 2J user who resets or cancels the multicast service, can send the service agent to the server at any time, and can continue to the second point to send the service to the multicast service agent server $ 可 # Trunk #. # Τ &lt; Continue to Multipoint Delivery Service Agent

1245997 五、發明說明(271) 服器接續的該網點裝置的丨個以上的終端,將包 封包匯集情報、隱封包匯集㈣、匯集個別終 俨:端Ϊ 封包,傳送給實施該多點發送服務之送 仏、,、鈿或达彳5事務伺服器。多點發送服務透、 點發送資料的受信確認通知(ACK封包)、受信不良^知。夕 (NACK封包)等,可為高品質的服務,通信公司透過抑 ACK封包或NACK封包或受信者的個別報告,可抑 &amp; 網内部的通信流.量增大。並且,可防止未盥通 轉;^ ==發送資料的㈣’可容易實施對使用多= 器,傳达接收IP封包以交換情報。多點發送服務代理 ,從送信終端被傳送的多點發送資料並保存於?部'服 夕點發送服務代理伺服器使用網點裝置的多點發送機能,1245997 V. Description of the invention (271) More than one terminal of the network device connected by the server collects the packet information, hidden packets, and individual terminals: the end packet, and transmits it to the multicast service. Send to 仏, 钿, 钿, or 彳 5 transaction servers. Multicast service transmission, reception confirmation notification (ACK packet) of transmission data, poor reception notification. Xi (NACK packets), etc., can provide high-quality services. By suppressing ACK packets or NACK packets or individual reports of the recipients, the communication flow within the network can be increased. In addition, it is possible to prevent unauthorised transfer; ^ == 发送 'to send data. It is easy to implement the use of multiple devices to communicate and receive IP packets to exchange information. Multicast service agent, the multicast data transmitted from the sending terminal is stored in the department's service, and the point service service server uses the multicast function of the branch device,

飼服器接續的該網點裝置之終 D 上的特定終端進行情報交::將通“己錄…網點裝置 miP膠囊化與逆IP膠囊化的方法之通信記錄内 。有私疋内部IP封包輸出處指定囊The specific device on end D of the branch device connected by the feeder is used to exchange information: In the communication record of the method of “encoding ... the branch device miP encapsulation and reverse IP encapsulation. There are private internal IP packet output Designated capsule

指定内部IP封包輸出處指定值時,則=行 =工, :二將該IP輸出至外部IP封包超過通信電 過J 電路伺服器經由外部Ip封包超過通信電路接收未被IP^When the specified value is specified at the output of the internal IP packet, then = line = work,: Second, the output of this IP to the external IP packet exceeds the communication power. Via the J circuit server, the external IP packet exceeds the communication circuit.

Hi 第275頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(272) 化的外部I P本f白 r-n i 由網點 電路接 的情 代理伺 。包含 機能 值時, 值時, 部I P封 裝置轉送至多:發= = 心 收未外心 報,經由接續超過通』同時將包含ip封包 服器的通信電路,轉送錶多:^器與多點發送服務 接續至外部ip封包=以:==服器 部。通信記錄内部,有指定外=== 進行逆IP膠囊化,沒有指定外部ip封包 =膠囊化,而將該内部IP封包輸出‘内 包超過通信電路。 1 9·進行多點發送通信的第丨9實施例: flP轉送網20 00的内部設置網點裝置2〇〇1至2〇〇5及 路由裔2007至20 09。網點裝置與路由器係透過Ip通信電路 直接地或經由網點裝置或路由器間接地接續。2 〇丨1至2 〇 j 5 係網點裝置的位址管理表,登錄經由通信電路接續至網點 裝置的終端之I p位址。2 0 1 6至2 0 2 0係網點裝置的路徑表, 2021至2023係路由器的路徑表。終端2025至2039具有IP封 包送受機能,經由IP通信電路接續至網點裝置。2045至 2049係輸出預定外的IP封包之超過通信電路。2050係多點· 發送服務代理伺服器。終端2026係在多點發送服務中傳送 多點發送資料的送信終端。多點發送資料係包含數位化聲 音、傳真資料、靜止影像、動態影像等任一種多點發送資 料。終端2 0 2 7係用於多點發送服務的送信事務伺服器。Hi Page 275 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (272) Externalized IP books f-n r-n i are served by the network circuit of the outlet. When the function value is included, when the value is reached, the IP sealing device forwards to the most: Send = = Receive the heart report, and then pass the connection. The communication circuit including the IP packet server will be transferred at the same time. Send the service to the external IP packet = to: == server. Inside the communication record, there is a designated outer === to perform reverse IP encapsulation, and no external IP packet is specified = capsuled, and the internal IP packet is output ‘inner packet exceeds the communication circuit. 19. 9th embodiment for performing multicast communication: The flP transfer network 2000 has internally installed network point devices 2000 to 2005 and routing nodes 2007 to 20 09. The branch point device and the router are connected directly or indirectly through the branch point device or router through the IP communication circuit. 2 〇 丨 1 to 2 〇 j 5 address management table of the branch device, register the IP address of the terminal connected to the branch device via the communication circuit. Path table for 2 0 16 to 20 20 series network point devices, path table for 2021 to 2023 series routers. The terminals 2025 to 2039 have the function of sending and receiving IP packets, and are connected to the outlet device through the IP communication circuit. 2045 to 2049 are out of communication circuits that output unscheduled IP packets. 2050 Multipoint · Delivery service proxy server. The terminal 2026 is a transmission terminal that transmits multicast data in a multicast service. The multicast data includes any kind of multicast data such as digitized audio, fax data, still images, and moving images. The terminal 2 0 7 is a transmission transaction server for multicast service.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第276頁 1245997 五、發明說明(273) &lt;&lt;IP封包的轉送〉〉 其次,說明經由送信終端20 26從外部Ip封包2〇4〇的 送起一連串的IP封包轉送步驟。終端2〇26將送信端外部 位址E02&quot;、欠信端外部IP位址&quot;M2&quot;的外部11}封包2〇4〇 送至通信電路2 05 1 (圖3 33之步驟DD1),網點裝置2〇〇1 查接收到的IP封包2040之送信端IP位址&quot;E〇2&quot;是否有登 於位址管理表2011上(IP封包接收檢查),在本例中,由 於通信電路205J的邏輯通信電路名稱&quot;F〇2,,及Ip位址 &quot;E02&quot;被登錄成位址管理表2〇11的第2行之記錄””、 m E02”,IP封包2040被接收。在未登錄的情形中,接收到的 IP封包直接被轉送給封包超過通信電路2045 ,而廢棄ip 封包。 ^ 其次,有關路徑表2016的第1行的記錄” Msk—m2, M2 ,G0 2,G0 3n,檢查該記錄的第1項目” Msk — m2&quot;與Ip封包 2040之受信端IP位址” M2”的&quot;and,,演算結果/是否與前述 記錄的第2項目”M2” 一致(下列(8)式)。在本例中為一致。 在此,’’ Msk-m2,,的值為 255.255.255.255。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 276 1245997 V. Description of the invention (273) &lt; &lt; Transfer of IP packet >〉 Next, we will explain a series of transmissions from the external IP packet 2040 via the transmission terminal 2026. IP packet forwarding steps. Terminal 2026 sends the external address E02 of the sender and the external 11} of the external IP address of the sender to the external 11} packet 2404 to the communication circuit 2 05 1 (step DD1 in Figure 3 33). The device 2000 checks whether the IP address of the sender of the received IP packet 2040 "E02" is registered on the address management table 2011 (IP packet reception check). In this example, since the communication circuit 205J The logical communication circuit name &quot; F02, and IP address &quot; E02 &quot; are registered as the record "", m E02 "in the second line of the address management table 2011, and the IP packet 2040 is received. In In the case of no login, the received IP packet is directly forwarded to the packet exceeding the communication circuit 2045, and the IP packet is discarded. ^ Second, the record of the first line of the path table 2016 "Msk—m2, M2, G0 2, G0 3n, check the first item "Msk — m2" of the record and the "and IP address of the trusted IP address" M2 "of the IP packet 2040, and calculate the result / consistent with the second item" M2 "of the previous record (the following (Eq. (8)). In this example, it is consistent. Here, the value of '' Msk-m2, '' is 255.255.255.255.

If (n Msk-ra2n) and MM2M = n M2,f) · · .(8) 其次,有關該記錄的第3項目GO 2及G03,將ip封包 2041送出給邏輯通彳§電路名稱為&quot;g〇2&quot;的通信電路2〇53( 步驟DD2),並將IP封包2042送出給邏輯通信電路名稱為 G03的通信電路2054(步驟DD3)。IP封包2041及204 2同 時複製IP封包2040而產生。在前述程序中,ip封包Μα的 受信端IP位址’’ Μ 2π不包含於路徑表2 〇 1 6時,外部I p封包If (n Msk-ra2n) and MM2M = n M2, f) · · (8) Secondly, regarding the third item of the record, GO 2 and G03, send the IP packet 2041 to the logical communication. The circuit name is &quot; The communication circuit 2053 of step G2 (step DD2), and sends the IP packet 2042 to the communication circuit 2054 of the logical communication circuit name G03 (step DD3). IP packets 2041 and 204 2 are generated by duplicating IP packets 2040 at the same time. In the foregoing procedure, when the IP address of the trusted end of the ip packet Mα is not included in the path table 206, the external IP packet

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第277頁 1245997 發明說明(274) 2 040被廢棄(多點發送位址的登錄檢查)。 1?封包2 04 1到達路由器20〇7,根據路徑表2〇21之第2 行的纪錄’’ M2、G12,’,被送出給邏輯通信電路名稱為G1 2的 通信電路20 55以做為IP封包2〇43(步驟DD4)。Ip封包2〇43 到達路由器2 008,根據路徑表2〇22之第2行的記錄&quot;M2、 G27n ’被送出給邏輯通信電路名稱為以?的通信電路2〇58 以做為IP封包20 34 (步驟DD5)。另一方面,被送出給通信 電路2054的IP封包2042到達路由器2009,根據路徑表 2023之第2行的&quot;M2、G21、G22&quot;,送出IP封包20 35給邏輯 m 通信電路名稱為121”的通信電路2056(步驟DD6),並送 出IP封包2036給邏輯通信電路名稱為” G22&quot;的通信電路 20 57(步驟DD7)。IP封包2035及2036係同時複製IP封包 2042而產生。路由器的路徑表2〇21至2〇23可具有與網點裝 置之路徑表2 016同樣的罩幕,由於係公知故其說明省略。 I P封包2 0 3 4係經過通信電路2 〇 5 8到達網點裝置2 0 0 3。有2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 277 1245997 Description of the invention (274) 2 040 is discarded (register check of multicast address). 1? Packet 2 04 1 arrives at router 2007, according to the record "M2, G12, 'in the second line of the path table 2021, it is sent to the communication circuit 2055 with the logical communication circuit name G1 2 as the IP packet 2043 (step DD4). The IP packet 2043 arrives at the router 2 008, and is sent to the logical communication circuit according to the record "M2, G27n" of the second line of the path table 2022. What is the name? The communication circuit 2058 is used as the IP packet 20 34 (step DD5). On the other hand, the IP packet 2042 sent to the communication circuit 2054 reaches the router 2009. According to &quot; M2, G21, G22 &quot; in the second line of the path table 2023, the IP packet 20 35 is sent to the logical m communication circuit name 121 " Communication circuit 2056 (step DD6), and sends an IP packet 2036 to the communication circuit name "G22" of the logical communication circuit 2057 (step DD7). IP packets 2035 and 2036 are generated by duplicating IP packets 2042 at the same time. The routing tables 2021 to 2023 of the router may have the same mask as the routing table 2 016 of the branch point device, and the description is omitted because it is well known. The IP packet 2 0 3 4 passes through the communication circuit 2 0 5 8 and reaches the outlet device 2 0 3. Have

關路徑表2018之第1行的記錄”Msk一m2, M2,Fl〇,F12,F22n, 檢查該§己錄的第1項目&quot;Msk-m2n與IP封包2034之受信端IP 位址&quot;M2”的’’ and’’演算結果,是否與前述記錄的第2項目 &quot;M2” 一致(下列(9)式)。在本例中為一致。在此,&quot;Regarding the record of the first line of the path table 2018 "Msk-m2, M2, F10, F12, F22n, check the first item recorded in this § &quot; Msk-m2n and the IP address of the trusted end of the IP packet 2034 &quot; Whether the calculation result of "2" of "M2" is consistent with the second item "M2" of the previous record (formula (9) below). In this example, it is the same. Here, &quot;

Msk-m2&quot;的值為255. 255. 255. 255。The value of Msk-m2 &quot; is 255. 255. 255. 255.

If (M M s k - m 2M ) and 11 M 2M = ,! M 2M ) ...(9) 其次’有關該記錄的第3項目F1〇、F12、F22,送出IP 封包2038給邏輯通信電路名稱為&quot;F1〇 ”的通信電路2〇6〇( 步驟DD11) ’送出ip封包2〇39給邏輯通信電路名稱為,,F12„If (MM sk-m 2M) and 11 M 2M =,! M 2M) ... (9) Secondly, the third item F10, F12, F22 related to the record, and send an IP packet 2038 to the logical communication circuit. The name is &quot; F1〇 &quot; communication circuit 2606 (step DD11) 'Send IP packet 2039 to the logical communication circuit name, F12'

第278頁 1245997 五、發明說明(275) 的通信電路20 6 1 (步驟DD13 ),送出IP封包給邏輯通信電 路名稱為’’F22”的通信電路2059(步驟DD9)。終端2 03 1及 2 0 3 3分別經由通信電路2 0 6 0及2 0 61接收多點發送資料。 多點發送代理伺服器2 0 5 0係經由通信電路2 0 5 9將接收到 的多點發送資料保存於内部的資料庫。 網點裝置2 00 4接收IP封包2 035,使用路徑表201 9的 第1行之記錄’’Msk-m2,M2,F13n,與網點裝置20 03的程序 相同,將複製IP Λ封包2035的IP封包2040送出給邏輯通信電 路名稱為1’F13&quot;的通信電路2062(步驟DD14)。網點裝置 2005接收IP封包2036,使用路徑表2020的第1行之記錄 nMski2,M2,F16,F17”,與網點裝置2003的程序相同,將 複製IP封包2 036的IP封包2041送出給通信電路206 3,將 IP封包2042送出給通信電路2064(步驟DD17、DD18)。 &lt;&lt;ACK封包或NACK封包的爆滿之預防&gt;&gt;Page 278 1245997 5. Communication circuit 20 6 1 (step DD13) of the invention description (275), sends an IP packet to the communication circuit 2059 (step DD9) of the logical communication circuit name "F22". Terminals 2 03 1 and 2 0 3 3 receives the multicast data via the communication circuit 2 0 6 0 and 2 0 61. The multicast proxy server 2 0 5 0 stores the received multicast data via the communication circuit 2 0 5 9 The network device 2 00 4 receives the IP packet 2 035, and uses the record of the first line of the path table 201 9 `` Msk-m2, M2, F13n, the same procedure as the network device 20 03, will copy the IP Λ packet The IP packet 2040 of 2035 is sent to the communication circuit with the logical communication circuit name 1'F13 &quot; 2062 (step DD14). The branch device 2005 receives the IP packet 2036 and uses the record of the first line of the path table 2020 nMski2, M2, F16, F17 The same as the procedure of the branch office device 2003, the IP packet 2041 of the duplicated IP packet 2 036 is sent to the communication circuit 206 3, and the IP packet 2042 is sent to the communication circuit 2064 (steps DD17 and DD18). &lt; &lt; Prevention of ACK or NACK packet from being full &gt; &gt;

e,端203 1為了將與ip封包2〇 38的接收相關的情報,也 就是受信報告之ACK封包、受信不良報告之NACK封包或終 端的個別報告等,向送信終端2〇26報告,形成送信端外部 IP位址為&quot;M2”、受信端外部1?位址為&quot;E〇2&quot;的Ip封包2〇44 ,送出至通信電路2060 (圖333之步驟DD21)。同樣地,終 端2033為了將與^封包2〇39的接收向送信終端““報生、、, 將送信端外部^位址為” M2”、受信端外部Ip位址為,,£〇口2,, 的ip封包送出至通信電路2〇61(步驟DD22)。e. The terminal 2031 reports the information related to the reception of the IP packet 2038, that is, the ACK packet of the trusted report, the NACK packet of the trusted bad report, or the terminal's individual report, etc., to the sending terminal 2026 to form a transmission. The external IP address of the remote end is "M2", and the external IP address of the trusted end is "E02" and the IP packet 2044 is sent to the communication circuit 2060 (step DD21 in Fig. 333). Similarly, the terminal 2033 In order to send the receiving packet 039 to the sender terminal "" Reporter, ", the sender's external address is" M2 ", and the recipient's external IP address is, 〇〇 口 2 ,, ip packet Send to the communication circuit 2061 (step DD22).

終 ---- 端20 26報告的IP封包時,檢查Ip封包之送信端外部IFinal ---- When the IP packet reported by the end 20 26, check the external I

12459971245997

址丨丨Μ2Π 錄,接 DD26) 〇 =否登錄於位址管理表2〇13。由於在本例中未戌 乡的1Ρ封包直接轉送給超過通信電路205 9 (步^ 次 /制從接收多點發送資料之所有終端 點發运負料运信終端,送出終端個別報告的”封包 可預防ip轉送網内部的ACK封包或NACK封包的爆滿c &lt;〈利用多點發送代理伺服器傳送資料〉〉 向多 結果Address 丨 丨 M2Π record, then DD26) 〇 = No login in the address management table 2013. Since in this example, the 1P packet that is not hometown is directly forwarded to the communication circuit 205 9 (steps / times are sent from all the terminals receiving the multicast data to the negative terminal, and the "packet sent individually by the terminal" can be sent. Prevent the ACK or NACK packets in the IP forwarding network from being full c &lt; <Transmitting data using multicast proxy server> To multiple results

夕點發送代理伺服器20 50在前述步驟DD9中,接收 終端2 0 2 6傳送的多點發送資料並保存於内部的資料庫中, =終端203 1及20 33在前述步驟DD21&amp;DD22中,要求再傳' 刖述多點發送資料時,前述保存的多點發送資料經由網2 裝置2 003 (步驟DD27),送出給終端2〇31(步驟DD28),戍 是可送出給終端20 33 (步驟DD29)。此時,使用網點裝置 2003 内的路徑表2018 之第 1 行&quot;Msk-m2, M2, F10, F12, F22,,, 進行多點發送資料的傳送。 &lt;&lt;送信終端間的資料傳送接收》 多點發送服務代理伺服器2 050將前述形成的儲存各 種匯集情報的IP封包傳送給送信終端2026,或者從送信終 端2026接收送回的ip封包(圖333之步驟汕“至!)!)“)。在Evening point sending proxy server 20 50 In the foregoing step DD9, the multicast data transmitted by the terminal 2 0 2 6 is received and stored in the internal database, = terminals 203 1 and 20 33 are in the foregoing steps DD21 &amp; DD22, Request for retransmission 'When the multicast data is described, the previously saved multicast data is sent to the terminal 2301 (step DD28) via the network 2 device 2 003 (step DD27), and it can be sent to the terminal 20 33 ( Step DD29). At this time, use the first line of the route table 2018 in the network device 2003 &quot; Msk-m2, M2, F10, F12, F22 ,, &quot; to transmit the multicast data. &lt; &lt; Data Transmission and Reception Between Sending Terminals》 The multicast service proxy server 2 050 transmits the IP packet formed by storing the above-mentioned aggregated information to the sending terminal 2026, or receives the returned ip packet from the sending terminal 2026 ( The steps in Figure 333 are "to!)!)"). in

此’前述IP封包的IP位址係多點發送服務代理伺服器 2050之IP位址&quot;E22,,及送信終端2 026的IP位址&quot;E 02” ,使用 位址管理表201 3的第4行之通信記錄&quot;F22、Ε22π與路徑表 2018之第5行的記錄” Mski2、E22、F22n,及位址管理表 2011的第2行之通信記錄&quot;F0 2、E02&quot;與路徑表2016之第3行The IP address of the aforementioned IP packet is the IP address "E22 of the multicast service proxy server 2050, and the IP address of the sending terminal 2 026" E 02 ", using the address management table 201 3 Communication record on line 4 &quot; F22, E22π and record on line 5 of the path table 2018 &quot; Mski2, E22, F22n, and communication record on line 2 of the address management table 2011 &quot; F0 2, E02 &quot; and path Table 2016 line 3

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第280頁 1245997 五 '發明說明(277) ————一——一一 :::” m2 E 〇 2、F 〇 2 f °如此’多點發送服務代理伺 服為可與貫施夕點發送服務代理伺服器接續之該多點 服務的送信終端,傳送接收lp封包而交換情報。”、、X k &lt;〈送k事務伺服器間的資料傳送接收&gt; &gt; 多點發送服務代理伺服器2〇5〇將前述形成的儲 報(ACK封包匯集情報、NACK封包匯集情報、個別終 月良)的I P封包傳送給送信事務伺服器2 〇 2 7,或者可 :二二,事務伺嚴器202 7送回的IP封包(圖333之步驟DD46 ==5 。在此,Ip封包的Ip位址係多點發送服務代理飼 •,F杰 之1?位=122,,及送信事務伺服器2 02 7的IP位址 用位址官理表2013的第4行之通信記錄,,F22、 ”#控表20 18之第5行的記錄1姑—1112、5:22122”, f &amp;理表2〇1 1的第3行之通信記錄,,F03、E〇3,,與路徑 表016之第4行的記錄” Msk〇3、e〇3、f〇3,,。如此,多點發 代理伺服II可與實施多點發送服務代理伺服器接續 ▲二i f發运服務的送信事務伺服器,傳送接收1 p封包而 父換情報。 〈〈送信終端與送传重k 、七事務伺服器間的情報交換&gt;&gt; 择浐^^端與送信事務饲服器交換1 p封包,可進行為了 曰 、X 1^服務的情報交換(圖3 3 3之步驟D D 5 1) 〇並 且,授盘i关拉^ 可將、、:^塞°ς ^ 2 0 2 6與送信事務饲服器2 0 2 7相同的1 P ’ 能以:i化務::器202 7的機能包含於送信終端20 26的機 端2026的機能ί * ’送信事務伺服器2027的機能與送信終 糸利用TCP埠號碼或UDP琿號碼加以區分。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 280 1245997 Five 'Invention (277) ———— One——One One ::: ”m2 E 〇2, F 〇2 f ° so' multicast delivery service agent Servo is the sending terminal of the multi-point service that can be connected to the Guan Shixi point delivery service proxy server, and sends and receives lp packets to exchange information. ", X k &lt; <data transmission and reception between sending k transaction servers> ; &gt; The multicast service proxy server 2050 transmits the IP packets of the aforementioned storage report (ACK packet collection information, NACK packet collection information, individual end-of-month goodness) to the delivery transaction server 207, Or you can: 22, the IP packet sent back by the transaction server 202 7 (step DD46 of Figure 333 == 5. Here, the IP address of the IP packet is a multicast service proxy feed, F. 1? Bit = 122, and the communication record of the fourth line of the address official table 2013 of the IP address of the transmission server 2 02 7 , F22, ”# 控 表 20 18 The fifth line of the record 1gu — 1112, 5: 22122 ", f &amp; management table 2001 line 3 communication record, F03, E〇3, and record 4 of line table 016 Msk〇3, e〇3, f〇3 ,. In this way, the multicast proxy server II can connect with the proxy server that implements the multicast service ▲ two if delivery service server, send and receive 1 p packets and The parent exchanges information. << Information exchange between the transmission terminal and the transmission weight k and the seven transaction servers> The ^^^ side exchanges 1 p packets with the transmission transaction server, which can be performed in order to say, X 1 ^ Service information exchange (step DD 5 1 in Figure 3 3 3) 〇 And, the award i Guan pull ^ can be: ^ plug ° ς 2 0 2 6 is the same as the delivery service feeder 2 0 2 7 1 P 'can be used to: The function of the device 20 7 is included in the function of the terminal 2026 of the transmission terminal 20 26. * The function of the transmission server 2027 and the transmission end use the TCP port number or UDP number. Distinguish.

第281頁 1245997 五 發明說明(278) &lt;&lt;接續送信事務伺服器的網點裝置&gt; &gt; 在本實施例中,送信終端20 2 6與送信事務伺服器2〇27 係接續至相同的網點裝置2 0 0 1 ,將接續至網點裝置2〇〇2 的終端2028 ( IP位址&quot;E〇4”)重新設定於送信事務伺服器, n ^ 2 0 2 7不用以做為送信終端5也就是送信終端與送π信事 務伺服器可接續至不同的網點裝置。此時,送信事務饲服 器2 0 2 8、傳送接收I ρ封包的多點發送服務代理伺服器 2050及送信終端20 26以” Ε〇4 ”做為送信事務伺服器的^位 址傳送接收I Ρ封包。 &lt;〈網點裝置的變化&gt;&gt; 圖330的網點裝置2 0 0 1可分離為圖334所示之位址 理模組2090及路由器2〇91而加以實施。但是,位址 組2090及路由器20 9 1可經由電路209 2進行情報交換。址 管理模組209 0内的位址管理表2〇11χ係包含盥點1 咖内的位址管理表2川相同的情報,路由器=i裝内置 路從表201 6X係包含與網點裝置20 0 1内的路徑表2〇 、 的情報。位址管理模組2 090實現做為實現 ^ 服器或硬體模組。 电細寺的何 &lt;&lt;使用位址管理模組的Ip封包之轉送〉〉 參照圖3 34 ’說明Ip轉送網2〇〇〇内的ιρ封 炊 209 1經由通信電路2()51接收外部Ιρ°二2G51接路由器 外部…測經由電糊2傳送給位址管理=二Page 281 1245997 Fifth invention description (278) &lt; &lt; Spot device for connecting to transmission server &gt; &gt; In this embodiment, the transmission terminal 20 2 6 and the transmission server 2027 are connected to the same The branch office device 2 0 01 will reset the terminal 2028 (IP address &quot; E〇4 ") connected to the branch office device 2000 to the transmission server, and n ^ 2 0 2 7 is not used as the transmission terminal 5 is that the sending terminal and the sending server can connect to different network devices. At this time, the sending server 2 0 2 8. The multicast service proxy server 2050 that sends and receives I ρ packets and the sending terminal 20 26 Sends and receives IP packets with "Ε〇4" as the ^ address of the sending transaction server. &Lt; &quot; Changes in branch device &gt; &gt; The branch device 2 in Figure 330 can be separated into the block shown in Figure 334. The address management module 2090 and the router 2091 are implemented as shown. However, the address group 2090 and the router 20 9 1 can exchange information through the circuit 2092. The address management table 2 in the address management module 2090 〇11χ contains the same information as in the address management table 2 in the bathroom 1, The router = i is equipped with a built-in route slave table 201. The 6X series contains information about the route table 20 and the network point device 201. The address management module 2 090 is implemented as a server or hardware module. Ho of the fine temple &lt; &lt; &lt; &lt; Transfer of IP packets using the address management module &gt; &gt;> With reference to FIG. 3 34 'Description of the IP packet 209 in the IP forwarding network 2000 1 Received externally via the communication circuit 2 () 51 Ιρ ° 二 2G51 is connected to the outside of the router ...

1245997 五、發明說明(279) 位址管理模組20 90檢查接收到的IP封包2〇4〇之送信端Ip位 址’’ E02”是否有登錄於位址管理表2〇1 lx上。在本例中, 通信電路20 5 1的邏輯通信電路名稱”F〇2”與1?位址&quot;e〇2,, ,確認被登錄以做為位址管理表2 〇丨丨χ的第2行之記錄 F0 2、Ε02π,並將確認結果通知路由器2〇91。路由器2〇 根據位址管理模組20 90的報告,接收ιρ封包2〇4〇。在報生 為前述IP封包係未登錄的情報中,接收到的Ιρ封包直ς 送給封包超過通屑電路2045,而廢棄ιρ封包。 得 &quot;M k其f μ路由器2〇91,有關路徑表201 6Χ的第1行的記錄 G〇2,&lt; G〇3”,檢查該記錄的第1項目nMsk — m2” = 〇40之受信端1?位址12”的&quot;and”演算結果,是 記”第2項目&quot;M2&quot;一致(下列(1〇)式)。在本=1245997 V. Description of the invention (279) The address management module 20 90 checks whether the IP address "E02" of the sender of the received IP packet 2040 is registered on the address management table 201 lx. In this example, the logical communication circuit name "F〇2" of the communication circuit 20 51 and the address 1 &quot; e〇2 ,, are confirmed to be registered as the second address management table 2 〇 丨 丨 χ Record F0 2 and E02π, and inform the router 2091 of the confirmation result. The router 20 receives the ιρ packet 2040 according to the report of the address management module 20 90. It is reported that the aforementioned IP packet is not registered In the information, the received Ip packet is sent directly to the packet that exceeds the chip circuit 2045, and the Ip packet is discarded. It is "Mk f f router 2091, the record G on the first line of the path table 201 6X 〇2, &lt; G〇3 ", check the first item of the record nMsk — m2" = 〇40's trusted end 1? Address 12 "&quot; and" calculation results, it is recorded "item 2" &quot; M2 &quot; Consistent (Formula (10) below). In this =

Tf ,flu Msk m2 的值為 255.255.25 5.2 55。 1“ Msk —m2”)and ”M2” =,,M2,,) · · ·(1〇) 204〗二t仏有〒該f錄的第3項目G02及G03,將1P封包 並將二封:邏輯通信電路名稱為,’G02’,的通信電路205 3, 並將IP封包2 042送出給邏鮫、s &gt;① &lt; 丨口电格ZUW, 電路2054。 、4電路名稱為’’603&quot;的通信 圖332之網點裝置2〇〇3 址管理模組與路由器的組合同樣的機能之位 管理模組包含有包含與位 2此’置換的位址 址管理表,前述置換路由考仫:表2〇13相同之情報的位 報。透過同樣的原理,網=包含與路徑表2Gi8相同的情 述同樣的機能之位址管_及2〇05利用具有前 、、、且與路由器而可以置換,分別The value of Tf, flu Msk m2 is 255.255.25 5.2 55. 1 “Msk —m2”) and ”M2” = ,, M2 ,,) · · · (1〇) 204 〖Two t〒 If there is the third item G02 and G03 of this record, 1P will be packed and two : The logic communication circuit name is 'G02', the communication circuit 205 3, and sends the IP packet 2 042 to the logic box, s &gt; ① &lt; 丨 ZUW, the circuit 2054. 4, the circuit name is `` 603 &quot; Communication diagram 332 of the network point device 2003 address management module and router combination The same function of the bit management module contains the address management including the replacement of bit 2 Table, the aforementioned replacement routing test: Table 2013 reports the same information. Through the same principle, the network = an address tube that contains the same functions and the same functions as the routing table 2Gi8_ and 2005 can be replaced with routers with front,,, and routers, respectively.

1245997 五、發明說明(280) 包含網點裝置2004至20 05所包含的位 的情報。 g里表或路徑表 &lt;&lt;有線廣播或媒體配信通信系統的實現〉〉 在終端2 02 6為可傳送數位化聲音 端2〇31至203 9為數位化聲音 二:卓二送仏終端,終 的傳送變成有線聲音廣播 現:用述^^ 線聲音廣播通信系統。在終端2〇26為可傳送數位 態影像的聲音動態影像送信終端,終端2〇31至=二動 化聲音動態影像受信終端時,前 ^ : nTvr的傳送,可實現使用 ii二?通同樣的方法,可實現傳送接收數位化靜止景; ί ΐ ί轉达的有線傳真通信系統。數位化聲音受作玖 像受信終端可將包含對多點發送資㈣受 值、y η 奋)的感想等的受信端個別情報之ι ρ封包, 端2026 ’多點發送服務代理飼服器從複數個 :匕Μ接收IP封包’可將包含1?封包包含的情報編集成 5表或紐文的匯集情報的115封包傳送給送信終端或送信 ,務伺服器。送信終端或送信事務飼服器可將包含對接收 匕含匯集情報的IP封包之結果的評論的ιρ封包,送回給多 =發送服務代理伺服器’結果,可實現進行多點發送資料| ^ L侧與多點發送資料受信側之情報交換的有線廣播通信 、,。如上所述,多點發送代理伺服器仲介多點發送資料 =k,與多點發送資料受信侧間的情報交換。傳送的媒體 :、、、書籍或報紙、音樂或影像,有線廣播通信系統可實現做 m 第284頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(281) ' 為多點發送服務的書籍配送通信系統或報紙配送通信系 統’音樂配送通信系統或影像配送通信系統。在此,影像 係指數位化儲存於錄影帶、CD 4DVD等的聲音與動態影/像 所構成的情報。 ^ 一、’ &lt;&lt;摘要〉〉 終端係接續至經由通信電路接續位址管理模組的路由 器’將送信端I p位址登錄至前述位址管理模組的位址管理 表上’並在路由器輸入的IP封包的標頭内之送信端ip位址 登錄至位址管理模組内的位址管理表上時,轉送丨p封包, 在未登錄時,透過將該IP封包轉送至路由器的超過通俨電 路的方法,防止預定外的IP封包混AIP轉送網内部。並 且,在路由器輸入的IP封包的標頭内之受信端多點發送IP 位址未登錄至路由器的前述路徑表上時,透過將該IP封包 轉送至路由器的超過通信電路的方法,防止預定外的1?封 包混入I P轉送網内部。 的IP位址有登錄至網點裝置的位址管理表上 封包,在IP封包未登錄時則轉送至超過通信 =被廢棄’則被送到多點發送代理祠服器 二夕2發% IP位址登錄至網點裝 發送1p封包受信者向多點發送IP封包 =封包的ιρ封包受信確認用的ACK封包、钱 置。在受信端多點發2=IP封包等不 ,網點裝置輸入的外網點裝置 IP封包的標頭内之受,1245997 V. Description of the invention (280) Contains information about the bits contained in the outlet device 2004 to 2005. g table or path table &lt; &lt; Implementation of cable broadcasting or media distribution communication system &gt;> Terminal 2 02 6 is a digital voice that can be transmitted 203 to 203 9 is digital voice 2: Zhuo Er send terminal, The final transmission becomes a wired sound broadcast. Now, a communication system using a wired sound broadcast is described. When terminal 2026 is a sound dynamic image transmission terminal capable of transmitting digital images, when terminals 2031 to = two dynamic sound dynamic image receiving terminals, the front ^: nTvr transmission can be used. II? The same method can be used to realize the transmission and reception of digital still scenes; ί ΐ ί wired fax communication system. The digital voice is used as an image. The receiving terminal can send individual information of the receiving end including the receiving value of the multicast data and the sentiment, etc. to the packet. The terminal 2026 'multipoint transmission service agent feeder Plural: Receive IP packets '1' can transmit 115 packets containing the information contained in the 1 packet into 5 tables or the collected information in New Zealand to the sending terminal or sending server. The sending terminal or sending service feeder can send the ιρ packet containing a comment on the result of receiving the IP packet containing the aggregated information back to the multi = sending service proxy server 'result, which can realize the multi-point sending of data | ^ Cable broadcast communication for exchange of information between the L side and the multicast data receiving side. As described above, the multicast proxy server mediates the multicast data = k and exchanges information with the multicast data receiving side. Media to be transmitted: ,,, books or newspapers, music or video, cable broadcasting communication system can be realized m page 284 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (281) 'For the multicast service Book distribution communication system or newspaper distribution communication system 'music distribution communication system or video distribution communication system. Here, video is information composed of audio and dynamic video / images stored on video tapes, CD 4DVDs, etc., exponentially. ^ I. '&lt; &lt; Summary >> The terminal is connected to the router connected to the address management module via the communication circuit, and the sender IP address is registered on the address management table of the aforementioned address management module. When the sender's IP address in the header of the IP packet input by the router is registered on the address management table in the address management module, the packet is forwarded. When not registered, the IP packet is forwarded to the router. The method exceeds the communication circuit to prevent unscheduled IP packets from being mixed inside the AIP forwarding network. In addition, when the multicast IP address of the trusted end in the header of the IP packet input by the router is not registered in the aforementioned route table of the router, the method of forwarding the IP packet to the router beyond the communication circuit prevents the unplanned 1? Packets are mixed into the IP forwarding network. The IP address has a packet on the address management table registered to the outlet device, and when the IP packet is not registered, it is forwarded to more than communication = discarded, then it is sent to the multicast agent proxy server 2 nights% IP bit The address is registered to the network, and the recipient sends a 1p packet. The recipient sends an IP packet to the multipoint. The ACK packet and the ACK packet are used to confirm the receipt of the packet. Send 2 = IP packets to multiple points on the receiving end, etc., the headers of the IP packets of the external network device entered by the network device are accepted,

在終端 時,傳送I P 路,若I P封 透過不許可 理表上,從 信者通知接 知受信狀態 通過網點裝 路徑表上時At the terminal, the IP route is transmitted. If the IP seal is not permitted on the schedule, the notification is received from the believer to receive the trusted status.

1245997 五、發明說明(282) ____ 端多點發送位址轉送登錄於路徑表的”封 路徑表上時,透過網點裝置廢棄該^封包,防f未登錄於 IP封包混入I P轉送網内部。 止預定外的 多點發送服務代理伺服器接收從送俨炊 發送資料並保存於其内冑,多點 傳送的多點 ,送出至接續於多點發送服====發送資料 置的終端。 σ接、戈的該網點裝 可將包含從接續至容許1、、, 網點裝置之1個以上的終端接:服::服器接續的該 ’傳送給實施該多點發送服;: = : = 封包 器。 1〇終鈿或^信事務伺服 多點發送服務代理伺 服器接續的該多點發送服務;送=務代理伺 間傳送接收I Ρ封包,而、、舳或达4事務伺服器 服務代理伺服器使用包含由/j三並且,前述多點發送 的IP封包之情報。 3 ^由1P封包超過通信電路接收到 透過使用可傳送數位 士 像等的聲音送信終端、聲d態影像或靜止影 送信終端,可實現使用丨p ^、、,=像送信終端、靜止影像 有線TV廣播通信系、统 =有、線聲音廣播通信系統、 信終端可將包含受信終端的個則;^ f系統。有線廣播的受 終端’結果,可實 多狢,月報之ip封包傳送給送信 丁夕點發迭資料送信側與多點發送1245997 V. Description of the invention (282) ____ When the multicast address is forwarded and registered on the routing table of the routing table, the packet is discarded through the network device to prevent the unregistered IP packets from being mixed into the IP forwarding network. The unscheduled multicast delivery service proxy server receives the data sent from the delivery cooker and saves it inside, and the multicast multicast is sent to the terminal that is connected to the multicast delivery service ==== the sending data is set. Σ The network equipment of the connection and connection can connect more than one terminal including the network connection from the connection to the allowable 1 ,, and the network device: service :: server connection to the implementation of the multi-point delivery service ;: =: = The packet sender: 10. The final multicast or service transaction multicast service is the multicast service that the proxy server continues; the send = service agent sends and receives IP packets, and the service server service The proxy server uses information including IP packets sent by / j and the aforementioned multiple points. 3 ^ Received by a 1P packet over the communication circuit, using a voice transmission terminal, acoustic image, or still image that can transmit digital images, etc. Video mail It can realize the use of ^ p ^ ,,, = image transmission terminal, still image cable TV broadcast communication system, system = yes, line sound broadcast communication system, and letter terminal can include the rules of the trusted terminal; ^ f system. Cable The result of the broadcast receiving terminal can be more than a few minutes. The monthly ip packet is sent to the sender.

1245997 五、發明說明(283) 資料受信側間的情報交換之有線廣播通信系統。多點發送 代理伺服器係仲介多點發送資料送信側與多點發送資料受 信側間的情報交換。 '1245997 V. Description of Invention (283) A cable broadcast communication system for information exchange between data receiving sides. Multicasting The proxy server mediates the exchange of information between the multicast data sending side and the multicast data receiving side. '

多點發送服務透過要求改善多點發送資料之受信確認 通知(ACK封包)、受信不良通知(NACK封包)等,可為高品 質的服務,通信公司透過抑制ACK封包、NACK封包或受信 者的個別報告,可抑制I P轉送網内部的通信流量增大。並 且,可防止未與.通信公司訂契約的多點發送資料之配信, 可容易地實施對使用多點發送服務的收費。 20·進行多點發送通信的第2〇實施例: 參照圖335說明本實施例。在IP轉送網21〇〇上設定通 信公司X的管理範圍2101與通信公司γ的管理範圍21〇2,並 且設置網點裝置2103至2114、路由器2115-1至2115-11 、路由器2 11 6。網點裝置與路由器係透過丨p通信電路直接 地或經由網點裝置或路由器間接地接續。具有I p封包送受 機此的終端2 11 7至2 1 3 3係經由I p通信電路被接續至網點裝 置上。2 1 4 0至21 4 3係多點發送I p服務代理伺服器,2 1 4 4 至2147係多點發送卩服務代理伺服器,2148至2151係超過The multicast service provides high-quality services by requesting improved acknowledgement notifications (ACK packets) and bad notifications (NACK packets) of multicast data. Communication companies can suppress ACK packets, NACK packets, or individual recipients. It is reported that the increase of the communication traffic inside the IP forwarding network can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent delivery of multicast data that has not been contracted with a telecommunications company, and it is easy to implement a charge for using the multicast service. 20. 20th Embodiment of Multicast Communication: This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 335. The management range 2101 of the communication company X and the management range 2102 of the communication company γ are set on the IP transfer network 2100, and the branch point devices 2103 to 2114, the routers 2115 to 2115-11, and the router 2 116 are set. The branch point device and the router are connected directly through the communication circuit or indirectly through the branch point device or router. The terminals 2 11 7 to 2 1 3 with the IP packet sending / receiving device are connected to the network device via the IP communication circuit. 2 1 4 0 to 21 4 3 series multicast IP service proxy server, 2 1 4 4 to 2147 series multicast service proxy server, 2148 to 2151 series

通信電路伺服器。通信公司X與通信公司γ共同管理路由器 2116。網點裝置2103至2114限定為全部具有”膠囊化與1 逆膠囊化機能的裝置,或者全部不具有1?膠囊化與逆膠囊 2機能的裝置,有關各個網點裝置的内部構成則透過其他 實施例加以說明。 &lt;〈通信公司的送信終端與送信伺服器〉〉Communication circuit server. The communication company X and the communication company γ jointly manage the router 2116. The outlet devices 2103 to 2114 are limited to devices that all have "encapsulation and 1 inverse capsule function", or all devices that do not have 1? Capsule and inverse capsule 2 functions. The internal structure of each outlet device is implemented through other embodiments Explanation: <Transmission terminal and transmission server of communication company>

第287頁 1245997Page 287 1245997

五、發明說明(284) 區分A報社的電子報配送服務 播局的新聞配传服旄盔&amp; 私、、,n 發送P服務,B廣 公司X營輝Λ ㈣服務。終端21 17係通信 的夕點發送資料送信終端,線、^ ^ 多點菸、Λ^ 終端2120係通信公司Y管理的 送信終端,終端2122係通信公司γ管理的送 ^ ^21 23 #'A ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 〇 ^ ^21 1 7 d 20將A報社製作的電子報傳送給 伺服器2 11 8戈通俨八q v的接俨古 。a司X的运#事務 有關電子報配送的事務連絡通信之多點發 : =勤^端2119係8廣播局管理的終端, 聲 ,動態影像m新聞配信服務傳送至通信公司播x = 聲 或通信公司γ的送信事務飼服器2122事 J關電子報配送的事務連絡通信之多點發送Q服務用的終 送信事務飼服器2118代表通信公 L Λ電八子=送、透過Β廣播局的TV新聞配信ί = I進Λ’,樣广送信事務健器2122代表通二 司Υ,進灯有關多點發送資料的傳送之事務 &lt;&lt;多點發送IP封包之轉送&gt;;&gt; 電子報做為數位情報儲存於多數的 封包。A報社從A報社的終端2123將電子報二:: 达公3X的送信事務伺服器2118(圖336之步驟216〇) 必日、’電子報IP封包係經由網點裝置2丨i丨、路由器V. Description of the invention (284) Distinguish the newsletter distribution service of the newspaper A. The news distribution service of the broadcasting station &amp; private ,,, and n send P service, and the service of B company X Yinghui Λ ㈣. Terminal 21 17 series of communication points for sending data, terminal, line, ^ ^ multi-smoke, Λ ^ terminal 2120 is a transmission terminal managed by communication company Y, and terminal 2122 is a transmission managed by communication company γ ^ 21 23 # 'A ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 21 1 7 d 20 will send the newsletter produced by the newspaper A to the server 2 11 8 通通 俨 八 qv 的 俨 古. a Division X's operation # affairs related to the distribution of electronic newsletters contact multiple points of communication: = 2 ^ 2119 is a terminal managed by 8 broadcasting stations, audio, dynamic video m news delivery service is transmitted to the communication company broadcast x = audio or communication The company's delivery service feeder 2122 is related to the business of electronic newsletter distribution. The multi-point transmission Q service is the final delivery service feeder 2118 on behalf of the communication company. Newsletter ί = I 进 Λ ', sample broadcast delivery server 2122 on behalf of Tong Erji, into the affairs of the transmission of multicast data &lt; &lt; forwarding of multicast IP packets &gt;; &gt; electronic Reports are stored as digital information in most packets. Newspaper A will send electronic newsletter 2 from terminal 2123 of newspaper A :: The delivery service server 2118 of Dakko 3X (step 216 in FIG. 336).

IMIM

麵 第288頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(285) 2115-10 、2115-7 、2115-6 、2116 、2115-5 、2115-3 、 2115-1、網點裝置2103,到達送信事務伺服器2118。從 終端21 23向送信事務伺服器2118的電子報IP封包的傳送可 利用公知的UDP通信技術(不連接通信)或TCP通信技術(連 接技術)來實施。Page 288 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 V. Description of the invention (285) 2115-10, 2115-7, 2115-6, 2116, 2115-5, 2115-3, 2115-1, outlet device 2103 , Arrived at the delivery transaction server 2118. The transmission of the telegram IP packets from the terminals 21 to 23 to the transmission server 2118 can be performed using a known UDP communication technology (non-connection communication) or TCP communication technology (connection technology).

送信事務伺服器2 11 8將接收到的電子報I p封包保存於 内部的資料庫(步驟2161)。其次,送信事務伺服器2118將 接受並保存的電.子報IP封包傳送給送信終端2 n 7 (步驟 2162),送信終端2 117保存接收到的電子報ip封包。此 時,從送信事務伺服器2 118向終端2 117的電子報ip封包之 傳送可利用公知的UDP通信技術或TCP通信技術來實施。 送信終端21 17將前述保存的電子報ip封包送出給網點 裝置2103(步驟2163)。在此,受信端位址為多點發°送位 址Μ X 。則述被送出的電子報I Ρ封包同時於多點發送專用 的I Ρ轉送網2 1 5 2内部被轉送,而到達網點裝置2 1 〇 6至 210 8(步驟2 171至2174)、電子報IP封包的受信終端之炊端 2124至2128(步驟2175至2177),同時並到達多點發送?服 務代理伺服器2140至2141(步驟2178)。The delivery server 2 11 8 stores the received electronic newspaper IP packet in an internal database (step 2161). Next, the transmission transaction server 2118 transmits the received and saved telegram IP packet to the transmission terminal 2 n 7 (step 2162), and the transmission terminal 2 117 saves the received electronic packet ip packet. At this time, the transmission of the e-mail ip packet from the transmission transaction server 2 118 to the terminal 2 117 can be performed using a well-known UDP communication technology or TCP communication technology. The transmission terminal 21-17 sends the aforementioned saved electronic newspaper IP packet to the network point device 2103 (step 2163). Here, the address of the receiving end is a multicast address MX. Then, the sent electronic newspaper IP packet is simultaneously forwarded internally in the dedicated IP relay network 2 1 5 2 for multicast, and reaches the network device 2 1 06 to 210 8 (step 2 171 to 2174), the electronic newspaper The multicast terminals 2124 to 2128 (steps 2175 to 2177) of the trusted terminal of the IP packet arrive at multicast at the same time? The service proxy servers 2140 to 2141 (step 2178).

終端2124至2125傳送通知正常收取電子報Ip封包之 ACK封包或通知前述^封包錯誤的NACK封包時(步驟 ,ACK封包至NACK封包被轉送至負責電子報配送服務的多 點發送P服務代理伺服器2140(步驟2183)。同樣地,終 端2126至2127傳送通知1?封包之接收狀態仏}(封包戍1^(^ 封包時(步驟2182),前述ACK封包至NACK封包被轉送至多When the terminals 2124 to 2125 transmit the ACK packet notifying the normal receipt of the electronic newspaper IP packet or the NACK packet notifying the aforementioned ^ packet error (step, the ACK packet to the NACK packet is forwarded to the multicast P service proxy server responsible for the electronic newspaper distribution service) 2140 (step 2183). Similarly, the terminals 2126 to 2127 transmit notification 1? The reception status of the packet 仏} (packet 戍 1 ^ (^ When the packet is received (step 2182), the aforementioned ACK packet to NACK packet is forwarded at most.

1245997 五、發明說明(286) 點發送P服務代理伺服器2141(步驟2184)。從終端2128 送出ACK封包至NACK封包則為同樣的程序。 多點發送p服務代理伺服器2140及2141將電子報即 封包再傳送給終端21 24至21 27以做為多點發送資料(步驟 2 1 8 5、2 1 8 6 )。多點發送p服務代理伺服器2 j 4 〇及2 J 4 j形 成報告電子報I P封包之接收狀況的丨p封包,並送出給網點 裝置2106至2107(步驟2187),IP封包經由1?轉送網2152 (步驟2188),並經由網點裝置21〇3,到達送信事務伺服 器 2118(步驟 2189)。 通信公司X管理的送信事務伺服器2丨丨8使用有關在步 驟2 162及2189中之電子報IP封包配送的情報,可算出通信 公司X管理的IP網2 101的使用費用。送信事務伺服器2118口 由包含前述接收到的IP封包之内容的情報,形成包含給A 報社之報告事項的IP封包,並將形成的Ip封包傳送給A報 社的終端2123(步驟2190)。在此,IP封包係經由網點裝置 2103、路由器2115]、2115一3、2115一5、2116、2ii5 6、 2115-7、2115-10、2111,到達終端2123。八報社接收”封 匕,確認依賴通信公司X的電子報1]?封包的配送情況。 社的步驟_完畢後,將電子報1P封包從A報 夕半聰9專送給通#公司Y的送信事務伺服器2122(圖 2111 ,玖± 1 f4)。此時,電子報1 P封包係經由網點裝置 服秀2、122 、網點裝4 2n〇,到達送信事務伺 服器Ζ122。送^事務伺服器2122將前述接收到的 封包保存内部的資料庫(步驟2 1 6 5 )。 第290頁 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 1245997 五、發明說明(287) ---- 送#事務伺服器2 1 2 2,對於送信終端,接受送信事務 伺服器2122具有傳送電子報1?封包之資格的正規送信事務 伺服器之涊證(步驟2260 ),送信事務伺服器2122將前述接 收,保存的電子報IP封包傳送給送信終端步驟21W) ,运信終端2 120保存接收到的電子報Ip封包。又,在步驟 216j中,A報社的終端2123,對於通信公司γ之送信事務伺 服器21 22,可接受在A報社的終端21 23上沒有錯誤的認證1245997 V. Description of the invention (286) The P service proxy server 2141 is sent (step 2184). Sending an ACK packet to a NACK packet from the terminal 2128 is the same procedure. The multicast service agent servers 2140 and 2141 send the e-mail packet to the terminals 21 24 to 21 27 as multicast data (steps 2 1 8 5 and 2 1 8 6). The multicast service p server 2j 4 0 and 2 J 4 j form a p packet that reports the reception status of the electronic packet IP packet, and send it to the network device 2106 to 2107 (step 2187). The IP packet is forwarded via 1? The network 2152 (step 2188) passes through the network point device 2103 to the delivery transaction server 2118 (step 2189). The transmission server 2 managed by the communication company X uses the information about the distribution of the IP telegram IP packets in steps 2 162 and 2189 to calculate the usage fee of the IP network 2 101 managed by the communication company X. The delivery transaction server 2118 uses the information including the contents of the received IP packet to form an IP packet including the report item to the newspaper A, and transmits the formed IP packet to the terminal 2123 of the newspaper A (step 2190). Here, the IP packet arrives at the terminal 2123 via the network device 2103, the router 2115], 2115-3, 2115-5, 2116, 2ii5 6, 2115-7, 2115-10, and 2111. The Eight News Agency received the “Dagger” and confirmed the newsletter 1] that depends on the communication company X. The distribution of the packet. After the company ’s steps _, the electronic newsletter 1P packet was sent from A newspaper Xi Bancong 9 to Tong # 公司 Y Sending transaction server 2122 (Figure 2111, 玖 ± 1 f4). At this time, the electronic message 1 P packet is sent to the sending transaction server Z122 via the outlet device service show 2, 122 and outlet 4 4n0. The sending service transaction server 122 The device 2122 saves the previously received packets into an internal database (step 2 1 6 5). Page 290 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd 1245997 5. Description of the invention (287) ---- Send #Transaction Server 2 1 2 2. For the sending terminal, the sending transaction server 2122 accepts the certificate of the regular sending transaction server that is qualified to transmit the electronic message 1? Packet (step 2260), and the sending transaction server 2122 receives the previously received and stored electronic The IP packet is transmitted to the transmitting terminal (step 21W), and the transport terminal 2 120 saves the received electronic packet IP packet. Also, in step 216j, the terminal 2123 of the newspaper A, for the communication company γ ’s transmission transaction server 21 22, Acceptable on Terminal 21 23 of A Newspaper Bad certification

送信終端21 20將前述保存的電子報lp封包送出給網點 裝置2109(步驟2167)。在此,受信端位址係多點發送位 址&quot;My&quot;。前述被送出的電子報Ip封包同時於多點發送專用 的IP轉送網2 1 5 3内部被轉送,而到達網點裝置211 2至 2114(步驟21 91至2194)、電子報ip封包的受信終端之終端 2129至2133(步驟2195至2197),同時並到達多點發送p服 務代理伺服器2142至2143(步驟2198)。終端2129至2133The transmission terminal 2120 sends the aforementioned electronic newsletter lp packet to the network point device 2109 (step 2167). Here, the address of the trusted end is the multicast address &quot; My &quot;. The aforementioned IP packet sent by the newsletter is simultaneously transferred within the IP forwarding network 2 1 5 3 that is dedicated for multicast transmission, and arrives at the network device 211 2 to 2114 (steps 21 91 to 2194), the trusted terminal of the IP packet of the newsletter The terminals 2129 to 2133 (steps 2195 to 2197), and at the same time, arrive at the multicast service p server 2142 to 2143 (step 2198). Terminals 2129 to 2133

傳送通知前述電子報IP封包之接收狀態的ACK封包或NACK 封包時(步驟220 1、2202 ),ACK封包至NACK封包被轉送至 負責電子報配送服務的多點發送P服務代理伺服器2丨42或 2143(步驟22 03 或2 204) 〇 ° ^When transmitting an ACK packet or a NACK packet notifying the reception status of the aforementioned IP telegram IP packet (step 220 1, 2202), the ACK packet to the NACK packet is forwarded to the multicast P service proxy server 2 which is responsible for the newsletter distribution service. 42 Or 2143 (step 22 03 or 2 204) 〇 ° ^

多點發送P服務代理伺服器2142或2 143將電子報ip封 包再傳送給終端2 129至2 133以做為多點發送資料(步驟 2205、2206 )。多點發送p服務代理伺服器2142及2143形 成報告電子報IP封包之接收狀況的I P封包,並送出給網點 裝置2112至2113(步驟2 207 ),IP封包經由1?轉送網2153(The multicast P service proxy server 2142 or 2 143 retransmits the electronic newspaper IP packet to the terminals 2 129 to 2 133 as the multicast data (steps 2205, 2206). The multicast service proxy servers 2142 and 2143 form IP packets that report the reception status of the electronic packet IP packets, and send them to the network devices 2112 to 2113 (step 2207), and the IP packets are forwarded through the 1? Forwarding network 2153 (

291 1245997 五、發明說明(288) 步驟2 2 0 8 )’並經由網點裝置2 1 0 9,到達送信事務祠服器 2122(步驟22 09 ) 〇 &quot; 通信公司Y管理的送信事務伺服器2 1 22算出通信公司γ 管理的IP網2102的使用費用,並且,由包含前收到的ip封 包之内容的情報,形成包含給A報社之報告事項的ί p封包 ,並將形成的IP封包傳送給Α報社的終端2123(步驟221 0) 。在此,I P封包係經由網點裝置2 1 1 〇、路由器2 11 5- 1 0、 網點裝置211 1,到達終端21 23。A報社接收ip封包,確認 依賴通信公司Y的電子報I p封包的配送情況。在實施多點 發送Q服務的情況中,也可透過前述同樣的方法實施。 &lt;&lt;認證手續〉〉 前述步驟22 60的認證手續有各種公開的技術,參照圖 337說明一例。送信事務伺服器2122及送信終端212〇將共 同函數y = f (a,b)與秘密的認證鍵” κ”保存於内部。送信事 務伺服器2 1 2 2將識別送信事務伺服器2 1 2 2的情報,,I D 21 2 2,, 傳送給送信終端2120(步驟2160-1)。送信終端2120接收識 別送信事務伺服器2122的情報&quot;ID2122,,,產生亂數&quot;R,,, 算=並保存Cl = f(K,R),同時將亂數&quot;R&quot;傳送給送信事務伺 服器2122(步驟2160-2)。送信事務伺服器2122使用接收到 &quot;的^數&quot;R&quot;、認證鍵”K”與函數”f”,算出C2 = f(K,R),將 C2”傳送給送信終端212〇(步驟216〇-3)。送信終端檢查前 述產生並保存的” c 1 ”與前述接收的&quot;C2”是否一致,若一 ,致,,’由於可確認送信事務伺服器2丨2 2保存正規的認證鍵 K ’因此可認證送信事務伺服器21 22為正規的送信事務291 1245997 V. Description of the invention (288) Step 2 2 0 8) 'and via the network point device 2 1 0 9 to the messenger server 2122 (step 22 09) 〇 &quot; the messenger server 2 managed by the communication company Y 1 22 Calculate the usage fee of the IP network 2102 managed by the communication company γ. From the information including the content of the ip packet received before, a p packet containing the report item to the newspaper A is formed, and the formed IP packet is transmitted. To the terminal 2123 of the A newspaper (step 2210). Here, the IP packet arrives at the terminal 21 23 via the branch point device 2 1 1 0, the router 2 11 5- 10, and the branch point device 2111. Newspaper A receives the IP packet and confirms the delivery of the IP packet, which depends on the newsletter Y of the communication company. When a multicast Q service is implemented, it can also be implemented by the same method as described above. &lt; &lt; Authentication Procedures &gt;> There are various disclosed techniques for the authentication procedures of steps 22 to 60, and an example will be described with reference to FIG. 337. The transmission transaction server 2122 and the transmission terminal 2120 store the common function y = f (a, b) and the secret authentication key "?" Internally. The delivery server 2 1 2 2 transmits the information identifying the delivery server 2 1 2 2, ID 21 2 2, to the delivery terminal 2120 (step 2160-1). The sending terminal 2120 receives the information that identifies the sending transaction server 2122 &quot; ID 2122 ,,, and generates random numbers &quot; R ,,, calculates and saves Cl = f (K, R), and transmits the random numbers &quot; R &quot; to The transmission transaction server 2122 (step 2160-2). The transmission transaction server 2122 calculates C2 = f (K, R) using the received "quotation number" R ", the authentication key" K "and the function" f ", and transmits C2" to the transmission terminal 212 (step 216〇-3). The sending terminal checks whether the “c 1” generated and saved is consistent with the received “C 2”, if it is the same, “Since it can be confirmed that the sending transaction server 2 丨 2 2 keeps the regular The authentication key K 'can therefore authenticate the transmission transaction server 21 to 22 as a regular transmission transaction

第292頁 1245997 五、發明說明(289) 伺服器。 &lt;&lt;變化〉〉 參照圖3 3 8加以說明,I p轉送網2丨〇 〇 —丨的内部設置通 仏公司X的官理範圍2101-1與通信公司γ的管理範圍21〇2 μ 、網點裝置 2104-1、2105-1、2107-1 至 2114- 1、路由器 2230及2 232、位址管理模組2231及2233、路由器2115—j至 2115-11、路由器 2116。網點裝置 2104 -1、2105-1、Page 292 1245997 V. Description of the invention (289) Server. &lt; &lt; Changes &gt;> With reference to Fig. 3 38, the internal setting of the IP transfer network 2 丨 〇〇— 丨 is set by the official scope of the company X 2101-1 and the management scope of the communication company 2201 μ Network branch devices 2104-1, 2105-1, 2107-1 to 2114- 1, routers 2230 and 2 232, address management modules 2231 and 2233, routers 2115-j to 2115-11, and router 2116. Outlet device 2104 -1, 2105-1,

2107-1至2114-1·係全部不具有Ιρ膠囊化與逆膠囊化的機能 之裝置’其具體的内部構成與在其他實施例中說明相同。 路由器2230與位址管理模組2231係以電路接續,路由器 2230與位址管理模組223 1係變成一體並實現與網點裝置同 樣的機能。同樣地,路由器2 2 3 2與位址管理模組2 2 3 3係以 電路接續,變成一體並實現與網點裝置同樣的機能。由上 述,可實施與使用圖335至圖336說明的多點發送服務同樣 的多點發送服務。 從提供多點發送服務的Α報社之終端2123,將電子報 IP封包傳送給送信事務伺服器21 18及2122,送信事務伺服 器2118及2122可將前述接收到的電子報ip封包經由”轉送 網21 01-1及2 102-1,透過多點發送技術配送給受信終端 2124至2133。前述配信的結果被報告至送信事務伺服器 ❶ 2118及2122,可對前述受信終端2124至2133收費。 再者,IP轉送網21 5 2及2153不必要為多點發送專用的 I P轉送網,共用其他實施例說明的用於I p電話或資料轉 送、聲音影像轉送的IP轉送,也可實施前面說明的多點發All of 2107-1 to 2114-1 are devices that do not have the functions of Ip encapsulation and reverse encapsulation. The specific internal structure is the same as that described in the other embodiments. The router 2230 and the address management module 2231 are connected by a circuit. The router 2230 and the address management module 223 1 are integrated into one unit and realize the same function as the network point device. Similarly, the router 2 2 3 2 and the address management module 2 2 3 3 are connected by a circuit, and become a whole and realize the same function as the network point device. From the above, a multicast service similar to the multicast service described with reference to FIGS. 335 to 336 can be implemented. From the terminal 2123 of the A newspaper company that provides the multicast service, the e-mail IP packets are transmitted to the delivery transaction servers 21 18 and 2122. The delivery transaction servers 2118 and 2122 can pass the aforementioned received e-mail IP packets through the "transmission network 21 01-1 and 2 102-1 are distributed to the trusted terminals 2124 to 2133 through the multicast technology. The results of the aforementioned distribution are reported to the delivery transaction server 2118 and 2122, and the aforementioned trusted terminals 2124 to 2133 can be charged. Or, the IP forwarding network 21 5 2 and 2153 need not be dedicated IP forwarding networks for multicast transmission, and share the IP forwarding for IP phone or data forwarding, audio and video forwarding described in the other embodiments, or implement the previously described Send more

1245997 五、發明說明(290) 送服務。 &lt;〈位址管理表或路徑表的設定〉〉 通信公司X的管理範圍2101及通信公司γ的管理 2102内部的網點裝置内部的位址管理表或路由器的路 點發送服務,設定個別的位址管:表 或路由益的路徑表(多點發送樹狀結構的設定), J過其他實施例說明的方法。並且,透過增減多點發送服 務使用者,變更多點發送樹狀結構是透過停止多點發 Ϊΐί ’ Ϊ放多點發送樹狀結構等在其他實施例中說明的 技術亦可適用於本實施例。 &amp; /3刃 &lt;〈總結〉〉 透過以上所述的方法,複數個多點發送服務係 :$數個?信公司的ΙΡ轉送網之ιρ轉送網加以實施。多點 將多點菸、”二* 通仏公司’代理收費業務。 貝Λ 通信公司x管理的送信事務飼服器 二送;二二彳S i。的送信事務飼服器,前述通信公司X管理 的达4事務伺服器係經由通信 發送資料配送至接續於诵广八…二V、^,將夕點 個故她Η接^ κ於通仏公司x管理的IP轉送網之複數 通传公司γ&quot;爲理的,終端,將多點發送資料配送至接續於 信么:司Y管:的心網之複數個終端。通信公司X或通 務代理祠服山轉送、、祠内的配送結果係經由多點發送服 。 通信公司x或通信公司丫的送信事務伺服1245997 V. Description of Invention (290) Delivery service. &lt; <Setting of Address Management Table or Path Table >> The management range 2101 of the communication company X and the management 2102 of the communication company γ The internal address management table or router waypoint transmission service inside the network device sets individual bits Address management: table or routing table of routing benefits (setting of multicast tree structure), the method described in other embodiments. In addition, the technology described in other embodiments, such as increasing the number of multicast service users, changing more multicast tree structures, or stopping multicast, can be applied to this implementation. example. &amp; / 3 blades &lt; <Summary >> By the method described above, a plurality of multicast service: $? Implementation of the IP forwarding network of the letter company. Multi-point multi-point cigarettes, "two * communication company's agent fee business. Bei Λ communication company x's delivery service feeder two send; 22 two S i.'S delivery service feeder, the aforementioned communication company X manages The Da 4 transaction server sends data through communication and sends it to the continuous broadcast… two V, ^, and will pick up a reason why she will receive ^ κ on the IP forwarding network of the multi-pass company γ & quot For a reason, the terminal will send the multicast data to the following terminals: Department Y tube: the multiple terminals of the heart network. The communication company X or the general agent forwards the service to the temple, and the distribution results are within the temple. Delivery service via multi-point. Communication company x or communication company's delivery service server

1245997 五、發明說明(291) 發明之效果 使用IP轉送網的終端間通信接續控制方法與裝置透過 將多媒體終端,也就是具有Ip通信機能的個人電腦等的Ip 終端I P電》舌機或I p聲音影像裝置接續至統合 送網的 網點裝置、閑道或媒體路由器之任一個以上,可進行用於 使用IP轉送網的終端通信的終端通信接續控制。在此’媒 體路由器設置於統合Ip轉送網的外部,經由統合IP轉送 :稱使端識別用的電話號碼等所構成的主機 名稱,在夕媒體終端間進行情報交換等的相互通信。 用的cm的*媒體路由器上接續具有公眾電話交換網 * 話機,從接續至公眾電話交換網之電話 機,經由統合I p轉送無!拉接τ Α 又換網I电居 行終端間通信。又,單:,動的電話機’而可進 電子書籍等的= 一多媒體終端成為送信端,可將 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 文為被開不本發明之第丨實施例的媒體路由1245997 V. Description of the invention (291) Effects of the invention The method and device for controlling communication between terminals using an IP transfer network. IP terminals, such as multimedia terminals, that is, personal computers with IP communication functions, etc. The audio and video device is connected to any one or more of the branch point device, idle channel, or media router of the integrated transmission network, and can perform terminal communication connection control for terminal communication using the IP transfer network. Here, the 'media router' is installed outside the integrated IP forwarding network, and forwards the host name made up of a telephone number for identification, such as a telephone number for identification, through the integrated IP, and performs mutual communication such as information exchange between the media terminals. The used cm media router is connected to the public telephone exchange network * telephone, and the telephone connected to the public telephone exchange network is forwarded through the integrated IP p! Pulling τ Α and changing the network I, the communication between the terminals. In addition, a single: a mobile phone can access electronic books, etc. = a multimedia terminal becomes a sender, and can be 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd is the media routing of the first embodiment of the present invention

第295頁 1245997 五、發明說明(292) 器之機能或被開示本發明之第2實施例的閘道之機能的補 助圖。 圖5係用以說明本發明之第1實施例、第2實施例的媒 體路由器或閘道機能的I P封包之1個型態的說明圖。 圖6係模式地表示本發明之第1實施例的媒體路由器之 構成,說明此媒體路由器之動作的程序之補助圖。 圖7係模式地表示本發明之第1實施例的媒體路由器之 構成,說明此媒體路由器之動作的程序之補助圖。 圖8係說明本發明之第1實施例的網點裝置内部的位址 管理表的圖式。 圖9係說明出現在2個IP終端間通信的I p封包之型態的 圖式。 圖1 0係說明出現在2個I P終端間通信的IP封包之型態 的圖式。 圖11係說明出現在2個I p終端間通信的I p封包之型態 的圖式。 圖1 2係說明出現在2個I P終端間通信的I p封包之型態 的圖式。 圖1 3係說明出現在2個I p電話機間通信的I p封包之型 態的圖式。 圖1 4係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的I P封包之型 態的圖式。 圖1 5係說明出現在2個I p電話機間通信的I p封包之型態 的圖式。Page 295 1245997 V. Description of the invention (292) The supplementary diagram of the function of the device or the function of the gateway of the second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 5 is a diagram for explaining one type of IP packet of the media router or gateway function of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 6 is a supplementary diagram schematically showing the configuration of the media router according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and explaining the operation of the media router. Fig. 7 is a supplementary diagram schematically showing the configuration of the media router according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and a procedure for explaining the operation of the media router. Fig. 8 is a diagram illustrating an address management table inside the network device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a type of IP packet appearing for communication between two IP terminals. Fig. 10 is a diagram illustrating a type of an IP packet appearing in communication between two IP terminals. Fig. 11 is a diagram illustrating a type of IP packet appearing in communication between two IP terminals. Fig. 12 is a diagram illustrating the types of IP packets appearing in communication between two IP terminals. Fig. 13 is a diagram illustrating the types of IP packets appearing for communication between two IP telephones. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 15 is a diagram illustrating a type of IP packet appearing in communication between two IP telephones.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第296頁 1245997 五、發明說明(293) 圖1 6係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的ιρ封包之型 態的圖式。 圖1 7係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的丨p封包之型 態的圖式。 圖1 8係說明出現在2個I p電話機間通信的丨p封包之型 態的圖式。 圖19係說明出現在2個^電話機間通信的1?封包之型態 的圖式。 Λ « 圖2 0係說明出現在2個I ρ電話機間通信的丨ρ封包之型 態的圖式。 圖2 1係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的I ρ封包之型 態的圖式。 圖2 2係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的I ρ封包之型 態的圖式。 圖2 3係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的I ρ封包之型 態的圖式。 圖2 4係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的I ρ封包之型 態的圖式。 圖2 5係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的I ρ封包之型 態的圖式。 ° 圖2 6係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的I ρ封包之型 態的圖式。 圖2 7係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的I ρ封包之型 態的圖式。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 296 1245997 V. Description of the Invention (293) Figure 16 is a diagram illustrating the type of ιρ packet that appears between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 17 is a diagram illustrating a type of p packet appearing in communication between two IP telephones. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a type of a p-packet appearing in communication between two IP phones. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a type of a 1 packet which appears in communication between two telephones. Λ «Fig. 20 is a diagram illustrating a type of a ρ packet that appears in communication between two I ρ telephones. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a type of an I p packet that appears in communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 22 is a diagram illustrating a type of an Ip packet appearing to communicate between two IP telephones. Figures 23 and 3 are diagrams illustrating the types of IP packets appearing in communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 24 is a diagram illustrating the types of Ip packets appearing in communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 25 is a diagram illustrating the types of Ip packets appearing in communication between two IP telephones. ° Figure 26 is a diagram illustrating the type of I ρ packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 27 is a diagram illustrating the types of Ip packets appearing in communication between two IP telephones.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第297頁 12459972049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 297 1245997

話機間通信的I P封包之型 圖2 8係說明出現在2個I P電 態的圖式。 圖29係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的ιρ封包之型 圖式。 圖3 0係表不媒體路由器内部之媒體路由器狀態表的例 圖31係表示獨立型IP電話機之概念構成的方塊圖。 圖32係表示獨立型IP聲音影像裝置之概念構成的方塊 圖。 圖3 3係說明出現在2個丨p電話機間通信的丨p封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖34係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的ip封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖35係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的ιρ封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖36係說明出現在2個ιρ電話機間通信的ιρ封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖37係說明出現在2個ip電話機間通信的ip封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖38係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的IP封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖3 9係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的IP封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 @ 4 0係、說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的IP封包之其Types of IP packets for inter-phone communication Figure 28 illustrates the appearance of two IP states. Fig. 29 is a diagram illustrating the type of ιρ packet appearing for communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 3 is an example of a media router status table showing the inside of the media router. Fig. 31 is a block diagram showing the conceptual configuration of an independent IP telephone. Fig. 32 is a block diagram showing the conceptual configuration of a stand-alone IP audiovisual device. Fig. 3 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of p packets that appear between two p telephones for communication. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of ip packets that appear in communication between two IP telephones. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the ιρ packet that appears to communicate between two IP telephones. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the ιρ packet that appears to communicate between two ιρ telephones. Fig. 37 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of an ip packet appearing to communicate between two ip telephones. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Figure 39 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. @ 4 0 系 , Describes the other IP packets that appear in the communication between 2 IP phones

2049.3793-PF;RAY.ptd 第298頁 12459972049.3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 298 1245997

五、發明說明(295) 他實施型態的圖式。 圖4 1係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的1 P封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖4 2係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的1 P封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖4 3係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的1 P封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖44係說明洎現在2個I P電話機間通信的1 P封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖4 5係說明出現在2個I p電話機間通信的I P封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖46係說明出現在2個I p電話機間通信的IP封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖4 7係說明出現在2個I p電話機間通信的I p封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖4 8係說明在本發明之第1實施例中,出現在2個I p谭 話機間通信的Ϊ P封包之其他實施型態的圖式。V. Description of the invention (295) Scheme of his implementation. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the IP packet that appears between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 4 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the IP packet that appears between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 4 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of 1 P packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 44 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the 1 P packet for communication between two IP telephones. Figures 4 and 5 are diagrams illustrating other implementations of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Figure 46 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Figures 4 and 7 are diagrams illustrating other implementations of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 48 is a diagram illustrating another implementation type of the ΪP packet that appears in the communication between two IP phones in the first embodiment of the present invention.

圖49係說明在本發明之第i實施例中,出現在2個1?售 話機間通信的IP封包之其他實施型態的圖式。 ^ da 〇係用以說明在本發明之第1實施例中媒體路由器 的RAS管理的模式圖。 圖5 1係模式地表开·太1 .η也% L θ 本發明之第2實施例的閘道之構 圖C从主—乍的孝王序之補助圖0 圖5 Ζ係模式地表不本路 不發明之第2實施例的閘道之構Fig. 49 is a diagram illustrating another implementation mode of an IP packet appearing in communication between two 1-phones in the i-th embodiment of the present invention. ^ da 〇 is a diagram for explaining the RAS management of the media router in the first embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 5 The surface of the 1-series model is too large. Η is also%. Structure of the gateway of the second embodiment of the invention

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第299頁 1245997 五、發明說明(296) 成’同時說明此閘道之動作的程序之補助圖。 圖5 3係δ兒明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的I p封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖5 4係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的I ρ封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 〃 圖5 5係說明出現在2個I Ρ電話機間通信的丨ρ封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖56係說明在本發明之第2實施例中,出現在2個IP電 話機間通信的IP封包之其他實施型態的圖式。 圖5 7係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的I ρ封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖5 8係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的I ρ封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖59係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的IP封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖6 0係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的IP封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 Φ 圖6 1係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的I P封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖62係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的IP封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖63係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的IP封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖64係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的IP封包之其2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 299 1245997 V. Description of the invention (296) A subsidy chart that describes the procedures of the operation of this gateway at the same time. Fig. 5 is a diagram of other implementation types of IP packets that δ Erming appears in the communication between two IP telephones. Fig. 5 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of Ip packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. 〃 Figure 5 5 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of ρ packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Fig. 56 is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of an IP packet that appears in communication between two IP telephones in the second embodiment of the present invention. Figures 5 and 7 are diagrams illustrating other implementations of Ip packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of I ρ packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Φ Figure 1 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. Figure 64 illustrates other types of IP packets that appear in communication between two IP phones.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第300頁 1245997 五、發明說明(297) 他實施型態的圖式。 圖6 5係說明出現在2個I P電話機間通信的I p封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖6 6係說明出現在2個I p電話機間通信的〗p封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖67係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的ιρ封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖68係說明出現在2個IP電話機間通信的ιρ封包之其 他實施型態的圖式。 圖69係說明本發明之第2實施例之網點裝置内部的其 他位址管理表的圖式。 圖7 0係在本發明之第2實施例中閘道狀態表的記載 例0 圖71係在本發明之第3實施例中實裝於CATV系統内部 的媒體路由器之構成的模式圖。 圖7 2係說明在本發明之第4實施例中接續使用終端收 容無線裝置與閘道裝置的各種終端之方法的圖式。 圖7 3係表示本發明之第5實施例中閘道之構成例的方 塊圖。 圖7 4係表示在本發明之第6實施例中使用電話通信控 制伺服器時的構成例之方塊圖。 圖7 5係用以說明本發明之第6實施例的流程圖。 圖7 6係用以說明本發明之第6實施例的圖式。 圖7 7係用以說明本發明之第6實施例的圖式。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 300 1245997 V. Description of the invention (297) Schematic diagram of his implementation. Fig. 65 is a diagram illustrating other implementation types of IP packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the p-packets that appear in communication between two IP phones. Fig. 67 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of ιρ packets that appear between two IP telephones for communication. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating other implementations of the ιρ packet that appears to communicate between two IP telephones. Fig. 69 is a diagram illustrating another address management table inside the branch point device according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 70 is a schematic diagram of the gateway state table in the second embodiment of the present invention. Example 0 Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a media router implemented in the CATV system in the third embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 72 is a diagram illustrating a method of successively using various terminals to accommodate wireless terminals and gateway devices in the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 73 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a gateway in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 74 is a block diagram showing a configuration example when a telephone communication control server is used in the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 75 is a flowchart for explaining a sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 76 is a diagram for explaining a sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 7 is a diagram for explaining a sixth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第301頁 1245997 五、發明說明(298) 圖7 8係用 圖7 9係用 圖8 0係用 圖81係用 圖82係用 圖8 3係用 圖84係用 圖8 5係用 圖8 6係用 圖8 7係用 圖8 8係用 圖8 9係用 圖9 0係用 程圖。 圖9 1係用 司)的圖式。 圖9 2係用 圖9 3係用 圖94係表 式。 圖95係表 之圖式。 圖96係表 例的方塊圖。 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以λ說》明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 以說明本發 示電話號碼 明之第6實施例的流程圖。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的流程圖。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例的圖式。 明之第6實施例(釋放階段)的流 以說明本發明之第6實施例(通信公司為1公 明之第6實施例的流程圖。 明之第6實施例的流程圖。 之通信公司區分表的例子之圖 不電話號碼之電話管理伺服器區分表的例子 示本發明之第7實施例之媒體路由器的構造 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第302頁 1245997 五、發明說明(299) 圖9 7係用以說明本發明之第7實施例的圖式。 圖9 8係表示本發明之第$實施例的構造之方塊圖。 圖9 9係表示本發明之第8實施例的動作例的流程圖。 圖1 0 0係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖1 〇 1係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖1 0 2係表示本發明之第8實施例的動作例的流程圖 圖1 〇 3係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖1 0 4係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖1 0 5係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖1 0 6係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖1 0 7係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖1 0 8係用以說明本發明之第6實施例的圖式。 圖1 09係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖11 0係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖111係用以說明本發明之第8實施例(媒體路由器的 其他例)的圖式。 圖11 2係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖11 3係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖114係用以說明本發明之第8實施例的圖式。 圖11 5係表示媒體路由器内部之一部與被接續至此的 IP終端或LAN的接續狀態的模式圖。 圖11 6係表示發信優先度控制管理表的例子之圖式。 圖11 7係表不發彳5優先度控制管理表的例子之圖式。 圖11 8係用以說明本發明之第9實施例的圖式。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 301 1245997 V. Description of the invention (298) Figure 7 for 8 series Figure 7 for 9 series Figure 8 for 0 series Figure 81 for series 81 Figure 82 for series 8 Figure for 84 series Figure 8 is used in Figure 5 Figure 8 is used in Figure 6 Figure 8 is used in Figure 7 Figure 8 is used in Figure 8 Figure 8 is used in Figure 9 Figure 9 is used in Process Chart. Figure 9 is a diagram of the Division 1). Figure 9 for 2 series Figure 9 for 3 series Figure 94 series. Figure 95 is a diagram of a table. Figure 96 is a block diagram of an example. To explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair to explain the hair This is a flowchart illustrating the sixth embodiment of the present invention to explain the present phone number. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. The flowchart of the sixth embodiment. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. Illustration of the sixth embodiment of the invention. The flow of the sixth embodiment (release stage) of the Ming Dynasty is to explain the flowchart of the sixth embodiment of the present invention (the communication company is the first embodiment of the 6th embodiment of the invention. The flowchart of the sixth embodiment of the next embodiment. Figure of the example The example of the telephone management server classification table without a phone number shows the structure of the media router 2049-3793-PF of the seventh embodiment of the present invention; RAY.ptd page 302 1245997 V. Description of the invention (299) Figure 9 7 is a diagram for explaining a seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the structure of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an operation example of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Flow chart. Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 102 is a diagram showing the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Flow chart of an operation example of the eighth embodiment. Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 104 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 0 5 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. 8 embodiment diagram. Fig. 107 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 108 is a diagram for explaining the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 is for 09 The diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 111 is for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention (another example of a media router) ). Fig. 11 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 11 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 114 is a diagram for explaining the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Illustration of the eighth embodiment. Fig. 115 is a schematic diagram showing a connection state between a part inside the media router and the IP terminal or LAN connected thereto. Fig. 116 is an example of a transmission priority control management table. Figure 11. Figure 7 is a diagram showing an example of a 5 priority control management table. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第 303 頁2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd p. 303

1245997 五、發明說明(300) 圖1 1 9係表示本發明之第9實施例的構成的方塊圖。 圖1 20係說明本發明之第9實施例的動作例之流程圖 圖1 2 1係用以說明本發明之第9實施例的圖式。 圖1 2 2係用以說明本發明之第9實施例的圖式。 圖1 2 3係用以說明本發明之第9實施例的圖式。 圖1 2 4係用以說明本發明之第9實施例的圖式。 圖1 2 5係用以說明本發明之第9實施例的圖式。 圖1 26係用枣說明本發明之第9實施例的圖式。 圖1 2 7係用以說明本發明之第9實施例的圖式。 圖1 28表示本發明之第1 〇實施例的構成的方塊圖。 圖1 29係說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的動作例之流程 圖1 3 0係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 31係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 3 2係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 3 3係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 3 4係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 3 5係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 3 6係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 3 7係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 3 8係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 3 9係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖140係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 41係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。1245997 V. Description of the invention (300) Fig. 1 9 is a block diagram showing the structure of a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of operation of the ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a diagram for explaining the ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 2 3 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 26 is a diagram illustrating a ninth embodiment of the present invention using dates. Fig. 1 2 7 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 28 is a block diagram showing the structure of a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 29 is a flowchart for explaining an operation example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 130 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 31 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 34 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 136 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 37 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 38 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 39 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第304頁 1245997 五、發明說明(301) 圖1 42係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 43係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 44係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 45係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 4 6係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 4 7係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 48係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 49係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 5 0係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 51係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 5 2係用以說明本發明之第1 0實施例的圖式。 圖1 5 3係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 54係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 5 5係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 5 6係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 5 7係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 5 8係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 5 9係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 60係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 61係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 6 2係說明本發明之第1 0實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 6 3係說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的動作例之流程 圖0 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第305頁 1245997 五、發明說明(302) 圖164係說明本發明之第1〇實施例的動作例(TCp—IAM) 之流程圖。 圖1 6 5係說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的動作例(τ c p _ a C Μ) 之流程圖。 圖1 6 6係說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的動作例(τ c p _ c P G) 之流程圖。 圖1 6 7係說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的動作例(τ c ρ — a Ν Μ) 之流程圖。 Λ 圖1 68係說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的動作例(tcp-rEL) 之流程圖。 圖1 69係說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的動作例(tcp-RLC) 之流程圖。 圖1 7 0係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 71係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 7 2係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 7 3係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 74係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 7 5係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 76係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 7 7係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 78係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 79係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 8 0係用以說明本發明之第1 〇實施例的圖式。 圖1 81係表示本發明之第11實施例的構成的方塊圖。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 304 1245997 V. Description of the invention (301) Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 14.6 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 47 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 54 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 156 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 158 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the 10th embodiment of the present invention. 0 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 305 1245997 V. Description of the invention (302) Figure 164 shows the first of the invention 〇 Flow chart of the operation example (TCp-IAM) of the embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (τ c p _ a C M) of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (τ c p _ c P G) of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 167 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (τ c ρ-a NM) of the 10th embodiment of the present invention. Λ FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (tcp-rEL) of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example (tcp-RLC) of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 74 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 76 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 181 is a block diagram showing the structure of an eleventh embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第306頁 1245997 五、發明說明(303) 圖1 82係說明本發明之第1 1實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 83係說明本發明之第11實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 8 4係說明本發明之第11實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 8 5係表示本發明之第1 2實施例的構成的方塊圖。 圖1 86係用以說明本發明之第1 2實施例的圖式。 圖1 87係用以說明本發明之第1 2實施例的圖式。 圖1 88係說明本發明之第1 2實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 89係說明本發明之第1 2實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 90係說明本發明之第1 2實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 9 1係說明本發明之第1 2實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 92係說明本發明之第1 2實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 93係說明本發明之第1 2實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 94係說明本發明之第1 2實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 95係用以說明本發明之第1 2實施例的圖式。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 306 1245997 V. Description of the invention (303) Fig. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 183 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 185 is a block diagram showing the structure of a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 86 is a diagram for explaining a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 87 is a diagram for explaining a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 89 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 90 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 192 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 193 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 1 94 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 195 is a diagram for explaining a twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第 307 頁 1245997 五、發明說明(304) 圖1 9 6係用以說明本發明之第丨2實施例的圖式。 圖1 9 7係表示本發明之第丨3實施例的構成的方塊圖 圖1 9 8係說明本發明之第1 3實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖1 9 9係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 0 0係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 0 1係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖202係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖2 0 3係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖204係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖205係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖206係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖207係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖2 08係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 0 9係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖21 0係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖211係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖21 2係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 1 3係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 1 4係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖21 5係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖21 6係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖21 7係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖21 8係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 307 1245997 V. Description of the invention (304) Figure 196 is a diagram for explaining the second embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 197 is a block diagram showing the structure of the third embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 198 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 0 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a 13th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 204 is a diagram for explaining a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 205 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 206 is a diagram for explaining a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 20 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 13 is a diagram for explaining a 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第308頁 1245997 五、發明說明(305) 圖2 1 9係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 2 0係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 2 1係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 2 2係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 2 3係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖224係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖2 2 5係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖226係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖227係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖228係用以說明本發明之第13實施例的圖式。 圖2 2 9係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 3 0係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 31係用以說明本發明之第1 3實施例的圖式。 圖2 3 2係表示本發明之第1 4實施例的方塊構成圖。 圖2 33係說明本發明之第1 4實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖234係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖2 3 5係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖236係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖237係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖238係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖2 39係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖240係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖241係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 308 1245997 V. Description of the invention (305) Figure 2 1 9 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the invention. FIG. 2 0 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 21 is a diagram for explaining a 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 22 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 2 3 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 224 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 25 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 227 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 228 is a diagram for explaining the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 29 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 30 is a diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. 2 to 31 are diagrams for explaining the 13th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 3 2 is a block diagram showing a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of operation of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 234 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 35 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 236 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 238 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 39 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 240 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第309頁 1245997 五、發明說明(306) 圖2 4 2係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖2 4 3係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖2 44係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖245係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖2 4 6係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖247係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖2 4 8係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖2 4 9係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖2 5 0係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖25 1係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖2 5 2係用以說明本發明之第1 4實施例的圖式。 圖2 5 3係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖254係用以說明本發明之第Η實施例的圖式。 圖2 5 5係用以說明本發明之第14實施例的圖式。 圖2 5 6係説明本發明之第1 4實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖257係説明本發明之第14實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖2 58係説明本發明之第14實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖2 5 9係説明本發明之第1 4實施例的動作例之流程 圖。 圖2 6 0係表示本發明之第1 5實施例的方塊構成圖。 圖261係説明本發明之第15實施例的動作例之流程2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 309 1245997 V. Description of the invention (306) Figure 2 42 is a diagram for explaining the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figures 2 to 3 are diagrams for explaining the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 24 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 245 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. 2 to 6 are diagrams for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 247 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figures 2 to 8 are diagrams for explaining the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. 2 to 9 are diagrams for explaining the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 50 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 25 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 53 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 254 is a diagram for explaining a first embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 25 is a diagram for explaining a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 25.6 is a flowchart showing an operation example of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 257 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 58 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figs. 2 to 5 are flowcharts for explaining an operation example of the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 60 is a block diagram showing a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 261 is a flowchart for explaining an operation example of the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第310頁 1245997 五、發明說明(307) 圖。 圖2 6 2係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 6 3係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖264係用以說明本發明之第15實施例的圖式。 圖2 6 5係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 6 6係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 6 7係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 68係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 6 9係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 7 0係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 7 1係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖272係用以說明本發明之第15實施例的圖式。 圖2 73係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖274係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 7 5係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 7 6係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖277係用以說明本發明之第15實施例的圖式。 圖2 78係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 79係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖280係用以說明本發明之第15實施例的圖式。 圖281係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖282係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 83係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 84係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 310 1245997 5. Description of the invention (307) Figure. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figures 2 to 6 are diagrams for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 264 is a diagram for explaining a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 65 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 6 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 6 7 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 68 is a diagram for explaining a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figures 2 to 6 are diagrams for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 70 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27.1 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 272 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 73 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 274 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27.5 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27.6 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 277 is a diagram for explaining a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 78 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 79 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 280 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 281 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 282 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 83 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 84 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第311頁 1245997 五、發明說明(308) 圖285係用以說明本發明之第15實施例的圖式。 圖2 8 6係用以說明本發明之第丨5實施例的圖式。 圖2 8 7係用以說明本發明之第1 5實施例的圖式。 圖2 8 8係表示本發明之第丨6實施例的方塊構成圖。 圖2 8 9係說明本發明之第1 6實施例的動作例之流程 圖0 圖2 9 0係用以說明本發明之第1 6實施例的圖式。 圖2 91係用g說明本發明之第1 6實施例的圖式。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 311 1245997 V. Description of the invention (308) Figure 285 is a diagram for explaining the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 28.6 is a diagram for explaining a fifth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 7 is a diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 28 is a block diagram showing a sixth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 8 9 is a flowchart for explaining an operation example of the 16th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 0 Fig. 2 9 0 is a diagram for explaining the 16th embodiment of the present invention. Figure 2 91 is a diagram illustrating the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention using g.

圖2 9 2係用以說明本發明之第1 6實施例的圖式。 圖293係表示本發明之第17實施例的構成之方塊圖的 一部分。 圖294係表示本發明之第17實施例的構成之方塊圖的 一部分。 圖2 9 5係表示本發明之第1 7實施例的構成之方塊圖的 一部分。 圖296係用以說明本發明之第17實施例的圖式。 圖297係用以說明本發明之第17實施例的圖式。 圖2 9 8係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施例的圖式。Fig. 29 is a diagram for explaining a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 293 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 294 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 295 is a part of a block diagram showing the constitution of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 296 is a diagram for explaining a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 297 is a diagram for explaining a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 98 is a diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment of the present invention.

圖299係用以說明本發明之第17實施例的圖式。 圖3 0 0係説明本發明之第1 7實施例的動作之流程圖。 圖301係用以說明本發明之第17實施例的圖式。 圖302係用以說明本發明之第17實施例的圖式。 圖303係用以說明本發明之第17實施例的圖式。 圖3 04係用以說明本發明之第17實施例的圖式。FIG. 299 is a diagram for explaining the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 0 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 301 is a diagram for explaining the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 30 is a diagram for explaining a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第312頁2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 312

1245997 五、發明說明(309) 圖3 〇 5係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖3 0 6係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖3 0 7係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖3 0 8係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖3 0 9係說明本發明之第1 7實施例中 圖式之一部分。 圖31 〇係說明本發明之第1 7實施例中 圖式之一部分。 圖311係說明本發明之第1 7實施例中 圖式之一部分。 圖31 2係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖31 3係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖314係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖31 5係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖3 1 6係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖31 7係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖31 8係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖31 9係用以說明本發明之第1 7實施 圖320係用以說明本發明之第17實施 圖321係表示本發明之第1 8實施例的 一部分。 圖322係表示本發明之第18實施例的 一部分。 圖323係表示本發明之第18實施例的 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 之位址管理表的 之位址管理表的 之位址管理表的 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 例的圖式。 構成之方塊圖的 構成之方塊圖的 構成之方塊圖的 2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第313頁 1245997 五、發明說明(310) 一部分。 圖3 2 4係表承本發明之第1 8實施例的構成之方塊圖的 一部分。 圖3 2 5係説明本發明之第1 8實施例的動作之流程圖。 圖3 2 6係説明本發明之第1 8實施例的動作之流程圖。 圖3 2 7係用以說明本發明之第1 8實施例的圖式。 圖3 2 8係用以說明本發明之第1 8實施例的圖式。 圖3 2 9係用埒說明本發明之第1 8實施例的圖式。 圖3 3 0係表示本發明之第1 9實施例的構成之方塊圖的 一^部分。 圖3 31係表示本發明之第1 9實施例的構成之方塊圖的 一部分。 圖3 3 2係表示本發明之第1 9實施例的構成之方塊圖的 一部分。 圖333係用以說明本發明之第1 9實施例的圖式。 圖334係用以說明本發明之第19實施例的圖式。 圖335係表示本發明之第20實施例的構成之方塊圖。 圖336係說明本發明之第20實施例的動作之流程圖。 圖3 37係用以說明本發明之第20實施例的圖式。 圖338係用以說明本發明之第19實施例的圖式。 圖339係表示統合IP轉送網之概略的方塊圖。 圖340係用以說明交換機與信號網之關係的方塊圖。 圖341係表示No· 7-共通線信號方式的信號單元之一例 的圖式。1245997 V. Description of the invention (309) Figure 3 05 is used to explain the 17th implementation of the present invention. Figure 3 06 is used to explain the 17th implementation of the present invention. Figure 3 0 7 is used to illustrate the first implementation of the present invention Fig. 17 is a diagram for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention. Fig. 3 is a part of the diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 31 is a part of a drawing for explaining the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 311 is a diagram showing part of a drawing in the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 31 2 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention Fig. 31 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention Fig. 314 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention Fig. 31 is for explaining the present invention The 17th implementation of FIG. 3 16 is used to explain the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 31 is the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 31 is the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 31 9 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 320 is for explaining the 17th implementation of the present invention. FIG. 321 is a part showing the 18th embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 322 shows a part of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 323 is a diagram showing an example of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. An example of the address management table of the address management table. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. Example schema. The composition of the block diagram The composition of the block diagram 2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd page 313 1245997 5. Part of the description of the invention (310). Fig. 3 24 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 3 2 5 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 3 2 6 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 2 7 is a diagram for explaining the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 28 is a diagram for explaining the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figs. 3 to 29 are drawings for explaining the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention by using cymbals. Fig. 3 30 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figs. 3 to 31 are part of a block diagram showing the constitution of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 3 32 is a part of a block diagram showing the structure of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 333 is a diagram for explaining a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 334 is a diagram for explaining the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 335 is a block diagram showing the structure of a twentieth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 336 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 37 is a diagram for explaining a twentieth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 338 is a diagram for explaining a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. Figure 339 is a block diagram showing the outline of an integrated IP forwarding network. Figure 340 is a block diagram illustrating the relationship between a switch and a signal network. Fig. 341 is a diagram showing an example of a signal unit of the No. 7-common line signal method.

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第314頁 1245997 五、發明說明(311) 圖3 42係用以說明交換機與信號網之關係的流程圖。 圖343係用以說明交換機與信號網之關係的流程圖。 圖344係用以說明交換機與信號網之關係的流程圖。 圖345係用以說明交換機與信號網之關係的流程圖。 圖346係表示閘道之基本機能的方塊構成圖。 圖347係表示I P封包内之呼叫控制資料的例子之圖 式。 圖348係表示IP封包内之聲音資料的例子之圖式。 圖349係表示I P封包内之影像資料的例子之圖式。 圖3 5 0係表示統合情報通信網之基本原理的方塊圖。 圖3 5 1係表示統合情報通信網之基本原理的方塊圖。 圖3 5 2係表示統合情報通信網之基本原理的方塊圖。 圖3 53係表示統合情報通信網之基本原理的方塊圖。 圖3 54係表示多點發送IP轉送網之構成例方塊圖。 圖3 5 5係在多點發送I P轉送網中使用的多點發送表的 例子。 圖356係用以說明本發明之圖式。 圖3 5 7係用以說明本發明之圖式。 圖3 5 8係用以說明本發明之圖式。 圖359係用以說明本發明之圖式。 圖3 6 0係用以說明本發明之圖式。 標號之說明 1〜IP轉送網; 1-1、1-2〜終端; 卜3、卜4〜媒體路由器;卜5、1-6〜接續伺服器;2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 314 1245997 V. Description of the invention (311) Figure 3 42 is a flowchart for explaining the relationship between the switch and the signal network. Figure 343 is a flowchart illustrating the relationship between the switch and the signal network. Figure 344 is a flowchart illustrating the relationship between the switch and the signal network. Figure 345 is a flowchart illustrating the relationship between the switch and the signal network. Figure 346 is a block diagram showing the basic functions of the gateway. Figure 347 is a diagram showing an example of call control data in an IP packet. Figure 348 is a diagram showing an example of audio data in an IP packet. Figure 349 is a diagram showing an example of image data in an IP packet. Fig. 3 50 is a block diagram showing the basic principle of the integrated information communication network. Fig. 3 51 is a block diagram showing the basic principle of the integrated information communication network. Fig. 3 52 is a block diagram showing the basic principle of the integrated information communication network. Fig. 53 is a block diagram showing the basic principle of the integrated information communication network. Fig. 3 54 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a multicast IP forwarding network. Fig. 35 is an example of a multicast table used in a multicast IP transfer network. FIG. 356 is a diagram for explaining the present invention. Figures 3 5 and 7 are diagrams for explaining the present invention. Fig. 3 58 is a diagram for explaining the present invention. Figure 359 is a diagram for explaining the present invention. Fig. 3 60 is a diagram for explaining the present invention. Explanation of the symbols 1 ~ IP forwarding network; 1-1, 1-2 ~ terminals; Bu 3, Bu 4 ~ Media router; Bu 5, 1-6 ~ Connection server;

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第315頁 1245997 五、發明說明(312) 1 - 7〜中繼接續伺服器;1 - 1 0〜I P轉送網; 1 - 1 1、1 - 1 2、;1 - 1 3、1 - 1 4 〜網點裝置; 卜1 5至1 - 2 0〜路由器; 2〜統合I P轉送網; 3〜I P資料網; 4〜I P電話網; 5 - 1〜I P聲音影像網; 5 - 2〜盡力而為網; 6 - 1〜通信公司X運用管理的I P轉送網之範圍; 6 - 2〜通信公司Y運用管理的I P轉送網之範圍; 7- 1、7-2、7-3、7-4〜通信公司X運用管理的網點裝 置; 8- 1、8-2、8-3、8~~4〜通信公司Y運用管理的網點裝 置; 9 - 1、9 - 2〜閘道; 10-1〜10-8〜統合IP轉送網1的外部之通信網; 1 1 -1〜1 1 -1 0〜I P終端; 12-1、12-2〜獨立型IP電話機; 12- 3〜獨立型IP聲音影像裝置; 13- 1、13-2、13-3、13-4〜非獨立型IP電話機; 14- 1、14-2、14 - 3、14 - 4 〜媒體路由器; 15- 1 、 15-2〜LAN ; 16- 1、1 6-2、16-3、16-4〜非獨立型聲音影像裝置; 17- 1、17-2、17-3、17-4〜公眾電話電路; 18- 1〜18-8〜類比電話機; 19- 1〜19-19〜具有IP轉送機能的路由器; 20- 1至20-4〜在LAN或媒體路由器内使用的路由器;2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 315 1245997 V. Description of the invention (312) 1-7 ~ relay connection server; 1-1 0 ~ IP transfer network; 1-1 1, 1-1 2 ,; 1-1 3, 1-1 4 ~ outlet equipment; BU 15-1-2 0 ~ router; 2 ~ integrated IP forwarding network; 3 ~ IP data network; 4 ~ IP telephone network; 5-1 ~ IP audio and video Network; 5-2 ~ Best effort network; 6-1 ~ Range of IP forwarding network managed by communication company X; 6-2 ~ Range of IP forwarding network managed by communication company Y; 7-1, 7-2 , 7-3, 7-4 ~ Communication company X operation and management of point devices; 8- 1, 8-2, 8-3, 8 ~ 4 ~ Communication company Y operation and management of point devices; 9-1, 9- 2 ~ Gateway; 10-1 ~ 10-8 ~ Integrated communication network of IP 1 external communication network; 1 1 -1 ~ 1 1 -1 0 ~ IP terminal; 12-1, 12-2 ~ independent IP telephone ; 12- 3 ~ independent IP audio and video device; 13- 1, 13-2, 13-3, 13-4 ~ non-independent IP telephone; 14- 1, 14-2, 14-3, 14-4 ~ Media router; 15-1, 15-2 ~ LAN; 16-1, 16-2, 16-3, 16-4 ~ non-independent audio and video devices; 17 -1, 17-2, 17-3, 17-4 ~ public telephone circuit; 18- 1 ~ 18-8 ~ analog telephone; 19- 1 ~ 19-19 ~ router with IP transfer function; 20- 1 to 20 -4 ~ router used in LAN or media router;

2049-3793-PF ; RAY.ptd 第 316 頁 1245997 五、發明說明(313) 21-1至21-5〜在通信公司之不同的IP轉送網間使用的 路由器; 2 2 - 1、2 2 - 2〜接續控制部; 2 3 - 1、2 3 - 2 〜Η 3 2 3 終端部; 24-1、24-2 〜SCN 介面; 27-1 、 27-2〜ATM 網; 2 7 - 3〜光通信網; 2 7 - 4〜碼框中繼交換網; 3 0-1至3 0-4〜IP資料網專用的網域名稱伺服器; 3 1 - 1、3 1 - 2〜I P電話網專用的網域名稱伺服器; 3 2 - 1、3 2 - 2〜I P聲音影像網專用的網域名稱伺服器; 3 3 - 1、3 3 - 2〜盡力而為網專用的網域名稱伺服器; 35- 1、35-2〜IP資料服務運用管理伺服器(DSS); 36- 1、36-2〜IP電話服務運用管理伺服器(TES); 37- 1、3 7-2〜IP聲音影像服務運用管理伺服器(AVS); 3 8 - 1、3 8 -2〜盡力而為服務運用管理伺服器(BE S); 4 8 _ 1、7 8 - 1〜網域名稱伺服器。2049-3793-PF; RAY.ptd Page 316 1245997 V. Description of the invention (313) 21-1 to 21-5 ~ routers used between different IP forwarding networks of communication companies; 2 2-1, 2 2- 2 ~ connection control unit; 2 3-1, 2 3-2 ~ Η 3 2 3 terminal unit; 24-1, 24-2 ~ SCN interface; 27-1, 27-2 ~ ATM network; 2 7-3 ~ Optical communication network; 2 7-4 ~ code frame relay switching network; 3 0-1 to 3 0-4 ~ domain name server dedicated to IP data network; 3 1-1, 3 1-2 ~ IP telephone network Dedicated domain name server; 3 2-1, 3 2-2 ~ IP audio and video network dedicated domain name server; 3 3-1, 3 3-2 ~ best effort dedicated network domain name server Server; 35- 1, 35-2 ~ IP data service operation management server (DSS); 36- 1, 36-2 ~ IP phone service operation management server (TES); 37- 1, 3 7-2 ~ IP Audio and video service operation management server (AVS); 3 8-1, 3 8-2 ~ best effort service operation management server (BE S); 4 8 _ 1, 7 8-1 ~ domain name server.

2049-3793-PF : RAY.ptd 第317頁2049-3793-PF: RAY.ptd Page 317

Claims (1)

,90105465__% ”、申請專利範圍 曰 L 一種網際網路協定(I p)通信系統,其包含 和祠:ϋ際網路協定(IP)轉送網,包含至少兩個網點裝置 =裔,其特徵在於: 別述網點裝置和伺服器係透過前述網際網路協 網内部之線路,連接至一目的網點裝置和一目的(飼服 成内ΐ Ϊ網點裝置包含根據外部網際網路協Ip)封包形 際網:;:ϊ(:=ί(ΙΡ)封包之功能以及根據前述内部網 之功能· u)封包還原前述外部網際網路協定(IP)封包 =述網點裝置連接至少一媒體路由器; 月J述媒體路由器連拉$ ^ iOi _;, :彳Si網際網路協以Μ)封包之方a,與前= 定(ιρ) ί ί Ξ: ί::: J Π::用在前述網際網路協 方式丄:前述目的網=:::==封包的 刖述網際網路協t f 、、, ^ 1口 ’ 系統的終端間通信接續控制方:網:7共同通道信號 道信號系統之呼叫控制I 二1么包含No. 7共同通 封包,執行一玖端η δ = ί的珂述内部網際網路協定(IP) 灯〜^間通信接續控制。 2·如申請專利範圍 信系統,其中係省略位址結束訊息/罔際網路協定πρ)通 3·士申明專^圍第所述之網際網路協定(IP)通 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第318頁 1245997"90105465 __%", the scope of patent application is L. An Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, which includes a network and a temple: an Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which includes at least two network devices. : The network device and the server are connected to a destination network device and a destination (feeding into an internal network). The network device contains a packet-shaped packet based on the internal Internet protocol network. Network:;: ϊ (: = ί (ΙΡ) packet function and restore the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (IP) packet according to the function of the aforementioned internal network u) The packet = the network device is connected to at least one media router; Media Router $ ^ iOi _ ;,: 彳 Si Internet Network Association (M) packet side a, and before = 定 (ιρ) ί Ξ: ::: J Π :: used in the aforementioned Internet Cooperative method: The aforementioned destination network = ::: == Description of the packet Internet protocol tf ,,,, ^ 1 port 'Inter-terminal communication connection control system: Net: 7 common channel signal channel signal system call control I 2 1 does not contain No. 7 common packet, executes one end η δ = ί the internal control of the Internet Protocol (IP) lights ~ ^ communication connection control. 2. If the patent application scope letter system, where the end of the address message / Internet Protocol πρ) communication 3 statement The Internet Protocol (IP) protocol described in section 2049-3793-PF4.ptc, page 318, 1245997 曰 ^^MK 9Q1Q546B 六、申請專利範圍 終端間的 定(IP)通 發包含電 的通信接 定(IP)通 發包含呼 端間的通 定(I P)通 端間通信 定(IP)通 端間通信 址 0 定(IP)通 過做為 連接至少 音資料的網際網路協定(IP)封勺 通信接續控制。 ㈨封包,以執行 〇 ·如申睛專利範圍第1項 其中前述網際二二 路協 的網際網路協定⑽封包, 1 1 ·如申請專利範圍第1 信系統,其中前述網際網路協定際網路協 叫控制資料的網際網路協定((轉迗網係收 信接續控制。 力疋UP)封包,以執行終 信系統,如二、專利:圍第1項所述之網際網路協 接、、了;制時的終端識別編號係為電4Γ 作夺统a申: 二專利範圍第1項所述之網際網路協 接匕乃編網際網路協定(IP)轉送網在終 只1 1〗日守的終端位址係為網際網路協定(Ip)位 •如申凊專利範圍第1項所述之網際網路協 m其中前述網際網路協定(IP)轉送網係透 〇 · 7共同線仏號系統的中繼信號點之閘道裝置, 一公眾電話交換網。 丄/ 1 5 ·如申請專利範圍第i項所述之網際網路協定(Γ p)通 L糸、、、充其中閘道I置係包含至少一之N NI界面,並且 月述網際網路協定(I p )轉送網透過前述閘道裝置接續至少 一公眾電話交換網。^^ MK 9Q1Q546B VI. Patent application scope IP (IP) communication between terminals including communication communication (IP) communication including communication between call terminals (IP) Communication between terminals (IP) communication terminal The IP address (IP) is controlled by the Internet Protocol (IP) communication connection that is connected to at least the audio data. ㈨Packaging to implement 0. As stated in item 1 of the patent scope, the aforementioned internet protocol agreement of the 2nd and 2nd Road Association⑽packet, 1 1 · As applied for the patent scope of the first letter system, in which the aforementioned internet protocol internet Road Association calls the Internet Protocol for controlling data ((Transfer network connection receiving control. Power up) packets to implement the final message system, such as the Internet Protocol Connection described in the second patent: the first item. The terminal identification number at the time of the system is electric 4Γ for the control of the system: 2. The Internet protocol described in the first item of the patent scope is the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network. 1〗 The terminal address of Nissei is the Internet Protocol (IP) bit. • The Internet Protocol described in item 1 of the patent application, where the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network is transparent 7 The gateway device of the relay signal point of the common line 仏 system, a public telephone exchange network. 丄 / 1 5 · The Internet Protocol (Γ p) as described in item i of the scope of patent application is communicated with L 糸 ,, The gateway I system contains at least one N NI interface, and describes the Internet protocol I p) through the gateway routing network connecting means at least a public switched telephone network. 第320頁 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 案號 90105465 1245997 月 修正 曰 六、申請專利範圍 _ 1 6 ·如申請專利範圍第1 信系統,其中前述網際網。戶=2際網路協定(IP)通 Ν〇· 7共同線信號系統的中繼信二之透過做為 一公眾電話交換網,並且前^ : k衣置,連接至少 code)。 j述閘道衣置則包含點碼(p〇int 1 7·如申請專利範園第1 信^統,其卡前述網際網路協m同=路協定πΡ)通 道i置接續前述網點裝置之盔l、、係經由藉一閘 信接續控制。 彳么#,執行終端間的通 ^8 ·如申請專利範園第彳 信系統,其收發包含無線、U網際網路協定(IP)通 協定(ip)封包。 、y》 乎叫控制資料的網際網路 1 9 ·如申請專利範圍 信系統,其收發包含無線开;網際網路協定(ip)通 (IP)封包。 、、v式之聲曰貧料的網際網路協定 2 〇 ·如申請專利範圍第1 信系統,其中前述網際網路協定⑽通 道裝置接續前述網點梦t =疋()轉送網係經由藉一閘 通信接續控制。執仃收發多媒體資料之終端間 —種網際網路協定(IP)通信系統,其包括 、、’罔際網路協定(I p)轉送網,勹人 /、 和伺服器,其特徵在於. 罔包含至少兩個網點裝置 别述網點襄置和飼服哭传读讲A H 轉送網内部之唆跤 2 m係透過則述網際網路協定(IP) P之線路,連接至一目的網點裝置和一目的飼服 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第321頁 1245997Page 320 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Case No. 90105465 1245997 Amendment Date VI. Patent Application Range _ 1 6 • If you apply for the first letter system of patent coverage, the aforementioned Internet. Household = 2 Internet Protocol (IP) communication relay signal of the common line signal system No. 2 is used as a public telephone exchange network, and it is connected to at least code). The gateway device includes a point code (p.int 1 7 · If the patent application for the first park of the patent application system, the card of the aforementioned Internet protocol = road agreement π) channel i is connected to the aforementioned point device The helmets l, and are controlled by a gate.彳 么 # , Executive terminal communication ^ 8 · If the patent application system of the patent application, the sending and receiving includes wireless, U Internet Protocol (IP) communication protocol (ip) packets. ", Y" is called the Internet of control data. 9 · If the patent application scope of the information system, its sending and receiving includes wireless communication; Internet Protocol (IP) communication (IP) packets. The sound of the "," and "V" voices is a kind of lean Internet protocol 2 〇 · If the patent application scope is the first letter system, where the aforementioned Internet protocol ⑽ channel device continues the aforementioned site dream t = 疋 () the transfer network is borrowed by Brake communication connection control. Inter-terminal for transmitting and receiving multimedia data-an Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, including, "Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, human /, and server, characterized by.. Contains at least two outlet devices, separately mentions the establishment of the outlets, and feeds the cry. Reads and talks about the internal network of the AH transfer network. 2 m is connected to a destination outlet device and a destination network through the Internet Protocol (IP) P line. Purpose Feeding 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 321 1245997 別述網點裝置包含根據外 成内部網際網路協定(lp)封包 協定(IP)M還原前述 之功能; 部網際網路協定(IP)封包形 之功能以及根據前述内部網 外部網際網路協定(IP)封包 ’並且利用收發 與前述網點裝置 Y」述媒體路由器連接至少— 呵述外部網際網路協定(1?)封包之;:置 進行通信; 定(Ip; 3、罔點裝置和蚰述伺服器係利用在前述網際網路協 ^ =網内部收發前述内部網際網路協定(IP)封包的 式丄與前述目的網點裝置和目的伺服器進行通信; 別述網際網路協定(IP)轉送網根據H323共同通道信號 省、1的終端間通信接續控制方法,以收發包含H323共同通 、仏號系統之呼叫控制資料的前述内部網際網路協定(I p) 封包’執行一終端間通信接續控制。 22· —種網際網路協定(Ip)通信系統,其包括 _網際網路協定(IP)轉送網,其包含至少兩個網點裝 置和饲服裔’前述網點裝置和伺服器經由一線路與一目的 網點裝置和一目的伺服器接續;前述網點裝置連接至少一 媒體路由器;前述媒體路由器則連接至少一終端裝置,並 且以收發網際網路協定(IP)封包之方式,與前述網點裝置 進行通彳§ ;前述網點裝置和前述伺服器以收發前述網際網 路協定(IP)封包之方式,與前述目的網點裝置和目的伺服 器間進行通信;以及The categorized network device includes the function of restoring the foregoing according to the external internal Internet protocol (lp) packet protocol (IP) M; the function of the external Internet protocol (IP) packet and the function of the external Internet protocol according to the foregoing internal network ( IP) packets' and use the transmission and reception to connect to the aforementioned network device Y "media routers at least — the external Internet Protocol (1?) Packets :: set communication; fixed (Ip; 3, point device and description The server communicates with the destination network device and destination server by sending and receiving the aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (IP) packets within the aforementioned Internet protocol. The Internet protocol (IP) forwarding According to the H323 common channel signal province and 1, the terminal communication connection control method, to send and receive the aforementioned internal Internet protocol (IP) packet containing the call control data of the H323 common channel and the number system to perform an inter-terminal communication connection 22. · An Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, which includes an _Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which includes at least two network devices and a feed station. The aforementioned network point device and server are connected to a destination network point device and a destination server via a line; the aforementioned network point device is connected to at least one media router; the aforementioned media router is connected to at least one terminal device, and transmits and receives Internet protocol ( IP) packets to communicate with the aforementioned point device; the aforementioned point device and the server communicate with the aforementioned destination point device and the destination server by sending and receiving the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packets; and 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第322頁 1245997 銮號 90105465__年月曰_修正 _^ 六、申請專利範圍 前述網際網路協定(IP)轉送網根據No· 7共同通道信號 系統的終端間通信接續控制方法,以收發包含N〇. 7共同通 道信號系統之呼叫控制資料的前述網際網路協定(丨p )封 包’執行一終端間通信接續控制。 2 3 · —種網際網路協定(I P)通信系統,其特徵在於: 、、’罔際網路協定(I P )轉送網包含至少兩個接續祠服器; 别述接續祠服器經由一線路與一目的接續祠服5|接 續; 、 口口 、刎述接續伺服器係以收發一網際網路協定(丨p )封包之 方式、與前述目的接續伺服器進行通信;以及 珂,接續伺服器根據牝· 7共同通道信號系統的終端間 二二2 ί控制方法,以收發包含N0·7共同通道信號系統之 門、制資料的前述網際網路協定(IP)封包,執行一終端 间通k接續控制。 is 如申請專利範圍第23項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 遇t糸統,直中俞朴、私,士, 通信接續”2述接績飼服器是根據sip系統的終端間 眘祖沾、,、 以收發包含前述sip系統之呼叫控制 接續控制。 協疋(1 P )封包,來執行終端間之通信 2 5·—種閘道裝署 統中’其中該網際^罔政&amp;〜於―網際網路協定(IP)通信系 裝置和伺服器· a 協疋(IP)轉送網包括至少兩個網點 路協定(ip)轉送Ξ述網點裝置和伺服器係透過前述網際網 目的伺服器;寸^之一線路,接續至一目的網點裝置和一 月1J 網點裝置包含根據外部網際網路協定 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第323頁 1245997 曰 j 號 901QFi4fiR 六、申請專利範圍 (jP)封包形成内部網際網路協定(I? 則述内部網際網路協定(ιρ)封包义匕之功能以及根據 了匕之功月b ’珂述網點裝置連 J際網路協 ,别述媒體路由器連接至少—钦至夕一媒體路由 前述外部網際網路協定(IP)封包^方二置,並且利用收發 進行通信;前述網點裝置和前述 J “與前述網點裝置 =協定UP)轉送網内部收發前述内;前述網際 3包的方式,與前述目的網點裝 ^網路協定(IP) :際網路協定(IP)轉送網進行通 道信號系統之呼:以收發包含N。·?共同通 封包,執行_蚊端^貝4的别述内部網際網路協定(IP) 迷網際網路協定(IP)轉送網以及至少—KU刖 亚且前述閘道裝置包含一 眾電活父換網, 則下執杆斜1、+、λ 中龜控制衣置,用以在一相同規 2fi 41則述么眾電話交換網之通信接續控制。 述間道裝°置Λ專巧 _直包3刚述公眾電話交換網之一點碼。 統中,J:由種閘道裝置,用於一網際網路協定(ΙΡ)通信系 詈夺a 網際網路協定(i p )轉送網包括至少兩個網點裝 夏彳口伺服哭 •义 協~ Π ρ〉’月11述網點裂置和祠服器係透過前述網際網路 6Λ ^ 轉送網之一線路,接續至一目的網點裝置和一目 封勺/ ’則述網點裝置包含根據外部網際網路協定(IP) 內5形成内部網際網路協定(IP)封包之功能以及根據前述 、罔際網路協定(1 p)封包還原前述外部網際網路協定 mi 2〇49-3793-PF4.r 第324頁 1245997 年 月 曰 修正 --Ml 90inB4RH 六、申請專利範圍 (^p)封包之功能;前述網點裝置連接至 則述媒體路由器連接至少— =媒體路由盗; 外部網際網路協定(IP) ^ ,盥並且利用收發前述 二(’1;;=,前述祠服器一 的方式,盥前辻目二收發則述内部網際網路協定(ip)封包 述網際網路裝置和目的飼服器進行通信;前 、Γ鳊間通信接續控制方法,以收發包人w ^ 虎糸、、先的 執行一。==,述内部網際網路協定(ip)封包 協定(IP)轉送網i至=控制’前述間道展置連接網際網路 2】之交換機係以點碼來識別閘道裝:么眾電話 中Λ勺一入種飼服器,用於一網際網路協一…s 中,其包含具有至少兩個 1路協疋(IP)通信系統 疋(IP)轉送網;前述網點詈^和,服器之網際網路協 路協定(IP )轉送網之—線,=服态係透過前述網際網 目的伺服器;前述網點續至一目的網點裝置和一 ;=Γ部網際網路二=網際網路協定(IP) π網際網路協定(IP)封包 封包,以及根據前述内 IP)封包;前述網點裝連接:::該外部網際網路協定 體路由器連接至少一終;^至少-媒體路由器;前述媒 :協定(IP)封包之方式,鱼ΐ =利用收發前述外部網 =點裝置和前述飼服:伟點裝置進行通信; 轉达網内部收發前述 t述網際網路協定 ^網路協定(IP)封包的方 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第325頁 1245997 Μ 曰 修正 M3l 901QR4RR 六、申請專利範圍 式,與前述目的網點裝置和目的 際網路協定爪)#送網根據Ν〇·7共同:=J =述網 間通信接續控制方法,以收發包 k L號糸、、充的終端 之呼叫控制資料的前述内部網際網路^通J,號:、統 一終端間通信接續控制,前述伺服哭7 =(IP)封包,執行 網路協定(IP)位址之對應表,;7匕3電話號碼與網際 際網路協定(I p)封包之位址。 艮據電話號碼變換成網 2 9 · —種網點裝置,用一 統中,其包含具有至少兩個、網^/置網路協定(⑴通信系 協定(IP)轉送網;前述網點裝詈=置和伺服器之網際網路 網路協定(IP)轉送網之一線^, D,服器係透過前述網際 -目的伺服器;前述網點裝置::-目的網點裝置和 (ip)封包形成内部網際網路協3根據外部網際網路協定 前述内部網際網路協定(11)) ·)封包之功能以及根據 定UP)封包之功能;前述網點前述外部網際網路協 器;前述媒體路由器連接至少二\接至少^媒體路由 前述外部網際網路協定(丨p) 、、、;端裝置,並且利用收發 進行通信;前述網方式,細網點裝置 網路協定(IP)轉送網内部收ί,服器係利用在前述網際 封包的方式,與前述目的網内部網際網二協定(IP) 信;前述網際網路協定(丨P )鞋二和目的伺服益進行通 系統的終端間通信接續控制t、’冯根據No.7共同通這信號 道信號系統之呼叫控制資料前二收發包含No. 7共同通 封包,執行-終端間通信接以内部網際網路協定(IP) 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第326頁 12459972049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 322 1245997 銮 90105465 __Year Month _Amendment_ ^ VI. Scope of Patent Application The aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network according to the No. 7 common channel signal system communication connection between terminals A control method for performing an inter-terminal communication connection control by sending and receiving the aforementioned Internet Protocol (丨 p) packet including call control data of the No. 7 common channel signal system. 2 3-An Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, which is characterized by: The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network includes at least two connection servers; let alone the connection server through a line Connect to a destination server 5 | continuation;, mouth, and description of the connection server is to send and receive an Internet Protocol (丨 p) packet to communicate with the aforementioned purpose connection server; and Ke, connection server According to the control method between two terminals of the 77 common channel signal system, the above-mentioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet containing the gate and system information of the No. 7 common channel signal system is transmitted and received, and an inter-terminal communication is performed. Connection control. is The Internet Protocol (IP) as described in item 23 of the scope of the patent application. The system meets the requirements of the Internet, the public, the private, the private, the communication, and the communication. Zu Zan, and, to send and receive call control connection control including the aforementioned sip system. Cooperative (1 P) packets to perform communication between terminals 2 5-a gateway installation system in which the Internet ^ 罔 政 & amp ~~ "Internet Protocol (IP) communication system devices and servers · a protocol (IP) transfer network includes at least two network protocol (ip) transfers, said network device and server through the aforementioned Internet purpose Server; one of the lines, connected to a destination branch device and January 1J branch device includes an external Internet Protocol 2049-3793-PF4.ptc page 323 1245997 j number 901QFi4fiR 6. scope of patent application (jP ) The packet forms an internal Internet protocol (I? Describes the function of the internal Internet protocol (ιρ) packet meaning and according to the work of the Internet, b 'Keshu network device connected to the Internet protocol, not to mention the media router Connect at least-Qin Zhixi A media router routes the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (IP) packets, and uses two transceivers to communicate; the aforementioned network point device and the aforementioned J (and the aforementioned network point device = protocol UP) forward the internal network to transmit and receive the aforementioned; the aforementioned Internet 3 packets The method is to install with the aforementioned destination network protocol (IP): Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network for channel signal system call: to send and receive including N. ·? Common packet, implement _mosquito end ^ 4 different internal Internet Protocol (IP) and Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network and at least —KU Ziya and the aforementioned gateway device contains a large number of live fathers Network, the lower control lever slant 1, +, λ in the tortoise control clothing, used to control the communication connection of the public telephone exchange network in a same 2fi 41. Said road installation ° placed Λ expertly _ Zhi Bao 3 just described a point code of the public telephone exchange network. In the system, J: A gateway device is used for an Internet Protocol (IP) communication system. An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network includes at least two outlets. Π ρ> 'The outlet split and temple server described in the month 11 are connected to a destination outlet device and a mesh seal via one of the aforementioned Internet 6Λ ^ transfer networks /' The outlet device includes an external Internet connection The function of forming an internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet within the protocol (IP) 5 and restoring the aforementioned external Internet protocol according to the aforementioned, Internet Protocol (1 p) packet mi 2049-793-PF4.r Page 324, Rev. 1245997-Ml 90inB4RH 6. Application for patent coverage (^ p) packet function; the aforementioned outlet device is connected to the media router connected at least-= media routing theft; external Internet Protocol (IP) ^ , Using the method of sending and receiving the aforementioned two ('1 ;; =, the aforementioned server one), the sending and receiving of the former two means that the internal Internet protocol (ip) packet describes the Internet device and the target feeder. Communication; front and back The communication connection control method is to execute the first packet sending and receiving packets. ==, the internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet protocol (IP) forwarding network i to = controls the aforementioned intermediary exhibition connection The Internet 2] switch uses a dot code to identify the gateway device: Λ spoon-type seed feeders in Mody phones are used in an Internet protocol ... It contains at least two 1-channel Cooperative (IP) communication system (IP) forwarding network; the aforementioned network points ^ and, the Internet Protocol protocol (IP) forwarding network of the server-line, = server state through the aforementioned Internet destination server; The aforementioned outlets are continued to a destination outlet device and one; = Γ Department Internet 2 = Internet Protocol (IP) π Internet Protocol (IP) packets, and packets according to the aforementioned IP); the aforementioned outlets are connected: :: The external Internet Protocol router is connected to at least one terminal; ^ At least-the media router; the aforementioned media: protocol (IP) packet mode, fish ΐ = use of the aforementioned external network = point device and the aforementioned feeding service: Great Point The device performs communication; Set the protocol of the Internet Protocol (IP) packet. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 325 1245997 Μ Modified M3l 901QR4RR Six. Patent application scope, with the aforementioned destination network device and destination Internet protocol claw) According to NO.7 common: = J = the method for controlling the communication connection between networks to send and receive packets k L number, the charging terminal's call control information of the aforementioned internal Internet ^ communication J, number: unified terminal Communication connection control, the aforementioned servo cries 7 = (IP) packets, executes the correspondence table of Internet Protocol (IP) addresses, and 7 addresses of telephone numbers and Internet Protocol (IP) packets. That is, the telephone number is converted into a network 2 9. A kind of network point device, which includes a network protocol with at least two network protocols (⑴ Communication System Protocol (IP) forwarding network; One line of the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network with the server ^, D, the server is through the aforementioned Internet-destination server; the aforementioned branch device:-the destination node device and (ip) packets form the internal Internet Road Association 3 According to the external Internet protocol, the aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (11)) ·) packet function and the function according to the UP) packet; the aforementioned network external network coordinator; the aforementioned media router connection at least two \ Connect at least ^ media routes to the aforementioned external Internet protocol (丨 p), end devices, and use transceivers to communicate; the aforementioned network method, fine-point device network protocol (IP) forwarding network internal network, server system Use the aforementioned internet packet mode to communicate with the aforementioned destination network internal internet protocol (IP) letter; the aforementioned internet protocol (丨 P) shoe II and destination server to communicate between the terminals of the system System t, 'Feng's call control data of the signal system based on No. 7 common communication. The first two transceivers contain No. 7 common communication packets, which are executed-communication between terminals is connected to the internal Internet Protocol (IP) 2049-3793- PF4.ptc Page 326 1245997 六、申請專利範圍 ::前=際網路協定(IP)轉送網在執行前述終端間 二接續控制牯,係將一原始網際網路協定(ιρ)位址登錄 於則述網點裝置之位址管理表。 參乂〇· 一種媒體路由器,用於一網際網路協定(IP)通信 和飼服器;前述網點裝置和飼服器係透過前述 ΐ ί定(IPi轉送網之一線路,接續至-目的網點裝置和~ 、伺服斋,丽述網點裝置包含根據外部網際網路協定 ^ )封包形成内部網際網路協定(IP)封包之功能以及根據 二1内部網際網路協定(IP)封包還原前述外部網際網路協 ip)封包之功能;前述網點裝置連接至少一媒體路由 :,前述媒體路由器連接至少一終端装置,並且利用收發 外=網=網路協定(1?)封包之方式,與前述網點裝置 名行通2 Θ述網點裝置和前述伺服器係利用在前述網際 、罔$協疋(I p)轉送網内部收發前述内部網際網路協定(I p) I匕^方式,與前述目的網點裝置和目的伺服器進行通 ^口 ’别述網際網路協定(〗p)轉送網根據N〇· 7共同通道信號 的終端間通信接續控制方法,以收發包含No. 7共同通 道^ 5虎系統之呼叫控制資料的前述内部網際網路協定(I p) 封^執行一終端間通信接續控制,前述媒體路由器係透 過别述網點裝置’對一接續伺服器收發包含呼叫控制資料 之網際網路協定(IP )封包。 、,、、31 ·如申請專利範圍第3 〇項所述之媒體路由器,其中 刖述媒體路由器包含一多媒體資料。Scope of patent application :: Front = Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network is performing the above-mentioned two-terminal continuous connection control. It is the registration of an original Internet Protocol (ιρ) address at the address of the network device. Management table. Refer to 〇 · A media router for Internet Protocol (IP) communication and feeders; the aforementioned network devices and feeders are connected to the destination network through a line of the aforementioned IPi transfer network. Device and ~, servo, and Lishu outlets include the function of forming an internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet based on an external Internet protocol ^) packet, and restoring the aforementioned external Internet according to the 2 internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet Network protocol (IP) packet function; the aforementioned outlet device is connected to at least one media router: the aforementioned media router is connected to at least one terminal device, and the sending and receiving = network = network protocol (1?) Packet is used to communicate with the aforementioned outlet device Mingxingtong 2 Θ said network device and the aforementioned server use the internal Internet protocol (IP) I / P method to send and receive the internal Internet protocol (IP) I / P within the Internet and the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, and the target network device It communicates with the destination server through the Internet protocol ((p). The transfer control method for inter-terminal communication connection according to the No. 7 common channel signal to the transmission network includes the No. 7 common The above-mentioned internal Internet protocol (IP) seal of the call control data of the 5 tiger system performs the connection control of communication between terminals. The aforementioned media router transmits and receives call control data to and from a connection server through a different network device. Internet Protocol (IP) packets. ,,,, 31 · The media router according to item 30 of the scope of patent application, wherein the media router described above includes a multimedia material. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第327頁 ------t^i〇105465 」多正 六、申請專利範圍 - ,32· 一種媒體路由器,用 中,其中網際網路協定(0 一^際網路協定(IP)通信 衷置和伺服器;前述網點裝)轉送網包括至少兩個網點 路協定(IP )轉送網之一線路,和,服器係透過前述網際網 目的伺服态;前述網點裝置包,、、、·ί至一目的網點裝置和一 2Ρ)封包形成内部網際網路g I根據外部網際網路協定 丽述内部網際網路協定(Ip)封P)封包之功能以及根據 定(IP)封包之功能;前述網點|還原前述外部網際網路協 2 ;前述媒體路由器連接至;2 4置,接至少一媒體路由 前述外部網際網路協定(ip) S勹終端裝置,並且利用收發 進行通信;前述網點裝置和A ^之方式,與前述網點裝置 網路協定(IP)轉送網内部收二Ϊ伺服器係利用在前述網際 封包的方式,與前述目的網述内部網際網路協定(IP) 信;前述網際網路協定(IP)轅t置和目的飼服器進行通 系統的終端間通信接續押制t、、、罔根據1^0·7共同通道信號 道信號系統之啤叫控制:ί料L、:、以收發包含N。· 7共同通 封包,執行一終端間通传接择二,内部網際網路協定(IP) 過前述網點裝置,對前‘網;2边前述媒體路由器係透 含數位化聲音資料之4網罔:=(==轉送網收發包 夺统J·盆種:某:::敗為’用於-網際網路協定(IP)通传 裝置和飼服器;前述網點事置=达網包括至少兩個網點 路協定UP)轉送網之4:置=器係透過前述網際網 目的伺服器;前述網點裒置包人:目的網點裝置和- 衣置包含根據外部網際網路協定 I 第328頁 2049-3793-PF4.ptc I245997 月 曰 __案號 90105465 六、申請專利範圍 _____ (^p)封包形成内部網際網路協 :r述内部、網際網路協定(ip)封包還j前以及根據 ^ Ip2封包之功能;前述網點裝置連接至少:::::協 _、,、别述媒體路由器連接至少_終 媒體路由 2 3外部網際網路協定(Ip)封包之方2: j且利用收發 仃通信;前述網點裝置和前 刖述網點裝置 _路協定(IP)轉送網内部文;;=;糸利用在前述網際 ;包的方式,與前述目的網,協定(IP) 。,前述網際網路協定(IP)轉送網 、^服态進行通 化執行-終端 成-通信呼叫設定網際網封包以形 前述網際網路協定(IP)封包㈧封包,並且利用傳送 網以便啟動一通信接續階段。别述網際網路協定(IP)轉送 34· —種終端裝置,用 址之網際網路協定(Ip)封包,苴勹=活5虎馬或做為終端位 置和飼服器之網際網路協有;ί兩個網點裝 續至一目的網點裝置::=η)轉f網之'線路,接 根據一外部網際網路協定 T裔,珂述網點裝置包含 封包形成一内部網際網路協 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第329頁 1245997 -月 曰 案號 90105465 六、申請專利範圍 定(IP)封包之功能以及根據前述内部網際網路 包還原前述外部網際網路協定(Ip) 疋C IP)封 *置連接至少—媒艘路由器;(前連;;;點 终置’並i利用收發前述外部網際網路協二: 之方式,與前述網點裝置進行通信;前述網點 伺服器係利用在前述網際網路協定(IP)轉送網内 述内部網際網路協定(IP)封包的方式,與前述目的網點裝 置和目的伺服器進行通信;前述網際網路協定(I p )轉送網 根據No. 7共同通道信號系統的終端間通信接續控制方法、, 以收發包含No. 7共同通道信號系統之呼叫控 内部,網路協定(⑻封包,執行-終端間通 制,刖述終端裝置係透過媒體路由器以及網點裝置,與網 際網路協定(IP)轉送網内之伺服器收發包含。乎叫控 之網際網路協定(IΡ )封包。 、 35· —種終端裝置,用於一網際網路協定(I㈠通信系 統中,其中網際網路協定(Ιρ)轉送網包括至少兩個網點裝 置和伺服器;前述網點裝置和伺服器係透過前述網際網路 協定(IΡ)轉送網之一飧^ ^ σ 、 綠路,接續至一目的網點裝置和一目 的伺服益,月ί)述網點裴置包含根據外部網際網路協定(I ρ ) 封包形成内部網際網路協定(Ιρ)封包之功能以及根據前述 内。卩網際網路,定(IΡ)封包還原前述外部網際網路協定 (^Ρ)封包之功能;前述網點裝置連接至少一媒體路由器; 月’J述媒體路由斋連接至少一終端裝置,並且利用收發前述 外部網際網路協定(IP)封包之方式,與前述網點裝置進行2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 327 ------ t ^ i〇105465 "Tao Zheng VI, Patent Application Scope-, 32 · A media router, in use, of which the Internet Protocol (0- ^ Internet) IP protocol communication server and server; the aforementioned node installation) forwarding network includes at least two lines of one of the IP protocol forwarding network, and the server is in the servo state through the aforementioned Internet destination; the aforementioned node device A packet, a ..., a destination network device and a 2P) packet form the internal Internet g. According to the external Internet protocol, the function of the internal Internet protocol (IP) packet and the packet are defined according to ( IP) packet function; the aforementioned outlets | restore the aforementioned external Internet Protocol 2; the aforementioned media router is connected to; 24, and at least one media route is connected to the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (IP) S 勹 terminal device, and the use of transceivers Communication; the aforementioned branch device and A ^ method, and the aforementioned branch device network protocol (IP) forwarding network internal receiving server uses the aforementioned internet packet method to communicate with the aforementioned destination internal internet protocol ( IP) ; The above-mentioned Internet Protocol (IP) 置 t and target feeders communicate with each other through the system terminal connection connection system t ,,, 罔 according to the 1 ^ 0 · 7 common channel signal channel signal system beer control: ί Material L,:, contains N for sending and receiving. · 7 common communication packets, performing one communication between two terminals. The internal Internet Protocol (IP) passes the aforementioned network devices to the front network; the two media routers mentioned above pass through the 4 network with digital audio data. : = (== Transfer network send and receive packets to win J. Pottery Seeds: Some :::: Lost to 'for-Internet Protocol (IP) communication devices and feeders; the aforementioned outlets are set up to include at least The protocol of the two network points is UP. 4: The setting network is through the aforementioned Internet destination server; the aforementioned network location is set up by the destination network device and-the device contains the IP address according to the external Internet protocol I, page 328 2049. -3793-PF4.ptc I245997 Month __Case No. 90105465 VI. Scope of Patent Application _____ (^ p) Packets form the Internal Internet Protocol: the internal and Internet Protocol (IP) packets are returned before and according to ^ Function of Ip2 packet; the aforementioned network device connection should be at least :::::: _ ,,, and other media routers should be connected at least _ final media routing 2 3 External Internet Protocol (IP) packet party 2: j仃 Communication; the aforementioned branch point device and the aforementioned branch point device_ 路Set (IP) network internal routing packets ;; =; Ito utilizing the Internet; packet mode, with the purpose of the network protocol (IP). The aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network and the server perform communication implementation-terminal generation-communication call setting Internet packet to form the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet and packet, and use the transmission network to initiate a communication Continuation phase. Distinguish the Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding 34 · — a kind of terminal device, using the Internet Protocol (IP) packet of the address, 苴 勹 = live 5 tiger horse or the Internet protocol as the terminal location and feeder Yes; two network devices are connected to a destination network device:: = η) to the network of 'f', connected according to an external Internet protocol, the network device contains packets to form an internal Internet protocol 2049 -3793-PF4.ptc Page 329 1245997-Month Case No. 90105465 VI. The function of applying for IP (Patent Scope) packets and restoring the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (IP) (C IP) based on the aforementioned internal Internet packets Close the connection at least-the media ship router; (previous connection ;;; point finalization and use the method of sending and receiving the aforementioned external Internet Protocol II: to communicate with the aforementioned network device; the aforementioned network server is used in the aforementioned The Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network describes the internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet to communicate with the aforementioned destination network device and destination server; the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network is based on No. 7 Common channel letter Method for controlling communication connection between terminals of the system No. 7 to send and receive call control internal, network protocols (including packets, implementation-terminal-to-terminal system) including the No. 7 common channel signal system, it is described that the terminal device is through a media router and an outlet Device, which is included in the Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding server and contains the Internet Protocol (IP) packets. 35, a terminal device for an Internet Protocol (IP) communication In the system, the Internet Protocol (Iρ) transfer network includes at least two network devices and servers; the aforementioned network devices and servers are one of the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer networks: ^ ^ σ, Green Road Connected to a destination network device and a destination server, the above-mentioned network Pei Zhi contains the function of forming an internal Internet Protocol (Iρ) packet based on an external Internet Protocol (I ρ) packet and according to the foregoing. 卩Internet, fixed (IP) packet restores the function of the aforementioned external Internet Protocol (^ P) packet; the aforementioned branch device is connected to at least one media router; Fast routing means connecting at least one terminal, and the external transceiver using the Internet Protocol (IP) packets of the embodiment, with the network device 2049.3793-PF4.ptc 第330頁 12459972049.3793-PF4.ptc Page 330 1245997 2,;前述網點裝置和前述伺服器係利用在前述網際網路 荔定(I P )轉送網内部收發前述内部網際網路協定(丨p)封包 的方式,與前述目的網點裝置和目的伺服器進行通信;^ 述網際網路協定(1?)轉送網根據N0.7共 = 终端間通信接續控制方法,以收發包含νο.7==: 系統之呼叫控制資料的前述内部網際網路協定(I㈠封包^ 執行一終端間通信接續控制; ’ 其中前述多媒體資料至少包括文字、數位化靜止影 、數位化動畫、數位化聲音及數位資料。 36· 一種終端裝置,用於一網際網路協定(IP)通信系 協1,ΤΡ其ΐ含具有至少兩個網點裝置和伺服器之網際網’略 df罔;前述網點裝置和们艮器係透過前述網際 = = 轉送網之一線路,接續至一目的網點裝置;: 目的:服器;前述網點裝置包含根據外部網際網路 前成内部網際網路協定(IP)封包之功能以及根據 封包之功能;前述網點裝置連接至少一媒體路由 ΐ沭Iί媒體路由器連接至少一終端裝置,並且利用收發 進:通;:、罔ΐ :路協定(ΙΡ)封包之方式’與前述網點裝置 封= 轉送網内部收發前述内部網際網路協定(IP) 已j =式,與前述目的網點裝置和目的伺服器進行通 協定(IP)轉送網根據No.7共同通道信號 、、先的、、知間通信接續控制方法,以收發包含Ν〇· 7共同通2 .; The aforementioned branch point device and the aforementioned server communicate with the aforementioned destination point device and destination server by sending and receiving the aforementioned internal Internet protocol (丨 p) packet within the aforementioned Internet Liding (IP) forwarding network. Communication; ^ The above-mentioned Internet Protocol (1?) Forwarding network according to N0.7 == inter-terminal communication connection control method to send and receive the aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (I㈠) containing call control data of νο.7 ==: system The packet ^ performs communication control between terminals; 'The aforementioned multimedia data includes at least text, digitized still images, digitized animation, digitized sound, and digital data. 36. A terminal device for an Internet Protocol (IP ) Communication system association 1, TP includes an Internet network with at least two network devices and servers; slightly df; the aforementioned network devices and devices are connected to a purpose through the aforementioned Internet == forwarding network Branch device ;: Purpose: server; the aforementioned branch device includes the function of forming an internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet according to the external Internet and the function of packet The aforementioned outlet device is connected to at least one media router. The media router is connected to at least one terminal device, and the sending and receiving method is used to communicate with the aforementioned outlet device. The aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (IP) has j = type, and performs the protocol (IP) transfer network with the aforementioned destination network device and destination server according to No. 7 common channel signal, prior, and inter-communication communication connection control method To send and receive common '、申請專利範圍 ί t號ί統之呼叫控制資料的前述内部網際網路協定(IP) 含目的雷Γ —終端間通信接續控制,前述終端裝置傳送包 協定(ιρ!ΐ號碼之f際網路協定(IP)封包至前述網際網路 網際網路際網路協定(ιρ)轉送網轉換前述 網際網路:m封包為對應於前述目的電話號碼之目的 協定(IP)位^ ^址,並且傳达包含前述目的網際網路 )位址之上述網際網路協定(Ip)封包至終 •—種網際網路協定(IP)通信系統,其'^ —網際網路協定(IP)轉送網,包含至少二個\ ; 置; 〇 3主少一個網點裝 幻述網點裝置包含根據外部網 成内部網際網路協定(IP)封包之封包形 際網路協定up)封包還原前述外部述内部網 之功能; 1 w U網路協定(IP)封包 前述網點裝置係透過具有多址撥逆敗々主 經由二線路連接至少兩個目的網點裝置路佐表之路由器, 珂述網點裝置連接在前述網際網路協〜Ύτρ、± 邻之至少一媒體路由器,· 協疋dP)轉送網外 前述網點裝置連接至少一終端裝置· 媒體路由器連接至少一終端裴置· 刖述媒體路由器利用收發前述, 封包j方式,與前述網點裝置進行上=網際網路協定dP) 鈾述、、’罔點裝置係利用在前述網際 内部收發前述内部網際網路協定(丨p) 協定(I p)轉送網 、包的方式,與目的 1245997 修正 年 月 曰 _901Q54RB 六、申請專利範圍 網點f置進行通信;以及 制方t述網際網路協定(1 P )轉送網根據一多址撥送通信控 ^ ' ’以收發前述内部網際網路協定(IP)封包,執行一 、、、;^間通信接續控制。 3 8 4^ 通传系·纟申請專利範圍第37項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 協定(1 pt 其中當一多址撥送傳送器之前述外部網際網路 網點聿封包的目的網際網路協定(IP)位址未登錄於前述 網際網敗^ 一位址管理表令時,前述網點裝置捨棄可用之 |7Γ、、、、罔路協定(IP)封包。 3 g _ 項所述h種終端通信方法,其執行於如申請專利範圍第1 所ί之網際網路協定(IP)通信系統中,其包含: 月U述終端裝置傳送包 定(IP)封6 s义 5目的電治唬碼之網際網路協 此、、匕至則述網際網路協定(丨p)轉送網,· 定(IP)位址並且傳J包活唬碼之-目的網際網路協 際網路協定(ΙΡ)Ϊί二ί應網際網路協定(IP)位址之網 包。、端衣置則接收一被傳送網際網路協定(IP)封 4^° 5 : 包,並且根子以及外部封包形成内部封 受信側邏輯端子;終端梦 、▲铒编子識別貝矾決定 述送信側邏輯端子戋前社^1 u通k線路路徑,接續至前 Μ子或則述文信侧邏輯端子,利用包含呼叫', The scope of the patent application: the aforementioned internal Internet protocol (IP) with call control information of the t number, including the destination address Γ-communication connection control between terminals, the aforementioned terminal device transmits a packet agreement (ιρ! Ϊ́number of the Internet) Road Protocol (IP) packets to the aforementioned Internet Internet Protocol (ιρ) forwarding network converts the aforementioned Internet: m packets are destination protocol (IP) bits corresponding to the aforementioned destination phone number, and Communicate the above-mentioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet including the aforementioned destination Internet address to the end-a type of Internet Protocol (IP) communication system, its' ^-Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network, Contains at least two settings; 〇3 masters and one less point to install the illusion point device, which includes a packet-shaped Internet Protocol (UP) packet that is converted into an internal Internet Protocol (IP) packet according to the external network to restore the aforementioned external network. Function: 1 w U network protocol (IP) packet. The aforementioned network device is connected through a router with multi-address dial-back and the main line connects at least two destination network devices via the two lines. At least one media router in the aforementioned Internet protocol, Ύτρ, ± neighbors, and 疋 dP) transfer the aforementioned network point device outside the network to connect at least one terminal device. The media router connects to at least one terminal device. The packet j method is used to perform the connection with the aforementioned network point device = Internet Protocol dP) Uranium, and the 'point network device are used to transmit and receive the internal Internet Protocol (IP) protocol (IP) transfer network within the Internet. , The package method, and the purpose of the 1245997 amendment date _901Q54RB VI, patent application network location f set communication; and the manufacturer described in the Internet Protocol (1 P) transfer network according to a multiple access communication control ^ ' 'In order to send and receive the aforementioned internal Internet Protocol (IP) packets, perform communication control between one, two, and three. 3 8 4 ^ General communication system · The Internet Protocol (IP) agreement (1 pt) described in item 37 of the scope of patent applications When the Internet Protocol (IP) address is not registered in the aforementioned Internet. ^ When an address management order is issued, the aforementioned network device discards the available | 7Γ ,,,, and Kushiro Protocol (IP) packets. 3 g _ h types of terminal communication methods, which are implemented in the Internet Protocol (IP) communication system as described in the first patent application scope, which include: the terminal device transmits a packet (IP) packet 6 s meaning 5 purpose This is the Internet protocol for addressing blunders, and the Internet protocol (丨 p) forwarding network is described, and the (IP) address is set and the J packet is transmitted.-The destination Internet protocol The protocol (IP) is a packet that corresponds to an Internet Protocol (IP) address. The terminal device receives a transmitted Internet Protocol (IP) packet 4 ^ ° 5: packet, and root and external packets Form the internal logic terminal on the receiving side; the terminal dream and the ▲ 铒 editor identify the alum and decide to describe the logic side on the sending side子 戋 前 社 ^ 1 u through the k line path, which is connected to the front 子 子 or scribe letter logic terminal, using the call 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第333頁 12459972049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 333 1245997 曰 修正 控制資料之内部封包,執行終端間通信接續控制。 41 ·如申請專利範圍第4 0項所述之網際網路協定(I P ) 轉送網’其根據送信側之邏輯端子和外部封包形成内部封 包之共同通道信號方式之呼叫控制資料。 4 2 ·如申請專利範圍第4 0項所述之網際網路協定(I P ) 轉送網’其根據送信侧之邏輯端子和外部封包形成内部封 包之S IP方式之呼叫控制資料。 4 3 ·如申請專利範圍第4 0項所述之網際網路協定(I P ) 轉运網,其根據送信側之邏輯端子和外部封包形成内部封 包之電話號碼。 ,44·如申請專利範圍第40項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 轉送網,其係接續至公眾電話交換網。 45·如申請專利範圍第44項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 轉送網,其中終端裝置係為電話機。 4 6 ·如申請專利範圍第4 0項所述之網際網路協定(I p ) 轉送網,其中終端裝置包含無線介面功能。 、、,47·如申請專利範圍第4〇項所述之網際網路協定(Ip) 1 ^、’、罔,其係接續至一媒體路由器,並且與媒體路由器收 毛L包含呼叫控制資料之網際網路協定(I p)封包。 、、,48·如申請專利範圍第4〇項所述之網際網路協定(Ip) 么$、罔其係接續至一媒體路由滤,並且與媒體路由器收 毛彳。匕g U N I方式之呼叫控制資料之網際網路協定(I p)封 包。 49·如申請專利範圍第4〇項所述之網際網路協定(ιρ)Correct the internal packet of control data, and execute the communication connection control between terminals. 41 · The internet protocol (IP) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application ', which is call control data of the common channel signal method of forming internal packets according to the logic terminals on the sending side and external packets. 4 2 · According to the Internet Protocol (I P) transfer network described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, it uses the SIP method call control data of the internal packet to form the internal packet according to the logical terminal on the sending side and the external packet. 4 3 · The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, which forms the phone number of the internal packet according to the logical terminal on the sending side and the external packet. 44. The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, which is connected to the public telephone exchange network. 45. The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network described in item 44 of the scope of patent application, wherein the terminal device is a telephone. 4 6 · The Internet Protocol (I p) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, wherein the terminal device includes a wireless interface function. ,,, 47. The Internet Protocol (Ip) 1 ^, ', 所述 described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, which is connected to a media router, and contains media call control information with the media router L. Internet Protocol (IP) packets. ,,, 48. The Internet Protocol (Ip) described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, which is connected to a media routing filter and collects data with the media router. An Internet Protocol (IP) packet for call control data in U N I mode. 49 · Internet Protocol (ιρ) as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第334頁 1245997 、·申請專利範圍 ~~ 11網’其係接續至一媒體路由器,並且與媒體路由器收 ^彳°包s S I p方式之啤叫控制資料之網際網路協定(I p ) 包。 w50·如申請專利範圍第40項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 轉送網’其中係利用電話號碼來識別終端裝置。 、、/ 51 ·如申請專利範圍第4 0項所述之網際網路協定(I p) 網,其中當終端間通信接續控制係為通話階段時,在 終端間送信或受信包含數位媒體之網際網路協定(IP)封 包。2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 334 1245997 、 Applicable patent scope ~~ 11 network 'It is connected to a media router, and receives media control packets with the media router ^ 彳 ° s SI p mode beer call control information Road Agreement (I p) packet. w50. The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network as described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the terminal device is identified by a telephone number. 、 // 51 · The Internet Protocol (IP) network as described in Item 40 of the scope of patent application, wherein when the communication connection control between terminals is in the call phase, sending or receiving messages between terminals contains digital media Internet Protocol (IP) packets. 5 2 ·如申請專利範圍第4 〇項所述之網際網路協定(〗p) 轉送網,其中係根據電話號碼形成網際網路協定(IP)位 址° 53. 如申請專利範圍第52項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 轉运網’其中包含電話號碼與網際網路協定(IP)位址為一 對一對應關係之資訊。 54. 如申請專利範圍第4〇項所述之網際網路協定(ιρ) 轉送網,其中係透過閘道裝置,接續1個以上之公眾電話 交換網。 &quot;5 2 · The Internet Protocol (〖p) forwarding network as described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, in which the Internet Protocol (IP) address is formed according to the telephone number ° 53. If the scope of patent application is item 52 The described "Internet Protocol (IP) transit network" contains information that telephone numbers and Internet Protocol (IP) addresses have a one-to-one correspondence. 54. The Internet Protocol (ιρ) transfer network described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, which is connected to more than one public telephone exchange network through a gateway device. &quot; 55. 如申請專利範圍第40項所述之網際網路協定(1?) 轉送網,其中由公眾電話交換網來看,係透過做為公眾電 話交換網之信號局的閘道裝置,接續公眾電話交換網。 56·如申請專利範圍第4〇項所述之網際網路協定(ιρ) 轉送網,其中一無線收發部係接續至網際網路協定(ιρ)轉 送網,前述無線收發部係用以收發無線形式之呼叫控制資55. The Internet Protocol (1?) Forwarding network as described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, which is viewed from the public telephone exchange network and is connected to the public through the gateway device of the signal exchange office of the public telephone exchange network. Telephone exchange network. 56. According to the Internet Protocol (ιρ) transfer network described in Item 40 of the scope of patent application, one of the wireless transceiver units is connected to the Internet Protocol (ιρ) transfer network, and the aforementioned wireless transceiver unit is used to send and receive wireless Form of call control information 1245997 案號;90105465 年月曰 修正 六、申請專利範圍 料。 5 7·如申請專利範圍第4〇項所述之網際網路協定(Ip) 轉送網’其中一無線收發部係接續至網際網路協定(丨p )轉 送網’前述無線收發部係用以收發電話號碼。 5 8 ·如申請專利範圍第4 0項所述之網際網路協定(I p ) 轉送網,其中一無線收發部係接續至網際網路協定(〗p )轉 送網’前述無線收發部係用以收發聲音信號。 5 9.如申請專利範圍第4 〇項所述之網際網路協定(I p ) 轉送網’其中一無線收發部係接續至網際網路協定(IP )轉 送網’前述無線收發部係用以收發數位媒體資料。 6 0 ·如申請專利範圍第4 0項所述之網際網路協定(丨p ) 轉送網’其中係區分用以收發包含呼叫控制資料之内部封 包的通信線路,以及用以收發包含聲音資料之内部封 通信線路。 61·如申請專利範圍第4〇項所述之網際網路協定(ιρ) 1送網’其中在網點裝置上登錄有網際網路協定(Ip)終端 &amp;置之網際網路協定(IP)位址,當接收到包含未登錄之發 =來源網際網路協定(IP)位址的網際網路協定(I P)封包X 時’雨述網點裝置則丟棄前述網際網路協定(IP)封包。 6 2.如申睛專利範圍第4 0項所述之網際網路協定(I p ) 轉送網,其中在網點裝置上登錄有網際網路協定(丨終 ^置之網際網路協定(IP)位址,當接收到包含未登錄之發 =目的網際網路協定(IP)位址的網際網路協定(IP)封包X 時’ 4述網點裝置則丟棄前述網際網路協定(IP)封包。Case No. 1245997; Revision date of 90105465. VI. Scope of Patent Application. 5 7 · One of the wireless transmission and reception units connected to the Internet Protocol (Ip) transfer network described in item 40 of the scope of patent application is connected to the Internet Protocol (丨 p) transfer network. Send and receive phone numbers. 5 8 · According to the Internet Protocol (I p) transfer network described in Item 40 of the scope of patent application, one of the wireless transceiver units is connected to the Internet Protocol (〗 p) transfer network. To send and receive sound signals. 5 9. According to the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network described in item 40 of the scope of patent application, one of the wireless transceiver units is connected to the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network. The aforementioned wireless transceiver unit is used to Send and receive digital media. 6 0 · The Internet Protocol (丨 p) forwarding network as described in item 40 of the scope of the patent application, which distinguishes between communication lines used to send and receive internal packets containing call control data and those used to send and receive sound data. Internally sealed communication lines. 61. The Internet Protocol (ιρ) 1 Send Network as described in Item 40 of the scope of patent application, in which an Internet Protocol (IP) terminal &amp; Internet Protocol (IP) is registered on a branch device Address, when an Internet Protocol (IP) packet X containing an unregistered send = source Internet Protocol (IP) address is received, the raindrop device discards the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet. 6 2. The Internet Protocol (I p) transfer network as described in item 40 of the patent application scope, in which the Internet Protocol (the final Internet Protocol (IP)) is registered on the branch device Address, when an Internet Protocol (IP) packet X containing an unregistered outgoing = destination Internet Protocol (IP) address is received, the network device discards the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第336頁 1245997 月 曰 修正 丄 -j號90]054叩 /、、申請專利範圍 6立3· —種網際網路協定πρ)轉送網,其 邏輯端 ΐ,· ’、λ^ 信側之網點裝置形成内邏3::,外部封包,送 所接收之内部封包之邏輯端子二之網點裝置則根據 封包之邏輯端子;終端裝二:〗,決定應接收内部 述送信側邏輯端子或前述受么路徑,接續至前 控制資料之内料#,^ l邏~ &amp;子’利用包含呼叫 以· 一種網際網路協定(IP)轉送、制 ,裝置;其中外部封包係利用送信側其包括2個以上網 $封包,並且利用受信側之網點裝=衣置變換為内 網點裝置間則以内部封包進行通信;:::;外部封包, 路路徑,接續至前述送信側網點裝置或::置;以通信線 置’利用包含呼叫控制資料之内網點裝 接續控制。 了匕執仃終端間通信 65· 一種網際網路協定(IP)轉送網, 點裝置’前述網點裝置包含2個以上;輯有2::\上網 =係利”信侧之網點裝置變換^;;子包其/且外; 又k側之網點裝置還原前述外部封包, 部封句i隹;Τ 1 ,. u 、』”、、占I置間則以内 、才f / I通信;编裝置則以通信線路路徑,接續至前 述达仏側之網點裝置或前述受信側之網點 . 執行二,子識另…及哞叫控制資料之内部封包, 執订終埏間通信接續控制。 66.—種網際網路協定(1〇轉送網’其具有2個以上網 第337頁 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 曰 _修正 點襄置’冑述網點步署七人 線路則固定有邏 :1 0 32個以上通信線路,每個通信 邏輯端子,分別端子^其中在送信側之網點裝置之每個 網點裝置之每個、羅I ^邛封包形成内部封包;在收訊側之 前述外部封包;子,則分別將前述内部封包還原成 送信側邏輯端子或=襄置則以通信線路路徑,接續至前述 用包含呼叫控制述又心側邏輯端子,終端裝置間則利 制。 、;::之内部封包,執行終端間通信接續控 6 7 · 一種網點叢 根據送信側之邏輯 ,/、匕含2個以上邏輯端子,其具有 據所形成之内部封勺子和夕。卜部封包形成内部封包、並且根 端子之功能,#Γ、+、=之邏輯端子識別資訊決定受信側邏輯 碼。 4内部封包包含哞叫控制資料及電話號 6 8.如申請專利截 根據送信側之邏輯端子m項所述之網點裝置,其中其 道信號方式之啤!部封包形成内部封包之共同通 送信6:之如邏申輯睛端專範67項所述之— 之邏輯知子和外部封包形成内 呼叫控制資料。 了匕之S I P方式之 7〇· 一種網點裝置,i句令?銦以l、抑 信側之網點裝置具有根據送信側 ::::,J中送 成内部封包之功能,並且受信側之網以= 卜;;包形 收之内部封包之邏輯端子識別資訊決定靡妾 包之邏輯端子之功能,#中前述内部内^封 了包包含呼叫控制資2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 336 1245997 Month Amendment 丄 -j No. 90] 054 叩 / 、, patent application scope 6 Li 3 · — a kind of Internet Protocol πρ) transfer network, its logical end, , Λ ^ The network side device on the letter side forms internal logic 3 ::, the external packet sends the received logical terminal of the internal packet. The network point device is based on the logical terminal of the packet; the terminal is equipped with two:], decides that it should receive the internal transmission The side logic terminal or the aforementioned receiving path is connected to the contents of the previous control data. The "logical" &amp; child's use includes a call to a type of Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding, control, and device; where the external packet is It uses the sending side which includes 2 packets with Internet access $, and uses the network equipment on the receiving side to change to the internal network. Devices use internal packets to communicate; :::; external packets, routes, and connections to the aforementioned sending side Network point device or: Set; use communication line to set up the use of internal network points containing call control data to install connection control. The communication between terminals 65. An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, point device 'the aforementioned point device contains more than two; edited 2 :: \ Internet = system profit' point side device conversion ^; The sub-packet / and outside; and the network device on the k side restores the aforementioned external packet, part of the sentence i 隹; T 1,. U, ″ ″, within I, only f / I communication; editing device Then use the communication line path to connect to the network device on the daemon side or the network on the trusted side. Perform the second, sub-identification ... and internal packet of call control data to order the final communication connection control. 66.—An Internet Protocol (10 Forwarding Network 'which has 2 Internet access pages, page 337 2049-3793-PF4.ptc, said _correction point set', the seven-person line of the network is fixed with logic: 1 0 32 or more communication lines, each communication logic terminal, and each terminal ^ Among them, each of the network device on the transmission side, each packet of the network device forms an internal packet; the aforementioned external packet on the receiving side ; Sub, respectively restore the aforementioned internal packet to the sending-side logical terminal or = to use the communication line path to connect to the aforementioned logical terminal including call control and the heart-side logical terminal, and the terminal device is profitable. The internal packet is used to control the communication between the terminals. 6 • A branch cluster contains more than 2 logical terminals according to the logic of the sending side. It has an internal seal spoon and a eve. And the function of the root terminal, the logical terminal identification information of # Γ, +, = determines the logic code on the receiving side. 4 The internal packet contains the call control data and the phone number 6 8. If the patent application is intercepted, it will be based on the sending side. The outlet device described in item m of the logic terminal, in which the way of signalling the beer! Part of the packet forms a common communication letter of the internal packet 6: as described in Item 67 of the logical application series—the logical wise and the external packet Form the internal call control information. 70. A SIP method. A branch device, i sentence? Indium, l, the suppression device on the side device has the function of sending internal packets according to the sending side :::, J And the network on the trusted side uses = bu ;; the logical terminal identification information of the internal packet received by the packet determines the function of the logical terminal of the packet. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第338頁 1245997 #1^^90105465 六、申請專利範圍 料。 月 Θ2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 338 1245997 # 1 ^^ 90105465 6. Scope of patent application. Month Θ 徑蜩點裝置 之 網際網路協定UP)轉=糸;以上之網點裝置 之網點裝置變換為3;: 係利用送信側 還原外部封包,網::二包’並Γ用…彳之網點襄置 、罔2衣置間則以内部封包進行通传· 裝置則以通信線路路徑 至前 ‘置:端 述受信側網點裝置,利用包含呼叫控制資料前 執行終端間通信接續控制。 封包, 淫=· 一=罔點裝置’其係設於具有2個以上之網$壯 置ί且包含2個以上邏輯端子之網際網路協定UP)/'、, 網,:、中外部封包係、利用送信側之網點裝置變換 立送 包’並且利用受信侧之網點裝置還原外部、網:封 接績至前述送信側網點裝置或前述 t路廢’ 包含受信側邏輯端子識別資訊 置,利用 包,執行終端間通信接續控制。 H控制胃枓之内部封 73. —種網點震置,其包含2個以上 信線路則固定有邏輯端子…在送信側之二:母個通 個邏輯端分別制外部封包形成内部 1置之每 之網點裝置之每個邏輯端子,則分 ,在收訊侧 成前述外部封包;終端裝置間則利用包1 ^ 11卩封包還原 内部封包進行通信。 5 ^叫控制資料之 74· —種閘道裝置,其係設於如 所述之網際網路協定(IP)轉送網中,^ 靶圍第40項 該閘道裝置係接續至The internet protocol of the point device is UP = 糸; the point device of the above point device is converted to 3 ;: It uses the sending side to restore the external packet.罔 2 is used for internal transmission through the internal packet. · The device is connected to the front by the communication line path. The end-point device on the trusted side is used to perform communication connection control between terminals before using call control data. Packet, kinky = · 一 = 罔 point device 'It is set up in an Internet protocol with more than 2 nets, and contains more than 2 logical terminals UP) /', net,:, and external packets System, use the outlet device on the sending side to change the delivery package, and use the outlet device on the receiving side to restore the external, network: seal the result to the aforementioned outlet device on the sending side or the above-mentioned road waste. Package to perform communication connection control between terminals. H control the internal seal of the gastric cavity 73.-a kind of network vibration, which contains more than two signal lines are fixed with logical terminals ... on the sending side of the two: the mother through the logical end of the external packet to form an internal one Each logical terminal of the network point device is divided into the aforementioned external packet on the receiving side; the terminal devices use the packet 1 ^ 11 卩 packet to restore the internal packet for communication. 5 ^ Called control data 74 · — A gateway device, which is located in the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network as described, ^ Target 40 Item This gateway device is connected to 1245997 修正 ==定(IP)轉送網和公眾電話交換網, = = 裝置,其利用樹電話交: 75 、】執订通化接續控制。 所述之網^終端裝置’其係、設於如申請專利範圍第50項 號碼之定送網中,發送 (IP)轉送、=網路協定(IP)封包至前述網際網路協定 電話號碼為一 4述凋際網路協定(I P)轉送網則形成與對方 位址,θ福 對一對應關係之送信對方網際網路協定(IP) 位口傳給終端裝置。 J 7 6.〜娃A 邏輯端子以種、,,罔際網&amp;路協定(IP)轉送網,其根據一送信侧 成之該内部^二外,封包形成一内部封包,並且根據所形 端子;前述封t之一邏輯端子識別資訊決定一受信側邏輯 終端裝置^ ^信側邏輯端子或前述受信側邏輯端子係與一 内部封包,續’利用包含多點發送(mul ticast)用位址之 7 7 ·如申執^亍終端間通信接續控制。 轉送網·,装申請_專利範圍第76項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 78•如、中^前述内部封包係包含聲音資料。 轉送網,复凊專利範圍第76項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 79•如、中^前述内部封包係包含電子新聞。 轉送網,复申請專利範圍第76項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 认//Λ述内部封包係包含動晝資料。 轉送網,复明一專利乾圍第76項所述之網際網路協定(IP) 81_;、中前述内部封包係包含數位資訊。 種網際網路協定(丨p )轉送網,其包含_網點裝1245997 Amendment == fixed (IP) transfer network and public telephone exchange network, = = device, which uses tree telephone exchange: 75,] to subscribe to the connection control. The said network ^ terminal device 'is set in a fixed transmission network such as the number 50 in the scope of patent application, sending (IP) forwarding, = Internet Protocol (IP) packets to the aforementioned Internet Protocol telephone number is As described above, the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network forms a corresponding address, and θ is transmitted to the terminal device through a corresponding Internet Protocol (IP) bit. J 7 6. ~ Baby A. The logic terminal is connected to the Internet &amp; Road Protocol (IP) forwarding network, which is based on the inner side and the outer side of the sending side, and the packet forms an inner packet. Terminal; one of the logical terminal identification information of the aforementioned packet determines a logical terminal device on the receiving side ^^ The logical terminal on the receiving side or the logical terminal on the receiving side is connected with an internal packet, continued 'using an address including multicast (mul ticast) No. 7 7 · Ru Shen ^ 亍 Communication connection control between terminals. Forwarding Network · Applied Application_Internet Protocol (IP) 78 as described in Item 76 of the Patent Scope 78, such as, ^ The aforementioned internal packets contain sound data. Forwarding Network, the Internet Protocol (IP) 79 described in item 76 of the patent scope, such as, Chinese ^ The aforementioned internal packet contains electronic news. The forwarding network re-applies the Internet Protocol (IP) described in item 76 of the scope of patent application. // The internal packet contains dynamic data. The forwarding network, the Internet Protocol (IP) 81_ described in item 76 of Fumingyi Patent, and the aforementioned internal packets contain digital information. Internet Protocol (丨 p) forwarding network, which includes _ 网点 装 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第340貢 1245997 年 修正 _案號901054沾 曰 六、申請專利範圍 個包以=之V其中根據送信側之邏 側之網點裝置則根據戶;接收成:部封包;受信 訊,決定應接收内部封包之邏=封包之邏輯端子識別資 線路路經,接續至前述送p = ;終端襄置則以通信 端子,利用包含多點發;用°:=子或前述受信側邏輯 通信接續控制。 止之内部封包,執行終端間 8 2 · —種網際網路協定(丨、, 其中網際網路協定(IP)轉:網’其特徵在於: 置;其中外部封包係利用二括3個以上網點裝 包’並且利用受信側之網裝置變換為内部封 置間則以内部封包進行通信;終 二U衣 I,接續至前述送信側網點f 1 、彳5線路路 利用包含多點發送用位述;信側網點裝置, 續控制。 &lt; 円$封包,執行終端間通信接 83. —種網際網路協定(Ip)轉送網, 置其中網際網路協定(IP)轉送網具有3個以上 二雨述網點裝置包含2個以上邏輯端子;其中夕罔卜二^ 側用运仏侧之網點装置變換為内部封包、: :德點裝置變換為外部封包,網點裝置間則二G 仃通k ,終端裝置則以通信線路路徑,接續送^ =_裝置或前述受信側之網點裝置,制 = ;輯端子識別貧訊以及多點發送用位址之内部封包^ 終端間通信接續控制。 丨了匕執仃 1245997 _案號901054叩 ^'申請專利範圍 Λ 曰 修正 8 4 · —種網點裝置,苴特微 子,其中根據送信側之邏輯端子在和於外包, 封包形成内部封包、並且根;:::::際網路協定(ΙΡ) 子識別資訊決定受信側邏輯:子“;:::封包之邏輯端 路徨,接續至前述送信側邏輯端t^置則以通g線路 子,利用包含多點發送用位;言側邏輯端 信接續控制。 卩封包,執行終端間通 85. —種網點裝置,其特徵在於包含 外部it側之網點裝置具有根據送信側之邏U二 卜。卩封包形成内部封包之功能,並且輯^子和 f根據所接收之内部封包之邏輯端子識^資訊* ?農置具 前述内部封包之g短 5日 、σ /、疋應接收 路你邏軏知子之功能,終端裝置則以通作飧政 ίΐ前述送信侧之網點裝置或前述受信側 通信接續控制。 丨了 〇 執仃終端間 網點裝置變換為内ΐ部封包係利用送信侧之 換為外部^ 包利用受信側之網點裝置變 壯罟 、、t,網點裝置間則以内部封包進行通信;牧 ΐ、f ]以通信線路路徑,接續至前述送信側之網點壯、w &lt; 封包,執行終端間=接含多點發送用,址之内部 際網二,其T具有3個以上網點巢置之網 )轉适網;其中外部封包係利用送信側之網 第342頁 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997 修正 ---,90105465 盔 Ά—日 六、申請專利範圍 —' ___ 點裝置變換為内部 利用受 為外部封包,網點裝置間則以内部封包進行換 以:信線路路經,接續至前述送信側之網點裳置y ;;::Γ置,利用包含多點發送用位址以; 匕矾仃終埏間通信接續控制。 玎 婊種終端裝置,其包含一無線介面裝置,其係接 :〇申請專利範圍第46項所述之網際網路協定轉送 8 9 ·_—種終端裝置,其適用於一網際網路協定(I p 送網,前述網際網路協定(ιρ)轉送網中係根據一 輯=以及一外部封包形成一内部封包,並且根據^形Ϊ 之該=部封包之一邏輯端子識別資訊決定一受信側邏輯 子;丽述終端裝置則包含一無線介面裝置,並且利用無 收發部以及通信線路路徑,接續至前述送信側邏輯端式 前述受信側邏輯端子。 $ 9 0 · —種終端裝置,其適用於一網際網路協定(I ρ)轉 送網,前述網際網路協定(IP)轉送網包括2個以上網點裝 置,前述網點裝置包含2個以上邏輯端子;其中送信側^ 網點裝置係根據送信側之邏輯端子以及外部封包,形成内 部封包;受信侧之網點裝置則根據所接收之内部封包之邏 輯端子識別資訊’決定應接收内部封包之邏輯端子;前述 终端裝置則包含一無線介面裝置,並且利用無線收發部以 及通信線路路徑,接讀至前述送信側邏輯端子或前述受信 側邏輯端子。2049-3793-PF4.ptc Amendment 340 Tribute 1245997 _ Case No. 901054 Zhan Yue VI. The scope of the patent application package is equal to V. Among them, the network device on the logical side of the sending side is based on the household; the receiving is: a partial packet; Upon receiving the message, it is determined that the logic of the internal packet should be received = the logical terminal of the packet identifies the path of the data line, and continues to the aforementioned sending p =; the terminal is set to use the communication terminal, including multi-point transmission; using °: = 子 or the aforementioned receiving side Logic communication connection control. Only internal packets are executed between the terminals. 8 · · A variety of Internet Protocols (Internet Protocol (IP) Transfer: Internet 'is characterized by: placement; of which external packets are enclosed by 3 Internet access points. "Packaging" and use the network device on the receiving side to convert to the internal enclosure and use the internal packet to communicate; finally, the U-line I is connected to the aforementioned transmitting-side network points f1 and 彳 5. Letter-side network point device, continued control. &Lt; 円 $ packet, execute communication between terminals 83.-a kind of Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, where the Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network has 3 or more The rain-spot network device contains more than two logic terminals. Among them, the network device on the 罔 side uses the network-side device on the transport side to convert to an internal packet. The terminal device uses the communication line path to continue to send ^ = _ devices or the aforementioned network device on the receiving side to make =; edit the terminal to identify the internal packets of the poor message and the multicast address. ^ Control of communication between terminals. Hold仃 1245997 _Case No. 901054 叩 ^ 'Application for patent scope Λ Revision 8 4 ·-a kind of network point device, 苴 tetrino, in which the logical terminal on the sender side is outsourced, and the packet forms an internal packet, and the root; :: ::: Internet Protocol (IP) sub-identification information determines the logic on the receiving side ::::: The logical end of the packet is connected to the aforementioned logical end on the sending side, and is connected to the G line. Multi-bit transmission bit; speech-side logical end-message continuity control. 卩 Packets to perform inter-terminal communication. 85. A network point device, which is characterized in that the network point device including the external it side has a logic U based on the transmission side. 卩 Packets The function of forming an internal packet, and compiling information and f according to the logical terminal identification of the received internal packet ^ Information *? The farmer has the short g of the aforementioned internal packet for 5 days. Function, the terminal device is controlled by the above-mentioned sending-side network device or the receiving-side communication connection control. 丨 Implemented the conversion between the terminal-based network device and the internal packet is sent using the The side is replaced by an external packet. The network device on the receiving side is used to make the packet stronger, t, and the node devices communicate with each other using internal packets. The frame line, f] is connected to the aforementioned transmission point node, w &lt; Envelopes between execution terminals = Intermediate network with two addresses for sending and receiving, its T has 3 nets nested with Internet access points) transit network; among them, the outer packet is the net on the sender side, page 342 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997 Amendment ---, 90105465 Helmet-Day 6-Patent application scope-'___ The point device is converted to internal use and received as an external packet, and the network point device is replaced with an internal packet: letter line Passing through, it is connected to the aforementioned outlet on the transmission side; y :: Γ is set, and the address including the multicast address is used to control the communication between terminals. A terminal device that includes a wireless interface device that is connected to: 0 Internet protocol transfer 8 9 · _—a terminal device described in the scope of patent application 46, which is applicable to an Internet protocol ( I p sends the network. In the aforementioned Internet Protocol (ιρ) transfer network, an internal packet is formed according to a series of = and an external packet, and a trusted side is determined according to the logical terminal identification information of the = part of the packet. Logic sub; Lishu terminal device includes a wireless interface device, and uses the non-receiving section and communication line path to connect to the aforementioned transmitting-side logical end type and the aforementioned receiving-side logical terminal. $ 9 0 · A terminal device, which is suitable for An Internet Protocol (I ρ) transfer network. The aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network includes two network point devices. The network point device includes more than two logical terminals. The sending side ^ The network point device is based on the sending side. The logic terminals and external packets form an internal packet; the network device on the trusted side decides to receive based on the logic terminal identification information of the received internal packet. Terminal portion of the logical packet; the terminal device, the apparatus comprising a wireless interface, and using a wireless transceiver unit and a communication path circuit, connected to the reading-side logic messenger or the receiving end terminal of the terminal logic. 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第343頁 1245997 曰 修正 案號 90105465 六、申請專利範圍 91· 一種終端裝置,其適用於— 送網,前述網際網路協定(IP)轉、、关/同際網路協定(IP)轉 置,其中外部封包係利用送信侧有2個以上網點裝 包,並且利用受信側之網點裝置 '、’、罔=裝置變換為内部封 裝置間則以包含邏輯端子識別I ^原則述外部封包,網點 前述終端裝置則包含一内部封包進行通信; 部以及通信線路路徑,接續至前、,丄並且利用無線收發 述受信側之網點裝置。、’ ^廷信側之網點裝置或前 92· —種終端裝置,其適用於—么 送網,前述網際網路協定(ΙΡ)轉際^網路協定(ip)轉 置,前述網點裝置包含2個以 則固定有邏輯端子,其中在送信側之網^線路 端子上,•以外部封包形成内部封包,並^ ^邏輯 點裝置之每個受信側邏輯端子上, 又t側之網 成前述外部封包,·前述終端f置則包人:2 =封包還原 並且利用無線收發部以及通信線路路二接匕:J置: 側邏輯端子或前述受信側邏輯端子。 S刖a送信 9』.二種二際網路協定(IP)轉送網,其特徵在於: 其中具有2個以上網點農置,送信側之網點裝置 4封包變換為内部封包,受信側之網點裝置則還卜 料包丄網點裝置間則以内部封包進行通信;、終端裝^ 接續至耵述送信側之網點裝置或前述受信側之網點裝、Ί 並且利用包含受信側邏輯端子識別資訊和呼叫控制資, 内部封包,執行終端間通信接續控制;其中在網點裝置$ 第344頁 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997 月 修正 曰 人 號901054阽 六、申請專利範圍 址的網際網路協定CIP)封包網際網路協定⑽位 網際網路協定(⑺封包。τ月|J v網點裝置則丢棄前述 下,^一種網點裝4 ’其在具有2個以上網點裝置的情況 側之;將外部封包變換為内部封包,受信 封包進她,網點裝置間則以内部 訊和啤叫,制f料:f Μ包含受信側㈣端子識別資 的功心端茫置則=包,執行終端間通信接續控制 置之網際網路網點裝置上登錄有終端裝 來源網際網路協定(ί p位址=接收到包含未登錄之發信 前述絪點缺罢的網際網路協定(ΙΡ)封包時, ,,.-I置則丟棄岫述網際網路協定(I Ρ )封包。 置接9續5至定(ΙΡ)轉送網’其係透過閉道裝 φ ^ ^ ° §所接績之終端裝置與接續至公眾 ^ ^活機之間進行通信時,係利用包含呼叫控制資 枓之網際網路協定f Τ Ρ、Β ^ Ί ^ Φ M 的通信接續控制。包’進行終端裝置與電話機之間 鍊」Π睛專利範圍第95項所述之網際網路協定(ιρ) 轉运網,其中包含一無線介面裝置。 置接=·至一八種Λ際網路協定(IP)轉送網,其係透過問道裝 齋士、,貝A眾電話網,當所接續之終端裝置與接續至公眾 ’、活網之電活機之間進行通信時,係利用包含s〗P方式之 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第345頁 1245997 修正 曰 案號 90105465 六、申請專利範圍 :叫控制資料之網際網路協定(ip)封包,進行終端裝置與 電話機之間的通信接續控制。 · 一種網際網路協定(I p)轉送網,其係透過閘道裝 置接項至A,電治網,當所接續之終端裝置與接續至公眾 3 ::之電居機之,進行通信時,係利用包含共同線路信 〜,之呼叫控制資料之網際網路協定(IP)封包,進行終 端裝置與電話機之間的通信接續控制。 、 ,石際網路協定(IP)轉送網,其具有根據電話 透過閘道衣置接績至公嚴雷咕 接黃$八τ雷坏細 %電遣網’當所接縯之終端裝置與 包二乎叫二資料2 f洁機之間進行通信時,貝,j具有利用 電際網路協定(ιρ)封包,進行終端裝 置”電蛞機之間的通彳§接續控制之功能。 100. 一種網際網路協定(IP)轉送網,豆 上終端裝置,並且根據雷爷铼 /、接、、、貝至2個以 協定um立址,利用= = ===裝置之網際網路 (-)封包,進行所接續之終 = = 際:;協定 上:^:際網路協定ΠΡ)轉送網,其丄ί=。 址,二含呼;以:際網路協定⑽位 (,包,種進行終端裝置二= •一種網際網路協定(Ιρ)轉送 上終端裝置,利用包含呼叫控制資料二、、男至2個以 封包,進行終端裝置間的通信接4、錢騎協定GP) 第346頁 2〇49-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997 ---一 案號90105465 _______年 月 日 六、申請專利範圍 1 0 3 · —種網際網路協定(I p )轉送網,其接續至2個以 上終端裝置,利用包含共同線路信號方式之呼叫控制資料 的網際網路協定(IP )封包,進行終端間通信接續控制。 1 0 4 · —種網際網路協定(I p)轉送網,其接續至2個以 上終端裝置,利用包含SIP方式之呼叫控制資料的網際網 路協定(I P )封包,進行終端間通信接續控制。 105· —種網際網路協定(IP)轉送網,其接續至2個以 上終端裝置,利用包含H323方式之呼叫控制資料的網際網 路協定(IP )封包,進行終端間通信接續控制。 1〇6· —種網際網路協定(IP)轉送網,其中具有2個以 上網點裝置,前述網點裝置則接續至終端裝置,並且登錄 有、、衣置之網際網路協定(I p)位址,當接收到包含未登 錄之發信來源網際網路協定(IP)位址的網際網路協定(IP^ 封包時,則丟棄前述網際網路協定(IP)封包,並且 含呼叫控制資料之網際網路協定(IP) 信接續控制。 疋仃、、,'、為間通 107· 一種網際網路協定(IP)轉送網,其接續 裝置,並且具有根據電話號碼產生終 、·罔路協定(IP)位址的功能,以及利用包 欠:, ,:::定(ίρ)封包,進行終端間通信接續 並且與不同公司之網際網路協定(IP)轉送 108· —種終端裝置,其接 送網,前述網際網路協如P)轉送網協扣P)轉 j係利用包含呼叫控制 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第347頁 1245997 曰 修正 六、申請專利-^ ΐ料協定ΠΡ)封包’進行終端間通信接續控 定⑽)封信者終端裝置之電話號碼的網際網路協 路協定,..罔際網路協定ΠΡ)轉送網,前述網際網 終端裝fΜ 據所接收之電話號碼,產生受 、阳衣置的網際網路協 屋王又L f 利用所回傳之受芦#^w並且回傳至終端裝置, J自己的網際網路協定(ίΡ) 位址以 信。 〜又彳°者終端裝置進行通 109. —種終端裝置,苴 病 項所述之網際網路協定(ΙΡ;轉;網申請專利範圍第105 鏔5 !*種終端通信方法,其適用於一線诚壯番甘拉 ,至一網際網路協定Πρ) 义、〜鈿衣置,其接 轉送網係、利用包含呼叫 料之際網路協定ΠΡ) 包,進行終端間通信接續控制轉協定(IP)封 送包含受信者終端裝置之電話ϋ括:前述終端裝置傳 包至前述網際網路協定(Ιρ = έ馬的=際網路協定(IP)封 (IP)轉送網則根據所接收之U ;前述網際網路協定 置的網際網路協定(IP )位址並且^ =產t受信者終端裝 端裝置利用所回傳之受信者炊端至終端裝置;前述終 位址以及自己的網際網路協定1置的網際網路協定(IP) 進行通信。 )位址與受信者終端裝置 in. 一種網際網路協定( 其中包含2個以上網點)轉^網,其特徵在於: 端裝置,並且利用包含 則述網點裝置接續至終 卫丨J賣料之網際網路協定(I P ) 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第348頁 丄245997 ^^901Q54RR 曰 、、申請專利範圍 ____ ^ ’進行終端間通信接…丨 ::位址包含在登錄在;::: ;對:外部封包,當其送 ^止中時,則變換為;;網點裝置的外部封包送信 二夕部封包,並且網點 、匕,文#側之網點裝置則還 h。 x置之間係利用内部封包進行通 112 · 一種網際網路谈6 其中包含2個以上網二P)轉送網,其特徵在於: 置,並且利用包含呼^衣置’=可述網點裝置接續至終 、包,進行終端間通作砵二制貝料之網際網路協定(丨P ) 2者位址包含在登心控制;對於外部封包,當其受 :址中時’則變換為内:二:網點裝置的外部封包受信 信封包;並且網點裝置之 J中包Si?二協上(IP)轉,網’其特徵在於: J裝置,並且利用包含,衣’严述網點裝置接續至終 :包、,進行終端間通信丄=賢料之網際網路協定(IP) 艾換為内部封包,網點壯^工1 ,在送信侧之網點裝置中 信,在受信側之網點裝:之間則利用内部封包進行通 包含的外部封包送信^ ’則當在所接收内部封包内所 中所登錄的外部封包 係包含於受信側之網點裝置 包。 h “者位址時,則還原此外部封 4 ·種網際網路協定(I p)鐘、、^ 其中包含2個以上網 达且:’其特徵在於: __ 亚且利用包含呼叫控制 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第349頁 1245997 修正 日 i 號 9010541^ 六、申請專利範圍 定(IP)封包,進行終端間通信接續控 -心=、=:;變:巧Γ包,網點裝置之 包含於受信側::二^含的外部封包收信者位址,係 址時,則還原此所登錄的外部封包之收信者位 ^ t ^ ί m IP) # ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ : 則接續至終端裝置,廿,罔點4置,在珂述各網點裝置中, (IP)封包之位^,丄細且根據電話號碼產生網際網路協定 係包含於送信側之::;;::::(二)封;:送信者位址 利用包含呼叫控制資粗^置中所7且錄的达信者位址時,則 端間通信接續控制。、’、網際網路協定(IP)封包,進行終 ^6·—種網際網路協 其中包含2個以上姻赴j ^轉达巧’其特徵在於: 則接續至終端裝置,二衣置’在耵述各網點裝置中, …)封包之位址,當=碼產生網際網路協定 係包含於送信側之網點壯、 疋)封包之受信者位址 利用包含呼叫控制資料:錄的受信者位址時,則 端間通信接續控制。 際,.周路協定(π)封包,進行終 Π二二種網際網路協 其中包含2個以上網點)轉^;網、,其特徵在於: 則接績至終端裝置, 在别述各網點裝置中, ⑽封包之位址,當網;::協電;(以^^ __ 才包之送信者位址 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第350頁 1245997 修正2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 343 1245997 Amendment No. 90105465 6. Scope of patent application 91 · A terminal device, which is suitable for — sending networks, the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) transfer, gateway / internet Road Protocol (IP) transposition, where the external packet is packaged with two Internet access points on the sending side, and the network point devices ',', 罔 = devices on the receiving side are converted into internal sealing devices to contain logical terminal identification. ^ The external packet is described in principle, and the terminal device at the network point includes an internal packet for communication; the internal and communication line paths are connected to the front and back, and wirelessly transmit and receive the network point device on the trusted side. ^ The network point device on the side of the letter or the front 92 · — a kind of terminal device, which is suitable for — network delivery, the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) transposition ^ Internet Protocol (ip) transposition, the aforementioned network point device includes There are two fixed logic terminals. Among them, on the transmission side network ^ line terminals, • an external packet is used to form an internal packet, and ^ ^ logic point devices on each of the receiving side logic terminals, and the t side network is the aforementioned For external packets, the aforementioned terminal f is set by the person: 2 = the packet is restored and the wireless transmission and reception unit and the communication line are used to connect the two: J set: the side logic terminal or the aforementioned trusted side logic terminal. S 刖 a delivery 9 ”. Two types of Internet Protocol (IP) transfer networks, which are characterized by: 2 of them are farmed with Internet access points, and the network device on the sender side 4 packets are converted into internal packets, and the network device on the trusted side It also includes information that the network device communicates with the internal packet; the terminal device ^ is connected to the network device on the sending side or the network device on the receiving side, and uses the logic terminal identification information and call control on the receiving side. Data, internal packets, and control of communication connections between terminals; of which, at the branch device, page 344, 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997, amends the number of people 901054 (6), the Internet Protocol (CIP) for patent application addresses Network Protocol (Internet Protocol) (packet. Τmonth | J v outlet device discards the above, ^ a network device installed 4 'It is on the side of the case where there are 2 devices connected to the Internet; convert external packets to The internal packet is enclosed by the envelope, and the outlet device is called by the internal message and beer. The material is f: f M contains the identification information of the trusted terminal and terminal identification. If the core end is lost, the packet is executed. When the internet connection device controlled by the communication connection is set with the terminal source internet protocol (ί p address = Internet Protocol (IP) packet containing an unregistered outgoing message and the aforementioned point is missing , ,, .-I will discard the described Internet Protocol (IP) packets. Set up 9 continued 5 to definite (IP) transfer network 'It is a terminal installed in a closed path φ ^ ^ ° § When the device communicates with the public ^ ^ live machine, the communication connection control using the Internet protocols fTP, B ^ ^ ^ Φ M including call control resources is included. The "inter-chain" Internet protocol (ιρ) transfer network described in item 95 of the patent scope includes a wireless interface device. Placement = · to eighteen Internet protocol (IP) transfer networks, It is through the installation of the Qai Shi, and Bei A public telephone network. When the connected terminal device communicates with the public ', the live network's electric live machine, it uses the 2049- 3793-PF4.ptc Page 345 1245997 Amended Case No. 90105465 VI. Application Benefits: It is called the Internet Protocol (IP) packet of control data, which controls the communication connection between the terminal device and the phone. · An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which is connected to the gateway through a gateway device. A, electricity management network. When the connected terminal device and the electric home device connected to the public 3 :: are communicating, the Internet Protocol (IP) packet containing call control data including common line information is used. , To control the communication connection between the terminal device and the telephone.,, The Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which has access to the public through the gateway through the gateway to the public security Leigu received yellow $ eight “% Electrical Network” When communication between the terminal device being performed and the package 2 is called the second data 2f, the device has the use of Internet Protocol (ιρ) packets to perform the terminal device. Communication between machines and connection control function. 100. An Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network, with terminal devices on the beans, and using the Internet address of the device according to Lei Ye 铼 /, 接 ,,, and 2 to use the == === device (-) The packet is sent to the end of the connection = = ::; On the agreement: ^: Internet protocol Π) forwarding network, whose 丄 ί =. Address, two with call; use: Internet protocol niches (, package, type for terminal device two = • an Internet protocol (Ιρ) to transfer to the terminal device, using call control data including two, male to 2 Packets are used for communication between terminal devices. 4. Qianqi Agreement GP) Page 346 2〇49-3793-PF4.ptc 1245997 --- Case No. 90105465 _______ Year 6, Date of Patent Application 1 0 3 -An Internet Protocol (Ip) transfer network that connects to more than two terminal devices and uses Internet Protocol (IP) packets that contain call control data for a common line signal method to perform communication connection control between terminals. 1 0 4 · — An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network that connects to more than two terminal devices and uses Internet Protocol (IP) packets that include call control data in the SIP method to perform communication connection control between terminals . 105 · —An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which is connected to two or more terminal devices, and uses Internet Protocol (IP) packets containing call control data in the H323 method to perform communication connection control between terminals. 106. An Internet Protocol (IP) transfer network, which has two Internet point devices, the aforementioned network point devices are connected to terminal devices, and registered with the Internet Protocol (IP) bit Address, when receiving an Internet Protocol (IP ^ packet containing an unregistered sending source Internet Protocol (IP) address, the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) packet is discarded, and it contains call control data. Internet Protocol (IP) protocol connection control. 疋 仃 ,,,,,,,,,,,, and 107. An Internet Protocol (IP) relay network, which is connected to the device, and has a terminal and a Kushiro protocol based on the telephone number. (IP) address function, and the use of packet owing: ,, :::: (? Ρ) packets, communication between terminals and Internet Protocol (IP) transfers with different companies 108 ·-a terminal device, which Shuttle network, the aforementioned Internet protocol such as P) transfer network protocol deduction P) transfer j is the use of call control including 2049-3793-PF4.ptc page 347 1245997 said amendment 6, patent application-^ material agreement Π) package ' Inter-terminal communication connection (Determined) Internet protocol agreement of the telephone number of the terminal device of the letter holder, Internet protocol (IP protocol) forwarding network, the aforementioned Internet terminal device fM generates the receiver and server according to the received telephone number. The Internet Protocol King also uses the received URL # ^ w and returns it to the terminal device, J's own Internet Protocol (ίΡ) address to the letter. A terminal device can communicate with each other. 109. A kind of terminal device, the Internet protocol (IP; transfer; Internet application patent scope No. 105! 5) described in the disease item, a terminal communication method, which is applicable to the front line. Honest Fanganla, to an Internet Protocol (IP)), it is connected to the network system, and uses the Internet Protocol (IP) packet that contains the call data to perform communication control control protocol (IP) between terminals. ) Marshalling a phone that contains the recipient ’s terminal device: The aforementioned terminal device sends a packet to the aforementioned Internet Protocol (Ιρ = έ 马 = Internet Protocol (IP) packet (IP) forwarding network according to the received U ; The Internet Protocol (IP) address set by the aforementioned Internet protocol and ^ = produces the terminal installation device of the recipient using the returned recipient to the terminal device; the aforementioned final address and its own Internet The Internet Protocol (IP) set in the Road Protocol 1 communicates.) The address and the recipient's terminal device in. An Internet Protocol (including 2 access points) to the Internet, which is characterized by: an end device, and Use of a dot network device Continue to the final guard 丨 J Internet Protocol (IP) 2049-3793-PF4.ptc Page 348 丄 245997 ^ 901Q54RR said, the scope of patent application ____ ^ 'for communication between terminals ... 丨 :: The address is included in the registration ::::; to: external packet, when it is sending ^, it will be changed to ;; the external packet of the branch device sends the packet to the second party, and the network point, dagger, and text # side of the network point The device is also h. The communication between x devices is through internal packets. 112 · An Internet Talk 6 which includes two transfer networks with Internet access (P), which is characterized by: At the end, the Internet protocol (丨 P) of the two systems for inter-terminal communication is included in the address control; for external packets, when they are received in the address, the address is changed to internal. : Two: the external envelope of the branch device is received by the envelope; and the J device of the branch device is included in the Si? Second Association (IP) transfer, the network 'is characterized by: J device, and the use of the included,' strictly described the branch device continues to Final: packet, for terminal-to-terminal communication 贤 = reputable Internet Protocol (IP) Ai is replaced with an internal packet, the network is strong 1, the message is installed at the network device on the sending side, and the network is installed on the receiving side: The internal packet is used to send the external packet through the included external packet ^ 'The external packet registered in the received internal packet is included in the network device package on the trusted side. h "When the address is restored, this external cover is restored. 4 kinds of Internet Protocol (IP) clocks, ^ which contains 2 to reach the Internet and: 'characterized by: __ Asia and the use of call control 2049- 3793-PF4.ptc Page 349 1245997 Amendment date No. 9010541 ^ VI. Apply for a patent range (IP) packet for communication control between terminals-heart =, = :; change: clever packet, included in the network device Receiving side :: The address of the recipient of the external packet contained in the second packet. When it is the address, the recipient of the registered external packet is restored. ^ T ^ ί m IP) # ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ The device, 廿, 罔 is set at 4 points. In each of the network device, the position of the (IP) packet is ^, detailed and generated based on the phone number. The Internet protocol is included on the sending side :: ;; :::: (2) Sealing: When the address of the sender uses the address of the sender that contains the call control information, the communication between the terminals is controlled. ", Internet Protocol (IP) packets, Finally ^ 6 · —A kind of Internet Association which contains more than 2 marriages to ^ conveying Qiao 'is characterized by: Connected to the terminal device, the second device is set in the description of each network device,…) the address of the packet, when the = code is generated, the Internet protocol is included in the sender ’s network, and the address of the recipient of the packet is used. Contains call control data: When the address of the trusted recipient is recorded, the end-to-end communication connection is controlled. The weekly protocol (π) packet is used to transfer the two types of Internet protocols, including two Internet access points. The network is characterized in that: it is connected to the terminal device, and in each of the other network device, the address of the packet, when the network; :: Xiedian; (with ^^ __ sender address package only 2049 -3793-PF4.ptc Page 350 1245997 Correction 案號 901054^ 六、申請專利範圍 _ 係包含於受信侧之網點壯 利用包含呼叫控制資料 f中所登錄的送信者位址時,則 端間通信接續控制。y' 、、罔際、、、罔路協定(IP )封包,進行終 118· —種閘道製置,复〃 士 送網與公眾電話網,t、’、”係接續至網際網路協定(IP)轉 至一終端裝置,前述網際網路協定(IP)轉送網係接續 由前述公眾電話網來^ ^電話網係接續至一電話機,並且 網際網路協定(IP)轉送二視為具有信號局之功能;與前述 際網路協定(IP)封包進、L之=係以包含呼叫控制資料之網 利用前述信號局之功能=通信,與前述公眾電話網之間則 前述電話機之間進行^ e仃通信,並且在前述終端裝置和 119.-種閘道裝置;;;制。 網與公眾電話網,並 〃、接、嚼至網際網路協定(IP)轉送 協定(IP)封包與接續至2二ft呼叫控制資料之網際網路 置進行通信,利用做為八:、,周路協定(IP)轉送網之終端裴 續至前梅電話網號局的功能’與接 1 2 0 · —種網際網路協、, 苴中裉摅〜於 協疋(IP)轉运網’其特徵在於: 包,並且根據所开彡忐々A 卜&quot;卩封匕來形成内部封 受信側邏輯端子f前述內:封包之邏輯端子識別資訊決定 來源位址而僅包含封包之標頭部分則不包含送信 料之内部封包並t利用包含啤叫控制資 執订終知間通信接續控制。 1 其21中際網路協定(ίρ)轉送網’其特徵在於: 八 3固以上網點裝置,前述網點裝置則包含有2 imm 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第351頁 1245997 a 案號 90105465 六、申請專利範圍 個以上邏輯端子,其中送信側之網點裝 輯端子以及外部封包來形成内部封包,A =根據送信側邏 則根據所接收之内部封包之邏輯 | 信側之網點裝置 邏輯端子,前述内部封包之標頭部二不^訊決定受信側 址而僅包含收信者位址,並且利用包含?含送信來源位 部封包,執行終端間通信接續控制。 1控制資料之内 122· 一種網際網路協定(ιρΙ轉送網,甘 其中包含2個以上網點裝置, 〃特徵在於: 來形成内部封包,受信側之 /詈二f係根據外部封包 包,網點裝置之間利用前述内部^勺、隹遇原前述外部封 封包包含受信側邏輯端子識別資^ ^ =信;前述内部 2則不包含送信來源位僅:::部封包之標頭 用包含呼叫控制資料之内部封址’並且利 制。 钒仃終柒間通信接續控 123· —種網際網路 其中網點裝置包 轉运網,其特徵在於: 線路則固定有邏輯端子,立以上通信」線路,每個前述通信 個邏輯端子上,传”在送信側之網點裴置令的每 側之網點裝置中:t據外部封包來形成内部封包, 包,網點裝置端:上,則還原前述外ί; 封包之標頭部分則不包I =封包進行通信;前述内部 址,並且利用包含二2來源位址而僅包含收信者位 通信接續控制。 工制貧料之内部封包,執行終端間 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第352頁 1245997 曰 修正 i號 90105465 六、申請專利範圍 124·—種網點裝置,其特徵在於: 中包含2個以上邏輯端早,也由士 、, 子和外部封包來形成内部封並且x康,送信側邏輯端 部封包之邏輯端子識別資崎來令定^ ^述所形成之内 内4封包之標頭部分則 铒鳊子,則述 者位址,並且利用勺人Ϊ \ 址而僅包含收信 JL且利用包含呼叫控制資料之内 端間通信接續控制。 σ 、匕,執行〜 1 2 5. —種網點裝置,其特徵在於·· 其中具有2個以上邏輯端子,甘φ j乒〆丄 裝置則根據所接收之内部封包的邏輯端1識別資 =土$ =受信側邏輯端子,前述内部封包之標頭部分則不 匕3达彳&amp;來源位址而僅包含收信者位址,並且含呼 叫控制資料之内部封包,執行終端間通信接續控制。 126· —種網點裝置,其特徵在於: 、工 在柄ί Ϊ具有2個以上邏輯端子,其中送信側之網點裝置 部封包來形成内部封包’受信側之網點裝置則還 原耵料部封包,網點裝置之間則利用前述内部封包進行 通仏,河述内部封包包含有受信側邏輯端子識別資訊,前 j:部封包之標頭部分則不包含送信來源位址而僅包含收 尨者位址,並且利用包含呼叫控制資料 終端間通信接續控制。 乂円一釘〇 127. —種網點裝置,其特徵在於: 其中網點裝置接續至2個以上通信線路,每個前述通 I 2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第353頁 1245997 Λ_Β 曰 二 、----案號QmnM朗 ^㈣專利範圍 ___ ίϊ::固定有邏輯端子,其中在送信匈之έ :遴Η端子上,係根據外部 】之網點裝置中的 之網點裝置中的每個邏輯端3 =内部封包,在受 ㈣封包之標;包用:。部封包進 封t 3收k者位3止’並且利用包含 k L來源位址 ,執行終端間通信接續控制。 控制資料之内部 128+ _種網際網路協定Jp)轉送網, 其中終端裝置具有2個以上盥里接其特徵在於: 形^ =侧之網點裝置係根據外部網際網路網點裝置,其 前部網際網路協定ΠΡ)封包,受作侧,定(IP)封包來 别述内部網際網路協二t甸之網點裝置則從 封包,前述送::網路協 二路協定(= 包,執行線端U控制貝料之網際網路協定(IP)封 灯〜知間通信接續控制。 ^9· 一種網點裝置,其特徵在於·· 以上與巧p)::網中之終端裝置具有2個 外部網際網路協定二j二:中达化側之網點裝置係根據 封包,受信 )封0來形成内部網際網路協定(ip) 封包還原前、# ^點1置則從前述内部網際網路協定(IP ) 網點裝置和前述工網ff:(IP)封包’前述送信側之 際網路協定(J p :貝1之網點衣置之間係利用前述内部網 疋UP)封包進行通信,並且利用包含呼叫控制資 2049-3793.PF4.ptc 第354頁 1245997Case No. 901054 ^ VI. Scope of patent application _ refers to the network included in the trusted side. When the sender address registered in the call control data f is used, the communication between terminals is controlled. y ', 罔, 、, 罔, and Kushiro Protocol (IP) packets, to carry out the final 118 ·-a kind of gateway system, the return network and the public telephone network, t,', "are connected to the Internet protocol (IP) to a terminal device, the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding network is connected by the aforementioned public telephone network ^ ^ The telephone network is connected to a telephone, and the Internet Protocol (IP) forwarding 2 is considered to have The function of the signal office; packetization with the aforementioned Internet Protocol (IP), L = the use of the function of the aforementioned signal station = communication with a network containing call control data, communication between the aforementioned telephone set and the aforementioned public telephone network ^ e 仃 communication, and in the aforementioned terminal device and 119.-type gateway device ;; system; and the public telephone network, and connect, connect, and chew to the Internet Protocol (IP) Transfer Protocol (IP) packets and Connected to the Internet set of 22 ft call control data for communication, and used as a terminal of the 8 :, Zhou Road Protocol (IP) transfer network, Pei continued to the function of Qianmei telephone network number office, and connected 1 2 0 · —A kind of Internet Association, 苴 中 裉 摅 ~ 于 协 疋 ( The IP) transit network is characterized by: a packet, and an internal envelope-side logical terminal formed according to the opened envelope A &quot;envelope; the foregoing: the logical terminal identification information of the packet determines the source address and only The header part that contains the packet does not include the internal packet of the delivery material and uses the call control information to subscribe to the last-minute communication connection control. 1 Its 21 Internet Protocol (ίρ) forwarding network 'is characterized by: 3 fixed to the internet point device, the aforementioned network point device contains 2 imm 2049-3793-PF4.ptc page 351 1245997 a case number 90105465 6. Patent application scope of more than logical terminals, including the network side installation terminal on the transmission side and external package To form an internal packet, A = according to the logic of the sending side, according to the logic of the internal packet received | the logical terminal of the network device on the letter side, the header of the aforementioned internal packet does not determine the trusted side address and only contains the recipient's bit Address, and use the packet containing the source of the message to control the connection between the terminals. 1 Control data 122. An Internet protocol (ιρΙtransfer The network includes two network access point devices, which are characterized by: to form an internal packet, and the / f on the trusted side is based on an external packet, and the network device uses the aforementioned internal ^ spoon and encounters the aforementioned external packet. Contains the identification information of the logical terminal on the receiving side ^ ^ = letter; the aforementioned internal 2 does not include the transmission source bit only: ::: The header of the packet uses the internal address containing call control data 'and is controlled. Vanadium and terminal communication Connection control 123 · —A kind of Internet where the network of device installations is a packet transfer network, which is characterized in that: the circuit is fixed with logical terminals, and the communication is above the line. Each of the foregoing communication logical terminals is transmitted to the network on the sending side. In the outlet device on each side of Pei Zhiling: the internal packet is formed according to the external packet. If the device is on the upper side, the aforementioned outer packet is restored; the header part of the packet does not include I = the packet for communication; the aforementioned internal Address, and uses two or two source addresses and only contains the receiver's bit communication connection control. The internal package of the industrial system is poor, and the execution terminal is 2049-3793-PF4.ptc, page 352, 1245997, which is the amendment No. 90105465. 6. The scope of patent application 124. A kind of network device, which is characterized by: It contains more than two logical terminals Earlier, the inner packet was also formed by the driver, the child, and the outer packet, and the logical terminal identification packet of the logical end packet on the sender side was used to determine the header part of the inner packet. Xunzi, the address of the person, and use the scoop Ϊ \ address to include only the receiving JL and use the inter-terminal communication connection control including the call control data. σ, dagger, execute ~ 1 2 5. —A kind of network point device, which is characterized in that it has more than 2 logical terminals, and the Gan φ j ping-pong device recognizes the data according to the logical end 1 of the received internal packet = soil $ = Logical terminal on the receiving side. The header part of the aforementioned internal packet does not include the source address and only the address of the recipient, and an internal packet containing call control data to perform communication connection control between terminals. 126 · —A kind of outlet device, which is characterized in that: the worker has two or more logic terminals, in which the outlet device on the sending side is packaged to form an internal packet; the outlet device on the receiving side restores the packet of the outlet and the outlet The devices use the aforementioned internal packets for communication. The internal packet contains the identification information of the logical terminal on the receiving side, and the header part of the former j: part of the packet does not include the address of the sender but only the address of the recipient. And use the connection control including communication control data between terminals.乂 円 一 钉 〇127. —A kind of network point device, characterized in that: the network point device is connected to more than 2 communication lines, each of which is connected through I 2049-3793-PF4.ptc page 353 1245997 Λ_Β Second, --- -Case No. QmnM Lang ^ ㈣ Patent scope ___ ϊ :: logic terminals are fixed, in which the sending terminal is located on the terminal: the terminal is based on the external] of each of the network devices in the network device 3 = Internal packet, which is the standard of the trusted packet; The packet encapsulation is performed at t 3 and k is received 3 times, and the source address including k L is used to perform communication connection control between terminals. Control data internal 128+ _ kinds of Internet Protocol Jp) transfer network, in which the terminal device has more than 2 toilets, which is characterized by: ^ = side of the network device is based on the external Internet network device, its front Internet Protocol (IP) packet, the receiving side, defines the (IP) packet to distinguish the internal Internet Protocol II network device from the packet, and sends the aforementioned :: Network Protocol II Protocol (= packet, implementation The line end U controls the Internet Protocol (IP) sealing lamp of the material ~ the connection control of the Zhijian communication. ^ 9 · A network point device, which is characterized by the above and Q) :: There are 2 terminal devices in the network External Internet Protocol 2j2: The network device on the side of Sinotec is based on the packet, trusted) to form the internal Internet Protocol (IP). Before the packet is restored, # ^ 点 1 is set from the aforementioned internal Internet. The protocol (IP) network device communicates with the aforementioned industrial network ff: (IP) packet, and the aforementioned network protocol (J p: the network device UP of the Bay 1) uses the aforementioned intranet (UP) packet for communication between the transmitting side, and Use of call control information 2049-3793.PF4.ptc Page 354 1245997 2049-3793-PF4.ptc2049-3793-PF4.ptc 第355頁Chapter 355
TW090105465A 2000-04-06 2001-03-08 IP communication system, IP transfer network, gateway device, server, network point device, medium router, terminal device and terminal communication method TWI245997B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2000105023 2000-04-06
JP2000179234 2000-06-15
JP2000367085 2000-12-01
JP2000382682 2000-12-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TWI245997B true TWI245997B (en) 2005-12-21

Family

ID=37191297

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW090105465A TWI245997B (en) 2000-04-06 2001-03-08 IP communication system, IP transfer network, gateway device, server, network point device, medium router, terminal device and terminal communication method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
KR (12) KR100674152B1 (en)
TW (1) TWI245997B (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI393389B (en) * 2007-07-20 2013-04-11 Broadcom Corp Method and system for a handheld wireless communication device for configuring connection to and use of local and remote resources
TWI416921B (en) * 2006-01-24 2013-11-21 Pufco Inc Method,integrated circuit,and computer program product for signal generator based device security
TWI552589B (en) * 2014-01-09 2016-10-01 Chunghwa Telecom Co Ltd End-to-end active test IPTV channel access quality method
TWI556616B (en) * 2015-04-03 2016-11-01 Mitsubishi Electric Corp A media communication system, an audio terminal, and an acoustic symbol conversion device
US9590947B2 (en) 2013-12-17 2017-03-07 Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited IP management method, client and server
US9602332B2 (en) 2007-06-15 2017-03-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for DNS update triggered IPv6 neighbor advertisement

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005513869A (en) * 2001-12-15 2005-05-12 トムソン ライセンシング ソシエテ アノニム Video conference bandwidth selection mechanism
CN100469053C (en) * 2005-06-29 2009-03-11 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Communication terminal device and communication method
TWI510025B (en) * 2012-07-24 2015-11-21 Nec Corp Communication systems and methods and programs
KR102460071B1 (en) * 2017-12-21 2022-10-28 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for distinguishing communication signal in front of communication modem

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI416921B (en) * 2006-01-24 2013-11-21 Pufco Inc Method,integrated circuit,and computer program product for signal generator based device security
US9602332B2 (en) 2007-06-15 2017-03-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for DNS update triggered IPv6 neighbor advertisement
TWI393389B (en) * 2007-07-20 2013-04-11 Broadcom Corp Method and system for a handheld wireless communication device for configuring connection to and use of local and remote resources
US9590947B2 (en) 2013-12-17 2017-03-07 Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited IP management method, client and server
TWI552589B (en) * 2014-01-09 2016-10-01 Chunghwa Telecom Co Ltd End-to-end active test IPTV channel access quality method
TWI556616B (en) * 2015-04-03 2016-11-01 Mitsubishi Electric Corp A media communication system, an audio terminal, and an acoustic symbol conversion device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR100608988B1 (en) 2006-08-03
KR20050097901A (en) 2005-10-10
KR100669217B1 (en) 2007-02-28
KR20010095013A (en) 2001-11-03
KR20050097899A (en) 2005-10-10
KR100608984B1 (en) 2006-08-03
KR20050097898A (en) 2005-10-10
KR100609424B1 (en) 2006-08-03
KR100619619B1 (en) 2006-09-05
KR100609425B1 (en) 2006-08-03
KR100608985B1 (en) 2006-08-03
KR20050098785A (en) 2005-10-12
KR100608986B1 (en) 2006-08-03
KR20050096897A (en) 2005-10-06
KR100608987B1 (en) 2006-08-03
KR20050096898A (en) 2005-10-06
KR20050098787A (en) 2005-10-12
KR20050098786A (en) 2005-10-12
KR20050096899A (en) 2005-10-06
KR100669219B1 (en) 2007-02-28
KR100669218B1 (en) 2007-02-28
KR20050098784A (en) 2005-10-12
KR20050098788A (en) 2005-10-12
KR100674152B1 (en) 2007-02-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4822295B2 (en) Communication system using IP transfer network
TWI245997B (en) IP communication system, IP transfer network, gateway device, server, network point device, medium router, terminal device and terminal communication method
JP4356845B2 (en) IP communication system
CN100512359C (en) Terminal to teminal communication connecting control method using IP transport network
JP3645191B2 (en) Inter-terminal communication connection control method using IP transfer network
AU2005234711B8 (en) An IP communication system with employment of an IP transfer network
JP3948567B2 (en) IP communication system using IP transfer network
JP4008773B2 (en) Communication connection control method between terminals
CN101489002A (en) Terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method using IP transfer network
AU2005234710B2 (en) An IP communication system with employment of an IP transfer network

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees